Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http: //books .google .com/I
'wA
«^
-4.
• «.
• %■
* \
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY ANO ETHNOLOGY
VOLUME II
A. L. KROEBER
EDITOR
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
1911-1916
/
Cited as Univ. Calif. Publ. Am. Arch. Ethn.
CONTENTS
NuHBKB 1. — Elements of the Eato Language, Pliny Earle Ooddard, pages
1-176.
Number 2. — Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language, A. L. Kroeber
and J. P. Harrington, pages 177-188.
NuHBEB 3. — Sarsi Texts, Pliny Earle Goddard, pages 179-277.
NiTHBKB 4. — Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan, A. L. Kroeber, pages 279-
290.
Number 5. — ^Diehotomous Social Organization in South Ontral California,
Edward Winslow Gifford, pages 291-296.
Number 6. — The Delineation of the Day-Signs in the Aztec Manuscripts,
T. T. Waterman, pages 297-398.
Number 7. — The Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan Based on the Vocabulary
of De La Cuesta, J. Alden Mason, pages 399-472.
UNIVERSmr OF CALIFORNIA PUBLiCATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHACOLOQY AND CTHNOLOOY
Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 1-176, pl8. 1-45 October 31, 1912
ELEMENTS OF THE KATO LANGUAGE
BY
PLINY EABLE GODDABD
CONTENTS
PAiQS
Phonology 4
Individual Sounds . 4
Voweki - 4
Semi-VowelB 5
Gontinnants 5
Nasals 6
Spirants 7
Labial ..- _ 9
Dentals 9
Palatals 11
« ^7ACv* «••••••••••»•«••*••«••«»••••••■•••«••••*«•••«»«••■•••••■«•«*••*««••••■*••■••■•■*•«••••••••••«•••««•••« A^m
\7X\/ wVCvA ••«•••••••••«««•••••«•••■••••«■••••••«•«••*••••••••••■••**•«•«•••••••«•■•••■••••*•••*«•••**•«••« JLwf
xaolo Ox oonnui ...~....~......~...»...........~..^.m^....................m...^............. 13
Comparison of Kato and Hupa Sonndi 14
Assimilation of Soundi 17
Modification of Sjllablos ... ...... .. .. . . ... . 17
Moix^ologj 19
A flpaiiO "a vUw A^^^^LW •«•««••••••••••*•••••••■•■»•«••••■•••*•«••••«••*••••««••«••••••«•«•••■•«•••• ml ^
Plural and Glass SuflSxss ........ — ....... ... ............ — . ...... 24
Sofiz with Instnunental Moaning ......^....^...........................».... 26
8 University of CdHforniaPMbUcati(m8 in Am, AreK and Ethn. [YoLll
TAam
Suffixes of Temporal-Modal Force ^ 2(J
Suffixes of Sise, Shape, and Color 26
Nouns compounded with Nouns 27
First Noun qualifies the Second 27
With Possessive Prefix for Second Component 27
With Second Component modifying the First 27
Nouns compounded with Adjectives 28
Nouns compounded with Verbs _ 29
Adjectives and Verbs used as Nouns 29
Verbs with Instrumental Prefix used as Nouns 31
Polysyllabic Nouns Unanalyzed 81
Pronouns ...~..........~.....^^~^..„..........„..........„........^......„......^......^............ 32
Personal .......... 82
Personal Demonstratives 33
Demonstratives „ 34
Interrogative and Indefinite Pronouns 34
Adjectives 35
Pronominal Adjectives 35
MultipUcatiyes 36
Directional Wordi ^ ^ 37
Place 38
Time 38
Postpositions 30
Particles and Interjections ~ 41
PT6fiZ6B .....—..—; ••••••^ —..•—..•.••...•••...—••••... ..•^•••...—••^.^ 42
First Position „ 42
Adverbial 43
Deictic 49
Objective 51
First Modal 62
Second Modal — ......... — .. — .. ........... . ..... 53
Subjective 55
Third Modals 57
Stems . — — - 59
Sufiixes 80
Source of Information 80
Modal .„ 81
Temporal 83
Tenses and Modes « ~ 84
Table of Analyzed Verbs 85
Interpretation of Tracings 86
Explanation of Plates 88
1012] Qoddard: EUmenU of the Kato Language 8
INTRODUCTION
In general stmctore all the Athapascan languages have great
uniformity. The nouns, when not monosyllabic, are built upon
monosyllables by suffixes, or are sentence verbs used as substan-
tives. The verbs have adverbial prefixes expressing spatial rela-
tions, subjective and objective prefixes expressing syntactical
relations, stems which often indicate the character and number
of the subject or object, and suffixes with temporal, modal, and
conjunctional force.
This general structure has been rather fully discussed in the
treatment of the Hupa dialect.^ As has been said in another
place,' the Kato dialect differs from Hupa sufficiently to make
them mutually unintelligible. While this is due chiefly to
phonetic changes, in a lesser degree it is due to differences in
vocabulary, particularly nouns of descriptive meaning. The
suffixes of the verbs also differ considerably. The elements which
compose the words of each dialect are nearly all identical except
for the phonetic changes which exist.
It has been thou^t sufficient, considering the treatment
already given the Hupa language, to provide descriptions of the
individual sounds occurring in Kato, illustrated as fully as pos-
sible with tracings; and to list\ the morphological elements,
accompanying each with a few examples. This has been done
with the expectation that the chief use made of the work would
be comparative.
The material employed is chiefly that contained in Kato
Texts,* to the pages and lines of which the numerals after the
examples refer. The tracings* used were selected from about one
thousand made in the spring and fall of 1908 by Bill Bay, from
whom the texts also were obtained.
^Uniy. GaUf. Pabl. Am. Arch. Etlm., m, 1905. Bureau of American
Ethnology BuUetin 40, 87-158, 1910.
s Univ. Calif. Publ. Am. Arch. Ethn., y, 56, 1909.
• Uniy. Calif. PubL Am. Arch. Ethn., y, 65-238, 1909.
4 For a deeeription of the apparatus and methods oonsvlt Amer. Anthrop.,
BA yn, 618-619; and y, 1-4, of this series.
UniverHty of CdUfomia PubUoaiiona in Am. Arch, atid Ethn. [Vtd. 11
PHONOLOGY
INDIVIDUAL SOUNDS
VOWELS
Tbe vowqLs occurring in Kato are a, %, e, §, e, i, i, 5, ft, and u.
Of these, ^, ^, are evident modifications of a and e ; and i is not
at all common.
a in quality is the wide-mid-back in English father. It has a
very uniform length of .17 seconds.
^ is narrow-mid-back much like the vow^l in English what.
It occurs only in closed syllables, the same morphological element
when rendered open having unmodified a, e.g., -kwi|n, -kwa n%fi,
The converse, however, is not true that a becomes $ in closed
syllables. The stem of verbs often has i| in the present and a in
the past: tc'nnoLt'^, **cut them"; tc'n ne sIl t'ats, **I cut it
up." It is probable that the stem is more strongly stressed in
the latter case. The duration is usually les9 than that of a,
being about .11 seconds.
e is open in qualify as in English net. It is of frequent occur-
rence and stable in its character. In a few cases only does it
become narrowed to ^ as in English err. Its duration is very
uniform, being about .17 seconds. In less stressed syllables it
19 morphologically equivalent to Hupa e of the same quality.
I always has the closed, continental sound as in English pique^
"When stressed it is the morphological equivalent of Hupa e.
i, thQ open ^ound in English in, is but rarely heard. It ia
extremely short in duration and is detected with some difficulty.
It has been uniformly written in tc'in, "be s«iid." That it was
as uniformly uttered is not certain.
5 with the close qualify in English note is of frequent occur-
r^ce, and is fairly constant in its character, with a duration of
.17 seconds. It has frequently been vrritten in place of tl as a
possessive prefix, when its duration is only about .1 second.
fi hfus the sound of u in English but. It is always short
in duration, about .067 seconds. It corresponds in its use in
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 5
morphological elements with i in Hnpa; Eato Lilt, Hnpa lit,
''smoke/'
a, dose in qualify as in rule, Occurs as a possessive prefix
where one might suspect its origin to be connected with yo and
yi, the demonstrative. That it is not a vowel originally inde-
pendent of 0 seems probable. The closeness of quality may be
due to neighboring semi-vowek. Even in this prefix it is often
heard as o. Its duration is usually short, about .1 second.
SEMI-VOWELS
y initially seems to begin as a surd and to pass very quickly
into a sonant glide. It adds very little if any duration to
syllables. When final it is written i and seems in some cases to
have belonged to a separate syllable.
w seems to have developed in most instances from completely
sonant g under the influence of back vowels. In a few morpho-
logical elements w does appear without such influences, but in
certain Athapascan dialects g appears even in these. When the
w-like glide after k is not followed by a vowel it is surd and
written ti;.
OONTINUANM
Liquids
The only sonant liquid is the lateral one, 1. Initially in the
word and after a surd spirant the first half of the 1 is surd and
the latter half sonant. The first portion of the tracings (pi. 1,
figs. 1, 2) shows the effect of a single flap of the tongue followed
by a distinct rise of the tracing point, probably due to a greater
opening of the passage. In form, the tracing resembles that tot
the surd spirant l (pi. 1, fig. 9) but is much smaller.
Between vowels (pi. 1, fig. 4; pi. 3, fig. 3; pi. 7, fig. 9) and
final in the syllable (pi. 1, figs. 3, 5; pi. 9, figs. 1, 7) the sonancy
is uninterrupted. When 1 is followed by a glottal stop the
sonancy and apparently the duration of the sound itself are
much shortened. The sound under this condition makes but
little impression upon the finglish ear, and it is often heard as
a surd. The tracings in plate 1, figures 7-9, do show a degree of
I
6 Uf^er8ityofCaUfomiaPubHoaH(msiHAm.Areh,andEthn, [YoLll
sonancy. These interrupted sonants seem to be the representa-
tives of Hupa final L.*
The duration of 1 is about .18 seconds.
Nasals
m. — The bilabial nasal seems to occur only where b has been
assimilated to a dental or palatal nasal. Examples of such
assimilation are plainly seen in cases where the initial sound of
a verb-stem is b. Whenever it is preceded by n or n, b becomes
m and usually the preceding nasal becomes m (pi. 6, figs. 6, 8).
The postposition bl« when it follows a nasal becomes mi« (pi. 4,
fig. 9). There is one word with an initial m which is unex-
plained, main, ''weasel" (pi. 6, fig. 5). The duration of this
sound is about .1 second.
In common with several Athapascan dialects, Eato has b,
apparently preserved, where Hupa and other dialects have m.
Perhaps the change toward m began with these words where
assimilation took place and afterwards was carried through the
language by analogy.
Syllabic n. — ^In many words in Eato n stands by itself in a
syllable (pi. 4, figs. 2, 3), particularly when it is the first modal
prefix of verbs and adjectives, and the second personal posses-
sive prefix before a consonant. Under these circumstances Hupa
has a vowel i preceding the n. Such a vowel was imagined to
exist in Eato and was at first written. This n, unlike the con-
sonant, has no sound accompanying the release. Its duration is
about .12 second.
n. — The dental consonantal n when initial usually has the
sonancy beginning about .05 seconds before the release of the
tongue (pi. 1, fig. 8; pi. 2, fig. 3; pi. 3, figs. 5, 6). In some
instances the sonancy seems to follow the release in about .01
second (pi. 4, fig. 7), in this respect agreeing with g and d when
initial.
When n occurs within a word it is sonant throughout (pi. 4,
figs. 6, 7). Its duration is about .1 second.
The final nasal seems usually to be palatal rather than dental.
• Present series, ▼, pL 6, fig. 9.
1912] Ooddard: BlemenU of the Kato Language 7
bat it becomes dental when another syllable beginning with a
vowel is suffixed. In that case the n is often heard doubled as
the final and initial sounds of the adjoining syllables. This is
revealed in the tracings of plate 3, figure 1 of which shows a
more complete closure of the mouth passage for the second n.
Figure 6 of the same plate shows a decided increase in the
amplitude of the vibrations of the nasal tracing, apparently due
to the lower pitch of the final syllable, which happens to be
favored by the tambour in use.
n. — The palatal nasal seems to be characterized by an incom-
plete closure of the mouth passage, or by its closure sometime
after the lowering of the velum. This results in a nasalized
sonant, palatal spirant, or a nasalized vowel, according to the
degree of elevation of the back of the tongue, but since the
earlier part of the vowel and the latter part of nasal are pure,
the mixed character is not particularly noticeable to the ear.
Final g also has a similar incompleteness of contact.
Often the palatal n is followed by a glottal stop (pi. 3, figs.
3-5). The sound is somewhat obscured in that case and at first
the glottal stop was supposed to precede the nasal. None of the
tracings reveal such an order. The glottis seems to open and
the velum to fall at the same instant, causing a simultaneous
raising of both tracing points. Eato seems to differ from Hupa
as to the order of the glottal stop and nasal, as appears from
plate 5 of volume 5 in this series.
Spirants
The spirants of Eato are four in number, s, c, l, and h, all
of them normally voiceless. In a few instances the initial por-
tion is voiced at a low pitch, probably due to the gradual separa-
tion of the vocal chords. This low-pitched voicing of the initial
portion impressed the hearer, in some cases, rather than the
middle and last surd portion, and the sound was accordingly
recorded as a sonant. In a number of cases intervocalic h
appears with low pitch vibrations of great amplitude continuing
throughout its duration. If it be true that the glottal spirant
is caused by the friction of the air current as it passes the true
[
8 UniverHtyofCdlifarniaFfiblioati4}MinAm,AreKandEthn. [YoLll
vocal chords, there may well be degrees of their retraction and
relaxation.
s.— When initial, the tracing of s is usually a regular para-
bolic curve (pi. 5, fig. 1; pi. 6, fig. 7), showing a duration for
the sound of about .22 second. In an intervocalic position (pi. 1,
fig. 7) it may appear as a straight line or as an upward curve
according to the elevation of the adjoining vowel tracing. Final
in the syllable, which is a frequent position because of its occur-
rence as a suffix, it usually appears as a reg^ular descending
parabolic curve (pi. 3, figs. 5, 6; pi. 5, fig. 2; pi. 8, figs. 2, 8; pi.
10, figs. 1, 4, 7) of from .16 to .25 of a second in leng^. When
final in the word, s is sometimes quite prolonged (.33 second)
and shows a depression followed by a regular elevation. The
form of the curve is due to variation in breath pressure con-
trolled in the last analysis by the size of the opening between
the tongue and the palate, and possibly, though not probably, to
increase in the lung pressure.
c. — ^When initial before a consonant c (sh) seems to be syllabic
(pi. 5, fig. 4; pi. 11, fig. 5). It is distinguished from s with
difficulty by ear and its tracings closely resemble those of that
sound. In other situaticms in the syllable and word the remarks
above concerning s apply to c. In Hupa the corresponding
sound is huf (-w) .*
L. — The position for this sound seems identical with that
for L The tracings of it (pi. 2, figs. 1, 2, 4; pi. 11, fiig. 3)
usually show evidence of a single fiap or movement of the tongue
and sometimes (pi. 42, fig. 12) the slighter movements which
may represent the spirant character. In a few cases (pi. 10,
jBg. 2 ; pi. 8, fig. 1 ) the sonancy of the preceding vowel continues
into the 1, but in all other respects it is surd. The sound is of
the same character as that. found in Hupa.^ The average length
is a little less than .2 of a second.
h, \ — ^Tracings of this sound in the initial, medial, and final
C ) positions are to be seen in plate 5, figures 7-9. In duration
• Work died, v, 10.
T Ibid., pL 6, figs. 2, 4, 5, 6.
l§lfi] Qoddard: Slernrnti of the Kaio Language %
h 18 comparable to s and c. As had been remarked above, when
medial it often has low-pitched vocal chord vibrations.
G. — ^A sonant spirant in the postpalatal position occurs be^
tween vowels and finally. It has probably resulted from a stop,
the closure being incomplete.
STOPS
Six positions and three kinds of stops may be distinguished
in Kato. The positions are bilabial, dental, prepalatal, post-
palatal, velar, and glottal. The dental and palatal ones occur as
sonants or intermediates, aspirated surds, and surds accompanied
by glottal action.
Labial
b. — In the bilabial position only one kind is found, which from
its resemblance to the corresponding members of other series may
be called a sonant. The sonancy, however, does not occur until
after the separation of the lips (pi. S, fig. 3) ; the impulse for
their separation and for the approximation of the vocal chords
seeming to be synchronous. In regard to the tracings it should
be observed that the lips, being tightly confined within the speak-
ing funnel, often compress the air and elevate the recording point
during the closure, obscuring the effect of the release, a result
quite different from that produced by the other stops.
When b is preceded by a nasal it is assimilated to m. It does
not occur in the final position of the syllable.
Its duration averages about .18 seconds.
Dentals
d. — The sonancy of d occurs about .04 seconds after the witii-
drawal of the tip of the tongue from the sockets of the teeth.
Perhaps that interval is required for the adjustm^it of the chords
after the nervous impulse is received (pL 7, fig. 1). It will be
observed that laryngeal adjustment of some sort is synchronous
with the initial adjustment of the tongue marked by the first
vertical lines in figures 1, 2, 3 of plate 7. Since only the latter
third of the sound is sonant, and since its strength of enunciation
does not differ from the surd so much as is usual in European
10 UnivenityofCaUforniaFubHcaiioi^imAm.Ar<ai.midBthn. [YoLll
languages, it is heard by many as a surd. The sound is not found
in the final position of the syllable, nor could it be expected since
in that situation the sonant portion, the end glide, is wanting.
t. — In the sound represented by t, the final glide is surd
breath resulting in an aspiration perhaps a little stronger than
in accented English syllables (pi. 7, figs. 4-6). In several cases
t by itself composes a syllable (pi. 6, fig. 3; pi. 7, fig. 2). In
similar situations Hupa has d if the sound be initial, and t if it
be final, with a weak vowel if necessary. Where t and d occur
in the same word t appears as a higher tracing, indicating its
somewhat stronger character. In duration the closure is about
.1 second and the glide about as long.
t'. — The third member of the dental series is one of those
peculiar American sounds often called fortes or exploded. The
upper larynx line (pi. 7, figs. 7-9) shows a rather marked depres-
sion beginning as the tongue reaches the position of closure,
culminating an instant after its release, and gradually returning
during the glide, the latter portion of which is sonant. In
figure 9 both t' and t occur, with a definite depression for t' but
none for t, although it is nearly twice as high in the lower breath
tracing. The initial sound also has the depression for tc', of the
same character as the sound under discussion.
It will be noticed that the recording point does not ascend so
high as for d even, and immediately returns to the line marked
by the preceding closure or even below it. It seems probable that
the larynx tracing records a bodily movement of that organ
which normally occurs when the glottis is closed by the depres-
sion of the epiglottis. The glottal stop (pi. 7, fig. 7) has a similar
depression.
It seems that while the tongue is against the teeth closing the
passage through the mouth the velum is raised, closing the nasal
passages, and the glottis is closed by the epiglottis. The mouth
and throat form at that time a closed chamber filled with com-
pressed air which escapes as the tongue is withdrawn, causing the
moderate elevation of the tracing point. Immediately after the
release, of the tongue, while the glottis is at least partly closed,
some movement, perhaps the lowering again of the larynx, causes
1912] Goddard: BlemenU of the Kato Language 11
a degree of suction. These sounds have a characteristic harsh
effect on the ear. Examples of this sound in the final position
may perhaps be seen in plate 11, figures 5 and 6. In the lower,
breath, line of the latter the tongue release may be seen about
4 mm. after the last vertical line and a second one, probably the
glottal release, 10 mm. after the first one. That the laryngeal
movement is synchronous with, not posterior to, the dental stop,
appears from the depression in the larynx line of figure 5 of this
plate.
Palatals
The palatal stops seem mostly to be in the postpalatal position,
the prepalatal stops apparently having become affricatives. In
many cases it is rather difficult to be sure whether tc is uttered
or a prepalatal k with, perhaps, a glide. There are three sorts
of the postpalatal stops of the same general character as those of
the dental series, and in addition considerable variation in the
scmant depending upon the position in the syllable.
g. — ^Initially the sonancy of g begins, as in d, about .02 seconds
after the release of the tongue (pi. 8, fig. 1). Between vowels,
and in some cases even between vowel and consonant, the sonancy
is continuous, and the contact slight and of short duration (pi. 8,
figs. 2, 3) . If an o or ft follows, it is often heard as w. In Hupa,
in both the initial and medial positions, w occurs in all vowel
settings. Finally in a word and before a surd spirant the contact
is incomplete and a sonant continuant is heard (pi. 8, fig. 9)
written o.*'
k. — The aspiration of the palatal surd is more noticeable than
in the case of the corresponding dental. The duration of this
aspiration, between the release of the tongue and the beginning
of the vowel, averages .08 seconds (pi. 9, figs. 1-3). In numbers
of cases this consonant is syllabic, representing the pronoun of
the third i>erson either as a possessive prefixed to a noun or the
object prefixed to the verb. In this case and in some others the
aspiration sounds as a surd w. A sound of this kw sort occurs
finally and between a vowel and consonant (pi. 11, fig. 1). It is
7a It now seems eertain tliat two g's liave been eonfused: one, not very
frequent, is intennediate; the other k fuUy sonant, eorresponding to w in
Hnpa.
It UniverHtff of CaUfomia PubHoatians in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [YoL 11
quite probable that the w-tinge iB imparted by the remains of an
5 or u vowel. It appears that the ordinary aspirated k when
final usually loses its third or aspirated portion and resembles
an unaspirated k. Hupa has a surd palatal continuant (x) as
the corresponding sotmd in all situations.
k'. — The third member of the series is of the same character
as t'. Its tracings show the same depression in the lar3mx line
and a similar reduction in the height attained by the breath
tracing with the following retraction. It has a harsh, cracking
sound, still more noticeable than that of t'. A k of this sort fol-
lowed by w is also found (pi. 9, fig. 9). When final it is rather
hard to be sure which k should be written, but it almost certainly
occurs in plate 11, figure 8, and perhaps in many other words. It
corresponds to the only k of Hupa, in which language the palatal
sonants seem to have become w, and the aspirated surd palatal
stops the surd palatal spirant x.
Velar
q. — ^A few words have a sound dearly different from the
palatal sounds discussed above. This difference seems to be one
of position. The sound appears to be a velar, unaspirated and
intermediate as to sonancy (pi. 8, figs. 7, 8).
Glottai
That the glottal stop («) occurs in the initial position in a word
is not certain. It is initial in the verbal stems -«a, -«ai, and -«an,
but these stems of course are never the first syllable of words.
When intervocalic (pi. 11, fig. 9) the stop is usually heard as a
short pause between the two sounds, and is likely to be over-
looked as insignificant or not even noticed until attention is called
to it. When it is final (pi. 1, figs. 2, 6) it is much more promi-
nent, for in that situation its release is plainly heard as an
aspiration. Its duration in this situation is much longer. Its
presence may also be detected by its effect upon the vowel or
consonant which it follows (pi. 11, fig. 3). It has the result of
reducing the duration of a preceding sonant (vowel, liquid, or
nasal) to be about one-half of the usual length.
1918] Goddard: EUm^mU of t1^ Kaio Language 1$
«
AFFBICATIVBS
The classification of the afiMcatives (stops plus spirants)
is rather difficult in Kato. A sonant dj occurs in a number of
syllables (pi. 10, figs. 1, 4), but there is usually some question
as to the sonancy and also the position ; dj, g, tc, and ky at first
having been written for the same sound. An unmistakable surd
tc also occurs with aspiration which takes place through the
sh (c) position (pi. 10, figs. 2, 5).
A surd with glottal accompaniment (tc'} is frequent (pi. 10,
figs. 3, 4, 6, 9) ; a deictic prefix of this sort being present in a
large number of verbs. It is often syllabic.
It is rather doubtful if ts occurs in any large number of
cases. The diminutive suffix, of very frequent use in Kato, often
sounds as much like ts as it does like tc. This is probably due
to the fact that the second part of the sound is formed in a
position or in a manner between s and sh as heard in English.
L. — In some cases a lateral surd consonant of an 1 character
seems to be accompanied by the same sort of glottal or epiglottal
action which aflFects the surd stops and the aflFricative tc'. This
is especially plain in the tracing plate 2, figure 7. The effect, as
in the other sounds of this character, is to reduce the energy of
the breath, as is uniformly shown by the height of the tracings,
and at the same time to impart a harshness which is strikingly
noticeable.
TABJUE OF 80UND9
Stops OoBtinm«atf
I.
P
« "9 S S
111
Bilabial b m<b
Apl«al-4«iital 4 t t' 8 ts ts'.a' «
Median-prepi^ta] e dj t« t«'
Lateral-prepalatal l L
Post-palatal g k k' g ft
Velar q
Glottal « W
Semirowels: y, w.
14 University of CaUfomia FubUcaUans in Am, Arch, and Bthn. [YoL 11
Voweh.
a
e 9
GOMPABISON OF KATO AND HUPA SOUNDS
Eatx) a and % iorrespond to Hupa a and % (written A) .
Kato a% eloud; Hupa a, dovd.
Kato ytLgdLgslf he threw up; Hupa jawiLwaL, he threw through
the air.
Eato e ; Hupa e.
Kato fee, eoal; Hupa, tofiw, eoaL
Kato tee del'; Hupa tcittesdeL, they went.
Eato i ; Hupa e.
Kato ci, I; Hupa, htoe, L
Kato ddgisiil, one eould not see; Hupa ddxddAweeen, it eould
not be seen.
Eato 5 ; Hupa 5.
Kato Ld% grass; Hupa Ld, grass.
Kato ndtc'^td', water reached; Hupa n5itt5, the water eomes.
Eato ti ; Hupa i.
Kato Ldt, smoke; Hupa lit, smoke.
Kato nas fits, he ran about ; Hupa nas its ei, he ran about.
Kato giUliit, it bums; Hupa willit, it bums.
Eato y ; Hupa y .
Kato j&*f louse; Hupa ya, louse.
Kato yenat ja, he went in; Hupa yenawityai, he went in.
Eato 1; Hupa 1.
Kato l^t, seaweed; Hupa la, seaweed.
Kato tetm li*, he eaught in a noose; Hupa tsis loi, he tied in bundles.
Kato tc'ttelds, he led; Hupa natelSs, she dragged baek.
Eato L; HupaL.
Kato i/dn, squirrel; Hupa Ldn, mouse.
Kato Lelyits, he tied together; Hupa Leilloi, he tied together.
Kato tc'enanLa, he jumped out; Hupa teeilLat, he jumped out.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Koto Language 15
Eato L ; Hnpa L.
Kato AliOly its straps; Hnpa Uh, strap.
Kato teljoitdigi, she is making a basket; Hupa keitLd, she used
to make baskets.
Kato syllabic n ; Hupa n and i or other vowel.
Kato ntcel*y jour younger brother; Hmpa nittai, jour paternal
uncle.
Kato ndass!, it is heaTj; Hnpa nit das, it is heaTj.
Kato n ; Hupa n.
Kato ne', land; Hnpa nin, ground.
Kato naniinyaiy she started aeross; Hnpa nanifijai, he erossed.
Kato n ; Hupa n or n.*
Kato dtc'fkfi*, toward it; Hupa xdteifi, toward her.
Kato detgto'afi, he put it in the fire; Hnpa dedfiwifian, he put
in incense.
Katos; Hupas.
Kato dsftts, its skin; Hupa sits, skin, bark.
Kato ddkionesM, I was insensible; Hupa ainesen, I thought.
Kato 0 ; Hupa hw,
Kato ca, moon; Hupa hioa, moon.
Kato nee in tS le, let me look; Hupa nQw ill, let me look.
Kato nLcftfi', black; Hupa Luhioin, black.
Kittob; Hupam.
Kato bOfik'iit, lake; Hnpa mtSk, lake.
Kato bee ya htlt, he climbed up when; Hnpa me is La dei, he ran up.
Kato na^be, swim (pin. imp.); Hnpa nautrme, let me swim.
Kato d; Hupa d.*
Kato Ada*, his month; Hnpa x5tda, his mouth.
Kato dan51a, she put it up; Hnpa danawillai, she put it.
Kato bS daii, let us climb; Hupa wei diL, we will go.
Kato dj ; Hupa dj.
Kato dje% pitch; Hupa dje, pitch.
Kato dje* giiLtceL, he split open; Hnpa djewiLkil, he tore open.
Kato t, Hupa t.
Kato t5, water; Hupa i6, ocean.
Kato te^tc'gtotal', he stepped in water; Hupa te n5 dfi win taL, he
stepped in water.
8 It is not certain that this is a phonetic change. The occurrence of
n and fi in Hupa stems regularly marking tempond-modal changes may
have been extended by analogy.
• When a prefix such as follows de-, in fire, stands alone, it becomes t
in Kato, e.g., de t gfifi '%n (Hupa de dQ win an), he put on the fire; but
otherwise it is d also in Kato, as in de dtbi *^, put on the fire.
r
16 Unwenity9fC€Mf<>rmaFuhKoaU(m$inAm.AreKandBihn. [YoLll
Kato t' ; Hupa *."
Kato t'e', blanket; Hupa te, blanket.
Kato tagAtt'ats, ke butehered; Hnpa kit te lata, he eat tkem.
Eatotc; Hupatc.
Kato LtcCic, dnst; Hupa littcnu?! sand.
Kato wa niin tei btlfi, it will blow through; Hnpa da kjli wee tee, the
wind blew.
Eatx) tc ; Hupa tew.
Kato ctcoy my grandmother; Hupa mitctcwd, its grandmother.
Kato iiLtci, make it; Hnpa iLtewe, make it.
Kato tc'dn gCUi tee Ge, he cried; Hnpa tcftwintewti, he cried.
Eato tc; Hupa k (prepalatal).
Kato tctoif tree; Hupa kin, tree.
Kato nteel', jour brother; Hupa mikkil, her brother.
Kato giUtcdt, he caught than; tcexdLkit, he caught him.
Kato tc' ; Hupa tc, ky."
Kato tc' nee tifi, he la j down ; Hupa tcin nee ten, he lay down.
Ejito tc' g^n yan*, he ate of it; kyu win yan, he ate it .
Eato g; Hupa w.
Kato giiLgel*, it was evening; Hupa wilweL, dark, night.
Kato selgin, he killed; Hupa tceseLwen, he killed.
Eato k ; Hupa x.
Kato kaihit', winter time; Hupa zai, winter.
Kato kaya^*, they dug; Hupa zakehioe, she commenced to dig.
Kato wa'Mkan, she gave him; Hupa x5 wa tcifi zan, she gave her.
Eato kw ; Hupa z.
Kato kwdft', Are; Hupa xoft, lire.
Kato ktona*, his eyes; Hupa xonna, his eyes.
Kato kwa^la, you did; Hupa xadlle, do that.
Eato k' ; Hupa k. (The same sound.)
Kato k'%tde*, soon; Hupa ktltde, soon.
Kato k'e tc'tks t'ats, he cut; Hupa kit te tats, he cut them.
Kato niin iin diUE k'e*, get up (imp. sing.); Hupa in na is diUs ka,
she got up.
Eato k'w ; Hupa k.
Kato k'wAt', on; Hupa kiit, on.
Eato q ; Hupa q.
Kato qd, worm; Hupa <fi, worm.
Kato iifiqdt, spear it; Hupa yaaqdt, they always stuck them.
10 Hupa i is bat an earlier orthography for t' used in Kato.
11 In Hupa tc with glottal accompaniment was not differentiated from
the few occurrences of simple tc
1912] Chddard: ElemenU of the Kato Language 17
ASSIMILATION OF SOUNDS
The instances of assimilation noticed are the following :
b following n or n becomes m :
kw6fi*mi« (for kw6fl«bi«), lire in. 119-13."
kw5fi< m6fi a (for kwdfi^ hM a), fire before. 119-16.
ttUnmie (for tiinbic), swim. 118-16.
t final in verbal stems followed by b or k is assimilated :
tlLtc^kwan (forC^te^tkwan), 70a shouted. 164-17.
na sdL Liik kw^lL (for nasdLL^tkw^fi), you have burned f 174-4.
u na niin Ldb btlii (for finaniiiiLtltbiUi), around you must bum.
104-10.
ndlkabbM (for n51katb{UEL), will float ashore. 85-10.
t' of k'wiit', on, becomes n before words beginning with n :
kViin na gai, on it he walked. 78-1.
k'wiin ndL tifi, she put it on. 181-8.
g preceded by n becomes n or disappears :
na htlii ^t (for na hfLfi g^t), you untie. 123-7.
te'eii a ni (for tc'efi ga ni) , killed. 157-5.
te'nnfkfiifi (for tc'nnfUELgifi), he brought. 135-11.
MODIFICATION OP SYLLABLES
It is well known that syllables of greater importance of mean-
ing are rendered more emphatic by methods which are character-
istic of the languages in which they occur. English, in common
with other languages of Germanic origin, has a strong stress
accent. Ancient Greek and certain modem Slavic languages
have a variation in pitch. Variations of stress are undoubtedly
due to changes in the pressure exerted by the lungs upon the
air column and are brought about by an unusual incitation of
muscles controlling breathing. The increase of pitch, in like
manner, is due to an extra forcible incitation and contraction
of certain muscles of the larynx.
It seems that in Kato and other Athapascan dialects there are
similar grades in the force exerted by the muscles in closing and
adjusting the mouth passage. It was formerly held that these
were secondary effects of stress accent, although such accent is
12 The references are to the pages and lines of the author's Kato Texts,
Univ. Calif. Publ. Am. Arch. Ethn., v., 65-238, 1909.
18 University of Calif amia Puhlioations in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [Vol. 11
nearly absent at the present time. It seems more reasonable to
look upon these differences of enunciation as coordinate with, if
not independent of, stress and pitch.
Such differences in muscular tension of the walls of the
mouth, and of the tongue should alter the resonance of the buccal
cavity, and the quality of the vowels, render stops and affricatives
simple spirants, and cause final consonants to disappear.
The following diphthongs lose their final component :
.«ai becomee -'a, stem, to have, position,
-yai becomes -ya, stem, to go.
The quality of the vowels changes in the following :
ta- becomes t^t-, prefix, relating to water,
ka- becomes k^-, prefix, np.
ye- becomes yi-, prefix, in.
-del'- becomes -diiL, stem, go.
-sil' becomes -sCUi, stem, to strike.
k6- becomes kwfit-, prefix, down.
The sonant 1 becomes a surd spirant l :
•dCd becomes -dfiL, stem, of swimming fish,
•kal becomes -kaL, stem, to break,
-qal becomes -qaL, stem, to walk.
Affricatives become spirants :
-yats becomes -yas, stem, to snow,
-jitc becomes -yie, stem, to rest,
-gets becomes -gfic, stem, to look,
-k'ats becomes -k'as, stem, of long object.
Final stops disappear :
-Lat becomee -La, stem, to jump,
-ydt becomes -yd, stem, to chase,
-yeo becomes -ye^ stem, to drive deer,
-lao becomes -la% stem, to do.
-k'ao becomes -kV, stem, to be fat.
Not only is the duration of the entire syllable lessened in
these instances in which a diphthong becomes a simple vowel, an
affricative a simple spirant, and a final stop disappears, but
vowels in the weaker forms are shorter.
Stress and pitch seem to vary but slightly except that at the
conclusion of a sentence or any part of it spoken separately the
voice falls much as in English.
1912] Goddard: BlemenU of the Koto Language 19
MORPHOLOGY
NOUNS
The nouns of Eato are of the same sort and fall intx) the same
classes as Hupa nouns already fully discussed.^' In the first
clasSy monosyllables without evidence of formative elements,
there have been found sixty-eight. Of such Hupa nouns forty-
eig^t have been listed.^^ Of these Eato nouns sixteen are believed
not to exist in Hupa either as simple words or elements of words,
while seven of the Hupa monosyllables are not known in Eato.
The Hupa have descriptive names in the place of these Eato
nouns, the apparently original ones. In several instances the
change appears to be recent. The ordinary Hupa word for water
is tanan, what one drinks, but td is still employed in com-
I>ounds. Nouns similar to these Eato words are generally in use
throughout the territory intervening between Hupa and Eato
territory and are to be considered Athapascan nouns that have
disappeared in Hupa.
SIMPLE, MONOBYLLABIC
The following nouns seem to have no formative elements.
aSdoud. 74-6. (PL 12, fig. 1.)
^ firewood. 137-16.
yaS sky. 77-18. (PL 12, fig. 2.)
ya<, head louse. 152-5. (PL 12, fig. 3.)
yas, snow. 74-3. (PL 12, fig. 4.)
ye, hoiue. 97-6. (PL 15, figs. 18, 14.)
y5S scoter. 122-6. (PL 5, fig. 9.)
yd*, bead. 145-7.
w6s, leg. 79-10. (PL 5, fig. 3; pL 12, fig. 5.)
l^t, seaweed. 84-12.
16 (165), frost 748.
Lets, day. 80-1.
L6n, rodent, squirreL 96-9. (PL 2, fig. 1; pL 20, fig. 2.)
Ldk', steel-head salmon. 84-5. (PL 12, tg, 6.)
Lfit, smoke. 141-2. (PL 12, fig. 7.)
Le% night. 81-4.
L6S herb, grass. 71-3. (PL 2, fig. 8; pL 12, fig. 8.)
main, weaseL 74-2. (PL 6, tg. 5.)
^'Present series, m, 13-29, 1905; Bur. Am. Ethn. BuU. 40, 106-110,
1910.
1* Ibid., m, 18.
20 Univertity of California Fuhlications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [Vol. 11
ne*, land, earth. 711; 74-9. (PI. 20, tg, 9.)
sai, sand. 85-9.
se, stone. 71-8. (PI. 5, fig. 1.)
tSs, otter. 73-4.
slfis, ground sqnirrel. 73-7. (PL 12, fig. 10.)
Bk'e', mush. 110-8.
ca, sun. 74-9. (PL 12, fig. 11.)
eek', spittie. 154-14. (PL 12, fig. 12.)
eic, ochre. 80-4. (PL 15, fig. 12.)
ele', orioles. 72-13.
bafi, doe, female. 165-9, 182-2.
beL, rope. 101-7. (PL 12, fig. 13.)
bfis, slide. 86-11. (PL 12, fig. 14.)
biit', stomach. 110-1.
dafi, pile. 13310; 181-6.
deL, whooping crane (f). 73-14.
dj^, mud. 155-6.
djeS pitch. 137-13.
djifi, day. 82-8.
t5, water. 71-1. (PI. 7, fig, 4; pL 12, tg, 15.)
tfits, cane. 174-7.
ts'al, basket cradle. 113-12.
tsV, brush. 76-7.
ts'fifi, bone. 110-1.
tctln, tree. 71-3.
tc'afi, food. 85-5.
tc'ek, woman. 83-15.
tc%boat. 127-10.
tc'6S black-bird. 72-15.
tc'iifi, noise. 107-8.
t'a«, feather. 105-14. (PL 7, Hg. 7.)
t'e', blanket 110-5.
fee (t'ece), coaL 143-7; 147-9.
ges, black salmon. 84-3. (PL 12, fig. 16.)
gV5, yew.
ka% goose. 73-14.
ka', a feather headdress. 176-17.
kai, winter.
kOs, cough. (PL 12, Hg. 17.)
kwe*, track. 108-13.
kwdfiS fire. 81-3. (PL 4, fig. 5.)
kw5t, stream, creek. 90-15.
kwoc, whitethorn (a shrub). 166-3.
k'a*, arrow. 110-10.
k'ai^, hazelnuts. 94-5.
klfi*, juneberry. 133-3. (PL 4, fig. 8; pL 11, fig. 2.
k'fifi*, hazel. 133-10. (PL 12, fig. 20.)
ktlc, alder. (PL 12, fig. 18.)
kVaSfat. 83-15. (PL 12, fig. 19.)
qd, worms. (PL 8, fig. 7.)
1912] Croddard: Elements of the Kato Language 21
WITH POSSESSIVE PREFIXES
Nouns capable of intimate possession, such as parts of the
body, and terms of relationship, seldom or never occur without a
possessive prefix. These prefixes are :
a-, reflexive.
at'a, her own blanket fold. 181-9. (PL 7, fig. 8; pi. 13, fig. 1.)
c- or S-, first person singular.
c dji«, my heart. (PL 13, fig. 14.)
n-, second person singular.
nat, your sister. 132-4. (PL 13, fig. 10.)
no'-, first person plural.
nd*si«, OUT heads. 129-10. (PL 5, fig. 8.)
no'-, second person plural.
no' m*, your heads. 172-15.
nd'n^n, your mother. 135-2.
n h-, second person plural.
nhfinte, your (pL) noses. 97-9.
b- or hi-, third person of singular or plural definitely men-
tioned or understood persons or things (pi. 14, fig. 3).
bfintc, his nose. 80-7.
bine*, its (feather's) back. 127-5.
u- or 0-, third person singular or plural of persons, animals, or
objects (pi. 13, figs. 2-9).
fl na*, her eye. 152-10. (PL 13, fig. 5.)
t tea*, her apron. 165-8. (PL 13, fig. 3.)
kvh, third person singular or plural of persons or things
referred to indefinitely.
kw da*, his mouth. 123-2. (PI. 14, fig. 7.)
kfic-, third person plural.
kficnataeha*, without their knowledge. 155-8.
tc'-, third person of detached, unassociated members.
tc'sl*, head. 128-5.
Parts of the Body^^
-finte, nose. 80-7; 98-2.
-we ci, eggs. 111-9.
i» m, 14-16.
22 UfUversity of California Publicati(m$ in Am, AreK and Ethn, [YoLll
-w6*, tooth. 181-8. (PL 4, fig. 2; pi. 14, fig. 4.)
-w58, leg. 151-18. (PL 5, fig. 3.)
•la% hand. 154-1; 164-1.
•lai^, penis. 80-8.
•La, butt 93-10.
-na«, eye. 180-7. (PI. 13, fig. 5.)
-ne*, back, baek-bone. 133-3.
-ne«, lower leg. (PI. 13, fig. 12.)
-sa ye, its shell. 131-9.
•sa ke*, spleen. 133-4.
-si% head. 76-1. (PL 5, fig. 8.)
-n* da«, erown of head. 79-4. (PL 14, fig. 12.)
-so', tongue. 110-3. (PL 13, fig. 4.)
-sd se*, sting. 156-1.
-sfifi% meat 134-14.
•sAn ta*, forehead. 132-15.
-sftts, skin. 110-4. (PL 13, fig. 7.)
-sle*, anus. 143-13.
-bat', stomach. 148-6. (PL 11, fig. 5.)
-da«, mouth. 122-13. (PL 14, fig. 7.)
-da*, Toices. 106-14.
-da' ga*, beard.
-de', horn. 74-10. (PL 13, fig. 9.)
-des ke', lungs. 180-12.
-di ce*, shoulder. 75-1.
-dji«, heart. 125-17. (PL 13. fig. 14.)
-djik'e*, intestines. 113-3.
-te le«, Uver. 180-12.
-t'a, tail. 86-4.
-fai, neck. 153-11.
-ts'e k'e, navel. 132-10.
•ts'in ne, leg. 107-12.
-ts'd*, milk. (PL 13, fig. 6.)
•tc'ani, faeces. 142-7.
-tci% taiL 163-1. (PL 14, fig. 5.)
-tci*, mind. 101-14.
-tci*, heart. 101-5. (PL 5, fig. 4.)
•dji c!e te*, lungs. 80-2.
-tc6 djlL, kidney. 80-2. (PL 14, fig. 11.)
•tcdk, testicles. 80-9.
-tc'ge«, ear. 110-2.
•ga*, hair. 143-8.
-ge*, marrow. 110-2.
-ki«, butt
•kwa ne, shoulder, arm. 102-15; 160-7.
-kwafike, ribs. 133-9.
-kwe% foot 96-14. (PL 14, fig. 8.)
-qot', knee. (PL 13, fig. 13.)
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 23
Clothing
-L61, strap. 97-7.
't% poeket, blanket fold. 181-9. (PL 13, fig. 1.)
-t'a ni, skirt. 165-6. (PI. 13, fig. 2.)
-tea*, apron. 165-8. (PI. 13, fig. 3.)
Belatives
-at', sister. 132-4. (PI. 13, fig. 10.)
-itc, daughter. 128-7.
-fint, -findi, cousin. 139-4; 145-2; 146-3. (PI. 14, figs. 1, 2.)
-jacts, young. 80-14; 182-4.
•ja teete, daughter. 176-10.
-ye* dfifi, husband. 132-14.
-Id, dog. 101-6.
-n^n, mother. 105-7.
-ta% father. 105-7.
-t'Sci*, sister. 144-4.
-tcel*, younger brother. 141-12.
-tcai, grandchUd. 97-16; 148-11. (PI. 14, fig. 13.)
-tco, grandmother. 97-16. (PI. 13, fig. 15.)
•tciifikanai, uncle. 172-3.
-tc'i^, grandfather. 153-10. (PI. 13, fig. 11.)
-ge dM, brother-in-law. 153-18.
-gdn dan, son-in-law. 128-7.
-ki, boy. 102-6. (PL 14, fig. 9.)
-kik, children. 105-2.
NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES
Nouns as such never seem to be used with prefixes other than
the possessive ones. They take, however, a large number and
variety of sufSxes. With the exception of those first listed, these
suffixes have very definite meanings and most of them are trace-
able to other parts of speech. Those indicating size, shape, and
color differ from adjectives only in the absence of the usual pre-
fixes before the stem. The postpositions used with nouns are not
different from those forming phrases with pronouns, but in a few
eases the noun does not seem to exist without the suffix. These
X)06tpositions might easily become inflectional cases should they
suffer obscuring phonetic changes or their use except as nominal
suffixes cease.
24 Univernty of CdUfamia PublicaUana in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [YoL 11
Plural and Class Suffixes
-ki, -k, forming the plural of terms of relationship and classes
of people.
ie'j%n, woman. te'j%nki. women. 110-15.
ski, boj. 116-16. Bkik, boys, ehildren. 132-8. (PL 14, figs. 0, 10.)
-tcun, a suffix indicating one of a class, ''that kind of a
person."
tc'jantcM; old woman. 152-3.
stcdteiiSy my grandmother. 147-5.
-ta, the plural of the last.
k%ekit8y old man. 108-2. k^cldtsta, old men. 109-15.
-k'dcts, of uncertain meaning.
tc'7%n k'detSy old women. 105-1.
')n ya hun, a class suffix used particularly with place names.
It is the usual termination of the people of a village as dis-
tinguished from the locality.
t5kiyahMy water people. 175-1.
-gun, of uncertain meaning.
Ltsdgiifi, foxes, "the ones that are blue "(f). 73-3. (PL 8, fig. 3.)
Locative Suffixes^^
-dun, at.
ye dM, house place. 113-15.
yl tc5 diifi, danee house place. 145-6.
se ta* diifi, rock creek. 107-16.
t5 n e5n dM, water good place. 173-7.
-ta\ among.
yebi* ta% houses among. 171-17.
ne* k'wfit ta* , countries. 157-6.
n c5n ta% good places. 173-6.
ca*na'ta% creeks, creeks in. 82-14; 93-11.
tcihi taS trees among. 171-9. (PL 15, fig. 6.)
5 ye ta% under places. 180-1.
-tc'M«, toward.
t5 tc'fifi*, water toward. 176-6.
cn%ntc'iifi*, my mother toward. 120-11.
-bi«, in.
yebi*, house in. 97-11.
o da* bi*, its mouth in. 128-15; 182-5.
IK* See also the postpositions used with pronouns, p. 39.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Koto Language 25
wa tc'a mi', hole in, 156-12. (PI. 4, fig. 9.)
sak td* bi«, spring in. 115-10.
eie bi*, red mountain, 102-15. (PL 15, fig. 12.)
ts'^l bi*, basket in. 115-10.
kwd*mi% fire in. 110-4.
-bi*', inside.
ya'bi'k', sky in. 101-15. (PI. 15, fig. 15.)
yebi'k', house inside. 99-5. (PL 15, fig. 14.)
td bi'k', water inside. 155-4.
5 ]a« bi'k', its hands in. 114-8.
-bi« un«, toward, in.
ya<bi«M% skyin. 81-2; 99-10.
ye«bi'M«, house in. 110-15. (PL 15, fig. 13.)
-k^wfit*, on.
5 t4U« kVat', its tail on. 162-14. (PL 9, fig. 9; pL 20, fig. 1.)
u sl^ da kVfit', crown of its head on. 76-5.
u de* k'wfit', its horn on. 76-3.
ne* k'wfit', land on. 92-2.
td k'wfif , water on. 82-1.
-u ye, -wi-ye, under.
ea fi ye hfifi, sun under. 75-4.
tefin w! ye, tree under. 97-3.
-tnkgfit, between.
5 na^ tdk g6t, its eyes between. 76-2.
ye tdk gftt, house middle. 142-13. (PL 16, fig, 1).
-L*fit, middle (time or place) .
ne* L«fit, earth middle. 75-3; 104-11. (PL 16, fig. 4.)
ein L*fit, summer middle. 121-14.
taL'fit, oeean middle. 126-8. (PL 16, fig. 7.)
kai L'fit, winter middle. 113-14.
-bun a, before, alongside of.
kwdfi' mCdi a, fire before. 119-16.
-ne«un«, other side of, '*its back towards."
tone* fifi«, water other side. 126-6. (PL 11, fig. 9.)
-un6«, behind.
ne* fl n6«, hill behind. 164-16. (PL 4, fig. 7.)
tefi n5', tree behind. 103-5.
-lai«, on top, ''snmmit, point."
ne' lai', earth top. 161-14.
fi laik', their tops. 132-15.
kio tci« lai'k*, his taU end. 17712.
26 UnwenityofCaUformaPvhlioation$inAm.ArelLafidEthii. [YoL 11
Suffix with Instrumental Meaning
-biiii, with, by means of.
nagibdL, quiver with. 176-16.
ts'al bOL, basket with. 148-2.
tea' htoj, drees with. 166-6.
k'a' bdL, arrows with. 166-7.
k'dm m^ withes with. 167-1.
8uffi4ces of Temporal-Modal Force
-bM, for, will be (usually expresses purpose but sometimes
predictions of the future only).
a^bMy cloud will be. 79-2.
a^bfifi, for elouds. 78-8.
a te n« bM, its liver for. 109-6.
sak to* bim, ''spring will be." 88-4.
-wufi, for.
te'a wMy food for. 123-3.
td wM, water for. 118-4, 123-3.
-hit', -hut, at time of.
eifihit', summer time. 121-5.
eifi hiit, summer time. 155-1. (PL 16, fig. 6.)
djifi hftt, day time. 105-7.
kaihit', winter-time. 121-11.
-fit, at (perhaps a form of the last).
Le« at, night in. 136-1.
-ye, it is (simple affirmation).
ne* ye, country is, 120-14.
cn^ye, my mother is. 120-11.
dd u s^* ji, it is not meat. 134-14.
do L g6c 70, it is not rattlesnake. 177-4.
-un giy it is (affirmation with element of surprise) .
ea M gi, sun it is. 100-7.
-te le, will be.
k'ai t biiL tg le, burden baskets will be. 140-12.
Suffixes of Size, Shape, and Color
-tco, large, an augmentative suffix.
L5* tc5, bunch grass. 94-7.
diic te5, grouse. 72-5.
g%ctcd, redwood (gae, yew). 86-8. (PI. 14, fig. 14.)
ges tc6, elk (ges, deer in other dialects). 71-5. (PI. 14, fig, 15.)
1012] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 27
-tc, -ts, small, a diminutive sufSx also used to form terms of
endearment. Cf . u tc^unts, close by, from -te*un«, by or near.
dftetc, quail. 72-5. (PI. 14, fig. 16.)
Tictc, wolf. 71-6. (PI. 15, fig. 1.)
eteaite, my grandehild. 9716. (PI. 14, fig. 13.)
e 15t8, my dog. 89-14.
-yac, young, small.
8 Idts yac, baby smalL 113-12.
With both diminutives.
n5 nl yaets, grizzly small. 92-5.
ea^na'yacts, creek little. 115-13.
Cf. eyacts, my little one. 182-4.
Cf. seuyaets, stones small. 76-10. (With possessiye prefix fi.)
H3(3s, slender.
de* sdete, spike back. 108-8.
-tel, -toL, wide, flat.
Ld'tel, flat fi8h(f)
Ld* teii, bear grass. 176-17.
ts'finteL, "bone-wide'' turtles. 90-14. (PL 15, f^g. 5.)
Cf. se n toLts, stone flat small. 133-3. (With adjective prefix.)
NOUNS COMPOUNDED WITH NOUNS**
The First Noun qtuUifies the Second
in tee* bafi, deer female. 144-2.
dfis t'e kd ne, madrono berries. 134-17.
td a* bM, "water cloud," for dew. 79-4.
t5 si* dfin, water-head-place. 87-6.
tdbfittcd, water panther. 177-13. (PL 20, fig. 8.)
tcftn w6*, ' * tree teeth, ' ' hook. 158-7.
tcfin si* ts, ''tree head small," pine cones. 115-13, 117-12.
tcfinsfits, ''tree skin," bark. 137-14.
gesna*, salmon eye. 121-12.
k'a* s'fiL tifi*, arrow-bow. 144-9.
With Possessive Prefix for Second Component
ne* fi ta* dfifi, earth tail place. 86-9.
tc* kak' bi ne*, net's back-bone. 119-18.
With the Second Component modifying the First.
Ldnte' genes, "rodent-ears-long," a mouse. 73-10. (PL 2, fig. 1.)
t5 nai wd* nes, ' ' fish-teeth-long. ' ' 86-1.
i« m, 19.
28 University of California Publications in Am, ArcK and Bthn, [YoL 11
NOUNS OOMPOUNDED WITH ADJECTIVES
-n tcao, large.
ne* n tcao, eoimtry large. 97-16.
t5 nai n tcao, fish big. 85-11.
w5* n teas teeth large. 86-5. (PL 4, fig. 2.)
-nc5n, good.
to n od nit, water is good because. 87-10.
-nce«, bad.
ne n ce', land bad (mud springs). 106-2.
-nes, long.
la« nes, "hand long," raccoon. 112-5. (PI. 1, fig. 1.)
L5* neSy grass long. 80-3.
tea nes, wasp. 150-14.
ts'e k'e nects, '' navel long," an eeL 91-2. (PI. 20, fig. 7.)
-ntelts, broad.
kwe* n telts, ''foot broad," a heron. (PL 20, fig. 11.)
da' ya* n tel i tc5, ''mouths are flat large," geese. 158-14.
-n Ldts, stout, rough.
t5nLiits, water rough. 86-6.
-Lgai, white.
ya' L gai, louse white. (PL 15, fig. 8.)
Ldn L gai, woodrats. 73-9. (PL 20, fig. 2.)
naL g! L gai, white duck. 148-3.
seL gai, white stones. 143-4.
-Ltcik, red.
yd* L tcik, beads red. 176-14.
t5 nai L tcik, fish red. 124-15.
-Ltso, blue.
Lo^Ltsd, grass blue. 76-6. (PL 2, fig, 8.)
td nai L ts5, fish blue. 124-15. (PL 20, fig. 12.)
-Lcfin«, black.
t5 L cClfi* kw5t, black water creek. 98-14.
ges L ciifi*, salmon black. 86-2. (PL 15, fig. 10.)
-Lcik, shining.
na* L cik, eye shining. 181-9. (PL 15, fig. 11.)
-dMbai, grey.
ne'dtdbai, (a pine). 86-13. PL 20. fig. 5.)
Letc ba, grey clay. 76-2.
^ulk'iis, brown(t).
L6< dCa k'tm, grass dry. 121-13.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 29
-Ltiik(t)
tta L ttk, leaves die( f ). 121-13.
-tbifiy sharp, pointed.
ri' t bill, " heads sharp, ' ' a bulb. 149-4.
-tc'its, rough.
se tclta, sandstones. 77-9. (PI. 16, fig. 3.)
-Lan, many.
w6*Lafi, "teeth many." 149-1.
The two following probably have descriptive adjectives.
ta dM gai ted, hornet. 151-2.
ta ddL k'Ots, milksnake. 178-9.
NOUNS COMPOUNDED V7ITH VERBS
yicte s'fiL tifi kwtlt, "wolf lies dead stream,'' Ten-mile creek. 173-14.
JO* gtt L6fi, ' ' beads woven. ' ' 176-13.
yo* tcil «ifi, "bead''(f), abalones. 84-12. (PI. 20, fig. 6.)
L6« n«ai, "grass lies,'' grass game. 146-11. (PI. 20, fig. 4.)
ne* te li*, earthquake. (PI. 20, fig. 9.)
n^ kwos tifi, wild cherries. 131-12.
sais'^dilfi, "sand lies place," sandy beach. 125-4.
si«bis«an, "head(f)", head net. 113-8; 147-1.
satsbdLn^t'ai, "skin with it flies," flying squirrel. 122-12.
sne* bfiL gtQ li% "my leg with is tied," my garter. 176-16.
to ka H gits, ' ' water ( f ) ' ', mud-hen. 122-9.
ts6* kwi tlfi, * ' milk it has, ' ' a plant. 149-2.
tcu nal dalts, ' ' tree-run-around, ' ' a bird. 124-5.
tcfimmeLyits, "stick tied with," net stick. 169-5.
tcfln ta^ nac t bats, "tree among(f)". The name of a monster.
181-10.
tcflnktctlfi, "tree (trunk) (f) it has," a kelp. 84-15.
t'^tgfllyde, devil-fish. Contains stem -yds, to pulL 85-13; 124-16.
t'akwilifi, "feathers they have," birds. 88-8.
gac ted k'wftt kwi ya gits, * ' redwood on it runs, ' ' red squirrels. 73-7.
k'ai t buL, ' * hazel( f ) ' ', burden-basket. 135-6.
q6f yo *at8, * ' knee shoots, ' ' blue-bird. 122-9.
ADJEOTIVES AND VERBS USED AS NOUNS*^
yiLkai, morning, days. 82-10; 105-14.
yist'ot, fog. 126-2. (PL 18, fig. 15.)
Cf. 3d gfin t'ot, it is foggy. 121-10.
yis kan, day. (PI. 18, fig. 14.)
17 m, 21. A number of the words here listed have the form of verbs,
but their meaning is uncertain.
30 University of California Publications in Am. ArcK and Ethn, [Vol. 11
Le ddfi'y salt. Stem -don, to be bitter. 85-3.
L tao, blaek oaks. 89-17. (PI. 16, fig. 12.)
L tctiCf dust. 165-1.
naltcCa, white thorn. 91-14. (PI. 16, fig. 10.)
naL c5t, grass-snakes. 124-11. (PI. 10, fig. 8.)
naL tdn*ts, kangaroo-rats. Stem -tdn, to jump. 73-10.
na nin *ai* k'wfit, '4t has horizontal position on," dam on. 168-9.
nadil', ''they hang," sugar-pines. 86-17. (PL 1, fig. 8; pL 19,
H' 1.)
na gal, * * it travels, ' ' moon. 81-4.
na* gi, "it is earned, " or " it carries, ' ' qniver. 147-1.
ndle, deeps(f). Certain mythieal places in the ocean. 125-16.
saktd*, springs. Stem -t5, water. 88-4.
se Un, blood. Stem -lin, to flow. 144-6.
SOL tc'oi, herons. 72-4. (PL 17, fig. 3.)
seL kfit, magnesite beads. 176-13.
seLk'fitdi, kingfishers. 92-17.
sdaitc, "it sits smaU," cottontaU rabbit. 155-12. (PL 18, fig. 13.)
banat'ai, "main one it stands vertical," post. 130-17. (PL 19,
^g, 3.)
del ktlcts, fawn. 108-9. (PL 19, fig. 5.)
dfilnik, whistles. Boot -nl "to speak, to make a noise." 165-7.
dfiltcik, yellow pine. Stem -tcik, red. 86-13.
ta< tsit, low tide. 123-15.
te lafi, whale. 83-15.
te kfis le*, kelp. 85-10.
tyits, sea-lion. 83-11.
t kac ted, pelicans. 72-13. (PL 15, fig. 3.)
t bOL, burden basket. 179-11. (PL 19, fig. 4.) * |
t k5 icts, chestnuts. 89-8. (PL 15, fig. 2.) I
tk'an, ridge. Stem -k'an, to be on edge. 99-3. (PL 9, fig. 8.)
ts'Osnd*, "they are vertical," mountains. 71-2. (PL 19, fig. 6.)
ts'k^Ldfifi, he had walked place. 116-13.
tc'enaLdilL, comb. 172-15.
tc'enes, thunder. 77-12.
tc'ek'as, brush fence. 115-16.
tc' woe, foam. 121-16. (PL 19, tg. 11.)
tc' ga, basket pan. 113-10. (PL 19, fig. 10.)
tcgats'e*, twine (roUed on the thigh). 116-10. (PL 19, fig. 8.)
gun da nit, spring was. 121-13.
kaldac, "it comes up(f)," morning star. 101-13.
kwi yafi, old men. Stem -yafi, to grow, to pass through life. 105-1.
kwfin tfic ka ta, shallow places. 75-2.
kwfinteL, valley. Stem -teL, to be wide, or flat. 91-14. (PL 19,
^g. 12.)
k'itdaye, flowers. 78-6.
k'fis tcL, flat way. Stem -teL, to be wide, or flat. 181-3.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 31
VEBBS WITH INSTRUMENTAL PREFIX USED AS NOUNS.
bALs^Lt^y seed-beater. 113-11.
bOL te q5t; net rope. 117-14.
btlL g^ gas, fire-sticks. 110-11. (PI. 19, fig. 2.)
POLYSYLLABIC NOUNS UNANALYZED*'
adits, grasshoppers. 94-8.
in tee*, deer. 71-4.
! da ki, (a kind of rope). 114-1.
I dakio, WaUaki. 172-8. (PL 17, fig. 1.)
a 'est', pestle. 113-9.
An tetLn, peppemuts. 94-7.
yai in tafi«, mole. 96-6. (PL 20, tig, 3.)
wa te'^, hole through. 78-9. (PL 16, fig. 8.)
la ce*, buckeyes. 94-6. (PL 1, ^g, 2.)
naLgi, dog. 91-9. (PL 2, fig. 3; pL 16, fig. 11.)
na nee, people. 71-7. (PL 16, fig. 13.)
na« e6 k'a, robin. 72-9. (PL 17, fig. 2.)
na tcftl, orphan. 102-6. (PL 10, fig. 5.)
na tc'aitc, swallows. 73-1.
na kofi, clover. 152-5.
ndfiktctifi, tar-weeds. 94-4. (PL 16, fig. 15.)
n6n tc'ftt, strings. 117-13.
nfin ka dM, men. 165-13.
satcM, tan-oaks. 88-9.
sM sCbitc, chipmunks. 73-8.
sfin Lants, a star or constellation. 99-8.
sfil gits, lizard. 97-4.
ca< na*, creek. 79-3. (PL 4, ^g, 6; pi. 17, fig. 4.)
ban yd, turtle-doves. 92-16.
ban sits, sandpipers. 73-2.
bant6«, ocean* 86-10. (PL 17, fig. 5.)
ban ted, mussels. 84-13. (PL 17, fig. 8.)
be lifi, eels. 90-15. (PL 17, fig. 7.)
bel get, spear head. 133-8. (PL 17, fig. 10.)
bel kats, fish-spear. 128-12. (PL 17, fig. 11.)
benic, prongs. 170-5.
bfisbftntc, barking-owls. 92-8. (PL 17, fig. 9.)
baste 15, owls. 72-2. (PL 17, fig. 12.)
bate k'ai«, seagulls. 72-12. (PL 15, fig. 16.)
das tcafi, gopher. 122-6.
da taits, grey squirrels. 73-6.
dateafi', ravens. 72-2.
da tceL, storage bin. 138-2.
ddB, bears. 71-6.
i«m, 16.
32 Univenity of California PublicationB in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
dtdlants, salamanders. 84-4.
dtn daiy arrowheads. 111-4.
ta ka tee, crawfish. 91-2.
tele«, sack. 113-7. (PL 18, fig. 1.)
tfinni, roads.i«» 78-4. (PI. 17, fig. 13.)
tfihnfic, manzanita berries. 94-5.
tsfis na, yellow- jackets. 91-7.
tcaLnly varied robiiis(f). 72-4.
tci lil, screech-owL 92-8.
ton U k'e, slime. 161-12.
tcinnM*, stuffed deer heads. 177-10.
tcitcafi, white oak. 131-11.
tc5 h^a, poison. 163-7. (PI. 18, fig. 6.)
tcfin nfiL tc6ntc, Lewis's woodpecker. 72-8. (PL 19, fig. 13.)
tcfintc'bao, woodpeckers. 72-11. (PL 18, 4.)
tcfin tc' gi ted, pileated woodpecker. 72-8.
tc'a la, sunfiower seed. 138-6. (PL 18, fig. 2.)
to'a h%l, frog. 112-11. (PL 18, fig. 3.)
tclbetcifi, fir. 86-8.
tc'5 la k!, meadow-larks. 72-10.
tc'fintyac, condors. 72-7.
tc'fint'afi, acorns. 88-15.
tc'lis sai*, chicken-hawks. 72-3.
tc'dsts, mill-basket 113-9.
tc'fi be, firs. 90-1.
tc' la ki, sapsuckers. 73-11.
tc'lSlintc, hnmming-bird. 102-12.
tc' naL dfifi, adolescent girL 175-10. (PL 19, fig. 7.)
tc' si tciin, coyote. 72-1. (PL 18, fig. 9.)
tc' kak', net 84-8. (PL 18, fig. 5.)
t'ek5, girls. 111-2. (PL 17, fig. 15.)
g5 ya ni% stars. 74-7. (PL 18, fig. 7.)
k%cldts, old man. 108-2. (PL 18, fig. 8.)
ke bCa, knife. 78-11.
ki tsa*, basket-pot 113-8.
kwiyint, pigeon. 73-12. (PL 18, fig. 10.)
k'illek, boy. 119-7.
k'fin ta gits, jack-rabbits. 73-6. (PL 18, fig. 11.)
PRONOUNS^**
PBB80NAL
The personal pronouns seem originally to have been confined
to the first and second persons, although it is not easy to explain
18a Cf . Hnpa tin, road, m, p. 18.
i«bra, 29.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Langitage 83
all the third persons as demonstratives. There is a simple form,
nominative or accusative; and an emphatic x>ossessive, a dative,
and an ablative of accompaniment, apparently formed by sofiSzes.
First Person Singular
ci, I. 78-14. (PI. 39, tg. 9; pi. 42, fig. 1.)
ci ye«, mine. 141-6. (PI. 22, fig. 2.)
ea, for me. 103-9. (PI. 22, fig. 1.)
cfiL, with me. 187-2.
First Person Plural
ne hifi, we. (PL 5, fig. 8.)
nhiye*, ours.
nhdL, with U8. 125-2.
Second Person Singular
nifi, you. 79-7.
niye*, yours. 117-1.
na, for you. 152-6.
nfiL, with you. 131-6.
Second Person Plural
ndhifi,you. 114-11. (PI. 28, fig. 13; pi. 31, fig. 11.)
n6 hi ye*, yours.
Third Person
biye*, their, hers. 85-4; 88-5.
ba, for it 113-12; 149-12.
bfiL, with it 85-5.
kin, himself. 88-7.
kin yl, himself. 14913.
kifiha% him (only). 130-3.
kiye«, his. 91-9.
kwa*, for him. 110-9.
kwfiL, with him. 91-9.
PERSONAL DEMONSTRATIVES^'
hfifi, he, him.i»« 174-1; 123-16.
hfiL, with hioL 94-13.
ydfi, that fellow. 167-9.
i»m, 31-33.
i»«It appears that a suffix fi renders a demonstratiye personal in its
application. This also appears in Hupa adjective pronouns and numerals.
34 Unweniiy of California Publication$ in Am, Arch, and Eihn. [ VoL 11
DEMONSTRATIVES
hi, the (praetieally an article). 99-6.
hai je, that. 128-12.
ha3ri, those, that one. 171-19. (PL 21, fig. 15; pi. 45, fig. 1.)
Gf. the personal demonstratives hM and hftL aboye.
di,thi8. 74-9. (PI. 24, fig. 15.)
yi, right here. (PI. 21, fig. 6.)
yi bafi, the other side. 133-4. (PL 21, fig. 8.)
The more remote has the vowel 5 or tL with the same initial.
yu i, over there. 100-4.
j6 i, yonder. 100-7.
yd ye, there it is. 182-3.
y6 dfi, over there. 127-14. (PL 21, fig. 7.)
j6 dfl ha*, yonder. 75-3.
yd yi de', far north. 77-1. (PL 21, fig. 5.)
ydk', way. 104-9.
Cf. ySfl, that fellow. 167-9.
INTEBBOOATIVB AND INDEFINITE PBONOUNS'^
These words are usually interrelated in form. There are four
initial syllables : da-, relating to conditions ; dan-, used of persons ;
di-, employed with things and non-human persons ; ta-, which is
used of both time and place. With each of these there are found
three suffixes: -dji (-gi), the simple interrogative, asking which
one of several; -ca, -can (-ca- plus n) with an implication of
wonder in the question ; and c5«, used in affirmations concerning
anything unusual or mysterious.
datyatei, why. 129-10.
dan dji, who. 120-15.
di dji, what 97-14.
ta dji, when, 102-12.
ta dji, where. 182-3. PL 10, fig. 7; pL 22, fig. 7.)
10, fig. 7; pL 22, fig. 7.)
datyac^fi, what is the matter. 114-7.
d^neafiha', who. 144-4.
die^n, what. 79-2.
ta e%n, where. 78-7.
da t ya c5 kwiic, something is wrong. 114*13.
dancdkwtle, stranger. 119-8.
died', something. 99-15.
tacdkwiic, somewhere I guess. 119-1.
t%ccd*, sometime. 135-13.
«oni, 32.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 85
The following are also of interest :
da fin cd, very bad. 122-12.
da ti ea nM, what will be. 85-6.
dae t ya CO de^, if anythiiig is wrong. 166-10.
d^e tin dji, why does it do thatt 130-14.
d^nteod^ something. 167-3.
d^n te ea miifi, how will it bet 78-13.
d^n te od kwde ctlty something wrong I guess because. 115-4.
d^nteg^ how. 130-11.
daja* tin ge, what did they dot 166-4.
da ya*n dji, what they say. 153-14.
d^ 1411 gi, how many. 166-12.
dan ea My who is itf 170-12.
da ni eafi, who is het 97-4.
da hin tei^ what you say. 176-10.
di kwdn di, what kind. 80-4.
dd n k$ hit*, nothing too bad. 128-1.
dddane5% nobody. 99-4.
fa din cd' kwiic, for some reason. 136-8.
ADJECTIVES"
Qualifying adjectives are conjugated after the manner of
verbs. The stems of such adjectives are listed with the verbal
stems. Many adjectives are listed under nouns with which they
form compounds.
PBONOMINAL ADJECTIVES
In addition to the strictly pronominal adjectives such as La^
another, certain similar ones which are not conjugated are
included.
6 wdfi, some. 122-14.
wan t'a% some. 91-10.
wdn, some. 95-6.
La', another, other. 76-3; 79-5.
La mt&, will be many. 78-6.
Lane, much. 120-15.
Lanhit, much. 137-7.
Lan dM, many. 138-8.
L^ t§ le, wOl be many. 173-7.
Lene* ha«, people. 83-4. (PI. 21, fig. 10; pL 37, fig. 13.)
L ta, every way. 129-4.
Lta^ki, kind. 831. (PL 21, fig. 11.)
SI
m, 33.
36 University of California Fub\ication$ in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [YoL 11
BdstCy slender. 123-16.
swdltCy smaU. 116-9.
hand^tta^ last ones. 90-17.
tc5 ji, another. 118-2.
ted ji ha*, again. 80-2.
tc5 ji ta% other places. 149-9.
tV, raw. 109-11. (PI. 11, tg, 4.)
kwttni^n, every. 82-9.
kwiini^fi, many. 114-12.
kwiini4fiha% every one. 130-7.
NUMERALS"
The Athapascan numerals are generally decimal in their ar-
rangement. Kato follow a quinary system as far as ten. This
undoubtedly is connected with the practice of counting the
fingers, six being "one on the other side.'' The Yuki and Pomo
neighbors of the Eato make use of octonary and quinary systems,
respectively. Four n^ka«n^ka«, two-two, has displaced
din kilt which prevails in the other Athapascan dialects nearby.
CARDINALS
La ha', one. 82-5.
n%kka', two. 178-4.
tak', three. 178-6. (PI. 20, fig. 10.)
n^k ka' n^ ka', four. 108-3.
la' sa ni, tve, 165-17.
yi ban La' ha', six only. 140-9.
yi ban n]|k ka', seven. 1661. (PI. 20, fig. 13.)
yi ban tak', eight 103-9.
yi ban n^ ka n%k ka, nine.
la' L ba' fin, ten. 102-14.
la' L ba' fin biL La ha', ten with one.
na dfin la' L ba' fifi, twenty. 178-8.
ta dfin, thirty.
MULTIPLIOATIVSS
tak' dfifi, three times. 165-11.
DISTBIBUnVES
La ha' ta, one at a time. 165-15.
n^ ka' ta ha, two in a place. 108-2.
tak' ta, three at a time. 165-16.
32 m, 32.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 37
DIRECTIONAL WORDS"
These directional words are closely connected with nouns in
their meaning, the second syllable usually being a monosyllabic
name of some direction or cardinal point. They differ from
nouns in requiring a demonstrative prefix and in their use, which
is usually adverbial.
-n^, to the south, perhaps ''up-stream" was its original
meaning.
j6 yi nfik', way south. 75-9. (PL 20, fig. 14.)
hinfik', south. 189-18.
hainfik*, here sonth. 150-14.
hain^'k'a', way south, south along. 86-15; 107-16.
di ntk', south. 75-6. (PL 20, fig. 15.)
-na M, from the south.
jinafifi, from the sonth. 107-9.
hainafifi, from south. 148-9.
-se«, to the west, down hilL
y6^se*, far west. 126-6.
haise', down hilL 106-3.
dise', west, down here. 77-11; 142-8.
-sin tn, from the west.
hai siii fifi, from the west. 78-10.
di sifi fifi, in the west. 80-11.
-de«, to the north, perhaps originally "down-stream."
ydyide*, far north. 77-1.
hi de«, north. 77-1.
hai de' te'fifi', north toward. 115-7.
di de', north. 76-12.
-da« M, from the north.
yi da' fifi, from the north. 75-3.
hai da' fill, from the north. 78-8.
di da' fill, from the north. 74-10.
-dOk, to the east, uphill.
ji dtk% up hilL 180-3.
jSkynt'tkw, far above. 77-3.
hai dfik*, up. 99-2.
di dfik', east 75-4.
»m, 328-330.
38 UfmerHiyofCaUfarniaPvhUeaHofuinAm.AreKandSt1m. [YoLll
-da My from the east, down hill.
hai da {kfi, down MIL 180-5.
dl da fifi, from the east. 101-9.
-ban, the opposite side, particularly of streams.
ji bafi, other side. 133-4. (PL 21, fig. 8.)
haibafi, after that. 111-4.
di bafi, to other side. 105-1.
Cf. Lba« m, both sides. 14410. (PI. 21, fig. 9.)
ADVERBS**
Adverbs are mostly either monosyllables having adverbial
meaning, like k'M, recently, or such elements with demonstrative
and negative prefixes.
PLAGE
inifi, in a eomer. 132-12.
y6k wi t'fikio, far above. 77-3.
j6 k'fifi, way off. 107-5.
ne se k'a, the long way. 140-17.
nes se, is far. 167-2.
nes dfifi, far. 75-6.
nes dfin S, it is far. 140-17.
nesdfifiha^ far away. 86-14.
nfin]cwi3re, ondergroond. 75-8. (PI. 21, fig. 12.)
haktD, right here. 160-1.
hakw^, np there. 182-9.
da*, np. 99-15.
de k'a, here. 79-2.
dl fin, np there. 109-10.
djafiha', here. 97-9.
t ga ma, along shore. 77-1.
t ga mats, by the shore. 155-1.
kfin dfin ne, close. 104-13.
kfin dfinte, nearby. 79-6. (PL 22, fig. 12.)
kwfin nfin fifi, np this way. 85-8.
TIMB
ban dfit, next time. 136-4.
ha oi, long time. 134-8.
haoe* dfifi*, long time. 106-17.
ha oe kwfie, long time probably. 139-1.
haku; dfifi% then. 71-2. (PL 5, fig. 7.)
h5 ta, then. 84-10.
Mm, 328-338.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Koto Language 39
dail% already, long ago. 78-14; 121-13.
dants, BOOH. 136-5. (PL 22, fig. 6.)
dok'Qfi, already, not reeently. 136-7; 175-1.
dd rfifi has long ago. 155-15.
f dn dOfi ha*, all the time. 113-1.
gdnt'e, now. 81-2.
kae bi', tomorrow. 104-9. (PI. 22, fig. 10.)
kwtnfifi, next time. 166-9.
k^, jnst now. 103-8.
k'fin nfifi, before. 97-14.
k'fin dit', before. 137-5. (PI. 22, fig. 11.)
k'fin dfifi, yesterday. 128-7. (PL 22, fig. 13.)
k'ane^fi, this time. 167-8.
k'^tde', soon. 96-4. (PL 22, fig. 14.)
MANNER AND DEGREE
Lakwa, jnst, only. 155-9; 164-11.
La kit, for nothing. 166-9.
Lakwit, anyway. 133-14.
idkts (niikto), slowly. 100-13; 140-16. (PL 21, fig. 13.)
sa^dfifi, alone. 120-16.
sa^dfifiha', alone. 87-7.
sa< dfifi k Va, alone. 172-3.
sfit', little way. 161-5.
st'5*, nearly. 123-8.
e^fi, only. 78-6.
eani, only. 71-2.
ed, too mnch. 82-10.
e5', in vain. 130-9.
e5 n edfi, very well. 109-4.
edfi k^, well. 166-5.
cdfik', weU. 71-1. (PL 22, fig. 3.)
e5fi kwa, welL 181-13.
e5't, in vain. 159-12.
kakio, fast. 93-12.
POSTPOSITIONS"
The following elements when suffixed to nonns or pronouns
make prepositional phrases.'^
-ye, under.
5yeS under. 101-6. (PL 21, fig. 2.)
Oyeta% under places. 180-1.
Mm, 339-343.
M« Cf. also the Loeative SoiBxes of Nonns, p. 24.
1
40 Unwertity of CaUfomia Puhlioations in Am, Areh. and Eihn. [YoL 11
-wakti;, to one side of .
wakw, to one side. 97-4. (PL 11, fig. 1.)
nd* wa ka, about yourselves. 173-2.
ndwaku;, away from us. 178-5.
-lai«, top, end, on top of.
u lai«, its top. 10313. (PI. 21, fig. 3.)
-L, with.
bfiL, with it. 85-5.
kfiL, with him. 91-9.
-na, around, encircling.
d na, around it. 77-2.
-na tao ha^ without the knowledge of.
kto na tao ha*, without his knowledge. (PI. 8, fig. 9.)
fi na tao ha*, not knowing. 156-9.
ndnataoha', without our knowledge. 129-15.
kficnataoha', without their knowledge. 155-8.
-nitc, midway of.
5nite, half-way. 122-15.
5 ni teat, its middle. 162-14.
-n6«, behind.
u n5<, behind it 103-2.
-ne dM, base of.
kin nS diifi, iU base. 182-10.
-bi«, in. (The element may be -i«, b being the pronoun.)
bi«,init. 97-13. (PI. 6, fig. 7.)
di bi<, this in. 90-16.
-dai«, outside of.
5 dai<, outside. 98-4. (PI. 21, fig. 4.)
-duk', up, on top.
ktodOk', top. 127-9.
-ta% among.
bita% among. 107-14.
di ta^ , this plaee. 157-5.
-ttis, over, beyond.
6 tOs, beyond it. 77-12.
Ilw tils, over him. 156-14.
-tukgfit, between
dtiikgfit, between. 160-9.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 41
-tc'iin«, to, toward.
a tc*(tfl«, to himself. 87-7.
5 tc'tlfl', to him. 79-9. (PL 8, fig. 4.)
u te'QfitSy close by. 156-10.
nStc'iifi', to you. 97-7.
Lte'Qfi'y together, toward each other. 104-1.
kir U'iifiS to him. 174-2.
-tc'M a, before, in front of.
fitc'ftfia, before it 153-3; 77-7.
-t'flktt;, above, beyond.
6t*tikw, above, way back. 77-3; 104-11.
-t gfin, around, behind.*'
a te gtH^ around yourselves. 169-4.
-kwa«, for.
kto kwa% for him. 119-1.
ndkwa, for ns. 181-7.
-ke«, behind.
ske*, after me. 97-10.
ske' ha', behind me. 141-8.
-k'e, back, in the opposite direction.
atk'e, back of himself. 86-17.
-k'wut', on (perhaps combined with a demonstrative).
k'wftf, onit. 75-6.
PABTICLES AND INTERJECTIONS^
^te, come on, well. 98-6; 125-7.
abi, stop. 100-1. '
§ he, that is so. 173-14. (PI. 21, fig. 1.)
ii we, O yes. 100-10.
fifi, it was. 182-9.
L'fifi, so it is. 100-3.
na «a«, here. 97-13.
ni i, say. 164-9.
n! Ic, say. 100-3.
n5dd*, n5* do, go ahead, come. 103-7; 115-7.
hen', yes. 82-2. (PL 21, fig. 14; pi. 33, fig. 9.)
d6, no, not 79-4; 100-10. (PL 7, fig. 1; pi. 22, fig. 8.)
tehehei, (laughing). 147-5.
tea*, listen. 182-15.
ka«,welL 76-12.
>• Cf . prefix t gCbi in t g^ nas t gets, he looked back. 132-2.
*T ra, 343.
42 Unwer$iiyofC<aiforniaPuhli<Hitum$iHAm.AreKandEt1m. [Vol 11
VERBS
In Kato, as in other Athapascan dialects, the verbs are usually
complete in their meaning and are really sentences. The
adverbial concepts of place and direction are expressed by pre-
fixes standing first in order. The object and subject pronouns
precede the verbal stem in the order named. The relation of time
in regard to inception, duration, repetition, completion, etc., is
also expressed by prefixes, all of which precede the subject.
Standing between the subject and the stem are modal prefixes
which control to some extent the voices of the verb.
The stems themselves often vary in the quality of the vowel
and in the final consonants in a manner analogous to accent.
These varying forms occur in different tenses. Many of the
stems indicate the character and shape as well as the number of
the object or subject. Some stems are identical with mono-
syllabic nouns. The act itself in these instances seems not to be
named, but is understood or inheres in the entire verb without
an especial element for its expression.
The sufSxes for the most part are subordinating, expressing
the time relations, conditions, and the source of information.
Not only is the material (prefixes, stems, and suffixes) from
which the verbs are made identical, except for regular phonetic
changes, with that employed in Hupa, but many of the complete
verbs are similar.
PREFIXES
First Position
a-. Certain verbs of a sort usually requiring a double object
have this prefix when the direct object does not immediately
precede. These verbs express the doing, saying, and thinking of
special things.^ This prefix forms an indei>endent syllable
except when followed by c, the first person singular.
a ya e! lao, took me up. 158-14.
ane, she said. 152-8.
a nd^ t'e, you are. 139-1.
a dde ji, I boast. 128-1.
a kwl^elaoe, I fixed him. 182-14.
act'eye, I am. (PI. 40, fig. 7.)
2« ra, 90.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Langwige 43
Adverbial
ya«-. Used of motion or position upward or into the air.***
The duration is .12 seconds. There is syllabic union with the
third modal prefixes l and n, perhaps also with c, first person
singular. A form yai- appears the probable result of accentua-
tion.
ya 'ae, he put up. 99-10.
jaL dae bOfiy you must jump up. 82-16.
jail *ai'^ it stood. 156-15.
TakwoLt'a, make him fly. 182-16.
ya'gOLgaly he threw up. 142-3. (PI. 23, fig. 1.)
ii5gfiLg%Ly he threw down. 92-5.
ye'-, yl'-. Used of motion into a house or other partly
enclosed space.^ The form yf- appears to be the result of
accent. Duration of ye' is .25, of yi .18. Syllabic union with
following sounds seems never to take place.
ye nat ya, he went in. 177-13.
jehenyae, come in. 141-9.
yete'gihiTai, she went in. 132-13. (PI. 10, fig. 9; pi. 23, fig. 2.)
ji he d^, yon go in. 97-10; 153-2.
ye gi nai*, they went in. 107-17.
te'enlnai, came out. 164-9.
wai- or wa. Used of position over, at one side of, or near.'*
Duration .12.
wainyai, he went around. 97-3.
wai te' gCbi get, he struck over. 164-2.
wa* fifi l^il, he placed before him. 129-4. (PL 23, fig. 3.)
wa-. Used of motion through an opening or small space.*^
The duration of the syllable is about .27 seconds.
wa Qfi fiifi, she carried through. 180-2.
wa niin t^ bfifi, shall be wind. 80-14. (PI. 23, fig. 4.)
Le-. Used of the position near or movement toward each
other of two or more objects.'* The duration of the vowel is
about .15.
Lei yits, he tied together. 174-15. (PI. 43, tg. 11.)
Le ges *a*, encircled. 82-15. (Pl. 23, fig. 5.)
Left <a', (water) met 83-6.
M«m, 39.
»ra, 41.
M Compare the Hnpa second wa-, m, 44.
Sim, 44.
88 0,44.
44 Universiiy of CaUfamia Publioations in Am, ArcK and Ethn. [YoL 11
Lfin-. Used with verbs meaning to assemble. It is perhaps
related to the last.'*
lAb tee 7a h^t, they came together when. 148-9. (PL 29, fig. 4.)
na-. Used of indefinite movements over the surface of land or
water.'* The ordinary duration for the vowel is .13, but na ca
and naga have .19-.25. There seems to be contraction with o\
the second person plural prefix, and syllabic union with s, second
modal.
na ca«, I will go about. 133-6. (PL 23, fig. 7; pi. 35, fig. 10.)
nagakw^, he had walked. 154-12. (PL 42, fig. 6.)
na< be, ewim (dual imp.) 111-2. (PL 36, fig. 9.)
na^ ke', swim (plural imp.). 172-14. (PL 45, fig. 2.)
na w5^ nic, you played about. 134-17. (PL 8, fig. 5.)
nas 'Ate, he ran about. 134-3. (PL 29, fig. 1.)
nas L^t, he burned around* 79-3.
nai-, na-. Used of horizontal position or motion as across a
stream.*' The duration of nai- is .31, of na- .16.
nai 'ai biUi, it wiU be across, it will have waves. 85-8. (PL 23,
^g. 8.)
nanicge', I will carry you across. 141-4.
na nfifi 'ai, fish-weir, < < it is across. ' ' 133-9. (PL 28, fig. 3.)
na ntln Lat, jump across. (PL 34, fig. 3.)
nandnyai, she started across. 154-2.
naid-, nait-, nad-, or nat-. Used of position or motion at
right angles to a horizontal line or surface.'* The second
syllable begins with d if a vowel follows, with t' if the following
vowel is preceded by a glottal stop, and consists of t if followed
by a consonant. The duration of the vowel is about .17, varying
from .16 to .19.
nai t gftij 'a', he stood up a stick. 116-6.
na ddL 'a* bfifi, let it stand on end. 108-3.
na t gfiL 'a', he stood it up. 76-6. (PL 28, fig. 2.)
na t gflL '^ he stood them up along. 88-13. (PL 26, fig. 8.)
na t'a' bCLn dja', will stand up. 91-17.
na na-. Denoting a movement downward.'^ The duration of
the vowel in the first syllable is about normal (.16), that of the
88 Compare Hupa linyate, they come together, i, 295-1.
84 m, 48.
88 m, 49.
8«ni,51.
8T in, 51.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 45
second syllable shorter, about .12, and probably followed by a
glottal catch.
na na iL d^, he moved it up and down. 150-1.
nanagCQlifi, it runs down. 121-14.
na na g(U dae, he jumped down. 146-8.
na na gdfi gin, he took them down. 145-17.
na na gtlt yai, he came down. 129-11.
na niin dae, come down. (PI. 23, tg, 6.)
n5-. Used of being in or coming to a position of rest on the
ground, and also of reaching other limits of motion.*^ The
average duration of the vowel is .16, varying from .14 to .19.
When followed by c, first person singular, n, second modal in
first person plural, or one of the third modals, it is joined with
them in one syllable.
n6««ac, put it (imp. plu.). 110-11. (PI. 28, fig. 7.)
no nafl %t, he untied half way. 122-15. (PI. 44, fig. 6.)
n5 na ni kats, I feU back. 182-16. (PI. 44, fig. 11.)
n6 nftn yifi, they Hved. 160-12. (PI. 29, fig. 12.)
nd cfiL gaL, throw me. 133-4. (PI. 25, fig. 1.)
n5 ga *ac, he put down. 86-11. (PI. 23, fig. 11.)
ndtc'fintd', water reached (a certain point). 75-1. (PI. 7, Hg. 6.)
ndcge', I carried. 182-1.
non da 'afi, we put down. 172-2.
n51 k'48, they f eU. 152-2.
n5L tifi, he laid him down. 80-6.
no' fi 'an, he placed. 76-3.
nun-. Seems to be used of pressure or impact against a sur-
face. The vowel is short as is usual in closed syllables; from
.06 to .1.
nfiniegaL, let me chop. (PL 42, tg, 7.)
nfin fin dfik k'e*, get up. 100-3. (PI. 44, tg. 8.)
nfinjiLfogfit, she stung when. 156-15. (PI. 26, fig. 3.)
nfin yiL tsfiL, (ocean) beats against it. 86-12. (PI. 41, fig. 2.)
nfin ncL k'ai, he made stick in. 156-14. (PL 45, fig. 9.)
nfin sfiL gal, you beat. 129-10. (PL 42, fig. 8.)
nfin s'fis dfik k'e', he got up. 98-5. (PL 23, fig. 10.)
nfin s'fis tifi, she took him up. 179-14. (PI. 39, fig. 7.)
be-. Used of motion along a vertical or steep surface, as a
tree or hillside.'* The duration of the vowel is .2. It unites
with weak prefixes when they directly follow.
s8 m, 53.
<• Compare me- m, 46.
46 Univenity of Calif omia Publications in Am, ArcK and Ethn. [YoL 11
bee 7a h^t, he elimbed up when. 143-9.
bes gifi, he carried it up. 98-16.
beedUds, lead me up (imp. plu.). 147-6. (PL 6, fig. 1.)
be dtL, let us dimb. (PL 23, fig. 13.
da bes ya', he climbed up. 180-6. (PI. 6, Hg. 4.)
ben t'a td le, you will fly up. 182-11.
becna', I roast it (I lean it against[f]). 168-16.
This prefix seems to be used also in a figurative sense, at
least in one less definite in its meaning.
beL ke<, it is finished. 172-12.
be niL ke* e, I have finished. 78-14.
be dfil «ai«, let us try it. 109-6.
be giin t'eo, he taught. 122-11.
beeyahfit, he climbed up when. 143-9.
teeyahfit, he went because. 118-3.
da-. Relating to a position higher than the ground.^ The
vowel with considerable aspiration is about .18 in duration.
da fin die ge*, I take you up. 141-4. (PL 7, fig. 8.)
da n5 la, she put it up. 181-5.
da bes ya*, he climbed on. 180-6. (PL 6, fig. 4; pL 23, fig. 14.)
dandla, she put it up. 181-5.
n5 la, he put it. 79-13.
ded-, (t-). Used of motion into or position in a fire.** The
duration of the vowel is about .2.
de die t^ I will put in fire. 110-3. (PL 39, fig. 2.)
de dfifi '^ bfifi, you may put in fire. 127-12. (PL 23, fig. 15.)
de t gfin *afi, he put in fire. 157-13. (PL 7, fig. 2.)
ye tc' gfin '^ kw^n, he had put in. 115-14.
dje<-. Used of the splitting or separating a mass into two,
perhaps more parts.*' The duration is .12.
dje* gfiL tal*, he kicked open. 81-15.
dje* gfil tcel, he split open. 129-3. (PL 24, fig. 5.)
dje' giin Vats, he divided. 80-3.
tai-, ta-. Used relating to water or other fluids.** The usual
duration is from .15 to .18, but coming before n or d, it some-
times takes a final n or t and shortens its vowel.
I
40 m, 58.
*i m, 61.
4« m, 61.
*» m, 61.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Koto Language 47
tai *ac bftfi, it (water) will settle back. 85-8.
tai n^y drink. 88-6.
taya'dn^ii, let them drink. 123-6. (PI. 33, fig. 5.)
ta nas t ya, he came ont of the creek. 175-3.
Of. t^ nas dj51', rolled ont of fire. 147-9. (PL 41, fig. 3.)
tate'a^bfiL, prepare (sonp). 123-13. (PL 24, fig. 1; pL 37, fig. 6.)
t^ dfil sfis, we dragged out. (PL 35, fig. 6.)
ta gfiL gal, he threw in water. 90-14.
ya gfiL gal, he threw up. 142-3.
tai-, ta-. Uncertain, seems only to occur with stem -t'as -t'ats,
meaning to butcher.**
taist'ats, he cut np. 144-3.
taU'as, butcher (imp. plu.). 109-4.
tagfitt'ats, they cut up. 175-4. (PL 24, ^g, 2.)
dje« gfin fats, he divided. 80-83.
te*-. Relating to water, but usually to motion into or position
under water.*' The vowel including marked aspiration has a
duration of .16.
te^n5dfigge*, we will put in water. 139-9. (PL 7, fig. 5; pL 24,
fig. 3.)
te^ndl'iits, it ran in water. 174-10.
te^te'gfintal', he stepped in water. (PL 38, fig. 10.)
te^na tc'fiL deo, she washed them. (PL 38, fig. 3.)
te^ n5 nl g^ ne, I put in water. 140-1.
n5 ni gi ne, I put it down. 137-2.
t gun-. Meaning around, back, behind.
t gfin nais '^n, they turned around. 106-2.
t gfin nas t gets, he looked back. 132-2.
nas t gets, he looked around. 99-5.
ts'un-. Meaning away from, in verbs of fleeing.**
ts'finteLdelS they ran off. 165-10; 178-10.
tc'e-. Meaning out of, correlative of ye-, into.*^ The vowel
has a duration of about .12. It unites in first person with c and
in third person with modals n, 1, and l.
tc'e nan La, he jumi>ed out. 142-6. (PL 34, fig. 4.)
tc'e nal 'ac, she takes out. 180-11.
tc'e nCLnyae, come out. (PL 24, fig. 4.)
tc'ent^, he took out. 170-14.
««ni, 62.
*»m, 63.
^ Compare Hupa tsin-, m, 63.
♦Tin, 63.
48 Unwersity of California Puhlicaiiom in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
te'e n gift, he carried out. 98-5.
te'e ku wiU 1^, he was palled ont. 160-6.
te'el gal, he was thrown out. 102-7.
tc'eL t^ btlfi, you must carry out. 104-1.
tc'en jai, he went out. 102-9.
ka-. Used of motion up ont of the gronnd or water and also
np a hill or the sky.** The average duration is .17, but when the
vowel is closed it is about .1.
kaya* c!*, they dug (bulbs). 148-12.
k^l *ai hMf it wiU grow up. (PI. 26, fig. 9.)
kana g(Ul§, he came up (out of water). 175-3.
kanan^', they carried it up (the river bank). 175-4.
ka nac, sun came up. 81-2. (PI. 24, fig. 7.)
kasidel', we came up. 141-2. (PI. 1, Hg. 7.)
ka giil '^ kw^, they had sprung up along. 87-6. (PL 27, fig. 7.)
ka nac biin dja*, shall come up. 99-11.
k'S nac bfin dja', it shall go down. 99-12.
kai-, ka- (kwa-). Used with verbs of searching or looking
for.** The k is strongly aspirated. The duration of the vowel
is normal, .18.
kai n te bfifi, (they) must look for. 173-9.
ka ya' CLn te, they looked for it. 179-6.
kwa nd' td, look for it. 164-11. (PI. 24, fig. 6.)
ka ktc; n5< te, look for him. 160-1. (PL 39, fig. 1.)
ko, kwun-. Used of general conditions, as of the weather.'®
There seem to be two forms : kwiin- is very short, .06, and k6-, .12.
kdwfinyan, it grew. 166-7.
kdwiinniUi, it (ground) jarred. 177-14.
k5wfinsfil, it was hot. (PL 1, fig. 5.)
kd wiin teL, level. 106-6.
dd k5 gis ifi, one couldn 't see. 81-1. (PL 24, fig. 13.)
kwfin teL td lit, it was becoming flat. 107-3. (PL 27, fig. 2.)
kwfin sat, deep water. 74-10. (PL 34, fig. 11.)
kwfin I4fi, it is finished. 77. (PL 22, fig. 15.)
k5 wfin sQl, it was hot. 81-2.
gfin siiL, it became warm. 96-4.
ko-, kwflt-. Meaning down, or down hill.'*
kd tc' gfil 'fits, they ran down. 153-9.
kwfit tc' giin yai kw^, he had come down to. 116-5. (PL 24, fig. 9.)
48 Compare Hupa xa-, ni, 56.
40 Compare Hupa xa-, m, 66.
•0 Hupa x6-, m, 94.
»i ra, 57.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Koto Language 49
kwHn-. Used with a stem -yot, the verb as a whole meaning
to pursue. The vowel has a duration of .09.
kwiin t gi ydt, they pursued him. 145-14.
kwCbi till 75t, they ran after him. (PI. 30, fig. 13.)
kwCbiyaydl, they followed. 179-8.
kwa-. Seems to be used with the meaning of ' ' manner like. ' '•*
The duration varies from .08 to .12. The glottal stop is usually
present.
kwaMa, yon (plu.) did. 109-4.
kwaL i mftfiy yon mnst do it. 136-2.
kwaL ifi, he did. 129-4.
kw^ *i ne, I always do that. (PI. 28, fig. 12.)
dikwa«Lsifi, he did this way. 7912. (PL 24, fig. 15.)
eofik' kwa< lao, he did weU. Gf. 104-6. (PL 22, fig. 3.)
kwunye'-.^ Under the ground or water. The first vowel is
short, .06; the second syllable ends in an aspiration which may
be identical with ye' on p. 43 above.
kwfin ye 1 dfiL kwfic, underground we will go. 138-10.
kwfin ye dfil tfie tel, we will bnry it. 115-8.
kwCbi ye gfil lat, it has sunk. 174-12. (PI. 24, fig. 8.)
kwfin ye hi dfiL td le, we will go (underground). 140-15.
tl dfiL tg le, we will go. 136-5.
kV. Of severing as in biting and cutting."'
k'e te' fis fats, he cut. 146-11.
- k'e te'iin y^ kw^, bitten off. 161-7.
k'e tein nac bM, yon must bite off. 101-7.
k'e-. Apparently means down, used only of setting of heavenly
bodies.
k'e nae bfin dja', it (sun) shall go down. 99-12.
k'e nin yae bfifi, you must go down. 101-15.
Deictic^
The third person of the verb does not have a subjective prefix
of the sort and in the position found in the first and second
persons, but is marked by the absence of such a prefix. In many
cases, however, a prefix with demonstrative force is found.
The singular subject when indefinite or not named in con-
nection with the verb is referred to by tc'-. This follows the
6« Hupa xa-, ra, 77.
Mm, 85.
Mm, 99.
50 Unwersiiy of CaUfamia Publications in Am, Areh. and Ethn, [VoL 11
adverbial but precedes the first modal prefixes. Usaally it forms
or begins a syllable which contains no vowels. A following
consonant often seems to close the syllable.
tc'Asqdt, he speared it. (PI. 8, fig. 8.)
tc'iiB t'6k', he flaked. 156-7. (PL 11, fig. 8.)
te'nneLjil', she eats up. 180-9. (PI. 1, fig. 9.)
te' nes tifi, he lay down. 175-11. (PI. 5, fig. 2.)
tc'niinyai, he came there. 142-14. (PL 25, fig. 6.)
te'n ne gfiL <ifi«, he looked at it. 156-16. (PL 25, fig. 12.)
te' sin fifi gi, he is standing. (PL 26, tg. 2.)
te't teL bafi, he walked lame. 133-6. (PL 24, fig. 14.)
te't teL bfiL kw^, he had hung up. 176-3. (PL 27, fig. 8.)
te'q^ ja* ni, she was walking they say. 93-12. (PL 2, fig. 5.)
tc'ganyic, he broke it. 7912. (PL 10, fig. 3.)
ye tc' gftnyai, he went in. 97-11. (PL 10, fig. 9.)
What seems to be this prefix was often recorded ts'-.
ts'fiL san, he saw him. 97-4.
ts'fis H«, he tied. 145-8.
ts' sifi, stood. 75-10.
With no apparent distinction in meaning s'- was frequently
heard in place of tc', and ts'.
s'fis ji', he made a house. 168-7. (PL 30, fig. 9.)
s'fis lifi*, he became. 84-11. (PL 32, fig. 3.)
s'fis tc'afi, he shot it. (PL 41, fig. 7.)
niin s'ds dfik k'e', he got up. 98-5. (PL 23, fig. 10.)
nfin s'fis tm, he picked him up. 179-14. (PL 39, fig. 7.)
A subject which is named, or the last mentioned of two or
more nouns, is referred to by yi-. This often unites with the
third modals.
ye yi gfin *^, came in. 130-16.
yiLB%n, he fonnd« 184-14.
yiLsfit, (water) broke. 75-3.
yis t'^ts, he cut it. 162-10.
niin jiL t'5 gfit, when he stung. 156-15. (PL 26, fig. 8.-)
yi n§l ifi', one man looked. 165-11.
tc'nneLin^ he looked. 88-16.
The plural and the dual when not distinguished by the stem,
have ya«- in the position occupied by the other deictic prefixes.*'
ya'n ya« ni, they said they say. 82-11. (PL 4, fig. 4.)
be ya'L «ai», they tried it. 85-2. (PL 28, fig. 5.)
taya< dn^fi, let them drink. 123-6. (PL 33, fig. 5.)
ka ya' fin te, they looked for it. 179-6.
kafintS, she looked. 114-9.
ss m, 99.
1911] Ooddard: ElemenU of the Kato Language 51
The deictic prefixes tc'-, yi-, and ya«- occur not only referring
to the subject but to the object, in which case they are found in
all persons of the verb. The Hupa prefix corresponding to tc'-
when used of the object is k- or ky, giving evidence of separate
origins for forms now indistinguishable in Kato.'^«
te'eL na'y roast. 109-6.
te'ic t'a te le, I will make. 156-5. (PL 40, fig. 5.)
tc'6* y§fi, you (plu.) eat. 148-6.
te'd* siit, pound. 110-5.
tc' w6< bftL, carry it (plu.). 110-15. (PI. 37, fig. 4.)
yiste'^fikw^, who shot. 141-12.
yigfinyafi, (they) ate it. 113-16.
te' ofi gi la n§, I went after. 136-10.
to dn £^ la ne, water I brought. 137-1.
Objective
The object, except when of the third person and definitely
named, is incorporated in the verb, occupying a position between
the deictic prefixes and the first modals. These weaker forms of
the pronoun are found also as possessive prefixes with nouns;
first person singular c-, first person dual and plural n5-, or
n h-, second person singular n-, second person plural n5- or n h-,
third person singular kti;-, third person plural ya« kti;.
In the case of verbs of speaking with the stem -nl, -n, the
pronoun is combined with l, "with," and precedes the deictic
prefixes. The pronoun also precedes the prefix ga-, wa-, meaning
"to,** of which it is considered to be the object rather than that
of the complete verb.
efhi sOb e, (nobody) sees me. 176-1.
endLifi', look at me. 103-9.
egiyal, I am sleepy. 164-4. (PL 29, fig. 7.)
nd* eOL gaL, throw me. 133-4. (PL 25, fig. 1.)
be ed* Ids, lead me up. 147-6. (PL 6, fig. 1.)
te'end' nMane, he kiUed us. 117-6. (PL 25, fig. 4.)
n he dL ka kwie, we wiU pass the night 105-3. (PL 27, fig, 10.)
nhdctge*, let me see you. 142-6. (PL 43, fig. 2.)
ne 6 dfifi, you will die. 177-4.
da< n die ge*, I take you up. 141-4. (PL 7, fig. 3.)
kwniLifi*, she looked at him. 134-2. (PL 9, fig. 5.)
Gf . cQOj te'm, he asked me. 182-3.
e gaL teds, give me. 97-13.
Mm, 84.
52 Univeraity of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Bthn. [YoL 11
First Modal
6, — There are a few verbal stems which seem to require this
prefix, but it has not been possible to isolate it sufficiently to find
its meaning. Its position is after the objective and before the
following prefixes.
5c 1^% I will get 137-2. (PI. 24, fig. 11.)
dHgdc, look at them (imp. pin.). 164-9. (PL 25, fig. 13.)
nhdctge', let me see you. 142-6. (PI. 43, Hg, 2.)
tc'o na gdt giie, he looked back. 87-13. (PI. 43, fig. 4.)
te'dL yi kw%n hfit, he had named when. 117-12.
na-. With an iterative force indicating that the act is repeated
or the direction is reversed."^
nas K«, he tied up. 145-7. (PI. 32, fig. 6.)
nas diil Hn ng, we have got back. 95-12. (PI. 3, fig. 6.)
nS na ni kats', I f eU back. 182-16. (PI. 44, fig. 11.)
tc'e nan La, he jumped out. 142-6. (PI. 34, fig. 4.)
tc'e na gfit dac, he came out again. 149-13. (PI. 37, fig. 10.)
ka nagftll^, she digs out. (PI. 81, fig. 1.;
nas lifi', it became (again). 107-8.
slifi*, it became (first time). 76-9.
t-, te-. With a distributive or progressive force as regards
the act itself, its object or subject.** The form te- is found in
tenses expressing definite action. In other cases the vowel ii,
short and weak, is found, or the vowel is that required by a
following prefix.
ti dOL, let us go. 141-6. (PI. 88, fig. 2.)
tficge«, I wiU carry. 135-4. (PI. 8, fig. 4.)
n td laL, let him sleep. (PI. 31, fig. 8.)
tc' tdL k'^ dja', let him drop acorns. 129-8. (PI. 10, fig. 4.)
tfit bta, it rains. 74-4. (PI. 86, fig. 12.)
te siL tc51«, I stole. Cf . 141-15. (PI. 42, fig, 1.)
tc't te gfis tei% nearly daylight; the east was reddening. (PL 41,
fig. 12; pi. 8, fig. 2.)
tc't te 16s, he led. 175-2. (PL 32, fig. 10.)
d5 ha« tc't teL kfit, they did not go. 167-17. (PL 45, fig. 7.)
tc't teL bafi, he walked lame. 133-6. (PL 24, tg, 14.)
n tes laL ya* ni, he went to sleep they say. 83-4. (PL 31, fig. 10.)
tc'tes yai, he went. (PL 29, fig. 2.)
tc't tes de 15, they went on. 108-12. (PL 38, fig. 1.)
tc't tes gift, he carried. 101-9. (PL 43, fig. 8.)
»T m, 67.
»8 ra, 78.
1912] Goddard: Blemenia of the Kaio Language 53
A prefix consisting of d-, the syllable completed by other
elements, frequently occurs. No meaning has been discovered.
It is, however, required by prefix de-, relating to fire, and na-, to
be perpendicular.
na del tea miiii, they shall eat. 85-5.
nadeLgalkw^n, he had poured in. 125-13. (PL 42, Hg, 12.)
na des bil% he sprinkled. 123-2. (PI. 23, fig. 9.)
na de giit tsan, they heard again. 107-6.
na die tea, let me eat. (PI. 24, fig. 12.)
na dSL «a«, pile up. 103-11.
na doL 'a' bM, let stand on end. 108-3.
de dM *%c, you put on the fire. 131-9. (PL 23, fig, 15.)
-he, -h-. A prefix with he- or h- follows ye'- (yi), in, na-,
back, and stands by itself. It has not been possible to assign any
meaning for it.
yi he *%e, take them in. 113-4.
jeheLa, come in. 143-1.
yi he dfiL, you go in. 97-10.
ya' hes gifi, they earned it. 129-14.
nai hes 'tfi, they took it baek. 107-10.
na hae g^t, I will untie it. 79-1.
na hes le oe, it swam along. 128-8.
na he sftn t ya de*, if you go back. 187-10.
na he siL '(its kwafi, I ran back. 182-6.
na hdn das, you go back. 120-12.
lu tes gin, she carried them. 135-7.
ka hes di ifi', we will look. 173-17.
Second ModaP^
There are a few verbs which have the second modal prefixes
throughout, but in the greater number they do not occur in the
indefinite present. It is in these few present tenses without other
prefixes that the force of these second modals is most clearly
seen. It is quite clear in these forms that n- indicates comple-
tion, s- progression, and g- inception of the act or state. In the
great majority of verbs one of these three prefixes is required in
the definite or past tense; in most cases, in fact, it is by the
presence of one of these second modals that the definite tense is
distinguished from the indefinite. They are regularly used with
»» Cf . Hupa W-, HI, 95.
54 Universiiy of CaUfomia PubUeationM in Am, Arch, and Eihn, [YoL 11
certain adverbial prefixes without much regard to their mean-
ing.**
These second modals directly precede the subjective prefixes
in the first and second persons and the third modals in the third
person with which they form syllables. The progressive s-, how-
ever, may stand alone in the syllable, be joined to the stem, or
close a syllable of which a first modal is the initial.
g-, in a few verbs seems clearly to have an inceptive force;
in others it seems to occur regularly with certain adverbial pre-
fixes with which its tie seems to be formal rather than logical.
gi d{iL, we will go. 96-13.
giifi eL, you cany. 187-13.
gdc caL, I walk. 163-10.
ya« gftLgal, he threw up. 142-3. (PI. 23, flg. 1.)
ye< tc' giin yai, he went in. 132-13. (PI. 23, fLg. 2.)
to gilt fats, he butchered. 175-4. (PL 24, fig. 2.)
dje* gOL tcel, she split open. 129-3. (PI. 24, fig. 5.)
kwiinye' gCQlat, it sank. 174-12. (PI. 24, fig. 8.)
kwdt tc' giin yai, he went down. 116-5. (PI. 24, fig. 9.)
gOL teat, he shouted. 165-9. (PI. 25, flg. 10.)
gClnnes, it became long. 87-1. (PI. 25, fLg. 8.)
S-. Verbs employing s- are usually of acts or states which con-
tinue for some time.
n da ye, I sit. 140-7.
si tine, I lie. 175-16.
sgin, it was. 138-18.
st^n, lay. 176-18.
stifi, lay. 100-2.
sta, he sits. 123-7.
stbi da, you live. 79-7.
be ne siL git de, I am becoming afraid. 180-15. (PI. 6, fig. 2.)
bi' sta, he was sitting in. 132-3. (PI. 6, fig. 7.)
tc'ds li*, he caught in a noose. 108-4. (PI. 1, fig. 6.)
tc'fis qot, he speared it. 128-18. (PI. 8, fig. 8.)
kandel*, we came up. 141-2. (PI. 1, fig. 7.)
eo Examples of aU three of the second modal prefixes may be seen on
▼, 188. In line 14, mgine, I bring, occurs without a prefix. In the next
line it occurs in the same form with the prefix n5. In both of these the
completion of the act is clear. In line 15 g occurs in d5 ha' ge gin, she did
not bring it in. The inceptive force is not particularly clear, but the
statement may well mean that she did not begin the carrying. The fol-
lowing line has s and the stem without other prefixes, sgin, it was, and
here the meaning is clearly that of remaining in position with no refer-
ence tu the beginning or end of the act.
1912] Ooddard: ElemenU of the Kato Language 65
n-. Seems to be exactly parallel in its use with g- above,
haying however the opposite meaning, completion.*^
ni ja 76, 1 came there. 186-17. (PI. 29, fig. 6.)
nigine, I bring. 138-14. (PI. 43, fig. 8.)
nd' 'ac, you (plu.) put it. 110-11. (PI. 28, fig. 7.)
na nim <ai, a fish-weir (it is across). 133-9. (PI. 28, fig. 3.)
ii6< «ac, you (plu.) put it. 110-11. (PI. 28, fig. ^)
beniLke'e, I have finished. 78-14. (PI. 23, fig. 12.)
tc'nnoLyoL, let it blow. 80-13. (PI. 30, fig. 11.)
te'n nOl kfit, they came. 154-12. (PL 45, fig. 6.)
tc'niinTai, he came there. 142-14. (PL 25, fig. 6.)
Subjective
The subjective prefixes are, with some exceptions, those used
with nouns and postpositions. They stand between the second
and third modal prefixes. In the third person the subject is
referred to, if at all, by deictic elements.
The first person singular has two prefixes. In the indefinite
tense c- is used. It is evidently connected with ci, the inde-
pendent pronoun.**
ficyit, I wiU make a house. (PL 30, fig. 8.)
fie tei 06, I cried. 140-6. (PL 8, fig. 6.)
6c l4fi% I wiU get. 137-2. (PL 24, fig. 11.)
na ea«, I go about. 133-6. (PL 35, fig. 10.)
nftc *ine, I saw it. 137-1. (PL 28, fig. 10.)
bee «ai% I wUl try it. 1099. (PL 5, fig. 5.)
bee na«, I will roast. 168-16. (PL 33, fig. 2.)
da'ndicge*, I wiU pick you up. 141-4. (PL 7, fig. 8.)
tftc ge*, I wiU carry. 135-4. (PL 8, fig. 4.)
tc'ic t'a te le, I will feather arrows. 156-5. (PL 7, tg. 9.)
kw%e ^i ne, I always do that. (PL 28, fig. 12.)
nahficda, I will go back. 132-8.
na hiin dac, go back. 115-7.
The definite tense has the vowel i, with no known connection
with an independent pronoun form.*'
nijaye, I came there. 136-17. (PL 29, fig. 6.)
nigine, I bring. 138-14. (PL 43, fig. 8.)
nd na ni kats', I f eU back. 182-16. (PL 44, fig. 11.)
a 71 ne, I stand. (PL 25, fig. 7.)
si ti ne, I lay. 175-16. (PL 39, fig. 9.)
•1 m, 95.
•2 Compare Hupa -iuw, -uio, and -w, m, 97.
•9 m, 100.
56 UniverHty of Calif amia Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
CO* ^ la Ge, I fixed it good. 76-12. (PI. 31, fig. 5.)
ddyihe* e, I am tired. 98-1. (PL 36, fig. 6.)
be ne siL get de, I am getting afraid. 130-15. (PI. 44, fig. 3.)
te 8iL tcdl*, I stole. (PI. 42, fig. 1.)
81 ti ne, I lay. 175-16. (PI. 39, fig. 9.)
stifi, she lay. 100-2.
The first person dual and plural has a syllable immediately
before the stem beginning with d. The vowel is the weak short
<i followed by the third modal prefix when it is present, surd 1
becoming sonant. In its absence the initial of the stem is taken
over.**
n%n dfil 'a', we will make a dam. 163-11. (PI. 28, tg. 1.)
nadiUyic, let us rest. 140-18. (PI. 30, fig. 5.)
doyidehe* e, we are tired. 116-17. (PI. 36, fig. 8.)
dd dCa siis he, we did not see. 116-18. (PI. 26, fig. 7.)
te'nSdiigge*, we will put in water. 189-9. (PI. 24, fig. 3.)
ka' dat tca«, well, let us cook. 149-7. (PL 25, fig. 11.)
When the stem of the dual and plural is different from that
of the singular, instead of the prefix d- the first person in all
tenses has !-, not to be distinguished in sound from that found
in the first person sin^ar in the definite tense.
bg diiL, let us climb. (PL 23, fig. 13.)
ti dfiL, let us go. 141-6. (PL 38, fig. 2.)
ka si del', we came up. 141-2. (PL 1, fig. 7.)
The second person singular has -n, undoubtedly connected
with the independent pronoun nin, completing the syllable which
precedes the stem. It appears to be dropped before the third
modals 1, l, and d.**
Mqdt, spear it. 128-12. (PL 44, fig. 7.)
naniin dac, come down (imp.). (PL 23, fig. 6.)
de diln «%c, put on the fire (imp.). 127-12. (PL 23, fig. 15.)
tc'enOnyac, come out (imp.). (PL 24, fig. 4.)
Hl tci, make it. 79-8. (PL 41, fig. 8.)
nOn siiL gal, you hit. 12910. (PL 42, fig. 8.)
tc'iiLdiik, crack it. 138-2. (PL 38, fig. 8.)
k'wiin nCa Wc,«« put it on. (PL 31, fig. 7.)
tc'dnyafi, you eat. 125-7. (PL 29, fig. 13.)
tcV y%fi, you (plu.) eat. 148-6. (PL 29, fig. 10.)
The prefix appearing in the second person dual and plural is
M m, 98.
w ni, 98.
^ n assimUated to the following 1.
1912] Goddard: EUmenU of the Kato Language 57
-o% in which the aspiration is quite marked. The third modal l
completes the syllable when present. In certain cases the vowel
seems to be contracted, resulting in aspirated a.
nate'd^ Lo, set snares. 108-2. (PI. 25, fig. 5.)
n W 1%L, go to sleep. 110-16. (PI. 31, fig. 11.)
be CO* las, take me np. 147-6. (PI. 6, fig. 1.)
tate'd* boL, make sonp. 123-13. (PI. 24, fig. 1.)
tc'6« y%fi, you (plu.) eat. 148-6. (PI. 29, fig. 10.)
dLk'afi, make a fire. 103-7. (PI. 3, fig. 7.)
na COL na bfifi, you must doctor me. 166-10. (PI. 33, fig. 4.)
nesoLy^, you ate up. 136-16. (PI. 24, fig. 10.)
tc'nnSLt'^, cut them. 166-15. (PI. 40, fig. 11.)
6Hgfic,«T look at them. 164-9. (PI. 25, fig. 13.)
na* be, swim. 111-2. (PI. 36, fig. 9.)
Third Modals"^
6. — ^When it is desired to convey a command or permission to
a third person 5 is found directly preceding the prefixes discussed
below. By its logical limitation it can only be used in the third
I>erson«
tc'og%e, let him chew it. (PI. 5, fig. 6.)
tc' toL k'as dja«, let him drop it. 129-8. (PI. 10, fig. 4.)
tc'dL tci dja*, let him make. 140-2. (PL 27, fig. 6.)
she dLkakwic, we will spend the night probably. 105-3. (PL 27,
fig. 10.)
tc'nnoLyoL, let it blow. 80-13. (PL 30, fig. 11.)
ntdl%L, let him sleep. (PL 31, fig. 8.)
taya'dn^, let them drink. 123-6. (PL 33, fig. 5.)
d t yats, let it snow. 93-5.
A number of prefixes occur between the subjective prefixes
and the stems. In the case of only one of these, l, is it ever pos-
sible to discover any meaning or force imparted by it. Certain
stems seem always to be preceded by t or d and others by one
of the other third modals.
It would seem that l in a few cases has a transitive force,
since the same stems when they occur without it have intransitive
meaning. In many other cases it is impossible to observe the
transitive meaning because the real force of the stem itself is not
api)arent.
The stem -t§L, -t^l«, referring to movement of the feet has
•7 5 is a prefix, see p. 52.
•a ni, 34.
58 University of California Pvblicatians in Am. Arch. and Ethn. [ VoL 11
L when transitive and is without it when used of walking or
standing.
na dn gdL t^L, he kicked ont. 89-7.
nodiln^L, you step. 82-1.
ndtgdnt^lS stood. 82-8.
The stem -tin, -tie, used of persons, animals, and things of
animate origin, has l when transitive or when used of the dead
or sick, but does not have l otherwise.
s'tLLtin, he sick lay down. 158-4.
ndL tifi, he laid him down. 80-6.
stifi, lay. 100-2.
ndUic, lie down (plu.). 96-13.
It seems impossible to distinguish fully between the use of
L and 1. The latter is used always in the first person plural and
the former in the second person plural. This difference is almost
certainly due to phonetic causes. Occasionally 1 seems to be used
of the passive but it may be that these passives belong to a set of
forms with 1, neutral in force, that seem to exist for many or all
verbs with l.
no wil k'as, fell. 1521.
tc* t6L k'v dja«, let him drop. 129-8. (PL 10, fig. 4.)
gCQ k'^, a fire was. 108-2. (PI. 45, fig. 10.)
gfils^n, it was found. 83-13.
But compare giiltc^t, they shouted. 114-3.
gdUiitcat, they (elk) shouted. 165-9.
gCQtcifi, they made. 178-3.
gfiLtcifi, were made(t). 162-8.
On the other hand, the many transitive verbs treating of
the movement of objects classified by the stem as to shape and
number, do not have l, except -tcos, relating to flat flexible
objects.
A number of Kato verb stems are always preceded by t. The
iterative prefix, na-, requires t in the same position. It is pos-
sible that t also has an iterative force in all cases.
dHgiltc, look at them. 164-9. (PI. 25, fig. 13.)
n hoc t ge*, let me see you. 142-6. (PI. 43, fig. 2.)
wfin gUt t yac, some became old. 107-11. (PI. 30, fig. 6.)
bfiL tc' gilt t yifi, he doctored. (PL 30, fig. 3.)
do ha' ka non t y^fi, do not be ashamed. 141-8. (PI. 30, fig. 2.)
tetbn«, it rained. 81-1. (PL 36, fig. 18.)
tc' on t gets', he looked at them. (PL 43, fig. 5.)
yenagfitya, he went again. 99-4.
tc'e na giit dac, he came up again. 149-13. (PL 10, fig. 6.)
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Koto Language 59
When L and t (due to preceding na) both occur, the l pre-
cedes the t.
naheLtk^t, they went baek. 163-6.
nagQltbafi, he limped along. 138-13.
STEMS
The verbal stems of Eato in many cases have two forms
differing phonetically. The present usually has the shorter and
weaker form.** In a number of cases the variation in the form
of the stem is due to what appear to be reduced sufBxes -n, -1 and
-L, and -c. It is possible that the glottal stop (<) which seems in
some cases to characterize the definite past is also a remnant of a
sufl8x.«»»
Some stems phonetically identical have no discoverable sim-
ilarity in meaning. Since the complete verbs built upon these are
usually quite different, no confusion arises. It is possible that a
number of these could be shown connected in meaning if the
history of the language were known.
-«ai«, -«a«, to have position.^®
bee *ai«, I wiU try it. 109-9. (PI. 5, fig. 5.)
ka l«a*, it sprang up. 76-10. (PI. 9, tg, 1.)
Le gee 'a*, it was encircling. 82-15. (PI. 23, Hg, 5.)
nai 'ai bOfi, it wiU be across. (PL 23, fig. 8.)
di «iin es *a*, up there in a row. 109-10. (PI. 28, fig. 4.)
-«^, -«^c, to transport or give position to round objects.^^
det gdn ^Qfi, he put in the fire. (PI. 7, fig. 2.)
no ga '4C, he put along. 86-11. (PI. 23, fig. 11.)
de dfifi '^, put on the fire. 127-12. (PI. 23, fig. 15.)
n6« «ac, put it (plural). 110-11. (PI. 28, fig. 7.)
•• These are discussed above, p. 18.
^••In many cases it is difficult or impossible to establish the exact
form of the stem. There are several with endings -c and -n as -tc'an
and te'ac, to shoot; -tcan and -tcic, to leave. It seems probable that -c
is a suffix. It may be that -n is also a suffix and that the stem ends in
a YOweL If the -n belongs to the stem its disappearance before c would
occasion no surprise. There are several stems, however, which have the
simpler form occurring. In both Hupa and Kato the stem meaning to
carry on the back has the forms: -ge', -gfic, -geL, -gin (Kato); -we, -wuv;,
-weL, -wifi, -wen (Hupa).
TO in, 203.
71 m, 206. This is probably the stem above to which -fi and -c are added.
60 Unwergiiy of California Pvblieation$ in Am, Arch, and Ethn. [VoL 11
-al«, -aL, to chew.^*
tc' gCbi al^ 7a' Hi, he chewed it they say. 109-7. (PI. 26, fig. 4.)
na te' aL, he was chewing. 143-3. (PI. 41, fig. 5.)
-ate, -ac, to walk, to crawl.^*
ta tc'ClL ate e kwa n^, (tnrtles) have eome oat of water. 95-8.
tiU ac bi!Lfi, (turtles) must walk. 121-4.
tc'ttfilacb^, (crawfish) mast walk. 121-4.
-«Il, -«il«, to sit (plural only).
nd'il, yoa stay. 168-1.
tc'nfifi «a«, they sat down. 170-8. (PI. 28, fig. 9.)
no^'ilbfifi, yon most stay. 105-2. (PI. 28, fig. 8.)
-«in«, to look.^*
n dOl *ifi«, let us look. 168-1. (PI. 3, fig. 3; pi. 28, fig. 11.)
k«;niLin«, he looked at him. 134-2. (PI. 9, fig. 5.)
ddkdgisifi^ one couldn't see. 81-1. (PI. 24, fig. 13.)
ya tc' k«; neL ifi% they saw him. (PI. 25, fig. 3.)
tc'n ne gOL «ifi% he looked at it. 156-16. (PI. 25, Ag. 12.)
nee «ifi« t§le, I wiU look. (PL 27, fig. 8.)
nac nne, I saw it. 137-1. (PI. 28, fig. 10.)
-«in«, to do."
kwac 'i ne, I always do that. (PL 28, fig. 12.)
kwaLifi*, you (plu.) do that. 113-4. (PL 28, fig. 13.)
-•iits, to run, to move aimlessly.^*
nas 'fits, he ran about. 134-3. (PL 29, fig. 1.)
-•fits, to shoot."
te 'fits, he shot along. 144-9.
-yai, -ya, -yac, to goJ^
dabesya', he climbed up. 180-6. (PL 6, fig. 4; pi. 23, fig. 14.)
ye< tc' gfinyai, he went in. 97-11. (PL 10, fig. 9; pL 23, fig. 2.)
tc'e nfin yac, come out. (PL 24, fig. 4.)
kwfit tc' gfin yai, he went down. (PL 24, fig. 9.)
tc'nfinyai, he came there. 142-14. (PL 25, fig. 6.)
te'nfinyahfit, when he came. (PL 26, fig. 6; pL 29, fig. 8.)
tc'tesj^, he went. 116-9. (PL 29, fig. 2.)
Lfin tes yai, they came together. (PL 29, fig. 4.)
ca k'efi yai, sun went down. (PL 29, fig. 5.)
niyaye, I came there. 136-17. (PL 29, fig. 6.)
T2ra, 206.
7»ni, 209.
T*ra, 209.
75 in, 211.
76 in, 212.
7T in, 211.
78 in, 212.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 61
-yal, relating to sleepiness. Used with person affected as
object.
egiyal, I am sleepy. 164-4. (PI. 29, fig. 7.)
e^yalS, I am sleepy. 114-10.
-yan, -yac, -y^ to grow, to become old.^*
nesyanl kwan%fi, it had grown.
wdngattyae, some became old. 107-11. (PI. 30, fig. 6.)
k5 wi y^, they were growing. 88-15.
-yan, to like (used with possessive prefix and -dj!<, heart).
d5 kw dji yan, he didn 't like. 91-7.
dd s tei kio yan t&gi,I don 't like him. 142-16.
-yan, to clear off.
nifi y%iL kw%fi fifi ^, it has cleared off. 168-1. (Pl. 26, fig. 1.)
nifiyan de*, when it cleared off. 167-17. (PI. 27, fig. 1.)
-yan, to be ashamed.
dd ha' ka n5n t y^fi, do not be ashamed. 141-8.
ka nd t yan, she was ashamed. 180-8.
-yan«, -yfl*, to eat.***
nesdLy^n, you ate apt 186-16. (Pl. 24, fig. 10.)
tc'giinyan', he ate of it. 129-5. (Pl. 29, fig. 9.)
tc* 6< y%ft, you (pin.) eat. 148-6. (Pl. 29, fig. 10.
tc*finy%n, you (sing.) eat. 125-7. (Pl. 29, fig. 13.)
tc' neL yil«, she eats up. 180-9. (Pl. 1, fig. 9.)
Gf. nesyidja', let me eat. 181-12.
-yats, to snow.**
5 1 yats, let it snow. 93-5.
-yel«, to stop crying (T).
te't defi yel', he stopped crying. 148-4. (PL 29, fig. 14.)
-yea, -ye' , to make a deer drive.
te'n na dtl yeo, we will driye. 110-9.
tc'n na dfil yeo, she always hunts. 181-7.
-yi, to name, to call by name.
tc'dL yi kw^ hfit, he had named when. 117-12.
dlyibfindja% shall be caUed. 99-7.
-yin, to stand.**
si yi ne, I stand. (Pl. 25, fig. 7.)
Gf . tc* sifi fifi £^, he is standing. (Pl. 26, fig. 2.)
T* ra, 219.
aom, 217.
•1 Cf . yas, snow, ra, 19.
82 m, 220.
62 Universiiy of Calif amia PublicaiionM in Am, Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
-yin, to live at a place.*'
nS nftnyill, they UvecL 16012. (PL 29, Ag. 12.)
-yie, yi, to speak. (First and second persons only).'*
kftn nte jie, I will speak. 120-9.
a doc 71, I boast. 128-1.
kwinftnjie, you will talk. 174-3.
kd nd* ic, speak (plu.). 120-8.
-yic, to break.*'
tc' gCbiyic, he broke it. 79-12. (PI. 10, flg. 8.)
-yic, to whistle."
kwoLTie, he whistled. (PL 30, flg. 7.)
-yitc, -yic, to rest.'^
nadtdyic, let us rest. 140-18. (PL 30, Ag. 5.)
nagesyitc, he rested. 161-4. (PL 30, tg, 4.)
-yit, yik, -yi«, to build a house."
He Jit, I will make a house. 168-6. (PL 30, fig. 8.)
B*(lmji(k)'f he made a house. 168-7. (PL 30, fig. 9.)
gOl yi* jsl' nl, he built a house they say. 83-11. (PL 30, fig. 10.)
-yol, -yoL, yo, to blow.'*
te'nndLyoL, let it blow. 80-13. (PL 30, fig. 11.)
Gf. dwiyd, she fanned. 153-3.
-yds, to lead, to drag.
ye* kwil y5s, they took her in, 158-15.
-yot, -yo, -yol, ySL, to chase.**
kwfin tin ydt, they ran after him. (PL 30, fig. 13.)
bftn ti gi yd, they chased it. 174-10.
kwfin I y51, they followed him. 98-11.
na bfin y6L, they drove. 170-16.
-lai, -la, -l^c, to move several objects.
ka na gill 1^, she digs out. (PL 31, fig. 1.)
fina* tc'enalai, her eye she took out. 152-9. (PL 31, fig. 2.)
k'wfinnfill^, put it on (sing. imp.). (PL 31, fig. 7.)
belget k'wfinndn^, spear points put on. 168-11. (PL 31, fig. 6.)
8s m, 220.
84 m, 246. See -ni, -n below, p. 65.
SB Cf . Hupa -yefiw, to rub, to knead, m, 220.
•« Cf . Hupa -yefiv;, to rest, to get one 's breath, m, 220.
8T in, 220.
88 See ye, yik, house, p. 19.
8» in, 221.
•0 in, 221.
1912] Ooddard: BlemenU of the Koto Language 63
-lal, -1^ to sleep, to dream.*^
n t5 I4L, let him sleep. (PL 81, fig. 8.)
n tes laL 7a' ni, he went to sleep they say. 83-4. (PL 31, fig. 10.)
ii5hiii ntdU^, 70a (plu.) go to sleep. 110-16. (PL 31, Ag. 11.)
a nas laL, he dreamed about. 145-2.
-l^n, to laugh.
7a 's h|ii, they laughed. 155-2.
do slafi, he did not laugh. 103-15.
-1^<, to get.
6c 1^«, I will get. 137-2. (PL 24, fig. 11.)
5< l%ft, you get. 133-14. (PL 1, fig. 4.)
-lat, to float."
kwiin 7e< gOl lat, it sank. 174-12. (PL 24, fig. 8.)
te'n nta lat, it fioated there. 1481.
-lag, -la',-le',todo.»«
kwai W 7a* ni, he did it the7 say. (PL 31, fig. 3.)
dlkwa* lao, he did this way. 154-5. (PL 31, fig. 4.)
cd« gilaoe, I fixed it good. 76-12. (PL 31, fig. 5.)
a ed' fil le* , dress yourself. 103-1.
-le«, to sing.
te'e 1§% he sang. 149-11. (PL 32, fig. 1.)
te'egftlle', he eommeneed singing. 105-11. (PL 32, fig. 4.)
-leo, -le', to swim nnder water.**
na giil leo, fish were swinuning down. 164-1. (PL 32, fig. 2.)
w%nnileget, I swam to because. 175-5.
-li«, to snare.**
tc'fis li«, he caught in a noose. 108-4. (PL 1, fig. 6; pi. 32, fig. 7.)
nas li«, he tied up. 145-7. (PL 32, fig. 6.)
-lin, to flow.
nanagftlline, it runs down. 121-9.
-lin*, -le, to become.**
nas diil lin ne, we have got back. 95-12. (PL 3, fig. 6.)
s'fis lifi«, he became. 84-11. (PL 32, fig. 3.)
•i m, 232.
•s m, 232.
•* ra, 230.
•4 ra, 237.
M Gf . Hupa -loi, to tie, m, 236.
•« ra, 233.
I
64 rnfVM^tyo/CaIi/ofniaPti5)Mattoii«ifi^fii.^reJLafidJlPt^. [YoLll
-Id, to hail.
5 15, let it haiL 93-6.
-16, to deceive.
te' kioL ld« fit, when he fooled him. 136-14. (PI. 26, fig. 5.)
sko 15 5 kw%Cl, he was pretending. 134-6.
-168, to lead.*^
be o5* 158, take me up. 147-6. (PI. 6, fig. 1.)
gOl los t5 le, he wiU bring it. (PI. 32, fig. 9.)
tc'ttel58, he led. 159-9. (PI. 32, fig. 10.)
-Iflt, -Lfit, to bum (see Lut, smoke) .••
i £^ Ifit fifi gi, we are burning. 104-13.
gfillfit, it was burning. 173-16. (PI. 32, fig. 8.)
nais Lfit, is bumingt 119-6.
na^Lfit, you bum. 119-1.
Cf . de IfiG, bums. 100-6.
-Kits, to urinate.
bi« 5' Ifits, in it urinate. 188-14.
-Iflk, to tell, to relate.**
w%n tc' k5 Ifik, he told about it. (PI. 32, fig. 11.)
d5 ha' wan kwfil Ifik bfifi dja% you must not tell him. 139-13.
-La, to shoot.
5 n5^ La bfifi, you must shoot. 173-4.
te La, he shot. 144-12.
-Lan, to be many.
gfin L^, became many. 83-14. (PI. 33, tg, 10.)
gfiuLane, have become many. 169-10. (PL 33, fig. 11.)
-Lat, -La (-LagT), to jump.^*^
nanfiuLat, jump across (sing. imp.). (PL 34, fig. 3.)
tc'e nan La, he jumped out. 142-6. (PL 34, fig. 4.)
na nfin La gfit, he jumped across when. 147-7.
-Leo, he\ relating substances of dough-like consistency.^*^
bin5< LeS soak them. 110-6. (PL 34, fig. 1.)
bi' n5 gfiL Leo, they soaked them. 179-1. (PL 34, fig. 2.)
-L^ts, to be rough, to be strong.
n Lfits, it is stout 78-12. (PI. 34, fig. 5.) '
»T ra, 237.
M m, 236, 239.
•» ra, 236.
100 in, 238.
101 m, 239.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 65
-L5i, -L6, -L6n, to twine a basket, to braid.^***
te' Ldi {^ ^ she is making a basket (PI. 2, fig. 7.)
na te'd* Ld, set snares. 108-2. (PI. 25, fig. 5.)
5' Ld, braid. 113-8.
a de^ tc'CLs Ld kw%n, he had girded himself. 103-3.
natgiitLdn, he set snares. 108-4.
-na, relating to hunger. (It has the person affected as an
object.)
eg^na', I am hungry. 141-14.
e g^ na e, I am hungry. 168-15.
-nai«, -na«, to roast.^®'
te'eL nai', it is roasted. 113-15.
bee na% I wiU roast 168-16. (PL 33, fig. 2.)
te'geL na*, he roasted. (PL 33, fig. 1.)
-na(t)
ndLtinna', were left. 158-10.
-n^, to drink.^***
ta ya* 5 n^, let them drink. 123-6. (PL 33, fig. 5.)
tain^n, drink. 88-6.
tan%n, he drank. 79-2.
-nac, -nai, -na, to go. (Third person only.)"'
kanac, it came up. 81-2. (PL 24, fig. 7.)
ka gdn n^e, he came up. 75-2. (PL 33, fig. 8.)
yegdnnae, went in. 165-15.
ye £^ nai', they went in. 107-17.
ye nl na, came in. 143-11.
-nat', to lick with the tongae.
te'fiLnaf, licked. 103-14.
-nes, to be long.
gfinnes, it became long. 87-1. (PL 25, tg. 8.)
-ni, -ne, -n, -nee, -niL, to speak.
he fi' tc'n ni, yes he said. (PL 33, fig. 9.)
tc'tegMni, it makes a noise, thundered. 77-10. (PL 33, figs.
6, 7.)
a dd^ ne kw%n n^, you talk. 166-9.
ya*nya*ni, they said they say. 82-11. (PL 4, fig. 4.)
kwfiL dn ya' ni, he told him they say. 151-9. (PL 3, fig. 2.)
tc' kiln nee, he talked. 160-1. (PL 25, fig. 14.)
do kin nee, didn't speak. 141-16.
tgdnniL, it kept hooting. 179-7.
102 ni, 239.
los m, 242.
104 m, 243.
105 ra, 242.
1
66 UfwverHtyofCaUfarniaPfU>licaii(>n$inAm,Ar6h.andBthn. [YoLll
-nic, to play.*^
HA 05* nie, 70a played with. 134-17.
HA g6a nic kw%n, he had been playing. 115-10.
-nuk, to relate.
wiin kit; n^ de', 70a tell about when. 176-2.
-888, to pull, to drag.
ta nas sas, he pulled it out. 132-7.
t^t dtQ 8^, we dragged out. (PI. 35, fig. 6.)
-8at, to be deep.
kwiin 8^, deep water. 74-10. (PI. 34, fig. 11.)
-8at, -8^t, to sit.
nOn 8%t, sit down. 140-18. (PI. 34, fig. 10.)
na n5* 8%t, 70U (plu.) camp. 173-7.
-8i<, relating to one's head and its position.
betgfinsi*, had her head close. 152-3.
t gdn na si', turned heads. 165-12.
-sil, tosteam(t)."^
nd sil, I am sweating. (PI. 35, fig. 1.)
-sil«, -suL, -tsftL, to strike (repeatedly).*^
naneLsn*, it struck. 162-11.
kwiin je tc'iiL sil, it pounded into the ground. 154-10.
5l siiL, peck. 113-9.
niin jiL tsCiL, beats against it. 86-12.
-86(t)
n5 te gCH sd, she pushed in. 153-3.
-sfll, -sflL, to be warm.*®*
kdwiinsiil, it was becoming hot. 81-2. (PI. 1, fig. 5.)
g&n siil le, is hot 149-7.
giin siiL, it became warm. 96-4.
-sun, to think. (First and second person.)
dd kit; ne siifi, I was insensible. 182-17. (PI. 35, fig. 5.)
n5 niic sAfi (it, I thought you. 171-6.
-sihi, to hide.
be nd« siifi, you (plu.) hide it. 113-4. (PL 35, fig. 3.)
be ndn sCln kwafi iifi gl, you were hiding it. 101-10.
be n5 g^ sAn, she hid. 135-11.
io«in, 247.
lOT in, 263.
108 Gf . -siit, to pound.
109 See -sil above, m, 253.
1912] Goddard: BlemenU of the Koto Language 67
-sM, -s&s, to hang, or to be hanging.
te' teL sail, he hung up. 176-18. (PL 85, fig. 4.)
nBLBba, hanging. 176-16.
-sfis, to see.^**^
eC^sibe, (nobody) sees me. 176-1.
d5 dta sib he, we did not see. 116-18. (PL 26, fig. 7.)
-«ut, to faU."«
ndl sat, he f elL 147-8.
te' teL sfit, he f elL 147-7.
-sfit, to ponnd.*^^
fis sfit, I wiU pound. 110-8. (PL 85, fig. 8.)
k' gtn sAt, she pounded. 185-9. (PL 35, fig. 9.)
-fifit', to wake up."*
tee^ sfit, wake up. 100-9.
tcVnsat', woke up. 184-18.
-ca«, -cac, to go. (First person only.)^**
na ea^, I wiU go about. 188-6. (PL 28, fig. 7.)
nan ea^, I wiU eross. 154-1.
ta cac, I went. 182-17.
-ca', to catch with a hook.^^*
gfiaca}, they caught. 158-8.
-ce*, to spit.*"
kVfit te'e ja eeS they spit on. 154-14. (PL 85, fig. 12.)
-cin«, -ciin«, to be black.
et ei ng kw%n n^, it had turned black. 94-7. (PL 8, fig. 1.)
nL cfin*, black. (PL 86, fig. 2.)
-Ci«, to dig.***
ka tc* gdc ci«, they dug. 148-11. (PL 85, fig. 18.)
ka tc' gfin ci*, they were digging. 148-8. (PL 85, fig. 14.)
ka ya* ci<, they dug. 148-12.
-con, to be good, to be good looking.**^
n c5 ne, it is good. 79-4.
n cdfi fifi gi, it is beautiful. 100-5.
lota See Hupa -tsis. m, 272.
110 Hupa -tsit. m, 278.
111 Hupa -tsit, m, 272.
1" ra, 258.
us Hupa -htoai, -hu^a, -hwtLUW, m, 248.
114 Hupa -hi(;al, -hwELL, m, 248.
118 Cf . cek, spit.
ii« Hupa -hire, m, 249.
117 Hupa, -htt;5fi, m, 201.
68 l7nivtfr^<y(>/CaIi/offiiaPiiMioa<tofWffiiliii.^foKafid£<^. [YoLll
-he«, to be tired (but only when used with a negative prefix).
da yi he'e, I am tired. 98-1. (PI. 36, fig. 6.)
mfi ddfihe* fifi, are j(m (nng.) tiredf 141-1. (PL 36, fig. 7.)
ddyidehe*, we are tired. 116-7. (PL 36, fig. 8.)
-ba, to be thirsty.
taglba, I am thirsty. 141-10.
tgibae, I am thirsty. 118-4.
-ban, to walk lame.
te't teL baft, he walked lame. 133-6. (PL 24, fig. 14.)
naebanS, I am lame. 133-8.
nagiiltb^fi, he limped along. 138-13.
-bat, -b^c (-biie), to embrace ( t).
bete'madClt, he embraced it when. 131-2.
da kit dtQ biie, he embraced it 180-3.
-be«, to bet.
tc'iicbe«, I bet. 146-12.
-be, -bil«, to pick.
ya« tc* b€, they were picking. (PL 36, fig. 10.)
ya* k' td bn*, they went to gather. 152-5.
ya' tc' be dtA, they were picking where. 120-6.
kagdmme, he gathered. 76-4.
-be, -bin, -bic, to swim."®
nd hin na< be, swim (plo. imp.). 111-2. (PL 86, fig. 9.)
nl b! ne, I swam. 118-17.
nand^bic, swim across. 96-11.
tfimmio, swim. 118-16.
-bil«, -bia, -bfiii, to fall, to rain (plural object). "•
tetbn«, it rained. 81-1. (PI. 36, fig. 13.)
ya* ga bll*, they threw over. 149-8.
kit; na s'is bil', he sprinkled around him. 80-6.
c5fik tatbOl, good it rains. (PL 36, fig. 12.)
ce nan t biiL, come to me again. 143-8.
-biiL, to handle flour ( f ).
ta tc'film m(iL, cook mush (sing. imp.). 163-14. (PL 6, fig. 8; pL
87, fig. 5.)
ta tc'd< bCiL, cook mush (plu. imp.). 123-13. (PL 24, fig. 1; pi.
37, fig 6.)
-biiL, to hang up.
tc'ttcLbCiL, he hung it up. 79-13. (PL 37, fig. 2.)
tficbOL, I will hang up. 115-6. (PL 37, fig. 8.)
tc' teL biiL kw^fi, he had hung up. 176-8. (PL 27, fig. 8.)
118 Hupa -me, -men, m, 240.
ii»Hupa -meL, -mil, -miL, m, 240.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Eato Language 69
-bfin, to be 8mall( f ).
d5 bCba n§ kwa n^fi, were smalL 95-6.
ya* da mta, they became small. 107-12.
.bM«, to be fuU.^«»
dgmfifi* (dinbftfi*), it was fuU. 129-12. (PI. 37, fig. 1; pL 6,
fig. 6.)
LtemAn*, were fulL 82-14.
dd te htn ne, is not fall. 149-6.
tee dfil bM, we filled. 182-2.
-da, -dai, to sit, to remain.^**
sfinda, you stay (sing. imp.). 79-7. (PL 37, fig. 7.)
bi* sta, he was sitting in. 132-3. (PL 6, fig. 7.)
si dai, I sit. 140-7.
te^ nes dai, he sat down. 161-10. (PL 37, fig. 8.)
-dai, to be ezhaiisted( f ).
d5te5<dai, he didn't give out. 126-12.
-dac, to traveL***
te'e na gfit dae, he eame up again. 149-18. (PL 10, fig. 6; pL 37,
fig. 10.)
yaL dae bfifi, you must jump up. 82-16.
-dac, to dance.
nfie dae, I will dance. 103-9. (PL 37, fig. 9.)
tc* gtn dac kwafi, he had danced. (PL 37, fig. 11.)
-del*, -dfiL, to go (dual only)."*
tc'n nfin del*, they came up. 158-6. (PL 37, fig. 13.)
kaudel*, we came up. 141-2. (PL 1, fig. 7; pL 37, fig. 12.)
tc't tes de le, they went on. 108-12. (PL 38, fig. 1.)
bS dtOj, let us climb. (PL 23, fig. 13.)
a dfiL, let UB go. 141-6. (PL 38, fig. 2.)
-del«, -dffli, -d^ to handle objects (plural).
de t giil del* kw%n, had put in the fire. 131-7.
dan5Ld§Lkw^, he had put on a frame. 135-4.
ta ya iL dfil, she put in water. 143-4.
-deo, -de*, to win.
na* tc'fis deo, he won back. 147-1.
na* tc'fis de^ , he won back. 146-14.
k5 w%n tc' gfil deS from him he won. 146-8.
itoHupa -men, -mifi, m, 241.
i« in, 254.
^ Gf . -dauir, m, 255.
iM ni, 256.
70 Vn%verHiyof(kUifarf^P%bUeatum8inAm.ArcKandBthn, [YoLll
-deG, -de% to wash.
W na te'^ dgo, he washed it. 129-2.
W nate'gilLdeS she washed them. 153-5. (PI. 88, fig. 3.)
te* na testis de, he washed it. 168-16.
-din*, to shine.***
tein tB difi^y shone. 85-9.
na te' nOn din bM, it will be light. 140-4.
e^ dl ne, the sun shines. 182-13. (PL 38, fig. 4.)
-d6«, to be none.***
n d5« hM, it will not be. 80-13. (PL 38, fig. 5.)
nfitdd', all gone. 9911.
n dd* 70, there is none. 109-1. (PL 38, fig. 6.)
-dtdy -duL, relating to the movement of fish in numbers.
nfin dCd, they came. 169-8.
tfin dCiL, come. 120-17.
tfin dCiL bfifi, must eome. 120-18.
-diiL, to move something up and down( f ).
na naiL dftL, he moved (a basket) up and down. 150-2.
-dihi, to die.
ne« 6 dfin, you will die. 177-4. (PL 25, fig. 2.)
ee dfin ne, I died. 128-4. (PL 38, fig. 7.)
ce e dfin td le, I will die. 177-5. (PL 38, fig. 9.)
-diits, -diis, to twist.
gfit diits, is twisted. 114-1.
-diik, to crack (acorns) .
te'fiediike, I crack them. 140-4.
tc'iiLtfik, crack them. 138-2.
tc'fiLt^bfifi, you must crack. 136-1.
-djifi, to be day.
ddjifikwic, about day probably. 184-1.
-dj6l«, to roll.
t^nasdjdl*, it rolled out of the fire. 147-9. (PL 10, fig. 1; pL
41, fig. 8.)
-tal«, t^, to step or move the foot.***
te^ tc' giin tal<, he stepped in water. (PL 88, fig. 10.)
ndddnt^ you step. 82-1.
tc't te gilL t%L, he dragged his foot along. 90-4.
i«* m, 260.
126 Of. dd, not, the negative prefix.
iM ra, 261.
1912] Qoddard: EUmenU of the Kato Langwige 71
-J^n, -tic, to handle a large object."^
te'ent^n, he took out (spear-shaft). 170-14.
ndw^nticb^, give as (fish-spear). 128-13.
-tan, to eat (third person only).^"
tc't tan M gi, he is eating. 174-1. (PI. 38, fig. 11.)
-te, to look for anything.***
ka kio n5« te, look for him. 160-1. (PI. 89, fig. 1.)
ka fin te, she looked. 114-9.
ka ya' n tS, they looked. 114-8.
-tel, -teL, to be wide or flat.
n tel, flat. 180-14.
kwfin teL te lit, it was becoming flat. 107-3. (PI. 27, fig. 2.)
gfin teii, was flat. 106-11.
tc^eteLkw%n, he had spread. 115-11.
-teo, to teach (!)."<>
be gfin tee, he tanght. 122-11. (PI. 89, fig. 3.)
ke gfit fee, he taught them. 122-1.
-tin, -tuc, relating to movement or position of an animal alive
or dead, with transitive or intransitive meaning.***
nestifi, it is lying. 182-3. (PI. 39, fig. 5; pL 10, fig. 7.)
nfin s'fis tifi, he picked him up. 179-14. (PI. 89, fig. 7.)
t^nnastifi, she took out again. 129-2. (PL 39, fig. 8.)
ci ^lane, I lay. 176-16. (PL 89, fig. 9.)
nd niL t! ne, he put it. (PL 89, fig. 10.)
tc' nes tifi, he lay down. 175-11. (PL 5, fig. 2.}
fiLtfic, give it. 179-2.
nanfintfic, lie down again. 100-1.
d5 c g$L tfic, you did not give it to me. 179-5.
-t6«, relating to position or movement of water.***
ndtc'fintd^, water came so far. 75-1. (PL 7, fig. 6.)
-t6n«, to jump or to cause to jump.***
natc'dLtofi*, he snapped it. (PL 89, fig. 11.)
-tdn, -te, to be cold.
fis tfifi, it was cold. 96-1.
fis tfin e, it is cold. (PL 40, fig. 8.)
k5 wfin tfin, it is cold. 121-10.
fie te H« fifi, I might be cold( f ). 138-8.
"T m, 262.
iMm, 268.
i*» m, 264.
ISO Cf. Hupa -tu, -te, -tel, to sing, in a ceremony, m, 267.
i»i m, 264-6.
iMCf. td, "water," p. 20, and in, 267.
i»» ni, 267.
72 UfMivenityofCaHforfUaPubl%cati<m$%nAm.AreKaHdEihn. [YoLll
-tdky to burst.
gOLtdk, it bunt 182-5. (PL 8, fig. 1; pL 40, fig. 1.)
-tak, to kiIL^»*
BdjidLtfik, kiU me (plu.) "my heart(»)" 151-8. (PL 40, fig. 4.)
-t% to use a sling.
na kio nie f a kwie, I am going to sling at him. 122-14. (PL 40,
fig. 9.)
-t'an, relating to wax-like substances.^*^
k'we ja* hoL f afi, they stuek on. 170-6.
-t'ats, -t'as, to cut.***
jisf^tB, he ent it. 162-10.
ta gat fats, he butehered. 175-4. (PL 24, fig. 2.)
te'nnesiLt'ats, I cut it up. 138-15. (PL 40, fig. 12.)
te'nndLt'^, cut them (plu. imp.). 166-15. (PL 40, fig, 11.)
-t'ao, .tV,tofly."*»
nfin f ao, it flew. 182-11. (PL 40, fig. 6.)
te'ic t'a t$ le, I wiU feather. 156-5. (PL 7, fig. 9; pL 40, fig. 5.)
-t'e, to have an appearance or disposition.**^
ac i% I am. 159-10.
a nd^ t'e, you are. 189-1.
%n dfit t'd ye, we are. 132-5.
^ t'd, it ia. 100-10.
kfin i% she is like. 181-11.
-t'e, to cook.
tdLt'e, you cook (plu. imp.). 167-16. (PL 40, fig. 10.)
fis t'e yeS it is cooked. 163-15. (PL 40, fig. 8.)
-fin, to do."*
da kwa f ifi, he never did that. 130-14. (PL 9, fig. 4.)
kw^ tlft, I did that 147-5.
-t'6t, to suck."*
k'fiL t'dt, he sucked it 159-2. (PL 40, fig. 2.)
tc'iLt'at, (make) it suck. 115-3.
-t'6G, -tV, to sting.
natc'eLt'd, she stung. 156-14.
nfinyiLfd gfit, she stung them when. 156-15. (PL 26, fig. 3.)
tc't d(iL t'd* kwfic, something stung I guess. 114-14.
184 Cf . -tftk, to burst
185 m, 268.
iw ra, 268.
it«a Ct. t'a', feathers, and Hupa -tau, m, 268.
i»T m, 268.
iss m, 269.
!•• Cf . Hupa -tdt, to drink, to suck, ni, 267.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Koto Language 73
-t'ok', to flake flint.
te^t'dk', he flaked. 156-7. (PI. 11, fig. 8.)
-tsai, -sai, to be cby.^***
alnddja*, let them dry. 136-3.
gOL tsai, it was dry. 123-4. (PL 34, fig. 8.)
tetis sai, she dried it. 181-4.
-ts^n, -8^, to find, to see.^^^
te'fiLts%n, he found. 97-4. (PI. 34, fig. 6.)
dd ha* te'fiL tsa ne, he did not find. (PI. 34, fig. 7.)
fiLs^ do you seef 141-2.
ddgaisafi, it was never found. 179-6. (PL 34, fig. 9.)
-tsan, to hear.
detsafi, I heard. 182-8.
ya* ted sfil safi, they listened. 178-1.
-t85, to be blue.
dfiltsd, blue. 113-13. (PL 35, fig. 2.)
-tsfit, to know.
dd 5 dfil tsfit de, we didn't know him. 119-8.
-ts'eg, -tsV, to eat soup.
k gilL ts'ee, he ate soup. (PL 41, fig. 1.)
-ts'eG, -tsV, -s'uL (-tsl*), to hear.
na ya* d! ts'eo, they heard again. 106-16.
kan%Lt8^*, they heard again. 106-14.
-teai, -tea, to bury, to cook by burying.***
tc^gfintcai, he buried it. 129-2.
ka« dfit tea«, weU, let us eook. 149-7. (PL 25, fig. 11.)
betegfiLca% she put in sand. 152-8.
-tc^n, to eat in company.***
na dtQ tcafi kwafi, he had eaten. (PL 41, fig. 4.)
na die tcan ne, I ate. 171-9. (PL 41, fig. 6.)
na die tea, let me eat a meaL (PL 24, fig. 12.)
-tc^n, to defecate."*
ts'gfinte^ he defecated. 142-7.
140 m, 270.
141 m, 270.
i^Hupa -tcwai, -tcwa, m, 275.
148 Hupa, -tewan, -tcwfiil, m, 275.
iM Cf . Hupa -tcwen, -tcwifi, m, 278.
74 Univenity of Calif amia Pyblicatu>n$ in Am, AreK and Bthn. [YoL 11
-tcan, -tcic, to leave one.
5te5n5*teleb^ jou may leave it. 118-1.
d5 teds tde td le, I will not leave. 139-18.
5 tsdfi gat tcafi, they left them. 178-11.
5 te'd nl tea ne, I left him. 117-17. (PL 41, fig. 10.)
-teat, -tea, to be sick.***
tgiinteade, is sick. 140-5.
dttn tea bfifi, will be sick. 79-5.
-teat, -tc^t, to shout.
giiLte^, they shouted. 165-9. (PL 25, fig. 10.)
fie teat, I will shout 164-12.
fiLte^t, shout. 164-18.
gfiltc^t, they shouted. 114-8.
-tcaa, -tea' , to be large.***
gfin teao kw%]i, had beeome large. 116-4.
dtea% let be large. 98-7.
w5* iitca% teeth large. 86-5. (PL 4, fig. 2.)
-tce«, -ce«, to be bad."^
n tee* e, bad. 140-18.
d5 ha« n tee* mfin dja% let it not be bad. 171-10.
.tcel«(t), -tcfiL (-tceL), to split."*
dje* gfiL teel, she split open. 129-3. (PL 24, fig. 5.)
gfiltefiL, were opened. 125-6.
dje« kfiL tefiL, split it. 80-9.
dje* gfiL teeL, he split open. 129-3.
-tceo, -tee', (-ce'), to cry."*
te' gfin tee ge, he eried. 138-1. (PL 41, fig. 11.)
fiet<^ oe, I eried. 140-6. (PL 8, fig. 6.)
fintee^biifi, you may ery. 115-7.
d5 ha* ku; fin ee% do not for it ery. 117-8.
-tcl, to blow, said of the wind.**®
wa nfin te! bfifi, it will blow through. 80-14. (PL 23, fig. 4.)
-tci«, to be red, to dawn.
te' t te gfis tel*, it was about dawn. (PL 8, fig. 2.)
te'gfistd*, it was red. 148-5.
i4» m, 274.
iM Cf . Hupa -kya 9, -kya, m, 201.
14T Of. tc'fifi gfin tee*, he was angry. (PL 41, fig. 13.)
i*« Cf . Hupa -kil, -kiL, in, 282.
!*• Hupa -tcwfi, -tewe, ra, 280.
ISO Hupa -tee, ni, 274.
1912] Goddard: EUmenU of the Kato Language 75
-tcin, -tci, -tciL, to make.^'^
ftL USi, make it. 79-8. (PI. 41, fig. 8.)
te' giil teil, it is growing. (PI. 41, fig. 9.)
kio na* fiL tea, make him live. (PI. 10, fig. 2.)
te'dLt^dja*, let him make. 140-2.
giiltdfi, they made. 178-3.
jA* heL tcin, they made. 170-4.
te'ifl tein, he made. 77-6.
gieteiL, I place along. 88-1.
-teds, relating to flat, flexible objects, such as skins.^^*
naL teds, she put. 180-7.
egaLteos, give me. 97-13.
-tedt, -tcol, to steal.
k't teL tedt, he stole. 11811. (PI. 9, fig. 6.)
ei te UL teal«, I stole. (PL 42, fig. 1.)
-tcok (-cuk), to arrange in a row, to string.^**
tc' giin te5k kw%n, he had filled. 169-6.
te' gfin eiik kw%n, he had strong. 136-1.
-tcul, -tcuL, to be wet or damp.
nagilLtcfiL ja'ni, he got wet they say. 126-16. (PI. 42, fig. 3.)
naLtcftliit, it was wet beeaose. 126-11.
-tciin, -tcic, to smell.
yegfintcfin, he smelled it. 114-4.
gdLL efin ne, it smells. 109-6.
sfiL tcie, yon smell. 141-5.
-tcut, -tci, to catch hold of."*
yiL tefit, caught it. 114-4.
gCa teat, he caught them. (PI. 42, fig. 2.)
tc'eL t^* ya' ni, he caught it they say. 142-5. (PI. 42, fig. 5.)
naLtcebiifi, you must catch. 116-16.
-tcfif , to feed."»
ku wa gat teat', they fed her. 151-15. (PI. 36, fig. 4.)
-tciit, to stretch.
nfiLtefit, yon stretch. 78-15.
tc'eLtcat, stretch it out. 77-13. (PI. 42, fig. 4.)
1*1 Hupa -tcwen, -tcwifi, -tcwe, m, 276.
!•> Hupa -kySs, m, 284.
i»» Hupa -tcwdk, ni, 279.
iM Hupa, -kit, m, 283.
iM Hupa -kit, m, 283.
76 UniverHty of California Publications in Am. Arch, and Bthn. [VoLll
-tc'afi, -tc'ac, to shoot with a bow.
B'tB te'afi, he shot it. (PL 41, fig. 7.)
gat to'afi% he shot. 110-18. (PL 25, fig. 9.)
fin tc'ac, 70a shoot 178-1.
-ga, -gai, to walk (third person only)."*
na ga kw^n, he had walked. 154-12. (PL 42, fig. 6.)
na gai bfin dja', shall traveL 99-18.
-gal«, -gal, -gaL, to throw."^
n5teLgal*, she threw it. 181-4.
ka tc'el gal<, he tipped it 154-8.
k'egfiLgal', she threw away. (PL 42, fig. 11.)
na* deL g^ kw%n, he had poured. 125-18. (PL 42, fig. 12.)
ya* gfiL gal<, he threw up. 142-8. (PL 28, fig. 1.)
nandLgaL, put aeross. 158-18.
n5' efiL gaii, throw me. 188-4. (PL 25, fig. 1.)
-gal<, -g^, -gaL, to drop, to beat.
nafi gfil gal<, he beat it. 177-6.
nfin ie g%L, let me chop. (PL 42, fig. 7.)
nfinsfiLgal, you hit 129-10. (PL 42, fig. 8.)
naLg%L, hit again. 177-7.
-gan<, to be mouldy.
te't gafi«, it is mouldy. 167-16. (PL 42, fig. 9.)
-gan, -gaL, to kill (with plural object).
fieg^, I kiUf 96-10.
5< g^fi, kiU. 118-6.
to' gfifi ga ne, he was killed. (PL 42, fig. 10.)
to'end^nfifiane, he kiUed us. (PL 25, fig. 4.)
naij^gaLbfifi, must kilL 178-2.
-g^, to chew.
te'9 g^ let them chew it (PL 5, fig. 6.)
y5g^, let him ehew them. 110-7.
-gat, to sew.
te'e naiL gat de, he sewed up. 122-18. (PL 44, fig. 5.)
nd na«fi fi%t, he untied it 122-15. (PL 44, fig. 6.)
nahegat, he loosened. 122-14.
nahfifiabfifi, you must untie it. 78-15.
na hfifi %t, you untie. 128-7.
-gats, -g^, to scrape.^**
9* g^ scrape. 113-7.
te^ ge gats, she scraped them. 158-5.
iM Hupa -wai, -wa, ra, 221.
i»T Hupa -waL, -wfil, -wfiL, m, 222.
IBS Cf. Hupa -was, m, 224.
1912] Goddard: Elements of the Kato Language 77
-ge«, to whip.
5l ge*, whipped f 102-9.
-gel% -fi?ei^ -^> relating to the passing of night.***
gdl ge le, it was getting late. (PI. 48, fig. 1.)
tea kw6L gel«, very dark. 127-3. (PI. 2, fig. 4.)
(iLgfil, evening. 82-9.
-get, to thunder.
ddnaitget, it didn't thunder. 74-4.
-get, -ge, to spear.**^
wai tc' gfin get, he Btmck over. 164-2.
ya* tc* ofi ge, they speared. 166-16.
-gets, -guc, -ge«, to look, to see.
nhdctge*, let me see you. 142-6. (PL 43, fig. 2.)
te'd na gilt gdc, he looked back. 87-13. (PI. 43, fig. 4.)
tc'ontgets*, he looked at them. (PI. 43, fig. 6.)
6' t gfie, look at them. 100-9. (PI. 25, fig. 13.)
dntgfie. look. 95-12.
-gin, to kiU."*
sel gifi ya' ni, he killed they say. (PL 43, fig. 10.)
-gin, -gfic, -ge«, -geL, to carry on the back.***
te< n5dfigge% we wiU put in water. 139-9. (PL 7, fig. 5; pL 24,
fig. 3; pL 43, fig. 6.)
tc'n nfig gde, she brings in. 180-9. (PL 43, fig. 7.)
nig^ne*, I bring. 138-14. (PL 43, fig. 8.)
te'n nfifi fiifi, he brought it. 135-11. (PL 43, fig. 9.)
da n die ge*, I will pick you up. 141-4. (PL 7, fig. 3.)
tficge*, I win carry. 135-4. (PL 8, fig. 4.)
te'ttesgin, he carried. 101-9.
gfic geL, I will carry. 141-1.
gfifi eL, you carry. 137-13.
-git, -gfic, to be afraid.***
be nd siL git de, I am getting afraid. 180-15. (PL 6, fig. 2; pL 44,
fig. 3.)
wfin ye nel git, they were afraid of it. 154-6.
wfin tdL gfic fifi, might be frightened. 99-15.
-gits, to tie.
Le gits*, he tied together.
tcfim meL^ts, a stick he tied. 169-5. (PL 80, fig. 12.)
i5»Hupa -weL, -wil, -wiL, in, 224.
i«o ct bel get, spear head. 133-8.
161 Hupa -wen, -wifi, -we, m, 225.
162 Hupa -wen, -wifi, -wfiw, -we, ra, 226.
i6sin, 280.
78 Unwersity of Calif ortUa Publications in Am, Arch, and Eihn. [VoL 11
-guts, to bite.
be te gilts, he bit it 109-7.
-kai, to be alive.
nakai, alive. 114-2.
-kal, -kaL, to break.
taskal, break. 81-11.
tiic kaL, I will break. 110-1.
-kan, -ka, -kai, -kaL, relating to the passing of the night.^*^
nheskani, we spent the night. 167-7. (PI. 44, fig. 10.)
n he dL ka kwie, we will spend the night probablj. 105-3. (PI. 27,
fig. 10.)
dd yiL kai, not daj. 178-12.
yigfilk^L, it was daylight. 105-5.
yi gCLL ka lit, it got light when. 114-5.
-k^, -kac, -ka, to move a vessel containing liquid.^*^
wa* fifi k^, she gave him. 129-4. (PL 23, fig. 8.)
kd wa kac, give him (a basket of food). (PL 45, fig. 1.)
Used of fishing with a net, probably the same stem.
Gf. d< kan, net it. 168-14.
ts' giin kan, he had caught. 120-1.
dd ya« kac, they didn 't net it. 168-14.
kwa tc ^g(iB t ka, for him they dipped. 155-7.
-k^, -k&i, to be sweet.^**
L kfin, is sweet. 166-11.
tfilkamfindja% sweet will be. 91-5.
-ke«, to finish.^*^
be nlL ke<e, I have finished. 82-15. (PL 28, fig. 12.)
bel ke«, he finished. 172-12. (PL 45, fig. 8.)
be iL ke get, he finished when. 149-15.
be gee ke oe, I am finishing. 76-7.
-ke«, to bathe (plural only).
na' ke<, bathe. 172-14. (PL 45, fig. 2.)
-ket, to trade.^**
Leto'dfiket, they traded. 172-6.
-kut, to ask, to question.^**
do ha' cd ddL kfit, do not ask me. 166-8. (PL 45, fig. 8.)
iM Hnpa -xa, -xal, -zaL, -zfifi, m, 250.
lOB Hnpa -zan, -xfifi, -zanw, m, 250.
166 Hupa -zan, -zfin, m, 250.
167 Hupa -ze, -zu, m, 252.
iM Cf . Hupa -zait, -zai, to buy, m, 251.
i«» Hupa -zfit, -ztQ, m, 252.
1912] Goddard: BlemenU of the Eato Language 79
-kut, to travel (plural only).
te'nnaikat, they came. 154-12. (PL 45, fig. 6.)
d6 ha« te't teL Wt, they did not go. 167-17. (PI. 45, fig. 7.)
-kut, to swallow.
te'gdlkat, he swaUowed. 109-7. (PI. 1, fig. 3; pi. 45, fig. 5.)
nde kAt, may I swallow you. 181-14.
tw sal kAt, his mouth he put in. 157-15.
-kflt, to fall.
wal kiit, fell through. 158-1.
na te'fifi kiit, it f eU. 83-4.
-kfit, -kus, to float.
yalkfit, fioated. 143-7.
teL kfit, were washed away. 71-7.
ndniikkfis, it floated about. 127-8.
-k'ao, -k'a% to be fat."^
L kV bfin d ja«, let it be fat. 85-14. (PI. 26, fig. 10.)
Lk'ao, is fat 83-15.
-k'ai, to hit (with an arrow) ."^
nan neL k'ai, he hit. 156-14. (PL 45, fig. 9.)
-k'an, to build a fire.^^*
dLk'afi, make a fire. 103-7. (PL 3, fig. 7.)
gta k'^n, there was a fire. 162-18. (PL 45, fig. 10.)
fiLk'afi, make a fire. 127-11. (PL 45, fig. 11.)
-k'ats, -k'as, -k'aL, relating to i>osition and movement of long
objects only.
tc' tdL k'^ dja«, let him drop. 129-8. (PL 10, fig. 4.)
ya* giiL k'as, he threw up. 154-5.
w%n t gai k'%e, she threw up. 144-7.
ndwilk'as, feU. 152-1.
niin ya'L k'as, they pushed them in. 154-14.
tc' gfil k'aL, it f eU. 154-10.
telLk'^L, it struck. 154-11.
-k'e^, to brace oneself in getting up from a sitting or lying
jHwition.^^*
nfin s'Os dfik k'e«, he got up. 98-5. (PL 23, fig. 10.)
nOn an dak k'e<, get up. 100-8. (PL 44, fig. 8.)
-k'ots, to be sour, to be bitter.
dafik'ots, sour. 139-11.
do dfifi k'5 tdt, it is not salt because. 87-10.
170 Hupa -kau, -ka, m, 202.
iTiin, 281.
ITS Cf . Hupa, wil kan nei, a fire is burning, i, 151, L 4.
ITS Gf . Hupa -kai, -ka, m, 280.
80 rfifV6r«<tyo/(?aU/onitaPii&licat{oii«{fi^m.ilr0^afid£<^. [YoLll
-k'fiCy to lighten.
dd te't ttL k'H it did not lighten. 74-6. (PL 44, fig. 9.)
-k'uns to twist."* .
6<k'ftll«, twist. 163-12.
natc'k'ftfi*, it is writhing. 177-8.
-k'iits, to push in.
w^k'ftts, put in. 105-14.
nai neL k'Clts kw^y had stnek in. 158-4.
t%t tB k'tts, he palled it out. 127-9.
-qal, -qaL, to walk (third person only).*^*
tc' qaL ja* id, he was walking they say. 98-12. (PL 2, fig. 5^
pL 44, fig. 1.)
-q6t, to penetrate with a point, to spear .*^*
te'iis qdt, he speared. 128-13. (PL 8, fig. 8.)
afi qdt, spear it. 128-12. (PL 44, fig. 7.)
fie qdt, I will spear it 164-2.
SUFFIXES
The source of the information upon which the statement is
based, the degree of probability, and the time and stage of com-
pletion are indicated by suffixes which stand after the stem of the
verb. In some cases it is a matter of doubt whether these should
be treated as separate words or as word parts merely. In most
cases they do not seem to carry definite meaning when disjointed
from the verb. Several of them are affixed to nouns and other
parts of speech.
Source of Information
-e, -e are used of facts directly observed or in which the
speaker is concerned and has personal knowledge. The forms
with -e seem to be more emphatic.
be ne siL git di, I am becoming afraid. 180-15. (PL 6, fig. 2.)
be niL ke<e, I have finished. 82-15. (PL 23, fig. 12.)
nyine, I stand. (PL 25, fig. 7.)
ye s'ane, house stands. (PL 28, fig. 6.)
fie ga n$, I kiU. 138-4.
na fifi gfiL *a* d, he put across. 184-5.
nasdiUHnne, we have got back. 95-12. (PL 3, fig. 6.)
tc'dfigilane, I went after. 136-10.
1T4 Cf. k'fifl*, withes. 163-12.
iToni, 284.
iT«ra, 285.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 81
-Mgi states the fact as undonbtedly true and directly
observed but seems to indicate a degree of surprise.
te'LoiiUlg^ she ia making a basket. (PL 2, flg. 7.)
nifi 7^ kw^ Afi fi^ it has cleared off. 168-1. (PL 26, fig. 1.)
te' sin tlfi giy he is standing. (PL 26, fig. 2.)
te't tan« fifi ^ he is eating. 1741. (PL 88, fig. 11.)
ya«nl, tc'in, are in form independent verbs. The former is
the regular qnotative nsed in myths and tales and is quite in-
definite as to its subject.
te* q^ ya* nl, he was walking they say. 98-12. (PL 2, fig. 5.)
te' ffiSi al* y%* ni, he chewed it they say. 109-7. (PL 26, fig. 4.)
kwai' la' ya< n!, he did it they say. (PL 31, fig. 8.)
na gt^ tedL ya* ni, he got wet they say. 126-16. (PL 42, fig. 8.)
sel gifi ya< ni, he killed they say. (PL 48, fig. 10.)
-kw^ refers to acts which while not directly observed, are
inferred with certainty from the nature of the evidences observed.
ka gfiL *^ kwi|fi, they had sprang np along. 87-13. (PL 27, fig. 7.)
tct tOL bfiL kwi|fi, he had hung np. 176-8. (PL 27, fig. 8.)
tc' giin dac kwi|fi, he had danced. (PL 87, fig. 11.)
na ga kw^, he had walked. 154-12. (PL 42, fig. 6.)
na*deLg%lkw^, he had ponred. 125-18. (PL 42, fig. 12.)
-kwa n^ seems to be used with suffix -e, -S and indicates that
the evidence but not the act is directly observed.
et^nSkwan^n, were black. 94-7.
et ga ye kwa naft, were getting white. 94-5.
ta tc'fiL ate S kwa n%fi, turtles have come ont of water. 95-8.
tcteL te5t ye kwa n%&, someone had stolen. 138-15.
-kwiic, -kwic, is used with the first person only, and denotes
conjecture as to past, present, or future happenings.
afi kwiic, it cries I guess. 115-4.
na hfic da kwiic, I will go back. 137-10.
nakiDnicfakwic, I am going to sling at him. 122-14. (PL 40,
. fig. 9.)
n he 5l ka kwic, we will spend the night probably. 105-8. (PL 27,
fig. 10.)
kwfin s'fis noL ke* kwiic, might track ns. 142-11.
-kwfil luc. This suffix seems to be related to the last in both
form and meaning.
fift C^ kwiil Ific, is I think. 170-18.
fis f e kwfil liic M, it is done I guess. 169-1.
Modal
-bM predicts the act or happening with more or less deter-
mination on the part of the speaker that it shall come to pass.
82 UnwerHtyof(kiUf<Hrn4aPvhlicatuni$inAm.Arch.andBthn. [VoLll
wa nftn tei bdii, it will blow through. 80-14. (PL 23, fig. 4.)
nai 'ai htdH, it will be across. 85-8. (PL 28, fig. 8.)
k%l <ai bafi, it will grow up. 84-11. (PL 26, fig. 9.)
n5<*Ilb^, you must staj. 105-2. (PL 28, fig. 8.)
na cdL na bdfi, you must doctor me. 166-10. (PL 38, fig. 4.)
-dja« is used of future predictions in which determination or
desire on the part of the speaker that the events shall come to
pass is usually evident. For this reason it occurs more fre-
quently in the first person.
te' tdL k'^ dja<, let him drop. 129-8. (PL 10, fig. 4.)
tc'dL tc! dja', let him make. 140-2. (PL 27, fig. 6.)
kiic na* dja«, I want to live. 171-7. (PL 27, fig. 5.)
L k'a' bfin dja', let it be fat. 85-14. (PL 26, fig. 10.)
a dfil le' dja% we wiU do it. 83-2.
5c t ge< dja', I will look at. 149-13.
-tcL, -te le. The simple future prediction without an implica-
tion of duty, necessity, or intention is expressed by teL; tele
is used when the information is on the speaker's authority,
tc'ic t'a tS le, I will feather arrows. 156-5. (PL 7, fig. 9.)
niio ifi tS le, I will look. 165-4. (PL 27, fig. 3.)
benao *ai* t§le, I will try again. 139-1. (PL 27, fig. 4.)
gdl Ids td le, he will bring it. (PL 32, fig. 9.)
ce dihi t§ le, I wiU die. 177-5. (PL 38, fig. 9.)
nan dth teL, are you going homef 120-13.
na h5 tiin n%c teL, will you movef 140-8.
nCd lin teL bdfi, will flow for. 89-5.
fiL tci tel, you will make. 139-10.
na hihi dac teL, will you go backf 137-9.
na hfie d%c t§ le, I will go back. 117-18.
-iit, -hut, when, because. This suffix subordinates the verb
to which it is attached either as to time or cause as the context
may require. It is confined in its use to the past. The suffix
usually takes over as the initial of its syllable the final consonant
of the stem. An h may be the final aspiration of the preceding
stem.
fiL giil liit, it was evening when. 105-6.
yai ntLL ti niit, they brought it when. 128-16.
ya* giil k'a sit, he threw up when. 154-11.
yiL t'5 gdt, stuck him when. 156-1.
Lfintesyahfit, they came together when. 148-9.
na nCUi La giit, he jumped across when. 147-7.
5 d ji tc'fts tiik (it, he killed because. 157-7.
w%nnileget, I swam to because. 175-5.
naLoiiliit, it was wet because. 126-11.
nas li* niit, he was tied because. 146-5.
te si ya hiit, I went because. 118-5.
1912] Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language 88
Temporal
-de«, when, if. This suflSx is used of events in the future,
whether certain to occur or not, fixing the time of another act or
event.*^^
6 dji b6l tftk de«, you kill it if. 177-5.
wftn k«7 niik de', you tell about when. 176-2.
naLkiitde', you come back if. 117-18.
nan^gaLde*, when you put across. 153-11.
na he sihi t ya de^, if you go back. 187-10.
ts'ds qot de', if he spears it. 128-9.
te'nftnyade*, if he comes. 142-11.
gdL gel' de', night when. 97-10.
gOn d5' de', is gone if. 140-2.
kdw^ttbide', it is cold when. 172-15.
kd tc' gM 'ftts de', when she runs down. 158-11.
-un expresses a contingency as less certain than -de«.
at te li< t£, I might be cold( f ). 183-8.
wftn t5L giic Oil, might be frightened. 99-15.
na 5n te le* M, may come. 133-9.
tat btLL M, it may rain. 168-6.
Of. na nd tc'^ ke' u left', he might track us. 138-10.
ta nan 6 da H lefi', he might come again. 135-8.
-kwa< denotes the continuance of the act until a stated time.^^*
na hftc ga kwa', I am untying yet. 123-10.
tc'n niin dao kwa', he danced until. 130-15
-1, -L su£Sxed to the syllable of stem is used for acts or con-
ditions that are continuous in time or place.
giinyaL, walk. 104-13.
t giin niL, it kept hooting. 179-7.
tce^gMlaL,i7» he cried along. 145-5.
-c is used of continuous or often repeated acts. It is also
found in the imi>eratiye of many verbs without its meaning being
dearly manifest.
ta cae, I went. 182-17.
tftn yac, you go. 78-18.
tOmmie, swim. 118-16.
-bi^ in. This suffix common with nouns occurs with verbs
with the sense of when.
tea kwiiL gel' bi', very dark in. 179-8.
tea kwtlL gel* bi* ^*y very dark in. 179-7.
"Tin, 321.
!»• Cf. Hupa -tbc, -X, ra, 804.
179 The stem is tce% therefore -gtOlaL is an extended form or a
compound suffix.
84 University of CdHfonUaPvhUcatumi in Am. AreKandEthn, [YoLll
-M 18 used in asking a question to be answered by yes or no.
w%n *^ tSLf did yon givef 137-8.
nan t ya M kw^n, have you come baekf 182-14.
te'On jan ^ kw§n, yon have eaten f 138-8.
-kwanhiity two of the sufBxes presented above, when com-
bined make a relative temporal reference to the completion of
the act.
nas lifi dt kw^ hdt, it was again because. 107-6.
te'is teifi kw%n htlt, he had made when. 120-1.
te'5L 71 kw%n hiit, he had named when. 117-12.
te'fls t'a kwipi hftty he had feathered when. 116-12.
kd n5L get kw%n hftt, because you were afraid. 128-12.
TENSES AND MODES
In addition to temporal and modal variations expressed by
means of prefixes and su£Sxes discussed above there are two forms
of the completed verb resulting in part from accent which have
different temporal modal, force associated with them. The present
indefinite is usually the shorter of the two forms and is used
mostly for the imperative, for intended or proposed action in
the first person, and in negative statements. It might be dis-
tinguished as the non-indicative. The subject prefix of the first
person singular is c, the second modals are usually absent, and
the weaker form of the stem is usually found.
The definite tense is usually indicative in mode, referring to
an act or state as existing at a definite time, usually past. It is
distinguished by I as the subjective prefix in the first i>erson
singular, by the presence of one of the second modal prefixes, and
by the stronger form of the stem. The glottal stop is so fre-
quently found as the final element of the stem that it seems
plausible that it is a morphological or phonetic characteristic of
this form.
Present Indefinite Poet Definite
dc l^fi*, I wiU get. 187-2. (PI. 5n gi la ne, I brought. 137-1.
24, fig. 11.)
nacbe, let me swim. nibine, I swam. 118-17.
CO* 5c leS I will fix it 77-8. c5« gi la oe, I am fixing it. 76-
12.
tficca*, I am going. 161-1. tesiyai, I went. 120-17.
ta tc' 5^b^, prepare mush (imp. ta te b5* bU*, have you cookedf
plu.). 123-18. (PI. 37, fig. 169-14.
6.)
tat bOL, let it rain. 80-12. tet bll<, it rained. 81-1. (PI.
36, fig. 18.)
td gdc bftfi, let him carry. 140-1. tes gin, he carried. 101-11.
1912]
Ooddard: Elements of the Kato Language
85
K3
I
K3
CO
00
J.
04 00
I Ol OD
d» r* "T*
I
• *-» -ft /-». I *-* *-* *-* , *-» ,-^v«^ 0 08*^ '^ "^ '^ S »A 2 '^
flo <H^e9geo lo .« M «o .^ JJ^eo S * ** ^ S S S *"
Jl , VA ^ r^ f*i ht 00 d n ^ '*^ 9
S 2
^«Jm U mi rA ^ % mi 9mJ B^ eLmm "^ mi mi Km ^ ^ij O »;
<•* ^ >^ *-<' S3 ^*' fl8 ^^ *" ^-^ -S ^*' '*^ o "^ ^3 ^*' ^*' ^^^ ^ ^"^
S -i a
3
1
o
i I I I
o
.a
t~4 t~4 Q^
I
•^ «o *3 ^ q lo «
A4 5 04 9 04 9A4
f'W ^ s.^ ^ <>«« ^ >^
o
^ S S
4.^
ooei
^
^
s
9 Z^ S
9
^
? I u 1 :- 2 3 I S ii .- 1. ? s. I -a ? 2 ft ?
I
»j h) 'd ij
•J h)
0 ^
4
s
I
•^ « fl 'O 'O
d e» tA
« OB
OB tA OB
t«
0
JS 9
^
.M
K "b
s s s
I
ft '5; 1? a g s ^ I I a
€
10
0
J4
86 Un4verHtyof(kU%forniaPubUeat%<miinAm.AreKandEthn. [Vol. 11
DSfTBBPBBTATION OP TRACINGS
Plates 3 and 4 have nasal tracings for the upper line. These
are made as follows : a glass bulb open at each end is inserted in
one nostril, from the outer end of which a rubber tube passes
to a tambour having a rubber membrane rather tightly stretched.
To this rubber membrane a straw lever ending in a horn tracing
point is attached. As long as the posterior orifices of the nostrils
are closed by the velum the line will be straight, but as soon as
the velum falls the tracing point rises. The tracings show that
the vibrations are recorded both in the nasal consonants and
nasalized vowels, when the breath passes through the nose, and
in the pure vowels, when the nasal passage is closed. In the
latter case the vibrations must be transmitted through the soft
and hard palate.
In plates 1, 2, and 5-11 the upper line is from the larynx. A
metal tube ends in a cup-shaped termination over which a sheet
of thin rubber is stretched. This is applied to one side or the
front of the larynx. In these tracings the attachment was in
most cases to the front near the notch of the Adam's apple. The
subject's neck was soft and flabby, the larynx projecting but
slightly. The connection and tambour were the same as those
used for nasal tracings.
In both cases the points of the tracing levers were so adjusted
that vertical lines drawn with the instrument cut the two trac-
ings at synchronous points. The error due to irregularities of
the drum does not exceed a millimeter (about .02 second).
The lower line in the above mentioned plates and the tracings
in the remainder of the plates are made by the air column of
the breath taken from the lips by a metal mouthpiece fitting
closely and transmitted by a small rubber tube to a Marey tam-
bour. All the tracings were, with one or two exceptions, made
with the same tambour with no material change in its adjustment.
Vowels and semi-vowels result in more or less elevation of the
tracing point which inscribes the vibrations; these are in most
cases the fundamentals not the partials of the sounds. The liquid
1 has vibrations similar to those of the vowels, but usually shows
one or more deep notches at its beginning. The nasals result in
straight horizontal lines at the lowest level, since no breath issues
1912] Qoddard: Elements of the Kato Language 87
from the mouth during the articulation. The spirants are smooth
upward curves showing only the varying strength of the air-
column, which is controlled by the size of the opening of the
mouth passage and the lung pressure. The instrument is not
delicate enough to record the agitation of the air produced by
the rubbing against the opening which gives the spirants their
characteristic sounds.
The stops are shown by horizontal lines of the lowest level
during the period of closure, and by nearly or quite vertical
lines caused by the sudden release of air at the moment of
explosion. If the stop be a sonant the point immediately falls
and traces the vibrations. If an aspirated surd is spoken the
I)oint continues to rise or falls slowly without marking regular
vibrations. If the stop is accompanied by glottal action the
points fall sharply to or below the level marked by the tracer
during the closure, the vibrations beginning as it recovers from
this descent.
By observing the points where the vertical lines cut the
horizontal ones in plates 1-11, the exact beginning and end of
sonancy and nasalization can be ascertained as regards the move-
ments within the mouth indicated by the breath tracing. The
straight horizontal line is drawn mechanically while the pai>er is
on the drum and constitutes a time line extremely accurate, with
50 mm. equal to one second. The duration of words, syllables,
individual sounds, and often their component parts may be
quickly determined.
Varying elevations of the tracings of the same sound in the
same word indicate changing stress.. It is probable that vowels
being but slightly impeded in the passage through the mouth
regardless of their quality show stress. The amplitude of the
vibrations in the tracings varies with both stress and pitch, since
the natural i>eriod of the membrane and lever favors a certain
rate of vibration which its rendered more strongly. The pitch
can often be determined, relatively at least, by counting the
number of vibrations in a given length of base line.
Little can be determined as to the quality of the vowels by
tracings such as these.
TranmiiUed March 1, 1911.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1
LATEIAL SONANT AND 8PIBANT
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Fig. 1. — la* nes, raccoon. 112-5.
Fig. 2. — I'aci*, bnckeye. 94-6.
Fig. 8.— te'gMkdt, he swallowed. 109-7.
Fig. 4.— 6l4fi, yon get (imp.), 188-14.
Fig. 5. — kdwtostU, it was becoming hot. 172-14.
Fig. 6. — tc'ftsH*, he caught in a noose. 108-4.
Fig. 7. — ka si del*, we came up. 141-2.
Fig. 8. — nadil', sugar-pine. 89-17.
Fig. 9. — tc'nneLyH*, she eats up. 180-9.
[88]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 2
LATBIAL SPIRANT
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Fig. 1. — Ldn to ge nes, ' ' rodent ears long, ' ' a monse.
Fig. 2. — naL teds, she put a blanket. 180-7.
Fig. 8.— naL«j^ dog. 91-9.
Fig. 4. — tcakwdLgel', very dark. 74-8.
Fig, 5. — te'qaL ya'nl, he was walking they say. 98-12.
Fig. 6. — L'gde, rattlesnake. 91-17.
Tig, 7. — tc'hdltAgl, she is making basket.
Fig. 8. — Ld< Lts5, grass blue. 76-6.
[90]
EXPLANATION OF PLATB S
NA8AL8
Upi>er line from bulb in nostril, lower line breath.
Tig, 1. — et d nfi kw%n n^fti it had tamed blaek. 94-7.
lig, 2. — kwALiin ya' nl, they told him they say. 125-2.
Fig. 8.— n d«a ^ifi^ let us look. 168-1.
Fig. 4.— 6 to'Aii% to him. 79-9.
Fig. 5. — naslilL^ he beeame. 107-8.
J?ig. 6. — nas dtd lin ne, we have got baek. 95-12.
Fig. 7. — dLk'afii make a Are (pin. imp.). 108-7.
[92]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 4
NASALS
Upper line from bulb in noetnl, lower line breath.
Pig. 1.— ya« bl« ftfl«, sky in. 81-2.
Pig. 2. — wd'nteaS teeth large. 86-5.
Pig. 8. — n gtibi do*, it became none. 76-12.
Pig. 4. — ya'n 7a' nl, they said they say. 82-11.
Pig. 6.— kw6fl«, fire. 81-8.
Pig. 6.^ca«na«, creek. 79-8.
lig. 7.— ne« a n5% behind the hilL 16416.
Pig. 8.— km*, jnneberry. 188-8.
ilg. 9. — wa tc'a mi', hole in. 156-12.
[94]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 6
SPIRANTS
npi>er line larynx, lower line breath.
Fig. 1. — se, stone. 71 -S.
Hg. 2. — tc' nes tifi, he lay down. 175-11.
Fig. 8.— w6b, leg. 79-10.
Fig. 4.^etel*, my heart 101-5.
Fig. 5.— bee «ai«, I will try it 109-9.
Fig. 6. — tc'5g^ let him chew it
Fig. 7.— hakw dM', that time. 71-2.
Fig. 8. — nehinn5^Bi*, onr heads. 129-10.
^g' ••— y^S scoter (f), a bird. 122-6.
[96]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 6
LABIAL STOP AND NASAL
Upper line of ilgs. 1-4, 7, larynx, of figs. 5, 6, 8, from bulb in nostrily
lower line breath.
Fig. 1. — becdMde, take me np (plu.), 147-6.
iHg. 2. — be ne siL git di, I am afraid of. 130-15.
i^g. 8. — t b5e, it is round. 80-1.
Fig. 4. — da bes 7a', he climbed up. 180-6.
Fig. 5. — main, weaseL 74-2.
Fig. 6.— dd mM*, it is f uU. 129-13.
Fig. 7. — bi* sta, he was sitting in. 132-3.
iHg. 8. — ta tc'Clm milLy cook mush (imp. sing.). 163-14.
[98]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 7
DENTAL STOPS
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Pig. 1.— d5, not 137-2.
fHg. 2. — de t giin '^y he put in the Are. 168-17.
IHg. 8. — da' n die ge*, I will pick you up. 141-4.
Pig. 4.— tfi, water. 71-1.
Pig. 5. — te' nd ddg ge*, we will put in water. 139-9.
Pig. 6. — ndte'iintd*, water eame so far. 75-1.
Pig. 7.— t'a«, feather. 105-14.
fHg. 8. — a t'a, her blanket fold. 181-9.
Pig. 9. — tele t'a td le, I will feather arrows. 156-5.
[100]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 8
SONANT PALATAL STOPS
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Rg. 1.— gdh ttikf it burst 182-5.
Ilg. 2. — te't te gftfl tcl% it was about to dawn.
Fig. 8.— Ltsdgftfi, fox. 78-8.
Fig. 4. — ttc ge*, I will carry. 135-4.
Fig. 5. — naw5^ nie, you (plu.) played. 184-17.
Ilg. 0.— te tel GO, I cried. 140-6.
Fig. 7. — q5, worm.
Fig. 8. — tc'ds qdt, lie speared it 128-18.
Tig. 9. — kwnataQha% without his knowledge.
[102]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 9
SUBD PALATAL STOPS
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Fig. 1. — kal^a'i it sprang up (of vegetation). 76-10.
Pig. 2.— n^ ka«, two. 178-4.
Tig. 8. — te'g^kt^, a boat went. 126-7.
Pig. 4.— ddkwatlfi, lie never did that. 180-14.
Pig. 5.— ktrnlLifi*, he looked at him. 134-2.
Pig. 6.— k'tteLto5t, he stole. 118-11.
Pig. 7.— gftlk'afi, there was a fire. 162-18.
Pig. 8.— t k'an yl ddk, up the ridge. 99-8.
Pig. 9.— 5 tei k'wat', on his tail. 162-14.
[104]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 10
AWWtlCATPrEB
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Fig. 1.— t^n nas djdl'y it rolled ont of the fire. 147-9.
Pig. 2. — kwna' tlLtei, make him live.
Pig. 3.— te'giinjae, he broke off. 79-12.
Pig. 4.— te' tdL k'%s dja<, let him drop. 129-8.
]^g. 5. — nateM, orphan. 102-6.
Pig. 6. — te'e na gtt dae, he came out again. 149-18.
Pig. 7.— ta^ji nee till, where is he Ijingf 182-8.
Fig. 8. — naLe6te, grass-snake. 84-5.
Pig. 9.— ye'tc'giinyai, he went in. 97-11; 132-13.
[106]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 11
lOSOXLLANlOnS
Upper line larynx, lower line breath.
Pig. 1. — wBkfotB, one ftide, away from.
Pig. 2.— k*Ifi«, jnneberry. 133-8.
Pig. 3. — waLk'%t8% he put in. 105-14.
Kg. 4.— tV, raw. 91-5.
Pig. 5. — cbiit', my stomach.
Pig. 6. — Be q5t', a headdress. 170-17.
Pig. 7. — setOnai, stone-flsh (sword-fisht). 80-1.
Pig. 8.— tc'iis t'Ok', he flaked. 150-7.
Pig. 9.— to ne« Ofi<, water behind. 120-0.
[108]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 12
MONOSYLLABIC NOUNS
Fig. 1.— aS oloudB. 74-6.
Kg. 2.— ya% sky. 77-18.
Kg. 8.— ya«, loose. 162-6.
Fig. 4. — yae, inow. 74-8.
Fig. 6.— wdB, leg. 79-10.
Fig. 6. — Ldk*, fteel-head salmon. 84-6.
Tig. 7. — LCit, smoke. 141-2.
Fig. 8.— L5S herb. 71-8.
Fig. 9. — se<, stone. 71-8.
Fig. 10. — slASy gronnd-squirret 78-7.
Fig. 11.— ca< , sun. 74-9.
Fig. 12. — eek', sputnuL 164-14.
Fig. 13.— beL, rope. 101-7.
Fig. 14.— bAs, sUde of soil. 86-11.
Fig. 16. — 16, water. 71-1.
Fig. 16. — ges, salmon. 84-3.
Fig. 17. — kdSy eongh.
Hg. 18. — k'te, alder.
Fig. 19.— k'waS f at. 88-16.
Kg. 20.— kHifl«, haael. 188-10.
[110]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 13
NOUNS WITH POSSKSSIVX PREFIXES
Fig. 1.— at% her blanket fold. 181-9.
Fig. 2. — fi t'a m, her dress. 105-6.
Pig. 3. — a tea*, her apron. l(M5-8.
Fig. 4.— a sS'y his tongue. 110-3.
Fig. 6.— a na*, his eye. 152-10.
Fig. 6.— fl ts'6«, her milk.
Pig. 7.— fl siits, its hide. 110-4.
I^g. 2. — 5 di ee'y its shoulder. 75-1.
Fig. 9.— a de«, its horn. 74-10.
Pig. 10. — nat,' your sister. 132-4.
Fig. 11. — c tc ge, my grandfather. 153-10.
Pig. 12. — c ne*, my leg.
Fig. 13. — c qdt', my knee.
Fig. 14.— c dji*, my heart.
Pig. 15. — s te5y my grandmother. 97-16.
[112]
4
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 14
NOUNS WITH P0SSBS8IVS PftEllXBS.
Fig. 1. — kwlbnt, coosin. 145-2.
Fig. 2. — eihi dl, mj ooosiiL 145>S.
Fig. 3. — baeiy his nephew. 145-8.
Fig. 4.— kw6% his teeth. 181-8.
Fig. 5.— kw tc!«, his tail.
Fig. 6. — kaetc, knife. 110-10.
Hg. 7. — kw da'y his mouth. 12S-2.
Fig. 8. — kwkwe', his foot. 82-5.
Fig. 9.— ski, boy. 102-6.
Fig. 10.— sUk, children. 182-8.
Tig. 11. — c tea djiL, mj kidney. 133-3.
Fig. 12. — kw si' da*, his crown. 79-4.
Fig. 18. — s tcaitc, mj grandchild. 97-16.
Fig. 14. — g^ ted, redwood, 86-8.
Fig. 15.— ges tc5, elk. 71-5.
Fig. 16.— dCictc, qnaa 72-5.
[114]
Pig.
1.
Fig.
2.
Kg.
8.
Fig.
4.
Fig.
5.-
Fig.
6.
Fig.
7.-
Fig.
8.-
Fig.
9.-
Fig.
10.
Fig.
11.-
Fig.
12.
Tig,
18.'
Fig.
14.
Fig.
15.-
Fig.
16.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 15
NOUNS WITH SXTFFIZIS
jictc, wolf. 71-6.
tk6cU; ehestnut. 89-8.
tkaetc5, pelican. 72-13.
•yited, danee house. 83-11.
ts'M teL, turtle (bone broad). 90-14.
tetUi ta* , among trees. 171-9.
5 de* L gai, its horn white. 161-16.
ja* L gai, louse white,
ten gaite, tail white. 18812.
gesLeAfi*, salmon blaok. 86-2.
na L ^k, eye shining. 181-9.
elc bi*, red earth in (a mountain). 102-15.
je* bi^ M, house in. 110-15.
je* bik, house inside. 99-5.
ya^ biky sky inside. 101-15.
bfitsrai', seaguU. 122-6.
[116]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 16
NOUNS WITH SXTmZXS
Fig. l.— 7i<tiU^ gat, house middle. 142-18.
Pig. 2. — gatto5', barnacle.
Pig. 8. — set^ts, stone rough (sand-stone). 77-9.
Pig. 4.— ne«L«iit, world middle. 75-8.
Pig. 5. — Liie t tc6, rotten log. 184-15.
Pig. 6. — eifihat, summer time. 155-1.
Pig. 7.— ta L*iit; ocean middle. 126-8.
Hg. 8.— watc'afiy hole. 78-8.
Pig. 9. — nilnje* taa, ground under is found (bulbs). 148-8.
Pig. 10.— nal tc'iU, white thorn. 91-14.
Pig. 11.— naL gi, dog. 91-9.
Pig. 12.— L tao, black oak. 89-17.
Pig. 13. — na nee, people. 71-7.
Pig. 14. — sek'at'y grinding stone. 137-16.
Pig. 15. — ndfi k UM, pounded seeds. 94-4.
[118]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 17
POLYSTLLABIO NOUNS
Pig. 1.— I da« kw, Wailaki or Yuki 170-9.
Pig. 2.— na« c6 k V , robin. 72-9.
Pig. 3. — 8eLte'5!y heron. 72-4.
Rg. 4. — ea^na*y stream 79-3.
Pig. 5. — ban t6', ocean. 86-10.
I^g. 6. — eae dtA, bear elover. 94-9.
Pig. 7.~belifi, eeL 9015.
Hg. 8. — ban tc6, mnssel. 84-13.
Pig. 9.— htm biinte, an owL 92-8.
Pig. 10. — bel get, fish spear. 133-8.
Pig.ll.— belkats, pole of fish-spear. 128-12.
Pig. 12.— htm te 15, owl. 72-2.
Pig. 13.— tdn n!, road. 78-4.
Pig. 14. — da teants, erow. 72-15.
Pig. 15.— t'e ki, girls. 111-2.
[120]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 18
POLYSYLLABIC NOUNS
Fig. 1.— te le«, sack. 113-7.
Fig. 2. — te'a la, Bon-flower. 188-6.
Fig. 8.— te'ah^, frog. 112-11.
Fig. 4.— teftn te' bao, a bird. 72-11.
Fig. 5.— te' kak', net. 84-8.
Fig. 6. — tedb^, poison. 163-7.
Kg. 7. — g6jane% stars. 74-7.
Fig. 8. — k^ kits, old man. 108-2.
Fig. 9.— te' s! teM, coyote. 72-1.
Fig. 10.— kwi yint, pigeon. 78-12.
Fig. 11.— k'ftn ta gite, jackrabbit 78-6.
Fig. 12.— L tsd gftii, fox. 73-3.
Fig. 18.— s taite, eotten-taU rabbit. 155-12.
Fig. 14.— jis kan, day. 100-12.
Kg, 15.— yis t'6t', fog. 126-2.
[122]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 19
NOUNS 07 VERBAL OBIOIN
lig, 1. — nadeLtey a small pine. 88-11.
Fig. 2. — biiL gtLl gas, fire-Bticks. 110-11.
Fig. 3. — ba na t'ai, post of danee-hoase. 180-17.
Fig. 4.— t biiL, bnrden basket 179-11.
Tig. 5.— ddl kiits, fawn. 108-9.
Fig. 6. — ts'fis n5', mountain. 71-2.
Fig. 7. — tc'n naL dM, adolescent girL 109-9.
Kg. 8.— tc' ga ts V, twine. 116-10.
Fig. 9. — teaLnly mountain robin. 72-4.
Fig. 10.-> te' ga' , basket-pan. 113-10.
Fig. 11.— tc' w6c tee*, foam. 85-3.
Fig. 12.— kwiin teL bi*, vaUey. 1 74-9.
Fig. 18. — teiin niiL tcihite, Lewis ' woodpecker. 72-8.
Fig. 14. — be daiL tclk tody a woodpecker, "its head red large.''
[124]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 20
POLYSTLLABIO NOUNS
Pig. 1.— 5 tcl* k'wftt', its tail on. 162-14.
lig. 2. — L5n L gaiy wood-rat, ' ' rodent white. ' ' 78-9.
Pig. 3. — yaiintail*, mole. 96-6.
Pig. 4. — Ld^ n'ai, grass game. 146-11.
Pig. 5. — ne' ddl bai, a pine. 86-18.
Pig. 6.— yfi'tcil'ifi, abalone. 12417.
Pig. 7. — ts'e k'e neets, day eel, ''navel long.'' 91-2.
Pig. 8.— td bfit ted, water-panther. 177-18.
Pig. 9. — ne' te U', earthquake.
Tig. 10.— tak', three. 101-4.
Pig. 11. — kwe'ntelts, black-crowned night heron, "foot broad."
Pig. 12.— td nai L tsd, blue cat-fish( f ), < < fish blue. ' ' 124-15.
Pig. 18. — yi ban n^ ka', seven, ' ' beyond two. ' ' 166-1.
Kg. 14. — y6 yi nfiik*, way south. 75-6.
Pig. 15.— di ntk', south. 75-6.
[126]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 21
ADVIBBS, PABTIGLB8, KTC.
Fig. l.-> 6 heS 80 it iB. 178-14.
Pig. 2.— 5 yeS under it. 101-6.
Pig. 3.-> 5 lai<, its top, on it. 10818.
f^g. 4.— 5dai', outside. 98-4.
Pig. 5. — j6 yi de*, way north. 77-1.
Pig. 6. — yi, right here.
Pig. 7. — yd 6ft, over there, further. 127-14.
Tig. 8. — yi baft, other side. 138-4.
Fig. 9.— Lba*ftfiha*, both sides. 75-7.
Pig. 10.— Le ne ha', aU. 83-4.
Pig. 11.— L ta} ki, different kinds. 88-1.
Pig. 12. — nftn kwi ye, underground. 75-8.
Pig. 18.— Mkts, slowly. 140-16.
Pig. 14.— he Vl% yes. 82-2.
Pig. 15. — hayi, those people. 171-19.
[128]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 22
FBONOlTNSy ADVERBS, ETO.
Fig. 1. — ca tc'dn ge Ian, he got for me.
Fig. 2. — cl ye* ye% my house. 141-6.
Fig. 8.— oofLkkwa'kQ, he did well. 104-6; 154-5.
Fig. 4.— tadindji, whatforf
Fig. 5.— di, this. 74-9.
Fig. 6. — da tUta, soon. 136-5.
Fig. 7.— ta'dji, where! 182-8.
Fig. 8.— dd, not 79-4.
Fig. 9. — td 5 tcifi a, water in front of. 77-7.
Fig. 10. — kae bi*, tomorrow. 104-9.
Fig. 11. — k'to dit'y some days ago. 137-5.
Fig. 12. — kftn dihite, close by. 79-6.
Fig. 18. — k'iin dtH, yesterday. 128-7.
Fig. 14.— k'^t de*, soon. 96-4.
Fig. 15. — kwiini4fi, enough. 77-8.
[130]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 23
PBinZES or VKBBS
Fig. 1. — 7a* gdLgal, he threw up. 142-3.
Fig. 2.— je^ tc' gfln yai, he went in. 132-13.
Fig. 8. — wa* ^ k^ she gave him. 129-4.
Fig. 4. — wa nOn Usl htA, it will blow through. 80-14.
Fig, 5. — Le gea ^a*, it was eneireling. 82-15.
Fig. 6. — na nihi dae, come down.
Fig. 7. — na ea*, I go about. 188-6.
Fig. 8. — nai *ai bM, it will be across.
Fig. 9.— na des b!l*, he spilled. 128-2.
Fig. 10.— ntn s'CUi dtk k'e*, he got up. 98-5.
Fig. 11. — nO ga '^c, he put along. 86-11.
Fig. 12. — benlLke'e, I have finished. 82-15.
Fig. 18. — bd dfiL, let us elimb.
Fig. 14. — da* bes ya*, he elimbed up. 180-6.
Fig. 15. — de dtH *^Cf jovl put on the fire. 131-9.
[132]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 24
PREFIXES or VEBBS
Fig. 1. — tate'$b<!Uiy make soup (pin.). 123-13.
Fig. 2. — tagiitt'atSy they butchered. 175-4.
Pig. 3. — te' n6 dftg ge*, we will put in water. 139-9.
Fig. 4. — tc'e niin yae, come out.
Fig. 5. — dje' gdL tcel, she split open. 129-3.
Fig. 6.— -kwanS* te, look for it 164-11.
Fig. 7. — ka nac, it came up. 81-2.
Fig. 8.— kwfin ye« gfil lat, it sank. 174-12.
Fig. 9. — kwAt tc' gfin yai, he went down. 116-5.
Fig. 10. — nes5L7^y you (plu.) ate up. 136-16.
Fig. 11.— 6c l%fi«, I wiU get. 137-2.
Fig. 12. — na die tea, let me eat a meal.
Fig. 13. — d6 kd gis ill, one couldn 't see. 81-1.
Fig. 14. — tc't teL bail, he walked lame. 133-6.
Fig. 15.— di kwa'L sifi, he did this way. 79-12.
[134]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 25
VXBBAL PREFIXES, SUBJECTIVSS AND OBJECTIVES
Fig. 1. — n5* eta gaL, throw me. 133-4.
Fig. 2.— ne «5 dOfi, you wiU die. 177-4.
Fig. 8. — ya* tc' kw neL ifi*, they saw him.
Fig. 4. — te'e n$* niifi a ne, he killed us. 117-6.
Fig. 5. — natc'5^ Ld, set snares (plu. imp.). 108-2.
Fig. 6. — tc' nihi yai, he came there. 142-14.
Fig. 7. — si yi ne, I stand.
Fig. 8. — giin nes, it became long. 87-1.
Fig. 9.— gat tc'aft*, he shot. 110-18.
Fig. 10. — giiL teat, he shouted. 165-9.
Fig. 11.— ka* dat tea*, well, let us bury. 149-7.
Fig. 12.-— te'n ne giiL 'iiL, he looked at it. 15616.
Fig. 13.— 5^ t gfte, look at them. 164-9.
Fig. 14.— tc' kiin nee, he talked. 160-1.
[136]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 26
YIBBAL SUFFIZXS
Fig. 1. — nin 7%fi kw%fi Clii gi, it hM cleared off. 168-1.
Fig. 2. — te' sift M gi, he is standing.
Fig. 3. — nftn jiL t'5 gfit, when he stung. 156-15.
Tig. 4. — te'gOfial* ya^ni, he chewed it thej say. 109-7.
Fig. 5. — tc' kwL 15 ^iit, when he fooled them. 136-14.
Fig. 6. — tc* nfln ja htt, when he came.
ilg. 7. — d5 dM siis he, we did not see. 116-18.
Fig. 8. — nategi!^*^ he stood them up along. 88-13.
Fig. 9.— k^l^aibCdi, it will grow up. 84-11.
Fig. 10.— L kV htn dja% let it be fat. 85-14.
[138]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 27
8UVFIXE8 OF VERBS
Fig. 1. — nifijande*, when it eleared off. 167-17.
Fig. 2. — kwCln teL t§ lit, it was beeoming flat. 107-3.
Fig. 8.— ntc ifi< t$ le, I wiU look. 165-4.
Fig. 4. — be nae *ai' t§ le, I will try it again. 189-1.
Kg. 5. — kte na* dja*, I want to live. 171-7.
Fig. 6. — tc'aL Ul dja*, let him make. 140-2.
Fig. 7. — ka gi!^ *%L kwafty they had sprung up along. 87-13.
Fig. 8. — tc' teL bdL kw%fi, he had hung up. 176-3.
Fig. 9. — nes ja ng kwa n^, thej were ripe. 94-4.
Fig. 10. — n he 5l ka kwie, we will spend the night probably. 105-3.
[140]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 28
VERBAL 8TXM8
Hg. 1. — n^ diU *a*y let us make a dam. 168-11.
Fig. 2. — na t gi!^ *a*, he stood it up. 76-6.
Fig. 3. — na nM *ai, a flsh-weir. 138-9.
Fig. 4. — dl 'An es *a*, np there in a row. 109-10.
Fig. 5.— be yaL «ai«, they tried it. 85-2.
Tig, 6. — ye* s^ane, house stands. 141-5.
Kg. 7.— n6'«ac n5hifl, put, you (plu.). 110-11.
Hg. 8.— n6< «n btlfi, you must stay (plu.). 105-2.
Fig. 9.— tc' nM «il«, they sat down. 170-8.
Fig. 10.— nftc «I ne, I saw it. 137-1.
Fig. 11.— n dM <ifi% let us look. 168-1.
Fig. 12. — kw^ *! ne, I always do that
Fig. 13.— n5 hill kwa^iifi*, you (plu.) do that. 118-4.
[142]
¥■
>
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 29
VERBAL STIMS
Fig. 1. — nas ^ttB, be ran about. 184-3.
Fig. 2. — tc'tesjai, be went. 116-9.
Fig. 3. — k' g§ 'dts, be was sbooting along. 144-10.
Fig. 4. — jJUn tee yai, tbey came togetber.
Fig. 5. — cak'efiyai, son went down.
Fig. 6. — niyaye, I came tbere. 136-17.
Fig. 7. — cgijaly I am sleepy. 164-4.
Fig. 8. — tc' nftn ya ya' ni, be came tbere tbey say. 101-10.
Fig. 9.— tc' gftn yan«, be ate of it. 129-5.
Fig. 10.— tc'6< y^, you (plu.) eat. 148-6.
Fig. 11. — tc'g^nyaL, walk (sing. imp.).
Fig. 12. — n5 nftn yifi, tbey were living. 160-12.
I^g. 13. — te'iiny^, you eat (sing. imp.). 125-7.
Fig. 14. — tc't defi fiel*, be stopped crying. 148-4.
[144]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 30
TIBBAL STEMS
Rg. 1. — dd 8 dji' kw ja nSy I do not like him. 13643.
Pig. 2. — do ha' ka ndn t j^A, do not be ashamed. 141-8.
Pig. 3. — bCUii tc' gftt yifi, he doctored.
Pig. 4. — na' gis jite, he rested. 161-4.
Pig. 5. — na dfil ^e, let ns rest. 140-18.
Pig. 6. — wM giittyae, some become old. 107-11.
Pig. 7. — kwfiLyic, he whistled.
Pig. 8. — tie jit, I will make a house. 168-6.
Pig. 9. — s'Ctsji'y he made a house. 168-7.
Fig. 10. — gftl yi' ja' ni, he built a house they say. 83-11.
Pig. 11.— tc'nnfiLySL, let it blow. 80-13.
Pig. 12. — tciim meL yits, a stick he tied. 169-5.
Pig. 13. — kwihi tin ydt, they ran after him.
[146]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 31
VERBAL STEMS
Fig. 1. — kanagftll^y she digs out.
Fig. 2. — (fi) na' te'e na lai, her eye she took out. 152-9.
IHg. 3. — kwai' la' ja' ni, he did it they say.
Fig. 4.— dl kwa' lao, he did this way. 154-5.
Fig. 5. — 05' gi la GO, I fixed it good. 7642.
Fig. 6. — bel get k'wCUi nd* 1%C; spear point put it on (pL imp.). 138-8.
Fig. 7. — k'wCUi nfil ItlCy put it on (sing. imp.).
Fig. 8. — ntdli^Ly let him sleep.
Fig. 9.— c5' 5cleS I will fix good, 77-3.
Fig. 10. — n tes laL ya' ni, he went to sleep they say. 83-4.
Fig. 11. — n5hin ntO*l%Ly you (pin.) go to sleep. 110-16.
[148]
Kg.
1.
Kg.
2.-
Kg.
8.
Kg.
4.-
Kg.
5.
Kg.
6.
Kg.
7.-
Kg.
8/
Kg.
9..
Kg.
10.-
Kg.
11..
Kg.
12.-
Kg.
18.
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 82
VERBAL STEMS
te'dle', he sang. 149-11.
naigdlleOy fish were swimming down. 128-12.
s'Clsl]fi% he became. 84-11.
te'e gftl le'y he commenced singing. 105-11.
kakdsile; I am sick.
nas )i', he tied up. 145-7.
tc'tBU'f he caught in a noose. 108-4.
gfilldty it was burning. 178-16.
gftlldstdle^ yon wiU bring. 186-5.
tc't te 16S; palled repeatedly. 175-2.
w^tc'kdliiky he told about it 161-18.
tal Ions, soft 179-12.
kwm lac M gi, it looks like. 170-14.
[150]
awn;
nsjjij
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 33
VIBBAL 8TBM8
Fig. 1. — te'geLna% he roasted.
Fig. 2.— bee na% I will roast 168-16.
Fig. 3. — kae iia% I want to live. 182-5.
Fig. 4. — na edL na biifi, jon must examine me. 166-10.
Rg. 5. — ta ja' 6 nifi, let them drink. 123-6.
Fig. 6. — te't tdg gtbini, it makes a noise.
Fig. 7. — te't tiig gftn ni, it thundered. 77-10.
Fig. 8. — kagftnn%e, he came up. 75-2.
Fig. 9.— heii< te'nni, yes he said. 82-2; 102-8.
Fig. 10. — gta I4fi, became many. 83-14.
Fig. 11. — gftn lA ne, have become many. 169-10.
[152]
y
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 34
VERBAL STEMS
Fig. 1. — bind* Le% soak them (imp. plu.). 110-6.
Fig. 2. — b! nd gfth Lek, they soaked them. 179-1.
Fig. 3. — nanihiLat, jump across, (imp. sing.).
Fig. 4. — te'enaniAi he ran out. 142-6.
Fig. 5.— n L^ts, it is stout. 78-12.
Fig. 6. — tc'fiL ts^Uy he found. 97-4.
Fig. 7.— (d5 ha') te'tLL tsa ne, he did not find.
Fig. 8.— gfiLtsai, it was dry. 123-4.
Fig. 9. — ddgCQsan, it was never found. 179-6.
Fig. 10. — nihis^t, sit down (sing. imp.). 140-18.
Fig. 11. — kwiin sat, deep water. 74-10.
[154]
Fig.
1.-
Kg.
2.
Rg.
8.-
Fig.
4,-
Fig.
5.
Fig.
6.
Fig.
7.
Fig.
8.
Fig.
9.
Fig.
10.
Fig.
11.
Fig.
12.
Fig.
13.
Fig.
14.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 85
VERBAL STSICS
ndsil, I am sweaty,
dtatsd, blue. 118-18.
be nd^ sMy you hide (plo. imp.). 118-4.
te'teLsiifiy he hung up. 176-18.
dd ki0 ne sftfi, I was insensible. 182-17.
t4t dCd vta, we dragged out.
te' gftn siity he pounded up. 80-5.
> tB sftt, I will pound. 110-8.
k'gtbisiit, she pounded. 185-9.
naca% I go about. 138-6.
• te' gftn eai, she buried in ashes. 129-2.
k'wtlt te'e ja ce^ , they spit on. 154-14.
ka te' g(ie el', they dug. 148-11.
• ka te' gtbi ei', they were digging. 148-8.
[156]
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 86
VKBBAL 8TKH8
Pig. 1. — ne5nne, it is good. 77-4,
Fig. 2. — iiLefifi', black. 86-2.
Fig. 8. — gCkLefdi', it smells good.
Fig. 4.— kwa gtt te^t', they fed her. 151-15.
Fig. 5. — d5 DEL ban ne, he was not lame. 184-5.
Fig. 6.— dd tS he* e, I am tired. 98-1.
Fig. 7. — nlfi ddfihe'M, are you tired (sing.). 141-1.
Fig. 8. — d5 tS de he* e, we are tired. 116-17.
i^g. 9. — ndlufi na^be, swim (pin. imp.). 111-2.
Fig. 10. — ya* te'be, they were picking.
Kg. 11.— t b5c, round. 80-1.
Fig. 12.— c5llk ttit htl, well it rains. 74-4.
Fig. 18.— te t bn«, it rained. 81-1.
[158]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 87
VERBAL BTUCS
Fig. 1.— demim< (din b(iii<), it was fulL 12942.
Pig. 2. — te't teL b^, he hung it up.
Pig. 3.— taebdl, I will hang np. 115-6.
Pig. 4. — tc'w6< bftL, carry it (plu. imp.). 110-15.
Pig. 5. — ta te'iini mth, cook mush (sing. imp.). 163-14.
Pig. 6. — tatc'd* bftL, cook mush (plu. imp.). 128-18.
Kg. 7. — ftbida, you stay (sing. imp.). 79-7.
Pig. 8. — te'n nes dai, he sat down. 161-10.
Pig. 9. — ntit dac, I will dance. 103-9.
Pig. 10. — tc'e na gtt dac, he came out again. 149-13.
Pig. 11. — te' giin dac kwafi, he had danced.
Pig. 12. — kasidel% we came up. 141-2.
Pig. 13. — Le ne* ha* tc'n niin del*, all came up.
[160]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 38
VERBAL STEMS
Fig. 1.— te't tee dd le, they went on. 10812.
Fig. 2. — ti dftL, let us go. 141-6.
Fig. 3. — te^ na te'QL deo, she washed them.
Fig. 4. — cCin di ne, the sun shines. 182-13.
Fig. 5.— n d6« hM, it wiU not be. 80-13.
Fig. 6. — ndS'je, there is none. 109-1.
Fig. 7. — eedClnne, I died.
Fig. 8. — tc'CiLdClky crack them (sing. imp.). 138-2.
Fig. 9.— ce e dftn tfi le, I will die. 177-5.
Fig. 10. — te* tc' giin tal', he stepped in water.
Fig. 11.— tc't tafi «im gi, he is eating. 174-1.
[162]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 89
VSBBAL STEMB
Fig. l.— kaktond^te, look for him. 160-1.
Fig. 2. — de die t^fi, I put in the fire.
Fig. 8.— begiinteo, he taught. 122-11.
Fig. 4. — tein nd* niin tie, hide yoanelf (ling.).
Fig. 5.— nee tifi, it is lying. 182-8.
Fig. 6.— n5*tie, put it (plu. imp.). 168-13.
Hg. 7. — niin B'tbi tifi, he pieked him up. 179-14.
Fig. 8. — t^ nas tift, she took out again. 129*2.
Fig. 9.— ei si tine, I lay. 175-16.
Fig. 10. — nd niL ti ne, he put it.
Fig. 11. — na te'dL tdfi', he snapped it
[164]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 40
VERBAL STSlfS
Pig. 1.— gOL tiik, it burst. 182-5.
Pig. 2.— k'tL t'dt', he sacked it. 159-2.
Pig. 8. — tBttine, it is eold.
Pig. 4.— s dji dL tdk, kill me (plu. imp.). 151-8.
Pig. 5.— te'ic f a td le, I will feather. 156-5.
Pig. 6.— niinfao, it flew. 18211.
Pig. 7. — ae t'e ye, I am.
Pig. 8.— ^ t'e jeS it is cooked. 163-15.
Pig. 9. — na kto nic t'a kwic, I am going to sling at him. 122-14.
Pig. 10. — ndhifi t5Lfe, jon cook (pin. imp.). 167-16.
Pig. 11. — n5h!fi te'nndLt'y, yon cnt them (pin. imp.). 166-15.
Pig.l2.— tc'nneslLt'ats, I cnt it np. 188-15.
[166]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 41
VERBAL STEMS
Pig. 1. — k'gftLts'eo, he ate soup.
Pig. 2. — n^jlLtsilL, it beat against. 86-12.
Pig. 3. — t^ nas djol*, he rolled out of fire. 147-9.
Pig. 4. — na d€Q teafi kwail, he had eaten.
Pig. 5. — na te'aL, he was chewing. 143-8.
Pig. 6. — na die tean ne, I ate. 171-9.
Pig. 7. — s*^ te'afi, he shot it.
Pig. 8. — i!U:^teI, make it. 79-8.
Pig. 9.— te'gai ten, he kept making. 144-8.
Pig. 10.— 6 tc'6 ni tea ne, I left him. 117-17.
Pig. 11. — te' giin tee Ge, he cried.
Pig. 12.— tc* te giis tci*, nearly daylight.
Pig. 13. — tc'^ giin tee', he was angry.
[168]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 42
VEBBAL STEMS
Fig. 1. — ei tesiLtedl*, I stole.
Fig. 2. — gOl tcdty he caught them.
Fig. 3. — na gClL tetUi ya* ni, he got wet they say. 126-16.
Fig. 4. — tc'eLteiity stretch it out (sing. imp.). 77-18.
Fig. 5. — tc'eL tci* ya* ni, he caught it they say. 142-5.
Fig. 6. — na ga kw^, he had walked. 154-12.
Fig. 7. — ntbn ic g^, let me chop.
Fig. 8. — nCbi st^ gal, you beat f 129-10.
Fig. 9.— tc't gaft«, it is mouldy. 167-16.
Fig. 10. — tc' gtn ga ne, he killed.
ilg. 11. — k'e g^L gal*, she threw away.
Fig. 12. — na' deL g^ kw^, he had poured. 125-13.
[170]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 43
YBBBAL STEMS
Fig. 1. — gCdgeld, it was getting late.
Fig. 2. — n hdc t ge*, let me see 70a. 142-6.
Fig. 3.— tc't tes gift, he carried. 101-9.
Fig. 4. — te'9 na gdt gftc, he looked baek. 87-13.
Fig. 5. — tc'On t gets', he looked at them.
Tig. 6. — te^ n5 diig ge', we will put in water. 139-9.
Fig. 7. — te'n ntg gdc, she brings in. 180-9.
Fig. 8.— n!£^ne% I bring. 188-14.
Fig. 9.— te'n niiii fiifi, he brought. 185-11.
Fig. 10.— s^ gin 7a* ni, he killed they say. 141-13.
Fig. 11.— Lei Tits', he tied together. 174-15.
[172]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 44
VIKBAL STKMS
Fig. 1. — te' q^ 7a' ni, he walked they say. 93-12.
Fig. 2.— t ffin gats', it was getting thick. 126-11.
Fig. 3. — be nS ^ git de, I am getting afraid. 180-15.
Fig. 4. — te'geqOt, they stretched. 114-1.
ilg. 5. — te'e naiL gat de, he sewed up. 122-13.
Fig. 6.— nd na'fi fi%t, he untied it. 122-15.
Fig. 7.— diiqdt, spear it. 128-12.
Fig. 8. — nCbi On dfik k V, get up (sing. imp.). 100-8.
Fig. 9.— dd tc't tftL k'fte, it did not lighten. 74-6.
Fig. 10. — n hes ka n!, we spent the night. 167-7.
Fig. 11.— n5 na nl kats', I f eU back. 182-16.
[174]
EXPLANATION OP PLATE 45
VEBBAL STXlfS
Tig, 1. — ha 71 kdwakacy that one give him (a basket of food).
Pig. 2.— na< ke', bathe (plu. imp.). 17214.
Pig. 8. — bel ke', he finished.
Pig. 4. — ndc k€kt, I want to swallow you. 181-14.
Pig. 5.— te' giil kftt, he swallowed. 109-7.
Pig. 6. — Le ne' ha' te'n niU kAt, aU they came. 154-12.
Pig. 7.— d5 ba« tc't teL kiit, they did not go. 167-17.
Tig, 8. — da ha« cd d5L kiHt, do not ask me. 166-8.
Tig, 9. — nftn neL k'ai ya' ni, he hit they say. 156-14.
Pig. 10. — gfii k'%n, there was a fire. 162-13.
Pig. 11. — fiL k'afi, make a fire. 127-11.
Pig. 12.— t gM k'ate', it got sour.
[176]
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 1 1, No. 2, pp. 177-188 April 30, 1814
PHONETIC ELEMENTS OF THE
DIEGUENO LANGUAGE
BY
A. L. KEOEBEE and J. P. HABBINGTON
An opportunity afforded A. L. Kroeber to hear Diegueno as
spoken by Bosendo Curo of Mesa Grande, San Diego County,
California, in June, 1912, revealed great resemblances and some
striking differences between its sounds and those of its sister
tongue Mohave, likewise of Tuman family, of which a laboratory
analysis had previously been made.^ On the whole, the experi-
ence gained with Mohave made the phonetic elements of Diegueno
seem easily recognizable.' Independent observations on the
phonetics of the language courteously furnished by Mr. J. P.
Harrington, who has had a brief opportunity to hear Diegueno,
have been added as notes initialled by him.
POSITION
The points of articulation for consonants in Diegueno are the
same as in Mohave. The palatal and velar stops, k and q, kw
and qw, are i>erhaps less clearly distinguished. The dental and
palatal-alveolar stops, t and t^ ^^^ formed as in Mohave, and
1 Present series, x, 45-96, 1911.
2 Some Dieguefio words recorded a number of years previously from
Salidon and (hiorato of San Felipe, then at Pala, were also available.
T. T. Waterman has a phonetic key in the introduction, and a nomber of
words in the body, of his "Religious Practices of the Dieguefio Indians''
(Present series, vni, 271-358, 1910) and J. P. Harrington some notes in
Joum. Am. Folk-Lore, xxi, 324, 1908. There are said to be two Dieguefio
dialects, the southern being spoken at Manzanita, Gampo, and La Posta.
The northern dialect is the only one referred to here.
1 78 University of CaHfomia Fublioatums in Am. Arch, and Eihn, [VoL 11
occur in the same stems ; only in the word for earth, number 49
in the appended list of words, was palatal % heard in Mohave
and interdental t in Diegueno. No general transposition of any
sound to a more forward or backward formation is noticeable,
except the uniform change of Mohave 8 to Diegueno y.
STOPS
The Diegueno stops, which are p, t, t> k> kw, q, qw, with
which can be reckoned the affricative tc, are subject to the same
rule that applies in Mohave and in a number of other native
American languages : when initial or medial, they are half voiced,
the explosion but not the occlusion being sonant; when final or
followed by another consonant, they are entirely unvoiced and
more strongly aspirated.
The stops on the whole show little change between the two
languages. There are a few instances of stop and nasal inter-
changing; but they are uncommon. Such are : Mohave t becomes
Diegueno n (nos. 1, 2 of the list)'; and Mohave m becomes
Diegueno p (3, 4, 15, 30).*
NASALS
M, n, and ny also usually coincide in Mohave and Diegueno.
Compare numbers 5, 10, 13, 18, 21, 22, 27, 29, 36, 37, and others
in the list.
FBICATIVBS
In this class of sounds the two dialects show more difference,
Mohave tf, 8, and v being lacking in Diegueno.
s Or may it be that Dieguefio sz»iiin, recorded by me in its predicative
form as Kz*iiink or Bz*iiui*k, contains an n-sound cognate with that of
Mohave asentik, it is onef Mohave sito. Gocopa cit, would then be
regarded as a separate word, although perhaps of the same origin. Or
perhaps the Dieguefto nn stands for the Mohave nt; this would be the
reverse of what happens in no. 30 of the list, where a long nasal in
Mohave is represented in Dieguefio by nasal plus stop. As regards
Dieguefio Bxann, it is probably the representative of Mohave ahot, Yuma
azot, but one might also think of connection with Mohave ta-ahana, real,
good.— J. P. H.
4 Perhaps this change occurs most frequently at the be^nning or end
of a word. Gf . the change of v to p mentioned under Fricatives below.
The change also occurs within Mohave (cf. -motam and -potc, negative
suffixes) and probably also within Dieguefio. — J.'P. H.
1914] Kroeher-Harringian: Phonetio BlemenU of the Dieguefio Language 179
Mohave sard interdental 0 is always s in Diegaeno (4-10,
51).' Diegaeno s, however, corresponds also to Mohave s (11-
16). Bat in a few words (1, 17, 18) Mohave s becomes x in
Diegaeno.* This x seems to be formed more anteriorly than
the ordinary x of Diegaeno, which has a k or h articalation.
It might therefore be distingaished as x.
It shoald be stated that the word for eagle was heard as sspa
as well as Ex-pa from two of the Diegaeno informants. Mr.
Waterman writes expa.^
Diegaeno s seems ''sharper" than Mohave, that is, less like sh.
The Mohave sonant interdental fricative 8 is y in all cor-
responding Diegaeno stems determined (19-21, 51, 73).
Another voiced fricative of Mohave, bilabial v, was normally
heard as w in Diegaeno (2^27, 58). Dr. Waterman also writes
it w. When the ending aava becomes aa in Diegaeno (33, 64),
it probably stands for aaw, which would be regalar, final vowels
being freqaently slarred or lost in Dieageno. In some instances
(67, 73) Diegaeno p seems to stand for v.^ The word for no
(72), amaa, Mohave vara, appears to show the eqaivalence
V > m ; bat this is probably f allacioas, as the correspondence
o > aa is well established, which woald give as the Mohave
eqaal amo or mo, and this is apparently represented in that
dialect by the negative safSx -mote.
It shoald be added that the single word ''where" (22),
Mohave maki, was heard in Diegaeno as maive, with distinct
bilabial v.*
The sard palatal or velar fricative x mast also be mentioned
here. In Mohave a corresponding soand was written both h and
X, bat was finally regarded as a breath accompanied by some pos-
s Mohave is the only Ynman language of the Central group which
has 0 instead of b.—J, P. H.
• Goeopa has e or palatalized s, showing an intermediate stage between
s and X.— J. P. H.
f Present series, vm, 314, 1910.
• This change appears to occur frequently lit the beginning or end of
a word. Of. the change of m to p (under Stops above). — J. P. H.
• Mr. Isidro Nejo of Mesa Grande pronounced the word maipe'*, with
p, when articulating slowly. Perhaps we have here to deal with some
change such as in Shoshonean, where an informant will insist that such
a word as pa, water, never can become va, and yet in talk will be heard
to say va when the conditions require it.—-J. P. H.
180 Univeniiy of CaHfamia Publications in Am. Arch, and Eihn. [Vol. 11
terior narrowing rather than a true fricative, as appears to be like-
wise the case in a number of other Calif omian languages. Hence
the orthography h was adopted. In Diegueno the corresponding
sound (2, 4, 9, 36, 38, 44, 47, 55, 56, 58, 75) is much more clearly
of fricative character, and was therefore written, as also by Dr.
Waterman, x.^**
The labialized fricative xw corresponds to x as kw does to k.
Perhaps X and Xw, paralleling velar q and qw, should also be
distinguished. A sound similar to xw was found in Mohave, but
seemed to be only h followed by a short o or u (32, 56, 62, 69).
Possibly the orthography hw or xw, as in Diegueno, would be
more accurate.
LATEBAL8
Mohave has two 1 sounds: 1 and ly. Diegueno has at least
three : 1, ly and l. Possibly Ly should be added.^^
Mohave sonant palatalized ly corresponds, wherever the same
stems could be compared, to Diegueno surd l, either unpalatalized
(9, 11, 28-^1, 34-37) or possibly palatalized (32, 33, 38). The
only exceptions found, numbers 21 and 56, were recorded as
sonant in Diegueno. These may be errors. The l, it should be
added, is a spirant, not an affricative.
No regular Mohave equivalents have been determined for
Diegueno voiced 1 and ly, which occur both medially and finally
(4, 7, 13, 14, 39, 40, 41, 52, 63) ." That they have not been found
10 The Dieguefio z, like that of the neighboring members of the Central
gronp (Tuma, Maricopa and Cocopa) is much more fricative than its
Mohave counterpart. A Yuma Indian Uving among the Mohave once very
naively volunteered the information that the Tumas say aza, water, while
the Mohaves say aha. These Yuman developments are almost ezactly
paralleled by the sound of Spanish j in various dialects of Spanish. In
Calif omian and New Mezican Spanish the j is very h-like, and a Mohave
renders this sound perfectly when he uses his Mohave h in talkinp^ Spanish.
In certain dialects of old Spain, however, the i is very fricative, and I
have felt when hearing it, as also in the ease of the Yuma and Cocopa z,
that it is articulated farther back in the mouth than is the z of (German
'<ach."— J.P.H.
11 Yuma and Cocopa have both voiced 1 and ly and voiceless l and
Ly.— J. P. H.
12 In 4, 7, 52 Dieguefio has -ly, and Mohave has nothing. The fact
that both Ewi and Ewily were given as meaning stone led to the supposi-
tion that -ly is merely a separable suffiz, but the informant insisted that
Ksily(7) is the only word meaning salt, and that Ksi(8) can mean salt
under no circumstances but means to drink. The word meaning fly is
1914] Kroeher-Harringion : Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language 181
initially is not surprising, since very few Mohave words begin
with either 1 or ly.
TBHiLS
Diegaeno and Mohave r occur in the same stems, as in num-
bers 3, 6, 61 of the list, but are differently formed. Diegueno r
lacks the characteristic trill of the Mohave sound; it is soft,
untrilled, and resembles English r. Dr. Waterman, who writes
it R, calls it surd.^' It occurs also in the following words:
kwE-rau, hot; pitckara, two stand; meri, penis; menura, hear;
kosmirai, crazy; ekurr, far. In the last word it is lengthened,
that is, prolonged, like Mohave rr.
Another r, which is distinctly trilled and very much like
Mohave r, though the precise point of articulation was not deter-
mined, was found only in the words karap, hit him (imperative),
and Expauru, bald eagle. Dr. Waterman describes this sound
as trilled and made with the tip of the tongue dose to the front
of the palate." He writes it r, but gives it in only a few words.
Of these, kwinyor, red, was not found by the author, and sair,
buzzard, was heard as sa'i.^**
SEMI-VOWELS
Diegueno y sometimes represents Mohave 8. In other stems
it apparently is not the equivalent of this sound but of some
other, probably y. No common stems in which y corresponds in
the two languages have, however, been found.** Disregarding
words in which y is not certain on account of neighboring i, it
occurs in Diegueno in yaip, wind, yuwiL, thigh, oyuk, outdoors,
kwayuk, a lizard, *uyeL, flea, and perhaps also in yimi, wild cat,
very irregular, appearing as zalesmo in Yuma. In 39 Dieguefto has -1,
Mohave nothing. In 13 Dieguefio appears to have either 1 or n; Isidro
Nejo gave the pronunciation kwan*nie8ap. Nos. 40, 41, 63 appear to be
very irregular.—J. P. H.
18 Present series, vm, 272, 1910.
1* Op. cit, 272.
IB Beeorded as sa'i, with no -r. — J. P. H.
!• May it be that Mohave Ewayu and Dieguefio Euyahomar, name of
a mythic being, share y in common f — J. P. H.
182 Univeraity of Calif omia Publicatian$ in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
and yamatai, panther, though the latter has also been recorded
as nyimatai, which may be more correct in view of a probable
relationship to the Mohave stem nmne.^^
W occurs in Diegueno as the equivalent of Mohave bilabial v,
probably also otherwise. While found in Mohave, it is rare in
that language, and no certain correspondence of stems containing
w have been determined between the two idioms. Thus Diegueno
4tcix, heart, seems to have no connection with Mohave *iwa.
It need hardly be pointed out that kw and xw, like ly and ny,
are only orthographies, and not combinations containing a simple
w or y.
BBEATHS AND GLOTTAL STOPS
The soft, faint h sound of Mohave, written ', and frequent
as the sign of the third person, recurs in Diegueno. The body-
part terms written with it all contain the possessive element
indicative of the third person.
Mohave h is represented by Dieguefio x, already discussed.
The difference between the sounds is not as great as the ortho-
graphy might imply.
Qlottal stops occur in Diegueno (16, 73), but were not noted
as very vigorously formed.^*
LENGTHENED CONSONANTS
Prolongation of consonants is a feature shared by Mohave and
Diegueno. In addition to numbers 1, 2, 39, 46, 50, 60, 66, pro-
longation was observed in Esann, younger sister, ekurr, far,
Expannk, whale, amokwinn, pipe, axoLL, string. It will be
observed that nn of Exinn and Exann (1, 2) corresponds to
Mohave t, while on the other hand Mohave hammulye is repre-
sented by Diegueno empiL.
17 With the change in the last syllable of Mohave numeta, Diegnefio
nyimatai, cf. that in Mohave kwa^dd, medicineman (51), Diegnefio
kwisiyai. — J. P. H.
IS A glottal stop after a final vowel and followed by a very short but
folly voiced vowel of the same quality was heard in kima'% sleep thou!,
maipe*% where!, and probably also in piya'% this. — J. P. H.
1914] Kroeher-Harrington : PhoneUo Elements of the Dieguefio Language 183
TABLE OF CONSONANTS
The articulation is not always identical for all the sounds
represented hj letters on one line.
Labial
I>ental
Alveolar
Prepalatal
Postpalatal
Postpalatal, labialized
Velar
Velar, labialized
Glottal
e
4*
a
il
p
t
t
k
kw
q
qw
s
a
8
1
8
X
xw
(Xt)
(Xwl)
if
S
a
o
s §
izi S
m
a
8
.3s
s
8
0
§
a
5
a
3
I
•8
a
i
8
I I
^
- 3
a
3
tH
n 1 L
ny ly (Ly) r r y
VOWELS
A characteristic trait of Mohave is the slurring of unaccented
vowels, especially initially and finally. The same tendency seems
even stronger in Dieguefio, as numbers 9, 28, 29, 30, 31, 34, 36,
37, 47, 49, 61, 62, 68, 71 show. It is true that many of these
words were at first heard without the final vowel in Mohave
also; but, on the other hand, the slighted vowels were expected
and listened for in Dieguefio, so that their absence can hardly
be explained by unfamiliarity alone.^* It is quite likely that
these and other similar stems really begin or end in consonants,
and that the additional neutral a which Mohave shows is merely
a euphonic increment.
This colorless and unaccented a was at first frequently heard
as e in Mohave. The same was true of Dieguefio. In fact, the
sound generally continued to be so heard, and if recent impres-
sion were the only available guide, the author would have little
hesitation in saying that Dieguefio e (written e) correspended
to Mohave a as the neutral vowel, as in 2, 5, 7, 10, 11, 15, 17, 23,
26, 28, 29, 33, 34, 35, 38, 42, 44, 45, 46, of the list. But in the
i»I did not note any final vowel corresponding to the Mohave -a. —
J. p. H.
184 Univeraity of CaUfomia PubUoationt in Am, Areh. and Bthn. [ VoL 11
records from the former informants a was often written instead
of B in these same words. Dr. Waterman also writes xatca for
xEtca, awi for Ewi (though he agrees in expa, Mohave aspE).
It must therefore be left open whether a, as this colorless sound
might be written, or e, is the more proper designation for the
unaccented neutral vowel of Diegueno; but the writer inclines
to the belief that there is the suggested difference between Mohave
and Diegueno on this point.*®
The Diegueno vowel system seems also to differ from the
Mohave in the occurrence of sounds of close quality, at any rate
i and u,*^ in addition to the open values; and perhaps of a
third, still different i. This may be the sound that Dr. Water-
man has indicated by u.
More certain are several definite correspondences with Mohave.
Accented a generally recurs with distinct quality in both
languages (3, 6, 9, 14, 15, 17, 18, 24, 25, etc.)."
Unaccented Mohave a is sometimes i in Diegueno: numbers
12, 14, 15, 21, 43, 51. On the other hand i becomes a in 28, 39.
so The determination of the quality of the vowel in these unaccented
syllables proved so baffling that I determined to operate with a large
number of characters. I soon found myself using nearly aU the symbols
for mixed vowels provided for by the alphabet of the International
Phonetic Association. Before non-palatal sounds I heard the sound of
▲ or I, usually as the former when I listened carefully, but I was
impressed, as was Dr. Kroeber, that the sound is often more i-like than
in Mohave. Before palatal sounds I heard the sound even as i. Thus
mya, sun, xitca, Pleiades, miyulyk, sweet. But I heard the word for
eagle only as B^>a or Axpa, and find that I did not mark or note the z
of the word as being different from the ordinary z. The p cuts off the
offglide of the z and thus partly obscures the z. On the other hand, the
Mohave i is certainly represented by a more open vowel than i in many
Dieguefio words. Thus Dieguefio EkwL cloud (53), *itu, beUy(54), *kzu,
nose(55). Gf. Yuma and Cocopa Akwi. But in Mohave the first vowel
of these words is i Tinyam, night (48), retains, however, its i as in
Mohave, perhaps due to the following palatalized nasal. Can it be that
r also ezercises this palatalizing influence in such a word as kwirak, old
man (61), Yuma kwira'akf In Walapai r sometimes takes the place of
Mohave ly and Mohave ly is a palataUzed sound. The first vowel of this
word in Mohave is sometimes ▲, sometimes o (due to preceding kwf).
Also Dieguefio atimm, bow(66) has its first vowel rounded in Mohave.
In Dieguefio au, fire(64) (Mohave a'auva) the first vowel of the Mohave
word seemed to be entirely lacking in the Die^efio word. Certainly the
number of more or less distinct vowel qualities is very large and it
remains to be determined how the variations should be groped and to
what eztent they are the result of contiguous sounds.—J. P. H.
21 Close i was heard in tinyam, night (48), piya'% this (73) and xmily,
leg(52), perhaps due to the following ny, y or ly. In several words a
moderately close u was heard. — J. P. H.
ss This a, as in Mohave, often has considerable A-quality. — J. P. H.
1914] Kroeher-Harringtan: Phonetic Elements of the Diegue^ Language 185
Mohave e and i become respectively i and e in Diegueno about
as often as they retain their quality. Thus, e equals i in numbers
5, 26, 32, 40, 45, 52, 53, 56 ; i becomes e or b in 8, 11, 18, 19, 42, 52,
53, 54, 55 ; while i recurs as i, or e as e, in 1, 7, 8, 9, 16, 20, 23,
31, 48, 51, 65, 66, and 73.
Of the back vowels, o is uncommon in Diegueno. Mohave o
is represented most frequently by u in Diegueno (4, 20, 34, 35,
41, 46, 54, 57), or sometimes, at least when final, by au (3, 19,
56)."
Mohave u is less often altered in Diegueno. It is preserved
in numbers 21, 42, 55 of the list. When Diegueno alters Mohave
u, it is usually to a front vowel (13, 30).
ACCENT
So far as aural impression may be relied upon, the stress
and pitch accents of Diegueno seem to be identical with those of
Mohave.
COMPABATIVE LIST
English
Mohave
DiegueHo
1
one
site
Bx-inn24
2
good
ah6t
»yfti;>n
3
fox
marho
parzau
4
fly
^lyahmo
mesxapu-ly
5
woman
^nya'aka
sinyB
6
five
^arap-k
sarapss
7
salt
a^
Bsi-lj
8
drink
itfi
isi
9
ocean
(a)ha-9o'ilya
za-siL
10
raccoon
namato
nKmas
11
hand
isalya
B8EL
12
liver
4pasa
tc-ipEsi
13
star
ha-muse
kwily-mesap»«
14
mockingbird
sakwa-fo'alya
sakwi-lau
15
white
nyamas&m
kws-nimsap
16
buzzard
asei
sa'i
17
eagle
aspa
Ex.pa^T
MWith the
equivalence
) Mohave -o = Dieffuefio
-au, cf. Mohave -e =
Dieguefio -ai in
no.
51.— J. P. H.
24 Also given as
KZ'innk, it is one. — J. P. H.
SB It is stated that the
proper Dieguefio term for five is ^ssaLxakaL —
J. P. H.
2« The informant
gave
kwan*mesap, evidently a
variant form. — J.P.H.
«TExpaf— J.P. H.
186 University of CdUfomia Publieatiotu in Am. Arch, and Bthn, [Vol 11
English
Mohave
DiegueHo
18
sleep
i-sma
x-z*mfi
19
tooth
'm
lyau
20
eye
<)ad
iyt
21
sweet
ma3uly-k
miyul-k
22
where
maki
maive««
23
stone
avi
«wi^»
24
honse
ava
awa
25
south
kaveik
kawak
26
rattlesnake
five
Bwi
27
you (pi.)
mfitcva
minyawaptc'©
28
tongue
Mpalya
*anapxL
29
ear
^amalya
^BmaL
30
ash
hammulye
empiL
31
hot, day
' ipily-k
'upiL
32
skunk
ilyhue
kwiLyerwiru'i
33
rabbit
halya'auva
zEiiau
34
spider
haljTtota
ZXLtut
35
roadrunner
talypo
tiLpu
36
gourd, turtle
ahnalya
axnaL
37
rat
amalyka
maLk
38
moon
haly'a
zXLya
39
arrow
ipa
apall
40
beard
* iavume
* alemi
41
mortar
ah-mo
kaly-mu
42
see
iyu
xwu
43
sun
anyfi
inya
44
Pleiades
hatca
zBtca
45
metate
ahpe
ixpi
46
mountain-sheep
ammo
xmmu
47
dog
ahata
•
axat .
48
night
tinyam
tinyam
49
earth
ama^
amat
50
sky
ammaya
ammai
51
medicineman
kwatfiM
kwisiyaiM
52
leg, foot
'ime
<emi-ly
53
cloud, rain
ikwe
xkwi
54
belly
'ito
'etu
55
nose
<ihii
'exu
56
nail
kelyuhoM
silyexwau
57
white man
haiqo, hiiqo
zaiqu
58
two
havik
zawokS4
28 Given as maipe'*.— J. P. H.
«• Given also as Bwily.-^. P. H.
«o Given as minyawap. — J. P. H.
«i Given as kaLyixwi'u. — J. P. H.
»« Recorded as kwasiyai. — J. P. H.
«« Mohave ho < hwof— J. P. H.
«* The pronunciation is practically identical with the Cocopa.— J. P. H.
1914] Kroeber-Harrington: Phonetic BlemenU of the Dieguefio Langwige 187
Bngligh
Mohave
Dieguefio
59
month
'iya
'&
60
knee
memepiika
mexetnnn
61
old man
kwora'&ka
kwirak
62
blood
ahoata
axwat
63
snow
^npaka
al&p
64
fire
a'anva
&a
65
dance
ima
ima
66
bow
otisa
atimm
67
tobacco
anva
up
68
deer
aqw&qa
aqwaq
69
badger
mahoa
mazwa
70
bird
tciydre
asa
71
raven
aq&qa
ax&q
72
no
▼&ra
uman*^
73
this
▼ida-nya
piya'««
74
bad
alai-k
wiLitc
75
cane
aht&
azt&
Mohave
P
t
t
t
•
k
kw
q
qw
tc
m
m
n
ny
0
s
s
a
V
V
h (x tinge)
ho (=xw>
COBBESPONDING SOUNDS
DiegueHo
P
t
n (occasionally)
t
k
kw
q
qw
tc
m
p (sometimes)
n (usually)
ny (usually)
8
8 (usually
X* (occasionally)
7
w (always when medial)
p (sometimes)
(t)
X(f)
Xw(f)
L
1
M Becorded as * umau. — J. P. H.
w Becorded as piya".— J. P. H.
1 88 Univeriity of CaHfomia PubUcatiotu in Am.ArcK and Bihn. [YoL 11
Mohave
DiegueHo
(t)
ly
1
(t)
r (trilled)
r (untriUed)
(t)
r (trilled)
TT
(t)
y
y(t)
w
t
(t)
t
a
a (normally)
a
i (occasionally)
a (unaccented = a)
B
e
e (frequently)
e
i (frequently)
i
i (frequently)
•
1
e (frequently)
•
1
a (rarely)
0
u (usually)
0 (final)
au (sometimes)
n
u
n
i, e (occasionally)
(t)
0 (rare)
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 1 1, No. 3, pp. 189-277 February 27, 1915
SARSI TEXTS
BY
PLINY BABLE GODDABD
CONTENTS pAOB
Introdaetion 190
Key to Soands 191
Descriptions and Information 192
Prayers ~ 196
The Hair Parters 196
List of Dance Properties 206
The Dog Feast 208
Qualifications and Duties of Chiefs 214
Shamans 216
JL CmAJAwAXAiC v^ a X &/XO ■■■■>—•••»■»■•••♦•»—•»*•••» »»^ ■>■>•»» —•^■■•w •••»••»• •♦■•—■■•*»»^ »■»•■•»•••»»—»♦■»— mI^O
Buffalo Pounds „ 220
Trapping Beaver ~ 220
Primitive Dishes ~- 220
Stone Arrowheads ^ 222
What Eagle-ribs Saw at Edmonton 222
Medicine Bundle Rituals ~ «. 224
Origin of the Beaver Bundle 224
Planting Tobacco « 226
Jackrabbit Gives Medicine for Swift Horses 226
White Goose Gives Medicine for Horses 228
Buffalo Bull Gives a Shield 230
Owl Skin War Medicine 230
Squirrel, a War Medicine 232
Sky Person Gives a Medicine 234
Pat Grasshopper Beceives Medicine from Hawks ^ 236
A Knife, a War Medicine ~ 238
Weasel Gives a War Medicine 240
Bock Gives a War Medicine 242
A X ainted Xipi .....».m........................^......^......^........................m..........m>« a49
Finding a Buffalo Stone „ 242
Wild Parsnip Gives a Medicine 244
190 University of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
PAGE
Narratives ^ 246
Tc'a^e^LGOa, the Wise Sarsi 246
Famine Believed by Magic 250
Broken-Knife Relieves Famine 252
A Captive Barsi Boy Escapes from the Sioux 258
A Lame Man Captures Horses 260
A Bear Brings Home a Crippled Sarsi 262
Two Hawks Test Their Speed ^ 262
A Bird Has its Mate Doctored „ 264
A Fight with a Bear 264
Curing Madness Resulting from a Wolf Bite ~ » 266
Minor Narratives 266
The War Deeds of Eagle-ribs » 268
The Personal Experiences of Grasshopper 272
INTRODUCTION
The Sarsi are an Athapascan-speaking group of Indians who
have been closely associated with the Northern Blackfoot of
Alberta since the earliest historical reference to either tribe in
1754. There are no traditions of a trustworthy nature which
connect the Sarsi definitely with any other Athapascan tribe.
Linguistically all the northern Athapascan east of the Bocky
Mountains except the Sarsi and the Beaver on Peace River have
certain sound shifts not shared by the latter two languages. The
Sarsi and Beaver, however, are hardly mutually intelligible,
although both show relationships with the languages of British
Columbia.
The texts here presented were collected during the summer
of 1905. The expenses of this visit were provided by the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History under an agreement that that
institution should have the collections and the ethnological infor-
mation and the University of California should be entitled to
the linguistic results. The larger number of these texts were
revised in 1911 with the aid of Charlie Crowchief, who was the
interpreter used in obtaining them originally. Many of the
texts were also traced with the Rousselot apparatus from his
dictation. It was discovered that in originally recording the
texts certain intermediate sounds were written as surds and
thereby fell in with a series of surds from which they should
be differentiated. The glottally affected sounds in Sarsi are
1915] Goddard: Sarai Texts 191
unusually hard to distinguish. Charlie Crowchief at the time
the texts were recorded confused l and s in speaking. That all
these errors were corrected when the texts were revised with his
aid is not probable.
The main informant was Eagle-ribs, a man then about 65
years old. As he says in one of his narratives, he ranked as a
chief according to the old order. He led the chiefs in relating
coups during several sun dances.
The publication of the texts is for the purpose of furnishing
material for phonetic and grammatical study. It is intended
that this paper shall soon be followed by a grammatical analysis
of the material here contained. Free translations of most of
the texts have been or will be published.
KEY TO SOUNDS
a, e, i, 0 (unmarked) open as in father, met, pin, not.
8, i, d^ fi dose as in they, pique, note, and rule.
a, S, 1, 0, fi nasalized.
ft narrow, as u in but.
y as in yes; sometimes written for a sonant spirant when eoming before a
front voweL
w as in will, seldom occurs.
m as in met.
n as in net.
!1 as ng in sing.
1 as in let.
L a surd lateral spirant; the breath escapes between the back teeth and
the sides of the tongue.
l' the last sound with glottal affection; an affricative.
z a sonant spirant; as in lizard.
s as in sit; a surd spirant.
j as z in azure; a sonant spirant.
c as sh in shall; a surd spirant.
o a palatal sonant spirant similar to the sound of g in Tage as spoken in
Northern (Germany.
z a palatal surd spirant; as ch in (German.
h written in many places apparently for the preceding sound lightly artic-
ulated.
d a dental stop, intermediate as to sonancy.
t a strongly aspirated surd dental stop.
t' a glottolly affected surd dental stop.
g a fully sonant palatal stop; probably often written for the following
sound.
ff a palatal stop, intermediate as to sonancy; sometimes written k through
* oversight.
k a strongly aspirated surd palatal stop.
k' a glotUiUy affected surd pidatal stop.
dj and dz sonant affricatives.
ts' and tc' glottally affected surd affricatives.
^ denotes unusual aspiration.
' glottal stop.
192 University of Calif omia Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
DESCRIPTIONS AND INFORMATION
THE SUN DANCE
du xat'a «a ts'is <m na t'a tiGa magddillana
kats'I ts'iktlwa gina'f giLdiniicci <!ta*
tsisdaL^tiwu «98La dine m^giLdila dinagilla
dina ts^ktlwa^I gigikats'i tsis da l'u wH^ «aj3sadla
6 glGiisnll tatsa t'lGl d5giGilla dina la t'lGl
tsisdaL'tiwf *agis*ic zan! nli^nn! kats'i
dldig^ ts^Gani t'lGl mltsu* Lat'a xatc'ist'^c
•aLikats'In^ «!wat'lGl lik ka ktl dis Ga dina
natsana«i ta^k'a gtLst'lGa gimmaGa ts'ikHwa
10 na ts^ na 'a qH c^ na«! «aB gi nic t'l g! < tsu« «i
k'a gi ma t'ac
tsis da l'iI wti^ ts'azzilli nats'ittsa zitda
«atc'iz«Ic «l8gakuwa k'aLadltc'ic ts'azzilli
tcinna'i nagall^LLl t^Gl «a giL ka gu na ga djiL
15 *a t^ Gi tc^ zil li 'a ts'il la hi na g! Gl I^c dl tcl «i
nl da ts'I di tcic gunisnadi za^ <atc'icnc tc^zilll
tsaha ditlgi djil* gtL nisnadi za* k'anlt'a
tea ni gi L^fL nl tlGl ditcl«l tsi< Lilla tastciz
gwatc'icnc halikuwa «Ist'lGa ktldlLtc tadidllna
20 xa na Gi daL Li t'l Gi din na* *i8 ga ku wa 'i tcaz zil li
«alaGina«I «itsti« Ga tc'istcuj
tcis da L^ti wfL «a ts'il la ts'i titc'inn^c tsis da l'iI wti'
•ats'Iladi lik ka kH die Ga nate'inn^e nats^na<I
tazik'a nlnaGln^e gimmlnaska «a t'lGl nate'itteie
25 gim mi te'il lie «as tsa* tsis na l'Q wti* gi na< gim ma Ga
te'illae dina zillaBna«i didji djinnisi dugiteij
tH nizak'aGa za' gida' tis taste'itedji za'
gim mi zit da da ga di t'a di ta^ gim mi tsin na t'i Ga t'a* tcfL
mikala z&* te'asitea mitsi«k'Iza daGlL'u
30 14k ka za ts'i ka gfl y^ na l^ ka za ga sit dan na
•itstl* maGa te'I'^te «Iwat'iGi ni teit tc'^G Ga
k'agiste'uL nist'assi taGiGa*aLLl lilla «ita saGa
nit'a sikala iiilla gddja dlna«isla gula
te'innisk'a naglGi^^e «Iwat'iGi «Its1i«i dikalatsl^
85 na gi Gi di «^te gi Gi teiz gfl
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 193
DESCRIPTIONS AND INFORMATION
THE SUN DANCE
Not without cause they do it. Very who is sick
for him women it is who say, ''Father, sun lodge
I will make, this sick person he may get well/' These
women for him sun lodge we will make those who say it,
he dies then they do not make it. He gets well then
sun lodge they make. Buffalo many for they hunt.
Those they kill then their tongues all they cut out.
They come together. Then they camp in a circle. Those
who make the lodge middle just their tipi. Women
sun dance who know they ask then the tongues they-
cut up.
Sun dance sweat-lodge they build before they make.
Young men all mount their horses. Sweat-lodge poles
they are bringing back then they sing. There sweat-lodge
they are going to make they put them. The poles they put-
in the ground. One hundred only they make. Sweat-lodge
stones these too one hundred only there are. They-
twine together then the poles red paint with they-
paint. They make it. Old men all go in. They pray.
As they come out then these young men sweat-lodge
the makers tongues to them they give.
Sun lodge they make toward they move camp. Sun-
lodge where they make camp circle they came. Sun-
dance maker middle they camp around beside her. There
they make it. They give them first sun lodge their clothes
to them they give. These make the dance four days
they do not eat. Water a little only they drink. Cane
painted only behind them it hangs. Their hats
large feathers, her husband only crow's tail side of his-
head is tied on. One women sensible one to her
husband tongue to her he gives. Then small pieces
she breaks off. Toward sky holding it with, ''Father,
me pity. My husband with well I have lived it is."
On ground she puts it. And the tongue to her husband
she takes it back, they may eat it.
194 University of California Publications in Am, ArcK and Ethn, [Vol. 11
«aGanadiGi«a «It'u mik'a tc'icnc «iwat'ioi
nagimdji m! U da tc'I late «Iwtu3k'a dltci «It'aj3si
iiilla kamoa ^wiis «Ik'a •itci nitsisdi yuwti'
«aoanadlGi«a cits'! «akanlGa Lat'a «atc'itLa
5 «i tci nas ca oa «a tc'is 4c dl na tsin na Ga di dji
dzinnissi kwiyiGa za* naGlt^c duhaGiyako
tc'itdjinnf t'lGl nay^c «Itdisnr iiilla taL^
k'a ts^i dj! hi t'iGi nanidac hagina t'lGi
haktldjiGa za* ktldiLtc gdtc'inij «aLlts'idaLLi
10 giL ka da gu Gi m j ha ku dji Ga na < gim ml ts'ai yl ka
dan! magHmlinni kugil^c dina gdnas«inna
yiL na' i gu
«isgakuwa mits'ilwa k'a ts'I nis t'as sin na ktly^tc
«Iwat'iG! xaginic «Ita «isL^ka «!G!stcilt
15 «I wa t*i Gi da tcis da l'u wa Ga kti wi ca di si ts'il wa
xats'it'assi hatagididlihi t'iGi gimmits'tiwa
xa tc'i t'as l'u tci di gai ye tsin na gi tic gim mil la tcin na
das l'u' gim mi ka tcin na d jti Laz <i Lil la ta gis g^s sa
•isg^siL gagidisL'u' «iwa gimmitcanna za'
20 has t'i gim mi Ga na tc'in nis t'ic xa Gi ya t'i Gi
gimmaGa ts'itdi na ts'I di nis tci&s dik'a «^la
ginnit^tc tc'itdinidjf za gimazatdita xagistinna
gimmits'tiwa xatc'it'ac ditci mizzana xatc'itcic
•it'll «its'i l'ul «akiyi nakanit'i l'ul^I «itcl
25 gim mi ts'u wa Ga ni <a •! Ga di Gi <i wa t'i Gi 'a Ga na ti Gi «a
giGistcutc iiilla ta gi di dli xa t'a k'atagididlidigawa
gimmaGa tc'ididjic <ikidida zitda L'dL«i gistcutc
«iwa t'iGi gim ma sit di djic <a ha guginnedac
gitcittci iiilla fikidisni Lil la tci tci mikatoLLi
30 t'i Gi «!s du na ha li ku wa gim mi zam miL gis tcHtc
<iwa t'iGi k'a da gugidisxaltc <idaLa mikatcuL
gi ma lin na ka tc5L Li na tc'i Gis nitc «a Ga na di gi «a
katcina nats'i^ac «at'iGikawa xanigi y^tc
«igi ts'ukuwa nats^nal <isduna ^gakuwa
35 gi ni i La t'i Gi du dz^n na di na gi li'
«at'iGikawa nan! tcut'inna tsin na l'u wa ginidja
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 195
The center tree nest on it they place. Then what they-
offer they place in it. On forked sticks poles leaves with
they lean against it. Forked sticks on poles very long
there middle tree against they lean. All opposite the-
door poles house they make. These fast four days
inside only they sleep. He does not go out. They sing
then he gets up. He whistles with he dances. They-
stop singing then he sits down. Noon then chiefs
only they come in. They tell stories. Battles about them
they tell. The chiefs their wives food good they bring-
in people watching them they may eat.
Young men their breasts who are cut go in. Then
they say, ** Father, horses may I capture then when
sun dance lodge when I go in my breasts they will cut."
This way they pray then their breasts they cut. (A weed)
they tie around their heads. Their wrists they tie, their-
ankles too. White clay with they rub themselves. Belt
they tie around. And breech-doth only they wear.
For them they put a lodge. He comes out. Then for them
blanket they spread. On this back down he lies.
Whistle only is around his neck. While he lies his breasts
they cut. Sticks through they stick. From the nest
ropes two hang down. The ropes sticks his breasts
are stuck through they loop over. Then center post he-
embraces with he prays. When he finishes praying f or-
him they sing. He dances before ropes they pull.
Then for him they sing. He dances. Hanging with
he whistles with, in vain he tries to break it then other-
persons old men his shoulders they take hold. Then
backwards they pull him. There it tears out. His flesh
which tears out he offers. The center tree its base they-
place it. After that he goes out.
The women makes sun dance other young men
they go with then not long they live.
This much our Sarsi sun dance its story.
196 University of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn. [Vol. 11
Prayers
haiyuhfL* halitsa siL tit di nin na naoa tcazzTU
«ats'ila^ haiytihti^ halitsa da naoa tc^zili
«ats^la^ siL tit di nac na ^ la dina tcazzlle saoalana
siL tit dl nac na gtlla dIna tc^zTle saoalana
5 gim miL tX d! nas na gtL la ha li ka «a g! na hi hai ytl hu*
«Ita siL tit dl nin na tc'a nadloits'an haiyuhti*
«ita «I ts'^G oa k'a sa nadioists'an danlst'aooa
kwiyioa gwagtinili dina «l8Llgula haiyuhti'
<Ita saoa nit'a di tti gtL ma si tigi «^nilaigi
10 dl nti k'a «^n ni la gi gQ k'a djon na di na
«lLigaIa haiydhu' «Ita siGlLa kanigit'ahi saoa
ylnlni haiyuhu' •ita •Istcitci saoa yinini
saoa nit'a <!ta haiyuhtL^ <Ita tan! sin na saoa
nl t'a sa ou yi La
15 nanf dinati ha ml ts'i ta di s! dl!
halitsa *!ta gwagunili dz^na dina ts'i II m
<ita saoa nit'a ylsdjon dzana ts'innisk'a dina
«ISLi gtlla «iwu* taglsk'issa tc'at'^ooa xanats'Itd!
t'loi nlts^I gwagunlllnl dina *isLlgtila «ita*
20 dl nP ts'i ka di ka la Lil la gi djon «a t'l oa oa
t'lol kawa naoa gula« «Its(i«I naoa nlstctlt
<Ina saoa nit'a Lat'a dln^na i Lil la saoa
nIt'a dagtLnitinna tananlts'Idl t'loi na nis tc^c gH la
ts'atca «!na <Ina^ haiytlhil* ts'atca sIoiLa
25 ka nl gi t'a gwa giL nl lin nl sa oa gin nin ne <i na^
saoa nit'a saoa gtlyfL'a haiyflha^ ts'&tca
sinnadjinna I Lil la dzana dina «IsLlgtila
THE HAIB PABTEBSi
ma 81 14L Li Li ka dji dl ni l^c da mil le ta za tcic tc^ si
Ligisak'a ts'Ikuwa dlstsi ma ou lI ni k'^ si «I^aktlwa
30 dis tsl< ta tin na diz na ^s ga kti wa dis tsl «a kl na
1 Obtained from Pat Graflshopper, who sold the hat the poeseesion of
which confers the position of leader in organization. For a free translation
see Anthropological Papers, American Museum of Natural History, XI,
470-474.
1915] Ooddard: 8ar9i Texts 197
Prayers
Oh, Old man, help me. For you sweat-lodge they-
make. Oh, Old man, here for you sweat-lodge they-
make that you may help me. These persons sweat-lodge
who have made help them. Old men may they become.
Oh, father, help me. Thunder may I hear again. Oh,
father, birds' voices may I hear again. Sky in happily
person may I be. Oh, father, me pity. This water
is surrounded by which you made this island which-
you made on it long person may I be. Oh, father,
my days let them be to the end. Me give something. Oh,
father, what I eat me give. Me pity. Father, Oh,
father, I am poor. Me pity give me something.
We Indians thus to him we pray.
Old man, father, happily long time person having-
been, father, me pity. I may be old. Long time on-
earth person may I live. Then hot sun when it-
comes up then from you happily person may I be.
Father this woman her husband with may she be old.
From this time then lodge for you they made. This-
tongue to you I give.
Mother me pity. All people with me pity.
Every time when you rise then may I see you, Old-
woman mother. Mother, oh, Old woman, my days
to the end happiness me give. Mother me pity. Me
give property. Oh, old woman, my relatives with long-
time i)erson may I be.
THE HAIB PABTEBS
Wagons they place in a circle. The opening is toward-
the overhead sun. On the left side women sit. On-
the right side young men sit. Doorway four persons
young men sit. Two persons sword in front of them
198 UniverHty of California Publieationa in Am. AreK and Ethn. [ VoL 11
m^ gimitslta nadigi<a «akina naiina gimiga
«is Ll haL <a si ta
ma gtL iJ ni k'as si «assatcti «itci maoa nadlGi'a
<at'iGi <itc! maoa nadlGi«a k'a daGadi«a
5 d! j na «is ga ku wa ^ dji na mi ga diL ts! as sa
nitcitc^Ga ditci tazika si la <isgakuwa ts'ikuwa
dlLtsina gimikiza 'atcitL'a ditci <tci nadiGi'a
ditci sinnat'iGi na di gl duL «I maGadiGa cisgakuwa
^nnak'a «aki «itci nlnadiGi^a k'a «aki
10 gu tea da Ga di Ga «a ki na «is ga ku wa ^is ka si
cas<inna gigizitda gisda daGadlGa dina
mld^natasi gdn^n nsgiya ts^kuwa nas^a si da
tsiL <^L<Inni dina n^nldacna <aGa «I da na dl tcic cl gQ
has dtk gu na k'a si da «Isgaka nitsa tcidlnitcl
15 c^L «I nl sit da ma Ga tci dl djI nl t'l Gi ta dil i^tc
i^mm^nanidac die gtL 14m man! da t'lGi «!dlenie
mlga niskane «9s«inna si da ts'Iktiwa nllaGa
nsLihaLa «as<inne ts'Ika si da ^isgaka nItsa
da ni 'as ^ na si da <a sa «a8 <in na <a teit L'a
20 sit da <s t'^ nl «as <in na li ti gl *as sa *aL nn na
^a si da cisglya ts'ukliwa go*a<a «Ilinna
LitlGl ts'ukHwaga sit da Lakaza «lsglya gowa
til «Inakaena <assaga sit da ^assa nIteltea'Ga
•Is La <lLilla mlga sa<a nuga ^isglya sit da
25 nl da na <a teiL tetkt da ku la li kl na U nl «is t^ nl
«as«lnl «atcitVa gdt'a sit da «IteI nitsisdl
tagltiL
«a kin na ns ga kH wa ma si 14L I «a Lik ka 1^ na
masgd Ll ka kl yl dl gl l^e gut'a gIsda Litlglna
30 Is ^a ka ka wa tsin nl da t'l Gl na gl niL tite <as kl za
gIniLtie Litlgl ^isgaka nas'aGa kwIylGa sinnida
t'iGl kwIylGa«I gUdja naguglla I4kgagldlgie
«Itinna«I xaGlla tal kwIylGa Laniti* gwagdglL«ie
•iL'Igl sinnida t'iGi •Ik'atti kida dagiLgu^I
35 dl na «is ga ku wa < d jl na ^ ta za ka na gl ml tel l^e
«Iwa t'iGi «assa sitL'a dlgl«l L'utsin miGa
teitdlsk'^te Iwat'lGl maGa gltell^te
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 199
stands in the ground. Two persons others beside horse-
whip lies.
Right side big drum sticks for it are stuck in the-
ground. Then sticks for it stuck up on it hangs.
Four young men who sing beside it they sit. Drums
small four in the middle lie. Young men women
who sit between them opposite the doorway four sticks
stand up. Four hats tall hang. Young men behind
two sticks stand up on two tails hang. Two
young men belts who own in front of them they sit.
Where it hangs those among who dance give order
young man women in front he sits.
Axe who owns those who dance for them he fiUs-
their pipes beside the speaker he sits. Young men among
whistle who owns sits. For him they sing then he-
dances. He dances around a circle. Four times he has-
danced around then he whistles. By him shield who-
owns sits. Women at the end horse whip who owns
woman sits. Men among gun who owns sits. Drum
who owns opposite the door he sits. Arrow who owns
same place drum who owns by he sits. Young man
women work who are same place beside women he-
sits. One young man to them water who takes around
beside drum he sits. Pail small cup with beside-
him stands. Beside him young man sits. Those who-
dance he brings in food. One another arrow who owns
opposite the door among than he sits. Sticks long
he holds.
Two young men wagons who gather like a ring
they put in a circle, among them they sit. The same
young men tipi they dance then they put up. Side-
by side they put them up. The same young men house
inside they dance then inside good they make it.
They sweep. Rubbish they take out. Bed blankets inside
they put around. They make it. At night they dance
then lamps in they put (oil). These young men who-
sing in the middle they put them. Then drum small
this sweet grass under they bum. Then to them
they give them.
200 Unweriity of California Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [Vol. 11
nagidicGa Lilla didji xin «igidiyitc miL
^t'a xin«I gitdloi t'iGi ts'ukuwa dijna
sinnatigi «as«!na nadlLtc *!wa ts'ukuwa Lat'a
«^nltsa nagidiLtc ts'uktlwa na «i daL di k5 wa
5 La t'a «is ^a ktl wa na diLtc na g! daL dl ga wa La t'a
ts'tikuwa gidjin ts'tikuwa«I didahitl ^isLihaLa
«as«innl ^gaktlwa ts'fLkuwa klza gddila <!wa
dicgil masgCL dl ma tcl ni dac din! ts'Ika «isLihaLa
<as«in! gtinasi <ldldac ts'tlktlwa cisgakuwa
10 <a k'a si dan na dl n! ts^I ka <is lI ha La «as nn ni
gULhaL tiGi ts'tikuwa ^isgaka yishaLna<i <isLi
gQwact^tc <iwa «IsaGagit!zidi t'iGi dti gd wa yi nitc
hasdagtLna<i tazaka <Ididac ^is^akfLwa
«IsLihaLa «aL<Inina yflwtlk'^ssi naklsit ts'ilktiwa
15 ha gi yi na ts'ti ktL wa diL tsi «i k'a si «is ga ktl wa
m^s «^L«Inina nazit 'at^Gina dju ts'ukfLwa
hagigina ii9gakflwa stlktiwa «ila «iLtctlna
win ni t'^n na k'a gi mi tcis ctLz dil kin ni da ktl k'a tsin ni da hi
t'iGi dina ^isgaktlwa ts'tiktlwa «!la tci na giLL tcfL di na
20 ta za k'a na gi mi tcis cfLz has da gtL na <i nai y^tc
hanic Laiyika dini« tazak'a sit da yiiwti
ts'ika <ilatcinna gdL tcfL tea ga nad^ttsa La t'a
miza naLt'a mil la tadaLLa ^iwa t'iGi La t'a
mil la ta tci di «atc <i Lil la mi za sin ni tatc <i wa
25 ha na tci cHj di ni has da gQ na hi ha guL nitc
dahanaguLna hi gdL hanadjana gtllilada LasgtLla
dd na n^L da ha«a «iwa disgd ts'dkdwa tadi diLtc
•is ga ka dju di j gd ta di diLtc «a t'i Gi k6 wa ts'd kd wa
<i Lil la Ld ka ta na tcit di diLtc
30 dicna kat'dnaGa gdL «a l! gi dal na sitdi gimaGa
tazak'a na tcis ted ci k'a gidiniltcitc «isgakdwa
dijna gimaGa didjinna na diLtc didji xin
gimaGa «ItcidilGitc miL gdta«i t'iGi «igididatc
ydwd sinnatigi nadigiduL*! didji tsi
35 «i 1^ di date ta za k'a da ni «i wa gd tcis gi ma Ga
natcill^tc gi giL tcdte tee gd na gi gi dil l^tc sid^na
sitL'a nitcaw^nna tazak'a gin! dac gwa gi mi tcic •ie
dina kat'dnaGa*! sitda<! gimi^ ta tci n! date
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 201
They gtand while four songs they sing. Then
among the songs they sing then women four hats
who own get up. Then women all afterwards get up.
Women after they get up aU men get up. After they-
get up all women sing. The women they dance horse-
whip who owns young men women between he-
places. Then four times like a ring they dance around.
This woman horse whip who owns opposite way she-
dances. Women young men still who are sitting this
woman horse whip who owns strikes them hard.
Women men whom she hits horse she gives them. Then
they become angry then she does not give them.
The one who speaks in the middle dances. Young mei»
horse whip who own yonder side (outside) they stand.
Women who looks after women they sit that side
young men sword who own stand. Those too women
they look after young men women her hand who holds
behind the ring they pull them they may not dance. They-
finish dancing then these young men women their-
hands who held in the middle they put them. The speaker
gets up. He says, ''My friends, this person in the middle
sitting yonder woman her wrist because he held he-
is foolish. All his mouth kiss, his hand shake." Then
all his hands shake with his mouth they kiss. Then
they take him out. This one the speaker tells them ''Do-
not do that again. Who does that again if there is one never
he wiU dance again. Then four times women they dance.
Young men too four times they dance. After that
women with together they dance.
Four men who have fought blanket for them in the-
middle they spread on it they sit. Young men four
for them who sing they get up. Four songs for them
they sing then fifth then they begin to dance. Those
hats high four toward they dance. In the middle guns
and scalps for them they put on the ground. Then one-
who captured them takes them up. Boy small large
middle he sits they make. These men the boy by them
he sits. Knife with they cut him up they pretend. His-
.4
202 University of California Publications in Am. Areh. and Ethn, [Vol. 11
m^ cfiilla ta M mi tci t'ac gwatcidl«!c gimftcis
dju tsitdistcuL gwa tcit di «!c dis gtL gimaoa
n! na sin m da hi t'ioi ha na gim mi tci «!c sltda^i
dina dijna kat'unaGa«! ^isi^kka maoa tcillatc
5 ha gi na dl tci na ti g! «! tci na gi die gi giL La na di d^tc
gu gi nitc tci t'i Gi
•Iwa «l8Le gutsia dani •Icictcu gini t^iGi
gimaoa «a8sa tcichaLtc dIna zisisoi ginitc
ni i^n ni tea k^ t'in ne ka gu ki nitc gii Lat di gwa Li gis dal
10 dju gi nic ni i^n ni «is l^ ka djfL «i cLs tcti dju
ginic ^at^iGikowa sukuwa go«a«a<I tsimatigi«i
da Ga na di l^itc su kti wa mi tain na^ ti oa na tsi la «i na
«a na gi diL diLtc «isL^ka gusiLa magunilinni
«a na tsit diL diL «a na tsiL diL diL ^ niLa «at'ic
15 has da gii na «i «is ga ktL wa haL nitc na nl «is t'a
tadasdaL ^anad^Ld^iL gusiLa«i sini yinizinna
«isLi guL «anad^LhaL «isLigu «itci da«i Litigi
na tsil la
Lakazagtl «isgaka tadilL^tc «asts^a gCLstioa
20 «as sa «as «i ni ta diL L^tc mi tsis di na ^s ka se
«^«inna<i tagidilL^tc «i8kasi «its'i nagididatc
^Lsdilwa xin <iLilla kagidiLLtitc <iwa Lagididatc
di j gtl na gi ni date <is ga si «i da oa na gi dil L^tc m^
«as«inna«i naginidac gtlk^a Lakaza •isgaktiwa
25 tci si Li ka sil ktL wa teis i <i ^ di dae «aL t'as si
ha na gi ni date di j gtl ha gi t'ie m^ ^ zil l^c ci
ta gi yi yis ni
<iwa dug5wa^ ginic na gini date <isLahaLa
«aL«innina^ tagidilL^tc Lat^a «§iLnitsis gini da
SO sil kQ wa «is ga ktL wa zi da« di j gu ha gi ditc
na gini date hagina t'iGi hasdagiina«i tadili^tc
liMz^ <ili« tai^tc tsiL «§iLnnna ^t'a
ta dil Late dij gii La ma ni d^tc ha na t'i Gi na ni date
tcidinitci «§iL<ini «ist'a tadilL^tc «akagu
35 da ma ni da t^i Gi ka wa t'i Gi *i diL nitc «i wa
«i diL ni ti k5 wa Lat^a •isgaktLwa nanidatc k'a
sitd^na teidlnidji iLilla giiLhaL hagula t'iGi
gu Ga gi nic dij gtl <i diL nitc «i wa na ni date
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 203
scalp too they take off they pretend. Four times to-
them they dance then they do that again. The boy
these four men horses him they give. When they-
have done that hats they put on with them they dance-
around. They tell stories.
Then "Horse, scalp, gun I captured," they say
then for them drum they hit. ** Person I killed''
they say. Many different things they have done they tell-
about. "Many times I fought too," they say. "Many
horses too I captured too," they say. After that women
who works for hats they hang up women their hats
which had been taken down.
They give away property. Horses, clothes good they-
throw away. Those which are' thrown away many get them.
The speaker young men he says to, "Your turn, you-
dance. You throw away clothing. Those (T) who wish
horse even they throw away. Horse for sticks any
same place they put.
One by one young men they dance. First very drum
who owns dances. Next to him belts who own they-
dance. The belt toward it they dance back and forth.
Different songs with they tie around their waists. Then
they dance around a circle four times. They sit down. Belts
they hang up again. Swords who own they dance. By it
middle young men toward one of women toward
they dance. Past each other they dance. Four times they-
do that. The swords upwards they hold.
Then they quit. They sit down. Horse whip those-
who own they dance. All one after the other they dance.
Women young men in front four times they dance that-
way. They sit down. They do that then the speaker
dances one being he dances. Axe who owns in turn
dances. Four times he dances around. He does that then
he sits down. Whistle who owns in turn he dances.
Twice he dances. After that then he whistles. And
when he whistles all young men get up. Still who-
are sitting he whistles when he hits. He does that then
to them he gives something. Four times he whistles. Then
he sits down.
204 University of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [ VoL 11
•ist'^ni «§iL«inniDa «&t'a tagidili^tc «§iLk^tdI
•Iginada* hiLilla «lLt'^m«i «isgaka «Iwa
sukuwa nioa yioa «ist'anni L^katiL
«I da dl tciL na La m oa gi di tci j dl j gtl La ma gi m date
5 gii ni« ha di tsin na <I has da gu na« ts^i na y^itc
hanic ytiwilnl maoa dinistsi «isLi «isLig^la
ma Ga n!s La
•isgaknwa nagut'inna<I «ist'a tagidili^to
dijga La ma gin! date tfL wanayatelna tadili^te
10 <9S sa ta gi yi8 ni hi <! lil la di j gtl La ma m date
«i wa nis ka ne «aL •! ni «ifl t'a di j gu La ma ni date
ts'uka*! «!sLihaLa «as«innl «!st'a «98nit8i
tadili^te Lat'a «i8gakuwa ^igigiiilla tadilL^tetci
xin nsduwa dalinne gimanita «iwa dijna
15 cis ga kH wa ta zi k'a ni na tell L^te xin <iL k^ na
mik'assa dfL «ii9 da n^ na silktLwa «aGa didjinna
^didjihi t'io! «i8kiya suktiwa gu«a«a«I
sinnat!gi<i nal^ie s^kuwa sinnadasti<i stikuwa
zitda fisgiyaci <inada teat'^Ga na di teii9 tei k'a si
20 gu ni Ga da« ns gi ya la ka na dli ni <i8 Li ha La
casein ne ^isgakfLwa stikuwa giza gQdila ts'ika
ns Li haL a «as nn ne gtl nas si na di dae dij gtl
La ma na sin ni da t'iGi 'is^iya^ tsinnatigi «isdtlna
stlktlwa tein na na dis na miga ninadiLte Lat^a
25 stl kH wa «i tein na dite «a t^ Gi k5 wa «is ga kti wa
•ist'a Lat'a sin na gi yi tite Lat'a «§iLteisse
gunisnatigu tateididiLte tsinnatigi*! «iLilla
<!wat'i. hasdagtlna«i naiy^ite gtln^Lnnnina
<!haenie dan! miL tsin ni da' hi «i wtl sis si daL a
30 mi tsis na «i wa fl Gi has da gtl na «i d! ^ gii siL a
«!wa «isL^ka«i djtl gun^<inna«! ha^la «iwa
<is^akuwa «akina«i dan! ktlgil^te miL natsinl«i
xin didj! «iteidiyie gtlwa teistetlti t'iGi hau
teinite du«isninna La Lat'a dani«i
35giika nateill^te di^ dani«! «a tsin nis ta t'iGi
Lat'a «isLi guGa teist^te dH «a tsin nIs t'a t'iGi
gflni «isL! guGa teist^te natsikwiyi t'iGi
gimmaGa teiet^te <!wa dtihatsinna t'iGi Lat'a
1915] Qoddard: Sarsi Texts 205
Arrows who own in turn they two dance. One be-
hind the other they dance then arrows young men and
women their eyes below arrows they hold. Who moves-
away immediately their faces they poke. Four times
they dance around. Their faces who pokes speaker
toward he walks. He says, ** Yonder person's face him
I poked. Horse saddle him I give."
Young men who work in turn they dance. Four times
they dance around. Water who brings he dances, pail
holding up with four times he dances around. Then
shield who owns in turn four times he dances around.
The woman horse whip who owns in turn last of all
she dances. All young men with her dance.
Songs different kinds all have. Then four young-
men in the middle they place. Songs who sing their-
voices do not give out women for them who sing they-
sing. Then young man women worker hats he takes-
down. Women he puts them on. Women in front
young man he dances. Sun the way it goes he leads-
th^n. Young man one another horse whip who owns
young men women between he places. Woman horse-
whip who owns the other way she dances. Four times
when they dance around then the young man hats
other women whose turn to wear them beside them they-
stop. All women wear them then young men in turn
all wear them. All together one hundred times they-
dance hats with.
Then the speaker gets up. Those who own them
he tells, **Food with the dancing you bring. We-
are going to eat." Then the speaker these clothes
and horses too those looking on he gives to. Then
young men two food they bring in then they take it-
around, songs four they sing. By them they put food
then "hau," they say. Who does not say it immediately
all the food by him they put down. This food they-
eat up then all horse to him they give. He does not-
eat it up then he himself horse to him he gives. He-
vomits then to him he gives it. And he does not vomit
206 University of Calif omia Puhlioaiions in Am. Arch, and Bthn. [YoL 11
gu wa tcic tcfiz <Ita8itfLwa gQnlsn^nl «as8a kitda
nltsit^sse Lakaz& hast^ooa kowa tcistio
ma dl wQ tsa oa gtita «I tci has t^ oa da nit! ddtioa
niLa djidja tagigiiyi «a8sa gUt'a kitda Liki
5 da nl gH nas «! na «! ha tcic tcuz
k'atsisna t'lOl sfLk^wa ^wa «i8gakuwa «aLiia
naginfdac didji xin k'anatciGihl t^oi «aLna
has dti gii na «I naiy^tc hanic k^ananadac <Isn!
t^o! natcidiLtc miL hanatsIdaL^I oina <Itcid!yic
10 La na ha dl ka na sin na ti g! gi ma oa tci «atc gi Lil la
dij gtl da mil le «a na tcin ni dac miL dl dji «! t'i oi
<IL hanay^c Iwat'io! ts'a «a miL nn nana
hanatci'ac «Iwat^ ta natcidiLtc hadikana niddwa
t'ioi mit sin ni t'i oa na« ^iL hanagiini^dac
List of Dance Properties
15 Likiza sinatigi dit'^nitca^ tcaktLyiooa tioa
maoa niLa «!wa m^s^i nami<i mikagQ
nigisL'fLsi maoa dagiL'fL mitcinnaoa dagiL'il
«is tea zi t'a ga ma oa da gi L^fL
«iwa <isLihaLa dit^^nitca <Udji maoa
20 da gi L'a di na sis oa na z&* ma oa da gi gi l'CLc
dina diiina «iLhaLna djfL «ioa dagigiL'uc
dani <iLtcilna z&^ giiwa «isLahaLa diiic
nsiIhaLa «ik'a dani tci <U lie namiya dikada
ka^tc^da miLfLlagti datci^L^uc tcak^zaga
25 mi k'a si« da dis t'a «a tcis nc
«iwa <iLt'^ni gQsiLa mika digisdiz gwatcicic
•ist^^ni«i ^aLtc^niskaL minil^oa «aki dit'^netca
da gi L'a
«iwa niskani«i giiy^ni «igisLa ^itci
SO di ma tsa oa mi t'a yi dji tic di dji di t^^ ne tea
maoa dagiL'il Lastcu «iLilla Lat^a tastciz <iwa
Layigatcisli «isgaka «a^L<inlna« Lat'a giitsita
Las tcu ta tsis tcai
<iwa tcasizali^i tea si da mit'^o mi tea *ak'a
35 ni ois teae tcti hwu wa <i Lil la
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 207
then all they take the food around. Tea ten pails in.
Bread one sack for them they bake. Crackers five
boxes, beef not very much, berry soup pails five
in. Some food those who look on they give.
They finish eating then women and young men
in turn they dance. Four songs they finish singing
then in turn the speaker stands up. He says, ''You-
make an end of dancing," he says then all get up then
they go out its song they sing. One of them who has-
been wounded hat to him they give. With it four times
entrance he dances up and back then after the fourth time
with he goes out. Then outside to the owner he gives-
it back. Then they go home. Wounded person there is-
none then whose hat it is with he leads them out.
List of Dance Properties
One hat hawk tail, weasels very on it many.
And sword otter skin on it sewed up to it tied on.
Its handle tied on hawk feathers on it are tied.
And horse whip hawk tails four to it are tied.
Person who has killed only to it ties them on. Person
somebody who has whipped too to it he ties the on. Oun
who has captured only for it whip paints. Horse whip
on gun he draws. Otter skin beaded stripped long way
for the handle they tie on. Weasel skin along it in bunches
they make it.
And arrow beads on it they twist around they make-
it. Arrow forked at the end two hawk tails they-
tie on.
And shield deer skin stick circle inside they-
place. Four hawk tails to it they tie on. Yellow paint
with all are painted. And across the breast young men
who own it all their bodies yellow they paint them.
And crow neck lace crow its wings, its tail on it
is beaded porcupine quills with.
208 University of Calif omia Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [YoL 11
<!wa «lBka8l<I dit^^netca mlt'^oa niLulda
gusitL^a ml ka di gis tiz gfltcaga haGi'a «atcic«ic
tclgica ma gum lit da Ikicgwagu tcicnc maGa
da <I da tsa tsa da <a tcic nc
The Dog Feast
5 namdacna minadjlna tiGa ^agutila t'lGi
hanic li caiGisLahl dim dinaGila <!wa guwa
tatsididli Litca mtcitc^tda ta La tcl yi l'uc sakuwa
guLg^na caigiL<Ic minlgi ku <aka tcitdi«!l^c
«iwa ha tcit die k'atc maGatsigina «^ttciLntc «as8a
10 ma gtl m lit da kl da tcil l^tc dij gu ml til na tc! die gue
«at'iGikowa Likani ml ki da teie gue sukuwa
eaigii^nm*! digiGa kwiyiGa «aLugu8a«a
teana «astca« tsinmda« dam miL tsinmdah!^
midaka mjakaga si la 'ateie^ic hasdagflna«I
15 ha nic «I wa Li «I kw^iL a tei ju ni '^iL ^ ni gi ts'i
diy^itc «iwa ktiteil^te duLanatsi'a sukuwa
gu«a«a^ L'titsin yioa tsitdi tagiisk'is «ik*a
naGi«ae L'Htsin natsi<a zi|;da tslyioa
ta mi tei die n!e tazateijti giits'i ta mi tcit die nic
20 La Ga teiz di gu teis «i dju < wa win ni t'as si dju
ta mi tei die nie Li«i na tei dilate L^utsinna tsi*ahi
nidatatstsa«aL dijgu mits'i nakayitsa«aL
*at^Gikowa miga nagitci'atc sitdi'kahi magunilitda
nukata teictcue ^skasi «aL«inna Likiza maGa
25 ta tin na tsi di na tcie teue «a t'i Gi k'a ni date
gimifikassa giminaka nateil^ie
dijna kat'unaGa «atcitL'a gidiniltcite *assak'a
Li mikidasila^ tsitdi 4 k'izza nateiLtcflz ^iskasi
«aL<ini maGa teiditeite nanidahi t'iGi *akagu
30 «as t'a si «i di dac «is ka si «at di na ni dae dij gu
hat'ie «at'iGikowa «isduwa xin maGa nateitdiyie
•Iwa yits'i «ididae tagii yi«i n^nidae miL
didji^it'iGi yinigi nidagat'aka «ididae «itdida
zitda ciLt^^ni miGa teitite Li tazilla
35 kit da teie di ni ka t'i ne «i ni la Ga sit da <e za ka
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 209
And belt hawk tail its feathers long ones beads
twisted around like a tail sticking out they make. Cloth
good hanging they make. On it in rows crosswise
they make it.
The Dog Feast
Those who dance their relatives very are sick then
he says, *'Dog I will make feast this person may be-
well." Then for him he says a prayer. Dog small
they hang. Woman who is neat cooks it. For it fire
for it they kindle. Then they bum the hair oflf. Care-
fully (T) they do it. Pail good in it they put it.
Four times its water they pour out. Then sugar they-
pour in. Women who cook it their tipi inside they-
leave it.
Long time first they dance. Food with they dance
for it few lies there they make. The speaker
says, ''Then dog bring in.'' The sword who owns
to it goes. Then he brings it in. He does not put it down.
Woman who works for sweet grass under it charcoal
burning on it he puts. Sweet grass he puts it before
last he holds it up. Noon place toward he holds it up.
Where it sets toward too. Then toward north too
he holds it up. The dog he puts down. Sweet grass where-
it is they hold it above. Four times to it they move it
then beside it they put it down. On blanket good one
on it they spread down. The belts who own one of them
for him before the doorway blanket they spread. On that
he sits. His belt beside him they put.
Four men opposite the door they sit down. The pail
dog is placed in blanket one side they move. Belts
who own for them they sing. He dances then twice
back and forth he dances. Belt without he dances.
Four times he does that. Then another song for him
they sing. Then to it they dance. Three times the side-
of it he dances then the fourth time to it prairie-
chicken like he dances. He starts dancing before arrow
to him they give. Dog soup he pokes it in. This man
210 Univeriity of Calif omia PubHeaiions in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
ktigitcitc ganasa tadiy^c <IsdagQ tanadlli^tc
tagQ yi<m n^nidatc miL didjitloi n! da oa t'a ka
nadidao litazila*! kit da n^ gl tcitc hadlkana
t^Gl gii wtis La dat tsti kaglLdltc dijgu hat^ic
5 di j na ka t^ti na oa dis tsin na «! hac «!c iJ tea <I
nLt'^nm «lLilla takasilla m^s «98«inna ytL wu
dijna kat'ilnaoa<I mtcitca gimaoa yItciLtcilj
gflnilaoa sitdana^I Litsitsinna «atciLtcuj <Iwat^oI
gi g^t tcl ga dll duL il tcitsinna^I tazak'a natcl'atc
10 •Iwat'iGi «isgak11wa suktLwa Lat^a Li«I
«Itcisna dan! «Il LfLka natsinna «Itcisna«!
«Inik! . fitlk^wa tcinatigi <aL«inmiia hanic
«ad!naka ^Isina «at'io!kowa Lat'a hau tclnic
dfL hau <isniniia Lat'a daiil«! maoa tcill^tc
15 cf tcis na zit da xin gl ma oa <! tcl d! Gic sfL ktL wa
sinatigi «aLnnn!na tagili^tc «at^ioIkowa
naginidatc <at^io!k5wa «It8!na Lat'a «at'iGl
Litffltsinna ^Its'i didatc dijna kattinaoa tazak'a
distsinna yits'! <!<Udac ilMza 'astca tciditcitc
20 La t'a «is ^a ka na ! diLtc ma gii il nl gii la zil ^s s!
tazitdani tcijiLtcdj! na tc! d! ni djitc «at^oikowa
ilkiza kat^In!«! La ma didatc nLt'^m ^Lilla
di j gii mi tsl tsin na nL t'^ ni «I Lil la kas gO
manadjikic dijgtl dina kat'tlnaoa«! hakit'ic
26 La t'a ha ^ nl da ha gi m! ka «a na tsit diL diLtc
si ni yi ni zin na «isL^ka ha na tcit diL haLtc tcijuni
«aL4nna«i tcigica sitt^naga ^iiilla Lamadiy^c
li tsin na <! ml k! da tn la
il calahi <inizinmna tasitdidlihi *ak^c^na
80 mis t'd ti «a gi tic gi ma oa ta sit di dli gQ na sa
gi na dac gu ha gi nio di ni li *i ni zin ni
gwagQnili dina<iligtlla dinatcina «iLilla
si na ti gi ^ ma Ga sit di na si di niL(s) tcdtc <a t^i Gi
yik'a sinnaligi natcill^tc sinatigi^ <aGa
35 ta tsi di dli «a t'i Gi mi yi Ga L'ti tsin tcit diL k'atc
ci wa da Ga na tci dil l^tc
La ka k'a tsis na t'iGi dijna mits'i di diLtc
«iskassi«i ninatsilla t'iGi tatinna gigiLilla
'as da diLtc tazatcizdi giitsis<i nagi diLtc 'iwa
1915] Qoddard: 8ar$i TexU 211
at the end who sits his mouth he pokes it in. Before him
he walks. Again he dances. Three times the side of it
he dances then four times prairie chicken like he dances.
The dog soup in he pokes, a wounded person then his-
cheek he wipes it on. Four times he does that. Four
men who are sitting he does it to. Dog arrow with
he takes out. Sword who own those four men small-
pieces to them he gives. At the end who sits the dogs-
head he gives. Then they take the meat off. Dog its-
head bone in the middle they place.
Then young men, women all dog they eat. Food
with together they serve. Those who eat for them
women hats who own says, ''My friends, let us eat."
Then all "hau,'' they say. Not "hau," who says all
the food to him they give. They eat before song for it
they sing. Women hats who own dance. Then they-
dance. Then the bones all there dog head bone to-
ward they dance. Four men in the middle who sit
to it they dance. One first they sing. All young men
stand up. Bight hand upward they hold they shout.
They sit down again. Then one man dances around a-
cirde. Arrow with four times its head bone arrow
with gently he pokes. Four times these men do that.
All while he dances on them they throw away. Those-
who want to horses they throw away. The sword who-
owns cloth thin with he goes around. Dog bones
on it they put.
Dog who makes feast who are called on they pray.
Who knows how pipe they give. For them he prays.
In front of him they sit. For them he says, * * This dog
who called on happily may he live his relatives with.'*
The hats for them blanket they spread. Then on it
hats they put. Hats for they pray. Then under them
sweet grass they bum. Then they hang them up again.
They finish eating then four to it go. Belt they-
bring back in, then doorway with it they stand. Noon
toward they stand. Then sunset toward. Over there
toward north too. Then they come in. Belts who own
212 University of Calif omia Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [VoLll
Lagatclzdi gutsis«i yuwu« winnet^assl dju
•afiGikowa kugidiLtc «iskassi «aL«inmna«i
ka La gi gi dil tcitc gi nu n§ik ka tsit di na tsit dl ni l^tc
«i wa «is kas si «i da ml tcl dil i^tc «i wa t*i Qi gi gi ma oa
6 di dji xin «i tcit di yic gim miL Lil la gim mi kal-
tcit dil L^Htc <at'iGik5wa Lanaginidac hagina
t'i oi La t'a ^ ga kti wa mi Lil la ka tci diL L'CLtc
<at'ioik5wa ma na tcit L^tc <iwa hanatcill^tc kawa
kunatcill^tc «i8kasi tcinatigi <iLilla gQtsillasi
10 t^i 01 tcin na tciL titc La tcit di date
mi li tci ka ni i^n na «a t^i Gi na ka gi mi tci die cuj
sinnatigi <aL«innina k'a ginidac gwa gi mi tciL «itc
kigidji magQnilitda ^maGa tciLtcuc ^wa
«isLa magtinilitda gimaoa tcill^te tsidi kahida
15 gi ma Ga tci gi nic ka da nis tcac da gi ma Ga
tciginic tsola gimitsola gwatcicnc gimaGa
tcit di tcit <iwa tagimi tcidiyii^tc guk'a nagisni
<inizinna gtL ka tagidilL^tc stikuwa sillasinna
gimikalak'a gimik'a tadilL^tc ^isL^kka «aki<kakawa
20 ta )n ka ka wa ma gii ni lin ni k'a na tci giL nitc gu ziL La «i
tiGa niLa na tci giL nitc ka tci dji hi t'iGi sakuwa^
naginidatc tsil la sin na <i gimaGa gutcinij
sinatigi ^ulla gutsillasi t'iGi didji <iL'igi
tiza tci ni date <iwa didji dji nisi ha^itsinida
25 ha gti za
g^L^aLidaLna za <at'iGina tsinnatiGa nid5na
za zinnatiGa sin ni data miL naxinnatsi«a miL
hakHtciga silli miL gasillasi t'iGi Likiza
dina tai^c maGa yitsi«ana maguLini gula
30 tcin na <i Lil la na gu tci cuj dij gu La ma gtL tcic cuj
guga gin nidae gula sinnaka <iwat'iGi gu tci ni tcitc
di ka ha li tsa ha <iLilla Lat'a guni gu wus La da tsu k'a
mas gu ta Li gi tsa tci di Lie <a t'i Gi ko wa na tci y^itc
gula sin na dju naiy^itc guwa djudjin dijgu
35 La tci ni date <a t'i Gi k5 wa na tci ni date ta zi ka
tsisda ditci «iL'agi teas din na natcit^c
•a t'i Gi ko wa «a guL «in na «at t'ic
1915] ' Goddard: Sarsi Texts 213
they place in the middle. Behind them blanket they spread.
Then belts they bring. Then for them four songs
they sing. With them they tie them aromid their waists.
Then they dance around the circle. They do that then
all young men with them they tied on. Then they-
give them back. Then they take them out. Tipi they-
take them in. Belt hat with they give some one. Then
they put them on. They dance around the circle.
His horses whose are many those they put in the middle.
Hats who own beside he sits they make. Coat good him
they give. Then trousers good him they give. Blanket
new to him they give. Moccasins beaded to him they-
give. Earrings their earrings they make to him they-
give (T). Then in front they dance. On them I will-
oflPer who thinks on them they dance. Women to whom-
it is given their husbands on them they dance. Horse two
three good ones they oflfer. Clothes very many they-
oflPer. They finish singing then women get up. To-
whom it is to be given for them they talk.
Hat with who is to receive then four nights
only they sleep. Then four days dancing this way
they keep on.
Those who fight only those hat dances only hats
when they dance with it they give orders. With it chiefs
they become. With it they give it then one person
dances. To him to whom it is given right his hand wrist
with they pull him up. Pour times they lead him around.
Beside him he sits, beside the one who gives it. Then
they paint white man's paint with all their faces.
On their cheeks like rings blue paint they paint.
After that he gets up. He who gives it too gets up.
For them they sing. Pour times they dance around.
After that they sit down again. In the center they sit.
Pour nights by himself he sleeps. After that the owner
he becomes.
214 Univeriity of Calif omia Publications in Am. Areh. and Eihn. [YoL 11
SOCIETIES
Lat'a ^sgaka ^wa kat'fLnaGa za yiLtadiLtc
Lat'a t'a gim mi tsi Ga dagiL^o^ 'aLt'ati <aglt^
<!ts^aoa kagana gim ma la tcin na ^aigiaj/o tai^
tagididiLtc ^asts'a miL didjl«! t'iGl xagiltic
5 gi ga na L^a na <I ka ga na «i «I lil la gH ts! xa git dl tc^ j
tasgiLna
«l8^aka <!wa kat'dnaGa z& yiLtadiLtc taLaginnidahi
t^Gi xagiltic gigistcona ts'itda tea gota
ta gi gis tc'tlLtc 'ast'ati «a^t^ •akiyi t'a
gim m! tsi Ga da giL l^o
liktLwa
10 kat'tLnaGa cfwa ts^ktLwa yiLtadiLtc kat'flnaGa*!
mitcadit^Gi 'akasigigida «!gididahl tlGi
ts^ktiwa«! tci gi ca <! la Ga giigitani lilla «!ginnada
na gOl tc'tLj na
Isgaka ^wa kat'tlniGa iff yiLtadiLtc
^ast'atl 'agit'i tak^ t'a gimmitsi'Ga da^L'5
15 ta gd ta gi di diLtc miL di dji <i t'i Gi xa gil tic
gi gic tc5 na gi na ni ta ta ga giL tc'ilLtc
dawtX*
«is^akuwa za yiLtadiLtc ^ts^ilsa za
gimmitsi'Ga daigitL'o tc'idinitci ^mizala m^sgtl
tagididiLtc minaGa ts'ist'una gistsahi t'iGi
20 ta la gi dil gic «a t'i Gi k5 wa ta na gi diLtc
QUALIFICATIONS AND DUTIES OP CHIEFS
nahine <Unati «isdugii'a dinasadli «a Li ts^ daL L'i
t^iGi gtidja gOst'iGa ts'in n§u3 ^i gu di ma tc'i djin na
na siL G^ na «i wa da ni ti «iL tcu na^ ha kn tci Ga ti
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 215
SOCIETIES
Mosquitoes
All young men and men only dance. All
feathers their hair are tied on. Naked they are. Bird
claws their wrists are tied on. Three times they dance,
first then fourth time then they go among the people.
Those they catch their claws with their heads they-
scratch.
Police
Young men and men only they dance. They dance
then they go among the people. Those they catch blankets
breech cloths for they tear up. Naked they are. Two
feathers on their heads are tied on.
Dogs
Men and women they dance. The men red cloth
they put around their shoulders. They dance then the-
women end of cloth they hold with they dance.
Preventers
Young men and men only they dance. Naked
they are. Three feathers on their heads are tied on.
Three times they dance then fourth then they go-
among the people. Those they catch their clothing they-
tear to pieces.
Dawu*
Young men only dance. Soft feathers only ontheir-
heads are tied on. Whistles around their necks in a circle
they dance around. His eye who is shot they see then
they run away. After that they quit.
QUALIFICATIONS AND DUTIES OP CHIEFS
We Indians different ways when we were living, when-
we were fighting each other then well just when he was-
looking at him his enemy who killed; and gun who-
216 University of Calif omia Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [ VoL 11
«a gi t'ic di ma' kn «is 14k ka ni La nl' ni «i« na'
«at'ioina dju hakutcloa «agit'ic mitts^n^oa
gu d jan na gu yl la gu dl nic na dd ka ts'i dli na <a t'l 01 na
dju* hakutcaoa ^agit'ic ts'asdina nadllna
5 mis t'o kas «as nn na* «a t'l 01 na djti ha ku tea oa
^agit'ic maoa gQLa gud^tdlicna* «at'ioina* djti
hakatcioa <agit^c «ak'a du gu tsis dis tcoL na
tsa oa k'i Gi d ji du wi yi ya* gu tsis gi dis tcuL lI t*i oi
tsa oa k*i gi dji yigiyaitc «iwat'i haktitciaa «agit'ic
10 «a t'i oi na ha kti tci Ga t'i na tsa oa k'i gi dji <i da ha ktl tci oa
gina«i didilli<i lilla nistc'atci iiilla <asdaLt'a
ha ku tci Ga na <i maGa <its'isnagu gigilanagu
mits'i ^ts^kanagu dina mataguii na gQ ts'us fi hi
t'i Gi min na oa tc'in nic na ku ni <i ni gQ ha ku tea Ga
15 si lin ni t'i Gi za di na gi Lin na «a Li ts'i zi Ga t'i Gi
hakutcaGa<i guts'i diy^c guzisG^na<i hastc'inic
yHwu<i ts'izicGini minadjinna* <isL^ka niL^ni
guziLLa niL^ni gimaGa nil la gQcnic
minnadjinna* ts'iz zis Gi ne na gimaGa ts'illa t'iGi
20 na nis si dd «a i^n na ts'i gi ni la
SHAMANS
tiGa gwa gii di la t^ Gi «izilni «iwat*iGi
«a Ga gQ yi lin na «as tc'in nitc xagiya t'iGi guts'i
^^ly^te ma gtl di la na <i tal gimmaGa na ts'is tcus si
k'a ginnit^tc na ga gQ git dil nitc •iwa t'iGi gidjin
25 gwa gQ dil la <e xa ^ ^l t'5t La yi gi Gic k'ac xa gi na
t'iGi zanagiy^tc giGina gudja guLntctci
ha ni da t'iGi ^isL^kka gimma tc'iLl^tc ha ni da t'iGi
gu siL La gim ma Ga te'i l^tc «a ka ko go «a gu dja gu gi la
t'iGi dinatc'il^tc ha ni da t'iGi tagd gu dja gtL Gila
30 t'i Gi di na tc'il l^tc «a k5 ha <a Ga ja tc'i gi litc
Lik'i giits^GGa kwiyiGa ^a gu di la t'i Gi «iwat'i
l'o Li tc'it di «atc gimiga naGits'i«atc L'o^i «isL'a
kita giGik^tc giGiziz <at'iGig5wa gotsaga«i
dina tc'il 1^ <iwa mitsi< ^agudil^nna tiGa
35 <a t'i Ga kii gi mi na sa na tc'a «^tc l'iL mi k'a
tatc'e«^tc «iwa t'iGi yinatda giyiLtsin «a t'iGi
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 217
captured chiefs they became. Scouts horses many
they stole those too chiefis they became. His heart
kind, fond of inviting, not stingy, those too chiefs
became. By themselves another kind, pipes who own
those too chiefs became. His tipi many who had painted
those too chiefs became. Tet who had not taken scalps
scalps shirts they did not wear. Scalps those having taken
tJien scalp shirts they put on. Then chiefs they became.
Those who are chiefs scalp shirts chiefs their uniforms
metal with beads with they are like.
The chief his tipi to eat he invites. From him they-
may ask anything. Person bad thing who commits then
to him he tells him he must stop it. Chief who becomes
then he lives this way. They kill one another then chief
to him he goes. The murderer he tells, ** That one you-
murdered his relatives horses many, clothing much
them give," he tells him. His relatives who was killed
to them he gives. Then in the future they do not hate-
each other.
SHAMANS
Very he is sick sickness then medicine man he asks.
He comes out then to him he goes in. Sick person
blanket for him they spread on it he lies. He feels-
over him. Then he sings. Where the sickness is he sucks.
He throws it in the fire. He does this then he goes out.
For it well making him sometimes horses to him
they give. Sometimes clothes to him they give. Twice
he has doctored him then he gets well. Sometimes three-
times he doctors him then he gets well. This way we-
doctor each other.
Another kind his chest inside when he is sick then
herb he puts on the fire. Beside him he puts it. Herb
cup inside he dips. He drinks it. Then his chest
gets weU. And his head when it aches very much then
fire in front he puts it. Herb on it he puts. Then
over it he smells. Then they do that they get well. And
218 Univeniiy of California Puhlieations in Am. Areh. and Ethn, [VoL 11
di 01 ga ts*! •! gii dja na t'ic •Iwa gCLts'itta gCLlwiLLi
t'lOl L'a^ gioI<aL gulwiLi l'u iiilla gigidijatc
•fwat*! gtl dja na t'itc diL'1i<T gCLziLa niLane
gtlGa gfginic gCLtsIga g^a gCL dl la •! t'i oi l'Q
5 gCL tc'i dl jtLc ^ wa t'l gI gtl dja na t'ltc gtl ziz za tcfl
<atsagakahi t^iol L^tL tc'adlt'ada mi da
ts'itdi<ahi t^ol midlida dtl gtl xa yil niLtc <at'ioIk5wa
dlnatc'il^ digl ^ztUinI<I gudjatc'is<T «in|iigiiL
Lana tatcatc •Iwa gtldja tc'Ic^na^ nli^nna
10 d! n^ l^tc <T wa <a ktl gu dja «a Li ts^i <in
SPORTS
^akiaka 'aLits'i ta za ts'is ta ta ka zillasi
dagigiLL^u <a U yi gim mic ylLtc kawa gtlmaiya
tsiflk'a ka ts'a oi diLtc gCLziLLa kats'itdila* <ast'adi
gflstiGa <iskaka gimik'a tats'innidac gOzzagu
15 na ^i L'a ta gi di lij ga wa ha La ta k'a gtlL ziL La •! La t'a
na ki di Lac
nsgaktlwa tiGa yiLL^^Lna <aLitts'i tazadit^nna
kawa gflmaiya nats'itdiltc dat'igikawa didille
ha kit dja Ga gCLts'i zagiiGiflsa gidilLitc giiwahad^inna
20 gCL ziL La ka ts^t dil la ci na gi di l^tc
gudja •iditc'acna 'asat^ <isnina «iwat^Gi
«a tc'innic t'iGi gtlziLLa kats'idil^c sa^ani
tc'ict'ats'i nats'i^atc digidana t'agidjitc Lana
«anni nine ^astsa •IniLt'11' "iwafiGi «aGa
25 sa <a ni giL t'Qtc gQ gi tc'a ta <i tci na gi di tcitc <i wa
LikV ist'a «idist'utc 8a<ani<i «itc*^na
tc^a gilL ditc gu ziL la na gi dil 1^ ca «a
PAINTINO OP TIPIS
gutcidiLicci t'iGi tn ^isL^ka didji kida
<^ttciL<itc tsi dijna ^isgaka didji mas
30 ta ka l^L tsi ^ mas ^i tsi ki da toil l^tc <a ki na
tatin nazi <atcitL^a <akina nazi mas takatiL
kawa gtlts^i mas<i tagigiLni miL didji tsi
kawa gwa gi yiL tctiz •iwa <agit^Gi kawa
1915] Goddard: SarH Texts 219
part of his body swells then herb he chews. The-
swelling herb with he blows. Then it gets well. His-
herb clothing much him they give. His ear it aches
herb he blows in then it gets well. His large veins one-
cuts then herb holy its opening he puts in then
its blood does not flow. After that he gets well. This
sickness they doctor even some die. And well
who are made many they get well. Then this way well
they make each other.
SPOBTS
Two horses to each other praising heads (t) they-
tie up. Two days after camp away on a hill they-
go up. Their clothes they bet. Naked just young men
on their horses they mount. Far where they stop they-
race. The winner clothing all he takes.
Young men very who run fast to each other praising-
themselves camp from they gather. From here money
chief's house from that far they start. Who wins
clothing which they have bet he takes.
Well who shoots, **Let us bet," he says. Then
*'Ye8," he says. Then their clothes they bet. Target
side of the hill they place. Their guns they load. One-
of them says, "You, first shoot." Then the target he-
shoots. Where it strikes stick they stick up. And the-
other in turn he shoots. The target who shoots he wins.
Clothing he takes.
PAINTINO OP TIPIS
They paint a tipi then paint in cups four in side
they make paint. Four young men four rings holding
paint the rings paint in they dip. Two persons before-
doorway stand. Opposite the door two persons stand.
Rings they hold. Tipi to it the rings holding up with
fourth time tipi they put on the cover. And there tipi
220
University of Calif amia Publieations in Am, ArcK and Ethn, [VoL 11
gutcidiLic «iwa kuwioa didjl «!8La kit'a
s! ka «a tc! L'a
tsa si ha du wa
guL tcit djin ni
5 dl na kwi yi Ga
t'l Gi tci tea «I
di j dl if^ tsin sa <a kwi yi oa sa «a
ta tin na kwi yi oa gu gi dis k'an
t'l 01 Likiza nanitcitcai likiza
diLtsinna kawa gtloa tciLtcudi
mi tea gu lin ni dij gQ za gu za ka
z! ka <! wa ka tsit tsa di t'l oi guL dl djin gu oi na
<!wat'iGi kat'dnaga kawa<i maoa gutsa^ahi
guiilla kamloa tsasdina kuyioa nitate didji
10 <i L'a gi ni tate ka miL guL di ka wa k'a ni ta t'l ol
«iwa «at*ioik6wa mits'i ktl na teit diLte •at'ioikowa
mi Lil la ka gu teil lite
BUFFALO POUNDS
nas «a oa «a tsi la t'i of
zani
^a ka ^ tie na mi tsin na wtlL li t'l oi
1^ «i tei dl te'ae *al tsin ni oa na da li t'l o!
«a teie <!e taz na nakQjij <Twa ktl diLte
dina kateinnitie kQgisi miteiLt'd
mikatelgae *iwat'lGl natsiL<aL Lat'a
<! Lil la ta na teit diL
•is ga ka xa m
minnada
mazts!
migina
Lat'a
«a lin ni
TRAPPING BEAVEB
20 taoa minna didilli <steiltsi minna
«a La te! dl <ae mas tsi <i tel sit L'a n! da sit di tsi
didilli ns ted tsi ^atitigi <itei maoa na teit diL nite
«at'ioioa dateigiL'fle •iL'atsi «It'ioi nuts'!
nateitdiy^e mika teiLdjUs tsizneo^
PBIMiriVE DISHES
^ dzanagQ ts'atea eidjonni didille mil
na gu ts'i tin ni ni dd wa gu <^ sa< di dil li mi oa
sate'isinne nidtiwagu gtlL'is «9ssa<gii «ate'is<
di kas ku na kan t'i oe gi gi kit da da ni i kit da gi la
m^ its'inna m^ <agis<i di tei ted «itei kuda
30 k'in nis t'as si gim mi ts'is La za xa ni da <9S sa* ki da oi la
«it'ioe <iLitda «agis«ini t'ioe «a ts'a ki gi suz «isL'a
gwa *a gi gie «ie
1915] Goddard: 8arsi TexU 221
they paint. Then inside four cups inside stand.
Opposite the door four places sweet grass is placed.
Inside it is placed. Cedar doorway inside they bum,
then they sing, then one our berries each one person
inside who is sitting tipi to them they give to eat.
Then the berries spoon four times only in their mouths
they put. Then they finish eating then they sing its-
songs. And then man tipi for him to whom it is given
with on the prairie by himself inside he sleeps. Four
nights he sleeps. When the day ends he finishes sleeping
then after that to him they go in. After that with it
everything ends.
BUFFALO POUNDS
Buffalo corral they make then young men buffalo
for ride. They drive them then over them they shoot.
Beside the hedge they go then both sides those who hide
get up. Then they go in around them people everybody
from the outside shoot them. All they kill. Then
they butcher them. All meat with they go home.
TBAPPING BEAVEB
In the water its hole iron trap its hole they put-
outside. Both sides sticks small they stick up. Iron
trap the wire stick for it they drive in the ground.
There it is tied. In ihe morning then to it they go.
Its legs are caught. They kill it.
PBIMITIVE DISHES
Long ago old woman aged iron with made from
when was not, pot iron in it one cooks was not clay
pot she made. This she fired (t) then in it food
she put in. Enife bone knife she made. Large stick
stick inside she hollows out, their plate. Buffalo horn
pot they put in. There it is soaked they make it, then
they split it. Cup they made.
222 Unwenity of Calif omia Publications in Am, AroK and Ethn. [VoL 11
STONE ABEOWHEADS
«!st'9nn6 «agfla <at'ioe (Udilll nidtlwa tsa
dadHwagd «agi8< tsa Glyiiilla itc'^Lii
«aGiBno tsa didtlLiI k'asL^a gigitcinna «!t^ii!
t'l ol ^ ts'in na ta gin niL tsaL
WHAT EAQLEBIBS SAW AT EDMONTON
5 ^oe nas «a oa tcH wa zani diglicsl yis4
•afioe xanltl* yis«I «at'ioe gSts'l nas^aoa
yis4 «at^Ioe gtltcaoa nas^aoa iiaGis< gCLtcaoa
nas'aoa naG!s4 naiJ gtlts'i naclna <aL!ts'ldaLi
maginica nats^mahi «!tci nas^aoa guts'!
10 *a gu ni ca da ni ti gtl dja ma gCL n! ca tc'i oe ca
giidja< y!s< gCLcicatl gtlts'! ^i^kka
ma gtl ni lin ni 7!s4 yiGl gtlzadi gCLts'I danitcCL
yi8«I lit'ioe tanak^e yia^ yiwu *Igahali
haladji yis^ maxayi«aiye yls4 masyiLL'aLi
16 yis «I di na ti «iB d5 na yDs «I da tcis i yis «I
d§gahali tcadit'^na yis4 didilli yis^ dinati
gdts'i yiB4 naclnna gCLts'i yis< mItc'aGa
<asdja diGinidji gilts'i yis4 taLi^ts'a gtlt'inna
yis4 dzanagtl halikdwa yis<I dzannagCL
20 ts'a kH wa yis 4 dzan na gfl ts'i ktl wa yis 4
dzanagtl •Igahali ts'ikQwa yis< dzanagtl
mi ts'i Ga ni tctl wa y!s< dzanagtl na dtis zi Ga ten
yis! maGazinna yis< dzanagQ <its'aGoa
yis< tsiskagu yis*! tfltctlgii yis4 tanak^csi
25 cl kaj ji yis •! ts*a Ga k'i yi dji jris «I tea gtiz za Ga
k'iyidji yis< gtlts'i gtl ci cat! yis<!nna kawa
gddadlicci yia^ guts'i tc'afaGGa yis«I
s The suffix -ti is used of primitiye objects and native animals to dis-
tinguish them from newly introduced ones.
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 223
STONE ABEOWHBADS
Arrows they made. Then iron was not. Stone
arrowpoint they made. Stone with sharp they made.
Stone oval tied on its handle he holds then bones
he pounds up.
WHAT BAOLBBIBS SAW AT EDMONTON
There Edmonton cattle spotted I saw. There
buffalo I saw. There afterward houses I saw. There
east houses I saw again. East houses I saw again.
Again after that Cree they fought I knew about it.
Hunting wood corral afterward I knew about. Musket
very well I knew. Cloth well I saw. I have sense.
There horses good I saw. Over there far away there
large gun I saw. The same place boat I saw. Over-
there white man chief I saw. Flag I saw. Wagon
I saw. Indians another tribe I saw. (Name of tribe)
I saw. White man priest I saw. Money I saw. Indians
from there I saw. Cree from there I saw. His hair
in the middle parted there I saw. Nez Perc4 tribe
I saw. Long ago old men I saw. Long ago old women
I saw. Long ago young women I saw. Long ago white
women I saw. Long ago donkey I saw. Long ago
rattlesnake I saw. Long ago birds I saw. Long ago
wolves I saw. Rivers I saw. Lakes I saw. Boat
flat I saw. Scalp shirt I saw. Weasel shirt I saw.
There I have sense. I have seen. Tent painted I saw.
There sun I saw.
224 University of California Publications in Am, Areh, and Ethn, [VoL 11
MBDICINB BUNDLE EITUALS
ORIGIN OP THE BEAVEB BUNDLE
kawa guts'! kat'ine tarns da la dizahe'
disL^alla xani yi«I «isLi daGlsL'ula •Iwat'iGi
xani<i •iniLt'u yiziLoi •Iwa •isii yioa
naolssut •Iwat*iGi d^GGioisL'u' •Iwat'i xani'i
5 n^s <aL «a lin ne <i gws, d! Gl la «! wa gtus ti Ga
minnasga* tutcula' tutakagii na (Urn Gila la
tcadLsdl tazats'it <igust'lGa minnada dzill^Ga
nak'us tsitL^a taGistiL nasguwiissi «isnasitda
ta Gl di <a ts'i m dza
10 min niG Ga <^ na tas 1411 nl <a La gi t'l ma Ga nl dza
imda< dlnisdj^cci xaGi^a* tas 1411 ne<i dinl
dina* cits'! gud!cnaj La dinagisLa ^It'aka
s! na n! dj! di <!s nil la La yti wtL* tc'a s! n^G Ga diL ga
d! na g!s La« <a ku <!l n! na kal La* tc'a tcV «! ts'ao Ga ^
15 tas i^n ni ma L'a dis ts'! d! n! tc'a ^ gu die naj
La m^td! «isdQts'! diya ^tc'IdzaGa mils'!
nakanica "iLnl tc'a«! dl tc'a«I Lat'a'
taglsdjacla ^tcizgH nuts'! nakanica t'lGl
«it'aka nits'! 8!tdisdla«a' mltc'^ nlya tc'a«I
20 *^ n!
«Iwa tasL^ne* «Ist'a gu die naj La maGa
SI Gis taL <I guL dti tc'a d! t'a <a t'a^ <asslsn! sinn! z&*
tc'^t dl nls t'a *a t'a* La siLtldlnlna guwa slglst^LlguL
La siL tl dl nl na da siLlGlssa «agis<Inneda Lat'a
25 d! na «I lin na* si l! gIs sa dd gH wa nis *a ha t'a
tasL^ne*! «IsnI dlna*l tc'a has nil la La dinf
dinala* sInlGa«I c^stclz «!wat'lGi tc'a«! «a
gisnl tc'a*! dlsniti lilla nlst'^na disdal
dz^ na da da nl «I n! du wa tc'a* «! na g! d! la
30 LlGis«i t'asl«anni tumiL tcltc'a dits'inne*
ts'aslt'aga maGa da gIIl'u* <iwa La tasL^nnel
<^ni di^ sit tumiL La «i8 du dl gu t'in na GaGl'aLlguL
•idtigu tcut'inna za* «aGls«Ig(ila tc'a d! t'a
nlduwa^a sit tumiL La za* «a tc'a d! t'a «a
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 225
MEDICINB BUNDLE EITUALS
OBIGIN OP THE BEAVEB BUNDLE
Camp from it man mounted a horse. He hunt he-
rode. Buffalo he saw. Horse he tied. Then buffalo
he shot. He killed it. And horse to it he led. Then
he tied the horse. Then buffalo he cut open. The meat
he arranged. Then just beside him a lake was. On the-
shore he had spread the meat. It was hot. Noon just
above him in the sky cloud small floated. With his-
head down he was eating then he looked up.
His food around water serpent lay in a circle. Its-
forehead its horn blue stuck up. Water serpent this
man to him he spoke, **My son, may I live. Why
are you afraid of met*' he said. '*My son, yonder
thunder is thinking about me. May I live." Thus he said.
It came down, thunder. Thunder birds water serpent
around him sat. This thunder spoke, "My son, from him
some other way go. That I might eat him to him I came-
down," he said, thunder. These thunders all were-
blue. ''That I might eat to it I came down. Then
on that account to you it ran. From it go away,"
thunder said.
Then water serpent in turn spoke, ''My son, to him
do not give me. He is not holy. I say I only am holy.
My son, help me. To him do not give me. My son,
if you help me, my bag you may have. All people
who may be my bag not to them I have given. ' ' Water-
serpent spoke. This thunder he told, "My son, this
you save my food you may eat. Then thunder, "Yes,"
said. Thunder made a noise with up they went. Already
food was gone. The thunder took it up.
The bag was in bottle small hard crow feathers
over it tied. Then "My son," water serpent said, "this
my bottle other tribe do not give. Other Sarsi only I let-
226 University of Calif omia Publications in Am, ArcK and Ethn, [YoL 11
<l8 dti di gu t'in na situmiLLa ganl«alada tsut'inna
niduwa gwa gu na ha t'a <!gi li^s sittumlLLa
mitt'a sa^anna^a^ namlyi dju mit'a'a <its'^Ga
Lat'a tc'asts'itti mit'a^atV miL tc^djinne
5 xal ten di dji mi t'a t'a La «a ka tcin na
«a na ts^ di I^tc ci mlt'a «akatcinna <adila t'lGi
ts'i d^ na ka tci tc'a ka min nas ga na gi «a
gwa nis'Ic xa^nlgowa t^Ioi xa tc'is tc'uLtc ^wafioi
ts'i t'at
Planting Tobacco
10 ha gu tc'i diL k'^tc *iwat'iGl ts'itd^naka tcitc'a
gtlk'a tUniclzna ^a ka na ha ci gis natc •Iwat'i «!tci
taste! tci iLilla maoa kdtc'idicdi kUts'itda
td w^L «aL nn na na gi dl djitc si ne gi ni zin na «a di na
dju nadjic i^nna ^t'a <!sd(lna yinlzina
15 na tc'itc ka mi k'a ts^ oi y! zit t^ Gi La m^t di
titc'in^c sit d^ na ka ka <! gikats'a «id(lwut
<ita nidasi <^tt'a di <a na ts'i di l^tc tci da
dig! «ats^dila gwagHnili xaGidal gwa gQ nil!
zaGidaL gwagtlnili Lat'a dina n^nit'tit dina
20 La t'a na xa Gi na <a t'i g5 wa «a k5
JACKRABBIT GIVES MEDICINE FOB SWIFT HOBSES
mi da wflsissat'a mita <! L^a tsi yis t'a dilitcaka
kamadiwtLt <at'iGi gtl^ tcisk'a sit da la tcusL^a
LasinistsiL <idiga naGiniLti sis ka ka «a ts'^ Ga
yi tci tci yi niz zin la *a kd nal ts'i* na dis dja <i tci j gQ
25 tens L^a <i ta giL t^L mi k'a si gu za ts'iL <aL t'^ si ya
nazi ni L^a ti Ga tcfl mik'aiya kit da <a tcin nis til la
«at'iGi <a tcin nis tin ne yik'a nazilla «iskanidaLLa
li Gi dis cat tci <at^Gi ^iskanid^L^i halitsa<i
k'asdinna yitsi< «adiGinaLLa tat'aciiilla dinilla
30 dii yi Ga na Gi naL La di ni <i ts'^ Ga •! dis djin
k^anidjindi gUdicnajla La k'iGits'i naniya
cictciz mits'i •isdazdja La mik'a tcistc'itdl
dani «istcatda*a^ saGa niLta «istcij ylnagiL^in
s This time of day.
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 227
own it. Holy nothing is, my bottle only is holy. Other-
tribe my bottle if you give Sarsi none will become. This
bag my bottle inside it lies. Otter too is in it. Birds
all different kinds are in it. With it they sing large-
rattles four are inside. My son, tobacco seeds inside.
Tobacco you sow then boys small mocassins beside it
stand up make." Autumn then they pull it up. Then
they smoke it.
Planting Tobacco
They burn off the grass. Then boys small over it
who tread it down run back and forth. Then sticks
pointed with for it where they make holes they put in-
seed. The owners they sow. Who wish to those too
sow. Others in turn other persons who wish to sow it.
On it they put the dirt then away they move the camp.
Boys' mocassins their spirits drive away.
''Father from you it is this that is planted. Here
this may it grow. Happily may it grow. Happily may-
it grow. Happily all people may they smoke you.
People all you look after." This is all thus.
JACKRABBIT GIVES MEDICINE FOB SWIFT HOBSES
His horn bent over his father early in the morning
his horses drove away. Then beside on the hill he sat.
Squirrel he killed. By himself he laid it down. **My-
children's birds will eat it," he thought. This time he-
went home to eat. The squirrel he was holding. Behind-
him he heard something. He stopped. He stood. Jack-
rabbit his legs between hid itself. Then where it hid-
itself over it he stood. Hawk was chasing it. Then
the hawk the old man nearly his head it touched.
While flying it sang. Not from it he moved. This
bird sang.
When he stopped singing he spoke. ''My son, from it
move. I will eat it, to it it made me tired. My son,
from it seven guns you will capture. To me give it.
228 University of California Publioatiom in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [VoL 11
nl dza mi t'^ oa <! lil la tcis tcit de da dti wa
m! tsi« k^ za da gi l'u La t'a <! ts'^o oa ta sin ne za
tc'a din nis t'a «a «a «i gl ml ts!< k'lz za da g! l'5 nl gi oa
nil la
5 nl L'a U oa ted «I <st'a gtldicnaj La mioa
81 GiL t^L i guL du sa tc'a tl t'a «a «a ma oa si oil taL i guL
halitsa niL'atioatcu nagisTni nit dza mitca
i Lil la mi ts'I oa tas tsu wQ nu tsl k^ za da oi l'u la
sinni t'aoa digi naoa nisLa<a«a maoa
10 SI oiL t^L 1 gilL si nl t'a oa tcis tc'it di da ni
«iLtcutda<a^ du sa tc'a di t'a <a «a La nil! tea ka
sa gl gil l'^l La <a^
di ne ha li tsa «i ni L^a ti oa ten •! I Lil la tl di na
<Twa Tts'aooa^I dju nLtldlnalla dim din^lla
15 cB teds L'a za ni teiz «is nil la «i wa t*i oi tetis L*a «i
na distil la «isduts'i i Lil la dist'ai «at'ioi
halitsa^i ni L'a di oa teu <i <inna kuoiyistilla gutdi
nadisdjala hall tsa <i nuliteaka tioa haeaenaLLi
din ni te'a di t*a ti gwa «at dja la
WHITE GOOSE GIVES MEDICINE FOB HORSES
20 Ladi halitsa Lit'ioi<i* diskaka <aoa tsiz
«aoa diy^lla teiz <ast'ahi tdtctLoa k'anita
yioa naoly^la yits'i disduz yioa naoidtiz
teiz gut'inna* tasi «ate'atdinij gust'ioa «at'ioi
La din nis ta la
25 ytlwtL gatsitLala yitsli gtlcUenaj La «it'aka
dd gimaoa nit'a gimite'at dininidji La
<igisi nilitteaka naniL^innana gtLn^L«inne
nidza Lat'a gidilgaila gimlts'ioa diLk^e tazik'a
nazidi<i Li^si muwtis wtissi diLk^e miga
80 ni na oi zi d! md kus k'a dil gai ye ted ga tsit La <i
«^ni diyika «akiyika za tioa gali^LLa^a
La naoa gdn^nniL^T gdnaoiL^ini nidza kawa
gdnisdj^na gd dil gai 'ateitL^a ts'a 4s Li tea
dil gai ye daoitL'd «iwa ni li tea ka oa «a •iwa nini
85 na oa «a gd dja na oa gd d^t dlie gd la gdL <i wa
* When used of people means tribe or nation.
1915] Goddard: Sarai Texts 229
IwiUeatit." He looked then its feathers with seven
arrowpoints side of its head were tied. "All birds I
only I am holy." That side of its head was tied to him
it gave.
Jaekrabbit in turn spoke. *'My son, to him do not-
give me. It is not so holy as I. To it do not give me."
Old man jaekrabbit he looked at then its tail with
its ears painted yellow side of its head were tied. **I
too these to you I will give. To it do not give me. I
too seven guns you will capture. He is not so holy as I.
My son, your horses will run like me."
This old man jaekrabbit with he helped. And
bird too he helped. "This you save this squirrel
only you may eat," he said. Then the squirrel betook.
Another way with it he flew. Then the old man jaek-
rabbit hole he put in. From it he went home. Old man
his horses very ran fast. This holy became.
WHITE GOOSE GIVES MEDICINE FOR HOBSES
Another time old man the same his children for
ducks for them he went. Ducks different kinds at a lake
he found. To them he came. Toward them he crept. To them
he crept up. Ducks many among them he aimed just as
then he fell asleep.
Yonder white goose to him spoke. ''My son, why
not them you pity. At them you aimed. My son,
here your horses look at." He looked at them then all
were white. Their ears were black. In the middle the-
one stood left its leg front was black. Beside it
another stood its mane white large. The goose said,
''These two horses only very run fast. My son, your-
tipi look at." He looked then tipi high was white.
Opposite the door outside horse tail white was tied.
"And your horses' tipi and you your tipi it is. Your-
tipi is not painted. And do not paint yourself. Your-
230 Universiiy of Calif omia PubUoatiom in Am, ArcK and Ethn, [VoL 11
ta di gi ts'l gu la guL nits'lda za' Laz «!Ltasdlaz
<Twa nldjonna^a <aku xamik'ana gUtc'Initc
«a t*! Gl k5 wa
BUFFALO BULL GIVES A SHIELD
<akinna •Isgakuwa taoinisda ^isi^kka k'a
5 ta gin nis da •II k'ai ye Li ka za^ za di d^o oa nl La
gigidissanl ytlwtl 48X1 tigilL'^L<T k'a tasida
did^Ga •ilk'aiyega ts'lgilL^^Ll «ilk'aiye ts'idiwtic
«isMya«I «Ilk'aiye yidissa tc'i g! dl giL L^a
ha iJ gl di c^tc tea «isLi«I «isdadja <islaya nateigilL'a
lO'aflGi «Ilk'aiye «isLi«I te'a niL tc'Ol «isii«!
ta sit ts'a <a t'l gi ma Ga zin na na" ku ts'i Gil L^a
•il k*ai ye «i nn na •! «aL k*a gQ niL dla guL n^t diL ts'it di
«aL da na gCL dla «iwa tagH xa gCL lai gl niL k'a mtiwus
git'I naguniLte'ul k'a na gu nis kai ye yik'a
15 gu diL tc'lU yi na da na zit di Lil la xa ta la yis tin na
gi ts'a ga na k'a <i liz
•ilk'aiye'i ha nil la La da niL tin na din nis na
c^stsa nits^ nz za Ga di sis sit siGa k'asdinna
saGa zi sis gin na ka la sin n^ nis «in na na nnnagiLnn
20 mi da Ga nis kan ne t^ dja ei da ga dit ta La
(U niskane dudinna ganistiha^a ninne da naGa
nisti didji dani nLtetlda'a ha ki dji ni tea wQ*
«^ninaha*a ninanidjadi niskani<i <alla
«^t Li ts'i d^L di didji dani nLtcflt •iwa
25 ha ki dji ni tea wtL *^t dja
OWL SKIN WAR MEDICINE
dijna «isgaka «aginila <at^iGi tanastsai
Lastsu iiilla •iwat'iGi miditdlieea guganak'asi
<iwa gQwusk'asi t'as Axilla tasteij k'a na di ni dli ei
t'iGi •iwat'iGi ku^nada yicBLdie «iwat'iGi t'as
80 mi ts'i dis k'an xa gi la gi na L^a yi Ga giL t'i t^ Gi
ts'atea naGa Ginila^i dani didji dicUt'ani
digi mit^a ts^gila mi si k'a di ts'in ni Ga
0 In eompoundfl na. but when alone 'in na, as in the next line, is used
for the underground den of an animal.
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 231
blanket only white clay make white with. Then you-
will be old." Thus the story they tell. This is all.
BUFFALO BULL GIVES A SHIELD
Two young men rode. Horses on they rode. Bull
one only calves many they chased. That one horse
good runner on he rode. Calf beside bull was running.
The bull was lowing. The young man bull chased. He-
ran in front. While he chased it the horse got tired.
Young man jumped oflf. Then the bull the horse tore-
open. The horse died. Then wolf 's hole he crawled in.
The bull the hole tore open. When he came at it again
he tore it open again. Then three times he tore it open.
His leg he saw. He tore the ground again. He gored it-
again. On him he tore it off. Above him while standing
on his back he was lying. His chest on he urinated.
The bull said, **My son, I will help you. At first
at you. I was angry. My son, nearly by me because-
I killed you look at me. ' ' He looked. On his horns shield
painted blue was hanging. ''My son, this shield nobody
I have given. You now to you I will give it. Pour
guns you will capture. Great chief you will become."
When he came back the shield he made. When they were-
fighting four guns he took. Then great chief he-
became.
OWL SKIN WAB MEDICINE
Four young men she gave it. Then she painted us
yellow with. Then its painting along the arms and
along the legs gunpowder with she painted. When she-
finished painting us then then above fire she shook it.
Then gunpowder from it burned. When she had done-
that across the breast she put it. Then old woman
to us she gave it. Guns four bullets these in it she put.
Owl whole skin she wore. Near she sat. Then guns
282 Unwersity of Calif omia PubUoaiioHB in Am. AreK and Ethn. [Vol. 11
tsinn^Lt'i gus tea na nisda <!wat'ioi dam didji
•fiilla mioat'ucU dlt'^ni*! mikanagiki
du ma xa oi ni ts'It dit'^ni^I hat'a ts'inisk'a cidjaj
na hi ts'iL t'uL La da mitc'a naL dzti gu la goL dina
5 SI nis t'l ol ma oa nis 1411 na yti wa wu sa dza na di na
glligula gi gi ni diL ka da dudlnagistsigQla •atigida<I
giLtcuzgula dig! mt'udina gwagunila dina
gi li gu la gi ma lin na niL tis gu la
^ts'^OGa mitsanatiga nini ^y^niligula
10 ka ni dai da si na ni ni
SQUIBBEL, A WAB MEDICINE
halitsa'i ga^ldl La da dani «iLtcudata <iwa
La nicina kat'tlnaga siLoa'a Iwa La gutsis
nii^nni diLtc'uLa^a <!wa La gtlLa ^isi^kka
ni«!gilla 'iwa La ha kite! «^ninnahat'a ^wa
15 La din na ni ma tcit djin na dtl ni k! ziL oa 'a ^ wa
La dl «ididjit'ioi Iwa La aska zuni
<a gQ t'in ni gilL dtl niLk'a nitta'a dina nil! za^
gulasa «iwa La ni djon na «a 'at t'a dinisLahat'a
•a t'i oa oa '^ niL dis si ni djon 'a t'a 'a t^i oi ko wa
20 ha gUL di gi ni la
giziLgini t'ioi naginiLLu saoa oitacU Lat'a
tasistcai 'ikahalitsiha <!Lilla L^igisi k'asi
sizsa naga*atciz magQiinni k'asi sinnaoa
hagitciz «aktLhat'a cictcic ku* nada yidicdicci
25 ni dza t'as mi tsi dis k'an ha gi lai gi sa oa
gin niL ti «isLi minna gtloa nisti saoa
ginniLtidi guts'i ta di gu t'a mi t'a s^ «^«inni
ta di gil t'a mi t'a k'^niLtaki gns t'i oa naoa
gin niL ti mitdasi dani «isistcut mitdasi nicina
30 z^ 01 mit da si *a kin na tsis dis tc'uL mit da si
guLa ^isL^kka <istcQt mitdaci cicdja mitdasi
ha ki tci «is Li
haiyuhu di diltcilzja miLtidininagula ha kite!
«agina haiyuhu diltcuja halitsanahi ^iiilla
85 miL ti di ni na gH la dza na di na <! lin ni Lil la
1915] Goddard: 8arsi Texts 233
four with when they shot her bullets dropped from her.
They did not penetrate her. Bullets just on the ground
lay.
When one shoots you from him do not move away. This
my medicine to them I give in the future long time
persons will be. What they want they will not fail to get.
Those things they will capture. Those who smoke this
vrtll be happy, persons they will live. Their flesh will-
be strong.
Bird her head you you be ashamed if you are lying
you.
SQUIRREL, A WAR MEDICINE
The old man when he saw it, ''My scm, this time,
guns you will capture. And, my son, Cree men
you will kill. And, my son, scalps many you will take.
And, my son, many times horses you will steal. And,
my son, chief you will become. And, my son, people
your enemies they will not kiU you. And my son, this
you vrill sing. And my son, even sickness although-
it is about not on the ground you will lie. You wOl live
only it will perhaps be. And, my son, you will be old
as I am ( T). Because of this I am saying it to you. You-
willbeold." This is aU it said to him.
When he killed it then he made it. To me when he-
gave it all over he painted me yellow. White man red paint
with. Left side my mouth he painted horizontal. Bight
side my eyes he painted. This is the way he painted me.
Fire over he shook it then powder from it burned.
When he had done that to me he gave it. Horse for it
to him I gave. To me when he gave it from that time
thirty-five winters I had it. Thirty-five is ended just-
then to you I give it. From it gun I captured. From it
Cree I killed. From it two men scalps I took.
From it many horses I captured. From it I became old.
From it chief I became.
Oh, this squirrel help him. Chief he may become.
Oh, squirrel he is old man when help him. Long time
he lives then with that help him. Misfortunate without-
234 University of Calif omia Publications in Am. ArcK and Ethn. [Vol. 11
^at'ioiiilla miL ti di na gQ la matagtlLl «atcigtLcagu
dinallgtLla haiyuhu diltcuzja halitsa tsillinnl
ma oa y! nin m
haiyuhu dl na tail la hi dlla siLtidinina niclna
5 dtl cT gl tc'a gu di na gis La hai yfL hu dil tcuz ja sa oa
nit'a cinadjinawa gl ml dlla gwagunili dInagisLa
SKY PERSON GIVES A MEDICINE
halitsa sit til la nak'CLsk'a dina «!lilla
halitsa «Ili mitsaoa di^ yits'i nakaniyadi
has tin na yi ziL oi ha nil la La di g! ml si ka
10 na oa nis La mi ka tsin nis li ha ta da na oa nis La
«isduna nits'i ginihalata «isL^ka gtLziLa
naoa tsin nil lata gtioa gill^L «!wa 'at'lolna
•amiLnnna tl gwanahata sinna nist'a nak'fLsk'a
dina «isLinat'a nis tsl ni tctl wti sizzat'a Lat'a
15 di na La ga I^l na gi ml na gi tc! di gtlL La t'a sis ka ka «a
•^t da di La «a «^ siL «in na
misikaiy^oa dim ts'ika da maoa yinilla
gwagdnili ts'atca «iligCLla ytLwtl tfL damasit^oi
wtLnasdinna Likaza dikahali kasti <!wa
20 ni ci na ta La ka za kas ti da ni ni ni kas ti
niL ka sin nas hi t'ioi nazisslkata Lat'a ^its'iiooa
nak'usk'a cUna siskaka git'a nisk'a dina
tad^dli t^oi nadlstcitc nahioa nata sinna da
•innaoa die cite haiyHhtL gimis^Lti tad^Ldlihi
25 yd wtL na hi ta ts'i ta sit di dliz z& tea di t'a «a
wHnat'a dzanagtl gwagunilinni dtLhagQt'a da
niLk'a gwatagHyiLi Lat'a da niLk'a
gd ma na dis date gtln^«I dtl niLk'a gwanagHnlLi
anagHnaha'a 'at'ioaoa tad^LLi liilla gimis^ti
80 da ta d^L Li na hi ta na hi Lil la ti di na 'a
•Ita niLtsin nite5wtL dim ts'ika maoagdta
miLtldininna di misikaiyioa mits'l tea di t'a gd la
ts'ateaigina di nagiL«inna misikaiyioa ginnahi
gudja nahala nsi^kka •agdnili «isLagala dju
85 ti oa ma gu ni li miL ti di ni na
1915] Goddard: Sarsi TexU 235
knowing may he live. Oh, squirrel, old man he being
to him give.
Oh, being saved alive with help me. Cree never-
shooting me may I be saved. Oh, squirrel me pity. My-
relatives with them happily may I live.
SKY PEESON GIVES A MEDICINE
Old man was sleeping. On the sky person it was.
Old man he was. His hair was white. To him when-
he came while he slept he killed him. He said, ''My son,
this owl claws to you I will give. I have not wanted-
to give it away, this time to you I give it. Some one-
else from you if he buys it, horses clothes to you
if he gives to him give it. And those persons will own it.
Very it will be theirs. I am sky being I am. Big-
wind my name is. All people who take away do not-
be afraid of them. All my children they are. It is mighty.
It is my own.
Owl's claws this woman now to her you are-
giving happily old woman she will be. Yonder water
surrounds the other side one white man I stay with.
And among Cree one person I stay with. Now you
I stay with. You call upon me then I will listen to you.
All birds on the sky beings my children they are.
On the.earth beings you pray then I hear you. For you
our father above me for you I tell him. Oh, keep on ( T)
you pray. That our father to praying only is holy.
In the past long time it was happy. Not like that now
on earth bad all now on earth I walk around I look-
at. Not on earth happy it will be. That is why
you pray with keep on. Now pray our father with-
you I will help.
My father, wind great, this woman is poor.
Help her. These owl 's claws to her let them be holy.
Old woman may she become. These . your own owl's claws
for them well she paid. Horses good, saddle too
very good. Help her.
236 University of California Publicaiions in Am, Arch, and Etkn. [ VoL 11
PAT GBA8SH0PPEB BECEIVES MEDICINE FROM HAWKS
A, First Narrative
kuzltda ^ama^gtl tazasit i^nnistciki i^nna
na guB tin di tcut'inna nagugitindl sinni gimits'i
dlcicc^tdi sinnada «atca «is^anidaL <!wa
^ts^Ldiskasi zillaoa na gi di na t'a La dti gim mis tc^L a
5 si ts'i na ka gil La si ts^ gu za siL a oa «! na gis «! n!
ni dza g! mi gis <f tsa gi mi ni g! na dis sis 'a
gi mi nis tsill^ SI sika gatagidilLa yiiwtL sitdika
sill^ssi niLt'a gist'ail tag& siiilla na^ditcij
miL didjitsi niLt'^ giLt'ai gtL satsi dugimmistsa
10 gwa gi tea «a k'a na gi caL na gQ ti na ts'i gd wa
nadicicca gfbstioa sik'a gidilLa «l8g^mdaL«i
maoa guiinik'asi sizz^onmiLa gadacUcnij <wa
<as tc^L diL k^c ci su k'us ka da Ga da die nij gu dli ta
adati
15 «at'iGikowa ta sis tsa gtlzatsi niLt'a sikistilla
n^ si giL di gi sit di na gis sit di gwa tei gu ni ea dz^ na
gu te'a ki nit tsa ni na gd cie dja ni na cie dja na gi dis ti ei
nidza 'ak'a simmaoa Ligidit'acla nagtitina
•its'i dieieea «at'iGina «iguLi gimin^L^i
20 gi ni tsa k'as di na si lil la na ka na gi di tsit
«a t'i 0i ko wa na di gis e^t ti ha gu t'a di dji djin nis si
sai gi tan gu za sa oa kwi yi Ga sis da
guLi sinada gidini gimidistcie Luk'a ka
dicieeadi tdgiLa sinnasga Luk'a sinnasga
25 na giL haL ha na gi La di lu k'a <! ni n^ nis ti di da tsa <
gihadadistsi sistidi «iL'igi gimigis^I hassisgini
nitsit'a miL nanitsitdi naGa gininiti «It'aka
tsa «iLilla nahinnisaLi dtihanalala tiGa miL
na tsit tsit di na 6a yi gi niL a
B, Second Narrative
30 ukagidiLLati ninagissitdi ta sis tsa siga
gin nis da nitetiwii «its'^Ga hasiLni cUgi
sikagana «^niL«I maGayinagula yiiwu dzana
di na ni li gii la ha lit tsa <^ ni na ha «a du ma t'a gu La «a
digi naGa nis La tiGa tea di fata midatsi
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 237
PAT GBASSHOPPEB BEGEIVES MEDICINE FROM HAWKS
A. First Narrative
Before last summer noon fence some when they-
were working at Sarsi where they were working I to them
when I was going above me it was (a hawk) and (a hawk)
above me were flying around. I did not see them. To me
they came down. To me I heard them coming. I looked-
around then I saw them. Stone for them I picked up.
I threw at them. Over me they skimmed. Yonder west
upwards up they flew. Three times with me they came
when fourth time up they flew. Far I could not see-
them they became. Still I walked down. Those working
near them I was coming just as on me it lit, ^Isg^nnidai.
To it right side my shoulder it put its claws in. Then
^^stc^LdiLkacci back of my neck he put its claws in. The-
blood flowed.
After that I was dead. Far up they took me. When-
they let me fall down ; when I fell I did not know anything.
Long time afterwards I came to my senses. I got up.
I look around then still around me they were circling.
Those working to them I went. They too were looking-
at them. Among them nearly with me they came down.
After that I felt rather crazy. Four days with me ( T)
all the time ( f ) my tipi inside I sat even above me
screaming I heard them. Fish for when I went I went-
in water beside me flsh beside me it threw. When it-
came out fish when I brought back everybody saw
where it put its claws. While I slept at night I saw them.
They said to me, ''Your body with it our strength to you
we give. Why stone with did you throw at us T If you-
had not done that very with strength to you wewould-
have given."
B. Second Narrative
They picked me up. Where I fell, I fainted. By me
they sat. Big one bird said to me: ''These my claws
you may have. Take care of them. Then long time you-
will live. Old man you will become. Not bad these
to you I give. Very they are holy. Prom them I am-
238 Unwertity of Calif omia PublicatioHB in Am, Arch, and Ethn. [VoL 11
dina^TsiJna^a sin! gtlLi da nikadagisLi dtl
gtldja naoa ginisnidji ni tsi na ti oa ha maguLini
k'asi da^L^ugdla L^iki «l8ganIdaL«! «iat'a
ham ytLwtl Li 7a naoa gigimdji Lit'ioi
5 na hi giL «in na 'a <! 01 na hil la «a dl da na oa
mfgfnicmtc cU dat'a ts'innlLk'a wtLda
mag&catca*a <Iwa tloa dzana cU na ni lin na «a
dat'a manlsdata mdQwaha'a dig! Lat'a
•^Lt'ah! ^Its'^oa siskaka'a min^gadlskata
10 dtl d! n^s ts! ta «a wu sa gH n! n! 7a gQ la «is gam d^i.
saL t'an na s! g!L q^l ! gClL g! mi s! 8!s a! la da s! ka ga na
naoa n!nad!sLa*a <! ts'^ oa tctl <! Lak'a<! ^Ist'a
hanl sinn! djfL saLt'^na s! sis 01 da s!kag^nna
ninnadisLa^a TiLwawtlsa d!g! naoa n!oa<!
15 ma oa g! na gil la ^Is dtl na ha nil la da ha g! la min na
naoa t8!g!g!n! 'at'lolna maoa g!n!lana wtLsa
dz^ na d! na g! U na «a g! m! n^ «! gu la sa *a t'! 0! ko wa
n! ts'! k'a gu na naj
A KNIFE, A WAB MEDICINE
<!ta na g! nis l5 na 'a 7!l g&las! t'lo! «isL!
20L^kaza mina natc!g!Ln!c mo!na jatca dQ
mliilla «aha tcltc! n! Lata 'a LagtL za* niclna
j^ttca miLilla dlsistsit mitsisk'izza disistc'ul
di j gti ml z! sis gQt gtl nis na is t'! oa miL dis ma
cUg! slm^ssa «akagu «isL^kka miL nstctlt
25 na cU s! dal d! *is la miL na ois tcQt La d! na d! sis ma d!
«a kin na miL na d! nil s! «a k! 7! m^s ^^t t'a
L!kizza tsinnisk'a nagisc!cnio <ist'a na sis t! naoa
•!ta naginiLLQ millad!kad! das! giL tcill^s!
ta d! dli h! Lil la sa «aoina*a da cic tcltc! t'io!
80 gu guL •! «! Lil la s! n! oai
mist'ut! <!Lilla tadldl! gwagdmU s!oa
wUsa dlnaUgdla s!n!st'!oa mioa nisist!na«a
d! g! ma oa g! nis 'a
millacUkad! saoa gin!*^na*a «af!o! das!
85 na n! sis I4n na 'a
gwagtiml! dInagisLa c!nadj!na nagistsan
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 239
living. I although ( T) now I am sorry for you. Not
good to you gift (T). Your dancing hat right side
tie it on." The other one hawk in turn said: ''That
my friend to you he gave the same we two own. Those
are ours. These now to you I give this all on earth
soon you will learn. And very long time you will live.
Things I cannot do there is none. These all different-
kinds birds are my children. The one I want I do not-
lose. In the future be wise. Hawk like me do not kill.
If you kill them my claws from you I will take away."
The large bird, the other one in his turn said : ''I too
like me if you kill my claws I will take away. In the-
future these you we give take care of. Another person
if you give you may do it. For it to you he gives some-
thing. That person to him you give it in the future
long time he will live. I will look at him. Here to you
we finish talking."
A KNIFE, A WAB MEDICINE
My father made it. With he gives it then horse
one for it they offer. Cree dead body not with it
back ( T) in vain he runs. Once only Cree dead body
with it I ran up. One side of its scalp I tore. Four times
his back I stabbed. Ten times with it I went to war.
This my knife twice horses with I captured. When-
we went home horse with it I captured again. Another-
time when I went to war two men with it we killed.
Two knives used to be. One on the ground I offered
bad because I dreamed. My father made it. Bear
from with it toward sky praying to me he gave it.
He painted me then the knife with he threw at me.
Pipe with he prayed. ** Happily my son in the-
future may he live. By myself of it I dreamed this
to him I give."
Bear to me he gave it. That from I made it.
"Happily may I live. My relatives may I see again."
240 University of Calif omia Publicatiana in Am, ArcK and Ethn. [Vol. 11
WEASEL GIVES A WAB MEDICINE
ginnioa naginiLLu sinnis LidiL^cdl ga*!
fwat'iGi tasittsa din! gfnioa tsakusiggaci
hanilla La dan! «!Lilla dihagtiyisa
ni tsiL t'uL La da hagilLada mkigltca za hadikatda^a
5 ni ni nl lin na du ha di ka da «a n! na m y^t dl «a gi la
dismadl saoa yista ha sis n! naaa nista
ni ts'i guB tin na gugunatcitsi diya di«^nlL«!
ml! tea minna saaa niLta
sisLasaka Lat'a yiduwa sinn! za <ak*a
10 gis na sa aa tciL ta d! La t'a ka t'u na ga ku g! dal
tc!nn^L<! s!m ginnaoa ^iiilla «atcitL'a sada
^datcinicuL <!t'!oi cltcana za din! glnaoa
tasistsQ saoamtsa La da miL gwatsisL^u
slganak'as! mk^ka tatcistclz «!kahal! tsaha
15 < Lil la s!s z^m miL a *a ka t'a m! na sa oa ta ka k'a
yln^ooa k'a tanadilsitdl dikasitda saoamka
tea t^G oa d! ka sit da
m!nasa n! sis da natsinnaL<! ma na d! n! teu dj!
dizaka giteaz y!*aL «!wa naL«! «!Ln! Lat'a
20 na tsin n^L < d! g! tsu ! gtlL sil la ns tetl d! za ka
gtlts'! silaL^^ka nag! gis k^ dldilt'^n! taglssilla
sil la «aLan!g!steu ha sis n! diLna sizzaka
g!yi*^n! te!te! d!sna g! m! sis t'! o! gtlL «!dinni
zSl nagldlLn! y!G!nna «iLdiLoin k'amdjin!
25 ha sis ne na ma teit djin na ^^ ka d! ha gtl g!s sa da n!
nits'! dtlxaLat'a^a hag!lLada du nil linn!
had!kata<a ha ta n! djon na «a siLn! 'at'Io! gimoa
•a Lam Laiyaka katsisoa sinn! za dae!edja
<! g!s «!n n! gH had!n!«! gu ha nl nista d!n! g!djon
30 (Repeated as follows : ytL wti n! gis «in n! <! wa da gu oa
nin nis ta di n! g! djon)
ginna cadln!*! 'at'lo! daglsL'u
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 241
WEASEL GIVES A WAB MEDICINE
My older brother made it. Daytime when he was-
riding around he saw it. Then he fainted. This my-
brother weasel said, '*My son, gun with short dis-
tance if he is shooting if it comes out your coat only
it will enter. Your flesh it will not enter." When he-
came back he made it. When I was going to war to me
he gave it. He said to me, * * To you I will give it. I do-
not want to lose you. Dreadful place you are going. This
you may have. Your horse for it to me give. ' '
My friends all are not. I only still I live. To me
when he gave it all men came in. They looked on. I
my brother with him back of fire we sat. I took oflf my-
dothes then my breech cloth only this my brother
painted me yellow. My front hair in the middle ( T) with it
he tied it. Along my arm its tracks he painted red.
White man's paint with my shoulders both its holes,
on my chest moon still when it is new he painted.
On my back sun he painted.
In front of him I sat. They were looking at us. (A grass)
in his mouth he put. He chewed it. Then, **Look,"
he said. All looked at us. **This do not let go." My-
hands he held. His mouth from my palm he threw
bullet. It was hot. My hands he held together. He-
told me, * ' Swallow it. ' ' My mouth when I put it in vain
I tried to swallow, although I tried. He himself cmly
could swallow it. Its song he sang. When he finished-
singing he said to me, ''Your enemy even short distance
gun at you will not wound you. If it shoots not your-
fiesh it will enter. You will become old," he said to me.
Then my brother said truly. My friends are all killed.
I only I am old.
As when I first saw you you told me I will give you-
away. This person will be old.
That place I saw you then now to him I will give-
you away. This person will be old.
My brother, where you said there, I will tie it.
242 Untvertity of Calif omia PublicaiioHB in Am. ArcK and Ethn, [ VoL 11
BOCK GIVES A WAB MEDICINE
ttltctLoa tsatctlka yiga tc^zill •^ladi yiga
n^ttac dldji djinnissi yi^ yitta tCL dtlt^nni
dtLtcItc! <!iilla tagfzit tsa<! hanilla La
naoast'a dit'aka siga n^nitatci ^isklya^
5 ha nil la «! ta^ ha li tsa 'a tcin na sa oa gin nin nl
ha kite! 'atsinna saoa gfninni •at'ioi *aki
«aka niga nat^tc tca< hanilla gunlya La
halitsa f^nlnaha^a hakitci '^nlnaha^a
tcistcitdi dan! nLtctLt La sillinna '^niL^Inna
10 La sin na 'a si z! tsa ta gal gai di d! t'^ nl n! ka
nakag&la naoast'a si^ nanitaci
tsa f^nl*! has! hadja ha kite! nitcawa
•adja halitsa 'adja tcistcitdi dan! nLtctlt
sist'tL t'lo! didit'^n! m!ka naka
A PAIOT?ED TIPI
15 Laoadistsi «!wat'iG! sisziso! Liklzan! dzinnis<!
ta sis tsa la <!wa kawa ktLyloa sis da la •at'io!
kat'lni '^ssisn! naoada dakdwa ciwat'ioi saoa
disdjin «!wa nagtldlkaila nag&sisdjaLa *isLi
mika tasisda nldQwaLa «isLig^la si sit da
20 ffl ki gi tea sis La i^ ka La t'a ni da wa La
FINDING A BUFFALO STONE
tsa xani k'at'Ine mits'ayika «akinna
ma ta nas din na ts'idatsa ta sin na la gtL ku'ts'i cUya
li Lilla kwala* «iwat'iGe tc^djinla mlnasga
yidists'ala yit'ioi tc'idjinni gtits'i cUyalla tsa
25 xa n! na di <a la dl ti ^ la yi djin ni xa ni cU tci
xani nas^aoa «a ts'is *in m dl tc'itclzdji niduwala
dim ts'ika ninadja nagUdlgai xan! ntduw5*
kudaLLi yisnila xani gidiL «isn!la <Iwat'ioe
tsa xani^i nani'ala yi djin la xani kuyidalla
30nascaGagai tadinists'is din! ts'idatsa tasinna<!
k'at'inni yiaanlsda^ «! wat'ioe yiwii' ts'ika
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Tfixts 243
BOCK GIVES A WAB MEDICINB
At a lake large rock beside it sweat-house when he-
made beside it he slept. Four days by it he slept.
Water he did not drink. He did not eat when he
became thin. The stone said, *'My son, I pity you.
Why beside me do you sleep T" The young man said,
**My father, old man being me give. Chief being me
give. These two for them by you I sleep." The stone
said, ** You are wise, my son. Old man you will become.
Chief you will become. Seven guns you will capture.
My son, my flesh you may have. My son, it is I. My-
name 'stone goes in the water.' Bullets from you
will fall off. I pity you, beside me because you slept. ' '
Stone what it said so it happened. Chief great
he became. Old man he became. Seven guns he cap-
tured. One shot him then bullets from him fell off.
A PAINTED TIPI
Evening (f). Then I was killed. One day I was-
dead. Then tipi inside I was sitting. Then man
told me your tipi this tipi. Then for me he sang.
Then it was morning. I woke up. Horse on it I was-
riding was gone, saddle, my blanket, my coat, my-
leggings, my moccasins, all were gone.
FINDING A BUFFALO STONE
Stone buffalo. Man his wives two. The opposite-
side girl poor for wood she went. Dog with she-
got it. Then some one singing close to her she heard.
That place some one singing to it she went. Stone
buffalo she picked up. It was this was singing. Buffalo
wood buffalo corral where they made what they ate
was none. This girl came back. ''At dawn buffalo
you drive they will go in," she said. "Buffalo are-
coming," she said. Then stone buffalo she put down.
She sang. Buffalo went in. Corral they filled. This
girl poor man he married. Then that one girl
244 University of California Publioationa in Am, Arch, and Eihn, [Vol. 11
nitcdwtli miL'aoa Lad! da •at'ioi guts^ yidjinnl
t'lQi xani kudiLtc yidjinnl t'ioi nit^ai
guts'i xani niLa 'agudja «at'iGe gats^ xani
kudaL gwagddja yigi ts'lka das! tsa xani
5 yi oin na yi gin ni t'i oi
WILD PARSNIP GIVES A MEDICINE
halitsa gidtlwa sinni magunicani kamak'a
Lididacci ctlL'ata* nlyalla 'at'ioi nats'izzi
gwa<la halitsa mitsaoa digucaoa nagddatizla
<!oi cdL'ata halitsa gwadjagi La sinna^a ctiL^a
10 mi tis sa na gin na gi <in di otL L^a gu ni na di oi *a la
La saninaha'a halitsa tcitc'a gwaninaha«a
cQL'a halitsa 'adja xanadtLcca 'a dj^k gi t'i ol
za' yi dti wa
^Heracleum lanatum, Michz.
1915]
Goddard: Sarai Texts
245
elder her place she sat. Then after that she sang
then buffalo used to go in, she sang. Then after that
buffalo plentiful became. Then after that buffalo
came in it became. That girl from her stone buffalo
its song they sang.
WILD PARSNIP GIVES A MEDICINE
Old man has died, I I knew on the prairie he was-
wandering in the wild parsnip he went in. Then one-
standing he saw. Old man his hair very white he-
was leaning on a cane. There among the wild parsnip
old man he had become. "My son, it is I, Parsnip
its cane." When he looked again parsnip like it stood-
again. ''My son, like me you will be. Old man small
you will be." Parsnip old man he became. He was-
crawling out when he became only he died.
246 Univeriiiy of Calif omia Publieatians in Am. ArcK and Bihn. [YoL 11
NARRATIVES
TCAQUCAGGA, THE WISE SAESI
y^wQ dz^na halitsa tc'agiLc^Ga mizza«la
gunisn^nna miskaka Lat'a ts'it don na^ <l8t'^ni
guGa Lat'a <alla k'ast'a catcloa dadaoilL^u^
<9S m ts*! gOs ts'n wa <aoa ^Its'inna <!tcldanf
5 <a 1^ la yi oa cas tsi sit L'a lun na t'i Gi ^^ yi Ga
«^l^la Lat'a k'as«! kanagigi<at guGa Ginila
xasadaL ^iLnilla <!8gaka< xagigidaLiI t'iGi
k'as Lai yi Ga giL t'l halitsa^ <!dlni djtL
diLt'^na k'ast'a LaiG!gaLlJ halitsa*! L^a Ga na tc'is tc'i
10 gu m ts'l na nl ya mis ka ka < gi gi ni ts'l xa na to'is tsis se
naginldalla^ halitsa^ ha nil la «aiJsid^LLa*a
cfts'aha ^asts'a siLdiltsHt sinni nahlst'tL <wa
nani dtL na his tc'a ^ saGa naGili^nna i to! dam
1 Lil la Las SI s! GaL xaL I <! ts'a ha < «!^ jiL dji lil la
15 ^ wa < tc! da ni i lil la giL dis tsit yi Ga na dis La ti
gusfiGa yigana zana «idis8i halitsa^ hagiisnilla
tinniya^ dtl <at da din ni dla tigiy^la nistilla
<aL ts'Is din na gigiiilla gidiltsitda t'lGl giLwadassi
Li k'u yi Ga na ga niL t'tL
20 <9S nit ts'i gus ts'fl wa za* k'a na zit ha U tsa <
yits'i giLnaLLa ha nil la sa Gil Gfhi ni giLL sinni
djtL nist'tLha<a' ts'itda^i <a <Isnilla ditcidani
taditanni Lil la <ask'anadao yiyiLiiiilla «iwa
giL diL tsit yissihiguL GakagilL'a itcidani iiilla
25 na GiL gil «i t'a ka dH ha 14L La na hi si hi guL < t'a ka
halitsa ts'isd^GGa danatc'ati hai^LLa halitsa
nagisnaLLa «as ni ts'i gOs ts'u wa «ila «is tout di lil la
LiGidictij yiGa «anit'i data gil la ha ki tci ni ten wti'
<isnilla «iLt'^ni gHwa xanigilla nadad^L
30 «iL ni kii na gi Gi da la La gi niL taz «a t'i Gi ^ l'^ Gi
ginlLtazdi tata^diditsaLLa gimita ha gi miL nil la
ha t'a B9S ts'it ts'i la ta di das tsa giL
1915] Qoddard: Sarsi Texts 247
NAEEATIVES
TCAQUCAQGA, THE WISE SABSI
Over there long ago old man Tcaguc^Goa was his-
name. Ten hia children, all boys. Arrows for them
all he made. Quivers tipi i>oles ( t) he tied on. The-
youngest for him bone bow he made. For him bears-
head small like a hat for him he made. All quivers
when he untied to them he gave them. **Let us go out,"
he said. The young men went out then quivers they-
tied on. The old man himself too his arrows in quiver
he tied on. The old man west toward he stood. His sons
towards him east they stood. The old man spoke,
**We are going to fight each other. The oldest first will-
attack me. I will shoot you. And you when I do not-
hit to me who runs up bow with he may club me-
down." The oldest shouting with and bow with
attacked him. To him as he was coming just then his arm
through he shot. The old man said to him, ''Walk away.
You are not strong.'* He walked away. He lay down. One-
after another with them when be fought then he hit-
them. Nine he shot.
The youngest only still stood. The old man to him
spoke. He said, ''You will not care for me. I too will-
shoot you.'* The boy, "Yes,*' said. His bow taking up
with he walked back and forth while shooting. Then
he attacked him. Although he shot him he ran to him.
Bow with he clubbed Imn. "Why did you do thatt
Even if he was shooting at you, why old man like that
when he shot you you do thatt" Old man when he came-
to his senses the youngest his hands while he held he led-
him around. Of him he was proud. "This one great-
chief," he said. Arrows for them he took out. "Let-
us go home, " he said. They went in. They lay down. Then
in the night when they were lying they were groaning.
Their father said to them, "Why you have not boils
do you groant"
248 Univertiiy of California PublieaiioTis in Am, Arch, and Eihn, [VoL 11
•at'lGi guts'i tc'asdinna nicina iiilla
naiigildiLtc «as ni tsl gOg ts'a wa «i nicina ^tcudi
t'lGi tsiL iLilla za' La si da gus tsaL hat'inni
dzana nicina Las si das tsaL hanidanidza
5 «as ni ts*! g^ ts'u wa «i ga ti Gis mai gim mit ta gi ma
za gis da <at'iGi nicina gimik'acGa* dzana
tcitci ninagidaLLa ^wat'iGl gimmita gimm^kka
diya nicinaGa naGiyalla halitsa hat'anit'i
•ists'inilla siskaka «aka daca«a hasts'innilla
10 da gtlL du wa ha tc'a gH c^ Ga mis ka ka La t'a
gaGa halitsa'i ha nil la <a gwa gu ni lin na ka
<aginniLala <at1[Gi gunisn^ni nicina yiGala
mis ka ka <a gi ni t V
nadisdjala di ts'ai ya ts'i kanagidja ha nil la
IS ts'a tea na bis ka ka La t'a ts'i Gi Ga^ «i wa si ni
gtinisn^na nicina yisGa* mits'aiya<i ha nil la
halitsa da< za na ts'i zis Ga la halitsa«i xaGiy^la
«itcita niy^la kuk'a •adagdla Lat'a «itcita
ka nidasilla gadi kQnagidjala ha nil la yuwa
20 da dil tsa dl i tci ta na ni na* dtL na gi zis Ga <a •i wa
mits'aiya «at'iGi naninala Lat'a nicina«i
m^ka ts'idlsdala maGa Li xastiLla ts'a«!lla
mi«i L'aiyik'a tsit din niL tsil la «iL'aiGid& mits'i
sitdldaLla •at'iGi «iL'aiGi halitsa«i kuk'a
25 <a ta ga lai gi ka Lit ta di gi 1^ la La t'a di li tea ka
da da gis L'a la La fa itci«i «akanidi hasdaganaLLa
<at'iGi nicina«i ha nil la kawa gaLa nadad^L
^ nil la gimaGa tsaztsit i^nnisa glGinizinni
<a t'i Gi La na gi dis yiz <a t'i Gi «i L'a tsi ha li tsa <i
30 ni ci na ka k'a ga wa na gi y^ la na dis dja la
kanagiya dits'aya has nil la «^n nlL dis si da nicina
Lana giszisla <at'iGi dinagilila gadja
Li gi di n^c
<9t tsin niL t'^n na <i <atdi nsdana tcistc'inna
35 sit d^ na n^t cUt dis dai gi di ma t'i Gi ni na gi daL Li
t'iGi kadaL g^Ginits'i kagaginij giGini«ahaka
tcitci giGini<aLLa *ita* «idalt'a ts'i dad^L
<Iszi<agitta '^lllni nanaG^LLaL <at'iGi nagina
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 249
Then after that by themselves Cree with theywent-
to fight. The youngest Cree when he caught then axe
with only he knocked him down. He did that long time
Cree he knocked down. After a while the youngest led-
the war party. Their father, their mother only stayed.
Then Cree killed them. Long time not they were-
coming back. Then their father for them went. Cree-
camp he came. *'01d man, what do you want!" they-
asked. ' * My sons for them I came. ' ' They said, * ' Here
Dear Tcaguc^Goa his sons all were killed." The old-
man said, ''Yes, well you did to them." Then ten
Cree he killed, his boys as many.
He went home. To his wife he went in. He said,
**01d woman, our children all they have killed, but
I ten Cree I killed." His wife said, "Old man
this time only they will kill us." Old man went out.
In the brush he went. Camp ground he fixed. All
brush firewood he placed about. From it he went in.
He said, ''Yonder in the middle in the brush put the-
tipi. They will not kill us." Then his wife there moved-
the tipi. All the Cree for them came. His tipi smoke
coming out they saw. This side of him where he could-
not see they stopped. At night to him they went. Then
that night the old man fireplaces which he had made
fires he lighted. All his dogs he tied up. All
the trees were lighted up. He kept talking loud. Then
the Cree said, "Tipis are many. Let us go home,"
they said. Of him they were afraid. There were many
they thought. Then those they ran home. Then next-
morning the old man Cree camp place to it he went.
He went back. He went in. His wife he said to, "As I-
toldyou Cree those ran home.'* Then they were save^.
Well they camped about.
Those who were killed after them others seven bo3rs
were bom. They went to hunt. Then they came back
then lies to him they told. They tried to fool him.
In vain they tried to fool him. "Father we shoot to
we are going. Where we kill meat we will put there then
250 University of Calif onUa PubUeatians in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [YoL 11
halitsa«! <a ^ nil la gidisdala tcatciga
«igi8iLgila halltsa^ m^ti za ga nan^cla
gQllLtfi za^ <!dala '^tt'agtl gay^naka
haiginilla nahita hascUnf m^stfl^ '^lllnl
6 na nal oa gu Ul ttL dju <a t'l o! m! ga da ni gi nil la
mnaginldaldi digita ^naoa gfdiglni «aLitt'a
giGlnioI<al halitsa^ <a <isnilla nlt'iol nagisna
<!wat^Gi nanlna «alin! silla ^ts'! ganan^Ldi
dam«!ga nag! git da miskaka*! hag! nil la da^^ttV
10 ha li tsa «! ha nil la ha t'a m^ ti ha t'a d^L ni !
guliLtH*! «asdaga dl L^uk'a ttL «aLdan!
•ats^n^tda sImg^L«ai <isni <!wa Lat'a ditcl
gH li ^! dl 018 stLz halitsa<! ha nil la Lat'a '^llinn!
«!k'a IgtiLi ^aLt'^ «Iwa Lat'a k'anitt'a
15 gi g! oa nis tctlt La t'a «a ol niL t'a La t'a <is tciz
di s! «i da na n^L La
miga nagisinilla <a gi di di n^L t'aL ! gust^oa
mfk'asatctl ^agln^L hasna«a dl^ana tadidiLnis
giLilla «! ts'a oa t'ak ka disn!* miskaka haiglLnilla
20 dfl ts'is na di gwa t'l oI «i ts'aa oa t'a ka ts'it d! nil la
dan!<! <^niLt'agi gOflt'ioa ^tc^zlgtl gwadi
nat'ai dzill^id dtL g! giis tsa ktl nanlt'ai 'at'lol
din! za^ g!gizists'! siskaka maka nadlgaLt'ad!
d! na dfl oas t'a gd la sa
FAMINE BELIEVED BY MAGIC
25 dzanagd sinne <ita m!ta <at'iG! tc'adita
mats'innala mioa tsitL'a m! tea na oa zu la dits'itda
kagisdla k'anlt'attsi L!G!G!cn!c didaoaka tdtL^a
gu8!t'ala* m!oa g^tt8^t didj! djinnis! hag! la
mloa g!Lna* dtLwtls k'agiLtctlz dit'ann! t'^oa
80 iL dtL wtLs k'a n! t'az mu wus «! dz^ z! wu8 gwa dja
ts'!ka oa ginlta «98 tc'^ niL t8^L gisnilla *!wa
<9 ts'^t ts! giL tail mloa ha oi ts'in ni ta g^nagtldita!
g^tdlnisda Lat'a g!gitci8ga 14m ma gi o! dis ta
du «a gi g! niL ta ^wat^o! maoa nai g! ts'in m ta ts'itdi
85 gi k'a giL ka mu wlla k'a na t'a ka na dl dU ^az
1916] Goddard: SarH Texts 251
we will move there. " The old man, ''Yes," he said. They-
went. Beside Cottonwood they killed. "The old man
willow only by he camps, slough water only he-
drinks. Let us see he is wise," they said. "Our father
we will tell, 'Beside willow tree meat we put. Slough-
water too there by it food,' " they said.
When they came back their father to him they said it.
At last they fooled him. The old man "Yes," said.
"Over there I will camp." Then he moved camp. Meat
lies to it when they moved, to the food they came.
His boys said, "This is the place." The old man said,
"Where willow tree where you spoke oft . Slough water
where is itt This prairie water do you meanf At last ( t)
you fooled me," he said. Then all wood he put on the-
fire. The old man said, "All meat fat even cook."
Then all was cooked. To him they gave it. All he ate.
"All I will eat, I said. Here put it."
Beside him they put it. He had nearly eaten it then
his neck large became. While he ate his arms he lifted
with bird like he sang. His boys said, "Not you eat
while bird like you sing." The food when he had eaten
just then like a hawk from them he flew. To the sky
where they could not see him he flew up. Then singing
only they heard. "My children on account of it you-
acted foolishly people I will not pity. ' '
FAMINE BELIEVED BY MAGIC
Long ago I my father his father then was holy.
There was famine. His son small was hungry. His blanket
foot skin he cut off. He put it in the Are. Calf's foot small
it was cooked. His son ate it. Four days he did this.
His son ate it. His leg he covered. Hawk feathers
with his leg he cut off. His leg deer leg became.
Woman to her he gave it. "Chop it in half," he said.
Then she chopped it in half. His son she gave it. He-
ate the marrow. He had enough. All ate. They passed-
it around. They did not eat all of it. Then to him they-
gave it back. Blanket on it he put. His leg as before
he put out again.
252 University of California Puhlieations in Am. ArcK and Bthn, [YoL 11
tc'at'inni niclna gidists'ala Lakaza nicina
halitsa l'u Ganatala l'u <iLilla <!mLt'u
ma gu dis dla ti didj! dzinnisn gust'iGa taioiswuts
dis dj^c gwa dja mi na* dji na ha giL nil la «! t'a ka
5 di n^ m la ha ka gim mi nil tl ha nil la ts'a ku tl oa
Lidastls ku< nadiliat! iJlla I d! d! d^t L'ic
xaglya LidlGlya k1i< miLdisnflc li taoigaL
nidflwa gu ts'i L^a ts^n na gOs t'loa kata takanacidja
milinna«i kanat'a dtlmaguiUla <asda nadja
10 ma na gH dis La d! djI djin nis si ka wa dij gn
Li di gi ya <aL da na t'itc ma na gH di dl^ ci <a t'i Gi ka wa
dtL gH dja <U dla du gu Ga ylL nl
gtidisGaldi mitts'aiya ha giL nil la yuwQ halitsa
mits'I dica miga nista gddja <a na nin na ha ka
15 ha nil la ha nl nas s! gi ts^ kfL gi y^l la ha ll tsa «i
ha nil la hat'a nidjagH ts^ka'T ha nil la niga
nistagti nits'! dicica ^L^ats! sikalats'i na dis dja
sTkala gUdja nan! la halitsa^ <a <isnilla
halitsa*! <isL! magtinllinne <!wa gusiLLa djtL
20 gu Ga nil la ha nil la da na d! dja ni ka la d! n^ la
ninlyad! mikala gUdja nadja la
din! kat'inn!«! L^aiylka ^zzagadlssit xan!
«al yi wa I Lil la I niL t'tL <ai yu wa gi tsa da ta ts'a
<isnilla hall tsa «i l'u I Lil la dina haL in nl gtl d! nitc
25 ts'^ n^L dl xa ni ts'is sis gl dl ns ga ktl wa haL nil la
•aiyfiwa «istc!dj! k'an^Lgls saGa hagigil^la
«aiyuwa diLnlk'l mitsaGa «Its'innaga mItsaGa
taglnlkai <at'lGi La tasts'a halitsa^ maGa
Lat'a l! gQ ts'is sin la <Itc!ta miL'fLwa Iiilla
30 <a na ts'it dis xal
BROKENKNIPB BELIEVES FAMINE
tcQt'innala mizzi m^smlkaltfini kagudlcUylsnala
ma tsin na <a t'l Gis sin na gH gis Laj la kH tsl g! da la
ha nil la Lat'a han^Ld^L nahidan! t'assa da
•Itclt'a nica 'aflGl guts'! dinldjigtl kawa
35 gtl mai ya tcit dis La «! wa sas t'Qt gu la yu wQ
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 253
Doing wonders Cree heard about it. One Cree
old man herb he dreamed about. Herb with he shot.
He became sick. Four days then he became thin.
Black he became. His relatives said to him, *'Why
do you not get well! Try your best ( t)," they said. ** Out-
side fire very make." Fire it was started when
he painted himself. He went out. He went in the fire. Fire
blazed with him. Smoke went up. He was not. Short time
then fire he came out. His flesh was as before. He-
was not sick. As before he became. He was sick again.
Pour days after four times he went in the fire. He-
became same again. He was sick again. After that he did-
not doctor himself. He stopped.
When it was night his wife said to him, * * That old-
man to him I will go. By him I will lie. Well
you will become." He said, ** You may do that." To him
she went in. The old man said, **What you come fort"
The woman said, **By you I will lie to you I came.
Tomorrow to my husband I will go back. My husband
well make him." The old man *'Yes," said. The old-
man horse good and clothes too to her he gave.
He said, **Now you go home. Your husband will get-
well. ' ' When she came home her husband well was again.
This man secretly became angry. Buffalo marrow
with he shot him. ** Marrow when he eats he will die,"
he said. The old man herb with people he always-
does with. When they moved camp buffalo when they-
killed young man he said to, '^ Marrow may I eat
break off to me give it." Marrow when he swallowed
his throat like a bone his throat stuck in. Then right-
there he died, the old man. At him all laughed. In the-
brush his herb with they threw him in.
BBOKEN-KNIFE BELIEVES FAMINE
It was a Sarsi. His name knife-broken. He led the camp.
There was famine. Then he invited them. They came in.
He said, * * All go out. Your guns load. Here in the-
brush I will go. There from moose like camp from
254 Univer»ity of Calif omia Publicatiant in Am, Arch, and Bthn. [VoL 11
gulagu ni'adi kawa <aLnitt^ yinist'ana
sIzisGa hadjalati tcizziLGi mittsisna nattsis^aL
Lat'a tanatsisLa mitsiLna millinna tcitca za
k'a tsin m t'az mis Lai a Itclt'a nagini^alla gr^tdi
5 ka na di ya gus ti Ga gH k'a ka na d! La La ka na gi dla la
LadlnaLidi nagHdiyisna gadji ma tain na la
naguyisLaj ha nil la natsagamzudila «a ^tslnilla
«!wa <aiyiga naoa <asLa ha tsit dis tsi 'a tsitdi
dlwns kaigiLtc^ m^s n^tdl^a diwtls k'anlt'az
10 ta tin na na gi g!s l^s tc^ zi wtis gwa dja la mai yl wa
<a na gu tsit dl tsi gwaniLta maoa na g! tain nit tal la
tsitdi yiGa nayinittalla tsitdi^ k^za nl na nis tctis si
m! wtis «i ka na dja la
LadinaLltdl matsinna na gH w^n n^L <a «ikaiyiga
15 ka tcit d!l La gwa di 14I la «! toi t'a gCL ts^ mi tciL t'u
•aLnitsi yIdist'tLwa gizisGi n^ttsi<aLLa milinna
sitL^a Itcit'a nats^na«ani kanadidja daGa
k^ nag! dja
•is ga kawa kattLnaga dIt'aLza nahaGa kah!
20 nas 14c na ga wil ga «is nil la I tci t'a m y^ la
kahigtl nadlGltasla mitsiLt'tlLa gClLkaditsit
nagubaL it'lGi gutcIdi^aL dCl guLita<alla
k'amiiilla nagHtsiga t'lGl ^tcit'a gUts'i dInagQ
ka na d! y^c
25 hanidat'iGi gCLgila ViGl hanlc Laiyika
hassaL'a «isnio •iwat'iGi tcasL^tlL «!tc! mastsi
dItciL'tLo «!wa t'lGl has da a 'akinna natzinna
maLdlstltti gustaGa datoitL^tLc <akinna«I tlGa
tciLtic <aLasiL'ugd za mizana haigitcic «at'iGi
30 *a k'a du <a t'a sit da
Latdi nsgiya gUdjalaLa magddilala din!
^g!ya ma«! y!ts'! dly^la hag!snilla s!za
gudjamla nikanag!ca! «isLl magdnilinn! nlGa
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi Texts 255
I will run. Then shoot at me. Over there the last one
where it stands camp the last who shoots me will-
kill me. ' ' When he did that he killed him. They to eat him
butchered him. All took it home. They ate his meat.
Small only they cut off. His friends in the bushes
they put it. Prom it he came back. Just then towards him
he came running back. He went in again.
Another time he was leading the camp again there was-
f amine. He invited them again. He said, ^'You are-
hungry t'* **Yes," they said. **Then marrow for you
I will make. ' ' While they were sitting there blanket his leg
he covered. Knife he took up. His leg he cut off.
Doorway he threw deer leg it turned into. Its marrow
they got out. They all had it. To him they gave it back.
Blanket under it he put it. Blanket one side when-
he took his leg had become again.
Another time there was famine. He was leading the camp.
Bull like he ran out, he made himself. In the brush
from it they shot at him. The last one who shot him
killed him. They butchered him. His meat small piece
in the brush when he put he came out again. His tipi
he went in.
''Young men, men load your guns. For you bear
I will be. We will play," he said. In the brush
he went. Like a bear he stood straight up. They shooting-
at him he charged them. He threw them down then he-
pretended to bite them. Not the blood was. When he-
was done playing then in the brush from like a man
he walked out again.
Sometimes he invited them then he said this, ''My-
friends do this to me," he said. Then bow string
sticks both ends they tied. While he sat two men
strong ones across his breast just they tied it. Two men
very they pulled it. It was tied together only through him
it came out. There still nothing wrong he sat.
One time young man he was doctoring. He was sick.
This young man his mother to him she went. She told-
him, **My son you doctor. I will marry you. Horse
256 University of California Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
aata^a ^isnilla sitLaka «!t8^na lidilla tsa
•akiyi kunilla nits'i dica <isnilla gwa<i
hadjala kfLyfy^la tc^zi yisia na di ni gis tcti 71
ga «isgiya«i tagilta gwaigil^la td kit'a
5 Las tcfl yi kit da yi djaj tc^ zi gis La <! k'a
naganikala <iwat'iQi tsa «akiyi<! natdi<anni
<!ts^na disk'am«i yik'a tasi<^la yistsiLd!
dan! ^anazists^la <at'!Gl hadjagi tu«I
nazists^lla tagu hadjala tu< kit da taiki
10 gwat tsa mas gin na si 1^ la ts'a kfi <a k'a tsl dl yl la
cfiilla nu ka tsi dis k'a <!sgiya<! dinali
<ak'a xani gull m^s mi ka tfl ni dit'^nni-
dil glic c! •! Lil la ta nl kas si ka ki t'az la <! gis La
na ka tsit dls ka <ikabali nas'a Gated guts'! tutcuGa
15 na tci dl k^c yn wu ga k^L d! ka ha li ha ki dj!
mfts'aiya nak^Ld^LLaka ntlk'a <a na tsit dis hal la
m%t dl miL Lai ya < lil la hat tsis kil la yi t'! g!
ktL Gi g! gi kil la •at'!g! «! ka ha l! tcu t'in na ^s!na
haigisnilla bakHtcaga n!g!lata mist'dte daGadig^td!
20 ku ni tin g! y! ya ha <a 'a t'l g! ha nis tsin na <a di j gu
'^t dit la d! g! mis t'u t! di t'a <^ niL <in n! n!s tsin na <a
ha dl g! ni d! g! ha na tcis dji da Ga d!t t^n ni <! na dls t!
«i ka ha l! tctL t'in na «i yis nil la <a t'! g! sin na ha ktl tea Ga «i
y!g!L8kLa mist'ut! «!t8'! kti mi ts'! g! g! y^l la
25 ha tsin nil la '^t d! da d! g! mis t'd t! n^t d! «a h!
ha nil la d!gi^ hanatc!zts! daGaditt^ni n^tdist!
<!s nil la has tsit d! gi nil la d!j gH <a t'l g! ma Ga
y! ts! n! ta la
•at'!G! ^ Lil la nadiy^Jla mis Lai ya^ <ak'a
30 tu da ka l! d! y^s la ma tsin na na tci gis kil la
<!wat'!Gi ha nil la LQSsats'! tak^cca <isnilla
«at'!Gi m! teas! nil la gutsldiz^lla <aL!ta takas!ya
<atsill^la gim^tdi ha na tsis kil la «!wat'iG!
ha tsin n! tea s! ha giL <a «! Lil la d! t'^ n! d! glie ei
35 'an na gim m! tsiL diL hal <a t'! g! gu ts'! g!s da la d! n!
tsa s! ha g!s <a mit tsit d! gai y! gu <a d! L^l la d! t'^ n!-
d!lglieei tulgaiye gwadlLalla nak!faila nis ga gut!
1915] Ooddard: SarH Texts 257
good to you I will give/' she said. ''Before I come
manure put in the fire. Stones two take in. To you
I will go," he said. The mother did it. He went in.
Deer its skin he spread beside it young man stand-
on all fours he made. Water in it yellow paint in it
he poured. Deer skin on he placed it. Thai stones
two he picked up. The manure burning on it he placed.
When he hit it a gun it sounded like. There when he-
did it water made a noise. Three times he did that.
Water inside three times a lump from the body was in it.
Outside fire still was burning. With it he burned it.
Young man got well.
Still buffalo were knife broken, hawk varigated with
steamer they two went on board. Hides they shipped down.
White man Edmonton from to the large water they-
sailed. Over there while sailing white man captain
his wife because he made free with island he threw him-
away. Prom him his friend with he sailed off. There
they came in. There white man Indian^ was there. He-
told them, ** Chiefs when they invite you pipe where it-
hangs they will take you. There they will ask you four-
times which of these pipes will you have, they will say-
to you. Tou say this where the sun rises which hangs
I will take, ' ' the half-breed said. Then chiefs they invited
pipes to they took them in. He was asked, ''Which
these pipes will you have t" he said. "This where it-
goes up it hangs I will take," he said. They said it to him
four times then to him they gave it.
Then with it he went home. His friend still on the-
shore was walking around. He was hungry. He sailed up-
to him. Then he said, ' ' To my friend I will go ashore, ' '
he said. Then they would not let him. He struggled (t).
At last he went ashore they let him. Prom them they-
sailed on. Then some one said, "Crow who lifted up and
hawk variegated they threw away . " After that they stayed-
there. This crow who lifted up white headed eagle he-
made himself. Hawk variegated big goose he made him.
f Halfbreed.
258 Univernty of Calif omia PubUeatioiu in Am. ArcK and Eihn. [VoL 11
ni na gi nl t'ai la <a fl oi ga ts'I kahl 'adii^lla tsasl-
liagiL«a diLLai«a natdlsgilla viBdana t'loi
cisduwa <aiiadI<!o 'ak'astLkii L^nk'a mnamnaglnigilla
«a t^i Gi gtl ts^i na ka t'as
5 nicina sasdinna maoala ts'i kti gi g! t'az la
giGika 'attsala tsasIhagiL^I ha nil la zaoa
mitts'aiya ^Iiilla tsitdag^ mis Lai <a hagisnilla
ts'ikaka <anim tsldishald! ^t'aka ^^tdini «Isnilla
«! wa t'l 01 ha na Ids t'az la ktl yi na gi gl t'az la mis t'a ti <I
10 nas 'a Ga tcfl Ga na tsin n! ta la gi gi ts'i dis Id la gu ziL a
gimaGa tsin nil la la dijgiL mist'tLta^ gigiiilla
nat di y^ la
A CAPTIVB SABSI BOY ESCAPES PEOM THE SIOUX
yiwtl' ts'asstlwa tstLt'inna ts'itda yictctit
yit^Ge hatitdjiti dim< ts'itda diGa gwala
15 ha kit dji < ts'it da <i «as nil la La sin nas tl k'a
nadiGidjag5L nadisda yininnizinda sinaGa
diGini La sinaGa diGini nadisda yininnizinda
^wat'iGeda <akiyik'a ^isi^kka ma gH ni lin ni ka
nadigidja «at'iGi gw^tdi ^isi^kka ka diya
20 gwa di dla «a t'i Gi gH ts'i nis k V na tsi dis L^a ka
<aldye zff nadil^la yitcitdji nidtiwa hat'a
ts'asdinna disdja tsata^ naGidaLLi <iw{|
•itciL^tdlnasa <anna tcisk'a nis da m^ttsinna
diGiLit ma«ana gtLctcanna ts*itdask^na kawa
25 giL j^k'a
dijna tadists'inna <isLi gassClLla maGa
na xa ci Gi na da t'^n na '^n ni t'a i «is ts'in nil la
tstit'inna <anist'a <isnilla i^kkaza <isgiyala
tagisti giGiiilla natila kawa gigiLLilla
30 ni niin ni dal da ni ta zil le «i lil la gi Ga nis tctlt
^wat'iGi diGi tazille gizizla disdjaila
«is 14k ka t'^ k'a «inilltLwQ' miz^k'a xaiGigu«i
tcistc'itdi «ililla mizitda yLsdl^la dine k'at'inne
yits'i kaGiya«i «igisnilla ninadidza «idaga
35 n^t di na < wa t^ Gi na git dis nik^ t^ zil li «i da si la
1915] Qoddard: 8ar$i Texts 259
They flew up. Main land they flew across to. Prom there
bear he made himself. Crow he lifted up his friend he-
carried on his back. He was tired then another heturned-
himself into. At last prairie he brought him to. From-
there they two walked back.
Cree by himself his tipi was to it they went in.
With them they ate. Crow lifted up said, "Let us kill-
him; his wife with let us run away." His friend said-
to him, ** Because of a woman since they threw you away
why do you say thatt" he said. Then they went on.
They came in. Pipe Edmonton they left. To it they went.
Clothing to them they gave four times. Pipe with
they went home.
A CAPTIVE SAESI BOY ESCAPES FROM THE SIOUX
Over there Sioux Sarsi boy captured. Then chief
this boy his son he made. The chief the boy he told,
**My son, without my knowledge do not go home. I will go-
home, if you think me tell. My son me tell, I will-
go home, if you wish. Then two horses good ones you-
may go.'' Then from him horses for he went he-
pretended. Then after that on foot he ran back.
Moccasins two only he took. Food was none. That-
way just himself he started back. Through the mountains
he was coming back. Over there High river other side
hill he sat down. He was starving. He was weak. Beyond-
him little ways Piegan tipis few were.
Four people were riding. Horse they were leading.
To him they rode up. ** What tribe areyout" theyasked-
him. ''Sarsi I am,'' he said. One young man put-
him on a horse. With them he took him back. Tipis
with them he came back. Food, soup with him he-
gave. Then this soup he drank. He breathed out
like horses. Hail stones from his mouth came out. Seven
there were before him they lay. This man to him
he went in he asked him, **Will you pick them upt"
'' Certainly. " He put them in his mouth again. Then he-
swallowed them. The soup it was came out again. His-
260 Univertiiy of Calif omia Publieations in Am, ArcK and Ethn, [YoL 11
nadiskayi yisLaiya •aUyik'a ^Dsi^kka
ma ga nl lin ne k'a <!wa gdziLLa yioa nlla
^wat'iGl tstit^nats'i nadisL^a <wu tsut'innaGa
ts'innl dine tstLt'inna ts'ltda*! dlBLaiya«i
5 <as nil la yu wa* tsu t'in na ts^ na da L^a na gi dis L'a
•Iwat'iGi kuwagaL'a tstlt'inna ts'itdal
mi ta l! tc'^ ka niLanlt! dita «ati giofta din!
ts'it das ka na «i «l8t^a nadiy^LLa •atiyik'a
ma gu ni lin ni k'a yioa nisti tciGica nii^nniti
10 yi Ga ni la <a t'i Gi gd wa na ts'a t'in nl ni nai dja di
A LAME MAN CAPTUBES HOBSES
halitsa tstLt'inna dik'ahi giziLGi dzanakQ
sini «ak'a dtididissit 'afiGi halitsa*! ^Idya
^l! «a Li ts'i daL di muwtls k'a ts'in niL tc'a
L*! Gi si k'as si miiwtis n^nistcfUc gUnaninicca
15 mtL wtls «a ta gtl li lil la ta nis da gtl di Gis ma*
ytlwQ gCLzadi nicinaoa <!L'aiGi IsL^kka
gini^kfL gHwa nagiyidal halitsa*! gust^nnika
<isL^kka nis<r <at'iGi *iL'iGi gtizats'i naguniwut
nagtidigaiye «akV giLnawClL dilitca*! 'akV
20 ta si da
hanaguniGi wuLa nicina mana gtinisit k'ada
<inagiL*inni nidza gwa<!* mana gd ts'i nis sit
natciGilL^a «isLi tc'azitda diya ts'iyioa nisti
nis ts'it <a t'i Gi sit tin ne g^ l'Q wa za* diL nti
25 ni ci na •! yi ka na gu ni cite •! wa t'i Gi yti wu
winnasdinna* maGazinnagu ka tei di GiL L^a ts'a<i
nicina<i ha nil la maGazinna gwadjala «isL^kka
za' na* gi di wd la ni ei na *i «a t'i Gi di na gu
•anna dja la na dis dja yiLilla «a La ta nin na «! yiGa
80 ni na ha ci GiL na ta ts'is til la ka wa mi lil la
ni na ha ei ni na
•aLisidaLdi si da i Lil la guk^nana Lil la
nieina «iLt'uLLa nieina tc'istc'a mizana
diLLa«iguLi dut'aguli «akV «idite'asla mizik'a
85 te'is tc'a la <U di t'^ ni «! mi zi k'a dza t'a ga da di niL k'a
•igust'iGa nieina diLGiz miL na ts'it diL dal
1915] Goddard: 8arH Texts 261
friend two horses good ones and clothes to him
he gave.
Then from Sarsi one came. ' * Over there Sarsi camp, ' '
he said. This Sarsi boy his friend said, ** Over there
to Sarsi we will go.'' They went. Then they came in.
Sarsi boy his father's horses very many his father.
Two he slept. This Piegan in turn was going back.
Two horses good ones to him he gave. Cloth very much
to him he gave. Then they saw him again when he-
came back.
A LAME MAN CAPTUBES HORSES
Old man Sarsi smallpox killed him. Long ago I
yet was not bom. Then the old man young man was.
When they were fighting his leg was shot. Left side his leg
crooked it grew. His leg even then with he rode.
He led a war band yonder far away Cree camp at night
horses they were to steal there they came. Old man
six horses he stole. Then that night far away he-
drove them. At daybreak still he was driving them.
His own horse still he was riding.
While he was driving them Cree him overtook. Behind
he looked then he saw them. Him they overtook. He-
jumped off. Horse away from he walked. Face down
he lay, his eyes shut. Th^i he was lying grass only
a bunch stood. Cree for him were running about. Then
yonder across the river like a wolf he ran up the hill.
They saw him. The Cree said, '* Wolf he has made him-
self." Horses only they drove back the Cree. Then
like a person he made himself again. He went back with
those accompanying him him they overtook. They put-
him on a horse. Camp with him they came back.
When they were fighting he was sitting with defending-
them with Cree while he was shooting Cree shot him.
Through him though it went nothing was wrong. Still
he was shooting. In his back he was shot. Bullet on his-
back like gum it stuck on. Just then Cree withdrew,
then they went home.
262 Univeriiiy of Calif omia Publicaii(m$ in Am. ArcK and Eihn. [YoL 11
A BEAB BBING8 HOME A CRIPPLED 8ABSI
gititsanni gAdii winniga dadismana ts'a stl wa t8^<
nagadiLdI •isglyala nats'itdi tsa mtlw^
'a x^n na dis t'as glGaoa nanist'idi giGadl nadlsdal
nii^niil kwiyiGa yita •Tgftst'iGa nlniGa yits'i
5 kli yi g^t <i wa t'l Ge di gi nl ni Ga <I <a Gis nil la
naGast'a nadit'as «Twat'!Gi <S yisnilla •Iwat'iG!
nlniGa^I yiGa nagala ^Isi^k kat'^k'a ylk'a
^nniisdala <Is da gi dj^t dl <at^Gi giGittala
tl na gi Gi t'as di ylk'a tananlsdala gadjlGa gCLka
10 na gi dis gil la tl ga l'^ gl gOs t'l Ga ka wa
nl na g! n! gil la kawa gUta^ nagiya <a Gila la
Gad! ^Tfldflts'I nadlJsg^la ts'S xaGiy^la maGa
na Gl yal la <I wa t^i gI ml na djin na Ga k^ na ts'i Gis til la
<Iwat'iGi xasts^nilla dan! nan!dja«a<a ha nil la
15 n! n! Ga k'a ta sis da <a <a yl t^ g! na s! ts'ln nls t! n!
guts'! «it^Gi guts'! nasag^LLat'a •Is nil la
TWO HAWKS TEST THEIB SPEED
IzfLLtctl «Twa «is^an!daL 'aLlts'i tazag!d!t^LLa
katinn! g! m! zis ts'! la «i8gan!daL^ ha nil la
sax^na ^^tdadldla Llk'a^ ha nil la d!da«a
20 n! x^ na ^a da d! dla *aL din n! «is ^a ni daL <! ha nil la
tcis t'a gOs t! ga «at'!G! «a dad! dla L!k'a<! ha nil la
dtihat'a <^tdad!dla •is nil la •Iz^Ltctl'! ha nil la
sinn! saxanna z^tca za^ '^t dad! dla •Is^anldaL^
ha nil la •Itc! ts! ylt'at'a ylGa nat'ah! zitda
25 •! g!s teat la da ha t'a «at da d! dla tcis t'a gOs ta g!
y!Ga <aL!ka niGiGiila d!n! «is^n!daL<!
•IzuLtctl^I g!Ld!Lts'!la dtlziLGila «i8gan!d^L<!
ha nil la sltdaga sit da da naGa saxana zisG&
«isnilla yiL diL ts'il la n!i4nn! naiGlLdal <!z^Ltctl^
30 ha niL tctlt da gi ziL g! na ka za tea *a ka g! dis t'ai la
kadlt'aid! «is^an!daL<! liilla dlstsilla «!tc!ta
dlst'aid! gOsflGa ylkadiLLala ylziLGf <!z^Ltca«I
<ag!n!stcat y!Ga za^ ylGala da*atdad!dla
•Iz^Ltca^I
1915] Goddard: Sarsi TexU 263
A BEAE BRINGS HOME A CEIPPLED 8AB8I
Several Blackfoot south went to war. From Sioux
when they were coming back a young man was. When he fell
stone his leg cut oflf. For him they made a shelter.
Prom him they went back. Many times in it he slept
then bear to him went in. Then this bear said-
to him, '*I pity you. Let us go home." Then, ''Yes,"
he said. Then the bear for him stood. Like a horse
on him he mounted. "When they were tired there they-
slept. When they started again on him he mounted.
Blackfoot camp to it he brought him back. Late-
at night just camp he brought him back. Tipis among
he get off he made. From him different direction he-
went off. Outside he went out. To him he went up.
Then his relative's tipi he carried him in. Then he-
asked him, **How did you come back?" he said. **0n-
a bear I rode. Over there where they left me from there
then from there he carried me," he said.
TWO HAWKS TEST THEIB SPEED
«IzaLtcii and «isganidaL to each other while they-
were bragging a man was listening to them. «!sg^idaL
said, ** My buffalo are swift." The other said, '*Which-
ones your buffalo are swift do you mean?" ^IsganidaL
said, ''Swallows those are swift." The other said,
Not at all they are swift," he said. fz^tcu said,
I my buffalo zutca only are swift." ^isganidaL
said, "Tree to it it flies there it flies before I can-
catch it. Not at all it is swift." Swallows for him
together he drove, this <TsganidaL. <Iz^Ltcu flew at-
them. He did not kill them. <isganidaL said, "Where-
you are sitting sit ; this time for you my buffalo I will-
kill," he said. He flew at th^n. Many he threw down.
^iz^Ltcu he gave them to because he did not kill. zutca
for them they flew. When they flew out <!sganidaL then
flew at them. Trees were flying to just then he caught-
them. He killed them. ^iz^Ltcu he gave them. For him
only he killed th^n. He was not swift cfzaLtcu.
264 University of California Puhlications in Am. Arch, and Bthn. [YoL 11
A BIBD HAS ITS MATE DOCTOBED
kat'inne tasida mi tsl dil gai ye «iLt'iigu diLL'a
ml tsi dil gai ye diskakaga tasida <ald miskaka
kat'inni<I <IniLt'u mi mi zona <IdiLLa nat'aidi
win nas din na tutcdoa nisda tsi yl gl tsl gi 8l guts'!
smikala k'anadlt'ai diskakaga t^nisda miskaka
mi na Ga dl gin ni sil la <iwat'lGi dits'aiye ka didist'ai
ylga nisda ditc'aiy!^ «aoagigill! gunnisdja
tsiyigak'asi ditc'aiyi «^tdi LagilLa gutsitL'a
dzana <agudjaki «!sgamdaL<I Lilla k'anadit'ai
10 da ts'i ka siL ti ne gu ^a na gi nis da 4s ga ni daL «i
ts'ika«i mai ya Li 14L di dl daL <idjini Lilla ninaLatida
<aigila dzana hagiL*inne <aLita dinali
nagigit'aits nag! nis da ninagit'aidi «at'ioi
ts'ika<i gtidja nadja kat'inni<i mitsidigaiye
15 niL t'a si t'ai du gi t^ na ni t'ai <a t'i oi na ka diL La
tu <igilLa tudaka k'a tasi^nni tagagisti
«is g^ ni d^L ts'i nagigiLnij «i8ganid^L«i nLna
k'anits^tdi mitsidigaiyi ka«!y!st'a <igiLna
k'aginitcadi gwadi nadist'ai dina <akinna
20 di git t'tl ts'i na gi dis t'ai di na ti ^ ka t'in ni «i
ha gi ni zin na yti wil ta ka gi gis tin ni n^ <i gi ni zin na la
gits'i diya yioa nagiy^tdi tas I4n ni tcu la
gi gi zit tsi gw^t tsa
A FIGHT WITH A BEAB
Likizai k'at'ine dzazi <i3t'uku disL^a dz^zi
25 yi GUL li yi «I na sa di ya gus t'iG Ga mi ni ts'i
niniGa miLdistsit yits'aGa daoadiststLk ditci
ni La ni gi L'as si yi tea Ga ts'i L'a di ni di na <i <! tci
•initctit nineGa<i ditci«i za* «asL'a yini
yi<aL «it'iGe yits'aGa k'ada <idadisdjiL mas
30 xa Gi ca gi ts^L Li nit dza di tsi Ga na niis tsiL ni ni Ga
tsinna tsigudi GiisL'a yits'i gudisn^tc nanizit
gisni gunits'i dikadi nisL'a «iwat'iGe gistcdt
yi ziz Gl m^ i Lil la
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 265
A BIRD HAS ITS MATE DOCTORED
Man mounted. Its head white he to shoot rode off.
Its head white beside her children was sitting. Two
her children. The man shot her. Through her belly it-
went. When she flew up the other side by the lake
she sat. From the east after that her husband flew back.
Beside his children he sat. His children told him. Then
his wife after he flew. Beside her he sat. His wife
to fix her he tried in vain. East side his wife without
he flew. Short time when it had been hawk with
he flew back. There woman lay beside her they sat.
The hawk the woman around sitting sang when she-
sat up he made. Long time he did that, finally she-
was well. They flew up. They lit again. When they flew-
up again then the woman well became. The man
its head white sky flew up, he could not see it. It flew up.
Then it came down again. Water it went in. Shore on
water serpent it dragged out. To hawk he offered it.
The hawk began to eat it. When he finished eating it his-
head white in his turn began to eat it. When he finished-
eating it from it they flew away. These two to their-
nest flew back. The Indian the man thought, ** That-
yonder which they dragged out I will see," he thought.
To it he went. To it when he came up large water serpent-
it was. Its upper part they had eaten.
A FIGHT WITH A BEAR
One man moose he shoot he rode. Moose walking
he saw. In front he started just then in front of him
black bear chased him. Prom it he ran. Three leaning-
on a stump behind he ran. This man tree he caught.
The bear the tree only he ran against. Its face he bit.
Then from it back he moved. Knife he drew. He-
struck it then his nose he cut off. Bear old away-
from him ran. To it bespoke. ** Stand stiU," he said.
To him back it ran. Then he took hold of him. He-
kiUed him knife with.
266 University of California Publications in Am, AroK and Ethn, [Vol. 11
CUBING MADNESS RESULTING FROM A WOLF BITE
halitsa mistiwa tsitda sitL'a kutas!
yidiststila kawa g^wa, nagidisLatsI gast'ioa
maoazinna nis^lni gimika nagilLaLa tsitda
sitL'a<I «Itci makatugilLa sit da I dissioa
5 ka dl gis tcu l! gas t'l oa ma Ga zin na <I mi tcil tci
k'aniLtcti hagilaigi «aLata kagldClz maGazinna«i
gwadi «isduts'i diLLa kawa kfl gi yi t'as dl
halitsa^i kii siLsitd! nisgil mitc'a hatcagiz
ku Litdastis saoa tc'a kii li tsi ti gi la dl Liyigiya
10 dti ta gti li ta ka na cl dja «a t'f ol di na ll
MINOR NARRATIVES
I
ttitctiwa dik'a ts'inna nistinhi k'a tazlk'a
^da xaGl«a «Twat*iGe ts'ida tcitc'a li
GaG^LLl yinitctit yiGanl dtlyfditsit ma
yik'^nlstsiL <Iwat'lGe tH yiga naGlsnat
15 nis tin ne ta nls Gits' y! wa t'l Ge in wl gl gi ki l^ na
niwa takasGiz I4nna tak^nasGis
n
tdtctlGa xani dik'asitda tu da kadi <akinna
tasidana^ dinatctl ^^Lt'^td! ts^yiGa sit! la Ga
nagalL^la Lika ha nil la nasiminni nani«a
20 Li k'a ha nil la ta ga di na «a* ns nil la li k'a «i
ha nil la 'aLadini Lik'a^ <Itci iLilla yits'uzak'a
gwanigizla naya« giLnilla gCL na gis gaz di minaoa
da di k'az la ta Ga na dis dja la Li k'a <i ta Ga na Gi diL gil
ta za k'a gH wa na dd wa la ta Ga di na la
m
25 yiGe tutcu xanniti ts'iz ziz Gi na «a* «akinna
dinnana'a giyizisGi «iwat'iGe nagiGiL^aL
gi Gi tea nis <aL gi Gi tea nis <aL di mi tean ni xa Gi gu i di
tuteugu «adja «a tei teik k'a La yiwat'iGe tutcu
gwadja giGitea tatea^Gidit disL^tdi nagiGinnila
30 mi te^ ni yi mi k'^ si« tu dis na *i wa t'i Ge tsis ka
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 267
CUBING MADNESS BBSULTINO FROM A WOLF BITE
Old man his grandson boy small to the camp he-
led him. Tipi to they nearly came just as wolf mad
after them ran. Boy small tree climbed up. The boy
his grandfather as he pulled him up just then the wolf
his hips he caught. He was doing that at last he climbed-
up. Wolf from them another direction ran. Tipi
when they two went in the old man fire when he smelled
he became mad. Prom him they ran. **Fire make for me
outside. ' ' Fire when they had made it he walked in the fire.
Nothing wrong he came out again. Then he was well.
MINOB NABBATIVES
I
Lake on they went ice on. Middle horn stuck-
up. Then boy small dog was dragging he took hold-
of it. He let go (?) he would not (?). His mother
chopped it off. Then . water from it he moved. Ice
broke to pieces. Then water they fell in. Some over-
there ran ashore. Some ran back ashore.
II
By a lake, buffalo painted by the shore two persons
were riding. Large man naked face down was lying.
To him they rode up. One said, ' * He has been swimming.
He is one of us. " The other said, ' ' He is a water person, ' '
he said. The other said, **You are right." The other
stick with his loin he poked him. **Get up," he told-
him. When he looked his eyes were red. He ran in the-
water. The other hit him as he ran into the water ( ?) . The-
middle he disappeared. He was a water being.
in
Over there lake buffalo was killed. Two men people
killed it. Then they butchered it. They took the entrails-
out. When they opened it its entrails flowed out like-
a lake it became each way. Then lake became its intes-
tines where they dragged them they put them on the-
ground. Its intestines where they dragged water flowed.
268 Univeriity of California Publicationa in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [VoL 11
gutsiL'a 'adja na gi Gin ni la di tutcugu <anadja
Luk'a tutcu its'i Luk'a <ask9nna«6L tsiska
ga tci L'a yi ts'a
IV
ta din niL tsl na ha ci gilL naL d! tcisk'a kahaLci
5 gi giL na La ka za ta sit da xa ni ha g! caL «a U nl
nadisailoa gini gigitsi «iltil nakahaci gInlLna
kahaci gl giL nan! dina<I nidtlwa Ltlna za
guL'tlwa mizzana xag!<a <at'iGi siLti
V
dinne k'at'inne ^dissadi xani m^ka
10 zis oil la na ts'is <aL di tea gas da la tea giis da «i
nats'itdisti <akats'ila<I zitda ml tea ts'in nil la
ni dza te'a na gus d^ la
VI
ka gi zi ma zin na ts'ikagH <adi<ici «iskiya
<is 14k ka ka di y^ la na gi d^L di mi zit da na gi zil la
15 ts'i ka ma gCL ni lin ni gCL <a di d^J la «i wa t^ oe
yiGanisdalla dini <iskiya<i nisgila tasitsala
vn
niLtsi sitL'a didiLadi t'ioi dika ^abigii^nna
«aka gigidi^in ^wat'ioi gCLtea kugidijij
THE WAB DEEDS OP EAGLE-BIBS
«akadl gut'inna gadji tetlt'inna nicina
20 na ka ea xa ^1 ziz «i wa da nas «i oa *^n na Lan na
ku gi ziz teis iL gi ni ci na siL ti <i wa si ni ga d ji
halitsa sat'a mis^tsa dina *aGa <igisni
mi tsis La tsis si digiste'ul da gu ni t'a gu na mi si
sisgu m^ iiilla sisgua <iwa sinii dtieiste'a
25 siL t'u guL di t'i Gi ka ha ki tei nL djin nie na «a nis t'a
yHwu si La «akadi natsinniLdi tana 'isaLi
wussa hahaeiseana gin^Lgu gis<! k'anatsinnis
t'lGi gtist'iGa ninahaeinana «iwati hadissi
1915] Goddard: Sarsi TexU 269
Then creek small was formed. Where they put it like-
a lake became again. Fish lake toward it fish swam-
back and forth creek small from.
IV
Men who were riding as they were riding along on a hill
up they rode. One was riding, buffalo he was chasing.
Meat we will get they said. To him they rode. Down-
the hill they rode. Up the hill when they rode the person
was gone. Mouse only straw through it was stuck.
There it was lying.
V
This man when hunting buffalo cow he killed.
When he opened it unborn calf was in it. He took it home.
They put it in the pot before they opened it then another
was inside of it.
VI
Wolverine girl turned itself into. Young man horses
he looked for. When he came back in front of him she stood.
Oirl handsome she made herself. Then he married her,
this young man. He went crazy. He died.
vn
Wind small it whirls then their mother they own
for her they look. And in her abdomen they go in.
THE WAB DEEDS OF EAGLE-BIBS
Two tribes Blackfoot Sarsi Cree to fight they-
ran out. Then here fort they had made they went in.
They killed. Cree was lying dead. Then I Blackfoot
old man with me his dead body this one for I caught.
One side of his scalp I tore. How many times his back
I stabbed. Enife with I was stabbing him. Then me
they did not shoot although they were shooting at me. On-
account of this chief those they call I auL
Over there I was. Two places there were tipis. Three
we were ahead we went. Coming toward us I saw.
They were finishing putting up the tents then just we-
270 University of California Publications in Am. AreK and Ethn. [YoL 11
naoa natsigidal <It'aka nai^sna Iiilla dlsfist^Gl
ml nits! <lslldal nicina kat'Inl dits'aiya «isLlk'a
tasiszal tcitdiLLadl «isgaka gfinnagCLnissi t^^
gizlLGi un! ginagagina ^Iiilla mikala sissIlGi
5 ka t^i n! <i na <Il sit dl gOs t^ Ga mit tsa Ga «I gis nl
mitslk'izza nadlglstc'ul akagu za^ mizi sisgCLt
m^s iiilla <I wa t'l Gi k5 wa *akfl has! La
<Iwa ytLwH nadisisma naii gCLnisnana za*
•issaLl «at'iGi <L'aGi wilsa daca^ nicina
10 ^ nl ga U tea ^l tcQ la gadiLd! nana tsflLa
nicina ^saiinisa yinizin •IgCLt'lGa maGa
<a di nlL sil tsi ytl nsLi dagisL^tln! t^Gl nahits'i
dani •Iiilla dlya sinl k'as LaiylGa sisti
naGa . nagiya gtLst^Ga •IsIldfiL ^Li dagiL'tlni
15 ts'I n^L sit diL La gl mig gis liL tcl tcl n ni ts'I
tanlda «i8Ll<I yldlGitsii sinnlts'i siLt'Q^
LikadinniLLa <IgilLl mits^ gis LiL didlgistcuLl
sitdlLLa dasinniLt'a IgfLL«I k'a gIsiiL 4b li
giLtctltl minlgl tatsinnisda miL gitsitdissa
20 ga dji yl k'a ta nis da ni cl na •I ts'i da nl
dfixagilLa nicina*! UnatsilLa ^wa yiLn^LdiLtsI
nagilt'tLdl dani dtixanagilLa nici na«I zanatsilLa
gul nal La di na gil t'tl dl da ni dfL xa na gil La ni cl na ^
giLdiLtsI <i8Ll «itsaGa natsfL tcl tcl giLt'd
25<igat'lGa «isLi zazlka kasitdilLa nicina<I
IdiLt'tl gitsiltsi cidj^t gadj!«i m^ iLilla
giLdiLtsI ylGa nadiLLadi gflst^Ga nlcina«l
m^s xagiLLa gadji^ gits^LsiLLa ^wa nicina«i
sit diL La gadjil tsa nadi'ani Axilla gidisa
30 «i gu t'l Ga gCL ni tsil Li ka ni din niL La tsa ^ «i Lil la
ginittsil ylGa gigiLtsildi natsilLa nicina^ gadji^
nis da sinni za* hasissa «iwa mana nis La
1915 J Goddard: 8arH Texts 271
came back. Then I said, **To us they are coming."
Anyway putting the tipi down with we hurried (t).
At them we charged. Cree man his wife on horse
he threw. While she ran young men came up to her
then they killed her. I my brothers with her husband
we killed. The man when he fell just his scalp I caught.
One side of it I tore oflf. Twice only his back I stabbed
knife with. At that time thus we did.
Then over there I went to war. Again ten only
we were. Then at night ahead I went. Cree my-
brother's horse had captured. When we were going to us
he caught up. Cree perhaps we were he thought. Just-
then in front of him we hid ourselves. There horse
he tied then toward us gun with he walked. I
quiver over my shoulder it was. To us he walked up
just as we charged at him. Horse where he tied to
he ran back. In front of them I was running. Not towards-
me he could mount. The horse he letting go at me
he might shoot he turned around although toward him
I ran. As I was about to catch him he ran. He did not-
shoot me although still I chased him. Horse which-
he had captured against him somebody mounted with it
he chased him. Blackfoot on it mounted. Cree toward
gun did not go off. The Cree ran again. Then he-
charged at him. When he was going to shoot gun did not-
go off. The Cree ran again. When he caught up, when-
he was going to shoot gun did not go off. Cree he-
charged at him. Horse behind he jumped around. Not
he could shoot. Just then horse under its neck he ran out.
The Cree he shot. His hip he hit. The Blackfoot knife
with he charged. To him when he ran up just then
the Cree knife he pulled out. The Blackfoot ran from-
him. Then the Cree ran. The Blackfoot stone which-
he picked up with it he chased him. Just as he threw it
he turned around again. The stone with he threw. By him
when he threw he ran on the Cree. The Blackfoot sat-
down. I only chased him. Then to him I caught up.
272 University of California Pvblioationi in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
•iLt'^ni •Iiilla mizi zana xagfetsi k'ast'a
Lukwiyioa «iLt'^m Lat'a miL gisfa yiduwa
tci tcl ta tsa tea di t'a nis tsa di da ni mil la La ka
•Igisnik miL dagal'aga nagisxal •at'iGikowa
5 Las ga la nis k'a nis ti
THE PEBSONAL EXPEBIENCE OF GRASSHOPPER
«as ts'a gas t'l Ge xan! yik'aiye <Iskaka nakagfgica
djinis Iwat'lGe dani «TLilla miL xayists'it
disistcit t'lGl xaguyissa^da dam lilla <Inist'u
^da tcaiidl«a ^Iiilla sina^«innl lilla dists'it
10 nis t'a sis xal ci jatc dja za m na oi ts'it xa ni I
djanada tasits'ala sini! na cl ts^ dis ti la slwtis
dlitda sa dit! kfl na si ts'f g!s ti
Ladinaiinne «isttldi ylk'aiye nadlslssa
mananisLat! «inist'Q mininna <Isteoa namiclctc'a
15 yi gOs t'l oa dl gi xa n! ^ n! na La na tsi dis L^a
«i t'a na ols dj^tc miL nadlssistsit <Iwat'ioe
<as t'a gOs dlat maoa sisLatl siLdLstsit «a t^ oe gQs t'l Ga
si yi Ga y! Lat yis lI «T Lil la nis t'a sis xal «is lI
zIsGi naglsts'itdi ninaslsdja sldanna«l nisk'a
20 g5 Ga ni kai la xan nas tl hi nl dza «a ka su gti
xanaGlstc'Ql gutL^is tadlnlsdtiLa «at'lGaxa
dtl zls sis Gi sa Ga na tsl dIs L^a
xani tc'lGatasI mizitda *a tc'I nl sis ti nas«!
mita naGldist'Ic nidza Lakazatctl gQ Ga nl tea wd*
25 yis «i wa t'l mi tsa ni Ga «is t'l Ga cis te'a •! wa t'i G€
nisti I t'a na gis djatc tcitt'lGe maGa naGieca
^wat'i nas«inne nidza «Ik'alinne «lLilla t^Gl
xani m^ka naiilla <Iwat'lGl si tsl ts'aL^^LgCL
yis«! saGa naglL^adl zasGinnI gK •iwatlGl
80 has siis nl xa nl tc'as tslt ti zis sis Gil la na <a n^ na
nltc'5na yika nagCLniccIla mi ci tc'u zi ka la ca
ic tc'i ni ci la
«itci ylGa xanni nazitgH yis<! ditci
m) na da <a ka Gi ci ca m^ xa gIs *S mi dl^t da ma Ga
35 di nis tsit na tslt di mi tea nis La mi tea ku nai Gis La
t^'Gl gists^t yuwa nlLGa haeidisina :it^ni
kadidislGa didaGa tcitc'a leitcut sits'itda*
sistcuzdi guwa nln^nnisut La si mi nis tslL «atlGe
1915] Ooddard: Sarsi TexU 273
Arrow with his back through I shot. In quiver nine
arrows all with I shot. They were gone. Not he died.
He was holy. Where he sat gun his hand from I-
eaught hold. With it on his back I threw him. Then
right off on the ground he lay.
THE PEBSONAL EXPEBIENCE8 OP GBASSHOPPEB
The very first buffalo bull young men were teasing
daytime. Then gun with then I ran out. I chased it.
Then when I came near gun with I shot it. Its tail
sticking up with, staring at me with it charged me.
It threw me in the air. My senseless body only fell. The-
buffalo already was dead. Me they carried home. My-
leg its blood for me flowed. They carried me in.
Another time I shoot bull I chased again. When I-
overtook him I shot. Its back right in I shot him down.
Just then this buffalo got up. He ran again. I loaded
when I ran after him. Then he stopped. By him I ran.
He charged me. Just then against me he ran. Horse
with he threw me in the air. Horse he killed. When I fell
I got up. My gun ground in it was sticking. I tried-
to pull it up then finally I pulled it up. Dirt fiUed it
because of that I did not kill it. From me it ran away.
Buffalo were in a herd. In front of them I hid. I-
looked at them. Among them I looked around when
large one, the largest I saw. Then its heart exactly
I shot. Then it lay down. I loaded again. Then by it
I walked. Then I looked then male with then
buffalo female with. Then to me one coming I saw.
To me when he came what I had killed he saw. Then
he said to me, ** Buffalo wonderful you have killed."
Than us older ones about it tell stories. Hermaphrodita
is that way.
Tree under buffalo standing I saw. Tree above it
I went up. Enife I took out. Middle of its back in it
I stabbed. When it fell I cut it open. Its entrails I took
out. Then I ate them. That way on foot we ran
Buffalo we chased. Calf small I caught. My blanket
274 Univer$ity of Calif omia Publicaiiom in Am, Areh, and Ethn. [YoL 11
nasifl^aL tadisisge sigisLaoa nlnanisgini t'loe
kfltslgila tlol «akat8'igila
tcis dtlnat'agtl mit'aoa nadlGiM mits'I
t^Ganlca takasGlz nii^nni GlsGa kfi* Lilla
5 sis t'a «a fl gI gis ts^t
na dis fi^ sa dl zani m^ka kanaGlsi^t «akiyi
yist'^ne miGa mssi minaska gisiiLdi ^iJ
yiGa tciGatcfLt «!wat^Gi «isLl L^ats'i tagudlsxai
dtl na g!s ts'it «a gCL dis ts'tU la Ga <I n^ gas k^ts <I nidza
10 xa n! «I na ts'it mi da* tsl di k'az gH yis < Is li ^
k'anagica ml team xagit^la •IsLi*! tasitsa
Lad! sask'ada •Inn! tsiska «at^G! xanlts'i
GisadI dlt'^ne mits'itda ^Iiilla <a Las! tan
xan!t!<! disd^ ^wat'! mika nag!i4t m!ta
16 na g! d!s flc «a t'l g! gtis t'! Ga dl d^ Ga l! d! ts5 wQ^
•ast'a yis< man^n n!sLatI «!n!st'u namiclstc'a
«at'!G! maGa sis La «I t'^ na giis dj^tc <!sdtlwti
zan! nistsinne naziisG! 4wat'!G! «ak! z!sisGinne
nasis^oL dld^GGa gisdla Ina ttltctl «!gisdla
20 ta din na ts'is gCL sa Ga ts'in na *a «! wa nils tin nl tcu
djtl saGa ts'inna'a minna
dijna <!saL! ^dat'fL ts^ d!sadaL! «!stsisd!ta
misdaka d!dats! L!kaza «!lkaiye nats^ tc!g!lL^L
s!k!«!tca nanistctLz dan! «! Lilla m!n!ts'!
25 dl sis La min n! ts'! tc! yl Ga sis t! sa nn n! «aL t'aL Ga
siLdlJssitd! nstclsd! ylka d! g! y!s tstLk d! y!ka
na tsin n!s La d! gOst^Ga sanaLa s!kad!
da na na gCL dl gis La saGa nisda^I na mid!
glsiststl Sana diLLadI mini si dikad! nicica
80 ml ts'a Ga <a na L^a gl gl caL si ka d! gtis t'l Ga ml ts!
dak'a ^nist'fL maGa ylgust'tlla mlganatcd
tanlcicdja dln^siJ nanisftldi zIsisGl na^Iltsi
dat'lGe L'tlk'a «ld!slssannl «!wa <at'lGe
dan! <lLilla «!d!fi^sa «!d!s!ssSdI m^s «! Lilla
86 lAi sis Gf •! wa fl Gl ml nl gI <a bi na si dll< na s! «aL
1915] Ooddard: 8arH TexU 275
where it lay from there I dragged it. I clubbed it. Then
I cut it open. I put it on my back. My tipi I brought it-
back. Then they carried it in. Then they put it in a pot.
Ducks not flying, their feathers fallen off after them
I went in the water. They swam ashore. Many I killed.
Fire with I roasted than. Then I ate them.
When I was hunting again buffalo female I ran after.
Two arrows in it stuck in. Beside it when running
horse under it put its head. Then horse hips it lifted.
It did not fall. Tearing sound I heard. I looked around
when buffalo fell. Its horn red I saw. Horse I-
got off. Its intestines were sticking out. The horse died.
Once winter time there Berry river there for-
buffalo we went. Eagle his blanket with we went.
Buffalo ran. Then after them we ran. Among them
I looked around. Bight there calf dog yellow like
I saw. To it I ran up. I shot it. I shot it down. Then
by it I ran. I loaded again. Another buffalo fat I-
killed. Then two which I had killed I butchered.
Calf its skin for it whisky skins full tome he gave
and large bottle too to me he gave for it.
Pour persons we were we to shoot toward we started.
Valley its edge we were sitting. One bull to us was-
running. My coat I put on the ground. Gun with
toward its face I ran. Toward it on my belly I lay down.
When it saw me it stopi)ed. When it charged me valley
its bottom when I ran down the bottom when I ran-
down just then it caught up to me. When it hooked at me
I jumped to one side. By me it hooked. Again from it
I ran. To me when it ran facing it I turned around.
From it backward I walked. When it hooked me just-
then its head on it I shot. By it I shot. Its shoulder
I smashed." I saved myself. When I shot again I killed it.
It fell.
Here prairie I went to hunt. And then gun with
I chased them. When I chased them knife with I killed it.
And by it two we were, we butchered it. Our horses on
> I shot to pieces (f).
276 University of Calif omia Publioatiom in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [YoLll
^sL^ka k'a tasioa nata'aiylkats^I ninanila
ts'ika naoiolla kfits'lolla yiwat'iGl miGina*
bid! ts^da <!8l! mi kadi dicica m! tea dl kadi
tcasizoa tsiska gCLts^LLadl mina inlna^ ditci
5 «a La dl na tsl dl nl ha li tsa 4 yi na kfl ol duz
•iwat'iGl sistazdl jriwus «aLadiyi8L'u yiwat*i
gnnlnSn! ma^ats'e Likiza xaoila mi tea di kat di
lidlQl hal!tsa«I dlt^nits'a kfLla mis tciak'a
gCLdlGalgCL xagQyTst'^s mik'a ditci ta s! sQz gwa gCL la
10 gfi L'fL wa yi k'a tas dla kfl gQ da tcin na «a «a gCL la dl
maoazinna tclsi xaoltinnf ^fna yitastiic
mizikakk'a «alinnl xaoltsan gwagQc^c dlt'^ni
maoa nat'a hit'! of ^dldldliij kada gasuLiJ
t'lGe miw^ glt'inm t'ioi «a La gis tofLtc ktLGicQz
15 La dl Lfl kwi y! oa ktL oi la
Lidlcasdi •Ina gQtcfl gtlkacica < sis talk!
nldza kwiyioa maoazinna miskaka nagiLa
•1 da tcl n! cfiL dja t^Gl ktLgbdOz mInaGa kfi
•ast'a ka g! nis sis «az «at'iG! xa na tsl gb La sitsitda
20 min na «a La din nis tcfkz si m^ za 4 lil la min na da
sinniska gdganist'az has tin na mizl Gadinnistsl«
sittsitda xanaglstctLz •at'lGl xadiLga «at*lGl
tazittsa ha tsl giL tl gCL miskaka gOst'^nnl xagbLa
sigana kattbidl Idlssissadl xanlta gbuLLa
25 gtis t'l Ga Is li siL Lil la I na* ktL dl gI t'ats si
siLLilla nats^it si ga na ts^in na ts'innisk'a ktldaGlkai
midlitda xadaGlk'at Iwat^lGe 4 da djl« gCL cl cSk*
na si ts^t dis til la
1915] Goddard: Sarsi Texts 277
we loaded it. To our wives we brought it back. Women
unloaded it. They brought it in. Then we ate it.
I boy I was after him I went. Its tail broad,
beaver creek where it is small its hole. Its hole stick
we closed. This old man hole crawled in. Then
where they were asleep their legs he tied together. Then
ten besides one he took out, its tail broad.
The same old man eagles pulled in. Bank top of hill
circular place he cut out. On it wood close together-
he made it. Grass on it he put. Place to sit in when-
he had made wolf skin he took out. The hole he put-
it on. Its armpit meat sticking out he made. Eagle
to it it flew. Then it pecked it back he drew it, then
its legs he could see then he held them together. He-
pulled it in. Once nine he pulled in.
When I was walking about hole large I came to.
I was listening then inside wolf its children were-
making a noise. I took off my clothes then I crept in.
Its eyes fire like I saw. Then I hurried out. My-
blanket its hole I blocked. My knife with above it
on the ground I cut a hole. While lying down in its back
I stuck my knife. My blanket I took out. Then while-
it walked out there it died its head sticking out. Its-
children six I took out.
My arm when it broke I was hunting. Among buffalo
I was running just then horse with me hole stepped in.
With me he fell. My arm bone in the ground it stuck in.
Its blood flowed out. Then I lost my senses. They car-
ried me home.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 11, No. 4, pp. 279-290 February 10, 1915
SERIAN, TEQUISTLATECAN, AND HOKAN
BY
A. L. KBOEBEB
Daniel Garrison Brinton many years ago afiSrmed a genetic
connection between the Seri^ language of Sonora, the Chontal
or Tequistlatecan^ idiom of Oaxaca, and the Tuman group of
dialects, which Dr. R. B. Dix(m and I recently united with six
other Califomian languages into the new Hokan family.' Assum-
ing the validity of Hokan as a single group, Seri and Chontal
would therefore be members of it if Brinton 's assertion of their
relationship with Tuman is true. As his contentions have not
been generally accepted, the present essay is a re-examination
of the evidence.
Brinton 's union of Tequistlatecan and Tuman has hardly
elicited a reaction. It must be admitted that the twenty-three
Chontal words available to him were not enough for very con-
vincing efFect. The unsatisfactory quality of his word parallels
was also in part due to the poor material accessible to him from
the Tuman group of dialects. The enormous geographical dis-
tance between the two languages was a further obstacle to accept-
ance of his findings. The Tuman idioms do not reach farther
east than longitude 112^ nor farther south than latitude 31^^^
in Sonora or 26^ in the peninsula of Lower California. Tequist-
latecan is spoken on the Pacific Coast in the vicinity of longitude
96^ and latitude 16^, near the isthmus of Tehuantepec. Brin-
ton's remarks have therefore been ignored by nearly all of his
1 The American Baee (1901), 110, 113, 335.
« Ibid,, 112, 148.
s Science, n. 8., xxxvn, 225, 1913; American Anthropologist, n. e., xv,
647-655, 1913.
280 Univeriiiy of CdUfamia Piiblieations in Am. AreK and Ethn. [Vol. 11
colleagues and successors. Thomas and Swanton in their map
of linguistic stocks of Mexico^ retain Chontal as an independent
family under Brinton's provisional name Tequistlatecan.
Seri has provoked one discussion. In a linguistic appendix
to the late W J McGtee's famous monograph on the Seri, Mr.
J. N. B. Hewitt has compared in detail a considerable number of
Seri and Tuman stems, with consistently negative findings as to
original similarity. A careful examination of this report at the
time of its publication, however, left me with a strong belief
that genetic relationship existed. Several American anthropol-
ogists have expressed to me the same conviction. Mr. Hewitt's
conclusion seemed not unnatural in view of his affectionate
friendship with Dr. Mc(}ee, who was strongly attached to the
impression that the Seri were in every respect a thoroughly
unique and isolated people; and also because Mr. Hewitt and
Dr. Brinton were scientific antagonists in other fields. These
early misgivings as to the distinctness of Seri and Yuman were
fortified by the change of point of view which I underwent in
the course of my recent collaboration with Dr. Dixon, which
resulted in the unexpected union of Tuman with so many other
languages. The geographical barrier is also wanting for the
Seri. Their habitat, between parallels 28^ and 30^ and longitude
111^ and the Gulf of California, is almost in contact with the
territory of the Cocopa and directly across the narrow strait
from the Cochimi, both admitted Yuman tribes.
For Tequistlatecan there is available Francisco Belmar's
E studio de El Chonidl (Oaxaca, 1900). For Seri there is, be-
sides the various vocabularies drawn on and cited by Mr. Hewitt,
a compilation by F. Hernandez in his Ouerra del Yaqui, These
two works together provide vocabularies by or from McG^ee,
Pinart, Loustanou, Penafiel, Tenochio, and Bartlett. The sounds
of Seri evidently gave the European ears of these hearers much
trouble. A process of averaging, however, allows a probably fair
reconstruction of the spoken sounds. These have been expressed
in an orthography used in my rendition of the Yuman Mohave
dialect. In essentials this is the alphabet used by professional
American ethnologists. Certain details are explained below.
« Indian Langnagee of Mexico and Central America, Boreau of Ameri-
can Ethnology, BuUetin 44, 1911.
1915] Kroeher: Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hohan 281
Fortunately both Spanish and English spellings were employed
by the six recorders of Seri, and they included native Frenchmen.
The averages strack from their variant forms are therefore nearer
the troth than if all six had been of one nationality. To rep-
resent the Tuman group of languages, Mohave was chosen be-
cause of personal familiarity." I have not heard other Tuman
idioms except Diegueno, and not much of that. The attempt
to combine the rendition by other workers of other Tuman dia-
lects with the author's spelling of Mohave would have been
difficult, and left many doubtful points. For that matter, just
because Mohave is one dialect of many, and apparently a some-
what specialized one, any similarity between it and Ghontal or
Seri that may be accepted as established will only be reinforced
when satisfactory comparisons with the entire Tuman group
are instituted. Senor Belmar's orthography has been somewhat
altered, but not materially, to conform to that used for Seri and
Mohave. The comparative table of words from the three lan-
guages has been enlarged by selections of parallel forms from
the Hokan languages of California other than Tuman : Esselen,
Porno, Tana, Shastan, Chimariko, and Earok.*
In detail the orthography needs little elucidation. Following
American usage, c stands for sounds of the sh-type ; tc there-
fore equals English ch ; x is a surd palatal fricative, l a surd
1; and $ and S are surd and sonant interdental fricatives
derived in Mohave from original s and y. Chontal ng and gh,
and Seri gh, are as written in the original sources. Mohave ly
and ny are simple sounds, palatalized; and kw and xw in
all the languages referred to are probably simple labializations
of palatals. The apostrophe indicates the glottal stop, except
after stopped consonants, of which it denotes the glottalization.
Mohave v is bilabial: the same quality appears to attach to f
and V in the other Califomian Hokan languages, and may be
looked for in Seri and Chontal.
B Present series, x, 45-96, 1911.
• For Esselen, see present series, n, 29-80, 1904; for Porno, 8. A. Bar-
rett, ibid., VI, 1-332, 1908; for Chimariko, B. B. Dixon, ibid,, v, 293-380,
1910. The Shastan material is Dr. Dixon's; it covers Shasta, Aehomawi,
Atsngewi, and minor dialects. Tana and Karok are mainly from manu-
script notes by myself; there is published material on these languages in
the present series, ix, 1-235, 1910 (by Dr. £. Sapir), and a, 273-435, 1911.
282 UniverHty of Caiifomia PfibUcatiom in Am, Arch, and Ethn. [Vol. 11
Even without discuasion, this comparative table may be ad-
mitted to make the case for the relationship of Chontal and Seri
to Hokan at least plausible. It is hoped that the following sound
equivalences, many of which occur repeatedly, will convince even
the skeptical. To save space and detail, the words adduced are
not written out, but referred to by the numbers prefixed to them
in the table. Unless otherwise noted, references are always in
the order: Chontal, Seri, Mohave.
The correspondence m : m : m is found in words number 2,
3, and 6. In 4, 21, 27, Chontal and Mohave retain m, but Seri
has p, V, or nothing. Seri v : Mohave m in 29 probably be-
longs to the same class: a corresponding Chontal stem has not
been found. The formula f : p : m occurs in 9 and again in 23,
and therefore is probably regular ; p : m : m is found only in 14.
Five of these ten Mohave stems containing m have been traced
in other Hokan languages : the corresponding forms all show m.
The same is true of 17, m : m : w, m in Calif omian Hokan, which
throws light on the origin of the rather uncommon and hitherto
uneiplained w of Mohave.^
Chontal f does not always correspond to Mohave m: 33
shows the equivalence f : x : p. This Chontal-Seri correspond-
ence f : X is corroborated by Seri-Mohave f : h in number 15 —
the fricative character is retained, but the point of articulation
changed. Other cases of correspondence between labials and
palatals will be encountered; the dentals and alveolars seem to
shift less frequently. The obvious course of a change from pal-
atal to labial or reverse is through labialized palatals, especially
if the palatal articulation is distinctly posterior. But it is not
certain that the f : x : p of 33 represents original f : x : f < f : f : f ,
for Esselen agrees with Mohave in this stem in showing p.
Unvarying p occurs in 5 and 7. In the former of these, p
or b persists in the Califomian cognates.
Mohave v occurs in seven of the stems available for compar-
ison. In these it shows a variety of correspondences :
7 Present series, xi, 182, 1914.
BngUah
ChoHtat
1
Water
a-ha
2
Earth
a-mats
3
Sky
e-maa
4
L^
imits"
5
Tongue
i-paL
6
Sleep
cmai
7
Hot
e-paL
8
Bain
u-kwi
9
White
(niga)-4
10
Woman
a-kano
11
Old
a-kwe
12
Bait
oghue*
18
Sing
eow*
14
Ash
a-pi
15
Nose
16
Blood
a*wa8
17
Heart
o-m-eaxxt
18
House
a-huL !
19
Stone
a-pik
20
Wood
eke
21
Star
eamna
22
Two
o-ke
23
Three
a-fan
24
Drink
cwa
25
Fire
u-nga
26
Eye
i-piwa
27
Ear
i-emats
28
Hand
29
Child
80
Bone
31
Bog
32
Tobaeeo
a-me
33
Arrow
on-fants
34
Large
kweka
35
Foot
i-tungu*
1 1
•
Foot.
* Leg or foot.
■
' Cloud. Identity
of the sten^
xkwi) TftiiL
I
1
*01d man.
1
J
1915] Kroeber: Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan 288
18
h : k : V
California : w, (m)
22
k : k : V
California : x, h, k
34
k : k : V
California : b, m
19
p : 8 : V
California : b, f, ', -
32
m : p : V
California : w, h, hp
25
ng : m : y
California : m, p, h
35
ng : V
13
w : V
California : m, n, -
The remarkable correspondence k : k : v seems reasonably
established, in spite of the fact that two of the Hokan cognates
have labials and one palatals. The same may be said of Chontal
ng as equated to Seri and Mohave v. This correspondence is
corroborated by the occurrence of both labials and palatals in
the Califomian cognates. See in this connection also 32. In
fact, the entire v group evidences the close relationship of labials
and palatals throughout Hokan. Number 13 is uncertain, the
Chontal w being only the present writer's hypothetical render-
ing of several variants in the original.
Other instances of Chontal w occur in 16, where the formula
is w : V : hw, with consistent x in the Califomian languages, and
in 24 and 26, where none of the other tongues show a correspond-
ence and the Chontal sound may be of parasitic or vocalic origin.
The palatal stop k is found less frequently in other relations
than in that with v. Number 30 has k common to Seri and
Mohave. Number 10 shows the formula k : k : ^. Mohave $ is
from Diegueno^ and general Tuman s ; in this stem other Hokan
words also have dentals. The equivalence is, however, probable
on account of an established s — ^h — ^k shift in Hokan.*
Chontal kw : Mohave kw occurs in 8 and 11 ; in the former
case the equivalent is pk in Seri, tc in several Califomian
languages.
For h : X : h see 1 and 31 ; for k : h : ', 20 ; the Seri-Mohave
correspondence f : h in 15 has already been mentioned. Mohave
h is produced with some stricture;^** the diflference between it
and Seri x (**jj", **chk") is therefore probably not great.
S, with which I have included c, is in many cases persistent
throughout Hokan: see 6, 13, 21, 24, 27. Mohave 0 is shown
8 Present eeries, xi, 179, 1914.
9 Am. Anthropologist, n. s., xv, 651, 1914.
10 Present series, x, 62, 1911; xi, 179, 1914.
284 University of CdHf&mia Piiblioatians in Am. Areh, and Ethn. [Vol. 11
by its Diegaeno equivalent s to be a recent mutation, and the
occasional California variants ts, tc, h, are what might be
anticipated in a large array of diversified dialects.
T is not very common in the stems used. The equation s : t : t,
Calif omian t, d, is found in 16 ; t : t : t in 35 ; gh : t : ^, Die-
gueno s, Califomian k or t, in 12. The variation of the Cali-
fomian languages between palatal and dental in this last word
makes the Chontal-Seri-Mohave equivalence practically certain.
Two of the compared Mohave words, 2 and 31, contain the
alveolar-prepalatal stop t»" which occurs also in Diegueno. In
place of this, Chontal shows ts in one case, Seri once t and
once s. It is not impossible that ts and t may here stand for
a sound similar to t» the rendition of which has puzzled recorders
in several Hokan and non-Hokan languages of California.
For laterals there is a well defined equivalence l : l : ly in 5,
7, 27, 28, varied only once by the apparent substitution of ts in
Chontal. This correspondence is the more pregnant because
Diegueno, and apparently the Yuman dialects in general, agree
with Chontal and Seri in retaining surd l where specialized
Mohave has acquired sonant palatalized ly. The Califomian
Hokan languages in the same stems have 1, or its variants r,
n, or -.
Mohave trilled r in 11, 13, 29 is without Chontal or Seri
equivalent, except that one orthography of Seri 29 shows a final
d, perhaps written for a sonant fricative corresponding to r.
The vowels of the three languages agree even more consist-
ently than their consonants. A is unchanged in 1, 2, 3, 16
(twice), 18, 19, 25, 30, 31, 33. The Califomian languages also
show a in the great majority of their forms for these stems.
The equivalence a : - : a occurs in 1, 2, 5, 6, 31. Mohave and
Diegueno unaccented vowels are often very light, so as to be
easily missed by an observer unfamiliar with the languages ; but
this hardly explains the situation in Seri, as in all of the above
five cases the missing Seri vowel corresponds to the most mark-
edly accented one in the equivalent Mohave word.
Fewer instances appear of .the agreement a : o : a, namely,
numbers 17, 27, 28, 34; but the correspondence is equally posi-
11 Present series, x, 57, 1911.
1915] Kroeber: Serian, Tequiatlateean, and Hokan 285
tdve. Seri o in these cases is clearly a special formation, as the
Galifomian languages regularly show a. In the first three of
the four words the equivalent Mohave a is accented. Ghontal
o and u, so far as comparable at all, correspond to Mohave a,
Seri and the Galifomian languages showing less regular forms:
9, 10, 12, 18, 25.
Ghontal has a where Seri and Mohave show a, e, or i in
3, 7, 10, 14, 24. Galifomian analogues vary between a and i.
This appears to be an instance of assimilation in Ghontal of
originally distinct vowels.
Ghontal e seems reducible to two types : e : e : a in 20, 29,
32, and e:i (t) :i in 7, 12, 22. Galifomian analogues are so
variable that several original vowels may be involved.
Number 4 shows i : e : e, with which I am inclined to unite
the i : a : e of 8, on account of the Galifomian equivalents i and
e. More frequently, however, i is unchanged in the three south-
em languages, as in 4, 5, 26, and, for Seri and Mohave at least,
in 15, 28, 30. In every instance at least some of the Galifomia
dialects also show i, but others do not ; it is worthy of note that
in 5, 15, and 26 apparent metathesis of vowels occurs. In 6 the
formula i : i : i is modified by loss of vowel in Ghontal and in
19 in Seri. The lost Ghontal vowel is unaccented; that of Seri
corresponds, like lost Seri a, to an accented vowel in Mohave.
These correspondences cover fully three-fourths of all com-
parable vowels in the list.
The Ghontal initial vowels separated in the list by a hyphen
are included by Senor Belmar in a series of noun prefixes indi-
cative of number. Thus he writes le-maa, sky, as if le were the
morphological element and maa the noun stem. The equiva-
lences of these ** prefix" vowels with the initial vowels of the
stem in the Seri and Mohave words are, however, so close that
it is clear they are not part of the prefix at all. The division
should be 1-emaa. In the same way, under ''Other Hokan Lan-
guages" I have written Ghimariko i-pen, u-sot, i-sam, i-ta. When
Dr. Dixon studied Ghimariko as an independent^' language, these
initial sounds seemed to be connecting vowels of the possessive
prefixes of body part terms. But it is clear that here also the
It Present series, v, 326, note 12, 1910.
286 Univeriity of CkUifomia PuhUeations in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
division should be h-ipen, his tongue, not hi-pen. At one time
it seemed possible to Dr. Dixon^' and myself^^ that such forms
were all from monosyllabic radicals; but a comparison of Chontal
ipaL^ Seri ipii, Mohave ipalya, Chimariko ipen, Pomo hiba,
Shastan ipli, proves the initial i to be part either of the original
stem or of a prefix which became definitely associated with the
stem before the diverse and long separated Hokan languages
became detached from one another.
Apart from correspondences of specific sounds, one general
phonetic fact is clear about Hokan: fricatives, both surd and
sonant, and in labial as well as in dental and palatal articu-
lation, are exceptionally well developed. The contrast on this
point is marked with Penutian, which is as bare of fricatives
as it is at present the fashion to depict original Indo-European
speech to have been, and with Uto-Azetaken, where stops also
largely outnumber fricatives. Labial fricatives have long been
noted as excessively imcommon in American languages; yet
within the limits of the Hokan group f occurs in Chontal, Seri,
Esselen, Pomo, and Earok, and v in Seri, Mohave, and Earok.
It is not to be argued that this f and v correspond directly
in the several languages or represent survivals of original f
and V. In fact, the reverse is the case. Mohave v equates
with Seri-Chontal k and north Hokan m, w, b; Chontal f is
a development from labial stops or nasals, Seri at least some-
times from palatal fricatives. But the tendency for fricatives
to appear is evidently deep-rooted in the family, and must be
regarded as a significant character. This is confirmed by the
fact that those languages, such as Tana and some of the Pomo
dialects, which are weakest in fricatives, are the ones in which
sonant stops are most pronoimced. The theory of an underlying
impulse toward fricatives would also explain the development
of two such closely related and rare sounds as Mohave 0 and S
from such unrelated ones as s and y. I feel very strongly that
it is impossible to institute even slight comparisons among the
Hokan languages as a group, once this impulse has been per-
ceived, without attaining to an ineradicable conviction of their
original unity.
IS Am. Anthropologist, n. a., xv, 651, 1913.
i« Present series, xi, 183, 1914.
1915] Kroeber: Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan 287
It may be worth while to add a few general Hokan parallels
for Chontal and Seri for which no direct equivalents are known
in Mohave.
Night: Seri, amok; Chimariko, hime, himok-ni; Achomawi Shastan,
mahektca; Esselen tumas; Porno, duwe.
Sun: Seri, sax (moon: isaz, sic); Esselen, asi; Chimariko, asi, day;
Atsogewi Shastan, asiyi, day.
Navel: Chontal, a-tu; Shasta, edau; Achomawi Shastan, a la; Atsu-
gewi Shastan, tsup'-; Chimariko, o-napu; Tana, -lakU.
Person: Chontal, acans; Shasta, ic; Pomo, atca, tcatc; Chimariko,
itei, man; Tana Uhsi, man; Esselen, ezi-.
I trust that this presentation will both establish the original
unity of Tequistlatecan, Serian, and Yuman, and help to allay
the doubts of those who may have remained unconvinced by the
announcement of Dr. Dixon and myself that seven Calif omian
languages heretofore considered distinct could be united into the
one family which we denominated Hokan. No one is better
aware than we of the slendemess of the evidence as yet pre-
sented in support of our assertion ; but our first serious suspic-
ions of relationship are only recent, and each further hesitating
inquiry into the question has thrown open such vistas that the
material has accumulated faster than we could handle it, and
a delay in our promised proof has been inevitable. The present
little treatise may reveal some glimpses of the possibilities be-
fore us.
There was a time when the merging of one of the accepted
North American linguistic stocks into another was a rare and
notable event in American anthropology, and the simultaneous
wiping out of two was not heard of. That time is past. The
Hokan family as here treated comprises what a few years since
were regarded as nine families. That two others, Chumash and
Salinan, might be includable was suggested a year ago by Dr.
Dixon and myself. Since then Mr. J. P. Harrington has afBurmed
the genetic unity of Chumash and Yuman.*' As his studies in
recent years have made him the best informed authority on both
languages, his verdict must at least be taken seriously. If Chu-
mash is Yuman, it is Hokan ; and as Salinan will almost certainly
15 American Anthropologist, n. s., zv, 716, 1913.
288 University of CdUfomia PuhUcaiions in Am. AreK and Ethn. [VoL 11
go where Chumash goes, eleven^* former families are now ranged
under the banner of one. The new Penutian family takes care
of five other former stocks. Two are eliminated by Dr. Sapir's
daring but unquestionably valid recognition of Wiyot and Yurok
as Algonkin. The same investigator is also giving proof, suffi-
ciently critical and detailed to satisfy the most pedantic, of the
relaticmship of Shoshonean, Piman, and Nahuatlan, as first
affirmed by Brinton, and accepted by the late Dr. Chamberlain
and myself. Dr. Swanton has shown Natchezan to be Musk-
hogean. His comparison of Athabascan, Haida, and Tlingit, on
a suggestion of similarity long ago made by Dr. Boas, is incon-
clusive, but in the light of events elsewhere forces the suspicion
that a re-examination may result in a positive establishment of
relationship here also. The same may be said of Dr. Boas' other
demonstration of resemblance of morphological type between
Salishan, Wakashan, and Chemakuan. Still other unions and
inclusions will undoubtedly be made. Hokan now stretches from
southern Mexico to southern Oregon. Inquiry in the complex
linguistic field of the latter state and of the coast to the north
may result in determinations at the very first touch.
We may accordingly be confident that the language map of
North America will be thoroughly recolored in a few years. For
a long period the Powell-Henshaw list of 58 stocks in Canada
and the United States stood almost unaltered. The convenience
of this first exhaustive and entirely definite classification was
so great that it was soon looked upon as fundamental, and the
incentive to tamper with it was lost. The revision of the map
in the Handbook of American Indians in 1907 reduced the 58
stocks only to 56. With the additional families formulated in
1911 by Thomas and Swanton for Mexico and Central America,
the total for the continent was 82. In a few years this has
shrunk to 64, with most of the field still lying under the old ban.
At a chance gathering of anthropologists in Washington a few
months since, predictions were made, informally, it is true, and
in part perhaps not very seriously, but with an undercurrent of
conviction, as to the number of families that would be generally
i^Beally twelve, as Shasta and Achomawi-Atsugewi (Palaihnihan)
were long considered distinct and only recently connected by Dr. Dixon,
ibid., n. s., vii, 213, 1905.
1915] Kroeher: Serian, Tequisilaiecan^ and Hokan 289
recognized in ten years. The estimates ranged from 15 to 30.
Surely anthropologists may b^^ to realize that in these matters
a new order is upon them, merely through the progress of knowl-
edge and without any abandonment of the safely conservative
principles of the past.
It has been suggested to me that while there is probably some
underlying truth in most of the recent mergings of stocks, the
kind of relationship involved may be of a different sort from
what has heretofore been regarded as the relationship binding
together the members of a linguistic family. I wish to express
my absolute opposition to this attitude. If Chontal and Seri
are not related just as thoroughly and just as completely to
Yuman and Pomo and Ghimariko as Omaha is to Dakota or as
Cherokee is to Iroquois or as Arapaho is to Delaware, they are
not related at all, and the present essay has entirely failed of
its purpose. I recognize only one criterion of relationship:
reasonably demonstrable genetic unity. Either two languages
can be seen to have been originally one, or they cannot be seen
to have been one. The evidence may be of such kind and quan-
tity as to leave us in doubt for a time ; but there can be no such
thing as half-relationship. Philosophically, the concept of the
linguistic family may be of little moment or validity, like the
concept of species in biology; but for the organization and prac-
tical control of knowledge both these categories are indispensable.
And they can be of use only if they stand for something definite
and if as categories they are inflexible.
It is to me a particular gratification that the outcome of this
investigation re-establishes the findings of Brinton made by him
on so much slighter evidence. Brinton was dogmatic beyond a
doubt, and his attitudes seem at times inconsistent. But his
work is permeated by a clear grasp and a lucidity of thought
and expression ; and these qualities are given their full value by
a remarkable basic understanding, an instinctive feeling for phe-
nomena of the human mind that has rarely been equaled in the
field of ethnology or linguistics. On the points here discussed
Brinton 's material was nearly worthless; we must bear him the
greater tribute for his power of intuitive sane insight and inter-
pretation.
290 Univeniiy of CdUfomia PubUeaiians in Am. AreK and Bihn. [Ycd. 11
I should have liked to examine Brinton's further prognosis
that the Waikuri language of the southern portion of Lower
California was also Yuman. The available informati^m on this
idiom^ however, all goes back to (me very tenuous source, the
picturesquely abusive and spirited description of Baegert. The
few words contained in this do not look like Yuman or even
Hokan ; but they are too few and too specialized to allow of any
very certain conclusions. Unless new records from Lower Cali-
fornia can be discovered, a final judgment as to the positicm of
Waikuri will not be possible until the comparative analysis of
the Hokan languages has progressed so far that they can be
successfully measured against the fragments of this obscure
tongue. Pending this decision, Waikuri must be regarded as
of unproved afSnities and therefore held tentatively distinct.
Transmitted October tl, 1914.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
VoL 1 1, No. 5, pp. 291-296 February 1, 1916
DICHOTOMOUS SOCIAL ORGANIZATION IN
SOUTH CENTRAL CALIFORNIA
BY
EDWABD WINSLOW GIFFOBD
Since 1913 the writer has been engaged in a study of the
social organization of the Indians of South Central California.
The first product of this study, a report on the exogamous moie-
ties of the Central Sierra Miwok, is now in press. Following
the completion of this work, the writer set out to make a pre-
liminary investigation of other tribes to determine the geographic
limits of the moiety organization. This preliminary survey,,
which is to be followed by careful study of each group, has not
been entirely completed to date. The following brief statements
summarize the data obtained, especially with reference to tribes,
which, like the Miwok, are organized on the basis of dual
divisions.
The survey so far shows that the area in which moieties
exist extends from Amador County in the north to Kings County
in the south. In the southern counties the area extends from
the eastern foothills of the Coast Range on the west to the high
Sierra Nevada on the east, thus embracing both plains and
mountain tribes. In the north moieties have been found only
in the Sierra Nevada.
Aside from the Miwok, the tribes which have been visited
are the Chukchansi, the Oashowu, and the Tachi of Tokuts
stock ; and the North Pork Mono, the Inyo Mono, the Bridgeport
Mono, the Tiibatulabal, and the Eawaiisu of Shoshonean stock.
Of these the Chukchansi live in Madera County north of the
292 University of CdUfomia PubUoaiion$ in Am. Areh. and Ethn. [Vol. 11
San Joaquin River, the Gashown in Fresno County south of the
San Joaquin River, and the Tachi in Kings County north of
Tulare Lake. Of the Shoshoneans, the North Fork Mono live
in Madera County north of the San Joaquin River, adjoining
the Chukchansi, but higher in the mountains and more to the
east. The Inyo Mono inhabit Owens Valley, Inyo County, east
of the Sierra Nevada. The Bridgeport Mono dwell in the vicin-
ity of Bridgeport in Mono County, also east of the Sierra Nevada.
The Tiibatulabal occupy the Kem River region, and the Ea-
waiisu, who speak a dialect of Ute-Chemehuevi, inhabit the
Tehachapi Mountains.
The principal facts concerning social organization among the
tribes, where positive data were obtained, are as follows :
The tribes exhibiting a moiety organization are the Chuk-
chansi, the Oashowu, and the Tachi. The North Fork Mono
have, instead of indivisible moieties, two phratries composed of
two clans each. The other tribes appear to have no moiety
organization.
Personal names among all of the groups, with the exception
of the Bridgeport Mono and possibly the Eawaiisu, are usually
meaningless ; at least the Indians can give no interpretations for
them. Furthermore, names are transmitted, except perhaps
among the Chukchansi, a child usually being named after either
a living or a dead relative of the father. Frequently when an
individual is named after a living relative the name is changed
upon the death of the namesake. Miwok names invariably have
very full meanings and are not transmitted. A majority of the
Bridgeport Mono names also have meanings.
The kinship systems of the three Tokuts tribes (Chukchansi,
Oashowu, and Tachi) resemble closely in application the Miwok
system, which is described in detail in the forthcoming paper
on Miwok moieties. The characteristic features are, first, the
possession of but one term for grandchild, one for grandfather,
and one for grandmother ; second, the grouping of cross-cousins
in two generations, one older and one younger than that of the
speaker. On the other hand, the kinship system of the North
Fork Mono on the western slope of the Sierra Nevada is quite
unlike the Miwok and Yokuts systems. It is almost identical
1916] Gifard: Diehotomoui Social Organigation 293
with that of the Inyo Mono and the Bridgeport Mono, who live
east of the Sierra Nevada. These fifystems are characterized by
a distinct term for each of the f onr grandparents ; furthermore,
the same term is applied by the grandparent to the grandchild.
Cross-cousins are classified as brothers and sisters, hence in the
g^eration of the speaker.
The names of the moieties among the Miwok are kikua, or
water moiety, and tunuka, or land moiety. The three Yokuts
tribes (Chukchansi, Oashowu, and Tachi) examined employ the
names nutuwic (also given as nutuwuts) and toxelyuwic for
their moieties. Like the Miwok moieties, the Yokuts moieties
are exogamous. A child belongs to the moiety of the father.
Among the North Fork Mono also descent is paternal, but there
is no rule of exogamy. A child belongs to the clan and to the
phratry of the father, and may marry within his own clan or
not, as he chooses.
The names of the two phratries of the North Fork Mono are
pakwihu and yayantci. The pakwihu phratry is subdivided into
two clans, tiibahinagatu and puzaots. The yayantci phratry is
composed of the two clans dakats and kunugetci.
The arbitrary division of nature into two categories, **land''
and *' water*', is a feature of the Central Sierra Miwok moiety
complex. The land side of nature is associated with the land
moiety, the water side of nature with the water moiety. The
water moiety (kikua) of the Miwok finds its analogue in the
nutuwic or nutuwuts moiety of the three Yokuts tribes men-
tioned, and the Miwok land moiety (tunuka) finds its analo^e
in the toxelyuwic moiety of the Yokuts tribes. Among the
Yokuts tribes certain animals are associated with each moiety,
but it has not been ascertained that the whole of nature is
divided and associated with the moieties as among the Miwok.
In the Miwok organization the connection between moiety and
animal is through the personal name, each individual being
named after an animate or inanimate object. The eponym, how-
ever, is not transmitted to the descendant as a rule. Among
the Yokuts tribes and the North Fork Mono, where personal
names are meaningless, the connection between animal and
moiety or phratry is naturally not through the personal name.
294 Univenity of CdUfomia Publications in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [Vol. 11
Each individual in these tribes has a ''pet" or ''personal totem,"
which is inherited from the father, and seems to have no con-
nection with the personal name.
Among the Chukchansi the following animals are associated
with the nntnwic moiety: coyote, turkey vulture, falcon, and
quail. With the toxelyuwic moiety are identified the following
animals: bear, eagle, raven, crow, jay, and jackrabbit. The
Gkusihowu classify the following animals as connected with
the nutuwuts moiety: coyote, turkey vulture, and hawk
(speciesf). With the toxelyuwic moiety the following animals
are connected: eagle, wildcat, and fox. Among the Tachi the
largest list of moiety animals was obtained. For the nutuwuts
moiety the animals are coyote, prairie falcon, ground owl, great
homed owl, skunk, seal, and several other species of hawks and
owls. The animals of the toxelyuwic moiety are eagle, crow,
roadrunner, killdeer, fishhawk, raven, antelope, and beaver.
Among the North Fork Mono matters are not so sharply de-
fined. The privilege of changing one's phratry and the custom
of capturing young birds, which are kept as real pets, have
added to the complexity, so that an animal is associated some-
times with a member of one phratry, sometimes with a member
of the other.
The North Fork Mono clans appear to be functionless. Cere-
monial functions seem to be centered in the phratries, just as
similar functions are in the Miwok and Yokuts moieties. Among
the Miwok, the Yokuts, and the North Fork Mono, reciprocity
on the part of the dual divisions in funeral and mourning cere-
monies is the rule, and when games are played one division op-
poses the other. Among the Yokuts tribes an eagle ceremony,
which is a moiety affair, was held. There seems reason to believe
that similar ceremonies were perhaps held for other moiety ani-
mals. The ceremony was in the nature of a purchase or redemp-
tion of a moiety animal from the opposite moiety.
Ceremonial paints distinctive of each moiety were used by
the Yokuts tribes and the Southern Sierra Miwok, but have not
so far been found among the North Fork Mono.
Dual chieftainship, that is, a chief for each moiety or phratry,
was found among the Tachi Yokuts and the North Fork Mono.
1916] Gifard: Diehoiomaus Soeial Organization 295
Doubtless other tribes will prove to have a similar division of
the chieftainship.
An organization, which will perhaps prove to be on a moiety
basis, is reported by Dr. J. Alden Mason among the Salinan
Indians of Monterey County. A bear and a deer ** totem'' are
mentioned.^ Among the Central Sierra Miwok the bear is the
chief animal of the land moiety, the deer of the water moiety.
It seems quite probable that a continuation of Dr. Mason's in-
vestigations among the Salinan will show that the bear and deer
*' totems" really stand for moieties, which may prove to be sim-
ilar to those of the Tachi Yokuts, who were the closest neighbors
of the Salinan on the east.
Mr. J. P. Harrington for some time past has been investi-
gating the Chumash of the Santa Barbara region. The details
of Chumash social organization will perhaps prove to be quite
similar to those of the Yokuts tribes, mentioned in the present
paper, who lived to the northeast of the Chumash region.
The next task is to extend the survey to the Washo and the
Southern Maidu in the north and, if results among these stocks
warrant it, also to the Southern Wintun. The examination of
the Lake Miwok will perhaps prove instructive as to the origin
of the moiety institution among the Sierra Miwok. The rem-
nants of the Plains Miwok and of the Costanoan stock have so
far yielded no positive results as to a clan or moiety organi-
zation. There are still other informants to be examined, how-
ever. In the south the Mono living on the western slope of the
Sierra Nevada south of the San Joaquin River have yet to be
visited, as have also the other Yokuts tribes not already men-
tioned. Information obtained from the Tachi Yokuts indicates
that at least the following Yokuts tribes inhabiting the San
Joaquin Valley probably had an organization akin to that of
the Tachi : Chunut, Nutunutu, Telamni, Wechikhit, and Wowol.
The elucidation of the relations between the type of social
organization found in South Central California and the type of
organization found among the Luiseno, the Mohave, and the
Pima, all tribes possessing clans, is one of the ultimate aims of
iThe Ethnology of the Salinan Indians, Univ. Calif. Publ. Am. Arch.
Ethn., X, 189, 1912.
296 Univeraiijf of California Publications in Am, ArcK and Ethn. [Vol. 11
the survey. Another equally important matter, to be clearly
established, is the interrelations within the South Central Cali-
fornia area itself. Although it is still too early to make a posi-
tive statement, yet it seems that the Miwok organization, judging
from its simpler character, as compared with the Tachi, lies on
the periphery of the moiety area, not only geographically, but
also in point of complexity. A consideration of the North Fork
Mono complex conveys a similar impression. The absence of
exogamy and the presence of a kinship system totally unlike
that of the other groups having a dual organization seem to
warrant the conclusion that the ceremonial features of the Yokuts
and Miwok moieties have been borrowed, while the two social
features, exogamy and kinship i^stem, have not. It is therefore
not unlikely that, in South Central California, the dichotomous
social organization was primarily a valley institution, which
spread to the mountains.
TranamiUed January g9, 1916.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 1 1, No. 6, pp. 297-398 March 8, 1916
THE DELINEATION OF THE DAY-SIGNS IN
THE AZTEC MANUSCRIPTS
BY
T. T. WATEBMAN
CONTENTS
PAOI
Introdnction 298
The Mannscripts 299
The Aztee Calendar System „.. ~ ^ 300
The Time-periods 300
Method of Determining the Time-periods 302
System of Dating 303
The Twenty Day-symbols 304
The Numerals * 308
The Method of Writing Dates 309
The Tondlamatl, or Book of Indexes 310
The Book of Indexes Applied to the Time-periods 311
Corrections of the Calendar 316
Origin of the Calendar System 321
The Reason for Twenty as a Factor 322
The Reason for Thirteen as a Factor _ 323
Derivation of the Calendar Symbols 327
Probable Line of Evolution 327
The Delineation of the Calendar Symbols in the Manuscripts 328
The Twenty Day-signs; their Characteristics and Variations 332
Water-monster (dpactli) 334
Wind (Ehecail) 337
House \Cctll%) »...........— ...^.......^.^.^......^...^...............^.....^..................M 342
Lizard (Ctieiepiilin) 343
Snake (Coatl) _. 346
Death (MiquietU) 347
Deer (Maeatl) 351
X*aDDlw t X Ot/Av4v 1 ••.......•.•.••,....•... ...••.•...........•^^•••••••••. ••••—•••••••••••«•••..••••• OiiO
WftfAT f jHV\ ^'ST
Dog (ItecuintU) 360
Monkey (Ozomatli) 362
298 UniverHty of California PMbUeationg in Am, AreK and Bihn. [VoLll
Ocelot (Oeelotl) 370
Eagle (Qua%ihili) 374
King-Yulture (CoBoaquauhtU) 376
Flint (Teopail) 382
Borrowing of OharacteriBtics 392
Conclusion 393
INTRODUCTION
A very noteworthy achievement of the ancient Aztecs was
their peculiar calendar system. Even the Aztecs themselves seem
to have looked upon this calendar as the central fact of their lives.
It was not only of importance from a practical point of view,
but it filled a very large place in the ceremonial life of the people.
Thus ''calendar" had a meaning for them which the word quite
fails to carry for us. While their calendar system was in a sense
peculiar, its peculiarity lay chiefly in one or two unusual features.
In many ways the system was after all not unlike our own. This
does not, of course, mean that the two systems, theirs and ours,
had any historical connection. The development of the Aztec
calendar was undoubtedly independent of any influence from the
Old World. I am inclined to think that the Aztec system is not
so mysterious, and the history of its development not nearly so
abstruse, as the many commentaries written on it would lead us
to suppose.
It is a well-established fact that the particular system identi-
fled with the Aztecs of Mexico was merely an outgrowth, a sort
of special form, of one fundamental calendar concept which had
a very wide vogue in Middle America. This system is un-
doubtedly more ancient, for example, in Honduras, than it is in
the Mexican plateau. The Aztecs merely developed their own
special nomenclature for the various elements of this calendar,
and evolved certain special symbols. The system in its broad
outlines is very much older than the Aztec civilization proper.
1916] Waterman: DeHneatian of Day-signs in Asftee ManiucripU 299
THE MANUSCRIPTS
Calendar symbols of one sort or another occur on a surprising
variety of monuments, both of early and late periods. The most
important of these monuments for the study of the workings of
the calendar system in detail are certain remarkable picture-
books or manuscripts, made on folded strips of deerskin, or on
paper made of the fibre of the maguey (Agave americana).
These manuscripts are usually spoken of as *' codices." Only
a few of these native manuscripts survived the introduction of
European civilization into America. Those which were pre-
served were taken to Europe as curiosities, and often preserved
through mere luck. The ones still extant have received a great
deal of attention since the early part of the last century. All
but a few of the originals are still in Europe, and are at the
present time considered priceless.
The earliest effort at publishing or reproducing them on a
large scale is a work by Lord Eingsborough, in nine magnificent
volumes, called Mexican Antiquities} The arrangement of the
material in this work betrays almost complete ignorance of the
composition of the original manuscripts; and more than that,
the work of reproduction itself is, in a great many particulars,
inexact. The nine volumes, however, imperfect as they are, have
been the foundation of a great deal of later study. The American
scholar Cyrus Thomas,* has written several papers on Aztec
matters which are based largely on Eingsborough 's work. The
same might be said of at least one well-known monograph written
by the Mexican archaeologist Antonio Penafiel.' Reproductions
very similar to Eingsborough 's in general type, but rather better
in details of execution, have been published from time to time in
Mexico. Thus Penafiel's enormous work (noteworthy at least
in size and weight), called Monumentos del arte mexicano
an%tiO,* contains two Aztec manuscripts, namely, the "Book of
Tributes," and the '*Zapotec Codex," both reproduced in fac-
iFor fnU titles of all works referred to, see bibliography at end of
essay.
s See his '^ Numeral Systems of Mexico and Central America," 1893.
sNombres geogr&ficos, 1885.
« Berlin, 1890, two volumes of plates and one of text.
300 Unwersity of California PubUeatiant in Am. AreK and Bthn. [ VoL 11
simile, including color. A more recent work, edited by Chavero,
Antigiiedades mexicanas,* contains several pictographic texts in
color. Since the year 1883 there have become available, due
principally to the Duke of Lonbat, a number of very beautiful
facsimiles of ancient texts, which reproduce, in every respect,
the original picture manuscripts. A list of the facsimile texts
on which the present study is based will be found in the bibli-
ography below. A few '^ codices'' like the Codex Borbonicus,
edited by Hamy, have not been used in the present study simply
because copies were not locally available. Moreover, those manu-
scripts are most interesting which seem to be purely Aztec, or
which show few traces of Spanish influence. Hence such sources
have been most emphasized in the following pages.
THE AZTEC CALENDAR SYSTEM
THE TIMB-PEBIODS
It seems necessary to begin a discussion of the treatment of
the calendar in the manuscripts by pointing out the most essen-
tial features of the calendar system itself. That will accordingly
be our first concern. A good deal of uncertainty has always
existed concerning some of the details of the ancient Aztec
calendar. Discussion about certain points began only a few
years after the Conquest. Bernardino de Sahagun, for example,
whose Historia general de las cosas de Nueva Espana* is perhaps
the most valuable literary source for the study of conditions
among the Aztecs, was already involved in the year 1539 in an
acrimonious dispute with another monk concerning the ques-
tion of whether or not there were ** corrections" or ** intercala-
tions" in the Aztec system. Other features of the system have
always been surrounded with mystery. Certain facts, on the
other hand, are quite clear and have never been the subject of
dispute. Prominent among them is the fact, which must never
be lost sight of, that the basis of everything calendrical was
the solar year of 365 days, representing (though the Aztecs,
B Mezieo, 1892, one volume of plates and one of text.
• See bibliography.
1916] Waterman: Delineaiian of Day-iigns in Aztec ManusonpU 301
of course, never dreamed of the celestial mechanics involved)
approximately the period of the earth's revolution about the sun.
This is the starting-point and basis for all the other features of
their calendar.
Their calendrical computations seem, to be sure, to reflect
knowledge of other periods, based not on the sun but on the stars.
Seler,^ and Forstemann" have said a great deal about a so-called
' ' Venus year, ' ' a period of 584 days based on the movements of
the second planet of our system. Seler has also discovered what
seem to his own mind traces of a period based on the revolution
of Mercury. It may readily be assumed that the Aztecs had
considerable knowledge of the stars, and the recognition of star-
periods is by no means impossible. It is a very notable fact in this
connection that the ancient peoples of Mexico paid little regard
to the most conspicuous body in the heavens, aside from the sun,
namely the moon. This is especially interesting because the
moon's phases are employed almost the world over, as marking off
convenient periods of time. An important woi^ of the middle
seventeenth century, the Manual de las ministros de las Indias,
by a Jesuit, Jacinto de la Sema,* states that certain month-
periods were actually reckoned by the Aztecs, beginning with
each new moon. These are said to have been used by women,
especially in connection with the period of pregnancy. Periods
based on the moon, however, do not appear in the manuscripts,
and even moon symbols are noticeably infrequent.*®
There was recognized in ancient Mexico, in addition to the
year mentioned above, a period of twenty days, a cempodUi,
employed as a subdivision of the year-period. Such twenty-day
units were regularly employed in speaking of a lapse of time of
less than a year's duration. Eighteen of these centpoiMis, or
twenty-day periods, with a group of five special days added at
the end, made up the regular year of 365 days. The five days
thus added to the eighteen *' twenties" are the often-mentioned
nemontemi referred to in every account of the Aztec calendar.
f 1898.
8 1893.
• Published in 1899. See bibliography.
10 See GyniB Thomas, 1897, p. 954.
302 UniverHtjf of CaUfornia PubUeatumi in Am. AreK and Bthn, [ VoL 11
Many of the statements made concerning these nemontemi by
the older authors lead to confusion. The five days in question
were considered unlucky, and the Aztec refrained, as far as pos-
sible, from all activity during the period. Considered collec-
tively, they had no name, though each of the preceding eighteen
periods had one. It is often said, therefore, that they ''were not
counted." Seler has shown^^ that this means that they were
''of no account," since all activities were, as far as practicable,
suspended until the five-day period was safely over. We know
for a fact that the separate nemontemi days were duly reckoned
in their reg^ulftr places in all calendrical computations. The
concensus of modem opinion is that they are not to be looked
upon as intercalations or corrections. The Aztecs, then, in refer-
ring to the passage of time, employed (1) a period of 365 days,
broken up into (2) subdivisions or cempoMis of twenty days
each, each subdivision having a name. Besides the cempoaUis
there was a nameless five-day period. Such twenty-day periods
are often called months. It is, I think, worthy of some reiteration
that our English word "month" is philologically based on the
word moon, just as, from the practical point of view, the month-
period is approximately one "moon" of 291^ days. Obviously,
therefore, the word month cannot be appropriately applied to
these twenty-day Aztec periods.** Our best resource is to fall
back, in mentioning these subdivision of the Aztec year, on the
native word cempodUi, which means simply a "period of twenty."
They were not of prime importance in calendrical computations.
MBTHOD OP DBTEBMININO THE TIME-PERIODS
A point to be re-emphasized is that the one fundamental
element at the bottom of the Aztec calendar system is the 365-
day solar year.
The question which next arises is: how did the Aztecs come
to note so exactly the periods of revolution of certain of the
heavenly bodies such as the sun, and perhaps of some of the
planets t It seems that they had a simple but rather effective
11 1891.
12 Seler, 1900-1901, p. 5, makes this point.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-Hgna in Asftee ManusoripU 303
method of making observations. Mrs. Niittall in the Boas Anni-
versary Volume refers to a picture showing how celestial move-
ments were registered. A priest, to describe it briefly, sits inside
a temple door and notes, with the aid of a notch on the lintel, the
position of the rising or setting of a planet. The planet rises, of
course, in a slightly different place day after day. By observing
the rising of this planet until it got back to its original point,
he could determine its ** period.'* Probably the approximate
length of the solar year was established in this way — ^by noting
the variation of the point of sunrise, day by day, until the
return of a summer or winter solstice marked the completion
of a given period. The priest could meanwhile keep a tally
of days by notching a stick, or in some other way. Apparatus
for making more exact observations than this certainly never
existed among the ancient Mexican peoples. The general situa-
tion as regards astronomy and their attitude towards it is brought
out in a rather interesting way in an address reported to have
been delivered to Montezuma on the occasion of his assumption
of the office of principal war-chief. This exhortation is chronicled
by Tezozomoc," and is referred to by Seler." The war-chief is
urged ''to rise at midnight and look at the stars; toward morn-
ing he must carefully observe the constellation Xonecuilli, St.
Jacob's Cross; and he must carefully observe the morning star."
Sahagun also, in the seventh book of Historia general gives an
elaborate accoimt of Aztec astronomy. They had therefore
enough knowledge to realize the importance of the heavenly
bodies for recording the passage of time. It seems quite natural
that their time-periods should have a basis in the movements of
certain celestial bodies.
SYSTEM OP DATING
The Aztecs seem to have recognized, then, a number of time-
periods, the most important of which is the solar year. Now
comes the question of how they wrote down dates.
Perhaps the simplest way of understanding the Aztec i^stem
of indicating dates within the year is to recall the salient fea-
is Cr6nica mexieana, chapter 82; see Kingsborongh, 1881, vol. 9.
i« 1898, p. 346.
304 UnwerHty of Calif omia PubUoatumi in Am.AreK and Bthn, [Vol. 11
tures of our own system. We recognize, first of all, our year of
365 days (disregarding for the moment leap-year and other
** corrections"). We divide this year up into twelve unequal
periods. These periods were, in the youth of our calendar, much
more uniform than they are at present. A number of perfectly
trifling considerations have from time to time been allowed to
alter the length of certain months. Within each of our months
the days are numbered in order, beginning with 1. We identify
days, then, by using twelve names, each name in combination with
twenty-eight, twenty-nine, thirty, or thirty-one numerals as the
case may be. Considered from this point of view, our system
offers many points of resemblance to the Aztec. The latter, how-
ever, employed not twelve but twenty names, and used each of
these names in combination with thirteen numerals. They did
not utilize the ''months" or cempoaUis for writing dates. It
is best perhaps at this point to have these day-names used in
dating and their symbols clearly in mind.
The Twenty Day-symbols
The Aztec words which were used as day-names are all names
of actual animals, objects, or phenomena. In writing or record-
ing these words the Aztec made use of pictures. This gives us
a series of twenty ''day-symbols," which are of fundamental
importance in all calendar reckonings. It is very much as though
we ourselves used our present names for the twelve divisions of
the year, but represented them by pictures — perhaps a picture of
Janus for the month of January, of Mars for March, and so on.
The twenty day-names of the Aztecs, in the order in which they
usually appear, are given in the following list. In this list the
English equivalent of the Aztec word is given first, with the
native term following it. The orthography used is that adopted
by the Spanish on their first contact with the Aztecs, since that
orthography has become classical, and is now a fixed tradition
among Americanists. The pronunciation of the Aztec words here
written is practically that of modem Spanish, except that x has
the value of English sh, and z that of English ts. The double-1
has more nearly the value of the symbol as used in English than
in Spanish.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-tigns in Aztee ManuscripU
305
The Aztbo Day-nakss
Water-monster
Cipaotli
Wind
Ehecatl
House
CalU
Lizard
Cuetzpalin
Snake
Coatl
Death
Miqui2ftli
Deer
MoBatl
Babbit
Tochtli
Water
Atl
Dog
Itecuintli
Monkey
Oeomatli
Qrass
MalinaUi
Cane
Acatl
Ocelot ('
'Tiger")
Ocelotl
Eagle
Qvauhtli
King-vulture
Coscaquauhtli
Motion
Olin
Flint
Tecpatl
Bain
Qviahuitl
Mower
XooMtl
The graphic symbols corresponding to these names will be
found in figure 1. The name of the sign is in each case written
under it in English, with the original Aztec word in italics. The
drawings used in this figure are taken from various Aztec manu-
scripts, as follows :
a, NnttaU(Zonche),"p.46
h, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 83
e, NnttaU (Zouche), p. 47
d, NnttaU (Zonche), p. 42
e, NnttaU (Zonche), p. 44
/, NnttaU (Zonche), p. 48
g, Vatican B, p. 66
h, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 57
♦, Fejervary, p. 28
j, NnttaU (Zonche), p. 72
h, NnttaU (Zonchey
I, NnttaU (Zonche)
m, NnttaU (Zonche)
n, NnttaU (Zonche)
o, NnttaU (Zonche)
p, NnttaU (Zonche)
q, NnttaU (Zonche)
r, Vatican B,
a, NnttaU (Zonche)
t, NnttaU (Zonche)
p. 72
p. 48
p. 46
p. 72
p. 1
p. 54
p. 47
p. 50
p. 39
p. 47
The effort has been made in this figure to exhibit a typical
form of each of the signs. The drawing has been selected in each
case, out of the large number available, as being perhaps the
most characteristic form and the one most frequently encountered.
Many of the graphic symbols in this figure are, as regards their
meaning, self-explanatory. The symbols for House, Lizard,
IS For the citations, consult the list of mannscripts in the first part of
the bibliography.
306
Unwersitjf of Calif omia PublicaUans in Am, Arch, and Bthn, [ VoL 11
e
Snake
Coail
m
Oane
Aoatl
f
Death
2£iqu,%MtU
i
Dog
liBewmili
0
Deer
"hiazatX
OtomaXM
Eagle
QwxuhiM
a
h
e
d
Water-monster
Wind
House
Lizard
Ci'gacX}^
EheeaXl
Colli
CiieiBpaUn
I
Qrass
MalinaUi
King-Yultnre
CoteaqcmhtU
q r s
Motion Flint Bain
Olin Tecpatl Quiahuitl
Fig. 1. — The Twenty Day-signs, Typical Forms
Flower
Xoohitl
1916 J Waterman: Delineation of Day-Hgns in Agiec ManiueripU 307
Snake, Deer, Babbit, Water, Dog, Monkey, Ocelot, Eagle, Vul-
ture, and Flower (c, d, e, g, h, i, j, k, n, o, p, and t, in the
figure) are fairly realistic pictures in each case of the thing
itself. The remainder are more or less puzzling. The first drawing
(a) represents a head, probably that of the ** cayman,*' either the
alligator or the crocodile. Both animals are very common along
the southern borders of the Qulf of Mexico. The second symbol
in the figure (6), standing for the idea ''wind'' is a representa-
tion of the wind-god Quetzal-coatl, or ** Feathered Serpent."
In this drawing he is shown, as is often the case, in human form.
The long beak shown in the figure is thought by some students
to be connected in some way with the idea of blowing. The sixth
sign {f)y called ** Death," is very appropriately drawn as a
human skull. The twelfth sign (I), ''Qrass," possesses, as it is
usually drawn, at least one curious feature. Underneath a very
realistic representation of a bunch of grass, with a seed stalk in
the center, there appears a human jawbone. The next symbol
in the list, '"cane" (m), is a representation of the cane shaft
of an arrow or javelin, probably the latter. The appendages
on this ''cane" figure apparently represent the feathering and
ornamentation of the missile. The cane-plant itself seems never
to occur as a day-sign. The idea is always represented by the
cane shaft. The seventeenth sign (g) is very much of a
puzzle. It represents the idea "motion"; but why motion should
be s3nnbolized in this particular way seems impossible to say.
Seler^* does, to be sure, advance the notion that it represents,
in one place, the sun between the sky and the earth (see p. — ,
below). For aU the certain knowledge we have, it must be con-
sidered an arbitrary symbol. The eighteenth symbol (r) stands
for the word "flint." It is quite a realistic picture of a double-
pointed flint knife of the type found in use among nearly all
uncivilized peoples. The design at the middle of the edge of
this knife is the remnant of a picture of a human face.^^ The
nineteenth symbol. Bain, represents the face of the rain-god (see
page 385, below). More specific comment on the forms of these
symbols will be found in another part of this paper.
i« 1900-1901, p. 14.
IT See fig^ure 35, below.
308 UnwenUfofCaUforfMPubUcaUansinAn^AreKandBthn. [YoLll
The Numerals
The second principal factor in the calendar system is a series
of thirteen numerals. There are a number of interesting opinions
as to why the list of numerals should have been limited to thir-
teen. Some of these opinions are noticed and compared in
another section of the present paper. The mere writing of these
numerals is a very simple matter. The value is indicated in
every case by a series of dots. Very little is^rstem is apparent
in the placing of these dots. They seem to be placed around
the day-sign according to the taste of the artist, in the x>osition
which gives the best artistic effect, or where there is convenient
space (fig. 2). Other ways of indicating number than the rather
d 6 f
Fig. 2. — ^The Method of Writing Calendar Numerals
a, The day 12 Death (NnttaU (Zonche), p. 76); h, 18 Bain
(NnttaU (Zonche), p. 46); 0, 6 Monkey (NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 44);
d, 13 Cane (NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 44) ; 0, 6 Snake (NnttaU (Zonohe),
p. 44); f, Motion (PelLafiel, 1890, voL 2, p. 288).
awkward method of writing down dots, were perfectly well
known to the Aztecs.** In the *'Book of Tributes" and other
places where considerable quantities of commodities are to be
enumerated, a number of devices are used. Thus ** twenty" is
represented by a picture of a pantli, or battle-flag. A picture
apparently representing a feather stands for the quantity **two
hundred." There are other symbols for larger quantities. In
18 See Cyms Thomas, 1897, pp. 945-048.
1916] Waterman: DelineatUm of Day-iigns in Aztec Manuseripia 309
the Bologne Codex, ''five** is indicated by a straight line, and
ten by two parallel lines. Such short-cuts were not customarily
applied to the ¥n-iting of dates. We have in the two principal
factors just discussed, then, the raw materials on which the whole
writing-out of the calendar was founded: (1) a set of twenty
symbols or ** day-signs,** used with (2) a set of thirteen numerals,
indicated by dots.
The Method of Writing Dates
At this point there appears one of the curious features of the
Aztec system, to the existence of which reference was made above.
The Aztecs, in writing a series of consecutive dates, changed for
every date in the series both the day-sign and the numeral. More-
over, as soon as they came to the end of either list, they at once
began at the beginning, regardless of how far along they were in
the other list. Certain remarkable results follow from this, as
will be apparent when it is remembered that the list of numerals
was very much shorter than the list of day-signs. Suppose the
Aztec were writing our dates according to his own system. He
would represent January first by a name and a numeral. For
the next day, however, he would have written, not January-tiw,
but February-two. Thus, he uses throughout the s3nnbols and
numerals in double progression. The twelfth day of our year,
according to the Aztec system, would have been written Decern-
ber-twelve, and the thirteenth, January-thirteen. The fourteenth
would, afwuming that our names were to be used in the Aztec
fashion, however be February-one, February would be the
''sign,*' following January, and the given date would take the
numeral "one** because after the thirteenth numeral has been
used, it is necessary to begin again with the first. A good many
different illustrations of the Aztec system have been brought
forward from time to time.^* As a matter of fact, there is nothing
complicated about it, though it would be the last thing probably
to suggest itself if one of us were inventing a calendar system.
Its difficulty is entirely due to the fact that it is utterly different
19 See Tylor, 1863. p, 239. Seler Bupplies eomplete tables of the dates
written out in the order in whieh they ocenr (1891, p. 1).
310 Unwersity of Calif amia FubUoatumt in Am.AreK and Bthn. [ VoL 11
from what we happen to do ourselves. No reason for the Aztec
custom in regard to the numerals has so far been advanced.
The Tonalamatl, or ''Book of Indexes''
Every day in the Aztec calendar, then, had what might be
called an index, consisting of a symbol used in conjunction with
a numeral. The twenty day-signs, every one of which could be
written with one of the thirteen numerals, make up a series of
20 X 13, or two hundred and sixty indexes, all told. This series
of compound terms for dates was known to the Aztecs as the
tonalamatl, literally **Book of Days.'* It has become customary
to use the native term tonalamatl in speaking of the series, since
the Aztec word has no exact equivalent in any of the European
tongues. This ''Book of Indexes" is really the one important
achievement of the Aztec and all related calendar syBtems. All
the other features of the system (and many of them are both
curious and interesting) really follow in a perfectly mechanical
way from the application of these 260 day indexes, which is all
the Aztec had or could supply, to the solar year of 365 days.
The solar year is, in a sense, a ''discovery,'' since it is based
on the actual revolution of the earth about the sun, but the
tonalamatl of 260 signs is apparently an artificial device. One
point demands decided emphasis in this connection. The 260
date symbols mentioned above do not correspond to any period
used in recording the passage of time. The time-periods are
(first) the year, and (second) its subdivisions, the "twenties."
One of the many things that make the literature on the Aztec
calendar hard to follow is the habit which authors have of
recognizing the point just emphasized, that the tonalamatl is
not a time-period, but meanwhile referring to it in a loose and
inconsistent way.*® The tonalamatl represents merely the number
of indexes or labels that the Aztec had at his disposal in writing
dates. It is precisely from this fact — ^that the tonalamatl was not
a period for reckoning time — ^that the most typical features of
the calendar system follow.
so For example, Seler, 1901, p. 16, or Nattall, 1904, p. 494.
1916] Waterman: DeUneaUan of Day-$ign9 in Axiee ManweripU 311
The **Book of Indexes'* Applied to the Time-periods
Let us suppose, for example, that we are at the beginning of
an Aztec year. The dates, according to the Aztec custom, are to
run in one continuous series. The division into months is of no
significance as far as the writing of dates is concerned. The
tofuUamatl of 260 symbols, as a little reflection will show, reaches
only two-thirds of the way through the year. At the end of 260
days we begin to use the tondtamatl over again. There is no
help for this, as there are no additional indexes for dates beyond
the 260th, on which the Aztec could draw. Certain indexes will
occur twice, then, in any given year. The 261st date in each
year, to go no further, will be exactly the same as the first. If
the Aztec wanted to distinguish between the two, he had to adopt
some indirect method.^^ If we began a year, then, with the begin-
ning of the tonalamatl, at the end of that year we would find
ourselves well embarked on our second voyage through the
tonalamatl. The first turn through the tonalamatl would take
us to September 17, and in the remainder of the year we would
use 105 of the 260 indices over again. It is a point for immediate
emphasis that at the end of the year the Aztec did not begin a
new ton<Uamatl, but went right on in the new year with the
remainder of the tonalamatl which he had already partly used.
Eternity for the Aztec consisted of an endless series of dates,
occurring in regular cycles of 260, irrespective of how these
cycles conformed or failed to conform to the actual year-periods.
We see, therefore, that the same principle is applied to the
tonalamatl as a whole, that was applied in the case of the two
factors mentioned above, the twenty symbols and the thirteen
numerals.
It must be remembered that the list of day-symbols, and the
numeral series, are used over and over again in two independent
cycles, ad infinitum. It is obvious, therefore, that in a year of
365 days the list of twenty day-symbols will be used eighteen
times, with the addition of five signs out of the nineteenth
revolution (365 = 20X18, plus 5). If a given year begins
with the first day-symbol, then the next year will begin with
SI See page 314 of the present paper, note 23.
312 UniverHtjf of Calif amia Publieatumi in Am. AreK and Bthn, [Vol. 11
the sixth. The next year after that must begin with the
eleventh, and the year after that with the sixteenth. All this
follows mathematically from our premises. The year after the
one last mentioned (that is, the fifth year reckoning from a
given point) begins with the sixth day-sign succeeding the one
last mentioned, which is again the first of our series of twenty.
It must be remembered that there is no twenty-first in the
series. The sign following the twentieth is of necessity the
first. Hence, no matter how often the tonalamatl is used, the
only symbols which will appear on the initial days of years are
the first, the sixth, the eleventh, and the sixteenth of our list.
This follows as a mathematical result merely of applying a series
of twenty day-signs in rotation to a year of 365 days. The
Aztecs were accustomed to name the year after its initial day.^
There were, therefore, only four of the twenty signs which could,
in the nature of the calendar, stand at the beginning of the year
and serve for year-names. It might be well to follow an estab-
lished custom and call these four the dominical day-signs. As a
matter of fact, the Aztecs named their years after the thirteenth,
the eighteenth, the third, and the eighth symbols of the list as
it is given above. Every year must begin either on the sign
Acatl (cane), Tecpatl (fiint), CaUi (house), or Tochtli (rabbit).
If we assume that the year begins with one of these signs, the
other three follow mechanically. The reason for the shift from
the use of the first, sixth, eleventh, and sixteenth day-signs as
dominicals, to the third, eighth, thirteenth, and eighteenth is not
known. The facts concerning the beginning or initial day-signs
were first rendered absolutely certain, I believe, by Mrs. Nuttall
at a meeting of the International Congress of Americanists at
Huelva, Spain, in 1892. It must simply be admitted that the
first sign in the list, according to the usage of the Aztecs at the
time of the Discovery, never fell on the first day of the year.
Applying to the numerals a procedure similar to the one
we have just applied to the day-signs, it becomes evident that
ss NnttaU, 1903, p. 13. Seler (1893, p. 142) advances the opinion that
they named the year after the first day of the fifth month. Without dis-
eossing this point, it is a fact that in ffeneral the Aztecs caUed the year
after the index of one particular day m that year. It seems altogether
likely that they would select the first day for this purpose.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-tigm in Agttc ManiucripU 313
the whole series of thirteen numerals would be used twenty-
eight times in a year and still have one day unaccounted for
(28 X 13 = 364, only, while there are 365 days in the year).
Remembering the Aztec principle of reverting to the first as soon
as a series is exhausted, it is evident that if the first day of a
solar year had the numeral 1, the last day of that year would
also have the numeral 1. The next year would therefore begin
with the numeral 2. This second year, like the preceding one,
would end on the same numeral as the one it began with; and
hence the third year in the series would begin with the numeral
3. Thus the years in their flight begin with the various numerals
in order — a very curious thing, depending on the fact that (1)
the year has 365 days, and (2) the numeral series is contained in
the year a certain number of times with a remainder of one.
Assuming that the Aztecs, before their calendar i^stem was in-
vented, were familiar with the length of the year, it is almost con-
ceivable that they chose thirteen numerals on account of the very
consideration that every successive year would in that way begin
with a different numeral. Fourteen numerals, however, would
of course have served this particular purpose quite as well as
thirteen. Such a reason for the selection of thirteen is about as
good as any so far offered. To recapitulate : The Aztecs had for
calendrical calculations twenty day-signs, thirteen numerals, and
a certain number of year-signs, the latter consisting of the
indexes which fall on the day on which the year begins. There
are only four day-signs which faU on the beginning days of
years, according to the Aztec system of revolving the calendar;
but each of these four signs combines in regular order with one
of their thirteen numerals. The total number of indexes which
can fall on the initial days of years is therefore four times
thirteen, or fifty-two.
It might be well to take some definite examples of the work-
ing of this system. Let us assume that the first year of a period
begins with the date 1 Cane ; the next must begin with the date
2 Flint ; the next with the date 3 House ; and the next with the
date 4 Babbit; and so on, until every one of the four signs has
occurred with each of the thirteen numerals. It will be remem-
bered that the Aztecs named the year after its initial date (see
314 University of Caiifomia TubUoaiUmt in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [ VoL 11
page 312, above). The Aztecs could with propriety speak of the
day 3 House, in the year beginning with 4 Babbit. Such a com-
bination ''3 House, 4 Rabbit" could not occur again until a whole
series of fifty-two years was passed over.** As a matter of fact,
the Aztec dates were written in precisely this manner, naming
both the day-index and the year in which it occurred. The index
falling on the beginning day of a year is regularly found asso-
ciated with a peculiar ''year" sign, looking like a monogram
composed on an incomplete A and O (fig. 3). It is obvious that
at the end of fifty-two years there are no new ''year" signs to
a h
Pig. 3. — The Year-Bymbol or Tear-sign
a, 7 House (NuttaU (Zonehe), p. 52) ; h, 6 Oane (Xuttall (Zouche), p. 44).
be employed, since all the possible initial day-signs have com-
bined with all thirteen numerals. It becomes necessary after
fifty-two years to begin with the first again. At the end of such
a fifty-two year period the Aztecs celebrated what is called a
"tying of the years." The priests kindled new, clean fire with
the fire-drill, which was distributed broadcast, and a fresh start
in reckoning was taken. Such a fifty-two year period is called
a "cycle" (in the Maya calendar of Central America, a "calendar
round"). There seems to have been no way known to the Aztecs
of distinguishing the dates in a given cycle from those in other
cycles. The Aztecs, then, had no fixed point from which they
reckoned, and every fifty-two years really represented a new
calendar. Their records could hardly be said to cover a longer
period than this. Tradition or legend might go back enormously
further, but a point never to be too much insisted upon is that
ss Bearing always in mind the proviso that there might, in eertain
cases, be two dates "8 House" in the same year. If the Aistee had
wanted to be specific in snch a case, he could do so only by stating how
much time had elapsed since the beginning of the year, or by putting with
the day-index a picture of the special divinity who ruled over that day
and no other (Seler, 1891, p. 18).
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-aigns in Agtec ManuscripU .315
when the Aztec chronicler spoke of what had happened a couple
of centuries before his own time, he was imparting essentially
mythological information, and was not dealing with historical or
chronological facts. In spite of their complex calendar system,
the Aztecs, at the time of the Conquest, were a people without
a history.^* It seems entirely probable that the archaeologist will,
within the course of the next few years, know vastly more about
the history and antecedents of the peoples and tribes known
collectively as the Aztecs, than they ever knew themselves. This
history will be reconstructed from their archaeological remains,
not from their writings.
This calendar system would, therefore, seem in a sense to be
a failure. In justice to the Aztecs, however, it must be remarked
that their calendar was not devised for the purpose of keeping
chronological records. If an Aztec knew in a general way that
a given event happened in the time of his grandfather, he seems
to have considered himself amply informed. Their calendar was
a matter, not of the past, but entirely for the present and the
future. Certain combinations of signs used in dating were held,
for reasons we can no longer fathom, to imply good fortune.
Certain other combinations spelled disaster and woe. The
calendar was very generally employed, in accordance with this
notion, as a means of soothsaying or divination. Every date had
a meaning of its own, irrespective of its relation to other dates.
It was in this aspect of the calendar that the Aztec found himself
most vitally interested. Their attitude is brought out very nicely
by the fact that they gave a man, for his personal name, the index
of the day of his birth.*' This date served him for a name until
he won so much distinction and honor that he deserved a better
one — ^an attitude that in general is quite in line with the customs
of the American Indians in other parts of the New World. The
260 indexes of the tondlamati, then, appear quite commonly in the
Aztec manuscripts as the personal names of heroes. So far as I
know, however, they kept no record of how old any individual
was. The fact that he was bom under certain auspices was
important. Nobody cared about his actual age. The calendrical
S4 Brinton in his varioiiB works insists on this point.
2B Codex Magliabeeehi (Nuttall, 1903), p. 12.
310 Umver$ityof(kaiforn4aP%blieatumi%nAm.AreKandBthn. pToLU
achievements of the Aztecs, then, are not to be measured by their
snccess in writing chronological history. There are certainly not
to be adjudged as having made a failure of something which they
after all rarely dreamed of attempting.
OOBBBCnONS OP THB CALENDAR
We saw above that the Aztec year had a length of 365 days.
The actual length of our solar year is appreciably greater than
that — 365 days, 5 hours, 48 minutes and 46 seconds, to be exact.
The ancient Mexicans, then, made the mistake every year of
beginning the new year more than five hours too soon. Such a
habit as this leads in the long run to some confusion. In the
course of four years the accumulated error makes a difference of
practicaUy a full day. At the end of a century of such continual
and unrectified miscalculation, the New Year's festival, assuming
that one exists, will be celebrated almost a month before the
proper time. Such matters take on an appearance of some im-
portance when we reflect that the Aztecs were, above everything,
an agricultural people. If conditions found to-day among the
agricultural Indians of the United States (for example, in the
Southwest) are any criterion, it seems rather likely that the
ancient Aztecs took a fanatical interest in the maturing of certain
crops. To the sedentary Indian of the United States the center
of everything is his cornfield. That the attitude of the ancient
peoples of middle America was, as a matter of fact, not essentially
different is shown by a passage in the famous ''Franciscan
Chronicle''** referring to the Cakchiquels of Guatemala:
If one looks elosely at these Indians, he wUl find that everything
they do and say has something to do with maize. A little more, and
they would make a god of it. There is so much conjuring and fnssing
about their eomflelds that for them they will forget wives and children,
and any other pleasure, as if the only end and aim in life was to secure
a crop of com.s7
It seems entirely probable that the most important religious
festivals in Mexico, as among the recent agricultural Indians in
s« Gr6nica de la 8. Provincia de Quattemala, etc. See bibliography at
end of this paper.
S7 Op. cit., chapter vn, quoted by Brinton, 1885, p. 14.
1010] Waterman: Delineaiion of Day-aigns in Aztec Mamuoripts 317
eastern and southwestern North America, were connected with
the crops.*® The religions 83n[nbolism of the ancient Aztecs is
aknost as thoroughly pervaded with references to corn-deities
and rain-godSy as are the rituals of the modem Pueblo Indians.
The festivals of a x>^ple so interested in crops must necessarily
have reference to certain fixed seasons of the year. It seems
likely, therefore, with regard to the Aztecs, that very serious
discrepancies arose at a very early period between the time for
the ceremonies, as shown by the progress of the calendar, and
the occasion for these observances, as indicated by the state of
the crops. The calendar system, it must be remembered, in
the form in which we know it, has a history of many centuries
behind it. Its symbols occur on some very ancient monuments.
Time enough had elapsed, therefore, by the period when our
record opens, for such discrepancies to have become acute. The
Aztecs, owing to this *' precession" of their calendar, might well
have found themselves at times celebrating harvest-home festivals
before the crops were so much as put into the ground. Each
generation must have discovered, from its own experience, that
their year of 365 even days was too short. From what we know
of Aztec life, then, we should expect to find some provision in
their calendar for corrections of some sort or other.
No marked success, however, has met the numerous efforts
which have been made to prove that a system of periodic correc-
tions or ' * intercalations ' ' really existed. The present writer, more-
over, cannot but feel that all the theories so far advanced concern-
ing the Aztec system of correction have been founded more or less
frankly on the knowledge which civilized students have of what
the correction ought to have been. Our system of adding a day
every four years produces a calendar very nearly correct. The
error between the time of Julius Caesar and the year 1752
amounted to only eleven days all told. We can say at once, how-
ever, that the probabilities are all against the Aztecs having made
this correction of one day in every four years, or any equivalent
interpolation. Lacking instruments of precision and chrono-
metric appliances, and being also without real written records,
s^See, for example, the Codex MagUabeechi (NnttaU, 1903), pp. 03,
79, etc
318 University of California T%bUcat%on$ in Am, Arch, and Bihn. [ VoL 11
sach an interpolation on their part would have been a most
surprising accident.
All the theories and commentaries written by modem scholars
on the question of Aztec intercalation are based on relatively
few original sources. By an original source is meant, in this
connection, accounts obtained by people who were actually in
contact with the Aztecs before their calendar lore was lost. The
following list represent a few of the most frequently quoted of
these ''original" authorities (page 319, upper half).
On the soil afforded by the sources named, a number of curious
and interesting theories have blossomed. The theories concerning
intercalation are distinguished, first, by their variety, and
secondly, by their ingenuity. No one of them seems to my mind,
under the conditions given, to be plausible. It is only fair to
state that the most ancient accounts exhibit about as much
diversity as the most recent critiques. In the case of Sahagun,
for example, we find the original author virtually contradicting
himself.^ The variety of the modem opinions in the matter of
intercalation is brought out quite clearly by putting them side
by side in the form of a tabulation (page 319, lower half).
So much for the evidence of intercalation on the positive
side. There is certain evidence, however, that seems to indicate
that the Aztecs must have been unacquainted with the whole
principle of calendar correction. Of first importance is the
curious fact mentioned by Seler*^ that when Sahagun talked with
certain ''old men, the most skilful possible," at Tlaltelolco, forty
years after the Conquest, their reckoning of the events of that
Conquest were already ten days in error. It seems impossible
to over-emphasize the importance of such evidence as this. It
is of vastly more significance than any number of statements
from the Indians as to what their custom was or was not. The
hard facts in the case seem to partake of the nature of a
demonstration, either that they had no intercalation, or, if any
such principle was employed, that they applied it only to periods
of over forty years duration. Another bit of negative evidence
M Compare the doubtful Btatements in the seeond book, chapter 19,
with the yigoroQB ones contained in the Appendix to the fourth book.
«i 1891, p. 19.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signa in Asftee Mamucripta
819
320 UmveriityofCaHforn4aPMbUeaHaHiinAm.AreK€mdBthn. [Vol 11
is of an equally uncompromising natore: None of the ancient
manuscripts show any trace of intercalation, thou^^ some of
them involve rather longer periods of time. This latter statement
applies with particular force to the Vatican manuscript 3738
(Vatican Codex A). »*
All the arguments for intercalation seem to involve one funda-
mentally wrong conception. There exists a school of thought
which sets up, in this part of the New World, a strong centralized
government, with a king at its head, whereas there existed in all
probability merely a weak confederation of utterly democratic
Indian pueblos, directed by a war-chief who was elected to super-
vise military operations merely. Some of the ideas expressed con-
cerning the calendar seem to hinge on this misconception. Not
enough attention has been paid in this connection to Bandelier's
papers.'* The works of many European writers on American
institutions still involves thrones and principalities, crowns and
scepters, very much as though Bandelier had never written. The
usual assumption is that, granted the existence of an empire, there
must have been in ancient Mexico some one universal system of
calendar correction, and that it is our duty to find out what this
system was. There is, as a matter of fact, some reason to believe
that there was in the last analysis no fixed, authoritative calendar,
to say nothing of an official system for correcting it. Considerable
evidence is available that the whole Mexican system was in a
formative and somewhat chaotic condition. It may be well to
enumerate some of the points that would suggest this conclusion
Sahagun tells us, for example, that the beginning of the Aztec
year differed greatly in different places. When he himself wished
to find out with what day the year began, he had to call a
conference of ''old men" and ''scholars," and they disputed
over the matter "for many days." Finally, apparently as a
compromise, they decided on February 2.** In other words, the
required date was not a matter of fact; it was a matter of
ss Consult Seler, in the passage just mentioned.
88 <<0n the art of war and mode of warfare of the ancient Mexicans'';
''On the distribution and tenure of lands and the customs with respect
to inheritance among the ancient Mexicans''; "On the social organiza-
tion and mode of government of the ancient Mexicans." 1880.
M 1831, p. 192.
1010] WaUrtnan: Delweatian of Day-Hgm in Agtee ManuscripU 821
opinion, and involved the reconciliation of conflicting reckonings.
In this connection it is furthermore worth noting that even the
names for the day-signs varied apparently from pueblo to pueblo.
A very interesting Ust of day-signs from Mezitlan, quoted by
Seler,*' has a sign ''Earth Ctoddess" in the place usually occupied
by Water-monster. This same list differs from that of Mexico
City in having ''Young Maize Ear" in place of Lizard; "Mill-
ing-stone" in place of Vulture, and "Tooth" instead of Grass.
It seems probable that additional lists from independent locali-
ties, or from a number of different pueblos, would reflect even
greater variety in the names for the separate days. In view of
these facts, it does not seem proven that there was any universal
or regular system of calendar reckoning among the Aztecs. We
must remember, also, that intercalation is hardly more than a
novelty in Europe. Until the time of Julius Caesar, our own
European calendar was a very helter-skelter institution. The
pontifib of republican Bome "squared" the calendar with the
seasons as the emergency arose, and as opportunity seemed to
offer. From what we know of Mexican civilization in general,
with its independent towns and distinct linguistic areas, it seems
highly unlikely that the ancient peoples there had ai^y better
arrangement than the Roman one. The evidence and the proba-
bilities are vastly in favor of the idea that no regular system of
calendar correction existed in ancient Mexico.**
ORIGIN OF THB CALENDAR SYSTEM
It remains to discuss the origin and basis of this series of
calendar symbols. Concerning the actual evolution of the signs,
nothing is known. To discuss the matter with any degree of
profit, access to considerable collections of the more ancient
Mexican monuments would be necessary. Perhaps with a study
of such monuments it would be possible to establish the evolution
of the system in a general way. It is also impossible to say why
the particular twenty objects which appear in the ordinary
«» 190O-1901, p. 7.
M Compare Preuss, in the Oyelopaedia of Beligion and Ethies, artiele
''Oalendar: Meziean," where similar conelnsionB are briefly e^reesed.
322 Univer$iiff of CdHfomia PubUeaiions in Am, ArcK and Bihn. [Vol 11
tonalamatl were chosen. Besemblances of a rather striking sort
exist between the calendars of Mexico and, for example, China.
The analogy embraces not only the arrangement of dates in
cycles, and the method of combining signs with numerals, but
in some cases even identity of the signs employed. For that
matter, there are undoubted points of analogy between the Aztec
signs and certain of the signs of our own zodiac. However,
to put forward the claim, which is occasionally heard, that such
resemblances are proof of contact, or of a migration from
China, is to run counter to the entire trend of the evidence of
Mexican archaeology as a whole. It becomes constantly more
obvious that the civilization of Middle America was really an
autochthonous development, though discussion on the matter is
still heard. It may be taken for granted, therefore, that we
must look for the development of the Middle American calendar
system on the spot. So far as I know, however, no one has tried
to treat the subject historically. The effort so far has been to
account for the development of the calendar, especially its
numerical elements, on a psychological basis.
The Reason for Twenty as a Factor
The one solitary point on which students of the Aztec calendar
agree concerns the reason for the selection of twenty day-signs.
This factor twenty is assumed to have its foundation in the
Aztec numeral system. The Aztecs, that is to say, like many
nations of ancient and modem times, had a system of numbers
based on twenty instead of on ten. A very interesting discussion
of this system may be found in Cyrus Thomas' paper ** Numeral
systems of Mexico and Central America."*^ It stands quite to
reason that their numeral system must have developed much
earlier than their peculiar calendar. No further explanation is
needed, therefore, in the opinion of many scholars, for the fact
that they chose twenty day-signs. It seems, on first glance, to
be just what would have been expected from a knowledge of
their arithmetic.
«T 1897-1898, h.
ISlfl] Wateman: BeUntationofDay-tigntinAtteoUanittieri^U 323
The Reason for Thirteen as a Factor
When we consider the fact, however, that the twenty day-
signs were combined with thirteen numerals we are confronted
by a genuine puzzle. Opinions about the reason for the exist-
ence of a series of thirteen numerals are almost as numerous as
the authors who have discussed the subject. If, as a matter of
fact, the existence of a vigesimal numeral system led to a selec-
tion of twenty symbols, we should certainly expect it to lead to
the selection of twenty calendar numerals. Why do we find only
thirteen t The artificial character of most of the hypotheses con-
cerning this point is made evident by merely putting them side
by side.
Vabioub SuoazsTtoNs to Acoount roB the Elekznt Thirteen
IN THE Calendak
1. The factor thirtean appears because the most important parte of the
hoij are tbirteen in number: namely, the ten fingers, one ear,
one eya, and the month. (FSretamaiui.)*i
2. Thirteen repreeents the period of the moon's waxing, or waning.!*
3. Thirteen was ehoson b«cauae the ancient Mexicans had a eoQceptlon
of thirteen heaTens. (Fdratemann.)*o
4. The title-page of the Tro-Corteeian eodez haa a lepreeentation of
the four eardinal points, eoonting in both direetiona, foUowed
by the symbols for the aeuith and nadir, and another one nn-
fortunatelf obliterated. Above these are written the numhera
one to thirteen. Does this aocoout for the thirteen of the
calendatf (Cym* Thomaa.}«i
5. The Aztecs established a year of 364 days, because they needed for
the year a qoantity diTisible by 4. The quantity (364) factors
into 4 X 91, also into 28 X 13. Henee 13. (Forstemann).«a
4. Thirteen is derived from the fact that 8 solar years are equivalent
to 6 "Venos" years. The Aztecs, in devising their calendar,
chose a unit consisting of a combination of 8 and 5. Henee 13.
{8eler.)M
»• 1893, p. 4B4.
•• This suKgeetion is mentioned by Freuss in his article on the Calendar
to which reference was made above (footnote 37), and by Bowdlteh
<1912, p. 266).
*o 1693, p. 404.
«i 1807-1698 b, p. 954.
u 1893, p. 494.
«* 1900-1901, p. 17 (following Tronooso).
324 Univer9ityofCaHfarniaP%blieai%ansinAm.AreKandBihii. [YoLll
These suggestions, while more or less ingenious, are rather
obviously artificial. The points involved in the first suggestion,
for example, would, if logically carried out, have resulted not in
the selection of thirteen numerals, but of some other number.
If, in making up a list of the most important parts of the body,
they were to count all ten fingers, half at least of which are
exactly like the other half, and which are not individually organs
of supreme importance, they would certainly have counted both
eyes. As regards the second suggestion, considerations of fact
thrust themselves forward. The actual period of the moon's
waxing is not thirteen days. Besides, if the moon had had any
effect on the evolution of the Aztec calendar, we would certainly
look for some traces of a lunar month. Nothing is simpler than
to count from one full moon to the next. The Aztecs would
hardly have made half of the moon's period an element in their
calendar and ignored the full period. The next two suggestions
in the list involve what is probably a logical inversion. It seems
likely that if the Aztecs conceived of thirteen heavens, or thirteen
gods of the day, it was because, for calendric or other reasons, the
number thirteen was already uppermost in their consciousness.
The number thirteen seems, as a matter of fact, to be rather im-
portant in their institutions. Thus there were thirteen divisions
in the Mayan armies; there are thirteen serpents in the Tzental
mythology ; and to the Cakchiquel the thirteenth day was sacred.**
It is, however, as plausible to consider these ideas a derivative
from the calendar as to turn the proposition the other way about.
The most abstruse theory is that of Forstemann (number 5
in the list just given). He assumes that the Middle American
peoples began by having a year of 360 days. Finding it too
short, they increased its length not to 365 days, but to 364,
because for personal (and it must be added, quite mysterious)
reasons they wished the number of days in the year to be divisible
by four. But a year of 364 days naturally divides itself into
subdivisions of twenty-eight days, and there are thirteen of these
subdivisions. Hence the thirteen of the calendar. Aside from
its highly elaborate character, this theory does not account for
M Cyrus Thomas, 1807-1898 b, p. 953.
1010] Waterman: DeUneatian of Daff-tigns in Agteo ManuicripU 325
the fact that the Aztecs selected the thirteen rather than the
twenty-eight, or for that matter, rather than ninetj-one, which is
as much a factor of 364 as are the other two quantities.
If Forstemann 's theory is the most abstruse, the one advanced
by Seler enjoys the distinction of being the most complicated.
His hypothesis involves his favorite idea that the Mexicans laid
stress on a ^^Yenus" year of 584 days. He is struck with the
fact, which is in a sense a curious one, that five of these Venus
years make up a period exactly equivalent to eight solar years.
He then makes the assumption that the Aztecs chose, as the basis
of their calendar, a period consisting of these two periods taken
together, or 949 days. The greatest common divisor of 365 and
584 is 73 ; the solar year is five times, the Venus year eight times,
and the ''basic" period thirteen times tMs factor. Hence the
element thirteen. If Seler 's theory is true, it must be borne in
mind that while these computations were being carried out in the
mind of the ancient inventor of the calendar, the days were still
nameless. They derive their names by the combination of certain
signs with these very thirteen numerals whose origin we are
discussing. Seler assumes therefore that the Aztec dealt with
such large numbers of days as 949, and traded such groups of
days about in their minds, before they had names for any of
them. In other words, he assumes that the Aztecs became skilled
mathematicians, noted carefully the length of solar and planetary
periods, and only after that sat down to invent names for
their day& There is no evidence in the whole of human history
that institutions develop in this way. The probabilities of such
a development having occurred with the calendar of the Aztecs
are, it seems to me, too remote to make the theory worth
elaborating.^'
Some scholars try to explain, not the occurrence of thir-
teen as an element in the calendar, but the occurrence of the
tondtamatl of 260 units. If for the first step the Aztecs recognized
260 as a fundamental quantity, and for the second step selected
twenty day-signs because the vigesimal character of their
numerals suggested such a course, they would derive the third
<• It is only fair to remark that Seler, judging from his phraseology,
seems to feel somewhat the same way about it himself.
326 Univenity of Calif omia PublieatuniB in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [Vol 11
element by dividing 260 by 20, thus getting 13. Several ex-
planations, as a matter of fact, have been advanced which account
for the element 260 directly. Someone has suggested that nine
was a sacred number, and that 260 represents the total number
of days in nine lunations. This hypothesis has been mentioned
favorably by Mrs. Nuttall.** Aside from other objections, nine
lunar months give, as a matter of fact, not 260 but approxi-
mately 265^^ days. Another hypothesis, which dates from very
early times (possibly from Motolinia)^^ is based on the idea
that 260 days represented the period of visibility of Venus. This
hypothesis might at least be discussed if Venus really were
visible for 260 days. Unfortunately, nothing of the sort is
the case. As remarked by Beuchat,^* the 260-day period does
not correspond to the duration of any known astronomical
phenomenon. Still another hypothesis derives the importance
of 260 days, and the use of that period in the calendar, from
the fact that pregnancy occupies that time. This last suggestion
would perhaps be the most plausible of the lot if pregnancy lasted
for that period. It has been advanced by Mrs. Nuttall,** before
her by Porstemann,'* and before him by Torquemada. Aside
from its relative simplicity, it seems to have little in its favor.
GkxKlman, whose monograph was probably the most important
single contribution to the subject,*^ holds the opinion that the
260 is not necessarily based on the combination of twenty and
thirteen, but that it became established because it was a unit
that divided up very conveniently in a number of ways.
Everything considered, I am inclined to advance the convic-
tion that the factors thirteen and twenty are the original ele-
ments in the tonalafnatl. It would seem most plausible, other
things being equal, to suppose that these two simple factors
evolved in some way, and that the tonalamatl is the product of
them. Very likely there was a simple and practical reason which
led to the selection of these two factors in the first place. It may
4« 1904, p. 495.
47 See Seler, 1900-1901, p. 16; NuttaU, 1904, p. 495.
«8 1912, p. 334.
*• 1904, p. 495.
BO 1895, p. 532.
81 1897, p. 29.
1910] Waterman: Delineation of Day-ngna in Agteo Mawuaoripia 327
safely be said, however, that this reason is not obvious at the
present time.
Derivation of the Calendar Symbols
Reference has been already made to the fact that the calendars
of all the more highly civilized peoples of Middle America have
many points in common, and are constructed along practically
the same lines. It is obvious at once, therefore, that there is
opportunity offered for the most interesting comparative study.
Such investigations have been carried out with gratifying results
by Professor Seler. Two of his works are of especial interest
from this point of view, namely, his *' Mexican chronology with
especial reference to the Zapotec calendar,""^ and his monograph
on ''The tonalamatl of the Aubin collection."^* Discussion as
to the probable place of origin of the calendar, and the deriva-
tion of its signs, is therefore unnecessary here. Of the two papers
mentioned, the latter in particular contains a systematic presen-
tation of the afSliations of the whole series of symbols, in order."^
The matter may be dismissed in the present connection with the
remark merely that Professor Seler 's evidence in these two
papers is almost entirely of a linguistic character. Archaeological
evidence has never been applied to this question.
Probable Line of Evolution
There are really two types of explanation possible for the
existence of this complex calendar — gradual evolution or sudden
creation. Of the two hypotheses I vastly prefer the first, on
general principles. Discussion will be out of place, however,
until we have some actual data to discuss. Some of the most
distinguished Americanists, on the other hand, seem to regard
the calendar as a sudden invention. Seler, as quoted above,
views the calendar in its entirety as the product of some one
author or set of authors, working consciously toward the elabor-
ation of a system. Mrs Nuttall^" also voices the belief that the
52 1891.
5» 1900-1901.
•* Op. cit,, pp. 9-16.
»8 1904, p. 494.
328 Unwer$ityofCaUforniaPyhlieatiaiuinAm.AreKandBiJm. [VoLU
system had an inventor (not to describe him more definitely)
who actually had in view, and provided for, an epoch of 1040
years. He is supposed to have made provision in his calculations
for 260 Venus periods, rectified by 260 separate five-day cor-
rections, and to have provided for twenty intercalations. She
seems to regard the twenty day-symbols, the tonalamatl, the whole
complex institution, as the product of one tremendous cerebra-
tion. Though I profess myself unable to discuss the evolution
of the system in definite terms, I wish to register my profound
unbelief that it took any such line as this. The chances are, it
seems to me, that the calendar has an actual history — a history
of gradual accretion, change, and elaboration. I am inclined to
think that this Aztec calendar system frequently suffers from
being considered apart from its setting. It is important to
remember that it was the work of Indian tribes who had hardly
passed beyond the threshold of civilization. While elaborate,
it is, like many primitive achievements, rather awkward and
inefficient even in its perfected form. The operation of the Mex-
ican calendar system recalls the faults of their method of picture-
writing. Both institutions impress one with a sense of their
futile ingenuity. Any writer who treats of the Aztec calendar
ought, I think, to preserve in his mind a very lively picture of
the Indian pueblos in which it developed. It is certainly absurd
to put the Mexican calendar on a plane of equality with the
calendar systems of those nations of the Old World who had
written records, and at least the beginnings of science. Further
than to insist that the calendar probably has a history, it seems
impossible to go.
THE DELINEATION OP THE CALENDAR SYMBOLS
IN THE MANUSCRIPTS
We have seen that the various calendar symbols represent,
at bottom, actual objects or phenomena. A possible exception
occurs in the case of the ''Motion" or Olin symbol, in which the
graphic element seems to be obscured, if it ever had one. A
good many tendencies operate in the case of most Aztec calen-
drical signs to change their original character. The simplest
1916] Waterman: Delineatum of Day-Hgna in Aeteo ManusoripU
329
of these tendencies is perhaps the mere desire for ornamentation
or decoration. The native artist at times seems to regard the
calendar signs as an admirable field for the expression of artistic
taste. This is illustrated very well by the treatment of the
serpent's head, used as the day-sign Snake or Coatl. Figure 4
represents the various manners in which this design is elaborated.
In the drawings shown in the figure the general outline has not
been seriously modified. The various artists do, however, show
considerable discrimination in the choice of different styles of
ornament which they apply.
^
e
Fig. 4 — ^Different Styles of Ornamentation applied to the
Serpent Head
a, Vatican B, p. 4; h, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 4; e, Nuttall (Zouehe),
p. 61; d, Vatican B, p. 4; e, Vatican B, p. 5; f, Vatican B, p. 81.»«
The same point is brought out very clearly in the case of the
different representations of Water-monster {Cipacili). This is
illustrated in figure 5. The head in every case is reptilian in
contour, possesses a prominent eye-plate, and is characterized by
the presence of a row of enormous triangular teeth. The surface
of the head is elaborated into spots, vertical lines, bars and dots
in a variety of arrangements.
The first point in the study of the day-signs, as they are
delineated in the manuscripts, is therefore that there is evident
considerable play of the artistic impulse. As a result, many
fanciful modifications of the original idea are in each case to be
looked for.
Another point deserving emphasis is this: that the native
artists, in delineating day-signs, were dealing with subjects per-
B< See note 15, p. 305.
330 UfUver9iiyofCMforniaPiihUeati<nuimAiiLAreKandEihn^ [Vol.11
fectly familiar to themselves and their audience. They were at
liberty therefore to reduce their pictures to the most naked
symbols without danger of being misunderstood. Moreover, the
signs in many manuscripts occur in a regularly established
sequence, and in many cases the identity of a symbol may be
Fig. 5. — Ornamental Elaboration in the Decoration of the
Water-monater Head
a, Vatican B, p. 4; h, Vatican B, p. 7; o, Vatican B, p. 67; d, Vatican B,
p. 71; e, Vatican B, p. 1; f, Vatican B, p. 2.
determined as readily by its place in the series as by its appear-
ance. In many cases, accordingly, we encounter symbolism run
rampant. The symbols occur, in fact, in all stages of denudation.
It would be easily possible, on the basis of the material in the
manuscripts, to ''trace the development" of the more simple and
mnventionalized desig^is from the more complicated and realistic
ones, by the old device of putting the realistic at one end of a
series and the conventional at the other. It is, however, worthy
of note in this connection that we often encounter a highly com-
plex form of a sign and a highly simplified one, side by side, on
the same page (see fig. 6). In other words, the native artist
apparently had complete forms of these day-signs always in his
mind. Sometimes in writing do¥Fn a given sign he would choose
one or two features only, and in other cases would put them all
down, with elaborate ornament in addition, if the space permitted
and the humor struck him. One thing is perfectly evident from
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signs in Aetec Manworipts
331
a study of the available manuscripts: that in the execution of the
day-signs, a considerable part is played by caprice.
These conditions permit almost unlimited convergence in the
various designs, making it practically impossible in some cases
Fig. 6. — ^Two Forms of the Day-sign Bain (Quiahuitl),
representing the Baln-god, Tlaloc
a, Human face with a goggle eye and long teeth; h, the same
simpUfied. (Both from Nuttall (Zouche), p. 9.)
to identify a symbol when taken from its context. This is illus-
trated in figure 7. There is general similarity between the first
two drawings (a and b), yet they represent quite independent
day-signs, Flower and Cane. An even more extreme case is
shown in c and d of this figure, c represents a human jawbone
surmounted by an eye, and the whole accompanied by a tuft of
grass. The whole composite figure represents the day-sign Grass.
Fig. 7. — ^Drawings Similar to Each Other but Standing for
Distinct Ideas
a, Flower (Xochitl), Vatican B, p. 7; b, Oane (Aoatl), Vati-
can B, p. 11; e, Grass {Mdlin<Uli), Vatican B, p. 18; d, Water
(Atl), Vatican B, p. 82.
332 Universiiy of Calif amia PubUeatiom im Am. Arch, and Bihn, [ YoL 11
d is a conventionalized representation of a vessel of water with
a shell in it (see figs. 20 and 25) and stands for the day-sign
Water. Yet the two symbols c and d certainly look as though
they were intended to represent the same idea. This variability
and convergence may be best discussed in connection with indi-
vidual studies of each of the day-signs, and the various forms
assumed by them. The tendencies just pointed out will be found
to operate in the case of each of the day-sig^is taken up in the
remainder of the paper.
THE TWENTT DAT-SIGNS: THBIB CHABACTEBISTICS AND VABIATI0N8
The effort has been in the following pages to collect the most
divergent examples possible of the twenty day-symbols and to
put them side by side for comparison. A good many Mexican
manuscripts have been omitted from the returns submitted in
this paper because they contained drawings of Europeans and
European objects, and were therefore obviously late. Prominent
among the manuscripts of this class which have not been con-
sidered are the Vatican Codex A (3738), and the manuscripts
mentioned above, published in facsimile by the Junta Colombina
in Mexico City"' (the Codex Porfirio Diaz, the Codex Baranda,
the Codex Dehesa, etc.). A good deal of material has thus been
passed over as too inexact for the present purpose. Conspicuous
in this category are the reproductions in Lord Eingsborough's
enormous Mexican Antiquities already mentioned. Here the
day-signs are so imperfectly drawn that any discussion of their
forms would be wasted effort. The drawings in the Aubin
manuscript, some of them reproduced below, are much worse
than any of those in Eingsborough. The peculiarities of the
day-signs in it are obviously the mere effect of ignorance and bad
draughtsmanship. The Loubat edition of this manuscript con-
stitutes a perfect copy of a defective specimen. The variant
forms it contains have therefore a certain interest.
Wherever possible, the day-signs illustrated below have been
compared with realistic drawings of corresponding objects.
Study of these graphic drawings throws considerable light on
B7 See Ghavero, Antiguedades mexieanae, 1892.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signs in Aztec Manuscripts
333
features of the day-«igns which might otherwise be obscure. It
is only fair to assume that the day-sign, where it is not realistic,
is a simplified and conventional version of the graphic represen-
tation. It wiU in some cases be seen that the drawings which
appear as day-signs are curious, not purely because they are day-
signs, but because the Aztec artist had limitations even where
he tried to be realistic. The realistic drawings which appear
below are selected in every case from the list of original manu-
scripts which supplied the day-signs illustrated.
e
f
0
m
n
Pig. 8.— <i-o. The Day-sign Water-monster (CipactU) ;
334 Unwersiiy of California PubUeaiiont in Am. AroK and Bthn, [YoLll
Water-monster (CipactU)
8owree$ of drawings (fig. 8):
a, Nattall (Zonche), p. 76 i, NattaU (Zonehe), p. 47
h, Vatican B,
p. 47
i, Yatiean B,
p. 80
e, Nuttall (Zoucne),
p. 35
Ic, Yatiean B,
p. 60
d, Yatiean B,
p. 87
2, Yatiean B,
p. 59
e, Yatiean B,
p. 73
Illy Aubin,
p. 13
f, Bologne,
p. 3
n, Yatiean B,
p. 58
g, NuttaU (Zonehe),
p. 4
0, Yatiean B,
p. 5
h, Fejervary,
p. 28
Pf Nuttall (Zouehe),
p. 75
The drawings in figure 8 represent various forms of the day-
sign Water-monster {CipactU). The final drawing in the series
(p) gives what must be regarded as an attempt at representing
this animal realistically. This latter drawing (p) was selected
from a page of the Codex Nuttall (Zouche manuscript) which
represents a group of warriors moving in canoes to the assault
of an island t0¥Fn. In the scene as given in the manuscript
there is drawn a lake, containing in its depths, in addition to
the present figure, a fish, several shells, and a snail (Codex
Nuttall (Zouche manuscript), p. 75). The resemblance between
the different forms of the first day-sign and this realistic draw-
ing of a monster in the water, lend ample color to the name
Water-monster applied to the day-symbol. The word CipactU^
the Aztec name of the day-sign, seems to mean first of all
''prickly."^* It is applied in the old vocabularies to an animal
described as a ''big fish like a cayman" (alligator). The
corresponding day-sign of the Zapotecs of southern Mexico has
a name defined as ''great lizard of the water." It seems
rather likely, all things considered, that the realistic drawing
shown below (p, fig. 8) and the day-signs which so closely
resemble it, are all intended to represent some of the American
crocodilia. A glance at figure 8, p, however, will show that it
is possible for even the realistic drawings of the animal to
represent him as lacking a lower jaw. This absence of the lower
jaw is quite a constant feature of this day-sign wherever it
occurs. Other prominent features of the day-sign are a large
eye-plate, which occurs quite uniformly, and large sharp teeth.
In the realistic picture the creature is represented with spines
B« Seler, 1900-1901, p. 9.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signs in Aetee MoMUcripts 335
along his back, and on top of his snout. The spines along the
backbone are a counterpart of those which occur on the actual
animal. Those along the nose and head, however, are artificial
additions. A study of figures c, f, and p of figure 6 makes it seem
rather likely that these latter * * spines * ' are in their origin merely
additional teeth which have wandered up from the lower part
or mouth part proper. On the other hand, they may be additions
suggested to the Mexicans by their familiarity with homed
lizards or ''homed toads," which, barring size, are animals
somewhat like the alligator but possessing homy or spiny heads.
The teeth sho¥Fn in the different forms of this day-sign are
worthy of remark in a general way. Figure 8, d, comes nearest
to representing realistically true crocodilian dentition. The
triangular teeth shown in &^ a more usual type in the manuscripts
•
than the others, seem to be merely conventionalized forms. The
Water-monster signs have in their outlines at least a family
resemblance to the sign Snake, or Coatl (see fig. 13). This
resemblance has apparently affected the dentition given to the
Water-monster, who is often provided not only with teeth, but
with serpent fangs. The distinction between the two types of
teeth is clearly made in the drawings lettered a, e, f, figure 8,
and is perhaps suggested in p. In nt we see not only a snake-
like fang, but the forked tongue of the serpent as well. These
points, suggested by or accompanied by an approximation in
general form to the serpent type, seem to be purely a case of
borrowing.
In a few of the drawings a nose-plug is exhibited (g and m).
This is a purely human article of adornment, and one that is
seen in many warrior and priestly figures in the manuscripts.
In figure 8, I, the combination of a spine and an eye-plate looks
almost like a sort of cap. The tail in figure 8, p, terminates in
a fiint knife, or a figure very much like the fiint knives illustrated
in figure 35.
In connection with the symbol Water-monster, Seler makes
a remark which is in my opinion a sample of what ought to be
avoided. He observes that the spikes on the top of the Water-
monster 's head are intended to represent stone knives. He
** proves" that this is their original meaning by referring to a
336 UfUver$ity of CdUfomia PubUeatians in Am, Arch, and Bthn. [Vol. 11
page in the Codex Borbonicas, in which the spikes have the form
of stone knives. There is a logical weakness here. In some mann-
scripts we find the Eagle's feathers also taking the form of flint
knives (fig. 32, g). That does not prove that the feathers were
originally drawn as fiint knives. There is in general so much
arbitrary simplification and elaboration in the representation of
all the signs, that to light on any one variant and call it the
original form is a waste of time. The only means we have of
judging what the original form may have been is to find a rep-
resentation of a given object which is evidently intended to be
g^phic. When, for example, the artist in the case of the
Cipactli sign, which we are discussing, draws a monster in the
midst of a lake surrounded with realistic representations of fish,
snails, and bivalve shells, as in the case with the original of
figure 8, p, it is only a fair guess that he intends his drawing to
be realistic ; and such a drawing probably represents his idea of
what the animal really looks like. It is at least plausible to refer
to the features of such drawings as the original ones. Even this
is not really conclusive. The characteristics of the g^phic
representation may be affected by features borrowed from the
familiar day-symbols. It would certainly be more plausible in
the case of Seler's fiint knives to make an assumption directly
the contrary of Seler's, and say that his fiint knives of the Codex
Borbonicus are elaborated and re-interpreted teeth or spikes. It
is hard to believe that the day-sign Water-monster could have
begun its career in a form so peculiar as that of an animal set
about with stone knives.
Seler's papers show another tendency which deserves com-
ment. He often refers categorically to certain traits as char-
acteristic of a given day-symbol. If one deliberately coUects as
many variant forms as possible of one day-sign, it is hard indeed
to find any one feature which occurs in all of them. To give a
specific example, Seler says that in representations of Cipactli
* * a row of spikes runs . . . along the vertical line of the head. ' "•
The drawings a, b, e, g, h, and i in the present figure, all six of
them very beautifully drawn, are without this feature. The
69 1900-1901, p. 9.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-gigna in Aetec Manuscripts 337
absence of hard and fast rules of this sort will be emphasized in
discussing others of the signs below.
One other feature of the Water-monster designs is worth men-
tioning. I refer to the artistic value of most of the heads as
decorative objects. Most of these heads present a thoroughly
picturesque appearance. The eye-plate is nearly always more or
less flamboyant, as is, in many cases, the figure as a whole.
Figure 8, a^, are more typical in this respect than are the others.
Wind (Ehecatl)
Sources of drawings (fig. 9):
a, Vatican B, p. 52 j, NattaU (Zouche), p. 1
b, Vatican B, p. 7 h, Vatican B, p. 71
e, Bologne, p. 1 I, Nnttall (Zouche), p. 16
d, Vatican B, p. 71 m, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 16
e, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 5 n, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 18
/, Vatican B, p. 3 o, Fejervary, p. 35
g, Vatican B, p. 1 p, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 3
h, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 62 q, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 65
i, Vatican B, p. 87
The various forms of this day-sign represent the wind-god,
Qiietzalcoatl, a name meaning literally, ''Feathered Serpent."
The symbol is associated however with the word ehecail, or
"breeze." Figure 7, q, gives an idea of the way in which the
deity is represented realistically. He has here the form of a
human being, running, and carries on his left arm a shield, with
javelins, and in his right hand the atlatl,^^ or spear-thrower. His
straight hair and a full beard are shown in the picture. His nose
is prodigiously elongated, and the parts of his face around the
mouth have the form of a bird's beak. It is rather hard to tell
by inspection whether these two features are supposed to repre-
sent the actual facial peculiarities of the god, or simply a mask
worn by him. On his head is a pointed cap, represented in many
places as made of tiger skin, and at the back of his neck is a
very characteristic fan-shaped ornament. The remainder of his
•0 Consult NuttaU, 1892.
8SS Uitivenit]/ of Calif onia FubUeatvma iit Am. Are\ and Sthm. [ToL 11
Fig. 9. — a-p, The Day-rign Wind (Ehecatl) ; q, BmUiUc
Drawing of the Wind-god
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signs in Asiec ManusoripU 339
costume is of the usual Aztec sort, consisting of a breech-doth
and sandals. The present drawing, however, shows in addition
a necklace and a conspicuous ear-ornament. When we turn to
the day-symbols shown in this figure, it is noticeable that they
represent only the head of the divinity. A good many of
the day-symbols in the manuscripts represent the head as de-
scribed, with the hair, beard, cap, and mask or snout. Some
of the manuscript drawings, on the other hand, are very much
simplified. It would be quite easy to see in the present figure
a ''descending series" of drawings. Figure 9, a, for example
which is a complete representation of the god with all the fea-
tures, might be considered to represent the beginning of a process
of degeneration, and figure 9, p, which is denuded of almost
everything, the end of the process. It is even possible to fill in
all of the steps between these two extremes, and to show how one
by one the features might have dropped off. Figure 9, a, for
example, has cap, beard, eye, ear-ornament, and snout. Figure
9, e, has lost the cap ; % lacks the cap, and in addition has lost the
ear-ornament. Figure 9, g, has lost, in addition to the foregoing
the pupil of the eye ; m has lost the eye altogether, retaining, of
the original features, only the snout and beard. In o and p even
the beard vanishes, and of the whole god nothing but the snout
is left. The mouth of a degenerates in p to a mere line.
Such a series has, however, very little real meaning. The
elaborate head shown in e was drawn by the artist who drew the
simplified form shown in p, and the two drawings are on adjacent
pages of the original text. Our text-figures therefore do not
represent actual genetic series. It does seem possible, however,
to interpret certain of the features present in the signs by a
process of comparison. For example, some of the realistic draw-
ings of the god represent him with a fang at the comer of his
mouth. It seems likely that the fang is elaborated from a notch,
which often occurs in exactly the same place and has very much
the same appearance. If an ''original" form is to be looked for,
the notch might be interpreted as the down-curved mouth, which
is the usual sign of old age, shown for example in figure 10, b.
The fang form is especially clear in figure 9, c, d, and I. It
seems rather likely that the notched disk below the comer of the
840 Vnivertity of CaUfonua PwbltMfwnt in Jm. Jreh. and Btlm, [ToL 11
month in figure 9, o, represents this moath-DotcIi or fang, wbidk
has in this drawing wandered oat of its proper place.
The eye in these representations of the Wind symbol does
some curious things. In b, figure 9, it wanders out on the beak,
and in d mounts up on a stalk. In drawings / and k this stalk
becomes much elongated. The beard, too, shares in these changes.
In figure 9, /, it loses its likeness to hair, retaining however its
outline. In g the hair is replaced by speckles, and in k and k
the whole beard degenerates into a mere sausage-shaped tag.
Such series as are shown in figure 9, whether they represent
Fig. 10.— <i, Tb« Pace of tha Wind-god, ahowing doini-euiTed month
(Nnttkll) ; i, a fkM with a eorred month, a
featare ugnifyiiig old age
accurately the origin of the simpler forms of the day signs or
not, at least enable us to recognize in the simpler forms many
of the elements which make up the more complicated ones. A
person, for example, who in examining a text encounters a form
like q, figure 9, would certainly have some trouble in recognizing
it as a form of the wind-god. Yet, by comparison with the more
complicated figures it is possible to recognize in the simpler
drawing the various elements which stand for tiie hair, the snout,
and the beard. The proportions and the positions of the various
parts merely are changed, while the identity of the figure remains
unmistakable.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-gigna in Astec ManuicripU 341
GOO
b3
H
lii izd
D.
jQ.
m
Fig. 11.
> The Day-sign Honae (CaUi) ; q, Bealistie
Drawing of a House
342 Unwersity of California PubUeationi in Am. Arch, and Ethn. [VoL 11
House (OaUi)
8ouree$ of drawings (fig. 11):
a, Vatiean B, p. 87
i, Vatican B,
p. 5
h, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 56
j, Vatican B,
p. 4
e, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 20
Jc, Fejervary
p. 30
d, Nuttall (Zonche), p. 34
1, Vatican B,
p. 64
e, Fejervary, p. 18
m, Vatican B,
p. 3
f, Nuttall (Zonche), p. 31
n, Nuttall (Zouche),
p. 84
g, Aubin, p. 1
0, Vatican B,
p. 71
h, Vatican B, p. 8
p, Nuttall (Zouche),
p. 6
There are probably few day-signs in which the original forms
are so completely obscured as in the case of the day-sign House.
In its extreme form the day-sign appears merely as a hook (fig.
11, nt), on a sort of a pedestal. The drawings in k, I, m, seem
to show how this ''hook" appearance evolves. A; is a fairly con-
vincing picture of a stone structure, I should say, with a thatched
roof. If the evidence of the manuscripts is good for anything,
this is the usual form of architecture in the Aztec or Plateau
region, even for ceremonial edifices. Comparison with figure
11, q, brings out the principal features of such a structure. This
latter represents, like a, e, and k-p, a cross-section through such
a temple. To the. right is the stairway leading up to the temple
doorway. The doorway was made up of two uprights, either
stones or timbers, with a third lying horizontally on them for a
lintel (see fig. 11, b-d). According to Seler,^^ these posts and
lintels are of wood. The artist, it seems, wished to exhibit this
doorway but was not equal to drawing it in perspective, so he
compromised by dragging it around to one side, and represent-
ing only part of it; that is, with only one of the uprights in
place. The front wall of the temple, or at least the position of
this wall, he represented by a mere thin line. The thatching,
however, is plainly and quite correctly represented, for the
temples had, as here indicated, ''hip" roofs, thatched on all four
slopes. The ridge seems to have been elaborated into some sort
of ornament. This is shown at the top of figure 11, g. On the
base or pyramid of the structure we see an earthquake or oUn
symbol (for which see fig. 34). In figure 11, k, the roof is rather
•1 1900-1901, p. 10.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day'Signs in Asiee Manuscripts 343
bulging or convex. In I the ''peak" effect is reduced to a rudi-
ment, and the drawing as a whole is more cursive in style. In
figure 11, m and n, the artist seems to have had in mind not the
original idea of a house, but such degenerate symbols of it as I,
figure 11, which he permitted himself to reproduce in still more
cursive fashion. In fact, in m, I, n, o, and p the likeness to a
house is almost or entirely lost.
In b, figure 11, the front view of the house, or calii, is repre-
sented. We see here the thatched hip-roof, and the doorway of
dressed stones or timbers. The artist, however, was apparently
not equal to drawing a stairway in front view, so left it out.
In d this doorway is drawn still more plainly. Here the artist
seems to have tried to draw at the same time both the front and
the gable ends of the roof, giving up, however, without being
successful. In g the structure has been reduced to a remnant.
We see here apparently a side view showing half of the door
construction (compare a) and a line representing the back wall.
Figure 11, h-j, represent this same front view of the structure,
dra¥Fn, however, in cursive lines. The T-shaped inclosure seems
to represent the outside line of the door construction, the open-
ing having vanished. In this case, a study of the more compli-
cated forms readily explains the simple ones such as g.
Lizard (Cuetzpalin)
Sourees of drawings (fig. 12):
a, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 56
g,
Yatiean B,
p 16
h, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 49
K
Fejervary,
p. 37
e, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 13
m
Yatiean B,
p. 7
d, Yatiean B, p. 3
•
Bologne,
p. 2
e, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 5
i?.
Aubin,
p. 19
f, Yatiean B, p. 64
h
Yatiean B,
p. 70
This is probably the least interesting of all the day-symbols,
for the reason that it is nearly alwa3rs carelessly drawn, and does
not exhibit much variety at best. It is usually a sprawling figure
with an uncertain number of legs straggling about, and a taiL
I should say that the most characteristic thing in the drawing
of the lizard is the loose- jointed way in which it sprawls on the
page. One feature is noticeable in the drawings of lizard when
344 Unwer$Uyof(M%f&rniaPubUeationsinAm.AroKandEthii. [YoLll
they can be examined in color. Half of the animal is normally
red, the other half a sky bine. The division into two colors is
represented by the line across the lizard's body in figore 12,
a, b, c, e, and g. Seler's statement** that ''the lizard symbol is
i * I
Fig. 12.^The Day-sign Lizard (CMeUpaUn)
normally blue" does not apply to all the manuscripts. The
arrangement of colors would possibly indicate that one of those
species is intended whose under-surface is bright blue. To
economize time, perhaps, the artists painted the animal half
reddish and half blue, without bothering to be more realistic.
At least this is a possible explanation of the curious arrangement
of colors.
•« 1900-1901, p. 10.
1018] W^wman: DeUntatUmofDog-tigntbtAxttcUamueTipf
Rg. 18. — o-I, The Dk^-sigii Bnkke (Coatl) ; m, Bealiitie
Drswing of a Bnake
346 Unwer9UyofCdUformaP%bUoaii(m9%nAm.AreKandBthn. [YoLU
Snake {Coatl)
Sowreei of drawin^M (fig. 18):
a, Borgia, p. 5 h, Yatieaii B, p. 67
h, Aubin, p. 18 i, Yatieaii B, p. 66
e, Bologae, p. 7 h, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 77
e, Bologae, p. 4 I, Yatiean 15, p. 71
f, Yatiean B, p. 74 m, Yatiean B, p. 45
g, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 75
Figure 13, m, represents a realistic drawing of a serpent
chosen from a page in Vatican Codex B (manuscript 3773 in the
Vatican library). The scene, or whatever it may be called, rep-
resents a human figure holding a serpent in its outstretched hand.
The hand and part of the arm are reproduced in the present
illustration, the rest of the human figure being omitted. The
meaning of the device around the serpent just above the hand
is not dear. The snake in this drawing, as in many of the day-
signs, is plainly the rattlesnake. It is moreover quite accurately
represented. The head exhibits, however, in place of one fang,
a whole series of enormous ones projecting from the mouth. The
plate over the eye is elaborated also into a sort of crest. It is
interesting to note that figures of people holding snakes are
fairly common both in Aztec and Maya art.** One can hardly
help thinking in this ccmnection of the well-known Snake Dance
of the sedentary Indians of the southwestern part of the United
States, in which performers dance holding serpents.
Many of the day-signs representing the serpent show the same
characteristics as the realistic drawing just mentioned (for
example, a and b, figure 13). The former of these two has an
added feature, however, namely a plume at the end of the tail.
Figure 13, c and d, represent the same serpent-figure knotted up
in a sort of coil. In / the serpent is likewise complete, except
that his rattles have degenerated to a mere button, and his outlines
are not so conspicuously ophidian. In the remainder of the day-
sign figures there is represented only the serpent's head. (Heads
in general appear more frequently in the manuscripts as a day-
sign than whole animals.) Many of these heads are thoroughly
«* For the latter see Maudslay, 1889-1902, for example, voL 4, pL 33;
Spinden, 1913, p. 49.
1916] Waterman: Delineatum of Day-Hgna in Aaitee ManworipU 847
8erx)ent in character. In one of fhem however (g, figure 13), we
find a human nose ornament consisting of a ''plug" with a flow-
ing plume attached. In a few of the drawings the serpent head
is very much debased. The one shown in h, for example, might
well pass for the head of some other animal. In j we have only
a jumble of lines, so formless that it is hard to recognize in them
even such parts as the eye and the mouth. As a special instance
of ''debasement," attention is drawn to the figure shown in {
which lacks the fang, though the fang is perhaps the most char-
acteristic feature in the other serpent drawings.
Death (Miquiztli)
Sources of drawings (fig. 15):
a, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 79 i, Vatican B, p. 3
h, Borgia, p. 4 J, Pejenrary, p. 33
e, Vatican B, p. 25 1c, NnttaU (Zouche), p. 31
d, Vatican B, p. 96 I, Vatican B, p. 54
e, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 75 m, Bologne, p. 4
f, Vatican B, p. 52 n, Bologne, p. 2
g, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 13 o, Vatican B, p. 63
h, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 13 p, NuttaU (Zouche), p. 82
As already mentioned, the sign for death is a human skull.
This is drawn in many cases with some degree of fidelity to the
facts. It is, on the other hand, one of the symbols showing most
marked distortion. Figure 15 shows its principal variations.
p of this figure shows a realistic scene from an Aztec funeral
ceremony. The practice seems to have been to expose the body
until only the bones were left, which were then gathered and
burned. We have here the representation of such a cremation
scene. Piled upon a circular mat are the long bones tied up in
a faggot, and surmounted by the skull. Sticking up on each side
are decorated slats of wood. To one side stands the figure of a
priest, with black face and black body-paint, usual in the case
of people taking part in religious ceremonials. In his hands he
holds a torch with which he ignites the pyre. The fire may be
seen spreading to right and left in the drawing, and in the center
there mounts a thick column of smoke. The drawing of the
skull is the point of particular interest for us. There is con-
348 Unwenityof(kMformaP%a>UoatianiinAm.Areh.andSihn. [YoLll
siderable realism in the sketch. The staring ^e-orbit, the teeth
and jaw, and the zygomatic arch are shown, though not perfectly.
This type of drawing seems to have been the original model for
the day-i^ymbol Death.
I should like to emphasize some curious points in the Aztec
artist's treatment of the lower jaw of the skull. Perhaps we
can discuss this best by calling to mind the outlines of the jaw
as it really is (fig. 14, a). We notice the teeth and chin on the
one hand, and on the other the ascending '^ramus'' with the
sigmoid notch at the top. On one side of this notch (to the left
in the sketch) rises the coronoid process, and on the other, the
hinge of the jaw, or ' * condyle. ' ' The Aztecs represent all of these
features in their jaw-bones, esx>ecially the sigmoid notch and the
hinge. The hinge itself they expand into a sort of circular tag,
very prominent in all jaw figures. We can discuss the features
of their jaw drawings to best advantage by citing places where
the jawbone is drawn alone. For this we can turn to the
''Grass" symbols (fig. 28, below), in which a human jawbone
plays a conspicuous part. This is also shown in figure 14, b.
Here especial attention is drawn to the conspicuous ''hinge"
portion.
T'^^^l
o
Fig. 14. — Corioiu Features of the Drawings representing the Skull,
and a possible explanation of them
a, Drawing of an aetnal jaw-bone; h, a jaw-bone from a day-
sign, Nnttall, p. 79; <;, drawing of an aetnal sknll (Chinook Indian,
artificially flattened); d, Nnttall, p. 82, and 0, Nnttall, p. 13, the
sknll as drawn in day-signs.
1916] Waterman: DeUneaium of Daf-Hgna in Agtec Manuscripts 349
When we turn to the representations of the whole skull, with
brain-case and jaw, we find the delineation very much affected
by this fondness for emphasizing the hinge of the jaw. Figure
14, c, shows a sketch of an actual skull. An artificially flattened
Chinook (Columbia River) cranium was chosen for the sketch,
because it most nearly corresponds in outline to the Aztec draw-
ing. We have around the eye a bony ridge which fuses below
into the zygomatic arch, running across the sketch horizontally.
All of these features can be recognized in the corresponding
Aztec design (fig. 14, d) , though rudely drawn in. I should like
to emphasize in this latter figure (d) the fact that when the jaw
is fitted by the artist into the skull, as shown in the dotted lines
(actually following the original drawing), the flamboyant treat-
ment of the maxillary condyle, or hinge process, leaves only
the back part of the cranium showing. The occipital part of
the cranium runs around the jawbone in the form of a hook.
When the artist draws a skull without the jaw he preserves this
hook, which leaves a space or socket where the jaw hinge would
fit if it were present. This hook in skulls which are drawn with-
out jaws becomes rudimentary and apparently loses its original
meaning. I am otherwise at a loss to account for the curious
hook which appears at the rear of many skull drawings (such as
e, fig. 14). In the collection of skull drawings used as day-signs
(fig. 15) many will be found (h, o) where the hook is quite mean-
ingless. On the other hand, in some of them (f, I) the skull is in
perfect shape for the reception of a jaw with an expanded hinge.
We have in the drawings standing for the idea ^' Death" a case
where, it seems to me, a very curious and puzzling feature of a
day-sign is really explained by reference to an original graphic
style of delineation.
Many minor variations will be noticed in the skull symbols.
For one thing, the skull often has, as an ornament, a flint knife
stuck in the nostril (fig. 15, d, i). This flint knife seems to
degenerate in other cases to a mere point or lobe (g, j, I). The
eye also becomes less realistic in certain drawings (g, j). In
k we find a jaw with the usual hinge, but there is no correspond-
ing notch in the skull. On several of the skulls are found lines
suggesting a cap, possibly representing a painted design (f, k).
360 nim>eT»U]/ofCaiifoTiuaPitbKeationtinAin.AreKMdSthit. [T«l. 11
Fig. IS.— o-o, The Daj'-rign DMth (Jfi^titotU) ; p, BeftlUtie
Drawing of ft Skull
1916] Watemutn: DeUMaii(m of Day-Hgna in Agtec MamuoripU 851
The three last figures show a skoll with ornament attached,
prominent among them in each case an ear-ornament. The
absordily of an ear-ornament where there are no ears does not
seem to strike the artist. The meaning of the curious tuft on the
top of 0 is unknown.
Deer (Mazail)
Sources of drawings (fig, 16):
a, Yatieaii B, p. 64 h, Bologne, p. 3
b, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 26 i, KuttaU (Zouehe), p. 45
e, NuttaU (Zonehe), p. 49 j, KuttaU (Zouehe), p. 51
d, Yatiean B, p. 1 h, Fejervary, p. 20
e, KuttaU (Zonehe), p. 48 I, Fejervary, p. 36
f, Yatiean B, p. 67 m, Fejervary, p. 13
g, Yatiean B, p. 89 n, Fejervary, p. 26
Before discussing the illustrations which show the various
forms of this day-sign (fig. 16), it will be well to get certain
characteristics of the deer in mind. It is possible to form a con-
clusion as to which of the characteristics were most conspicuous
in the minds of the native artists by considering which are most
frequently in evidence in the delineations. The most important
one is the long, slender muzzle (fig. 16, a, b, c, d, e, g, i, j, n).
The next in importance is the antler. Another point which is
emphasized in many drawings is the deer's large incisor teeth in
the lower jaw, a trait which deer has, of course, in common with
many other ungulates. The cloven hoof is also very strongly
emphasized in some drawings. The realistic drawing at the
bottom of the figure (fig. 16, n) exhibits most of the deer's actual
peculiarities — ^muzzle, long ears, cloven hoofs, and short tail.
Neither teeth nor antlers are represented in n. The former occur,
however, very well drawn, in 6, c, d, and h. I think the deer's
antlers would be considered by ourselves his most distinctive
possession. These antlers appear in a, b, c, and d. The illus-
trations are here arranged in descending order, exhibiting a
successive deterioration of the antler. A series like this, whether
it accounts for the development of the simpler forms or not (and
it probably does not), enables us, at any rate, to identify these
simpler forms. The little excrescence in d can, for example, be
3Si Unitiwitpof(Mifoni*aPtMioationti»A».Arat.andmh». [ToLU
identified as an antler hy looking at the more folly delineated
drawingB in a and b. Peiiu^ the next drawing worthy of remark
is k. Like many of the figores in the Bolofpie Codex from which
it is taken, it represents a well-drawn head, with a tiny leg
I, TIm D»7-ilgii Dmt (Voiall) ;
Drawing of a Dew
1916] Waterman: DeUMation of Day-ngnt in Aiteo ManfuoripU 853
attached. In this case the head has teeth in the upper jaw, and
there might be some diflScoIty involved in identif3ring it as deer,
if it were not for the presence of the antler. It will be noted
that in the drawings of the deer the ears assume all sorts of
shapes and configorations, from erect to drooping (fig. 16, i).
We shall revert to this point in a moment. In k the artist drew
not a deer but merely an antler, which passes as a symbol for
the whole animal. In { and m he drew the cloven hoof merely.
Bdbhit (Tochtli)
Sources of drawingi (fig. 21) :
a, Yatiean B, p. 61
g, Aubin,
p. 18
h, Pejervary, p. 42
h, Yatiean B,
p. 27
c, Yatiean B, p. 96
ft, Yatiean B,
p. 60
d, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 80
i, Bologne,
p. 2
e, Yatiean B, p. 68
h, Borgia,
p. 8
f, Yatiean B, p. 49
The Mexican artist, if he set about the task seriously, found
no difficulty in drawing the rabbit in a very realistic fashion
(witness figure 21, %). Here the animal is given a characteristic
rabbit-posture — sitting cm its haunches. The drawing moreover
shows the elongated ears, the abbreviated tail, and the large and
prominent incisors so characteristic of the rabbit in life. It is
worth noting that the rabbit's big incisors are drawn in the upper
jaw, in this respect offering a contrast to the drawings of the deer.
In figure 21, g, teeth are entirely omitted. Certain curious ten-
dencies, however, show themselves in the delineation of these
teeth. In a they are conspicuous, but more like fangs than is really
necessary. In c and d they are unduly prominent ; in the latter
figure, indeed, notably exaggerated. In e the two teeth have been
fused into a sort of ribbon hanging out of the mouth. In f this
ribbon takes on the appearance of a tongue, and may have been
so interpreted by the artist. In A we have a tongue plainly
shown, but it comes out over the upper teeth. How the artist
reconciled this drawing with his knowledge of the facts cannot be
explained. Figure 21, j, is another figure from the Bologne
manuscript — a head with tiny legs attached. It might be worth
854 UniverHtyof(kU%forniaP%blioaHaniinAm.AreKandBi1m. [YoLU
mentioning in connection with these two plates that some of the
drawings of the deer are hardly to be distingoished from some
of the pictores of the rabbit. Compare, for example, g of figure
16 with / of figure 21. The many points of identity between
different drawings of these two figures deserves some further
illnstratiim.
We have said already that the most characteristic (or at least
the most constant) thing in the deer drawings is the represen-
a hod
Fig. 17. — ^Day-figns representing Four Different Animals,
all resembling the Deer
a, Deer, Yatiean, p. 52; h, Babbit, Yatican, p. 52; o, Dog, Yatiean,
p. 55; d, Ocelot, Yatiean p. 71.
tation of the deer's long muzzle. Stated baldly, the top line of
the deer's head is, in the pictures, concave. The rabbit, on the
contrary, has a short, rounded snout, and the top line of his head
is usually rounded over toward the nose. These traits are
brought out clearly in the realistic pictures (fig. 16, n; fig. 21, k).
It is now important to recognize that even such a constant dis-
tinction is often forgotten by the native artist. Figure 17, a, for
example, represents the deer, but b of the same figure, with
entirely similar outlines, represents not the deer but the rabbit.
For the sake of comparison a picture of dog (c) and ocelot {d)
are added, which, from the general outline, might be taken just
as readily for rabbit or deer. In other words, there is no type
to which the drawings of one animal necessarily conform.
Fig. 18. — ^Day-sisna representing Four Distinct Animals,
all resembling the Babbit
a, Babbit, Knttall, p. 47; h, Deer, Yatiean, p. 61; e, Dog, Yatican,
p. 6; d, Ocelot; Kuttall, p. 23.
1916] Waterman: Delineaticn of Daysigm in Agtee Man/UBcripU 855
It is quite as easy to pick out a series of animals all drawn
on the model of the rabbit. Figure 18 shows such a series. Here
the same four animals, rabbit, deer, dog, and ocelot (''tiger")
are represented, but they all have the form of the rabbit. The
drawing of the deer in b, figure 18, would certainly be interpreted
as the rabbit, except for the horns. If the deer's horns were
always delineated in representations of the deer, there could, of
course, be no confusion, but as often as not they are omitted.
The same point might be made about the ears of the two
animals. The deer's ears are often erect, while the rabbit's often
cling dose to the head, or drop down. Figure 19, a, shows what
a h c
Fig. 19. — ^Day-signs representing the Deer and the Babbit,
showing the commingling of traits
a, Babbit, KnttaU, p. 58; h, Deer, Vatican, p. 3;
e, Babbit, Vatican, p. 57.
might be regarded as a very characteristic drawing of the rabbit.
Figure 19, ft, however, represents the deer, though the ears droop.
On the other hand, c in this same figure, though the ears are
erect, represents not the deer but the rabbit. In other words, I
should like to make the point that statements such as those made
by Seler,** to the effect that absolute critera can be set up by
which each figure can be recognized, are not borne out by a study
of the manuscripts. If it were not for the occurrence of the
day-signs in regular series, it would be quite impossible in many
cases to distinguish one from another.
Fig. 20. — ^Day-sign Deer drawn with the Incisor
Teeth belonging to the Babbit
Vatican, p. 4.
To the zoologist the point most worthy of emphasis would be,
I think, the fact already referred to, that the rabbit has large
«* 1900-1901, pp. 9-16.
866 Uf^eni^ofCaUfarniaPybUeat%an$iiiAwi.Areh.andSi1m. [VoLll
incisor teeth in his upper jaw, while the deer has them only in
his lower jaw. This is associated, of coarse, with the distinction
i
i
Fig. 21.— o-i, The Daj-dgn Babbit {ToeMM) ; Ic, Realistic
Drawing of a Babbit
between rodents and nn^riilAtes. While this difFerence is noted
by the artists in most of the figures, we find occasional breaches
of the rule. For example, in figure 20 we find a representation
1916] Watemutn: DelineaiUm of Day-iigm w Agtee ManworipU
357
of the deer, with the large upper incisors proper to the rabbit.
The point here discussed will come up again in connection with
some of the other day-signs.
(PU
EJ^
e
9
m
q r 8
Fig. 22.— a-«, The Day-Bign Water (Atl)
Waier
8<mroe$ of drawingi (fig. 22):
a, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 44
h, KuttaU (Zouehe):
Uti)
c, NuttaU (Zouehe)
d, KuttaU (Zonehe),
e, KuttaU (Zouehe),
/, Bologne,
g, Fejenrary,
h, KuttaU (Zouehe), p. 18
i, Aubin p. 20
j, Yatiean B, p. 24
p. 25
p. 35
p. 53
p. 66
p. 6
p. 42
k, FejerTary,
{, Yatiean B,
m, Fejervary,
n, KuttaU (Zouehe)
0, KuttaU (Zouehe)
p, KuttaU rZouehe
q, KuttaU (Zouehe
r, KuttaU (Zouehe
s, KuttaU (Zouehe
P
p. 40
p. 6
P
P
P<
p.
17
44
9
76
p. 81
p. 8
p. 82
858 Unieeraitjf of CaUfonia Pfthlioationi in Ant-Areh. anS Bthit. [ToL 11
Fig. SS.— o-I, The Day-sign Wat«T {Atl), additional tonna;
ffi, Beftlistie Drewing of & Lake
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Dafsigm in Agteo MamuoripU 359
Bowreee of drawings (fig. 28):
a, Yatiean B, p. 71 h, Yatiean B, p. 54
hf Yatiean B, p. 47 i, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 58
e, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 72 j, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 13
d, Fejervary, p. 85 Ic, Bologne, p. 30
e, Yatiean B, p. 49 I, Yatiean B, p. 70
f, Yatiean B, p. 25 m, Nnttall (Zouehe), p. 74
g, Yatiean B, p. 4
There is a rather greater variety of forms of the symbol
^' Water" than is the case with most day-signs (figs. 22 and 23).
The most graphic of these represents a dish of some sort, full of
water, with foam or waves on the surface and a shell in the
center. For such a drawing the reader is referred to figure 22, a.
The same details come out in the scene or landscape at the bottom
of figure 23 (m). The principal thing in this latter representa-
tion is a lake with waves on top, a river flowing out of it, a fish
in its depths, and on the shore a temple. The scrolls represent-
ing the ripple or foamy surface of water are a very common
feature of the drawings.
Turning now to some of the variations of the water drawing,
we find a good deal of shifting and lack of uniformity of design.
In some of the designs, as might be expected, the waves are lack-
ing, others lack the shell, and others lack the containing vessel
mentioned above as very common. The drawings in the figure
are arranged in order according to the degree of completeness
with which these vessels or containers are delineated. This
method of arrangement, as before, serves merely for convenience
in identifying the simpler drawings. It is interesting to see how
rude and merely suggestive of the original elements some of the
figures are. Figure 22, r^ for example, has lost all external
resemblance to a dish full of water; the dish has been reduced
to a rudiment, and the water has taken on the appearance of a
solid object of some sort. Comparison with the more perfect
representations (figure 22, anr) will show, nevertheless, that all
the essential features of the graphic drawing are present. In
figure 23, c, the containing dish, which no longer actually '^ con-
tains'' the water, is itself bordered with water or wave symbols.
In the case of some symbols we see the whole drawing turned
upside down. This has happened in figure 23, e^ in which the
360 Un^er$UfofCaUforniaPyhUcaUan8inAm.Arck,aiidBt1in, [VoLll
water seems to stream down from a sky. Figure 23, /, is a still
more extreme ease of the same thing. Even in this latter ease,
however, the original dish and shell may be recognized. We
have finally, in the water symbol as shown in figure 23, h, merely
a formless collection of lines.
A few curiosities come to light in making such a collection of
water-symbols. For example, the dish and the escaping water
take in figure 22, p, almost exactly the form of an animal's head
with an eye, a fang (the leg of the pot or dish originally), and
two ears. The scroll designs representing the wavy or foamy
surface of water take on at times the forms of other objects.
Thus in figure 22, e, we have springing up on the surface of the
water a semi-circular knob. In figure 22, /, this excrescence takes
on the appearance of the ''Flower" symbol (see fig. 32, below).
In figure 22, h, it assumes another and very different form, but
one unlike any object the present writer can name. In figure
23, k, the excrescence becomes almost exactly like the Aztec
i^ymbol for smoke. In figure 23, {, finally, we have the vessel
under the shell clearly drawn, but the water has shot up out of
this vessel and hangs in the form of disks above it.
The form shown in figure 23, i, is something of a puzzle.
There is scarcely any resemblance to water left, but the curious
patterns around the edge correspond to the marks around the
margin of the water in the realistic picture illustrated in m,
figure 23. Identification of the various water-symbols is made
easier by the fact that in the manuscripts the part representing
the water itself is normally painted blue. This aid to identifica-
tion is of service only in the case of colored reproductions of the
original manuscripts.
Dog {lizcuintli)
Sources of drawings (fig. 24):
a, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 57
h, Bologne, p. 1
e, NnttaU (Zooebe), p. 79
d, NnttaU (Zonebe), p. 82
e, NnttaU (Zonebe), p. 3
f, Vatiean B, p. 66
g, Vatiean B, p. 51
hf Teierr^Tj, p. 41
i, Vatican B, p. 90
j, Fejenrary, p. 44
k, Fejervary, p. 36
I, Bologne, p. 8
tn, Vatican B, p. 68
n, Bologne, p. 3
o, NnttaU (Zonebe), p. 72
1916] Waterma*: DalineatUm of Day-tigng in Agtee liamuoripU 301
P-
^ ^
Fig. 24.— a-fl, The Day-aign Dog (lUcvmtU) ; o, Beallitie
Drawing of s Dog
862 UmvenityofCMforniaP%bUoatian8inAm.AreKandBthn. [VoLU
Comment has already be^i made on the fact that the symbols
for Dog, Babbit, Deer, and Ocelot are so drawn as to be very
mnch alike. Perhaps the most distinguishing feature of the dog
head, as it is usually drawn, is a black i>atch around the eye.
This patch appears in figure 24, b, c, d, e, h, n, and o. The
fact must however be noticed that ocelot C'Tiger'^ is some-
times represented with this i>atch (fig. 25, a). Seler^ says
that a characteristic thing about the dog, drawn in the manu-
scripts, is a '* double-pointed" black patch about the eye. The
present figure will show at least that this i>atch is not uniformly
'^ double-pointed." Another trait usually found in the delinea-
tion of the dog is a sort of lip (fig. 24, a, n, o, etc.). This lip
is however often represented in the drawings of other animals.
(Compare the tiger and deer drawings shown in figure 25, a, and
b.) In figure 24, o, and appearing in a good many places in the
Fig. 25. — ^Various Day-aigns, showing confuaion or
commingling of traits
a, Ocelot, with an eye-patch nsoaUy characteristic of the Dog
(Vatican B, p. 66); h, Ocelot, resembling the Dog in teeth, lips,
and form (NnttaU (Zoche), p. 80); c, a drawing of the Deer with
the lip which is characteristic of the Dog (Vatican B, p. 69).
manuscripts, is a sort of beard or fringe under the dog's chin.
Seler makes the additional remark that there were two varieties
of dog known to the Aztecs, and represented in the manuscripts
—one brown, and one spotted. Inspection of the present plate
makes one wonder whether they did not have some custom of
clipping their dog's ears. In c, d, g, h, i, j, I, and m of figure 24,
the dog is represented with a highly ornamental ear-flap. Seler
speaks of this ear as '' mangled," and calls attention to the very
interesting fact that dogs are represented in this way in the
Dresden Mayu Codex.^ He is the only animal so represented.
M 1900-1901, p. 11.
M Loe, oit.
1916] Waterman: Delineatian of Day-eigns in Ajtteo MoMucripU 863
In £ of figure 24, we have nothing left of the dog, except this
highly ornamented ear. Figare 24, n, is another of the Bologne
Codex figures, with a tiny leg attached. It will be seen that the
artist in o, figure 24, was unable to draw a dog's hind limb
properly. The animal has a leg quite like that of a human being.
This is true of most of the animals the Aztecs and the Mayas
tried to draw.*^ The drawings of the dog supply interesting
cases of convergence in the representation of animals. The
prominent and sharp teeth usually shown in the dog figures are
often represented in drawings of the rabbit.
Monkey (Ozomatli)
8<mroe$ of drawings (fig. 27):
a, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 72 h, Vatican B, p. 8
h, NattaU (Zonehe), p. 79 i, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 8
c, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 44 j, Fejervary, p. 42
d, Borgia, p. 8 k, Vatican B, p. 66
e, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 4 I, Fejervary, p. 20
/, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 38 m, Fejervary, p. 20
g, Vatican B, p. 8 n, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 76
The most nearly characteristic features of the drawings of
the monkey are: (1) a face with an elongated snout; (2) a stifl!
crest of hair; and (3) a conspicuous ear-ornament. The first
two are elements derived from the actual characteristics of thp
Central and South American monkeys. The presence of the ear-
ornament can be explained, as is the case with many other fea-
tures of the day-signs, on the ground that they are borrowings
from human articles of dress or adornment. Probably such bor-
rowings are due, at least in part, to the vague feeling which is
quite common among savages that all animals are human beings
essentially, with a power which enables them, for their own pur-
poses, to assume a different likeness externally. Other creatures
in the day-signs are represented with ear-ornaments similar to
the one exhibited on Monkey. Compare, for example, with the
present designs, the drawings representing Eing-vulture (fig.
•7 See Water-monster, Deer, Babbit, and Ocelot in the present paper,
and, for example, the splendid fignre of a jagnar from Chiehen Itza in
Bpinden, 1918, pL 29, fig. 7.
364 Univeniiy of Calif arnia PubUcatiom in Am. Arch, and Bthn, [ VoL 11
26 and fig. 33, a, b, c, f, h, k) and Wind (fig. 9). In view of this
fact, it is somewhat surprising to find that in one or two places
(see fig. 27, { and m) the monkey is represented vicariously by
his ear-ornament, and nothing else. This ornament, although it
stands for the day-sign Monkey, is in nowise to be distinguished
from the ornament worn by the Eing-vulture (fig. 26). If it
were not for its position in a series, then, there would be no way
of telling whether the drawning shown in figure 27, I, should be
interpreted as Monkey or as something else.
Fig. 26. — ^Drawing of a Day-sign representing the King-
Ynltnre wearing an ear-ornament, the latter not to be
distinguished from those which represent or typify
the Day-sign Monkey.
(Fejervary, p. 37.)
The crest of the monkey in the present figure assumes several
different forms. Compare, for example, a with j. In some cases
the crest looks quite like the tuft of feathers surmounting the
head of the eagle (see figure 32). The realistic drawing of the
monkey (fig. 27, n) shows that all of these symbols representing
the monkey follow the original idea very closely.
Grass (MalinaUi)
Sources of drawings (fig. 28):
a, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 79
b, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 79
c, NnttaU (Zouche), p. 19
d, Vatican B, p. 78
e, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 40
f, Vatican B, p. 68
g, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 24
h, Vatican B, p. 16 p, NuttaU (Zonehe), p. 71
i, Borgia, p. 6
This is, in certain respects, the most curious of all the Aztec
day-symbols, for the reason that it is, in its usual form, a com-
bination of three elements that seem to have no logical connec-
tion with each other — a human jawbone, an eye, and a clump of
j, Borgia,
p. 26
k, Borgia,
p. 67
I, Aubin,
p. 17
m, Aubin ,
p. 12
n, Bologno,
p. 6
r, Borgia,
p. 50
0, Bologne,
p. 3
1916] Waterman: DeUneatian of Day-ngna in AMiec MannsoHpU 865
ff
^\\\\\\t
m
Tig. 27.-0-111, The Day-sign Monkey (Osomatli) ; n, Bealistic
Drawing of a Monkey
SM Uiiw9nittofCaUfoniflaF*b1teaUtmti»tAm.AT0K<uttlgt1m. [YoLU
gram. Penaflel,** quoted by Seler," calls this graas eacate del
carhonero (because charcoal-bomere or "earboDeros" make sackg
of it) and states that the Aztec name malituUU, or "twisted," is
p°°^
>, The Dar-Bign Qrua (VatwoHt) ; p, BMU>ti«
Drawing of « Clomp of GraM
••1886.
M ISOO-IMI, p. 12
1916] Waterman: DeUneatum of Day-signa in A§tec ManuseripU 867
derived from the fact that the Aztecs were accustomed, as they
are still, to ''twist" it into ropes and pack-straps. Such
etymologies are, of course, always open to suspicion. What the
specific botanical name of the zacate grass is, I have not been
able to learn. A realistic picture of a dump of this grass on
the side of a mountain, with leaves, seednstalks, and roots, is
given in figure 28, p.
The first-mentioned element in the combination, the jawbone,
is usually quite realistically represented. It is ordinarily drawn
in profile, with the teeth in place, and with the sigmoid notch at
the top of the ascending ramus easily distinguishable. There is,
however, a peculiar and exaggerated representation of the condyle
or hinge already referred to in connection with the day-sign
Death (see page 349). Along the middle of the bottom edge of
the bone there is a curious collection of humps, either two or
three. Mrs. Nuttall says somewhere that these humps were put
wherever the artist wishes to express the idea of ''roughness."
,The basis of this idea, and the reason why the artist should wish
to indicate roughness on the bottom edge of a jawbone, are alike
uncertain. Seler^^ suggests a "reason" (such as it is) for the
association of the grass with a jawbone, namely, that the bone
signifies that the grass is dry.
The first four drawings (fig. 28, a, h, c, and d) give what
might be considered four stages in the degeneration of the com-
plete sign. In a we have jaw, eye, a clump of leaves, and a seed-
stalk. In 6 we have, besides the jaw, two leaves and the eye; in
c, the jaw and eye with no grass at all; and in d, plain jaw. Yet
the position of each of the last three signs in different series
makes it absolutely certain that they all represent the day-sign
Grass. It is rather curious to find a bare jawbone standing as a
symbol for vegetation, even vegetation of the driest kind.
Figure 28, e, f, g, and h, show a curious treatment of the
grass element. In the latter (A) all resemblance to grass is lost.
It is worth observing that in e, figure 28, the eye and eye-stalk
together take on an appearance identical with the ear-ornament
in the preceding figure (fig. 27). In the four figures just men-
70 1900-1901, p. 12.
368 Univenity of Calif omia Publications in Am. AreK and Ethn. [ VoL 11
tioned (e, f, g, and h, figure 28), there is progressive degenera-
tion of the eye-stalk, which in the last figure named is only an
empty bulb.
Figure 28, i, j, k, show the jaw in front view. The grass in
each of these cases receives a curious treatment, reaching a climax
in k, where it looks more like a phonograph horn than anything
else that could be readily named. The eye, which is quite realistic
in figure j, vanishes completely in k.
In I, m, n, o, the eyes are represented in combination with an
additional feature, an upper jaw. In n we have a curious thing.
The whole drawing assumes the form of a complete face with all
its features, holding a ball in its gaping jaws. Flourishing
around above this face we see the original eye and eye«talk, with
which we started in a of figure 28. The meaning of the pair of
jaws biting on an object is a complete puzzle to the present writer.
Cane {Acatl)
Souroei of drawing» (fig. 29):
a, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 9 j, Nnttall (Zboehe), p.U
h, Nuttall (Zonehe), p. 62 k, Vatican B, p. 47
e, Nuttall (Zouohe), p. 1 I, Yatiean B, p. 5
d, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 5 m, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 56
e, Vatican B, p. 65 n, Vatican B, p. 62
/, Vatican B, p. 51 o, Aubin, p. 8
g, Vatican B, p. 49 p, Vatican B, p. 60
h, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 32 q, Vatican B, p. 3
i, Nuttall (Zouche), p. 40 r, Borgia, p. 50
The symbols for the idea Cane (fig. 29) all represent, as
remarked in connection with figure 1, the cane shafts of javelins.
The first ten represent single missiles, the remaining seven
represent bunches of several at once. Seler^^ calls the object in
question an arrow. I am inclined to think that in most cases
the object is a javelin (see fig. 29, r). It occurs universally in
the hands of persons who in the other hand brandish the spear-
thrower, or atlatP* as in the present figure. Examples of this
combination are too numerous to quote. A device exactly similar
Ti 1900-1901, p. 12.
72 Consult Nuttall, 1891.
1016] Watermatu VeUtteation of Day-tigm in Aitee itatuuoripti 969
Fig. Zi.—a-q, Th« Day-eigu Cue {Aoatl); r, Bealiatie
DrBwiDg of a CBne-ahkf ted Javelin
870 Un^er$UfofCaUforniaPubUeaUan$inAm.Arch.aiidEihn. [VoLU
to the missile we are discossing occurs in one place (C!odex
Nnttall — ^Zonche manuscript)^' grasped in a warrior's hand
along with a bow. The typical arrow, which appears in many
places in Vatican Codex A (3738), is nearly always represented
with a wooden fore-shaft, and has a series of barbs on one side.
This arrow is not the weapon which occurs as a day-aign. The
pictured accounts of Aztec combats^^ represent the spear-thrower,
instead of the bow, as the important and universal weapcm. In
the mere interest of accuracy, the device which symbolizes the
idea Cane ought to be referred to as a javelin, not as an arrow.
It is noticeable that in many of the drawings of the present
figure, the javelin shaft is represented, while the head or point
is omitted. Apparently, this point was of flint or obsidian, and
therefore of no particular interest to the artist who was writing
out a symbol for Cane merely. Those representations which are
made up of several javelins together are often hard to recognize
(see fig. 29, e, m, n, o, p, g), and, it must be added, are much
more frequent in day-sign art than the others. The very badly
drawn figure from the Aubin Codex (fig. 29, o) has more than a
passing resemblance to one of the symbols (fig. 37, d) for Flower.
The meaning of the sunbursts around the javelins in fig. 29, /
and g, is unknown to the present writer, unless they represent
missiles with blazing balls of cotton attached for setting fire to
assaulted villages. The drawings in question certainly resemble
the Aztec way of representing smoke. The resemblance of some
of the groups of these javelins to the symbol for Flower supplies
another instance of convergence.
Ocelot {Ocdotl)
8<mroe$ of drawing* (fig. 81):
a» NuttaU (Zouebe), p. 48 i, Bologne, p. 2
h, NuttaU (Zonehe), p. 71 i, Vatican B, p. 80
c, NuttaU (Zouebe), p. 58 k, Bologne, p. 8
d, NuttaU (Zouebe), p. 54 I, Vatiean B, p. 4
e, NuttaU (Zouebe), p. 51 m, Fejervary, p. 82
/, Vatican B, p. 51 n, Pejenrary, p. 86
g, Vatican B, p. 74 o, NuttaU (Zouebe), p. 82
hf Bologne, p. 7
" P. 10.
T«8ee Bandolier, 1892 a, for description, and references to tbe litera-
ture.
1916] Waterman: DeUneation of Vay-tignt in ABtee ManuBoripU 371
A certain impropriety is involved in applying to this Aztec
day-sign, as is nsoally done, the name ''tiger/' an animal un-
known in the New World. The use of the term has become, in a
way, a tradition. The animal in question is the ocelot, in Aztec
oceloil, misnamed, like many American institutions, by the
Spaniards. These latter called the creature el tigre as a mere
convenience. He is characterized in the drawings by a cat-like
form, with talons and sharp teeth, and a handsomely spotted
skin. It might be supposed that the spots of the skin would be
the most characteristic feature in the delineation of this animal.
As a matter of fact, this trait is often represented in a very
spirited fashion (fig. 31, o). These spots occur not only on the
realistic drawings but on many of the day-signs : for example, in
a of figure 31. Like all other characteristics, however, they do not
appear consistently by any means. Thus in b the number of spots
has been reduced to two; in c of the same figure, but one is left;
in d, the spots have vanished entirely, and the animal head there
represented is hardly to be distinguished from that of the dog,
or even the rabbit as represented elsewhere. Curiously enough,
there is at least one case in the manuscripts where the day-sign
Babbit is actually represented with spots (fig. 30) . We have here
Fig. 80. — ^The Day-sign Babbit represented with the
Spots eharaeteristie of the Ocelot
(Nnttall, p. 77)
still another illustration of the rule that a given animal's most
conspicuous characteristic may, in day-sign art, be lost or loaned
to some other creature. It is perhaps worth noting that in g,
figure 31, we have a drawing which, though really representing
the tiger, has an outline that might serve with equal propriety
for the deer. It is considerably more like the deer than are some
of the deer figures (see fig. 16). The drawing appearing in j of
figure 31 (reproduced from fig. 24, &), looks, on the other hand,
like the drawings of the dog.
Another feature of the ''tiger" drawings which is apparently
realistic, is the black tip of the ear (see fig. 31, o). It appears
not only in the realistic drawing but in many of the day-signs
87S Vniivertity of Calif ontia FublieaUoru i* An. Aroh. and Btkn. [ VoL 11
as well (fig. 31, c, d, e, g, h, i, j, k). The drawing lettered k in
this flgore is one of the peculiar heads with tiny legs appended
to it which is characteristic of the Bologne Codex. In addition
to the 1^8, the animal in this drawing is provided with a nose-
>, Tk« Dft^r^aign Oeolot (Ooetotl) ;
Drawing of an Ocelot
1916] Waterman: Delineatio* of Day-^igna in AttecMaimtenptt
378
plug. In I of figure 31 the animal is represented with two erect
ears in the proper place, but bangioff down the back of his head
is pictured a Tei7 complicated ear-ornament. The animal appears
also to have some sort of a head-dress. The nose ornament
appears also in figure 31, m. In I the idea "Ocelot" is symbolized
by the drawing of an ocelot's paw merely, and in it by an object
which comparisOD with the other drawings will show to be an
ocelot's ear.
t-h, The Dftj-aign E^gle (OtKHtMU} ; i, BMOiBtie
DTawing of m Eagle
374 UnivenitfofCMf<>rmaPubUoation8mAm.AreKandEthiL [YoLU
Eagle (Quauhili)
Sowreei of dtwcimgg (fig. 82):
a, Vatiean B, p. 92 f, Nattall (Zoaehe), p. 23
b, Nattall (Z(mehe)y p. 47 g, Nnttall (Zouehe), p. 32
e, VaUean B, p. 50 ^ Yatiean B, p. 2
d, Yatiean B, p. 62 i, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 69
e, NattaU (Zonehe), p. 6
The various drawings of the eagle are markedly realistic. The
drawing at the bottom of the figure is taken from a section of the
Codex Nuttall which represents an eagle in combat with an ocelot.
The characteristics of the bird usually chosen for emphasis in the
day-signs are his hooked beak, and a crest of feathers on his head.
The beak occurs in practically all the drawings, not only in those
illustrated here. In a few cases there is some degeneration.
Thus in f, figure 32, the beak is weakened and lacks the sharp
curve so well represented in most of the other drawings. The
crest is usually barred gray and white, but these barrings do not
show in uncolored figures. There is considerable variety shown
in the minor details of the treatment of the plumes of the crest.
In %, figure 32, they are fairly realistic, as they are in 6 and e of
the same figure. In a they take on the appearance of a series of
hooks, and in d they are much elongated. In g and A, as men-
tioned in connection with figure 8 (p. 336), the feathers take on
appearance of stone knives. The reason for this is rather hard
to fathom. The stone knife is itself one of the calendar symbols
(see fig. 35) standing for the idea ''flint." Stone knives appear
occasionally on the head and back of the water-monster in place
of spikes. Perhaps in both cases the stone knives represent
merely a fanciful elaboration. A bird, however, something like
an eagle, whose plumage consists entirely of flint knives, is a
prominent mythological figure in the southwestern part of the
United States. So there may be some mythological idea behind
the drawing in the present case. In one or two cases the eagle
is represented with a tongue protruding from his mouth {c, d,
e, g, h, fig. 32). This tongue sometimes takes on the appearance
of a long scroll, as in figure 32, c.
»1S] Watnmm: IMiiuaU(mi>fDa)-*iffn*iMAMteeMa»tacnpU 87S
SC-^fe^ cc?^
?^
.***"'fe
Fig. 88.— o-fi, The Dty-tiga Eing-TDltnre (CofoaqtumhtU) ;
0, B«aliitia Drawisg of k Tnltnre
376 Uniner»UfofCaUf(>rtUaJhibUeaiian$inAm.Areh.andEilm, [YoLU
King-vulture (CozcaquauktU)
8<mree$ of drawingM (fig. 33):
a, Nattall (Zoaebe), p. 54 i, Vatican B, p. 62
h, Vatiean B, p. 2 j, Fejervary, p. 1
e, Nattall (Zonebe), p. 28 k, Nuttall (Zoaehe), p. 45
d, Nntiall (Zouehe), p. 13 I, Fejenrary, p. 40
e, Yatieaii B, p. 6 m, Vatiean B, p. 1
f, Nuttall (Zouebe), p. 59 n, Anbin, p. 3
g, Vatiean B, p. 92 o, Nuttall (Zonebe), p. 74
h, Vatiean B, p. 78
The drawings of the vulture are rather more interesting than
those of the eagle, since they show a greater amount of variap
bility, and have in addition certain curious features. Perhaps it
is best to notice first of all the realistic drawing (fig. 33, o).
The bird is here represented with his wings outspread. The
most characteristic thing from the Aztec point of view seems to
be his long beak with the hook at the end, and his curious naked
head with fine hairs on it. Everyone agrees that the bird repre-
sented is the king-vulture or ringed vulture, called by the Mex-
icans of today the ''Bey de Zopilotes.'' In the day-signs he is
normally represented with an ear-ornament hanging at the back
of his head. Seler^* advances the idea that this ornament is
intended to represent ideographically the idea of ornament in
general, meaning in the present case that the bird's neck is
ringed. It is, of course, hard to see why they should not have
drawn the creature with a ring instead of an ear-ornament if
that was the idea to be presented. It must however be observed
that the day-sign Vulture, as already pointed out (see fig. 26),
has, in some cases, exactly the same ear-ornament that is flaunted
by the monkey in the day-signs. The two animals moreover are
represented with very much the same sort of crest. It is entirely
possible that the similarity of the vulture's crest to the monkey's
has induced the appearance of similar ear-ornaments in both
animals. It is, however, not easy to state why the monkey should
have been so represented in the first place. At any rate, if the
ear-ornament is an ideogram for ''ringed" here, what is it in the
case of the monkey symbol T The ear-ornament in connection
T5 1900-1901-p. 13.
1916] Waterman: DeUneaticn of Day-Hgns in ABtec ManiuoripU 377
with the present day-sign takes on a variety of forms, but it
might be noticed that in each case it is readily distinguishable
from the ear-ornament worn by Qttetzalcoatt (see fig. 9), another
important figure commonly wearing this article of adornment.
The vulture's head is in actual fact almost bare. The few
hairs or pin feathers which are represented in realistic fashion
in figure 31, o, take on quite elaborate forms in certain of the
day-signs. They are sometimes elaborated by the addition of
small disks or balls (fig. 33, a and k). Sometimes they are con-
nected by a continuous line, as in b and c. In e they take on the
appearance of rectangles or scales. In y we see a bare head with
a sort of aigrette or plume, which in h and t solidifies into a sort
of peak. It seems that the artist must have had some such form
as g vaguely in mind before he was able to produce such a form
as «. On the other hand, it would seem that the custom of repr
resenting the vulture's crest with ornamental balls on top, as in
k, probably explains the curious drawing shpwn in I, where they
have become mere knobs. In m, from another manuscript, these,
or similar knobs, are represented in still more simplified form.
In n we have one of the degenerate forms from the Aubin manu-
script, which is simply unrecognizable. In j we have an abso-
lutely bare head, without even pin-feathers or the ear-ornament.
In d, on the other hand, we have a vulture head which is elabor-
ated until it is scarcely, if at all, to be distinguished from the
head of Eagle (see fig. 32).
Motion {OUn)
Saufces of drawings (fig. 34):
a, Bologne, p. 1 h, Vatican B, p. 8
b, Aubin, p. 19 i, Nattall (Zonehe), p. 61
e, Aubin, p. 8 j, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 45
d, Borgia, p. 6 h, Vatican B, p. 70
e, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 86 I, Vatican B, p. 98
/, Vatican B, p. 46 m, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 85
g, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 20 n, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 44
Figure 34, b, represents what is probably the "normal" form
of this sign. This, at any rate is the form which is of most fre-
quent occurrence on the monuments. It consists of two figures
S78
U»ti>enitfofCaUfomiaPiiliUeatitmtimAm.AreJt.andEtlnt. [Vol. 11
side by side which meet Id the center and are, so to speak, bent
away from each other at the ends. At the middle of the outer
edge of these two sides there are a couple of "handles," or rings.
In the center of the whole there is a circular fignre wlGch, in the
pveaent case, has taken on the appearance of an eye. In the
^ ^
Fig. 84.— Tli« Daj-aign Uotlon (Otm)
famous highly elaborated altar atone in the Mexican National
Museum, which usually goes by the name of the Aztec Calendar,^*
this central figure is filled with a great face which represents the
sun. The meaning of this "motion" or olin design (fig. 34, b)
is more or less of a puzzle. It sometimes occara in the form
shown in d, consisting of two angled figures fitted t<^ther or
T«Leoii 7 Quns, 1790; Ghsvero, 1876; PefiftfieL 1890, platea, vol. S, p.
81E, and corrMpondiiig portioni of thi tsxt; Nnttafl, IBOl, p. S; Uaeenrdy,
1810, p. Ml ff.
1916] Waterman: Delineaiian of Day-signs in ABteo MantuoripU 879
interlocked. It would be entirely possible to derive the forms like
b, figure 34, from these simpler interlocked forms; but we know
nothing at all about the real origin of these latter, and so we would
be no neai-er to a true explanation. It is worthy of remark that,
in a general way, the normal form of this sign has something of
the form of an X. It is moreover true that while the symbol
stands for the word ''motion," it is also associated with the sun.
This fact may very likely be founded on a curious myth. The
Aztecs, like a good many other peoples, have a myth which tells
of a series of universal cataclysms. The first sun that was
created came to an end in one of these cataclysms on the day
Four- Wind. It was therefore named the **Wind" sun. After
it was broken up another one was created which, at the close of
the epoch, disappeared on the day Four-Tiger. This sun is there-
fore spoken of as the *' Tiger" sun. Two more suns, disappear-
ing on the days Four- Water, and Four-Bain, followed in series
before our present sun came on the scene. In some mysterious
way it is known that the present sun will disappear on the day
Four-Motion, in which the sky will be broken up by an earth-
quake. It is therefore called the ' ' Earthquake " or " Motion ' ' sun,
or olin-tonatiuh. The present writer is inclined to see in this
myth^^ the real explanation of the association of this oUn sign
with the sun. It is of course possible to assume that the design
stands for or directly represents the sun in some way, and that
the myth was invented to explain that fact. The myth gives us,
however, one definite reason why the sign should stand for the
sun, and it seems a waste of time to go further afield, until there
is more evidence. It would 'be easy to imagine half a dozen ways
in which a graphic symbol for the sun might have degenerated
into this sign. Imagine if you like that the original symbol for
the sun was a disk with rays, and that these rays were gradually
omitted until only four were left. These four, if skewed, would
give the oUn sign. Such theories represent mere mental gym-
nastics, unless a series of forms derived from a study of the
monuments can be advanced to support them. The idea has
T7 See Maceurdy, 1901, for a moet interesting paper on these mytlis and
their representation on the monuments. Some of the most famous monu-
ments of Mexican antiquity are connected with this story. Maceurdy 's
paper supplies a number of references to the literature.
380 UiUven%tyof(kaifi}rniaPybUeaiian$inAm.ArcKandEthii. [YoLU
actually been advanced that the oUn sign represents the ^'fonr
motions of the son/' that is, it stands for the fonr main points
established by the son in his yearly journey — ^the points of sun-
rise and sunset at the summer and winter solstices. If these
points were plotted and connected diagonally by lines, we would
have something approaching the oUn symbol. It is worth noting,
however, that the figure naturally produced would be a parallelo-
gram, not an X. The sun moves not from the point in the
southeast to the point in the northwest, but from the southeast
to the southwest. We mentioned just above that the normal
appearance of this sign represents an X. It is of some interest
that the kin sign among the Mayas, which is also an X, is asso-
ciated with the sun. Possibly a careful examination of the Maya
m3rthologies would unearth some legend there corresponding to
the Aztec story just mentioned.
If we take the sign shown in b as the complete or normal
form, an idea for which there is some support in the fact that
it is the most usual on the monuments, it is interesting to see
which of its features are the most persistent in its career as a
day-sign. It is obvious at once that its X-f orm readily becomes
obscured. In e, figure 34, we have the two sides coalescing into
a single figure with a straight line down the center. Seler^* is
inclined to see in this a picture of the sun disappearing into a
cleft of the earth, the circle in the center being the sun, and the
two sides day and night. This idea is based apparently on the
fact that in figures of this type the two sides are often differently
colored. It is somewhat hard to follow his reasoning here. It
is in the first place quite unnecessary to make this assumption,
as the figure can be plausibly explained in another way, and it
leaves us, moreover, in more of a predicament than ever to
account for the use of the sign to mean ''earthquake" or
''motion,'' which is certainly its literal meaning. The division
of the sign into two differently colored surfaces is shown very
nicely in figure 34, /. It will be seen in this figure (b) that of
the original symbol we have the exterior outline, the circle in the
center and the handles still remaining. It is a point of some
78 190O-1901, p. 14.
1U6] Waterman: D«liiteati<MofDay-iigiuinAMteoManiueripU SSI
Fig. 85. — a-p, Th« Daj'-algu Flint {Teepatl) ; q, B«aUatie Drawing
of % SaerUe^ Bhowing tlio Flint Knif« in vm
382 University of California Publications in Am. Arch, and Bthn, [VoL 11
interest that it is precisely these handles that are most persistent
in all representations of the figure. They occur in simple form
in a, very much enlarged in e and h, and double in /. Even in
d, the interlocked figure, they appear as crinkles in a correspond-
ing location. In drawings like n, where the proper outline of the
figure even has disappeared, these two handles remain. In m,
which is a rectangular design, we have two perfect handles. In
k they are ornamented with scroll figures which look surprisingly
like the Aztec symbols for smoke. Certainly a person encounter-
ing for the first time a symbol like I, m, or f, would hardly asso-
ciate it with the designs shown in h. The symbol in question,
then, shows a great variety of form. I think we shall have to
dismiss the whole question of the reason why ''motion" or
''earthquake" is represented by a double figure with a circle in
the center and handles at the sides, as a complete mystery.
Flint (Tecpatl)
Sources of drawings (fig. 35):
a, Nattall (Zouehe), p. 53 j, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 7
h, Yatiean B, p. 98 k, Nattall (Zouehe), p. 16
c, Bologne, p. 1 I, Bologne, p. 4
d, Nattall (Zouehe)
e, Nuttall (Zouehe)
/, Nuttall (Zouehe)
g, Nuttall (Zouehe)
h, Nuttall (Zouehe)
i, Nuttall (Zouehe)
p. 62 m, Vatiean B, p. 1
p. 56 n, NuttaU (Zouehe), p. 24
p. 32 0, Vatiean B, p. 74
p. 39 p, Aubin, p. 16
p. 34 q, Nuttall (Zouehe), p. 69
p. 32
The drawing at the bottom of figure 35 represents a scene
which is quite commonly portrayed in the Aztec manuscripts.
The subject is a human sacrifice. The barefoot victim, dressed
in the usual Aztec waist-cloth, is stretched on his back over the
altar stone. The ofSciating priest, his face covered with the
black paint which is usual in religious performances, bends over
the prisoner and cuts his heart out with a stone knife. The
priest himself wears a waist-cloth, has a large ear-plug thrust
through the lobe of his ear, and carries hanging on his arm a
pouch. In general, it must be said, pouches are quite usually
represented in connection with priestly rites. The scene here
represented is one of the best examples of Aztec draughtsman-
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-iigns in Agtee ManuscripU 883
ship. The victim's posture, his glazed, closing eyes, and the
blood streaming from the incision are all realistically presented.^*
The object of particular interest for the present purpose is
the stone knife in the priest's hands. A few of these sacrificial
knives for removing the heart in human sacrifices have been pre-
served to the present day. The best known specimen is the one
inlaid with mosaic work which is preserved in the Christy Col-
lection of the British Museum — a specimen which is a favorite
subject for illustration by writers on Mexican archaeology.^ A
sacrifice scene similar to the one represented in the present figure
is figured in the Magliobecchi manuscript.*^ The sacrificial knife
as actually used consists of a double-pointed blade chipped out
of fiint, with one of the pointed ends fitted into a wooden handle.
A knife of the same pattern was selected by the authors of the
calendar to stand for the idea ''fiint." It was apparently the
most commonplace or most familiar object made of that material.
The various forms of the day-sign are shown in figure 35, Or^.
The first drawing, a, is perhaps the most typical. I am of the
opinion that the other forms are derived from this one. At any
rate, we find all the gradations from a knife with this appear-
ance to one with merely a few simple lines where the elaborate
design ought to be. The various drawings fit so well into a series
that it is hard to resist the temptation to regard them as steps in
an evolution. The most noticeable thing about a, figure 35, is
that we have there a fiint knife with a human face, consisting of
eye, mouth, and teeth, represented along one edge. More peculiar
still, the face seems to represent that of the rain-god Tlaloc (see
figure 36 for the various forms). We have in the case of the
present figure the goggle eye and the mouth full of long teeth
which are so characteristic of the rain-god. As to why the rain-
god 's features should be represented on the day-sign ''Flint,''
I have never heard a suggestion.
I have said that a, figure 35, represents the usual form of this
face on the Flint day-signs. In figure 35, b, however, we have
79 One of the moet realistic and pictoreeqne descriptions of sach a
place of sacrifice is the one by Juan Dias (the chaplain of the explorer
Juan de Cordoya), quoted by Mrs. NuttalL 1910, pp. 256-259.
soPefialiel, 1890, yoL 1, p. 123; Tylor, 1861, p. 101; Joyce, 1914, p. 194.
•i Knttall, 1903, 58.
384 Uninersiiy of CdHfarnia Pnhlieatiom in Am. AroK and Ethn. [V oL 11
another and quite different form. Here we see the goggle eye,
but instead of the Tlaloc face, in which the lower jaw is uniformly
missing, and the upper jaw armed with long, fang-like teeth, we
have a skeleton jaw with normal human dentition. It seems at
least conceivable that the Aztecs represented these teeth on the
edge of the flint-knife to symbolize the fact that the flint-knife
cuts or bites. On the other hand, the drawing may symbolize
especially the sacrificial knife, and the instrument may have been
represented with teeth because the Aztecs thought of it as eating
the heart of the victim. Figure 35, c, represents a degenerate
form of this same drawing. In figure 35, d, we have still the
knife, and we have the two lines across it transversely as in a.
Nothing else is present, however, except a round dot in the
center. It would seem almost necessary to conclude that this dot
stands for the face as shown in a. It would be most plausible to
assume that it is a remnant of the eye, all the rest of the face
having dropped off. In similar fashion, the curl in e, and the
still simpler curl in f, would seem to be the remnant of the mouth
shown in a. In p all the facial features have disappeared, and
we have nothing left but the two transverse lines. In h, i, j, k, n
we have a series of simple designs which occupy the place that
the face occupies in a, and which might easily be interpreted as
degenerate forms of the face. There has, however, been more or
less arbitrary elaboration and simplification of these designs.
Perhaps the simplest is k. At the bottom of n, we see a curious
curved design that possibly represents part of a haft or handle.
Figure 35, I, is another of the fanciful drawings which are
rather usual in the Bologne manuscript. We have here the flint-
knife with its face, but in this case a mannikin body has been
fitted to it, and we have a complete person in a curious attitude,
with both hands raised. The mannikin is dressed in waist-cloth
and sandals, with long ornaments of a flexible sort attached to
his wrists, and his body is painted black like that of the priest
in sacrifices. We spoke a moment ago of the curious curl design
which seems (fig. 35, e, f) to represent the mouth of our first
original drawing. It is worth noting that if this is the real mean-
ing of it, the artist in the case of m, figure 35, forgot that original
meaning. He has drawn two of them, one on each side of the
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-9ign$ in Jjftee ManutoHpU 885
blade. These two curls appear again in the case of o, although
this latter is a realistic drawing of a flint-knife, with its handle
and hilt plainly shown.
I should like to draw special attention to p, figure 35. This
design represents the idea ''Flint." There is no question about
its identity, which can be determined from a consideration of the
original series in which it occurs. Moreover, it is only a com-
paratively slight variation from some of the designs which rep-
resent the knife quite realistically (see h, i, etc.). The curved
design at the edge of the blade has simply been expanded rather
unduly. However, the drawing in p has gone so far from the
original that it approaches very close to the Aztec representation
of the ear of maize.
i, Vatican B,
p. 20
j, Borgia,
p. 50
h, Yatioan B,
p. 75
I, Bologne,
p. 2
m, Aubin,
p. 3
n, Vatican B,
p. 94
0, Vatican B,
p. 71
Bain (Quidhuiil)
Sources of drawings (fig. 36):
a, NuttaU (Zonche), p. 37
h, NnttaU (Zonehe), p. 89
e, NnttaU (Zouehe), p. 38
d, Vatican B, p. 96
e, Vatican B, p. 1
/, NuttaU (Zonche), p. 46
g, Vatican B, p. 58
hy Vatican B, p. 1 p, NuttaU (Zoncbe), p. 37
As already noted in several places, the day-sign Bain is rep-
resented by the face of the rain-god. This divinity was called by
the Aztecs TUUoc. A figure of the god is shown in p, figure 36.
There are several things in his appearance and costume in this
drawing that deserve special notice. In the first place he is very
elaborately dressed. He wears not only the customary sandals
and waist-cloth, but also a belt with some elaborate ornament
behind, and on his breast a necklace with a large circular pendant.
At the back of his head there seems to be an additional ornament.
Around his wrists are bracelets, and in his hand he holds what
may perhaps be considered a stalk of maize and a ceremonial
pouch. The head of this divinity, however, is the part of most
importance for our purpose, since the head only appears as a
UniPMtUfofCalifOTiuaP%biicationtinAm.AreKiutdBtlut. [VoLll
<^d
Fig. 36.— o-o. The Day-sign BaIu (QwahuUl) ; p, Beallatie
Drkwing of the Bain-god, TIaloc
1916] Waterman: DelineaUon of Day-tigns in Asiee ManmeripU 887
day-sign. The figure we are discussing seems to represent a
human being impersonating the god. We see in the drawing a
human face, with hair coming down to the ear, and in this ear
a complex ear-ornament. Part of the nose also is clearly visible.
The facial features, however, are in large part obscured by some-
thing suggesting a mask. The eye is covered by a sort of goggle,
and from this goggle a strip twists down over the face, running
along the upper lip. From this strip over the mouth there
depends a set of long tusks or fang-like teeth. This latter feature
is the most characteristic part of the Tlaloc regalia. On the
head, however, is a sort of cap surmounted by an ornament in
two parts, one projecting forward, and the other to the rear.
This ornament is also quite characteristic of the Tlaloc figure as
usually represented. Let us now examine some of the variations
of this figure when used as a day-sign.
The most complete delineation is shown in a, figure 36. Here
we have all the important features of the god realistically repre-
sented. We see the ear-ornament, the goggle eye, the strip or
mask with the tusks attached, and the cap with the two orna-
mental flai)s. In the next drawing, however (&), we have merely
the eye and the strip with its tusks. In c we have an even
simpler form than in b, and in d the eye looks like a simple ring,
and the teeth like slats. The strip that carries the fangs is also
dumi^ in this drawing and much simplified.
The drawings in e, f, g, and h show different forms, and were
chosen with special reference to the ornamental flai)s on the cap.
In 6 the teeth, eye, and strip are all present, but the two flaps
have become just a straight bar. We have a curious bar added
just above the teeth, the origin of which I cannot explain. It
appears, however, in / and h. In f the teeth look like a soft
fringe. In g we have just on the head a straight bar (representing
apparently the cap ornaments), a round eye, and the teeth. The
teeth are not, however, the fangs proper to a Tlaloc figure, as
usually represented, but are the triangular teeth characteristic
of the Water-monster symbol.
In % we see the eye, intersected by a bar, and a simplified set
of teeth. Whether this bar is the cap ornament, or the extra bar
which appears first in e, it is impossible to say.
888 Univer9%tyofCaHf<>r7t4aJhiblicaUan8inAm.AreKandEthn. [VoLll
In i^ j, and k we have these same elements very much simpli-
fied and distorted. In t the teeth, lip-strip, eje, and another
design, perhai)s representing teeth again, are all arranged to
form one horizontal figure. Recognition of this maze of lines as
Tlaloc symbols would be almost impossible, if we did not have
intermediate stages before us. In / the three most persistent
elements appear, teeth, eye, and cap ornament, but the teeth are
very degenerate, hardly more than a set of scallops. In k the
whole design is loose and formless, the teeth square at the end
instead of pointed, and practically all similarity to the realistic
drawing is lost. In { we have another one of the fanciful draw-
ings from the Bologne Codex. We have the various parts of the
Tlaloc figure, cap with fiaps, ear-ornament, goggle eye, and
mouth. The whole takes on, however, an entirely new appear-
ance. On the face appears a large patch of black face-paint.
The mouth is without teeth of any kind, although the teeth are
certainly the most characteristic of all the Tlaloc features.
In m we have a curious design from the Aubin manuscript.
The goggle eye, the cap, and the fringe of long teeth are all there.
The artist has drawn them, however, upside down. In n again
we have all the parts, but arranged to give quite a different effect
from any of the other drawings. The teeth, moreover, are of the
Water-monster variety. In o we have a drawing that might
easily be mistaken for the Water-monster symbol. It would
almost seem that the artist had the Water-monster figure in the
back of his mind. The drawing shows the goggle eye and the
curved lip-strip. The teeth, however, have lost their long taper-
ing shape, and the artist has made them follow around up the
curve of the strip, giving almost exactly the effect of Water-
monster's upturned snout. We have, however, behind the eye,
an ear which would not be in place on the Water-monster design.
Altogether, there is none of the symbols which is more com-
plicated and distinctive than the representation of the Bain
symbol, and yet there is no design which shows more marked
variability or greater similarity to entirely independent symbols.
1S16] Watentan: Delin«aluM of Dajt-aignt in Aetee ManutoHpU S8S
Fig. 87.— a-o, The Dar-rigu Ftoww {Zoehitl) ; p, Bealiatlii
Drawing of a Plant in BloMom
890 University of CtUifamia Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [VoL 11
Flower (Xochitl)
Sources of drawings (fig. 37):
a, Nuttall (Zouehe)
h, Nuttall (Zouche)
c, Nuttall (Zouehe)
d, Nuttall (Zouche)
Cf Nuttall (Zouehe)
f, Nuttall (Zouehe)
g, Nuttall (Zouehe)
h, Pejervary,
f P-43
i, Nuttall (Zouehe),
p. 2
, p. 53
/, Nuttall (Zouche),
p. 15
1 ?• 3
k, Aubin,
p. 4
1 p.43
I, Nuttall (Zouehe),
p. 76
, p. 51
m, Nuttall (Zouche),
p. 6
, p. 52
n, Aubin,
p. 6
, p. 16
0, Nuttall (Zouehe),
p. 19
p. 17
p, Pejervary,
p. 5
Figcu*^ 37 represents the various forms of the day-sign Flower.
There is considerable variety in these drawings, but they all rep-
resent obviously the same thing, namely a blossom. The most
usual outline is perhaps that of the fleur-de-lis. This appears,
for example, in a and b. In some cases, however, the blossom
is quite painstakingly portrayed with stem, petals and stamens.
(See, for example, e, f, and n.) In other cases this flower figure
becomes so simplified that it can scarcely be recognized at alL
The most extreme case of this is perhaps h, in which all likeness
to the flower is lost. In one or two cases in the manuscripts the
blossom is represented in a geometric fashion. An example of
this is shown in /. The most realistic forms are possibly e and
n, where the various parts of the blossom are shown in their
natural relations. In j, k, and o, however, the drawings become
quite grotesque and are hardly recognizable at all.
Figure 37, p, shows a plant in blossom. The similarity be-
tween these blossoms and those drawn to represent the day-sign
Flower is so marked that a case of identity seems to be estab-
lished. The plant represented in p is apparently a cactus, and
in all probability the ordinary * * prickly-pear, ' ' in Aztec nochtU,
that is quite common on the Mexican plateau. This seems to be
indicated by the way in which the oval leaves are joined. That
the plant is the cactus is suggested also by the presence of the
long thorns. As in many cases, there is represented at the
bottom of the plant the root. It seems altogether likely, then,
that the Aztec day-sign Flower represents really the flower of
the prickly-pear cactus.
1916] Waterman: DelineaUim of Pay-signs in Aetec ManuscripU 391
e
g
CCCC
)
I
m
Fig. 38. — ^Drawings showing the Borrowing of Characterisiics
between the Various Daj-signs
Sources of drawings (fig, 38):
a, Nnttall (Zonehe), p. 71
h, Nuttall (Zonche), p. 12
e, Vatican B, p. 88
d, Fejervary, p. 6
e, Nuttall (Zonche), p. 11
/, Fejervary, p. 9
g, Borgia, p. 57
K
Borgia,
p. 64
i,
Borgia,
p. 5
i,
Bologne,
p. 3
fc,
Vatican B,
p. 81
h
Vatican B,
p. 62
m,
Vatican B,
p. 96
w,
Vatican B,
p. 28
392 Univeriiiy of Calif artUa PubUeations in Am, JYch, and Ethn. [Vol 11
BORROWING OP CHABAOTBRISTIOS
Mention has been made in so many places of the borrowing of
characteristics between different day-signs that the matter may
deserve special illustration. Figure 38 shows a number of draw-
ings in which this borrowing has taken place. These are par-
ticularly picturesque examples and will serve perhaps to conclude
the whole matter. In a and b of figure 38 we have two typical
dayndgns. The first of these, a, represents the monkey quite
realistically. It will be seen at once, however, that he has bor-
rowed the flat two-flapped cap that is characteristic normally of
the Rain sign (b). Monkey, it will be remembered, is represented
normally with a crest (see e of the present figure). The presence
of the cap, then, in a is simply a case of outright borrowing. On
the other hand, in c, d, and e of figure 38, we have a case where
the monkey loans one of his features. The first of these draw-
ings (d) represents the day-sign Death and consists primarily
of a skull. The skull is topped, however, by a crest which has
been borrowed obviously from the monkey (see e of this figure).
The monkey is the only animal normally represented with this
feature. It will be remembered, too, that one of the characteristic
things about the monkey is the presence of an ear. This monkey
ear appears quite inappropriately on the skull shown in c. In
the Death symbol shown in d, an ear-ornament belonging to the
wind-god has been borrowed (see /, figure 36). In d, therefore,
the artist borrowed two features, the crest from the monkey and
also the wind-god's ear-ornament.
In g, h, and t we have a curious example of borrowing, g
represents the symbol for water, which is a dish with water pour-
ing out of it, and a little circular object in the center representing
a shell. In t we see a typical representation of rain-god, the
central feature of which is a semi-circular eye. Figure A is a
representation, like g, of water. Instead of a shell, however, the
artist represents in its midst an eye which he has apparently
borrowed from the Rain symbol.
In j, figure 38, we have a representation of the wind-god. He
has the usual wind-god's snout with the opened mouth and an
eye. He has, however, borrowed from the skull sign (see k) an
1916] Waterman: DeUneaiion of Daysigm in Jjgtee Maniueripis 893
additional eye, and the hooked rear portion of the skull. We
have then in i a eurionsly complicated and rather meaningless
%are — ^a wind-god with beak and ear-ornament topped by a
cranium and a loose eye borrowed from the symbol of Death.
In the last three drawings of the figures I, m, and n, we see
a curious case of interchanging of traits. Let us direct attention
first of all to the water-monster drawing (n). The important
things here are an upcurved snout ornamented with big tri-
angular teeth. In { we have a representation of the rain-god
standing for the day-sign Bain. In drawing this latter sjrmbol,
however, the artist borrowed two things. In the first place he
borrowed the teeth from the water-monster, and in the second
place, the pointed cap or mitre from the god of wind. On the
other hand, the wind-god here represented (m) is shown with
an upcurved beak, obviously an imitation of the water-monster;
and this curved beak is ornamented with typical water-monster
teeth.
CONCLUSION
I should say by way of summary concerning the general ten-
dencies which operate in the delineation of the day-signs, that
there is, in the first place, wide variation in type. It must be
noted that this variation is not due to historical development;
on the contrary, it is due in large part to conscious elaboration
or abbreviation on the part of each artist. We sometimes find
two widely variant forms in one day-sign, one perfect, the other
degenerate, side by side on the same page of one manuscript.
The difiSculty in recognizing the day-signs, where there is any
difficulty, arises from the fact that there are no hard and fast
criteria for the recognition of the symbols. One symbol may
gradually change until it closely resembles another. To render
this approximation still more marked, we have the curious bor-
rowing which has just been illustrated, in which perfect features
from one day-sign are transplanted and appear entire in the
drawings of another. The amount of variation is so great that
an almost unlimited number of examples could be chosen. The
day-signs as they are drawn in the manuscripts offer many
examples of divergence.
394 University of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Ethn, [Vol. 11
BIBLIOGRAPHY
AZTEC MANUSOBIPTS
Aubin TonalamatL [A facsimile manuscript issued as an addendum to
Seler's work of the same title.] 1900-1901. Cited as AuUn.
Codice Messicano di Bologna (Codice Cospiano). Manuscrito piet6rico de
los Antiguos Nauas que se conserva en la Biblioteca de la Uni-
versidad de Bolonia. Beproducido en fotocromgrafia & expensas de
8. E. el Duque de Loubat. Boma, 1898. Cited as Bologna.
Codice Messicano Borgiano del Museo Etnografico della 8. Congregazione
di Propaganda Fide. Beprodotto in fotocromografia a spese di 8. E.
i) Duca di Loubat a cura della Biblioteca Yaticana. Roma, 1898.
Cited as BorgU.
Codex Ferj^rvdry-Mayer. Manuscrit mexicain precolombien des Free
Public Museums de Liverpool (M 12014). Published by le Due de
Loubat. Paris, 1901. Cited as Fejervary.
Codex Nuttall. Facsimile of an ancient Mexican Codex belonging to
Lord Zouche of Harynworth with an introduction by Zelia NuttalL
Peabody Museum, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., 1902.
Cited as Nuttall (Zonche).
H Manoscritto Messicano Vaticauo 3773. Beprodotto in fotocromagrafia
a spece di 8. E. Duca di Loubat a cura della Biblioteca Yaticana.
Boma, 1896. Cited as Vatican B.
Zouche Manuscript (see ''Codex Nuttall")*
RECENT WORKS REFERRED TO IN THE TEXT
ANTiQt)KDADB8 MKXI0ANA8. 8ee Chavero, 1892.
Bandiuib, a. F.
1880a. On the art of war and mode of warfare of the ancient Mexicans.
(Reports of the Peabody Museum of Harvard University,
vol. 2, pp. 95-162.)
1880b. On the distribution and tenure of land and the customs with
respect to inheritance among the ancient Mexicans. (Reports
of the Peabody Museum of Harvard University, vol. 2, pp.
385-449.)
1880c. On the social organization and mode of government of the ancient
Mexicans. (Beports of the Peabody Museum of Harvard
University, voL 2, pp. 557-700.)
Bknevents, Tobibio de. 8ee Toribio.
Bkuohat, H.
1912. Manuel d 'Archaeologie (Am^ricaine (Am^rique pr^historique —
Civilizations disparues.) Paris.
Bowditch, C. P.
1910. The numeration, calendar systems and astronomical knowledge
of the Mayas. Cambridge.
1916] Waterman: Delineation of Day-signs in Aztec Manuscripts 395
Bbinton, D. G.
1885. The annals of the CakchiqueU. (Library of Aboriginal Amer-
ican Literatore, number 6.) Philadelphia.
1893. The native calendars of Mexico and Central America. Phila-
delphia.
Chavero, Alfredo.
1876. Calendario Azteca. Ensayo Arqueol6gico. Ed. 2. Mexico.
1892. Antigiiedades Mexicanas (editor). Published by the Junta
Golombina. Mexico.
CLAVIOEROy F. X.
1870-1881. Storia Antica del Messico. 4 vols. Cesena.
Cb6nica de la S. Provincia del SantIssimo Nombre de Jesus de Guatte-
MALA. Anonymous manuscript of 1683.
Enock, C. Reginald
1909. Mexico. Its ancient and modem civilization, etc. London and
Leipsic.
Fabrega, Jos£ Lino.
1899. Interpretation del Codice Borgiano. (Mexico, Museo Nacional,
Anales [first series], vol. 5.)
FdRSTEMANN, E.
1893. Die Zeitperioden der Mayas. (Globus, vol. 63. Reprinted in
Bull. 28, Bur. Am. Ethn., pp. 493-498.)
1895. Die mittelamerikanische Tonalamatl. (Globus, vol. 67, pp. 283-
285. Reprinted in Bull. 28, Bur. Am. Ethn., pp. 527-533.)
Goodman, J. T.
1897. The archaic Maya inscriptions. (Biologia Centrali-Americana.
Archaeology. Appendix. See Maudslay, 1889-1902.)
Humboldt, A. von
1816. Vues des CordiUeres et monuments des peoples indigenes de
1 'Am^rique. Paris.
ICAZBALCETA, J. GaRGIA
1858-1870. Coleccion de documentos para la historia de Mexico. 3
vols. Mexico.
1885-1892. Nueva coleccion de documentos para la historia de Mexico.
5 vols. Mexico.
JoNGHS, Ed. de
1906. Die altmexikanische Kalendar. (Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologic, vol.
38, pp. 485-506.)
Joyce, T. A.
1914. Mexican Archaeology. London.
EiNOSBOBOUGH, LORD
1831. Antiquities of Mexico: comprising facsimiles of ancient Mexican
paintings and hieroglyphics . . . together with the Monu-
ments of New Spain by M. Dupaix. ... 9 vols. London.
Leon y Gama, A.
1790. Descripcion historica y cronol6gica de las piedras que se hal-
laron en la plaza principal de Mexico. Mexico.
a96 Un^enU^ofikMfornkiPMblieatumimAwLAreKandEilm. [YoLU
MaOODBDY, GlOBOK CbUKT
1910. An Astee "Cslendftr Stone" in the Yale UniTenity Mnsenm.
(Ameriean Anthropologist, n^, toL 12, pp. 481-496.)
MAUDSLiLT, A. P.
1889-1902. Biologia OentraH- Americana, or eontribntione to the knowl-
ledge of the flora and fanna of Central America. Arch-
aeology. 4 vols, of platee, 1 voL of text and an appendix.
London.
MoroUNLL See Toribio de Benevente.
NUTTALL, ZiLIA
1891. The atlatl or spear-thrower of the ancient Mexicans. (Arch-
aeological and ethnological papers of the Peabody Mosenm
of Harvard University, voL 1, pp. 173-207.)
1901. The fundamental principles of Old and New World civilizations.
A comparative research based on a study of the ancient
Mexican religions, sociological and calendrical systems.
(Archaeological and Ethnological Papers of the Peabody
Mnsenm of Harvard University, voL 2.)
1908. The book of the life of the ancient Mexicans, containing an
acconnt of their rites and superstitions. An anonymous
Hispano-Mexican manuscript preserved at the Biblioteca
Narionale Centrale, Florence, Italy. [Sometimes called the
Codex Magliabecchi.] Part 1, introduction and facsimile.
University of California, Berkeley, CaL
1904. Periodic adjustments in the ancient Mexican calendar system.
(American Anthropologist, n.s., voL 6, pp. 486-500.)
1906. Problems in Mexican archaeology. (American Anthropologist,
n.s., voL 8, pp. 133-149.)
1910. The island of Sacrificios. (American Anthropologist, n.8., vol.
12, pp. 257-295.)
Obosoo t Bebra, Manuxl
1880. Historia antigua y de la conquista de Mexico. 4 vols. Mexico.
PbAaful, Antonio
1885. Nombres geogr&ficos de Mexico. Catalogo alfab^ico de los
nombres de lugar pertinentes al idioma * ' Nahuatl. ' ' Estudio
jerogliflco de las matriculas de las tributos del Codex Mendo-
cino . . . Dibujo de las AntigQedades Mexicanas de Lord
Kingsborough. Mexico.
1890. Monumentos del arte Mexieano antiguo. Omamentacion, mit-
ologfa, tributos, y monumentos. Berlin.
Sahaoun, Bxbnaboino
1829. Historica General [Universal] de las cosas de Nueva Espafia.
Mexico. [An independent edition is printed in Kingsborough,
London, 1831, voL 7. A French translation was edited by
Jourdanet and Simten, Paris, 1880.]
1916] Waterman: DeUneatian of Day-iigns in Jjrteo ManuioHpU S97
SZLKR, EdUABD
1891. Zur mezikaidsehen Chronologie mit besonderer BeruekBiehtigiiiig
des zapotekischen Kalendars. (Zeitsehrift ffir Ethnologie,
voL 28, pp. 89-133. Translated in Bull. 28, Bur. Am. Ethn.,
pp. 1-^5. Beprinted in 1902-1908, voL 1, pp. 507-554.)
1898. Die mexikanischen Bilderhandschriften Alexander von Hum-
boldts in der Eoniglichen Bibliothek zu Berlin. Berlin. (Be-
printed in 1902-1908, voL 1, pp. 162-300. Translated in
BnU. 28, Bar. Am. Ethn., pp. 123-230.)
1898. Die Yennsperiode in den Bildersehriften der Codex Borgia
Gnippe. (Yerhandlnngen der Berliner (^esellBchaft ffir
Anthropologie, Etbnologie nnd Urgeeehichte. Beprinted in
1902-1908, voL 1, pp. 618-667. Translated in BnlL 28, Bnr.
Am. Bthn., pp. 123-229.)
1900-1901. The Tonalamatl of the Aubin Golleetion, an old Mexican
pictnre manuscript in the Paris National Library (Mannserits
Mexieains No. 18-19). Published hj the Duke of Loubat,
with introduction and explanatory text by Dr. Eduard Beler.
Berlin and London. English translation by A. H. Eeane.
1902-1908. Gesammelte Abhandlungen zur amerikanischen Sprach-
und Alterthumskunde. 3 vols. Berlin.
1903. Die Eorrekturen der Jahreslange und die L&nge der Yenns-
periode in den mexikanischen Bilderschriften. (Zeitschrift
ftir Ethnologic, toL 35, pp. 27-49. Beprinted in 1902-1908,
vol. 3, pp. 199-220.)
Sebna, Jacinto de la
1899. Mexico, Museo Nacional, Anales, vol. 5.
Spenob, Lewis
1912. The civilization of ancient Mexico. Cambridge, University
Press. (New York, G. Putnam & Sons.)
Spinden, H. J.
1913. A study of Maya art. (Memoirs of the Peabody Museum of
Harvard University, voL 6.)
Teenauz-Compans, H.
1837-1841. Yoyages, relations, et mdmoires origineaux pour servir a
I'histoire de la decouvert^ de PAmMque. 21 vols. Paris.
Tezozomoo, Fernando de Alvabado
Cr6nica Mexicana (see Eingsborough, 1831, vol. 9). Translated into
French by Temaux-Compans, Paris, 1855.
Thomas, Cybus
1897-1898a. Mexican calendar systems. (19th Beport of the Bureau
of American Ethnology, part 2, pp. 693-819.)
1897-1898b. Numeral S3rBtems of Mexico and Central America. (19th
Beport of the Bureau of American Ethnology, part 2, pp.
853-955.)
TOBQUSICADA, JUAN DE
1615. . . . libros rituales y monarquia Indiana, etc. Sevilla. Ed. 2,
edited by A. Gonzales-Barcia, Madrid, 1723.
398 Unhemty of California Pubhoations in Am, AreK and Ethn, [Vol. 11
TGumo DB Bbneventb (called Motounu.)
HiBtoria de los Indios de Naeva Espafia (see Kingsborongh, 1831, voL
9, where parts of it are printed. Another edition, complete,
will be found in Garcia Icazbaleeta, 1858-1870, voL 1.)
Tylob, E. B.
1861. Anahnac, or Mexico and the Mexicans, ancient and modem.
London.
Vbttia, M. Febnakdbz
1907. Los calendarios Mexicanos. Mexico, published by the Museo
Nacional.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 1 1, No. 7, pp. 399-472 March 9, 1916
THE MUTSUN DIALECT OF COSTANOAN
BASED ON THE VOCABULARY
OF DE LA CUESTA
BY
J. ALDEN MASON
CONTENTS
PAGE
iNTBODUCnON 400
Pabt L Stbuotubb 402
General CbaracteriBties . .- 402
Phonetic Syf tern .« 402
Parts of Speech — 405
Etjmological Suffixes of Nouns 406
Morphological Suffixes of Nouns 408
Pronouns . 411
Verbs 411
Et3anological Sufixes of Verbs 412
Morphological Suffixes of Verbs ....~.»^..^.^..^.»,..»..^........... .......^ 415
Adjectives ^ 425
Particles 426
Pabv IL Classifizd List op Stbus . . 427
Nouns ................................M..^........^....».~.^»,...^ ....^..^.M.^........ — ..^.....^ 427
Animals ..^... » .....^............ — . ^......... ^ »,.^........ ...... 427
AJ%^ ffmm 1 M A v^H .................................................................................................. ^K«fv
Mj\KL^ JTvLiMVO .»«»...».».....««......«....»....«...».»■.»».».».«.........«.....«.«........«...............»» 40w
Manufactures, Instruments .m.^...^...........................^...^.^......... 433
Natural Phenomena ........................................~.... .......... — ........ — .....^ 435
Words of More Abstract Significance 436
Terms of Belationship and Personal Categories 437
400 Uwweriity of CaUfamia Publications in Am, Areh, and Ethn. [ YoL 11
PAfil
ProAOUiiB . 439
DemonstratiTes 440
lDt6rrogatiT6 Pronoiins .~. — ....~..~..m~............~^~..^~.^^....~.»~.~~«. 440
V«i>Ka 44.1
JE1LUJ vw l/X V OO •>••»•••— •—^— ♦•—••»•♦»—•—••••••••••*•••■■••••»•••»•••••••■••■■■■■•• ♦^•^ *—•••■■••••■•■*•■•** *VA
JQL^A ▼ vX i^O »♦♦»♦<♦»»»•»»»—*••••■■••••••••»»••••••••••♦—••—■■•■■■■■•»••»••••••••*••••■**••— •••■•■■■••■•■■*»**•• ^E\#\/
Descriptive and Miaoellaneoiis Adverbs 467
Postscript - ~ 470
INTBODUCTION
A century ago Father Felipe Arroyo de la Cuesta, one of the
most earnest and indefatigable members of the order of St.
Francis, collected a mass of 2884 words, phrases, and sentences
from the language of the Mutsun Indians, spoken at his mission
of San Juan Bautista near Monterey, California. At about the
same time he composed a grammar of the language, which is one
of the branches of the Gostanoan linguistic group. These two
manuscripts were sent by Alexander S. Taylor to the Smithsonian
Institute, which loaned them for publication to John G. Shea, in
whose Library of American lAnguisHcs they appear as volumes
IV and vm, 1861 and 1862. Together they form one of the fullest
and most complete collections of data extant on a Pacific Coast
language. There is little doubt that the missionary knew the
language well and interpreted its psychology and spirit fairly
correctly. In his grammar there appears less strict adherence to
the form and structure of Latin grammar, less subconscious
premise of Latin as the standard par excellence than is generally
found in grammars of this time and type. Nevertheless, in spite
of the comparative excellence of the grammar, but because of its
lack of scientific arrangement, unphonetic orthography, and the
foreign tongue, it is deemed better to rearrange and formulate
the grammar, using as a basis the phrases of the vocabulary.
The phrase-book is likewise unfortunate in that it is at present
almost inaccessible to the modem student, due to its faulty ar-
rangement. This is done alphabetically according to the initial
1916] Mason: MuUun Dialect of Coatanoan 401
letter of the sentence, the various stems being scattered through-
out the nearly three thousand sentences. The same difficulties
of unphonetic orthography and Spanish language likewise obtain
here.
Several years ago Dr. Eroeber had the majority of the
phrases comprising the more important of the sentences copied
to a card-index. I have recently spent some time in working over
the material thus secured, arranging cards according to stems and
isolating grammatical particles. The following paper embodies
the results of this research.
While the grammar of De la Cuesta is the most complete ever
published on a Gostanoan language, several more scientific
treatises have been produced in the last few years, principally
by the University of California. These are, ''Languages of the
Coast of California South of San Francisco, ' '^ and ' ' The Chumash
and Costanoan Languages."' Other pertinent works are ''Pho-
netic Constituents of the Native Languages of California,'"
"The Native Languages of California,"^ and "New Linguistic
Families in California."*
The present paper consists of two parts, first an exposition of
the etymological and morphological elements upon which the
structure of the language is based, and second a list of the various
stems of all classes found in the material, though, since not all
of the phrases were transferred to cards, this does not entirely
exhaust all those in the original phrase-book. These are appended
partly as reference for the examples of morphological and ety-
mological word-structure previously cited, but more particularly
as an aid to the larger work of comparison of Mutsun with
kindred Costanoan and other extra-group languages. The recent
proposal of the "Penutian" linguistic family, to which Mutsun
would belong, renders such a glossary invaluable for purposes of
comparison.
1 A. L. Kroeber, present series, n, 29-80, 1904.
a Ibid., IX, 287-271, 1910.
t Ibid,, X, 1-12, 1911.
4B. B. Dixon and A. L. Kroeber, American Anthropologist, n.s., ▼,
1-26, 1903.
5 Ibid., TLB., XV, 647-655, 1918.
408 Unwenity of Calif amia PubUeaiions in Awl Areh. and Ethn. [VoL 11
PABTL 8TEUCTUEE
General Characteeistics
The surprisingly close similarity between the general morpho-
logic structure and 8pr<ichgeisi of Costanoan and other languages
of its type and Indo-European has already been noted but is
none the less striking. The main characteristics of the language
may be thus summarized. Phonetic simplicity and comparative
unimportance of rules of phonetic change; complete lack of in-
corporation, either nominal or pronominal; complete absence of
prefixes; independent pronouns; nominal case endings; and com-
parative simplicity of categories of mood, tense and number,
necessitating an immense number of dissimilar stems of relatively
slight difference in significance.
Phonetio System
The phonetic system of Mutsun and of Costanoan appears to
be relatively simple. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, all appearing
open in quality. The Spanish orthogri^hy is perfectly satis-
factory for expressing these sounds and no change has been made
in transcription. Barely a vowel is found in the phrase-book with
circumflex accent and very rarely with acute accent, but as no
uniformity in thus spelling any word is evident, and as the
phonetic variation thus expressed is not described, such marks
have been disregarded.
The consonants seem to be only tv, y, m, n, I, r, $, c, x, h, p,
t, tf k, and tc. tn, n, I, r, 8, p, and t (dental or interdental) are
probably correctly expressed in De la Cuesta's Spanish orthog-
raphy and are left unchanged, tu is generally expressed in
Spanish by hu with following voweL De la Cuesta writes hiM,
hue, hut, and once hiio. He further uses often gua, giie, gut, and
guo which denote in Spanish gtua, gwe, gwi and gwo. There is
no sonant g in Costanoan, though the k has an intermediate
quality. We find, however, that, though the hu- and gu- ortho-
graphies are each generally used consistently for certain stems,
1916] Ma$on: MuttUH Diaieet of Coatanaan 408
there are occasional cases of identity, e.g., guaUun, hualiun,
htwlon, **be envious;" huUo, guUo, ^^signal *yes' with the eyes;"
huipa, gilipa, * * invite ' ' ; gueren, weren,^ * * rabbit. ' ' Similarly the
gu- orthography without the diaresis, gue, gut, is found often.
This denotes pure sonant g in Spanish, a sound missing in Cos-
tanoan. Instances of a stem both with and without the diaresis
are common, e.g., gueiero, giieierogmin, ** great," and it is prob-
able that such omissions of the diaresis are accidental. Therefore
all Au- and gu- orthographies have been changed uniformly to w.
Medial w is probably expressed by u with following vowel, but
it often is difficult to decide whether a given u is vocalic or
consonantal.
y is expressed correctly except in certain combinations; De la
Cuesta's n probably denotes ny. (In a few cases of doubt it has
been retained as n, as in suffix pan.) i and y are sometimes inter-
changed, as yttug, ittug, ''a seed." Here also it is often difficult
to distinguish vowel and consonant.
c (sh) is not definitely distinguished by De la Cuesta but is
suggested by certain sh, sch orthographies. Had he distinguished
the sound he would probably have written it with an a; in accord
with older Spanish usage.
X (palatal surd fricative) presents some difficulties. Initially
it is doubtless represented by ja, ge, gi, jo, ju. Medially the same
orthography is utilized. Final x seems to be represented by g,
e.g., uming, mu^ix,^ **wolf ;" eg, ex,^ ** squirrel." De la Cuesta's
g in consonantal combinations offers the most uncertain of the
phonetic problems, tigsin, ** skunk," is checked by Kroeber's
tixsin,^ rendering it practically certain that g in this case repre-
sents X. On the other hand, g before m and n probably represents
k. Thus cma and gma are both used as a plural suffix, gne is a
common passive suffix. Eroeber has nimikne wdkai,^ ''he hit
me," doubtless the same suffix. Eroeber transcribes tansagte,
**ten," tansakte, but atsiagnis, atsiaxnis.* Substitution has here
been made on the theory that g before a surd represents the con-
tinuant X, while before a sonant or intermediate it represents the
palatal stop k.''
« A. L. Kroeber, MS.
7 See postscript below, p. 470.
404 UnwenityofCdUforniaP%blieati<m9inAfn.AreKamdSthn. [YoLll
Initial and medial h may be silent, as in modem Spanish, bat
since it is regolarly employed in certain stems, and as both h
and X are found in most Costanoan texts, it is retained.
t is the tongae-blade t found in the Costanoan and neighbor-
ing languages. De la Cuesta wrote variously tr, th, thr, thrs, trs,
etc. It is often difficult to decide whether the last consonant of
the complex is a distinct sound or not.
Following Spanish usage, k is denoted by De la Cuesta by c
before a, o and u, and by qu before e and i.
The affricative to is regularly written by De la Cuesta ch but
often confused with f.
Doubled letters, both consonants and vowels, are frequently
met with in De la Cuesta 's orthography. As these are foreign to
the Spanish language, except in the cases of II and rr^ it is as-
sumed that the device is employed to express length or duration
of the sound and is therefore expressed in the present paper as
the simple sound followed by inverted period, in accord with
modem usage.
The Spanish language is, on the whole, a far better medium
for the recording of unfamiliar languages by an untrained ear
than the unrevised English. In the great majority of cases there
is no question as to the exact phonetic rendering of the native
words, and in a great number of cases they may be left in their
original forms. Only in cases where sounds unfamiliar to the
Spanish ear occur is difficulty found. Such are w. the peculiar
tongue-blade i common to certain California languages, and un-
Castillian combinations of sounds. Little difficulty has therefore
been encountered in transcribing the native words to modem
phonetic orthography, which is doubtless an advisable procedure.
The chances for frequent error in so many transcriptions and
changes in authorship are too great to allow any phonetic dis-
crimination or any elucidation of the finer and less evident points
of the language. Shea's impression is replete with errors of
transcription from the Padre's manuscript, and these may be
increased in the present digest. Many words are spelt variantly,
sometimes on the authority of the original, at other times mani-
festly due to improper reading of the manuscript. This is par-
ticularly true with regard to the easily confused m, w, u, and ♦.
1916] Ma$on: Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan 405
Nevertheless, a few pertinent remarks may be made on Mutsnn
phonetic laws. The language is phonetically smooth and simple,
the average word being an orderly alternation of consonant and
vowel. Either consonant or vowel may begin or end a word, but
consonantal combinations seem to be missing initially or finally,
the few recorded cases being probably due to error. Medially
certain combinations are permitted, though it is not easy to de-
termine these. Thus, lalak-na, **go for geese," becomes by meta-
thesis lalkana. Similarly, certain suffixes are varied in order to
avoid unwieldly and harsh complexes, as kai^, but men^e (in-
terrogative) ; uta-kma, but ims-fnak (plural) . There appears also
to be a feeling for vocalic harmony, and some suffixes are varied
to the end that their vowel may correspond and harmonize with
the characteristic or stem vowel of the word. Thus sumi-ri-ni,
but towo-roste; xanorksa, but tare-kse. Again certain vowels
seem to be dominants and survive in assimilation or elision. Thus
the past tense suffixes -is and -in are dominant and -kne^s be-
comes 'knis; -pu-in, -pin. A thorough phonetic study of the lan-
guage would doubtless codify all these rules and elucidate many
others.
Pabts of Speech
Mutsun recognizes as parts of speech the noun, pronoun, verb,
adjective and particle, though, as in English, the division is a
more or less artificial one, the lines of demarcation are not hard
and fast, and it is sometimes difficult to assign properly a given
word, which may not uncommonly function in several categories
without change in form.
Nouns
The great majority of Mutsun nominal stems are dissyllabic
or trisyllabic. A few of the most common stems, such as many
body-parts, are monosyllabic, and a very few apparently poly-
syllabic stems are found. Nominal stems appear never to be
compounded and are varied only by the addition of a few suf-
fixes. Stems appear to begin and end with either vowel or con-
sonant without discrimination, and there seem to be no categories
of stem types, such as for animate or inanimate, natural or arti-
406 Univer$itjf of Calif amia PmbUeat%on$ in Afn. Arek. and Sthn. [Vol. 11
ficial. That is, it is not possible to infer from the form of the
word or from its suffix the category to which it belongs. Yet there
are a few etymological suffixes in occasional use. Those making
verbs are given below; those forming nouns follow here.
Etymological Suffixes of Nouns
1. -n, reiuUative, infinitive. Suffixed to verbal or other
stems denotes result or phenomenon of an act.
noBo-n
sike-n
paine-n
of»io-ii
•awe-n
breath, spirit, soul
flatus
menstmatioii
wound
•onf
Possible cognate :
tor-on
zasi-om
mira-mi-n
ef(x)e-n
isme-n
amole
shame
gift
dress
sun
2. "S, 'S-e, ('Se, -si), causative, abstractive. Suffixed to verbal
or other stems denotes cause or phenomenon of an act, and is
generally used with words of abstract significance.
remedy
language
a dream
an embrace
pain
sleepiness
una
ritea
isut
kapal(a)
kai
ete
xemfso
cure
speak
dream
embrace
hurt
sleep
become angry
silent
una-s
ritca-s*e
isut-s*e
kapala-si
kais
e^se
xa-s
xenkofst*e
anger
silence
Probable cognate is :
3. 'pis, (-mis, -sis), instrumental. Suffixed to verbal or other
stems denotes instrument or means for the performance of an
act.
xewe
cast shadow, re-
flect
xewe-pis
shadow, reflection
at-ue
watch
at-as-pis
lookout
eyes
beard, shave
eyes-pis
beard-napkin
v.<
1916]
Mason: MuUun Dialed of Coatanoan
407
itok
cleanse
itok-pis
table-cloth, napkin
TOTO(S)
play
Toro-mis
toy
isme-n
son
isme-sis
clock
.sukoma
smoke
snkumn-s-pis
end of cigar
4. -msa, i-nsa), instrumental. SnfSxed to verbal or other
steins denotes instrument or means for the performance of an act.
humiri baptize humiri-msa
ene ¥mte ene-msa
ama eat ama-nsa
tcala urinate tcala-msa bladder
iisi owe isi-msa debts
baptismal font
eraser, blotter
meals
Probably also :
nnnpimsa
handkerchief
rotemsa
papers
siamalpimsa
confession
yisnwaninsa
corns
5. -pan, -pan, agentive. SufiSxed to verbal stems denotes the
more or less habitual doer of an act or the exponent of a quality.
yume-pafi liar
mazer-pan one who makes sport of another with
the eyes
notio-pafi one who denies the truth
nimi-pail beater
yoso-pail lustful, lecherous
latue-pan one who is always making signs with
the tongue
ol*ue-pafi one who signals with his hand
pitciwi-pan cleanser of hair
li-pan hider
nimi-pan striker, hitter
Other isolated examples of etymological nominal suffixes are :
ruk
upu
usupu
mai-xi
mira
koxo
pux-ta
cord
ruk-esma
doubled cord
buy
upu-nsatpa
payment
fast
usupu-hai
Lent, time of fast-
ing
laugh
mai-t
a laugh, laughing
give present
mira-x, mira-
mi-n
gift
load of meat
koxo-enis
bringer of load of
meat
make bread
pux-uts
bread
408 Unwer$ityofCaUforniaPubUeati<mtinAm.Areh.andEtJm. [YoLU
krak-e
name^eall
krakat
a name
•oko-te
laarel
8oko-tei
laarel fruit
rite
decorate with
rite-ni
•
feminine adorn
beads
ment
mnkiir-iikiqpu
act like a
woman
maknr-ma
wobum
Reduplication seems to play an unimportant role in Mutsun
morphology. A few words are found in which the first syllable is
reduplicated but there is no evidence that the phenomenon is of
any morphological importance. Practically all of the instances
occur with names of animals or plants.
mnmuri
mumolalnk
lalak
Inklnk
kakari
BoksoCan
porpor
totoloa
fly
butterfly
geese
geese
raven
sensonte
Cottonwood
plantain
Morphological Suffixes of Nouns
The Mutsun language is a comparatively simple one morpho-
logically, being quite comparable to modem European languages
in this respect. But few changes in inflection for the declension
of nouns and the conjugation of verbs are found. These will be
noted below.
The noun is inflected for differences in number, case, and in
some cases even for person. Gtender is, as commonly in Ameri-
can languages, not recognized, unless in sporadic etymological
categories.
Many, if not all, animate nouns take a pluralizing suffix.
This is:
6. 'ktna, -mdk, plural.
sini boy
atsia
girl
sini-kma, sin-
boys
ksma
ataspis-mak
lookouts
nta-kma
•
parents
nhinis-mak
fishermen
uras-mak
hole-diggers
ataiai-kma
girU
1916] Mamm: Mutsun Dialed of Costanoan 409
pasear
(Sp.)
pa«6ar-i8-mak
passen-bj
watcir*on-inak
the Guaehironos
ka
daughter
ka-kma
daughters
inifl
son
inis-mak
sons
It is aLso used with substantive adjectives.
'kma is doubtless the original fonn and is used after a vowel,
-mdk being employed after a consonant to avoid harsh complexes,
though there are exceptions.
There appears to be no dual number.
The various nominal case relations are expressed hy suffixes
which may be interpreted as postpositions, but are probably as
correctly explained as true case inflections. These are :
7. -was, 'Uas, compositiondl, partitive, material,
ores- was tap hide of bear
xat*-was tote meat of beUy
xnrek-war mk cord of sinew
orpe-was etse middle of night
8. 'tne, terminative.
patre-me into the house of the Padre
me-me to yon, with you
9. 'Se, -B-e, -ne, -he, objective.
aisa-ne (s^^) them
kairka-s*e (try) pinole
moro-s*e (hunt) moles
krakat-se (know) name
kapzan-ne (strike) three
inu-se (take) road
soton-he (blow) fire
etc.
10. -sun, -sum, -urn, instrumental.
ak-sun (die) of hunger
mait-sun (die) of laughing
tala-sun (die) of heat
ekwe^-sum (conceived) in sin, (choked) with sin
zai-um (speak) with the mouth
urkan-um (thresh) with the mortar
410 Unwernty of Calif amia PubUeatiant in Am, Arch, and Bthn. [Vol. 11
11. 4ka, 4ak, locative,
tapnr-tak
nrkan-tak
xnmes-tak
ote-tka
wimft-k-tak
ekwses^-tak
(hmig) in tree
(grind) in mortar
(hidden) in grass
(speak) in ear
(wound) in wing
(wallow) in sin
4ka seems to follow vowels, -iak consonants to avoid com-
plexes.
12. 'iUj comiiative.
tanses-tn
ap«a-^
(eat) with jonnger brother
(dance) with father
A possible suffix with more the force of a postposition is :
13. "tnuy 'turn, regressive.
tina here tina-tun, tina- from here
tum
In the case of terms of relationship there are sometimes di-
verse endings according to the grammatical person. Thns:
apa
father
14. 'S(8),
''my''
apsa
15. 4(8),
''thy'*
16. -11(8), n,
''his''
ana
mother
ansa
taka
elder brother
taksa
taknan
tare
younger brother
tarekse
tarekte
taha
elder sister
tahasa
tahanan
papa
grandfather
papsa
et'O
grandfather
et*se
teire
grandmother
tcirsi
,
teinin
zan^a
wife
xan*aksa
xan*an
sit
child
sitnun
me(ne)
grandmother
mense
menen
The basis of this is plainly an infixation of -s- before the char-
acteristic vowel for the first person possessive and the substitu-
tion of -n8n for the third person, where 8 represents the char-
acteristic voweL The 6k of tar-ek-se and xan-ak-sa are sporadic.
This may be the vestige of a once fully functional genitive case.
No other instances are found in the language. The -t- of the
second person is very dubious.
1916] Mason: Muisw% Diaieet of Costanoan 411
Pbonouns
The pronoun, as before stated, is independent and never mor-
phologically welded with the verb or other part of speech. The
six representatives of the two numbers and three persons are dis-
tinct and those of the third person seem to have little or no
demonstrative force. The case endings, particularly the -s of the
objective, are suiBxed also to the pronouns. The possessive pro-
noun is often identical with the subjective form, though generally
one form is exclusively subjective. The pronoun has a tendency
toward combination with other pronouns and particles. Thus
we find such forms as ka-mes, *'I-you," this being the most
frequent; kat (kchet), **I in future time"; kas-hiha, **I also."
The pronominal stems are monosyllabic or at the most dis-
syllabic and quite dissimilar for the various persons. The first
and second personal plural pronouns, however, commence with
the syllable mak-, doubtless cognate with the pluralizing sufiSx
'tnak.
Demonstrative and adjectival pronouns are numerous and
invariable.
Detailed lists of all classes of pronouns will be found in
Part II.
Verbs
The typical Mutsun verbal stem is dissyllabic, ending in a
characteristic vowel. This may even be the invariable rule, ap-
parent infractions and exceptions being due to error or presence
of unsuspected etymological or morphological elements. The
characteristic vowel is not inalienably welded to the stem, since
certain infixes are added between stem and characteristic.
Like nouns, verb stems take no prefixes, all morphological
mechanism being attained by means of sufiixes. A few solitary
examples of possible verb-stem combination have been found
which may be differently interpreted on fuller acquaintance with
the language.
iip-xi(xii) roll, fall (scissors)
xixi(e) go, walk
ap-ura(iii) slip, faU (person)
uru(iii) 'all
up-ki roll, seize (log)
at-ki break, seisee (log)
at*e, atse break
412 UniverHty of CdUfomia PubUeationa in Am. ArcK and Ethn. [YoL 11
Reduplication of verbal stems is practically unknown in Mut-
sun. A few sporadic cases are found, however, which seem to have
the iterative significance frequently denoted by this means in
American languages.
polso
painted
polpolsi
dotted, streaked
tule
knock
tnltnl*e
palpitate
palpnl*e
palpitate
tipe
wander
tiptipe
wander
It is a difficult and largely an artificial task to separate verbal
particles into etymological and morphological elements. Never-
theless certain of these appear to belong to the former category
and others may be placed there merely for the lack of evidence
of morphological significance.
Etymological Suffixes of Verbs
17. 'ie, possessive. Suffixed to nominal stems denotes pos-
session of the object.
otco-te possess ears
kraka-te possess name
sitnun-te have children
pnltci-te have full breasts
18. 'kis', i'luis', 'pwiS')y imitative. Suffixed to nominal or
other stems denotes imitation of person or act. The reflexive
suffix -pu is normally added.
mam*anxa-kis-piii act like a fool
mnkene-pwis-pn act like a man
maknm-kis-pa act Uke women
monsie-kis-pn, (-wis-pu) act like a sensible person
sawe-wis-pu pretend to sing
19. -na, purposive. The verbal suffix -na, ** go to do," func-
tions also as an etymological suffix to noun stems, denoting in
this case **go for."
lalak
geese
lalka-na
go for geese
sirak
nuts
sirka-na
go for nuts
weren
rabbit
were-na
go for rabbits
1916]
Ma$<m: Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan
418
20. -mi, dative. Likewise the verbal suffix -mt may be suffixed
directly to nouns, functioning as an etymological suffix and de-
noting gift of the object. It is generally or always used with the
imperative and the first person singular object
mze
arrow
mze-mi-tit
give me arrows
ma-^T
tobacco
ma-sae-mi-tit
give me tobacco
setne
acom-bread
setne-si-mi-t
give me bread
21. 4%, substantive. A possible substantive suffix is found
once:
tanses brother tan8e0-ti-(8) be a brother
22. "U-, oppositional. Infixed before characteristic vowel of
verbal or other stems denotes significance opposite to that of
simple stem.
zit-a
•
pit-e
pat*i
roiko
kitca
rotcio
teuniy tnnnu
sew
tie
seize, grab
knot
lock with key
enveloped
fold, pleat
zit'Ua
•
pit*ae
pat*ne
rotnk
kitcna
rotciwe(wi)
tcnnuhwi
np
untie
loose
untie knot
open with key
freed
open, unfold
23. -r-, excessive. Followed by the characteristic vowel ap-
pears to denote a psychological cause for the condition described.
snmi
be content
snmi-ri-ni
sleep from satiety
siwi
bum
siwi-ri-ni
sunocate from heat
towo
be rigid
towo-ro-ste
be stiff fi^m cold
seso
shiver
seso-r-po,
(seso-n)
shiver from fear
24. 'f', corporeal. Followed by a vowel in harmony with pre-
ceding one generally refers to action with or on parts of body.
latue-fe
long tongue, (he) extends his tongue
l.el.uer-te
•
roU (eyes) too much
kaiti
•
tighten (it)l make (it) fasti
rau-ta-smin
•
with large occiput
mup-tu
shut your mouth 1
pelfe, pete
shut eyes
pete(ni)
keep mouth closed
PoV>
pluck hairs
kapafa
cross hands
414 Uiuver*ityofCiaifontiaPubUcatioiuinAm.AreKttHdBtkn. [VoLll
25. -<e, -«, i-it).
tere-ti-8 i
(7012) have cut (your hair)
nam-tiy nam-it i
(I have not) understood, heard
kiUte 1
(it) sparkles
jsta-ti, zop*o-ti, i
[did he give 70Q) anything, a drink,
iM-mi-ti, olte-mi-ti
meat, pinole f
insu-ti, insn-te
(you) know (it)
upxi-ti (or npxi) i
(let me) drink a little
wipati 1
[will) invite (you)
ole-ti 1
(I) seised (it), (what) could (you
do!)
ina-ti-8 i
[I) became sick
esoni-ti \
[you) hate (the language)
lopx-ti-ni-n (
jrew mouldy (wheat)
Possibly the same sufiSx is found in the imperative with first
person singular object, 4 or 'ii-t. It is a doubtful suffix ; no at-
tempt is made to explain it.
26. 'Wi, -we.
inu-wi-me-i
remind (him)!
rus-u-wi-kne
spit
tip-wi
(you) shorten (confession)
nansa-we
(he went) to try
pak«a-we
(may they) gather (them) I
lala-wi-s
he threw him
si.
xasiwa-si
scratch the boys' heads 1
xeksio-si-n
(have you) satisfied (him)f
zima-si-kun
(we) have searched for (them)
meze-si
(let me) be seeing; look I
pa|i-si
(that which) he has in his hand
nan-mi-si
(I) was listening (to them)
pak*a-8i
he seeks (us)
puti-si
(I) am blowing (the fire)
u^-si-mi-t
guard me I
at-se-i
break itl
xelue-si-tit (xelue-mi-tit)
flay, strip for me I
musi-si
(child) is sucking
This suffix may be cognate with the mandatory -si (No. 45)
but the resemblance is not evident.
Other possible etymological suffixes are :
1916]
Mason: MuUun Dialect of Costtmoan
415
rukesma
a doubled cord
rukesma-te
make countless in-
terweavings
xotio
a bag
xotio- (si) -nme
(order to) make a
bag
rok-a
house
ruk-8ap-(in)
(they have) made
houses
mat-er
tobacco
mat-uk-(ti)
give (me) tobacco
mat-ere-gn-in
(he) was intoxi-
cated
wi-xi
fish
wi-ni
catch fish
tor-oil
amole
tor-ke
bring amole
zasi-om
shame
xasi-mun
be ashamed
xan*an
wife
xaii.an-mi-(n)
(was) married
xakua
mussels
xakua-ikus
I went for mussels
Morphological Suffixes of Verbs
The verbal stem is variously modified for considerations of
tense, voice, various modal si^ificances, and to some extent for
number.
The unmodified stem is used alone for the present tense and
with temporal adverbial particles to express the future.
The most frequent temporal suffix is -n. This is generally
translated by the Spanish preterit, but frequently also by the
present. It may have an indefinite or aoristic sense, or denote
incompleteness or continuance of action, and is found mainly
with intransitive verbs.
28. -(t)n, indefinite.
totio-n
tio-n
ilo-n
towo-n
ketio-n
yati-n
xati-n
xirwi-ni-n
tursi-ni-n
terpe-ni-n
tempe-ni-n
loe-ni-n
letse-ni-n
isiwe-n
(whenever I) err
(I) shoot (with my left hand)
(whenever a house) bums
(you will be) frozen
(I) argue (with him)
(he) follows (you)
(I) am dying
(rain) is ceasing
(he) is cold
(I) have peppered my throat
(soon the river) will dry up
(he) nauseated (you)
(I) Uked (that)
(when they) rest
416 Univernty of CdUfomia PmbUeat%on$ in Atn. Arch, and Ethn. [YoL 11
29. '{%)$, past tense. This is less common than -n. It appears
to be a more definite past and is found mainly with transitive
verbs.
7oreti-8 (he) chased (me)
katia-mi-8 (he) gave (you)
mistu-s (yon) warmed yourself
mexe-npi-s (I) have seen (them)
wlpa-s (I) invited (yon)
30. '{i)kun, past tense. This is the less frequent past ending
and appears principally with transitive verbs. It is probably the
most remote of the past tenses, but as all three of these are regu-
larly translated by the bare Spanish preterit, it is most difficult
to delimit their respective spheres. The examples seem to imply
completion of action.
nzsini-knn (yon) have increased
nt*ni-knn (I) guarded (it)
nzei-knn (I) have guarded (it)
oioi-knn (he) seized (it)
oisio-knn (it) happened again
The distinction between the categories of intransitive and
transitive is not as close as in many Pacific languages, and there
is no invariable designating particle for either. Certain suffixes,
however, pertain to one or the other type. One of the commonest
suffixes in the language is -ni, which appears on the whole to be
a kind of intransitive suffix.
31. -nt, intransitive,
orko-ni-n, (orko-ste) \,we) were frightened
inn-ni-n (yon could not; imagine (me)
in*u-ni-n (I) awoke
istu-ni-n (I) dreamt ox (you)
(wate-na) xamu-ni-n (fire) is dying, (is-going dying)
(wate-na) lak^e-ni-n s^mux) is rising, (is-going rising)
eme-ni-n (I was going) to forget (it)
inxa-ni-n (I) am sick, have become sick, (you)
are sick
muk*ie-ni-n (I) am old woman
semo-ni-n (it wants Uttle time for me) to die
tursi-ni-n (he) is cold
^pu-ni-n (I) put my finger in my eye
suiu-ni-n (suiu-ste) it was finished, consumed, used up
fisku-ni-n (did this) break f
xupse-ni-n (my hair) is fixed and prepared
xasli-ni-n (be ye not) sad
ad infinitum
1916]
Ma$<m: Mutsun Dialect of Coatanaan
417
The nearest approach to a transitive suffix is -np, which seems
to express action directed toward another person.
32. -npie), traimiive.
titi-np-in
iteo-np-itit
tolso-npe
lilui-npe
mima-npe
munflu-iipe
mii8.i-iip-itit-7af
m«ne-iipe
mane-np-in
tnpu-np-in
he defended (me)
poU me out I
(I will) break (your feet)
(we wiU) amuse (70a)
do not disturb (him)
(ye have) soiled it
warm ye met
(how can I) forget (youf)
(has he) forgotten (yef )
(I) put my finger in (his) eye
Reflexive relations are very frequent and expressed by the
suffix:
33. 'pu, 'p-, reflexive.
lizin-pu
lix-p-in
ita-pu
eyes-pu
tcai-pu
aza-pu
xa^a-pu-i
tak*e-p-is
orko-p-in-se-me
un-pi-na
I wiU kiU myself
she killed herself
(do you) wash yourself f
shave oneself
praise oneself
(have ye not) combed yourselves f
hit yourself
(I) measured myself
did you frighten yourself f
(I) am going to eure myself
In many cases -pu appears to be used idiomatically, the re-
flexive function being obscure.
buy
upu-s-pu
seU
uni
crave,
wish
uni-8-pu
consent
inu
awake,
ber
remem-
inu-s-pu
observe, know, see,
feel
nip*a
teach
nip*a-p-in
they will teach
(him never)
ritca
8X>eak
ritca-pu
play, entertain
Reciprocal relations are expressed by the suffix :
34. -mu, reciprocal,
zata-mu let us fight
lix-mu we will kill each other
keye-mu (do not) trample each other
is*u-mu
hutcu-mu-t
play together 1
lift each other!
418 UniverHiy of CdHfomia Pubhoatums in Am. ArcK and Bthn. [ VoL 11
The passive voice is of considerable importance in Mutson
morphology and seems to be preferred to the active as a method
of expression whenever possible. It is expressed by the 8u£Sx :
35. 'kne, ptissive voice.
mexe-kne (me) (you) will be seen
mira-kne (me) (you) will be given a gift
mupa-kne (nep*e) (this) is sucked
ole-kne (they) are (not) caught
like-kne (me) (you) will be killed
lokuk-kne (zin) (the eye) is put out
lala-kn-is (haka) (he) was thrown down
ut'U-kne (nep*e) (this) is guarded
liwa-kn-is (arrow) was hidden
mat-ere-kn-in (he) was intoxicated
Probably cognate with this is the su£Sx -ne with which it is
in cases interchangeable, -ne often denotes a future passive, at
other times its exact use is not clear.
36. -ne, future passive.
nansa-si-ne (when we) try
meze-si-ne (you) will be seen
yume-si-ne (you) wiU be cheated
ziraste-pu-ne will (you) be reprimanded f
eise-kte-ne-s have (you) ^aved yourself f
Another su£Sx with a passive force is -stap. This seems to
refer entirely to completed passive action, and a great number of
the examples noted have a first person singular subject.
37. -stap, perfect passive.
ruta-stap (feathers) recently pulled
pele-stap (with what) was (this) stuck f
potsie-stap (I) was cendUred
katia-stap they gave rations
iztci-stap (he) was bitten by a snake
likistap (I) was kiUed
zise-stap (the fat ones) have been selected
mutiku-stap (I) have been tickled
The modal categories are considerably less extensive than
commonly in American languages but rather better developed
than in Indo-European.
The imperative is expressed by suffixes varying for number
and person of subject and object. Thus :
1916] Maaon: Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan 419
Intransitive or
Imperative Ut pere. obj, 3d pen, obj,
2d pers. sing. subj. 38. -t,4it 39. -i
2d pers. plu. subj. 40. -tyuf, -tityut 41. '{i)yut
zima-t seek me I
ima-t show me (it) t
oltemi-tit give me pinole I
ip*e-i ttim around t
oio-i seize it I
zima-i seek him I
ok< wo-i send them t
ot-emi-tit-ynt give me pinole t
sumua-ti-ynt give me wood t
oto-yut go for atole t
otciko-yut beqnietl
laisaisi-ynt sing slowly I
at*e-ti'yuf give him I
ara-ti-ynt give him 1
hutcu-m^ut lift each other 1
Another suffix with an imperative force is -is. This implies
going to some other place to accomplish the command and may be
termed the
42. -is, missionary imperative.
monse-is go and tell (them; I
Bak>a-is go and bring (pinole) t
taska-is go and walk (in the field) I
etne-is go and release (it) 1
oi-is go and get (it) I
zi'is go for firet
There appear to be some terminations having the effect of a
subjunctive. These are :
43. 'tkuUy subjunctive^ hypothetical,
ara-tkun (you) should give (him)
kati-tkun thus should (I dress)
ko-tkun (you) should tell (me)
kO'-tkun, kwo*-tkum
on*o-tkun (he) would have made sport (of you),
speaking (of you) after death
oi-tkun (I) would get (it if I wanted it)
44. -Icanej conditional,
ole-ti-kane if I could only catch them I
. toko-kti-kane if the bed is of ... .
taz-kane when it is asked
ak-niu-kane when he is thirsty
420 Univer9iiyofCaHfamiaP%ibUcaiian8inAm.Areh.andBthn. [VoLll
There may be some relation to the passive particle kne.
Iterative or frequentative relations are expressed by the suffix
or infix -s, placed between the stem and the characteristic vowel.
45. s, iterative.
ak*a enter aksa many enter
de-pn go else-pu many go
epe paia epse many pass
Bemo(n) die semsoCn) many die
De la Cnesta pays considerable attention to this suffix in his
grammar, suggesting that it is frequent with every verbal stem.
Strangely, very few unquestionable examples of it are found in
the phrase-book.
Probably the same morphological element is that found in
many cases following the characteristic vowel, particularly before
the reflexive -pu, denoting in that case plural or iterative re-
flexive. It is also commonly found in words denoting occupations,
i.e., one who performs an act continually. Compare the nouns
denoting personal categories in Part II.
amae-s-pn (do not) amuse yourselves
roroi-s-pu (do not) disport yourselves like boys
siole-8-p-is (we) were talking among ourselves
zewe-s-pu (we) both look together into the mirror
Other usages are more idiomatic and less evident.
ritca-is-pu recount, eonverse (ritcapn, play)
upu-8-pu sell (upU| buy)
siole-B-pu (they) are solitary and sad
meze-B-pu (Uke as he) looked
The mandatory or causative relation is expressed by the
suffix:
46. 'Si, ('8e)y mandative.
zotio-si-nme you have ordered that they make a bag
mana-si-s (yon) commanded to extinguish it
a^-si-s (you) commanded (me) to steal
pina-se-8 did (I) order thisf
Three relations implying motion are of importance in Mutsun.
The first, -na, daiotes motion to a distant place or outdoors.
1916] Mason: Mutsun Dxaleet of Catanoan 421
19. -na, purposive motion hence.
lizni-na (he) is going to kill (it)
ziisi-na (I) am going to catch (them)
paita-na (let ns) go and catch (them)
wate-na (lak>e-nin) (snn) is rising; (going-rising)
wate-na (wetere-nin) (it) is increasing; (going-increasing)
ereksi-na-ka I am going to bathe
The second, -su, denotes motion to a nearby place or indoors.
47. -8U, purposive motion hence.
nam-isi-sn (I) am going to hear (them)
ertse-sa (I) am going to sapper
were-BU (I) am going to catch rabbits nearby
etste-su (I) am going to sleep
The third, -inyi, denotes motion hither.
48. -inyi, (-im), purposive m/>tion hither.
liw-inyi (I) come to kill (you)
monse-im (I) come to advise (yon)
nesep-inyi (we) come to beg permission
paaip-in3ri (I) come to salute (you)
warep-inyi (I) come to visit (you)
A very rare and doubtful sufSx, -knit (misspelled in the gram-
mar as guit, or toit), has been termed ''prohibitional."* This
may be the passive kne plus the future adverb et; i.e., "you must
not be struck."
49. 'knit, prohibitive.
tamta-knity xata-knit he must not strike you
A second very obscure suffix, -ksi, is translated by De la
Cuesta "perfectly well," perfectamente bien, and is termed by
Kroeber "excellentive."^
50. 'ksi, ezcellentive.
zeksio-ksi (let me) satisfy (him)
ruisiu-ksi do not (ye) tremble
misu-ksi (your hand) trembles
nipa-ksi (we) are teaching (him)
rinsi-ksi (they) take the lower (key)
siaksu-ksi-t (speak) to me softly (in my ear)
zaune-ksi (would that) someone would bring
(water)
siru-ksi-ste (it) is pulverized
polso-ksi (what is this) painted f
8 The Ohumash and Oostanoan Languages, op. oii., p. 253.
422 Unwersiiy of California Publications in Am. Arch, and Eihn, [ VoL 11
The verbal sufSx -mt (ef . nominal sufSx -mi) seems to denote
an indirect personal object or an action done for the benefit of a
person. It is most frequently found with the imperative and first
person object, ''do this for me."
20. -mi, -me, beneficial.
katia(8tap)
gave (food)
katia-mi(8)
gave (clothes to
thee)
zeln(ksi)
strip off bark
zelue-mi(tit)
strip bark (for
me)l
moiiie(t)
advise (me)
monse-mi(tit)
advise (me)!
monsie
relate
moii8ie-mi(tit)
recount (me)l
monsie-me
relate to yon
riri
pat selvage on
riri-iiii(tit)
put selvage on (for
me)!
iifli
owe
iisi-me
(you) owe (me),
(I-you)
musi-si
sack
musi-mi
suckle, give suck
tika
chew
tika-mi(t)
chew (for me)!
etc.
Two suflSxes of the greatest frequency are evidently cognate.
These are -kte and -ste. The former is listed by De la Cuesta
merely as a preterit tense suffix, the latter, though of frequent
occurrence, not mentioned at all, though a suffix -miste, probably
a hortatory, is described.
Both seem to have the sense of a past participle, and, like the
latter, are frequently used adjectively. They express completed
action or achieved condition. Though little diflPerence is discem-
able between the two, it would appear that -kte is used principally
for transitive relations, -ste for intransitive ones. They are fre-
quently translated by the Spanish ya, * * already. ' '
51. "kte, ('Xtet)y perfect transitive (participle), adjectival.
mit*ci-kte
esko-kte
rite-kte
laki-kte
tolo-kte
lip*a-kte, lixwa-kte
liisu-kte
posio-kte
riski-kte
sitl<u-kte
niotsio'kte
husiero-kte
nutiri-kte
(bow) is unstrung
(it is) torn, impure
(it) is decorated with beads
(it) is lifted, hung
(they) have donned their regalia
it is hidden
toothless
hairless
pug- (nosed)
small
short
big (mouth)
big-nosed
1916]
Moion: MuUvn JHdlect of Costanoan
428
52. ste, perfect intransitive {participle) y adjectival.
(they) have (not) aniyed
(they) have died
(they) are seated
he was displeased (at me)
(he) has eyes
(I) am tired already
(I) am satiated
it is soiled
(it) has deeayed
snotty
blaek
lean
large (feet)
ziwa-ste
semso-ste
toilo-ste
•
pelke-ste
xntcu-ste
kome-ste
wane-ste
siksa-ste, mikna-ste
sesok-ste, snmn-ste
nnxn-ste, (nnzn-smin)
natka-ste
rinta-ste
noioro-ste
ad infinitum
The interrogative is expressed by the suffixation of the en-
clitic '8, se. This may be sofSxed to other words than the verb,
more commonly to the initial word of the phrase. Thns :
53. '8, 'Se, interrogative.
kan-se is this my . . . .f
kai-s it is painful f
ekwe-s did not . . . .f
lalka-na-s did (yon) go for geese f
men-se did yon . . • .f
-« regularly follows a vowel, -se a consonant, thus avoiding
terminal consonantal complexes.
The negative is formed by the independent particle ekwe.
epsie is sometimes used with negative imperatives, but the more
common method in this case is the use of the bare pronoun men.
Some of the isolated and unexplained suffixes, indicated by
italics, are:
sim-mpi, Atxirmpe (sira-ksi-ste)
man-t«-kte; man-toi-8>te
(man-M, man-a«)
yoko-fte
menso-rftf
mnp-il«n-ft0
ainwe-iam
paka-iatfii-s
ole-nkMpo
ton-«e-s
ton-0np-is
tiaka-X»e-i
grind (salt); (ground)
it went out; is going out
(put it out!)
(eigar) has beeome ash
(they) have drowned
(boy) keeps his mouth closed
(yon said you) went to see (him)
(he wanted) to find (us)
(he) can (run) weU
(I) met (him)
(I) lost (this)
split it!
424 Univenity of CdUfomia Publications in Am.Areh.and Bihn. [VoL 11
kipi-nt-pn-i
luA-nawin
kutC'keU'i
satar-a, satar-e, sa^r-pn
teite-ttn-i
sam-nm
sam-atpu; anm-ianU
Tote-punJe
^t'kin
n&nn-ke
zeksio-itf-i
xtLB^sen
TAt'XOiii; xai-xaisi
iiip*a-pffi
lop-X^i-nin, lop-ce-fte
ipi-rtf-i (ip*e-i)
ina-<i-8; ina-ilc-pa
we-«oIo-kt6, we^M^kmin,
we-«ar0-kte
we- tan; we-iere-np^i
yer-oepin
matala-mu-i; matala-n^-stap;
matula-fii
mene>fipo
mir-mo-mi-t
mup-i-pift-i ; mup-tf-i;
mnp^u-rte;
mup'iM-pu-i; mup-t«
mai-fl^i-ni-ete
teoTok-pumk
ii'PS'iB; ii-«t-ine
ak-€ni-iii-n ; ak-niii-kane
ekwe-na
nni-spn, vad-spaie, nndspdk
ole-ri
inu-wi-nw-i
itma-ni-t; itma-nii-i
ii'Wime
inn-i-iii-n
mi'SU-km; mi-mii-ksi;
mi-Mii-ksi; roi-mo-np-in;
nd-nga-i; rfi-ln-np-in
xunsa-fiH-n
waz-<ct-i
ele-mat»-pa
e\'Oe
sparkle
wink (your eyee)
narrow, difficult
very well tied, very itrongly bound
open the mouth
dance for met
(they all) have long hair
(I), (they all) cut their front hair
fire is made
(I will not) cleanse myself
(you will soon) be known
satisfy (him)t
(teach me before I) get angry!
it is well swept; very clean
(they will never) teach him
(wheat) moulded
turn (this) I (turn around!)
(I) became sick; (will you not) be-
come sickf
large, great
is great; increase it for me!
(he is) growing old
place face downward; (I) was placed;
(wait for him) to place himself
(I will not) forget
give me that which you were given!
shut his mouth! shut his mouth with
your hand! (he) keeps his mouth
shut; shut your mouth!
(they) laugh at (your speech)
we become sad (when . . .)
(I) owed; (I do not) owe (you any-
thing)
(I) am thirsty; (when) one is thirsty
(I) have no (. . . .)
(he wished) to agree
(you) can (not)
remind (him)!
lift me! lift him!
(we have) corrected them
(I) am tired of journeying
(your hand) trembles; (do not ye)
shudder; (who) trembles f he
moved him; move me! I moved
(they) flew
scratch (him)!
(you) will arise (early)
(he) slept (little)
yf
1916] MoBon: Kut9un Dialect of Costanoan 425
Adjectives
Adjectives display close relations with both verbs and nouns.
A few of them appear to be definite adjectival stems without
terminations, a small number seem to be derived from nouns, but
by far the greater number are akin to verbal stems. As allied to
nouns they may take the pluralizing suffix and stand as sub-
stantives, as weyero-maJc, "the big ones." As allied to verbs they
commonly take the verbal perfect suffixes -kte and -ste and may
be interpreted either as verbs or as adjectives, e.g., "the cloth
has been soiled," "the cloth is soiled/' or ^^ soiled cloth."
In addition to the verbo-adjectival endings -kte and -ste there
are two others, evidentiy cognate, used solely with adjectives.
These are -kmin and -smin. The distinction between them is not
evident, as, for instance, both nuikorkmin and humulu-smin mean
"black" (sing.) and natka-mdk and natka-ste "black" (plu.).
Other suffixes likewise seem to be interchangeable under certain
circumstances, as both orko^i^ and orko-sie mean "he was
frightened;" urixu-sinvn and unxu-sie both mean "snotty.
'kmin is probably cognate to -kne and -smin to -^te.
54. 'kmin, adjectival.
patka-kmin heavy, deep white
pelo-kmin bald
nntka-kmin black
hihula-kmin something cut, as a pole
isiwa-kmin newborn
knti-kmin very smaU
kipinyi-kmin a winker
kits«u-kmin twisted
55. 'Smin, adjectival.
selpe-smin (are you) intoxicated?
xop-tie-smin climber
an*e-smin turtles
ritca-smin liberal, generous
waksa-smin miserable, yile
ritcua-smin wUy, foolish
rauta-smin with large back of neck and occiput
samili-smin putrified
humulu-smin black
unxu-smin snotty
pelso-smin large-tongued, garrulous
paisa-smin runner
zase-smin brave, fierce
ad infinititm
426 UniverHtyofCaiifortMP%ibUeaUaH$inAm.Areh.andBihii. [Vol. 11
An infix -ti- is occasionally found before adjectival endings.
It is placed between the simple stem and the characteristic voweL
Its import is not d^ir but it seems to imply an adjectival-
agentive sense.
56. 4%-, adjeciivaJrogentive.
zop*e climb xop-ti-e-Csmin) dimber
temla arinate t«al-ti-a-(niiiii) nrinatar
maze fospeet, maz-ti-e-(8te) one who makes
miseonstnie wrong judgments
wllo signal ''yea'' wil-ti-o-(n*in) one who signals
with the ^^et "yes'' with the
eyes
Another etymological element giving an adjectival signifi-
cance is:
57. -«6, -«t, adjectival.
in-se tear-fol
yer-ie torn
polpol-si dotted
Pabtiolbs
Particles are independent and invariable. They range from
monosyllabic to polysyllabic, the longer ones being probably o(nn-
ponnded. For purposes of reference they are divided into loca-
tive adverbs, temporal adverbs, descriptive adverbs, and inter-
jections.
Two enclitics are met. The first is a conjunctive, -Kika or -hiaf
''and, also, as well."
kas-hiha me alio
The second is an adjectival pronoun, -^, ''alone, only,
solely."
men-tia yon alone
wak-sia he alone
1916]
Ma$on: Mvtsun Dialed of Casianoan
427
PABT n. CLASSIFIED LIST OF STEMS
The following lists are arranged in the order of the phonetic
alphabet. First the vowels, a, e, i, o, u, then the semi-vowels w
and y, the nasals m and n, the liquid I and the trill r, the spirants
8, X, and h, the surd stops p, t, f, and k, and the affricative tc.
Nouns
Animals
aiarat
magpie
auni-Bmin, anni-flmin
turtles
are
bird like a heron
asurian, atit
sparrow
atat
magpie
akat
eoneh
elei-min
goshawk
ex, hex
squirrel
eksen
quail
intkx
large hare
ipiwa
(rattle) snake
omkon
maggot
ores
bear
ofol*, ofon
red ant
okom
bird
ominx
wolf
nnteu-flmin
black beetle
nraka
salmon
wawisaee, -see, -soes,
coyote
wakisaes
wal*eii
owl
waaaka
eagle
wakaraf-smin
frog
weren
rabbit
wilo-pan
blackbird
wireekan
bat
wixi
fish
wipeor
fleas
jorah
black duck
ina^ap
coyote
marite
young deer
mltiA
little moulting bird (jestingly)
mamiil*al*iik
butterfly
mmnnri
fly
muniek, mnii^
small bird with black feet
428 Univeriiiy of Calif amia PubUoaiums in Am. AreK and Sihn. [Vol. 11
niwei
faun
notot
blackbird with yellow head
lalak
geese
lesokwa
earthworma
lisana
snake
l.nopo
yearling ealves
lokluk
geese
rames
weasel
rax
white lonse
linja
rat
riiui
jonng coyote
mmai
young hare
Baiae
jays
sanranik
large geese
sakar
nits
aiol-ekon
mole like a dormouse
siuyuts
sea-otter
8ial.il*iik
butterfly
ludn
smaUbird
aitikna, liteiknay
young squirrd
sikikna
■ikot
mole
soksokiaii
bird like sensonte
sweiusa
large dueks
zakua, (zaakan)
mussel
ZQii*aii
small dove
hutee(kiiiit)
dog
paratn
woodpeeker
penie, penik
eat
peridana
young quails
piLokian
martin
piteina
maggoty inseet
polokii
grasshoppers
pollen
young rabbit
por
flea
poskoi-min
black ant
potol
blackbird with yellow head
pukwie, pukwi
young deer, young fallow-deer
pokului-min
toad
tamala
leopard (pumaf)
tatci
a small animal
tiwiem
fallow-deer
tiwituk
bird
tira-imin
spider
tixsiii
skunk
tipih-smin
earthworm
tominis
seal
toroma
wildcat
torpaea, toniepa
gray blackbird
1916]
Maaon: Mutsvn Dialect of Co8ia$u)an
429
tote
deer, eattle, meat
tayankal
blackbird
iaiaskal
blackbird with watery eyes
tiwak
bird
time
0
whale
tuilun
▼nltore
kaal*epat
bird with large mouth
kazai
black louse
kakaii
raven
kaknu
hawk
kotewes
snakes
kuHan
blackbird
tcaxi
hawk
tceies
hare
tcil'iskan
hawk
tcirit-min
bird
tcorena, teoltcolna
cricket
tenrutn
woodpecker
Botanical
aisaae, inkis-e
acorns
ama-knis
seeds
anii
a white tree
arwe
oak
ahamen
bundle of fire-wood
enena
blackberries
it'iiz
a seed
0W08
seedy fruit
ortor-kmin
hay
uwena
very pink flower
oner
wild onion
upit
acorn sheU
wara
an herb
jarkas
an herb
ynkis
acorn
momoz
a small, salty seed
morof
acorn shell
mnren
an edible herb
lumuimin
an herb
raiiBOiia
an herb
rapak
oak
repit
acorn shell
reteti
• •
blackberry bramble
ririB
vine
ripin
oak
rore
an herb
rnnkes
an herb
sawana
a thicket
sasok
moss
480 Unwer9Uyof(kMf<>rwiaPvbUeaiian8inAm.Areh.andSihn. [VoLll
sapa
herb with a dark, hard seed
nk
small pinenut
sintotok wet«iiiak
poisonous plant
lirak
filberts, haselnnts
•iponina
a white root
Bomon
hole in a tree
■oko^
lanrel
■okotei
fmit of lanrel
munnay famiia
stieks of wood
xale
green tnle
xireni, (xirenfty zLremi) large pine-nut
zipnr
a tree
zit«iaiii
tnna
zitna, zitia
elderberries
zikot
pine
xolopia
shell, chaif of aeom
xop
larch, a red tree
zninea
hay
zomi-tmin
wild rice
zor
seed
pataz
willow
pat.i
ehia
P»t
tnno
pakir
plant like tnle
pi^ui
seeds
porpor
eottonwood
porpor onien
tree like white eottonwood
pnmria
small fmit
tamet
a dark edible root
taraz
small, white willow
tapur
tree, wood
tiwia
flowers
toinon
tuze
oak
tapit
reeds, straw
taU
fmit tree
tofolna
plantain
kamer
sweet herb
kamon
tnno
ketez
leaves
kiriVBmin, kiriVakin
an herb
ttMMOld
hay
teatia
a well-known tree, testicles of hog
tdanan
alder
Body Parts
awia
left hand
eyes
beard
in
tears
1916]
Mason: Muinm Dialect of Costanoan
481
iga, i8*a
hand
ihatn
ear-eavi^
iteie, itcik
pudenda
olof
back of neck
otcoy ote
ear
ot8*io-n
bullet wound
^Tl%
bangs, hair on forehead
nnuz
mucus from nose
nri
hair
OB
nostrils
water
stomach
wel*ewel(min)
point of the lips
wima, wimak
wing
wilopa
the red head of the blackbird
yisawani-nsa
corns
yutxa
tumor on neck
marax
skin
maxul
spittle, phlegm
tnf^k.qg
knees
mitla
•
thigh
mozel
head
mozot
skull
mii8
bosom, ureasts
matb
front teeth
muktiokrii, (mnxtioxris)
ankle
noso-n
breath, spirit, soul
la8.e
tongue
laain
finger- joints
Ut.akwa
veins
lorn
brain
lopohs, lop-ot8
nayel
Inp'Os
anus
raras
molar teeth
rifok
intestines
rikex {dliu
prepuce of penis
romos, mteu
pimples, wart
mines
spine, backbone
rai
saliva
sama
right hand
ffftfiftH
groin
sarka
blind ^70
aapa-zin
pupil of eye
sinpor
eyebrows
sire
heart, mind
aip*08
feathers
sit
teeth
sik*eii
wind broken, flatus
somsom
armpits
sok-o-s
testicles
482 University of CaUfomia PubUoaiions in Am. Areh. and Ethn, [Vol. 11
soko-rena, sioko-rena
Bcrotum
sate
pudenda
zai
mouth
zahie
voice
zat*a
palm and sole
tail (of snake)
zelien
skin
zeser
birth-mark, sear
zin
eye
zorko-8
throat
zop*o
baek, ui^r part of baek
zumu^
skull
znnyoU
arm
znrek
ligament
znpor
earbunele
zutUy znt*a
belly, abdomen
paine-n
menstruation
patdan
blood
pakar
rash
pak*a
shoulder-blade
poteor
scalp sores
posiy pilin, pat*08, patsa,
pudenda
peln
put«u-8
belly, abdomen
put'Ui
thumb
tankar
roof of mouth
tap*i8
crown of head
ti^*e
ribs
takutspU
shin-bone
tima
forehead
tiraB
buttocks
tolflo, toolos
knees
tote
flesh, meat
tokol
syphilitic sores
tnrii
nails
turtunin
throat, neck
tukauB
ears
tup^ni^ tupoi
tail
tntper
Ups
tnkai
chest bosom
takmur
Adam's apple
\KmUB
cheeks, face
tap
hide
tat.i
bone
fnrain
skin
karkas
molar teeth
kapia
little finger
katak, katcak, katak
nape of the neck, occiput
katcitei
pudenda
1916]
M<i8on : MuUun Dialect of Coaianoan
48a
koro
foot
(kukas), xnkas
anus, buttocks
teapal
kidneys
teiri
horn
tc*oxo
pudenda
tenknii
evacuations
Manufactures,
Instruments
andpa
pillow
aren
knot
aze-8
comb
ata-B-pis-mak
watch-towers
ate
acorn-bread
a^n
feminine ornament
aka|
ornament of conch shell
eyes-pis
napkin
ene-msa
blotter, eraser
ene-kmin, enko-kmin
writing, letter
erests
•
real, a piece of money
eszen
dress, clothes
eteer
iron
ets
•
bed
eksen
nest
iiot
sacred stick, fetish f
imini
pinole
im-kmin
arrow-point
isme-sis
clock, watch
itok-pis
table-cloth, napkin
oxot
•
basket with handle
ot*eme
pinole
nnnpi-msa, an
•opi-msa
handkerchief
ulis
basket
urkan
mortar
usek
whistle, flute
ntifl
arrow-point (arrow-shaft)
ntel
ear-ornament of feathers
uteir-min
small needle
walexin
small basket
ware
feather ornament
warsan
small basket
weteok
small basket
yatan, lasan
net
70x0
load of meat
mas
beads
mater, master
tobacco
lawan
bow
rires
arrow-cord, spear-cord
ritai
rabbitskin clothes
484 Univer$iifof(kMfarniaPwhUoati4ni$iMAw^Areh.atidSi1m. [VoLU
rifaiii
f eminlBe ornament
rff»
eoane pinole
rote-mtft
portfolio
mris
bow-string
nix«
arrows, spean
rok
eord
mk-Mma
doubled eord
rokA
home
•ak-in
broom
•etna
bread of aeoma and witmigo
■imiiagm
skirt of tnle or plants
■iotok
basket for holding water
■iwan
basket with a pTramid in the bottom
fimirin
seed-gatherer
•inpiey dnplm
handkerehief
dpirek
bone awl
■ipokiaii
large eomb, brosh eomb
•oxoi
ornament of beads and feathers
•okwa
atole
•iqrfk
small eloth
ratia
poker, digging-stiek
zmsa-pis
opening of poeket
ornament of eoneh-shell
xeLamok, xeLemoa
eloth, rag
zitea-mit, zitsU,
ziteha-mU
toy
3H>ti0
bag
zotoz
shoes
znrpn
beads, feather ornament
homoron
potsherd
homeran
bar
hamiri-mfa
baptismal font
palai-n
mnller of metate
panes
belt, sash
pakuff-mU
ball for game
pelo-maet
eomb of straw
I^roi
net
iwunit, pupufe puyut
bread
tio-Zy tio-t
spear, arrow withont point
tiwiz, tiwi
beads, feather ornament
tilai
basket with a good base
tirtlMii
belt, sash
tipsiii
small basket for amole
tor-on
amole
toko, tok*o
bed
tnyuwa
broom
tnpen
sweathonse
(ainweiiy ^inwen
bread of aeoms and w^atngo
^lia
wooden awl
1916]
Mason: Muiawn Dialed of Cosianoan
435
femox
tip-e
kitirox, kitiii0X| kitiixo
kit'Cas, kiteaa
kurka, knrea
teakar, tcawar
tcakini
tdles
teopoma
teokon
arrow with point
knife
skirt
key
pinole
seat, chair
stringless bow
beU
fret, brie-a-brae
sacred stick, fetish f
Natural Phenomena
awar
am*ani
at<ar, atar
ak.e
ak*eBy awes
inn
irek
isin, isiin
isme-n
ixntnn
urani
upak
wakani
wakis
wika
yopok
yokon
ynmns isir
man
man«s
mnrtei, mnrteis, mnrtoeis
murtcu
notson
latnn
raxopa
rokie, rokse
rutis
si
soton
saw, BUB
skoxe
xewe-pis
xitns
•
xntepa
pelek
north (dedo de oaragon)
rain
mad| mire
day
salt
road, trail
stone
hole (of animal)
son
drop
hole
lamp, clod, white paint
dewf
river, torrent
Ughtf
afternoon
hail
cinders, ashes
dirt on hands
earth, dirt
dirt, filth
night
night
food
drop
rays of snn
powder, dnst
open hole, cavity
water
fire
charcoal
drop
shadow, reflection
wind
conflagration, great fire
fine dast, atoms
430 Univenitjf of CaHfomia Fublieaium$ in Am. AreK and Sthn, [YoL 11
pire
world| atmosphere, weather, etc.
pitak
linty dust
pitil*an
mole-traek
pnaninjis
whirlwind
tamar
hill
titin
seashore
^ska, tatska
plain
fora
thunder
ftuds
day
kan
seashore
kar, kat
smoke
koloi
spring of water
kure
red paint
kntni
hole in ground
tearak
sky
tearko
light
teape
hole in ground
teopolotesi
place full of holee
tcok
elody lump of mud
Words of More Abstract Significance
ak
thirst
e^na puatis
a game
e^-se
sleep
eke^, ekes^y ekaesf
sins
iwe, ik.e
a method of making fun of a per-
son
impe-s
sign
isut-8*e
dreams
on.o
a method of making fun of a per-
son
oroe-8
hunger
oteiko
silenee
118*ix
sadness
mai-t
smile
morke
a method of making fun of a per-
son
muifliiiy yenko
lovef
layaya
lengthy height
lazi
game of revolving until dizzy
lat'iaya
great height
rakaf
child's game
ritca-se
language, speech
samili
putrid matter
8at.e
a method of making fun of a per-
son
senena
sting of an insect
siamalpi-maa
confession
1916]
Mcaan: Mutsun Dialect of Coatanoan
487
snwene
song
simky 8ime
hunger
zamapu
proof
zas
anger
xasi-om, xacd-nn
shame
xeiikot8t-8*e
• •
silenee
xuti
•
game
paya
lightness
peleta
children's game
taola-si
something held in the arms
tarsi
eold
tala
•
heat
tiSy tihs
Ufe
tiima
•
scent, pleasant odor
kai-8
pain, misery, sorrow
kapala-si
an embrace
kapnen
Wednesday
koteopo
a method of making fun of a per
son
krak-at, (xrak-atf)
name
tf,akir
odor
tcopopiswai
Friday
teukuri
bodily evacuations, movements
Terms of Belationship arid Personal Categories
ana
ana-knia
ap<a
apapat
a^a, atsia-knis, atcai-nis
atsiai-kma
at maku-kmin
ete, et*e
inis
inxoksima, yuxoksima
intiste-mak
isiwa-kmin
ixatute
itxine
urxes-mak
uxi*
uta
mak'U, makas
mene
meres, moeres
mirte-mak, mitte-mak
mos
mukene
mother
stepmother
father
nephew, grandson
girl
girls
widow
maternal grandfather or uncle
son (father speaking of son)
adult men, elderly men
elderly men
newly born child
godmother
man (address term)
bride and groom
mother-in-law
parents
husband
maternal grandmother
nephew, grandson
adult men, elderly men
son (father speaking to son)
man
488 UniverHtyofCaUforniaFubUoaUaniinAw^AreKandEihn. [VoLU
mnkur-ma
muknioe-aiiiiay mnkienip
liiii, mnji, siii-kiina
■it-noii
■it-BOS
xan*ay (xau-nan)
paiten-kte
parane
papa
tanrey tauro
ta, taha
taka, tak*a
tanses, (tanses)
tare
te^min
^reiy tearet
tuU
ka
teire
tooni
an-pi-8
aU-0
iwo-pan
ika-0-mak
onei-a
0]iei-kma-t*e
an*e-mu
ura-f-mak
nkini-i^mak
nten-mak
waizi-8-paji
wayas^mii
werxo-8-mak
yawison
lisieni-s
rite-pan
sirka-s-mak
zawa-piB-mak
zixon, koxoeni'8
homaia
teye-s
tikiro-mak
koteino-knii, -kma
teite-8-mak
women
elderly women
boy, youth, boys
ehild, (foetus), baby (mother
speaking)
stepchild (mother speaking)
wife
man, person, cultured person
grandmother
mother's grandfather (maternal
grandfather!)
child (mother speaking)
elder sister
elder brother
younger brother or sister, elder
brother
younger brother or sister
sister-in-law
men
young man
daughter (father speaking)
paternal grandmother
maiden
cook, toaster, roaster
competitor
liar, cheat, bully
millers
companion
neighbors
friend
hole-diggers
fishers
wizards, witches
angry donor, unwilling giver
enemy
deer-hunters
Tulareflos
walkers
toreador
nut-hunters
callers, shouters
meat-carrier
countrymen
cook, roaster, toaster
kneelers, those on knees
servant, boys
dancers
1916]
Mason: Mutsun Dialect of Cosianoan
439
Numerals
emettea, emetka, hemeftea,
one
hemetea, emettca
emetspn
onee
emetotea
•
the one
ntxiiiy nsfxin
two
ntstina
• •
twice
UBxinya
they both
kapxan
three
osity u^t
four
parneSy pames
five
nakitci
dx
fakitei
seven
taitimin
eight
watSQ, pak.i
nine
tanat, tansa-kte, matsu
ten
Pronouns
ka
I (BubjeetiTe)
kan
I (sabjeetiTe), my (posseedTe)
kan^ifl, kanii.
me (objeetiTe)
kas, (kak), (kaz)
kat
I (Bubjeetive with future particle)
kames
I . . . . yon
kanmea
you — my
me
thou (subjectiTe)
men
thou (subjeetiTe), thy (poaeoBBivo)
mes
thee (objeetiTc)
met
thou (Bubjective with future par-
ticle)
waka, haka
he (Bubjective)
wak, hak
he ( Bubjective), hie (poBBCBBiTe)
haks, hakaa
him (objective)
makse
we (Bubjective), our (poBBeesive),
UB (objective)
mak
our (poBBOBBive), we (subjective)
mak<e, marke
we (subjective) (dualf )
mak'et, makset
we (subjective with future par-
ticle)
you (subjective), your (poBseBsive)
TnA.lr<|fnff
you (objective)
aisa, ai
th^ (subjective), their (posses-
sive)
aisan, aiske
them (objective)
nnk
it (neuter objective), him (ob-
jective)
440 Ufmeniif of CaHfomia Pmbhoaiians in Am. Arch, and Bthn. [YoL 11
Demonstratives
UBf nop*o
this (elose)
nepaan
these
nane, nina, aemia, ne
nil.
this
onta, istar^ nep«er
nisia
this (farther)
minis, noniaiay nap*!
that
nnpean
those
Human
whieh, that which (relatiTe)
pina
this (more distant)
Adjectival Pronouns
aipire
some
aimnkte, aixames
all, exelnsively
aman
so many
ams«e
the other
ani, an ji
another
at*ia
only, alone
ezil.iste
alone
imin, imio, imi*n
all (personal)
imk
all
wa8i(a)
mueh
yasir
mnehy very
niaty nihia, aoiai nua
only, no more
l.el*aer^
too much
hisha
any
sioky siokwey siweae
himself, itself
pisnie
nothing
tolon
mueh
^70
much
ke*8e, kes*e
mueh
Interrogative Pronouns
an* • •
anpi, ampi
at*e
at*ekin, at*ekinta
in«at, inuat
inxa^i, inxan
in^, (imtis)
inka
inkai
isU
where f
whiehf
whof whomf (singular)
whof whomf (plural)
whenf
how manyf
whatf whyf where f
whatf (do)
whatf (say)
whatf (thing), whyf
1910]
Ma$<m: MvUvn Dialect of Coatanoan
441
Verbs
'The stems preceded bj the asterisk are those ocearring onlj once or
twiee and whieh therefore are more or lees doubtful.
aiw, ainwe, aiuwe, axuwe,
see
aizu, aipu, arxuwe
*aisa«e, inkis*e
desire, crave
*aixuwes
withdraw, depart
•auye
awake, awaken
ayi
come
*a7imi-ni
lose, stop
am
be (substantive)
*am(a)
speak truth
ama
eat
*ama-ni
appear
ameis, amaes
play
ami, ami-si
give, bring, hold, carry, preserve
amiu(m), amoi
teach
amne-ni, am*a-ni
rain, wet
amsa
endanger, injure
ana
pardon
*ana
desire to, long to
*ana-pu
be injured
*anure
bend, bulge backward
*ansam
paint
*ansemi
keep watch, be vigilant
•ale, luwi
break and leave place
ara, arsa
give
*arespi
quarrel, fight (between women)
*ars*e
observe, conceal
*arke-n
increase, grow
•arki-ni
take the road
*asa
part the hair
*asi-n
flow in (water)
asinu-n, as«nu
sneeze
*asiknene
hate
aski, askin, askun
cut
axa
comb
axe-niak*e-n
flee
*azi, arimi
give again
*axtu-n
break a tooth
*apere
chase flies with a branch
at
break, split
ata
examine
•at.e
insult, grumble, quarrel
*at.ia
cease talking, be silent
atue
view, watch
442 University of Calif omia Publioati<m$ in Am. ArcK and Ethn, [YoL 11
*at*uemi
*at-ma
•at(ki)
at
*a^
*a^
•a^ki
ak.a
*akan
*ak'ara
*ake, ak*e
ak*ii
at*eim
eorreety put right
quarrel, fight (boyB)
seize
steal, cheat
congeal
mend| fix
crack, split (earth)
leave, depart
leave, permit
look up
rise, jump, get up
enter
make, finish
E
eies, eis*e
erne, emse, enen
*eme-ni
emre-n, hemren
ene
eno
*enusi
ele, else
*eUe
*eraes
•ere
*erenmite
ertse, erfste
•ese
•esier
esoni, esosoni
*exenmi
epe, epse
*etueis
e^-n
shave
forget
wait, detain
be envious
write, paint
stay, remain
signal with the finger
raise, lift, arise
goad, spur, hurry
praise one's self
bathe
finish, end, complete
eat supper
dress
say
hate
leave, depart
pass by
disentangle, extricate, free
sleep
*iweke, inke
gather plants
•iwini
do
iwo
dispute, quarrel
ima
show
ime
join
♦imu
arise
•in
do
ina, inxa-n (una)
sicken
ina-n, insa-n
fall
inanme
rain
1916]
Mason: Muisun Dialect of Coatanoan
448
inn
observe, feel, eonjeetnre, remem
ber, recall
insa
know
♦inkai
speak, talk, say
•inke-ni
seize, grasp
Uo
burn
iluwiy ilpi, ili
put on sash or cloth
ilsi-mi
give meat
♦ilkun
lift skirts
irko
defecate
isento, i8«inte
walk carefully, watchfully
*!»
await
isia
be hungry
isiwa, isiwi
give birth, be bom
iriwe, ifluwe
reet
isi-m, ispan, iicd-me, iipsi
owe
iSQ
play at hand game
*i8iia, isa
follow, imitate
isto, isat
dream
iskani, itskani
pay
'iske-ni, zitske-ni
hiccup
ixime
tremble
•ixironi
sprinkle
•iTiraii
kick
*ixlfla
walk in mud
*izak.a
shout, cry
ixwi, iuie
go, walk (many)
*ixt.ci
sting, be stung by (snake)
ipili, ipile
lie down, lay down
ipire, ip*e
turn around
•it.iu
get the better of one
itok
cleanse, purify
itma
lift, raise
ija, itu
wash
*itATiai
•
arise
ite, itu
spur, incite, urge
ite
•
disparage
•iti-ni
«
bruise, mangle hand
itOy it*co
leave, depart
•itui
•
spread (acorns in the sun)
*it60, itn, itsku
doubt
*itcile '
be ashamed
itco-ni
come out
0
oio, (oit), oiis
seize, take, bring
♦oiwi
tie, clasp, bind
•ouso
order, instruct
•owe
return a favor, give the thing
dreamt
444 University of Calif omia PubUeaUam in Aw^ Arch, and Sthn. [Y oL 11
•one
*oneia
*oii*ome
*on8ie
ole
olo
•oLue
*olli8«e
olte-mi
ono-n
orko
*OMhe
•oewe
*opiweiB
ot*o
*ot«o(po)
ot*mo
•oto
o(8*io
ot8p6*a
oky oke, ok*o
•ok.e
*oteeiiiiix
oteiko
*oteiko
sit down, seat
aeeompanj
hont deer
atky inquire
ean, be able, gain
become blind
signal
kill many
give
beleh
frigbten
speak, reply also
scatter manure
discover, bring out
mend, fix
dirtj, render filthj
piUer
regain
wound
have a pain in ike penis
send
confess, be exposed
discharge, dismiss
de deaf, be quiet
desire, have desire, covet
U
•uwin
kill someone
•uwi-ni
flee
*una, unpina
cure
•un.e
quiet, cause to be silent
uni
desire, covet
ule
stop, cease
ule, (uel)
be sad, cry, be unable
ura
dig holes
*ura(pin)
make sport of, anger, feel, cause
feeling
♦uru-ni
fall
*urusi
have, carry
*ur8e, use
learn (language)
*u8a-ni
have hang-nails on the fingers
use
smell, have an odor
usete, useti, usute
conceive (child)
*usiu-n
depart
*uBiule
go out (fire)
*usui-mi
give seeds
*usuln
surpass, conquer
usxi-ni
be sad
1916]
Mason: MuUun Didleet of Cottanotm
445
uspu, ngapn
fast
*U8tU
whistle
*u8ka
enre hj removing stiek (meking
by shamanf)
*a8ke
mend, fix, repair
uze^ uzue, (nzwe)
gnard; bring the object guarded
uzn-m
increase
*nhiBoni
desire, eraye, eovet
up
roU
•npi
eoveir one's self (clothes)
npn
pay, bny, sell
*apziy npxiti
sip, drink a Uttie
•utisi
bargain, trade, buy, crave, desire,
covet
♦ntix
crave, covet
ntu
goard, place, sow (seed)
•utue
make a grimace
♦utku
double, fold
a^-8i
gnard, protect (child)
•like
bring water
•nk'ini-ni
wish to fall, walk aronnd (di£zi-
nessf)
nk'iai, nk^esi, uk«08iy nknesi
drink water
•utci
close
•utcu
open
nteu, utn, huteu
carry someone, raise, lift
w
waian
wane
•wane-ni
•walektis
wal*a-n, wolo-n
wara, warsa
warak, warka
•warepi
waris
warse, warsi
warta, wanta
•was»e
•wasi
•wasi
•washski, (wackif)
waxa, waktci, wak, waxu
•waxaiam
•waza*ni
•wata
wate
>, err
satiate, cloy
wound one's self
follow in file
be envious
cut
weep, cry
visit, salute
dislike
follow, perform
hide behind
cut and dry meat
beg a great deal
hate, abandon
pulverize (with the teeth)
scratch, scrape
be thirsty
do an act slowly
seize, bring, take atole
come, go
446 Univer9Ufof(kMf4>rmaPvblioati(}n$inAm.AreKandEihn, [VoL 11
wate
laek, fail, be wanting
^waterei, wetare
augment, make great
*wak.a
open the stomach and entrails
wakun
drown at ehildbirth
wakna, waka-ni
freeze
wel*o
cover the head
wesi^xukai
kindle, light
wex6
shield, cover
•wetio
take out the belly
wi
commence, begin
wiya
light, enlighten
wUki
nnfold
wilo
affirm with the eyes
•wilju
slope backwards above
wilkwo, wdiko
swell np (tale)
wire
blow npon, cure
*wirw«
illumine with a brand
wisa
display, show, teach
*wiB.a
scratch (birds)
Hrisen
dress a person
•wisen
spill, scatter
•wiBol
uncover, disclose
*wiBpe
flash lightning
wixe
split feathers for arrows
wizi, winiy oxi-ni
fish, turn about, cure
wixia
dispute, question
wipe
invite
•wit
bow, stoop, jump
wiU
fall, be thrown
♦witu
break a fingernail
wik*e, wiwe
tremble, shake
•wo8o-ni
choke (with pinole)
♦wopo
boU
•yam
•yan
*yanu-ni
•yasa
♦yat.la
yata-ti
•yatan, lasun
yati
*yat8.e
•yeikmi, yere-ni
•yenko
catch (moles)
boast
have pain in the stomach from
running
not take
frighten
give anything
be full (net)
follow, accompany
be urged, impelled
remain, continue, be suspended
divide love (f)
1916]
Mason: Mutiun Dialect of Costanoan
447
jer
•yiusie
*yim-, yumile
*yilu
•yira
♦yika
jono, yons
•yoreti
*yoron
•yoxon
•yoso, yusu
•yoporon
*yopok
yoke
yoko
*ynwi-ni
•ynya
ynme, yftme
ynra
*yiixi(B)
*ynpki-iii
*yntu-n
grow old, become torn
happen, succeed
turn seat around
commence^ enter (season)
pick, prick
grind in metate
cut hair
chase, pursue
pile up
loosen, slacken, ease
have carnal intercourse inter se
make, manufacture
hail
make sport of one
make ash, become ashes
remain, stay
bathe, swim
deceive, cheat
kill by hand
hope to
break the bottom off
run, fall, flow (tears)
M
•ma
mai
*mai-a, mai-z
man
mala, male
*mali
*malu-n
*maxe
*maxer
maxi, mawi
maxu
*maz-tci
*map*is
matal-, matulani
matmu, matnui
*mak*a
makai, maki
maku
*maka
mene, (mane)
*menomi, monomi
*meno-ni, menso
*mensie
•merke
look
laugh, smile
view, behold
quench, put out
soak, wet
cover the genitals
come down for the night
look down, view beneath
make sport of one with the eyes
close
open
be blind, unable to see
put hand over or in mouth
place face downward
stink, have bad odor
be indistinct
cover, place in order to clean
get married
go to eat
forget
sink to the bottom of the water
drown in the water
be ignorant of, not understand
move from the house
448 Umver9ityofCaUfarniaF%bUeaii4m$inAwi.Aroh,andBthn. [YoLU
mexe, maxe
mete
*miwe, miwik, mixu
^milan
'millut
mira
*mire
^mista
»iiiizira
^mipti
*mito-n
»mike
mit^eiy mit^oi, mint^ni
^moil*el*e
^moitee, moi^
mome-n, (monie-n)
^momo
^monoi
monte
monti*
^moro
morke (morwe)
^moxo-n
mohOy molio
^motiolpeee
^motuhe-n
moko
^muiai-n
^mnika
mama, mapu (mnpa)
^momi
manse, monsa
^mare
marsu'ii
man
maai
^mosi
^masiara-ni
^masak'te
maze
^maxi
^moxakiy ixikan
map-
mat-
^matde
^maka
^mateipi
look, tee
hide (in the grmss)
strike f
spread on the groond (bread)
rob one withoat appr^enaion
give presents, regale
fix the head like newborn chil-
dren
warm oneself
plaek the skin on the hand, graze
brood in nest
fall (bread)
test with the point of the finger
sharpen, temper, blont (arrow)
ran in a erowd
gather, eolleet, eome together
be late, delay
plaee something faee downward
enmesh, entangle
advise
relate, reeoont
beg and aceamalate (grain)
make sport of one by shoating
sabmerge, sink
dance above (women)
make a reverence
appear, grow (hair)
be bom, leave
love, desire, covet
swallow withoat chewing
sack
join, combine, meet (roads)
soil, dirty
camp, prepare for night
ache in molar teeth
sackle
heat, warm
like, covet
tickle in the nose
rab, palverize in the hands
saspect, misconstrae
be hot (weather)
finish grinding pinole
close the month
tickle in the hands and feet
eat pinole
hawk, coagh
eat breakfast
3916]
Mason: MuUun Dialed of Co$tanoan
449
N
'nayate
go gathering, get
nam, nanm
hear, listen to, understand
^nane, nene
count, pass in list, miss
nansa (nansa, namxna)
experiment, test
nansi
know, reeognize
*na8a-ni
fall, break (fire, brand)
•natka-Q
blaeken, cause to become black
*neike
be quiet, gentle
nesepa
ask permission
*niatiii
cease doing, quit
nimi
strike, beat, kill
nipa
teach
no8o-po
breathe
•no3ri
guard, hide
notio
lie, deny the truth
noto
slap face^ box ear
•nue
be
•nuiri
desire to, wish to
^nuifiin
love
•numa-ni
increase (pain)
nusa-ni
pant, breathe heavily
•nuBki
snore
*laisaisi
lala
lalei
•lalu-n
*laski(nis)
*latue
lak*e, lawe
laki
laku-n, lauku-n, lusku-n
*lakwa-n
*lakpom
*latcia
•lelte
•lek.o
letsen, lessen, lelsem
liwa, lixwa
liwi, (lik(.)i, Uewi, Hkni,
lixin, lix, uwi)
*l*imuok
lilui
lisko-n, lisa-n
sing rapidly
fell, throw
fan, winnow
lose, miss the road, wander
depart for another place
signal with the tongue
rise, climb (sun)
hang
gulp, eat without chewing
change from one to another
trip, fall, roll and lose something
remain in one place
turn the eyes too much
stink, have a bad odor
like, enjoy, please
hide in the grass
beat, cudgel, kill
steal, run, return and not catch
amuse, entertain
slip, slide, scrape, graze
450 UniverHty of Calif omia FublicatioM in Am. ArcK and Ethn, [ VoL 11
Upa
•lik.wa
loe
•lole
•l.olio
•Lopopoi
*lopx6, lopkti
lok(oi)8, lokflio, lokosi
•lokuk
*lui8mii
*liilpa8
Inxu-n, laz*u-n
*lat*apa
•luile
•luka
^latetmia
hide in any plaee
plaster, daub, smear, gloss
loath, nauseate, repudiate
cause to speak, break a speech
be content, appeased, cease anger
pass between
become mouldj (wheat)
lie, make a mistake
put out (eye)
fall from weight
play the flute
stick in mud or clay, be stuck in
wallow (in sin)
hang (like a swing)
soften the hair
get wet) soaked
B
•ranu-n
*ratS'a
•
*ratcami
*remomae
*rensik
•re^e, rekte
•retie
•reke
•riwi
riri
*ristest
ripa
♦ripu, rotciwewi
ripu
*ripsa
rita
•rite
ritca
roroi-s, (roro-s)
rote
roto
•rotuk, rotko
•roko
rotcio, rotcue, rotciwe
ruisu, rulsiu, ruisin, ruima,
rfiki, ruinxa
runa
rusu
♦ruxi
have pain in the neck
increase, crackle
be swelled up with plants
go from one place to another
interrupt, confuse
gather, collect
hang in a hidden place
change oneself, move
transform, change
put selyage on cloth
serve, do
hit with the flst
release, disentangle, cleanse, purify
prick
open with a knife
cry, shout
make dried meat
speak, talk, converse, recount,
play, entertain
play, entertain, divert, amuse
be (substantive)
drown
untangle, untie knot, knot, tie knot
put in the embers
enmesh, entangle, free, disentangle
move, stir, tremble, shake
dance
spit, expectorate
hide in the rear
1916]
Mas<m: Muisun Dialect of Cottanoan
451
rata
rata
rutus
•rutuk
•ratu-n
speak about a person, or thing, re-
fer to
cat, gather (wheat, feathers, etc.)
conceive (child)
signal " no " with the head
surround by water, isolate
s
sawe
saya
^sayal
*samai, samia
*sanae
*saln-ni
salpa
*salki
*sare
*saromi
sarpa
*sa8a
sate
8atar(a), sia^r(a)
sate
sak*a
sakeri-ni
*satcepame
seye
semo-n, semso-n, (semxo-n)
sele, sehele
selpe
sese
seso-n
*sesort-po
sesuk
sepe (spepe)
*sepie-n
*sialwini
siaxu, siaksu
•sietco-ni
siole
siotio
*siokole-n
*siurire, similile
*siu8pn-ni
*siuto
sing
shout, cry
lie face upward
cut the forelock
approach, draw near
get a cinder in the eye
hang, place in a cleft or fissure
split, fall apart
pray in one's room
administer extreme unction
patch, disappear from view
discover, find (land)
make sport of one by naming him
open the mouth
toast
bring a little
stick in the uvula
bring coals, embers
lengthen, expand
die
look backward
intoxicate with tobacco or liquor,
be crazy
walk in file
shiver
swell with pride, become haughty
decay
cut hair
satiate, cloy
split a flute
speak softly
hit (in stones)
talk, converse among selves, be sad
tie hair in a tuft
become hoarse, unable to speak
have a ringing in the ears
be blinded by the sun
hunt moles
452 Ufmeriity of Cdiiforma TubHeaiumt in Am. AreK and Ethn, [Vol. 11
dwe-n, gik.6-n
break wind
•riwi-ni, iixi-ni
disappear (smoke, tkirst)
siwi(ri-n)
foffoeate with heat, bom
*giii*a-n
become bald
•ginmekpi
kiss
Biniii
aet like a bojr, otaoer
*giiiteii, 8ait«a
toast, cook in earth-oyen
Binkam, sinkam
tickle in the body
•nDra
lift skirt, pnll shirt-tail
•riru
grind salt
*8izii-niy suza-ni
msh, gosh
•sitlAni
have feet asleep
•sitinpe
cramble, chip, make small
■i|6
spread (fire)
siksa, sikila, (tika)
soil, dirtj
*8iteit«e
cry with pain or weeping
*80illW6
enmesh, entangle
soro
flow, gosh
•aorpo
disappear, dim, recede, yanish,
fade
•soter-pu-ni
extend the feet
*fokoro
darken, become night
*8okto-n
get a drop of water in the eye
^taman, lumula
become soiled, dirty
*8amiri-iii
sleep from satiety
•umixi-niy sanii-iiy B>iimia
be content
Bomii
decay
■u-iiy fwi-ni
die
*salii-iii
drop or cinder fall in the eye
*fiiriT6-n
die out, go out, extinguish (fire)
•iur-ni
heat, warm oneself
mxmy
be afraid, fearful
*Ba8ze
act foolishly, play the fool
*8up6-ni
dream of one
■upi
tie, bind
*fiit*a-iii
break, crack
♦iutwi
pinch the mouth
^•atkiy mit*e
stretch the ears
*8aka
go to meet
Bukuma
smoke (tobacco)
Bukei, snkis
think, watch, observe, disapprove
swi'iiy 8wi-n
consume, use up, finish, die
*swi8ia-ni
singe the hair
swize, ftinze
skin, take oif hide
•switcn
toast
*8teekele (eekelef)
set, place
1916]
Mas<m: MuUvn Dialed of Cosianoan
453
xaiskn, xaskn, (xaise-n)
tickle, itch
*XftllII6
draw, fetch water
zawa
caU
*zawei
put on a veil
*xawiini
enclose, lock in
*xawi-iii
still, quiet, be quiet
*xania-iii
die out, go out (fire)
za-mpin, za-npa
eat again
*za]i-ni
desire, crave, covet
*zalaw6
strike sparks
zalas
lie, make a mistake
*xa1eti
play
*zal8i-npe-ne
kindle, Ught (flint and steel)
zalki
stretch, eztend
zari
begin, commence
*zarzare
befall ill, happen badly
*zarpa
disappear, fade away, become in-
visible
*zarteat6
lack a bit, a little missing
zaB.a
desire to, want to
zase-n^ zasese-n
become angry
zasiwa
scratch
zaai-ma-n
be ashamed, shame
zasli-n (zarli)
fear, be afraid
zastitinme, zatirinine
enter wind and cold
•xapu
cleanse, withdraw dirt
zata
sweep
*zatii
gather, assemble (fleas)
•zatki
cleanse, purify
*zatki-ni
go to the other side
zata
•
hit
*zatael*e
grumble, complain
*zake-iii
be flatulent, full of wind
*zakwa-ika
go for mussels
zatei-n, zatsi-n, zati-n
die of hunger, thirst, laughing, etc.
^zeiwele, zeizeie
earthquake, tremble (earth)
zew6y zewi
cast shadow, reflect
zemko
set (sun)
*z6lae
strip oif bark
zelzelte
float
zeksio, (zeisio)
satisfy
•ziete
hiccup
zii, wi, zihi, ziizi, ziin
go for fire, light fire
ziwa
arrive, bring
♦ziwli
take oif rope around neck
zima
seek, search
*zimiia
roll the head
zine, (zinkone)
go, walk
454 Univertity of Calif anUa PubUcaUons in Am. AroK and Ethn. [ VoL 11
•jrile
be wounded, have wounds
ziraSy ziraf
teoldy qnarrely lift the voice
xiri
make dried meat
a • • •
•xirwi-m
lessen, be eeasing (rain, wind)
xise
select, choose, elect
zisie, (xitsik)
make
•xIhUh
have pain in teeth
♦jrixwl
disdain, reject
zipn
carry
•xiteti
rub together
xiti, xitni, (xite)
cleanse oneself
*zita-ni
catch the hand in the door
•xita
m
make dried meat
•xite
spar, prick, goad, stick
*xite pet*o
stop (wind)
xitia, (xita)
sew
•xitimi
•
become indebted
xito, (xifa, xikto)
stretch, crawl
•xitorpi
throw, put, carrj outside
*xit8ke-n
be contented
xiksiy xiwiSi xikoi
tie, bind
•xitoik
make cotton cloth
xoin-we, xoixu-we, xoaxn
carry
•xowo
shout hoi hoi
*xomo
skin, take oif hide
•xon(.)o(ti)
evolver al aroo
^xonkote, xonxote
bundle, collect in a bundle
^xolome, xauni
ignore, not invite
xorko
gulp, swallow
xope
climb, mount
xopo
give water, give drink
•xot'Oro, xot'Ori
put hand in vagina
•xotpo
set (sun)
•xotcolon
make a hole (water)
*xuma, (xutna)
grind (mortar or metate)
xu-mi
give anything
•xu-ni
finish life, approach death
*
xute
kindle, Ught fire
•xn^a
place inside
xuti
■
play game
♦xut»u-n
remove dust, powder
*xut8ki, xufoki
seize, withdraw, remove
*xnka
change (song)
♦xutcu
carry on shoulder
H
*hainnamik*iii
lift with one hand
hio8*e,-hin8e| wise, ihuse-n
wish, desire, want
•hinti
throw, cast
1916]
Mason: Mutsun Dialect of Cosianoan
455
*hilie(pim)
be defiant
*hnme
join, impinge, strike
*hami-ii
wash oneself
homiii, (oxniri, tumiri)
baptise
homa-n, huniRa-ii,
fly
(umsu-n, nnsu-n)
♦hun.i
mix, stir
P
paita
hunt (geese)
•paye
be pregnant
paya
run
*pala
slap, hit with the palm
*palBi*ini-ii
toast, eook
*par8a
gleam, appear light
park!
weigh
*part*eipa
saw a pine
*pa8ipi
visit, salute
*pa8kei
secure fire with flint and steel
paxaf y paxtca
know, recognize
*patiami-n
bet, wager
pati
have^ hold in hand
*patae
release, loose
*pat8xi]i| patski
strike sparks
paka
seek, call, crack mussels
*pak*ak
marry
*paka-ksi
beat
*pakeit
obtain fire, make fire
*pakere
start (tears)
*pakal
give hand, shake hands
*pak8a
shine, lighten (fire)
patei
fall dew, sprinkle
pele, pelke
stick, join together, loosen, sep-
arate
pelte, pete
shut eyes
pesoiCpo)
remember, think
*pepeiia
espigar ea$teUanamenie ^
•pet.e
guard fried fish
•pete
escape, flee, fly, go
•pete-ni
keep mouth closed
•petole
keep feet together
•piisokri
knock with fingers
pio
cleanse teeth
•pinawai
have pain (neck)
*pilpiil*e, palpul'e, tiiltal*e
beat, palpitate (heart, pulse)
pira
inhume, bury
*pirka-n
scratch (birds)
*pi8iek8.i
grind, pulverize
piziy pize
split, open
450 Univertity of California Publieations in Am. Arch, and Ethn, [Vol. 11
•pixu-m
*pitila, pista
pitipuy pitui-ni
•pitu-ni
•pitBi
pite, pitae, pitui
•pit8.a
pitciwi
*poiBtco-ni, poiteo-ni
•poiko-ni
•polo
poLo
•porpore
posio, pasio
•po8.o
*p08ol<o ats
*poBo(poi)
•poxoro-n
pofo
•poko-ni
potsie
•punsi-wi
•punsi-ni
pulki-ni
•puriure
pusa
*pu8i-n
•puxi
•puti
put*in
•putu
puta
pu^, p^t^y putci-ri
putski
•putske
*put8iule, potsinle
burst pas
pineh, squeeze
cleanse intestines of exerement
flow, gush (tears)
frighten, fri^ten away
tie, bind, unloose, untie
signal "no" with eyes
shake, eleanse the hair
break wind without knowledge
frighten, scare
sunt sodomicici
paint, draw
dose
cut, singe hair with brand
check, suspend, equal
intend to dispute
be drunk, intoxicated
get the hives
pull out down, fine hair, pluck
swell, puff up
gamble, censure
catch (birds)
view with close attention
break off bottom
quake, tremble, earthquake
satiate, fill, cloy
twist like a whirlwind
recover, feed, give to eat
cover and guard
involve, wrap, gather
return and go from place to place
bring acorns, etc.
blow
pull hair
make the sound **put, put"
bum brightly, make no smoke
(fire)
*taula-si
•taye
*tamin, tan*
tamu
*tamxa-ni
tamta
*tanu, tanyu, tan*
*tanta
hold in arms
go quietly
double, fold
warm oneself in the sun, take the
sun
have earache
strike, beat
lift skirts
embrace, lift in arms
1916]
Ma$<m: JfnUmi Dialect of Costanoan
457
*taliini
make blisters on hands
tal^
extend the palms of the hands
•talku
spring, jump
*ta8iat6
wateh, dance
*ta8ta
display palm9 of hands
*taxara
follow, go after
tax(e)
ask, question
tapa
turn the tables, pay back in own
coin
•Upl
measure
Uta
touch
*tat8ka
•
extend hand
•takani
bum
*tak.e
measure
taku-ni
choke, strangle
teme-n, temo, temso
sleep by firey warm oneself by fire
tenpe, tempe
dry up (water, river)
tere
cut hair
terpe
smart, pucker (pepper)
tie, tik
grumble, complain
tio
shoot arrow
•tiuBi-n
flower, be in flower
•timire-ni
have headache
•timn-ni
trip, stumble
tinke-ni
jump, spring, lei^
•tUo
don regalia
•tiru
miscarry
•tireu-n
cut, break
•tiBi
cure the itch
♦tixi
slice meat, make dried meat
•tixiro-ni
slip, slide, fall
tipe, tiptipe
wander, walk about
•tipur
cut hair
*tip80-ni
rattle, make a noise (bone)
•tipki
cut hand
•Uti-n
coyer with shoulder
•titu
»
fray, unweaye
•titnk
lie on one side
•titu
extend hand
•titei
drown
•toutosi
•
harden, strengthen
*towo-n
remain rigid, frozen
tone, tonse
lose, find
♦tolflO
break knees
tor-ke
bring amole
•toxere-ni
be constipated
•topope
extend fingers and do top, top
totio-n
err, mistake, lie
•totoro-n
put in salt, salinify
458 Unwer$itffofCaUformaF%bKeaU&n$inAm.Areh.andEtkn. [VoLll
*totiie
tokso, (tokse)
*tiiin«
'taiflOy tniu-nure
•tume-n, tame-mels
tiiii*e, (tank)
tanate, (tanate)
tule, (talk)
•talok
talka
tar-si
•tasi-n
*ta0a-n
tapa-n
•tata
*tatia-n
*tatiii
•takitee
pat on shawl
ramble, make great noise, snore
mak» wooden bridge
tremble (hand, belly)
make food
finish, complete, end
eoneeive (child)
knock at door, call
cover one (for the night)
give rap, fillip
be cold, chilly
watch a dance
await, expect
finish, complete, end
coyer one, pat on hat
dief
string a bow
lift earth, (encorrar)
T
•tayawire
fala
*^sak
•tota
«
*tatu-n
*tatahale
*takarpite
teyo
*^melele
•Jele
tetesi
•teke
•tlen
tiwi
»iinai
•^iniwi
•tU.asi
*ti8«ektene, tcirsextene
tiska
•tlxta
tipe
*tipe(8pi)
*tip-wi
•titi
tika
•iollo
ton(o)me
•tonko-n
smile, chnckle, half laagh
be hot (weather), pat in snn
clear, clarify (sky, weather)
possess mach, own much
cease pain
speak between teeth
sit down, sink
blaze, heat, be afire
bum much
go in file, follow
pash, jostle, squeeze, hold
tip-tooy walk on toes
kick
put in bag, pocket
tighten, constrain
milk
listen to attentively, hear
cover with ashes
split, break, smash
hide in sand, be hidden
thresh grain
make thongs, straps for the capote
cat, shorten, clip, abbreviate
defend
chew, masticate
be seated
seek a dead animal
wither, become ury (seeds)
1916]
Mctaan: Mutsvn Dtalect of Costanoan
459
•toxoro
•
pass, go by (water)
•tOX(p6)
dry up (water, riyer)
•^
strike in the eye
toma-s, (tumas, tnmsa-ii)
like, enjoy, please
tnnkn, (tannk)
signal "no" with nostrils, con
stricting them
•tulu
•
make a hole
•tura
thunder
*tar8n, tatsu
walk continually, never stop
tapu-ni
put finger in eye
tuka
•
beg, ask
kai, (kayl, kaizi)
smart, be strong, bitter, bite
•kai-a
•
tighten, constrain
*kawak
advise, notify
*kam
do, make
kama(i), kamexe
look, watch, see, behold
*kamu
lend (wife)
*kamutce, xamutce
lack a bit, be missing a piece
*kane
go to the quarrel, fight
*kanxi
dry up
kale
defend
♦kal.u
bite
♦kar
be fortunate, happen well
*kara
grind, rub in the palms
*karapu
give tobacco
»karka
kindle fire with small sticks
»karki
.bargain, trade, barter
kase
bite
•kaxi
louse, expel lice
kapal(a)
embrace
*kapata
cross the arms, hands
•kapi
carry a large bundle under the arm
katia
give (clothes, food)
♦katu
kiU with teeth (lice)
*katu-ni
dry up (water)
*katca, katcue
be full of crickets, insects; expel
them
•kat.ei
drown
•keie(k)
gather, collect, come together
kewe, keinwe
obstruct, intercept
*kelete, kelte
frown upon, watch with disap-
probation
*kelok(mo), kelox(mo)
play by pinching
*kenem
put in proper place
ketio
argue, dispute, contradict
kile
shine, glare, glitter
460 UnwerHtyofCdUfomiaFia)UcaU(m$i>nAm.Areh,andEthn. [VoLll
*kiriwire, kiripire
•kixtiykikU
kipi
*kipiih8
kitpa
♦kita
*kitea, kitena
ko, ko.y kwo.y kwa, kna
kome
•koUole
*kwie, knie
kunile (kapile)
kusa
*kiifinwi
*kuza
kii^(8)y kii^(r), kntcnra,
kn^m
♦kut-a
k2uk(*)«9 xrak(*)6
write
have pain in throat
wink
inflate, swell cheeks
hide in hollow of a tree
make Are with two stieks
elose, lock with key; open, onloek
tire, become tired
mmble, grumble (intestines)
whistle
smoke (Are)
wash
meet, encounter, see
hide among rocks
double, bind, tie
tolerate, suffer, endure
name, call
TC
tcai(eB)
tcaora, tcausara, (tcaura)
•tcauri
*tcantcane
tcala, (tcalsa, tcasali)
*tcahel-e, tcehd'C
tcapu
*tcaka, tcaksa
*tcak.i, tcaxki
*tcakuniti
*tcakna-n
*tcimun, tcaimun
*tcimu-ni
♦tcile
tcirpi
*tcikri-n, tcixri-n
tcite
*tcitmo
*tcoliote
•tcorowe
tcorok
•tcotle
tcokse, tcos«o
tcunu, tcuni, (unu; (tcun*),
tcunuhwi
tculu
praise
be seated, be (positional substan-
tiye)
stink, smell bad
walk with shoulders raised
urinate
take the higher part (song)
prick, stick, pinch
bring, arrive
leave, depart
hate, desert
go ahead
treat ill, hinder, impede
bump the head
ring bell
cry, shout
reside, live
dance
prick, punch the eyes
water moves in intestines
moisten, dampen
sadden, become sad
be in file or line
have pain (in mouth or ear)
wrap, extend, shorten, double,
lift, fold, unfold
jump, spring, leap
1916]
Mason: Muisun Dialect of Coatanoan
461
•tculki
strangle, ehoke by squeezing neek
*tcuflpa
hide
•tcnknri-ni
defecate, void excrement
AaTECTlVES
auld
saltjy saline
auBta
9
sweet-toothed, gluttonous
auze
high, tall
amaja
nude, naked
amank
famous
and
left-handed
antiwin
small
asia
distinct, different
apsie, apeik
good
ateitak
so great
atcien
thievish
atciwa
silly, filthy
euU
sweet
el.emo
soft (ground)
elepisi elewia
straight, in file
emxe
very soft, gentle, easy
•8.0
lewd, unchaste
e^e
leafless, bare
ina
ill, sick
in-se
lachrymose
irk-ti-o, irx-ti-o
flatulent
isiwa
newborn
i^8, itsa
new
itee
smaU, Uttle
0W08
obedient, faithful
omzol*6
light, without weight
olsie
soft, easy
mnuln
filthy, vile
uiixa
snotty, filthy
unknm
thin, rare
oni
big-headed
Qsulay (nsona)
deep-set (eyes)
ukumi
crippled
Qtcili
fuU-Upped, thick-Upped
wartci
difficult, narrow, small (road)
wa8.ay waska, waksa
streaked, soiled
waaiwe
playful
we-8olOy we-jero, we-saro
large, great
we-tan
large, great
wetem68*ate
lean, gaunt, thin
wiman
lazy
witina
sticky
witeuktely witeuztel, witg'U
narrow, small
462 UniverHty of California Pubhcaiiom in ^m. Arch, and Bthn. [Vol. 11
womo
bearded
wot*oIo
deep-set (eyes)
yamuUi
unequal, different
yatcomas, jatceme
torn, full of holes
yer-se
torn, old, broken
joltOy yo(»a
big-eared
yopono
ruptured
yusala
fat, pot-bellied
mam<oza, mam'Oka,
foolish, stupid, silly
mam>aiixa
maztil'a
catarrhal, expectorant
mata
•
long-haired
matini, matil*i
large, great
meilo
large-mouthed
mez-ely maz-ele
blear-eyed
metske
9
cloudy, clouded
minua
narrow, difficult (road)
min-miiii min-mpin.
pretty, nice, pleasant, beautiful^
misi-a
good
mitile
curved, crooked, bent
mom-ti-e
slow, late, tardy
muretUy mortciiy murtiiy
dark, black, like night
mart*ou
muse
full-breasted
mutimte
•
fat-buttocked
mntcira
pleated
natka
dark, black
nlotaio
short, bob-tailed
noioro
big-footed
noti-ti-o
lying, untruthful
nop-ti-o
short in time, quick
nuxurikonin, nuxurixonin
flat-nosed
nntiri
big-nosed
laita
•
long in time, tall, high, long
laskan
eyen, smooth, plain
latem
•
long, large-tongued
lakte, lazte
big-headed
leocete
•
long, tenuous, stringy (phlegm)
Le-ti-p, l.e-t.i-0, loito,
soft, easy, loose, not hard
l*ok-ti-o
lisuy liisa
toothless, gums
lifiTiie
empty, clear
lit^imo
wet (hair)
lopote
firmly resolute
lopteo
ruptured
laplupsi
equal, straight, untwisted
latcomay laspi, Lnapi,
wet hair
l.utspi, Intspi
lutcti *
big-bellied, hairless
1916]
Mason: MuUun Dialect of Cottanoan
468
ranta
with big oeeipot, back of head
rinta
•
thin, lean
riski
flat-nosed
ritea
liberal, frank, generous, bene-
fieent
ritena
silly, foolish, stupid
rikti
•
protruding (eyes)
romso
granular
ropto
dirty-eyed
rotciteoy ritera, roteiko
blear-eyed
ratis
open, uneovered, ezeavated
m^i
congealed
sanre, (sauri)
fat, greasy
sam
ruptured
saxirinme
sweet, odoriferous
satara
•
unclean
Biat*eara
clear, rare> thin
sieperero
woolly, fleecy, hairy
simke
sUent
sitLu, flit«ia
smaD, young
somsie
lewd, unchaste
Botolo, sokolo, sotiteo
big-lipped, large-mouthed
supiri
watered
sap*a
like a bladder, blister
zan*an
married
xalea
blind
xas, xase
brave, flerce
zaska
brunet, dark-skinned
zat-xatsiy zat-xasti
clean, well-swept
zemtflo
•
sUent
zene
unequal
zel*weii
content, satisfled
xetoed
leafless, sharp-pointed, keen
zetsze
•
tired, worn-out
zitBUy (ritiia
insipid, tasteless
zontee, zonzontee
empty, void (mussels), melan-
choly, crestfallen
zo8-ti-Oy zoiskore
light, with little weight
ZO-ti'68
foolish, siUy
zo-ti-Oy zoie
loose, hanging
zotpe, zot«iko
bare, without fruit
zotsn
with deep-set eyes and bushy
eyebrows
zokoi(o)
scabby, itchy
hitnktei, hitnztei
mized, intricate
hOWOB
well-served
hozehen
tardy, late
humnln
black
hnsiero
big-mouthed
464 UnwersiiyofCaUfi>rnMP%blicationiinAwi.AreKamdEthn. [Vol. 11
hnklemeeate
delicate, flne, ligkt
pftine
bloody
paiia
good at nmning
pAlCOka
white
patka
pinky flesh-eolor, red, cream
pel.amoy pekiek, pelek
soft
pelo (Sp.t)
bald, kairloM
pelao
garmloos
pert«we
soft (bread)
pitko
pot-bellied
polio
paintedi colored
polpol-si
pinto, spotted, full of points,
streaked
porsie
trained (maker of onasnal things)
porko
artistic
poxolo
prominent, bulging, protruding
(eyes)
potsinle
smokeless (fire)
potxe
Ught, Uttle weight
potoo
quick, active
pnnta, po^
big-bellied, with much intestines
pnltei-te
full-breasted
pn^rte
newly-born
pa(.Uy polfay polfo
extremely protruding, bulging
(eyes)
pnteete
anxious, desirous
tamteite
partly painted, colored
taairi
hard, tough
tazarufe
drunken, reeling
taxara
in file, in a line, straight
tap*an
good
tapta
serious
tep^
shady
tini, tirtd
clear, limpid, pure
tiraia
large-buttocked
tixima, tilfo
high-browed, with a large fore-
head
tikili
large-eyed
titira, Utini
twisted, rounded
towo-ro
shivering with eold
torte
ashy, ash-colored
to-ti-o
silly, foolish, lying, untruthful
tokolo
syphiUtic
tokororoi
smooth, straight, even
tumnxu
tupsiu
fat
humpbacked, crooked, bent, curved
taila
•
dwarfed
^ara
spotted
\aBkvLf ^sas
pink, flesh-colored, red
1916]
Mason: Mutiun Dialeet of Coatanoan
465
^aziale
dear, limpid, pure
tata
rick, well supplied with garments
tak.i
heavy with fruit (trees)
faknmte
clear, thin, full of holes
tesele
•
pink below
tomto
•
with loose dothee
\onko
big-footed
fokd-tl-e
good at running, swift
tiiinni
•
wrinkled
tnfuare
blunt-nosed
^fona
small-eyed
kai-nawin
narrow, difficult, small
kajd
strong, pungent
kaltcit«6
loud-voiced
kasl'ii
small-headed
katitn
•
pot-bellied, fat
katm
•
with prominent teeth
kakza, kaz«a
bitter
kel(8ie)
raw
kelte
opaque-eyed, blind
kero
twisted (tree)
kearihon
hoarse
keteiwesi
ready, prepared
kirsi, kit8.i
well-painted
kipi, kipiri
twisted, not straight, (feet, road)
kipurorOy kiwuroro
twisted, streaked
kititae
• •
creaking, grating
kit8.a
one-eyed, squint-eyed
koro
thin, gaunt, lean
kninn, kwinn
narrow (road)
kuti
small
kntis
clear
kutcB-kets*!
•
very well tied, bound
teal-ti-a
urinous, fond of urinating
tcalka
white
tearka
clear (sky)
tearki
quiet, restrained
teakulfliy tenki
downcast, head downward
teese, tcixu
blue (eyed)
teekere
torn open, ripped
tdrU
yeUow moro
teiflire
provoked, angry, in bad humor
tcomelei
cowering, squat
teoxifliy teopsoxsiy tcopBoksi
pock-marked
teozorore, tcokere
full of holes
teopolotesi
open, uncovered
tenierte
adorned, decorated
tenpea
white, flesh-colored
tentsQy tentu
green
466 UnwerHiyofCMfornwPfa>heation8inAm.Aroh.andSthn. [VoLU
Adverbs
Locative
an*it, anit, an*i, an*epey
anta, an
ansia
axe
emze
enenam
esen
intis, info
iti*
itian, it^ajate
orpei
UBiun, nsionte
winimoi (wirimni)
naxana, nozana, nnzn
ne, niy nia, nitnn, niatnn,
nime
nn, nna
lewe^
ramai (resmai)
rini
rinsikii
sanae, taaanae
sinki
xat>ni
tapere
ti
tina (pina), tina-tnm,
tina-tnn, titnn
tipilikt«, tipilUe^ tikilakte
tita
kari
Adverbs
where t
diftanty far
apart, another place
far down, very distant, indiatinet
out of sight
behind
wheret
there, distant
backward
in the middle
farther on, farther
below, nnder
there (farther)
here, hither
there (nearer)
low
within
above
high
hither
end, edge
before, preceding
above
there, behind
right here, close, hence
roond abont
on one side
outside
Temporal Adverbs
aaxaie
yet, still
am^ren
a Uttle time, Uttle while
ar, am
already (past time)
arata, (araa)
tomorrow
artiskan, atsknn
saddenly
at, ara
shortly, soon (near fntore or re-
cent past)
emen
still, yet, althoogh
et, ete, yete, (yote, ikte,
soon (indefinite fatare)
iste)
imi, ima*
always, all the time
in.at, inaat
whent
1916]
Mason: MuUun Didleet of Coatanoan
467
inya, inyaha, (yu'aha)
shortly, at onee, (immediate fu-
ture)
ipsinn
a little while, a short time
iti
after some time
itizsina
at last, today
itma
early in the morning
itsia, it'ia, ipoA, itian,
afterward, soon, shortly
itaomtnm, i(*aiate
osioiy oiflio
again, another time
ume, uni
when, whenever
nle
yet, still, as yet
wisi
past time
wika
yesterday
yae
ever, at any time
yeteste
shortly, soon, in a short time
maran, marknm, markutkus
fature time
maha
at once
mes, met
fature time
naha
today
nua
yet, still, although
xapuhuy xaputea
never
hokse, hoke
a long time ago, formerly
hnyakse, wiyakse
this afternoon
pinawai
then, therefore, in that ease
tabaxy taba
today, day
kane, kaneme
before, earlier than
ketciwesi, (koteiwesi,
soon, at once, ready
kepired)
koteop, (koph)
when, whenever
kne
in the olden- times, once upon a
time
kntis, kuti
presently, very soon, a little while
teien
now, at once
teira
always, eontinually
Descriptive and Miscellaneous Adverbs
aereis, eraeis
aman
amane
amanis*e
amun, amu, amn
asaha
atpesi
a^, ati
ewe, ene
ewoye, eye, etmoye
enohek
es«e
so, thus, truly
so many
in truth, truly
uninvited (t)
in order that, concerning, because
truly, certainly
good, truly
without, no
and, but
(past desiderative)
but (apposition)
just as if
468 Univer$ity of California Publications in Am, Arch, and Eikn. [VoL 11
esiensan, eaienem
(indirect diseoorse)
6X6, zeh6y he, M, hi, hexe,
yea
66X6
epaeis, aoepMis
perehanee, perhaps
6p8i6, epsik
nol do nott
6kwe
no, not
imatknn, imsten.
if (contrary to fact condition)
iaap, iflu
tmly, certainly
ipten, ntix
more
orteo, jenko
eqoally
nsi
why, because
nksi
without more ado, heedlessly
walte
feet to head and head to feet
W6l6
(substantivet)
wiRi
because
yas^e
also, as well
yekere
more, much more
yuta .... ynta
either .... or
ma
truly
mo^
tell me I (interrogative)
mnisln
(among themt)
nan, nami, nani
perhaps, maybe
na at*ia
yes, of course
nohiln, nitshim
eaehibajo
sata
Uke, as if
Bir6
strongly
xatxatei
•
stepping high
xene-kte
unequal
xenkots*6
•
silently
xehered
low (voice)
X6t8k6r6
crawling
xitepn
strongly
hai, hahi, ain, aia, hia, hiha
and, also (enclitic)
pinl, pinyl, (pinya)
perhaps, perchance
taxe
(interrogative, final position)
tnkne
would that I (past optative)
|aman
half
kaitis
with this, no more
kati, kata, katam
like, resembling, just as if
kna, koai, kaaw6
thus
tci6L6
high (voice)
Intebjbgtions
ain*, ainn, aoin*, anin
give me it I bring me it I
atena rantik
shout at middle of dance
e*
shout at gambling game
iflk6
wait a momenti
it'ie, iui6
come on I let's go I
1916]
Mason: MuUun Dialed of Coatanoan
469
ilclntnint
oto
unik8ia(ne)
yela, yelamini
yuma
ynpe, yu
waras
nami, nani
lalei
linei
Botoi
Bokai
xep
sine
zouwo
zuU
•
tail
tin
•
kama
kari
ke
kie
tcaorak
teit, teitdL
wait a moment I
nmt gol
would that I (vehement desire)
wait a moment I
come on I let's gol
mnl gol
npon mj life!
let's seel well seel
get out!
shont at gambling game
shout at beginning of dance
shout at gambling game
shout at gambling game
shout at gambling game
look I
shout at end of dance
shout at gambling game
shout of gambling game
shout of gambling game
lookt
shout of gambling game
listen I look I
who knows I
shout at gambling game
shout at gambling game
470 University of California PubUcatumi in Am. AreK and Eihn. [VoL 11
POSTSCRIPT
At Pleasanton, Califomia, live a small number of Indians,
members of various central Califomian groups, gathered here by
reason of community of interest. They speak Spanish and Plains
Miwok among themselves. A visit was paid them for a few hours
in January, 1916, for the principal purpose of securing terms of
relationship and notes on social organization. One of the two
informants visited proved to be an elderly woman from San
Lorenzo and from her a vocabulary of a himdred odd words was
secured. A comparison of this with De la Cuesta's Mutsun shows
actual identity in many cases. The practical identity of so many
words proves first, the phonetic simplicity of the language, the
care with which it was recorded and the value of the Spanish
language as a medium for the recording of such aboriginal speech ;
second, the slight change which has taken place in this unliterary
language in the past century, and third, the correctness of the
recent transcription from Spanish to phonetic orthography. As
regards the latter point, the correctness of the transcription of
gm and gn to km and kn is demonstrated, while that ot gs to xs
in accordance with tigsin, tixsin is discounted by the record of
tugsiis as tuksus. No data were secured to elucidate the problem
of gt and other g combinations.
The glossary secured follows here for purposes of comparison :
oril bear hnn wolf
oto'imhi snake pirdwii rattlesnake
ma'i'yan coyote TOukuti' dog
ha'mni
fish
a'rwex'
oak
Ta'Por.
wood
yu'kii
live oak
TiwTft
flower
in
tears
si're
Uver
iiu
hand
XQ>S
nose
nrix, uri
hair
hSyek*
beard
we'per
month
hiii
eye
mi^'nyix
heart
horko'sa
throat
motel, mo*tel
head
Ta*mas
eyebrows
ma*e
breasts
Tim.a'x'
forehead
las*e
tongue
Tomii, tomfi
leg, loins
•ran.ai*
back of neck
Ta*E*
naU
ri'Tuk
intestines
TnKftuS
ear
si.T, sit
teeth
kor6'
foot
1916]
Mason: Mutsun Dialed of Costanoan
471
innx^
road
•ru'wai*
house
ha't.!
bow and arrow
teplal*
basket
apa«
father
Sinin
daughter, child
ana*
mother
Si'nmatc'
small child
afici
paternal aunt
sulTa'^tt
white people
aiTaKiil
woman
ha'uak^
wife
a'TCiaKie
virgin
hu'nTatc*
old man
ere*
uncle or aunt
Papa
paternal grand-
inlfi
son
father
uetreS
chief, shaman
Taka*
elder brother
u'zi
mother-in-law
(ra*rid
man
mele/
grandmother
TalC'
younger sister
m4k*o
husband
Ta'.nan
elder sister
mayin
wife of chief
Tanfiikifi
younger brother
merg'i
father-in-law
Kat*netc*
•
old woman
mg'riS
daughter-in-law
KOt«CO
young man
mueKma
people
tcotco"
grandson
a>we
morning star
yuk.i
ashes
irek«
stone
si
water
omu'w,omu'x^
''sea, arroyo
•Si'.Tic
fog
oS.e'
stars
hi'yis
fire
warS'p*
land
hidmen
sun
yo.ko
live coal
Kormei
moon
niK'ani
yesterday
hiwe*
shaman's dance
neTuhi
today
hu.fii'S
tomorrow
•ri'simu
hill near town
ka'U'O
north
makiSmo'.To
it is cloudy
makiS a^m^e
it is raining
yuwa'kne mak'damne
it ceased raining
herwe
it is hot
kauwi*
it is cold
lofikdwiS, lofiki/ii
it is white
sirke^iS
it is black
pultewis
it is red
we'ter
it is large
kntcu'iS
it is small
ftomikii
give me I
mand r5ti
where is it?
ri'Tcikmin
shouting of shaman at dance
hu'>tukne
•
he died
ka'*nak hu'tusin
I am going to die
me'iiem hU'tusi"
you will die
wa*ka hU'tuBin
he will die
maki.n makhu'tUBin
we will die
makam kamhu'tusin
you (plu.) will die
wa.kamakeahu'tasin
they will die
hu'.tukne'K
I have died
472 Un%verHiyofCiaiforniaPubUcaU4mtinAm.Areh.andBthn. [YoLU
c/tinii ni'm i'
ka'*na ekni'mi oril
me«iiek* snimi
ma'kam kimi'mi
wa'*kamaK makisni'mi'siiii
Ka'.na* ty.'he
ka*na ektea^u^ra
n6*ea tea«u^ra
Ka'iia Ka'yin
pf*ii ka'in
ka/iKsiKBiT
ka'iksikmo'tel
kiika*iKTiimi
KanaK u'tkani
ka^naksa'wi
ka.na*Ki'fti
ka*na kwarka
ka>iia eki'^wi
ka/nakra'pona
ka/nakio'TCyen
a'Toiimente
ekit* Kanxana
anini*k<
hi'n^ka'maBin
akwet* kiniuite takaa'ma
ka*nak teatce
ka'nak*einle
ka^nak ete
Ka*nak i'tma
Ka'oak hd'pe
Ka*nak e'son
Ka*nak yoken
I am going to kiU jroa
I am going to kill the boar
you will kill me
yon (plu.) will kill me
they will kill me
I nm
I Bit
now I sit
I am ill
he ifl ill
my tooth aehea
my head aehea
my back aehea
am playing
am singing
am daneing
am weeping
am shouting
am going to stir
am laughing
want to vomit
am hungry
am thirsty
am going to eat
don't know what I will eat
am standing
am lying down
am sleeping
got up
get down
am tired
INDEX^
Titles of papers in this Tolume are printed in bold-faced type.
Acatl (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form of,
331 fig. 7, 368, 369 fig. 29.
Accent, stress, mode of emphasis,
in language of Germanic origin,
and in Kato and other Athabas-
can dialects, 17.
Achomawi, 281 footnote 6, 287, 288
footnote 16.
Adjectives, Mutsnn, 425, 461. See
also Suffixes.
Adverbs, Mutsun, locative, 466,
temporal, 466, descriptive and
miscellaneous, 467.
Algonkin, 288.
American Indians, Handbook of,
cited, 288.
Animals, list of names of, in Mut-
sun language, 427.
Antigiiedades mexicanas, 300.
Athabascan, 288.
Athapascan, spoken by Sarsi In-
dians, 190.
Atl (Aztec day-sign), typical form,
306; ornamental form of, 331
fig. 7, 357 fig. 22, 358 fig. 23,
359, 360.
Atlatl, 337, 338 fig. 7, p. 368.
Atsugewi, 281 footnote 6, 287, 288
footnote 16.
Aztec calendar, 300; time-periods
in, 300, 302; intercalations in,
300, 317, 319, 320, 328; Venus
year, 301, 320; Mercury year,
301; moon not regarded, 301;
star-periods, 301 ; cempoaUi, 301,
302; nemontemi, 301; method of
maldng observations, 303; sys-
tem of dating, 303, and method
of writing dates, 309; day-signs,
304, derivation of, 327, deline-
ation of symbols in manuscripts,
328; thirteen as a factor in, 308,
313, 323, 324, 326; numerals,
308, 313, 322, 323, 324, 326;
Tonalamatl, 310, 311, 315, 325;
cycle (fifty- two year period),
314; not devised for chrono-
logical records, 315; as a means
of soothsaying, 315; index of
birthday used for personal name,
315; corrections of, 316, 317,
319; original sources, 318, 319;
origin of, 321; twenty as a fac-
tor in, 322, 326; probable line
of evolution, 327. See also Time-
periods, Thirteen, Day-signs.
Aztec codices. See Codices, Aztec.
Aztec manuscripts, delineation of
day-signs in, 297; bibliography
of, 394. Sef also Codices, Aztec.
Aztec mythology, cataclysms in,
379.
Aztec year, initial day, 312; year-
sign, 314; cycle of fifty-two
years, 314.
Baegert, cited, 290.
Bandolier's papers on ancient
Mexican manuscripts, value of,
320.
Barrett, S. A., cited, 281 footnote
6.
Bartlett, 280.
Bear, totem, 295.
Beaver language, 190.
Bebnar, Francisco, cited, 280, 285;
orthography altered, 281.
Blackf oot Indians, Sarsi associated
with, 190; Sarsi stories about,
263, 269.
Boas, F., cited, 288.
Boas Aniiiversary Volume, 303.
Bologna Codex, 309.
Book of Indexes, 310; applied to
time-periods, 311.
"Book of Tributes," 299.
Brinton, D. G., 280, 289; cited,
279, 288.
British Columbia, relationships of
Indian languages of, with Sarsi
and Beaver, 190.
Buffalo hunting, Sarsi texts, 273,
275.
"Calendar round," fifty-two years
period in Maya C^endar, 314.
C^endar symbols in the manu-
scripts, delineation of, 328.
C^endar system of the Aetecs. See
Aztec cidendar.
California, Gulf of, 280.
California, Lower, 279, 290.
California, South Central, social
organization of Indians, 291; to
be compared to that of Luisefio,
• Univ. Calif. Publ. Am. Arch. Ethn., vol. XL
473
Index
Mohave, and Pima, 295; inter-
relations within its own area,
296.
California, University of, scientific
publications on native Indian
languages, 401.
Galli (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
341, 342.
Campo, California, DieguefLo dia-
lect spoken at, 177 footnote.
Ctoe (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
331, fig. 7.
Cempoalli, in Aztec calendar, a
"period of twenty," 301.
Chamberlain, A. F., cited, 288.
Chavero, 300.
Chemakuan, 288.
Chimariko, 281, 285, 286, 287.
CSiontal. See Tequistlatecan.
Chumash, 287.
Chumash and Cosianoan Lan-
guages, cited, 421 note 8.
C^pactli (Aztec day -sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
329, 330 fig. 5, 333 fig. 8;
sources of drawings, 334.
davigero, original source for
study of Aztec calendar, 319.
Coati (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
329, 329 fig. 4, 345 fig. 13.
Cochimi, proximity of the 8eri to,
280.
Cocopa, 186 footnote 34; fricative
X, 180 footnote 10; open vowel
compared with Mohave and
Dieguefio, 184 footnote 20;
proximity of the Seri to, 280.
Codex, Bologna, 309; Borbonicus,
300; Tro-Cortesian, 323; Vati-
can A, 320; Zapotec, 299.
Codices, Aztec, publication of by
Lord Kingsborough, 299; nu-
merals in, 308.
Costanoan, Mutsun dialect of, 399,
400; structure, 402; phonetic
system, 402; vowels, 402; con-
sonants, 402; sonant g missing,
403,
Cozcaqauhtli (Aztec day-sign),
typical form, 306; ornamental
form, 364 fig. 26, 375 fig. 33,
376.
Cree, 261, 269.
Crowchief, Charlie, interpreter,
190.
Cuesta, Father Felipe Arroyo de
la, the Mutsun dialect of Cos-
tanoan based on vocabulary of.
399 ; collection of Mutsun words,
phrases, and sentences, 400, 470;
Mutsun grammar, 401, 420, 421.
Cuetzpalin (Aztec day-sign), typi-
cal form, 306; ornamental
forms, 343, 344 fig. 12.
Cure, Bosendo, Dieguefio Indian,
177.
Cycle, fifty-two year period in Az-
tec calendar, 314.
Dates, in Aztec calendar, system
of, 303 ; method of writmg, 309 ;
date of birthday used for per-
sonal name, 315.
Day-names, Aztec, 305.
Day-signs in Aztec manuscripts,
delineation of, 297; typical
forms, 306; year named after
initial day-sign, 312; dominical,
312; local varieties, 321; se-
quence of, 330; convergence,
331, 354, 355, 362; ornamental
forms, figures of: Snake, 306,
329, 345, 346; Water-Monster,
306, 330, 333; Bain, 306, 331,
385, 386 fig. 36; Flower, 306;
Cane, 306, 368 fig. 28; Qrass,
306, 364; Wind, 306, 338, 389
fig. 37, 390; House, 306, 341;
Lizard, 306, 344; Death, 306,
347, 350; Deer, 306, 351, 352,
354, 355 ; Babbit, 306, 353, 354,
355, 356; Water, 306, 331, 337
fig. 22, 358 fig. 23, 359, 360;
Dog, 306, 361 fig. 24, 362;
Monkey, 306, 363, 364, 365 fig.
27, King-Vulture, 364 fig. 26,
375 fig. 33; Ocelot, ocelotl, 306,
370, 372 fig. 31; Eagle, 306,
373 fig. 32, 374; Motion, 306,
377, 378 fig. 34; Flint, 306, 381
&g. 35, 382; borrowing of char-
acteristics between, 391 fig. 38,
392.
Day-symbols in Aztec calendar,
305; derivation of, 327; delin-
eation of, 328.
Death (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
347, 350 fig. 15. See Skull.
Deer (Aztec day -sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
351, 352 fig. 16, 354 figs. 17 and
18, 355 figs. 19 and 20.
Deer totem, 295.
Delineation, The, of the Day-
Signs in the Aztec Manuacripts,
297.
Dieguefio Language, Phonetic
Elements of the, 177.
474
Index
Dieguefio language, phonetic ele-
ments of, compared with Mo-
have, 283, 284; unaccented
vowels, 284.
Dixon, R. B., cited 279, 281 foot-
note 6, 285, 286, 287, 288 foot-
note 16.
Dog (Aztec day -sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
361 fig, 24, 362.
Dominical day-signs, 312.
Eagle (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
373 fig. 32, 374.
Eagle-ribs, Sarsi informant, 191;
story about, 223; war deeds of,
269.
Eagles, in Sarsi texts, 277.
Edmonton, Canada, 257.
Ehecatl (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
337, 338 fig. 9.
Elements of the Kate Language,
1.
Enclitics in the Mutsun language,
426.
English, parts of speech, 405.
Esselen, 281, 286, 287.
Fabrega, Jos^, original source for
study of Aztec calendar, 319.
Flint (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
381 fig. 25, 382.
Flower (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
331 fig. 7, 389 fig. 37, 390.
Forstemann cited, 301; on element
of thirteen in Aztec calendar,
323, 324, 325.
Fortes, member of dental series of
stops in Kato language, 10.
Gender, in Mutsun language, 408.
Qenitive case of Mutsun nouns,
410.
Goddard, P. E., 1, 189.
Goodman, cited on the tonalamatl
in the Aztec calendar, 326.
Grass (Aztec day -sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
331 fig. 7, 364, 366 fig. 28.
Haida, 288.
Harrington, J. P., 177; cited, 287.
Henshaw, H. W., cited, 288.
Hernandez, F., work on Guerra del
Yaqai, 280.
Hewitt, J. N. B., cited, 280.
House (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
341.
Humboldt, original source for
study of Azt^ calendar, 319.
Indo-European, 286; model cate-
gories, 418.
Inflection in Mutsun language,
408.
"Intercalations" in Aztec calen-
dar system, 300, 317, 319, 320,
328.
Interjections, Mutsun, 468.
International Phonetic Associa-
tion, 184 footnote 20.
Iroquois, 289.
Itzcuintli (Aztec day-sign), typi-
cal form, 306 ; ornamental forms,
361 fig, 24, 362.
Ixtlilxochitl, Fernando de Alva,
original source for study of Az-
tec calendar, 319.
Karok, 281, 286.
Kato language, elements of, 1;
stress accent in, 17.
Phonology:
Individual sounds: vowels, 4,
semi- vowels, 5 ; continu-
ants: liquids, 5, nasals, 6,
figures of, opp. 92, 94;
spirants, 7, figures of, opp.
88, 90, 96; stops: labial, 9,
figures of, opp. 98; dentals
(fortes), 9, figures of, opp.
100; palatals, 11, figures
of, opp. 102, 104; velar, 12;
glottal, 12, 13; affricatives,
13, figures of, opp. 106;
table of sounds, 13; com-
parison of Kato and Hupa
sounds, 14; assimilation of
sounds, 17.
Modification of syllables, 17.
Morphology :
Nouns : simple, monosyllabic,
19; figures of, opp. 110;
with possessive prefixes, 21,
figures of, opp. 112, 114;
parts of the body, 21 ; cloth-
ing, 23; relatives, 23.
With suffixes, 23, figures of,
opp. 116, 118; plural and
class suffixes, 24; locative
suf^ee, 24; suffix with in-
strumental meaning, 26 ;
suf^es of tempor^-modal
force, 26; suffixes of size,
shape, and color, 26.
Nouns compounded with
nouns: first noun qualifies
the second, 27; with pos-
sessive prefix for second
component, 27; with sec-
ond component modifying
the first, 27.
475
Index
Nouns compounded with ad-
jectives, 28, with verbs, 29;
adjectives and verbs used
as nouns, 29; figures of,
opp. 124; verbs with in-
strumental prefix used as
nouns, 31, figures of, opp.
132, 134; polysyllabic nouns
unanalyzed, 31; figures of,
opp. 120, 122, 126.
Pronouns, personal, 32; per-
sonal demonstratives, 33 ;
demonstratives, 34 ; inter-
rogative and indefinite pro-
nouns, 34; figures of, opp.
130.
Adjectives, 35 ; pronominal,
35.
Numerals, 36; cardinals, 36;
multiplicatives, 36 ; dis-
tributives, 36.
Directional words, 37.
Adverbs, place, 38; time, 38;
manner and degree, 39;
figures of, opp. 128, 130.
Postpositions, 39 ; particles
and interjections, 41.
Verbs, 42.
Prefixes, first position, 42;
adverbial, 43; deitic, 49,
51; objective, 51; first
modal, 52; second modal,
53; subjective, 55; third
modals, 57.
Stems, 59.
Suffixes, 80; source of in-
formation, 80 ; modal, 81 ;
temporal, 83.
Tenses and modes, 84;
table of analyzed verbs,
85.
Tracings of speech, interpreta-
tion of, 86 ; lateral sonant and
spirant, 88, 90 ; nasals, 92, 94 ;
spirants, 96; labial stop and
nasal, 98; dental stops, 100;
sonant palatal stops, 102;
surd palatal stops, 104; af-
fricatives, 106; miscellaneous,
108; monosyllabic nouns, 110;
nouns with possessive prefixes,
112, 114; nouns with suffixes,
116, 118; polysyllabic nouns,
120, 122, 126; nouns of verbal
origin, 124; adverbs, par-
ticles, etc., 128; pronouns, ad-
verbs, 130; prefixes of verbs,
132, 134; verbal prefixes, sub-
jectives and objectives, 136;
verbal suffixes, 138; suffixes
of verbs, 140; verbal stems,
142, 144, 146, 148, 150, 152,
154, 156, 158, 160, 162, 164,
166, 168, 170, 172, 174, 176.
King- vulture (Aztec day-sign),
typical form, 306; ornamental
form, 364 fig. 26, 375 fig. 33,
376.
Kingsborough, Lord, publication
of Aztec ''codices,'* 299.
Kroeber, A. L., 177, 279, 401;
cited, 403 note 6, 421 note 8.
Kuyahomar, 181 footnote 16.
Kwayu, 181 footnote 16.
I^ Posta, 177.
Leon y Gama, Antonio, original
source for study of Aztec cal-
endar, 319.
Library of American IAng%Mtio9f
400.
Lizard (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
343, 344 fig. 12.
Loustanou, 280.
McG^, W J, monograph on the
Seri, 280.
Magic, famine relieved by, 251;
practice of, 253.
Maguey, 299.
MalinaJU (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
331 fig. 7, 364, 366 fig. 28.
Manual de los ministros de las
Indias, 301.
Manuscripts, Aztec, 299. See aUo,
Ck>dices, Aztec.
Manzanita, 177.
Maricopa, fricative x, 180 foot-
note 10.
Mason, J. A., 399.
Maya calendar, 314.
Mazatl (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
351, 352 fig. 16, 354, figs. 17
and 18, 355 figs. 19 and 20.
Mesa Grande, San Diego County,
177, 179 note 9.
Mexican Antiquities, 299, 332.
Mexico, 288.
Miquiztli (Aztec day-sign), typi-
cal form, 306; ornamental
forms, 347, 350 fig. 15. See
also Skull.
Modal categories, Mutsun, 418.
Mohave, comparison of Dieguefio
with, 177, 178, 180, 181, 182,
183, 184, 185; representative of
Tuman group, 281; w of, 282;
k, and 6 of, 283, 284; o^er
dialectic comparisons, 285, 286,
287.
476
Index
Monkey (Aztec day-sign) , typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
363, 364, 365 fig. 27.
Monterey, California, 400.
Monterey County, California, 295.
Monumentos del arte mexicano an-
iiguo, 299.
Morning-star, mentioned in Aztec
manuscript, 303.
Morphology of the Kato language.
See Kato language, elements of.
Beduplication in Mutsim, 408.
Motion (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
377, 378 fig. 34.
"Motolinia*' (Toribio de Bene-
vente), original source for study
of Aztec calendar, 319.
Mntsun Dialect, The, of Costanoan
Based on the Vocabulary of De
La Ouesta, 399.
Mutsun language, 400, 401; struc-
ture, 402; phonetic system, 402
vowels, 402; consonants, 402
phonetic laws, 405; de la Cues
ta's collection of words, phrases,
and sentences, 400, 470; his
grammar, 401, 420, 421.
Parts of Speech, 403.
Nouns, 403, 405; suffixes, 406,
410; inflections, 408; gender,
408 ; grammatical person,
410; genitive case, 410; class-
ified lists, 427-439.
Pronouns, 411, 439; demonstra-
tive, adjectival, and interro-
gative, 440 ; lists of, 439, 440.
Verbs, 411, 441; suffixes, 412;
reduplication of verbal stems,
412; modal categories, 418;
relations implying motion,
420; negative particle, 423;
lists of, 441-461.
Adjectives, 425, 461; suffixes,
425, 426 ; Hsts of, 461-465.
Particles, 426; enclitics, 426.
Adverbs, locative, temporal,
466; descriptive and miscel-
laneous, 467.
Interjections, 468-469.
See also Suffixes, Numerals.
Nahuatlan, 288.
Nejo, Isidro, 179.
Nemontemi, in Aztec calendar,
301, 302.
Nose-plug, used in delineation of
Aztec day-signs, 335, 373.
Numerals in £e Athapascan dia-
lects, 36; in the Aztec calendar,
308, 313, 322, 323; list of, in
the Mutsun language, 439.
Nuttall, Mrs. Z., cited, 303; on
initial day-signs in Aztec calen-
dar, 312; original source for
study of Aztec calendar, 319.
Oaxaca, Tequistlatecan idiom of,
279; Belmar's work on, 280.
Ocelot, Ocelotl (Aztec day-sign),
typical form, 306; ornamental
forms, 370, 372 fig. 31.
Clin (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
377, 378 fig. 34.
Onorato, Digueno Indians, 177.
Oregon, 288.
Orozco y Berra, Manuel, original
source for study of Aztec calen-
dar, 319.
Ozomatli (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
363, 364, 365 fig. 27.
PaU, 177.
Palaihnihan, 288 footnote 16.
Particles in the Mutsun language,
426.
Peace Biver, Canada, 190.
Penafiel, A., 280, 299.
Penutian, contrasted with Hokan,
286; new family, 288, 401.
Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio
language, 177.
Phonology of the Kato language.
See Kato language, elements of.
Piegan, 259.
Piman, 288.
Pinart, A., 280.
Pleasanton, California, Indians at,
470.
Pomo, 281, 286, 287.
PoweU, J. W., cited, 288.
Prefixes, in the Kato language.
See Kato language, elements of.
Quauhtli (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
373 fig. 32, 374.
Quetzal-coatl, Aztec wind-god,
307; represented by day-sign,
Wind, 337; realistic drawing of,
338 fig. 9, q; figure of face, 340
fig. 10; ear-ornament, 377.
Quiahuitl (Aztec day-sign), typi-
cal form, 306; ornamental forms
of, 331, 385, 386 fig. 26.
Babbit (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
353, 354 figs. 17 and 18, 355
figs. 19 and 20, 356 fig. 21.
Bain (Aztec day -sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
331, 385, 386 fig. 36.
Bay, Bill, vocal tracings of Kato
language, 3.
477
Index
BouBselot apparatus, 190.
Sahagun, Bernardino de, 300, 318;
cited, 303.
Salidon, Dieguefio, Indian, 177.
Salinan, 287; totems, 295.
San Diego County, OEilifomia, 177.
Salishan, 288.
San Felipe, C^ifomia, 177.
San Juan Bautista, Mission, Cali-
fornia, 400.
San Lorenzo, California, 470.
Sapir, E., cited, 281 footnote 6,
288.
Ban! Textfl^ 189; key to sounds,
191; Sun Dance, 193; prayers,
197, 227, 233 ; hair parters, 197 ;
counting of coups, 203, 269 ; clog
feast, 209; societies, 215; quali-
fications and duties of chiefs,
215; shamans, 217; sports, 219;
painting of tipis, 219; buffalo
pounds, 221; trapping beaver,
219 ; primitive dishes, 221 ; stone
arrowheads, 223; What Eagle-
Bibs Saw at Edmonton, 223;
planting tobacco, 227; Buffalo
Bill Gives a Shield, 231 ; painted
tipi, 243; buffalo stone, 243;
famine relieved by magic, 251, by
Broken Knife, 253; Two Hawks
Test Their Speed, 263; water-
being, 267; ghost, 269; grass-
hopper, 273 ; buffalo-hunting,
273, 275, eagles, 277.
Seler, Edward, cited, 301, 303; on
initial day-signs in Aztec calen-
dar, 312 note 22; original source
for study of Aztec calendar,
319; on element of thirteen in
Aztec calendar, 323, 324, 325;
investigations of Mexican chro-
nology, 327; criticism of conclu-
sions, 335, 336.
Berlan, Tequistlatecan and Ho-
kan, 279.
Sema, Jacinto de la, cited, 301;
original source for study of
Aztec calendar, 319.
Shasta, language, 281, and foot-
note 6, 286, 287, 288 footnote
16.
Shea, J. G., Costanoan manu-
scripts, published by, 400, 405.
Shoshonean, 179 note 9, 288, 291,
292.
Siguenza, Carlos, original source
for study of Aztec calendar, 319.
Sioux, story of Sarsi boy's escape
from, 259.
Skull, representation of in Aztec
day-signs, 348, 349, 350; real-
istic drawing of, 350.
Snake (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
329, 329 fig. 4, 345 fig. 13, 346.
Sonora, relation of Seri language
of, to Tequistlatecan and Yu-
man, 279.
Spanish spoken by some Indians in
California, 470.
Spanish j compared to Tuman de-
velopments, 180 footnote 10.
Spanish orthography used for ex-
pressing Costanoan sounds, 401,
402, 403.
Star-periods in Aztec calendar sys-
tem, 301.
Stops in the Kato language. See
Kato language, elements of.
Suffixes in the Kato language. See
Kato language, elements of.
Suffixes of Mutsun adjectives: ad-
jectival, 425, 426; infix occa-
sionally found before, 426.
Suffixes, of Mutsun nouns:
Etymological : resultative, 406 ;
infinitive, 406; causative, 406;
abstractive, 406 ; instrumen-
tal, 406, 407; agentive, 407;
nominal, 407.
Morphological: plural, 408;
compositional, 409 ; partitive,
409; terminative, 409; objec-
tive, 409; instrumental, 409;
locative, 410; comitative, 410;
regressive, 410.
Suffixes, of Mutsun verbs:
Etymological : possessive, 412 ;
imitative, 421 ; purposive,
412; dative, 413; substantive,
413; oppositional, 413; exces-
sive, 413; corporeal, 413;
mandatory, 414.
Morphological : indefinite, 415 ;
past tense, 416; intransitive,
416; transitive, 417; reflexive,
417; reciprocal, 417; passive
voice, 418; future passive,
418; perfect passive, 418; im-
perative, 419; missionary im-
perative, 419 ; subjunctive,
419; hypothetical, 419; con-
ditional, 419; iterative, 420;
mandative, 420 ; purposive
motion, 421; prohibitive, 421;
* * excellentive, ' * 421 ; bene-
ficial, 422; perfect transitive,
422 ; adjectival, 422, 423 ; per-
fect intransitive, 423.
478
Index
Bwanton, J. B., cited, 288.
Taylor, A. 8., 400.
Teagucagga, a wise Barsi, 427.
Tecpatl (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
381 fig. 35, 382.
Tehuantepec, California, 279.
Tenochio, 280.
Tezozomoc, cited, 303.
Thirteen, as a factor in Aztec cal-
endar, 308, 313, 323; importance
of, 324; Forstemann's theory of
origin, 324, 325; Seler's hy-
po&esis of origin, 324, 325;
factor in the tomJamatl, 326.
Thomas, Qyrus, 299, on vigesimal
numeral system in Aztec calen-
dar, 322; on element thirteen in
Aztec calendar, 323.
Thomas, C, and Swanton, J. B.,
map of linguistic stocks of Mex-
ico, 280.
Tiger (Aztec day-sign), 306.
Time-periods in Aztec calendar
system, 300; method of deter-
mining, 302.
Tlaloc, rain-god, 385.
Tlingit, 288.
Tochtli (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
353, 354 figs. 17 and 18, 355 figs.
19 and 20, 356 fig. 21.
Tonalamatl, 310, 311, 315, 325;
factors thirteen and twenty in,
326.
Torquemada, Juan de, original
source for study of Ajstec calen-
dar, 319.
Totems, among Salinan Indians,
possible significance of, 295.
Tro-Cortesian Coder, 323.
Troncoso, original source for study
of Aztec calendar, 319.
Twenty, as factor in Aztec calen-
dar, 322, in the tonalamatl, 326.
Uto-Azetaken, 286.
Vatican Code A, 320.
Venus year in Aztec calendar, 325.
Vigesimal numeral system in Aztec
calendar, 322, 323.
Waikuri language, 290.
Wakashan, 288.
Walapai, 184.
Water (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
331 fig. 7, 357 fig. 22, 358 fig.
23, 359, 360.
Water being, in Sarsi texts, 267.
Water-monster (Aztec day-sign),
typical form, 306; ornamental
form, 329, 330 fig. 5, 333 fig. 8 ;
sources of drawings, 334; re-
semblance to snake, 335.
Waterman, T. T., 297; cited, 179,
180, 181, 184.
Wind (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental forms,
337, 338 fig. 9; used to repre-
sent Wind-god, Quetzal-coatl,
337.
Wind-god, Quetzal-coatl, 307; rep-
resented by day-sign Wind, 337 ;
realistic drawing of, 338 fig. 9,
q; figure of face, 340 fig. 10.
Wiyot, 288.
Xochitl (Aztec day-sign), typical
form, 306; ornamental form,
331 fig. 7, 389 fig. 37, 390.
Yana, 281, 286, 287.
Yaqui, Hernandez's work on, 280.
Year sign, in Aztec calendar, 314.
See ^tec year.
Yokuts, kinship system, 292.
Yuma, fricative x of, 180 footnote
10; open vowel compared with
Mohave and Diegueno, 184 note
20.
Yuman, 283, 284, 290; Dieguefio
and Mohave as members of, 177 ;
genetic connection with Seri and
Tequistlatecan, 279, 280, 287;
Mohave representative of, 281.
Yurok, 288.
"Zapotec Codex, *' 299.
479
r
f
I
>:. , o u> e ■ . / -^ a , ^ i
RECEIVFD
DEC 1 1Q17
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS '""^
•«^ LIBRARY OF THE "^
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNBCfiCTODY MUSEUM
^ Vol. 11, No. 1, pp. 1-176, pis. 1-45 October 31, 1912
ELEMENTS OF THE KATO LANGUAGE
Br
PLINY EARLE GODDARD
UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
UNIVEB8ITT OF OAIJFOBNZA PUBLIOATIONS
DEPABTMBMT OF ANTHSOPOLOOT
The following pnblleatloiui dealing with archaeological and ethnological anbjeeta tenad
Older the direction of the Department of Anthroiwlogy are sent in exchange for the pnbll-
eatlona of anthroiwlogical departments and mnsenma, and for jonmals demoted to general
anthropology or to archaeology and ethnology. They are for sale at the prices stated, which
include postage or express charges. Exchanges should be directed to The Exchange Depart-
ment» University Library, Berkeley, California, XT. S. A. All orders and remittances should
be addressed to the Uniyersity Press.
European agent for the series in American Archaeology and Ethnology, Classical Phil-
ology, Education, Modem Philology, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Otto Harrassowtti»
LeiiMdg. For the series in Botany, Oeology, Pathology, Physiology, Zoology and also Amer-
ican Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Friedlaender ft Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBICAN ABCHAEOLOOT AND ETHNOLOaT.— A. L. Kroeber, Editor. Price per
volume $3.50 (Vol. I, $4.25).
Cited as Univ. Calif. PubL Am. Arch. Ethn. Frioe
VdL 1. 1. Life and Culture of the Hupa, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-88;
plates 1-30. September, 1903 fl.26
2. Hupa Texts, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 89-868. March, 1904 tM
Index, pp. 369-378.
VoL 2. 1. The Exploration of the Potter Creek Cave^ by William X Sinclair.
Pp. 1-27; plates 1-14. April, 1904 M
2. The Languages of the Coast of California South of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-80, with a map. June^ 1904 M
8. Types of Indian Culture in California* by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 81-108.
4. Basket Dedgns of the Indians of Northwestern California, by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 106-164; plates 15-21. January, 1905 .76
6. The Tokuts Language of South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber.
Pp. 165-377. January, 1907 ..^.......^..^....^...m...^^ — ..^.»..^.._^ ........^ 8.26
Index, pp. 379-392.
VoL 8. The Morphology of the Hupa Language, by Pliny Earle Ooddard.
VoL 4. 1. The Earliest Historical Eolations between Mexico and Japan, ttom
original documents preserved in Spain and Japan, by Zelia NuttalL
Pp. 1-47. April, 1906 - ^ M
8. Contribution to the Physical Anthroiwlogy of California, based on col-
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the Universii^ of
dalifomia, and in the U. S. National Museum, by Ales Hrdlfcka.
Pp. 49-64, with 5 tables; plates 1-10, and hiap. June, 1906 .76
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 66-166.
February, 1907 _ L60
4. Indian Myths from South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
167-250. May, 1907 ^ .76
6. The Washo Language of East Central Calif omia and Nevada^ by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 251-318. September, 1907 .76
6. The Eellgion of the Indians of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 819-
Index, pp. 857-374.
VoL 6. 1. The Phonology of the Hupa Language; Part I, The Individual Sounds,
by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-20, plates 1-8. March, 1907 J6
2. Navaho Myths, Prayers and Songs, with Texts and Translations, by
Washington Matthews, edited by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 21-68.
September, 1907 - .76
8. Kato Texts, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 65-288, plate 9. December,
1909 2.50
4. The Material Culture of the Klamath Lake and Modoc Lidians of
Northeastern California and Southern Oregon, by 8. A. Barrett
Pp. 239-292, plates 10-25. June, 1910 .76
5. The Chlmarlko Indians and Language, by Eoland B. Dixon. Pp. 298-
380. August, 1910 LOO
Index, pp. 381-384.
VoL 6. L The Ethno-Oeography of the Pomo and Neighboring Indians, by Sam-
uel Alfred Barrett. Pp. 1-332, maps 1-2. February, 1908 8.86
2. The Oeography and Dialects of the Miwok Indians, by Samuel Alfked
Barrett. Pp. 333-368, map 3.
8. On the Evidence of the Occupation of Certain Beglons by the Miwok
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 869-380. Nos. 2 and 8 in one cover.
Index, pp. 381-400.
VoL 7. 1. The Emeryville Shellmound, by Max XThle. Pp. 1-106, j^tes 1-12, wttli
38 text ilgnres. June, 1907 1.5J6
2. Recent Investigations bearing upon the Question of the Occurrence of
Neocene Man in the Auriferous Oravels of California, by WUliam
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-130, plates 18-14. Febmary, 1908 ^
•>■■•>»•••••
n
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
8. Porno Indian Basketry* by 8. A. Barrett. Pp. 133-306» plates 16-30,
231 text figures. December, 1908 1.75
4. SbeUmonnds of the San Francisco Bay Beglon, by N. 0. Nelson.
Pp. 309-366, plates 32-34. December, 1909 ^ .60
6. The Ellis Landing Shellmonnd, by N. 0. Nelson. Pp. 357-426, plates
vO-Ov. ^^pZU, xVXw -iin -- — — — - — •/ O
Index, pp. 427-443.
ViA, 8. 1. A Iflsslon Becord of the Oallf omla Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 1-27. Iffay, 1908 i2S
2. The Ethnography of the Oahullla Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-
68, plates 1-15. JtUy, 1908 .76
8. The Bellgion of the Lnisefio and Diegnefio Indians of Southern Oall-
fomla, by Ctonstance GK)ddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
June, 1908 - li2S
4. The Culture of the Luisefio Indians, by Philip Stedman Spaiionaa.
Pp. 187-234, plate 20. August, 1908 ...^ M
5. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern Oallf omla, by A. L. Kroe-
ber. Pp. 235-269.' September, 1909 .86
6. The Bellgious Practices of the Dieguefio Indians, by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-358, plates 21-28. March, 1910 .80
Index, pp. 369-369.
V6L 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Saplr, together with Tana Myths collected by
Boland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-235. February, 1910 2.60
2. The Ohumash and Oostanoan Languages, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 237-
271. Noyember, 1910 ^ „ 86
3. The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 273-435, and map. April, 1911 1.50
Index, pp. 437-439.
V6L 10. 1. Phonetic Constituents of the Natlye Languages of California, by A.
L. Kroeber. Pp. 1-12. May, 1911 ^ 10
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Paiute Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 13-44, plates 1-5. Noyember, 1911 ^ 45
3. Phonetic Elements of the Mohaye Language, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
45-96, plates 6-20. Noyember, 1911 65
Vol. 11. 1. Elements of the Kato Language, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 1-176,
plates 1-45. October, 1912 •. 2.00
Volumes now completed:
Volume 1. 1903-1904. 878 pages and 30 plates $4.26
Volume 2. 1904-1907. 393 pages and 21 plates ^ SJ^O
Volume 8. 1906. The Morphology of the Hupa Language. 344 pages ^... 3.50
Volume 4. 1906-1907. 374 pages, with 5 tables, 10 plates, and map 8.50
Volume 5. 1907-1910. 384 pages, with 25 plates ^^ 8.50
Volume 6. 1908. 400 pages, with 3 maps ^ 8.50
Volume 7. 1907-1910. 443 pages and 50 plates 3.50
Volume 8. 1908-1910. 369 pages and 28 plates ^ 8.50
Volume 9. 1910-1911. 439 pages ^ „ ^ „ 3.50
OBAECO-BOMAN ABCHAEOLOaT. (Large Octayo.) (Published by the Oxford Unlyer-
sity Press.)
VoL 1. The Tebtunls Papyri, Part 1. 1902. Edited by Bernard P. Orenfell,
Arthur S. Hunt, and J. GUbart Smyly. xix -t- 674 pages, with 9 plates.
Price 116.00
VoL 2. The Tebtunls Papyri, Part 2. 1907. Edited by Bernard P. Grenfell,
Arthur S. Runt, and Edgar X Ooodspeed. xy + ^^ pages, with 2 col-
lotsrpe plates and a map 16.00
VoL 3. The Tebtunls Papyri, Part 8. (In preparation.)
EGTPTIAN ABCHAEOLOGT. (Quarto.)
VoL 1. The Hearst Medical Papyrus. Edited by O. A. Beisner.
Hieratic text in 17 f ac-simlle plates in collotype, with introduction and yocabu-
lary, pages 48, 1905. (J. 0. Hinrichs, Lelpsig, 25 marks.)
V6L 2. The Early Dynastic Cemeteries of Naga-ed-Der, Part I, by Oeorge A,
Beisner. xll -t- 160 pages, with 80 plates and 211 text figures. 190a
(J. O. Hinrichs, Leipzig, 75 marks.)
VoL 8. The Early Dynastic Cemeteries at Naga-ed-Der, Part n, by A. 0. Mace.
xi -t- 88 pages, with 60 plates and 123 text figures. 1909. (J. O. Hin-
richs, Lelpsig, 50 marks.)
VoL 4. The Predynastic Cemetery at Naga-ed-Der. The Anatomical Material, by
Elliott Smith. (In preparation.)
Vol 6. The Cemetery of the Second and Third Dynasties at Naga-ed-Der, by A. O.
Mace. (In press.)
V6L 8. The Cemetmry of the Third and Fourth Dynasties at Naga^ed-Der, by O. A.
Beisner. (In preparation.)
VoL 7. The Coptic Cemeteries of Naga-ed-Der, by A. O. Bfface. (In preparation.)
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUCD)
SPECIAL VOLUICBS.
The Book of the Life of the Ancient Mexicans, containing an account of tiiair xltea
and roperstitlona; an anonymons Hispano-American manuscript preserved in
the Blblioteca Nadonale Centrale, Florence, Italy. Beprodoced in f ac-stmileb
with introduction, translation, and commentary, by ZeUa NuttaU.
Part L Preface, Introduction, and 80 fac-simile pLates in colors. 1903.
Part n. Translation and Commentary. (In press.)
Price for the two jMurts - ~ -..-„^ ......,.—.. ..^. .^»^925iM)
The Department of Anthropology, Its History and Plan, 1006. Sent free on impli-
cation to the Department^ or to the Uniyersity Press.
Kote.~The Uniyersity of California Publications are offered in exchange for the public
cations of learned societies, and institutions, universities and libraztos. Complete lists of an
the publications of the University will be sent upon request. For sample copies, Hats <tf
publications or other Information, address the Blanager of the University Press, Berkley,
California, U. S. A. All matter sent in exchange should be addressed to The Exchange
Department, University Library, Berkeley, California, U. S. Ai
ASTEONOMY.— W. W. Campbell, Editor. (Lick Observatory, Mt Hamilton, CaL)
Publications of the Lick Observatory. — ^Volumes I- VI and vm-X completed. Volnnie
yn in progress.
EOTAJnr.— W. A. Setchell, Editor. Price per volume $3.60. Volumes I (m* Al6)t H (VV^
360), and HI (pp. 400) completed. Volumes IV and V in progress.
OLASBICAlT PHILOLOaY.— Edward B. Olapp, William A. Merrill, Herbert O. Kntling;
Editors. Price per volume $2.00. Volume I (pp. 270) completed. Volonie II in
progress.
ECONOMICS.— A. C. Miller, Editor.
EDUCATIOK.— Edited by the Department of Education. Price per volume $2JS0.
ENOINEEBINa.—Edited under the direction of the Engineering Departmenla. This serisi
will contain contributions from the Colleges of Mechanics, Mining, and dvU Engi-
neering. Volume r in progress.
OEOLOOT. — ^Bulletin of the Department of (Geology. Andrew C. Lawion and John O.
Merrlam, Editors. Price per volume $3.50. Vcdumes I (pp. 436), II (pp. 437), HI
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), and V (pp. 458) completed. Volumes VI and VII in progress.
MODEBN PHILOLOaT. — ^Volumes I (pp. 400) and II (pp. 373) completed. Volume HI
in progress.
PATHOLOOT.—Alonzo Englebert Taylor, Editor. Price per volume, 92.60. Volume I (pp.
347) completed. Volume H in progress.
PHILOSOPHT. — O. H. Howison, Editor. Voltuie I (pp. 262) completed. Volume U in
progress. Price per voltuie $2.00.
PHYSIOLOGY. — 8. 8. Maxwell, Editor. Price per volume $2.00. Volumes I (pp. 217),
II (pp. 215), HI (pp. 197) completed. Volume IV in progress.
PSYCHOLOGY. — Gteorge M. Stratton, Editor. Volume I in progress.
ZOOLOGY. — ^W. E. Bitter and C. A. Kof old. Editors. Price per Tolume $SJH). VolonuB I
(pp. 317), n (pp. 382), in (pp. 383), IV (pp. 400), V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478), VH
(pp. 446), vm (pp. 357) completed. Volumes JX, X, and XI in progress. Com-
mencing with Volume n, this series contains the Contributions ftom the Laboratory
of the Marine Biological Association of San Diego.
MEMOmS OF THE UNIVEBSITY OF CALIFOBNIA (Quarto).
VoL 1. 1. Triassic Ichthyosauria, with special reference to the American Forms,
by John C. Merriam. Pp. 1-196; plates 1-18; 154 text-flgnres. Sep-
tember, 1908 -. ;.-. 13,00
2. The Fauna of Bancho La Brea, Part 1, Occurrence, by John C. Mi-
riam. Pp. 197-213; plates 19-23. November, 1911 .90
VoL 2. Silva of X^alifomia, by W. L. Jepson. Pp. 480; plates 85. December^
1910. $9; buckram, $10; carriage extra.
UNIVEBSITY OF CALIFOBNIA CHBONICLE.^An offldal record of UUTsntfey ]UI»
issued quarterly, edited by a committee of the Faculty. Prloeb $1.00 per year. Cho^
rent volume No. XTIT.
Address all orders or requests for information concerning the above pabltcationB to lis
Univenity Press* Bedceley, California.
•^. Za^, IZO, (lyy- ^
PEA d/^^ ^^ ^^ 7>» K
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS* ^ODy MU^pfi
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 11, No. 2, pp. 177-188 April 30, 1914
PHONETIC ELEMENTS OF THE
DIEGUEfiO LANGUAGE
BY
A. L. KROEBER and J. P. HARRINGTON
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS
BBRRBLBT
UmVEBSITT OF OAIJFOBNZA PUBLXOATIONB
DEPABTMBMT OF ANTHBOFOLOOT
TlM foUowing pablieatioiis dealing with arehaaological and etlinologlcal idbjacts taofld
mdar tli6 dlractton of tbo Department of Antliropology are sent In exchange for the paUi-
eatlona of antliropologlcal departments and mnaenmi, and for Jonmala deroted to general
antliropology or to archaeology and ethnology. They are for tale at the prleea ftated, whUk
Inclnde poetage or express chiurges. Exchanges should be directed to The Bzchange Depart-
menti Unirersity Library, Berkeley, California, XT. 8. A. All orders and rendttanees dUMdd
be addressed to the University Frees.
Bnropean agent for the series In American Archaeology and Bthnology, Olasrictl Fhll-
ology, Bdncatira, Modem Fhllology, Fhllosopliy, and Semitic Fhilology, Otto Hanaasowit^
Xielpslg. For the series In Botany, Oeology, Fathology, Fhysiology, Zoology and also Amer-
ican Archaeology and Bttinology, B. Friedlaender ft Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBIOAK ABOkAEOLOOT AKD ETHNOLOOT.— A. L. Kroeber, Editor. Frloe per
▼dlnme $3.60 (VoL 1, $4.25).
Cited as Uniy. Calif. FubL Am. Arch. Ethn. Ptiet
Vol 1. 1. Life and Cnltore of the Hnpa, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-88;
plates 1-SO. September, 1903 $1.25
2. Hupa Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 89-868. March, 1904 SM
Index, pp. 369-378.
V<^ 2. 1. The Exploratlmi of the Fetter Creek CaTe^ by William J. Btnclalr,
Fp. 1-27; pUtes 1-14. April, 1904 -40
2. The Languages of the Coast of California Sooth of San Ftandaco^ by
A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 29-80, with a map. Jnne^ 1904 .60
3. Types of Indian Cnltore In California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 81-103.
4. Basket Designs of the Indians of Northwestern California, by A. L.
. Kroeber. Fp. 105-164; plates 15-21. Janoasy, 1905 .75
5. The Tokots Langoage of Sooth Central California, by A. L. Kroeber.
Fp. 165-377. Janoary, 1907 2.25
Index, pp. 379-392.
Vol 8. The Morphology of the Hope Langoage, by Fliny Earle Ooddard.
VoL 4. 1. The Earliest Historical Belatlons between Mtoxioo and Japan, from
original docoments preserred In Spain and Japan, by Sella NuttalL
8. Contrlboti<m to the Fhysical Anthropology of California, based on col-
lections In the Department of Anthropology of the UMversity of
California, and In the XT. S. National MoMom, by Ales Hrdlicka.
Fp. 49-64, with 5 tables; plates 1-10, and map. Jtne, 1906 .75
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 65-166.
4. Indian My^ from Sooth Central California^ by A. L. Kroeber. Fp.
5. The Washo Langoage of East Central CaUf omia and Nevada, by A. L.
&^oeber. Fp. 251-318. September, 1907 .75
6. The Beliglon of the Indians of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 819-
Index, pp. 357-374.
Vol 5. 1. The Fhonology of the Hope Langoage; Fart I, The IndiTidoal Soond%
by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-20, plates 1-8. March, 1907 .85
2. Nayaho Myths, Frayers and Songs, with Texts and Translations, by
Washington Matthew^ edited by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 21-63.
8. Kato Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 65-238, j/Mtb 9. December,
10AQ 2JS0
4. The Material Cnltore of the Klamath Lake and Modoe Indians of
Northeastern Califomi* and Soothem Oregon, by 8. A. Baxtett
Fp. 239-292, plates 10-25. Jone, 1910 .75
5. The Chimariko Indians and Language, by Boland B. Dixon. Fp. 298-
Index, pp. 381-384.
VoL 6. 1. The Ethno-Oeography of the Fomo and Neighboring Indians, by 8am-
oei Alfred Barrett. Fp. 1-332, maps 1-2. Febroary, 1908 — 8.95
2. The Oeography and Dialects of the Miwok Indians^ by Samoel Alficed
Barrett. Fp. 333-368, map 8.
8. On the Evidence of the Occopatlon of Certain Begions by the Miwdk
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 369-380. Nos. 2 and 8 In one eorer.
Index, pp. 381-400.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
ToL 7. 1. Tlia Emeryrllle Shellmound, by Muc XTlile. Pp. 1-106» plates 1-12; with
88 text figures. June, 1907 1 1.25
2. Becent Investigations bearing upon the Question of the Occurrence of
Neocene Man in the Auriferous Gravels of California, by William
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-180. plates 13-14. February, 1908 .86
8. Porno Indian Basketry, by S. A. Barrett. Pp. 138-806, plates 15-80,
281 text figures. December, 1908 1.75
4. Shellmounds of the San Francisco Bay Begion, by N. 0. Kelson.
Pp. 809-366, plates 32-34. December, 1909 J50
5. The Ellis Landing Shellmoond, by K. O. Nelson. Pp. 857-426^ plates
Index, pp. 427-443.
VoL 8. 1. A Ifission Becord of the California Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. Kroeber. I^. 1-27. May, 1908 .25
2. The Ethnography of the Cahullla Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-
. 68, plates 1-15. July, 1908 ^ ^ .75
8. The Beligion of the Luisefio and Dieguefio Indians of Southern Cali-
fornia, by Constance Qoddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
June, 1908 « ^ 1.25
4. The Culture of the Luisefio Indians, by Philip Stedman Sparkman.
Pp. 187-234, plate 20. August, 1908 ^ » -. M
5. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern California, by A. L. Kroe-
ber. Pp. 285-269. September, 1909 .85
6. The Beligious Practices of the Dieguefio Indians, by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-858, plates 21-28. March, 1910 „ ^ .80
Index, pp. 359-869.
V6L 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Sapir, together with Tana liyths collected by
Boland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-285. February, 1910 2.50
2. The Chumash and Costanoan Languages, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 287-
271. November, 1910..^ .85
8. The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 273-485, and map. April, 1911 1.50
Index, pp. 487-439.
V6L 10. 1. Phonetic Constituents of the Native Languages of Oalifomia, by A.
L. Kroeber. Pp. 1-12. May, 1911 10
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Paiute Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-5. November, 1911 .45
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohave Language, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
45-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 65
4. The Ethnology of the Salinan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-37. December, 1912 1.75
5. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-263. August, 1913 .25
6. Notes on the Chilula Ihdlans of Northwestern California, by Pliny
Earl Ooddard. Pp. 265-288, plates 38-41. April, 1914 30
Vol. 11. 1. Elements of the Kato Language, by Pliny Earle Qoddard. Pp. 1-176,
piawOS X-40. wCxooer, x\fxm ».■.......•.•.••••...•••••••.•••••■•-•••••.•••••..-•..••..••.•••••.•.• h»\hj
2. Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language, by A. L. Kroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 10
Volumes now completed:
Volume 1. 1903-1904. 878 pages and 80 plates ^ ^ $4.25
Volume 2. 1904-1907. 893 pages and 21 plates 3.50
Volume 8. 1905. The Morphology of the Hupa Language. 844 pages 3.50
Volume 4. 1906-1907. 874 pages, with 5 tables, 10 plates, and map 8.50
Volume 5. 1907-1910. 884 pages, with 25 plates .^ 8.50
Volume 6. 1908. 400 pages, with 8 maps 8.50
Volume 7. 1907-1910. 448 pages and 60 plates 8.50
Volume 8. 1908-1910. 369 pages and 28 plates ~ 8.50
Volume 9. 1910-1911. 439 pages 3.50
GBAECO-BOMAN ABCHAEOLOGT. (Large Octavo.) (Published by the Oxford Univer-
sity Press.)
VoL 1. The Tebtunls Papyri, Part 1. 1902. Edited by Bernard P. Grenfell,
Arthur S. Hunt, and J. Oilbart Smyly. xix + 674 pages, with 9 plates.
Price „ ^ ^....116.00
VoL 2. The Tebtunls Papyri, Part 2. 1907. Edited by Bernard P. Grenfell,
Arthur S. Runt, and Edgar J. Goodspeed. xv + ^85 pages, with 2 col-
lot3rpe plates and a map .-...- 16.00
EOTPTIAN ABCHAEOLOGT. (Quarto.)
VoL 1. The Hearst Medical Papyrus. Edited by G. A. Beisner.
Hieratic text in 17 fac-simUe plates in collotype, with introduction and vocabu-
lary, pages 48, 1905. (J. O. Htnrlchs, Leipsig, 25 marks.)
UNIVCR8ITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS -(CONTINUED)
V6L 2. The Eftrly Dynastic Cemeterlef of Kaga-ed-Der, Part Z, lyy George A.
Beiaiier. zU + 160 pagea^ with 80 i^ates and 2U text flgnrea. 190a
(J. O. Hinrldia, Lei^lg; 75 marks.)
Vol 8. ne Barlj Dynastte Cemeteries at Haga-ed-Der, Part n, by A. O. Mace.
zi + 08 pagei^ with 60 pUtes sad 128 text figures. 1909. (X O. Hln-
rlclis» Ldpstg; 80 marks.)
8PB0IAL VOLUBIEB.
The Book of the Life of the Anctept Merloim^ eootainliig aa aecosnt ef tbeir rites
and snpentitlons; an aiwny metis Hispaae-Amerleaa manoserlpt preserved in
the Biblieteea Vaiioaale Centrales FloteMse^ Italy. Bepcodaeed la f^ie-simUe^
with introduction* translation, and commentary, by Zella VnttalL
Part L Preface, Introduction, and 80 fac-fimHe plates la colors. 1903 120.00
The Department of Anthropology, Its History and Plan, 1908. Seat ftee on appli-
eation to the Department^ or to the UnlTMiity Press.
Kote.— The UnlTersity of Oallfomia Publications are offered in ezehange for the pabll>
cations of learned societies and tnstitntlons, nniverslties and libraries. Complete lists of aU
the publications of the UnlTersity will be sent npon re^piest. For sample copies, lists of
publications or other information, address the Manager of the Univeislty Preae^ Beiktfey,
California, U. 8. A. AU matter sent in exchange should be addressed to The Bxthaage
Department, Unlyersity Library, Berkley, California* U. 8. A.
ASTBOirOBCT.— W. W. Campb^ Editor. (Lick Observatory, Mt Hawtlten, OaL)
Publications of the Lick Obserratory.— Volumes I-XI completed.
BOTANY.— W. A. Setchell, Editor. Price per y<dnme fSJM). Volumes I (pp. 418), II (ppi
360), ni (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 397) completed. Volumes V sad VI in progress.
0LA88I0AL PHILOLOOT.-Edward B. CUpp^ William A. MerrUl, Hobert C. mMnc,
IBditors. Price per Tolume 92.00. Volume I (pp. 270) conq^eted. Volume n in
progress.
BOONOMIC8.— A. O. Miller, Editor.
EDXTOATIOK.— Edited by the Department of BducatloB. Price per ▼oiume 92JKL
ENGINEEBINa.—Edited under the direction of the Engineering Departments. This seriss
will contain contributions from the Colleges of Mechanics, Mining, and ClTlI Engi-
neering. Volume I in progress.
OEOGBAPHT.— Buliff 8. Holway, Editor. Volume I in progress.
OEOLOOT. — ^Bulletin of the Department of Geology. Andrew O. Laiwsea sad Joha O.
Merriam, Editors. Price per volume $8.50. Volumes I (pp. 435), n (pp. 467), in
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), V (pp. 458), VI (pp. 454), aad VII (pp. 4M, ladez ia press)
completed. Volume vm in progress.
MODEBN PHILOLOGT.— Volumes I (pp. 400) and n (pp. 373) completed. Volumes in
and IV in progress.
PATHOLOOT.— Alonso Englebert Taylor, Editor. Price per votame^ |2J0i Volame I (n^
347) completed. Volume n in progress.
PHIL080PHT.— O. H. Howison, Editor. Volume I (pp. 262) eompleled. Volume n in
progress. Price per volume 92.00.
PHT8IOLOOT.— 8. 8. Maxwell, Editor. Price per v^ume 92.00. Volumes I (pp. 2i7),
n (pp. 215), m (pp. 197) completed. Volume IV ia progress.
P8T0HOL0OT. — Qeorge M. 8tratton, Editor. Volume I in progress.
ZOOLOGY.— W. £. Bitter and C. A. Sofoid, Editors. Price per volume 93.50; Volume XI
and following, $5.00. Volumes I (pp. 317), II (pp. 382), in (pp. 383), IV (pp. 400).
V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478). Vn (pp. 446), Vin (pp. 357), IX (pp.866), X (pp. 417).
and XI (pp. 528, index In press) completed. Volumes XII and xm In progress.
QKIVEBSITT OF CALIFOBNIA CHBONICLE.— An offlcisl record of XTttiverslty lite,
Issued quarteriy, edited by a committee of the Faculty. Price, 91*00 per year. Cur-
rent volume No. XVL
Address all orders or requests for information concerning the above pnbUeatlOBS to Tht
anlverslty Press, Berkeley, California.
European agent for the series in American Archaeology and Ethnology, Classieal Phil-
ology, Education, Philosophy, and 8emitic Philology, Otto Harrassowits, Leipzig. For the
series in Agricultural Sciences. Botany. Oeography, Geology, Mathematics. Patiu^ogy,
Physiology, Zoology, and also American Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Friedlaender ft
Sohn, Berlin. «.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATION
IN
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 11, No. 3, pp. 189-277 February 27, 1915
RECEIVED
!.:/n 2 51915
'LIBRARY OF THB T
PEABODY MUSEUM
SARSI TEXTS
BY
PLINY EARLE GODDARD
UNIVERSITT OF CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
UmVEBSITT OF OAIJFOBNZA PUBLIOATION8
DEPABTMBMT OF ANTHBOFOLOOT
TlM fdUowlDf poblicattoiii dealing with arehMologieal and eUmologlcal iiibjeeto iMind
mdar tbM dixeetlon of the Department of Antbropology are sent in excJiange for the pohtt-
eatlona of anthropological departmente and miiaemiii» and for Journals deroted to general
anthropology or to archaeology and ethnology. They are for lale at the pricea ftated, vhldi
Inelnde po^aige or express charges. ' Exchanges should be directed to The Bzchange Dq^art-
ment^ University Library, Berkeley, California, U. S. A. All orders snd remittances should
be addressed to the University Frees.
Boropean agent for the series in American Archaeology and Bthmdogy, Olawlcsl FhO-
dogy, Bdncation, Modem Fhilology, Fhilosophy, and Semitic Fhilology, Otto Harrassowiti;
Xieipsig. For the series in Botany, Oeology, Fathdogy, Fhysiology, Zoology and^aiso Amsr-
ican Archaeology and Bthndogy, B. Fiiedlaender ft Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBIOAK ABOHAEOLOOT A2XD BTHNOLOGT.— A. L. Eroeber, Editor. Frioe per
YOlome $3.60 (Vol 1, $4.26).
Cited as Univ. Calif. FnbL Am. Arch. Bthn. Ftiet
Vd. 1. . 1. Life and Cnltnre of the Hiipa, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-88;
plates 1-80. September, 1008 ., $1.26
2. Hupa Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 89-868. March, 1004 ZJOO
Index, pp. 860-878.
▼oL 8. 1. The Exploration of the Fetter Creek Cave^ by William J. Sinclair.
Fp. 1-27; plates 1-14. April, 1004 . AO
2. The Languages of the Coast of California Sooth of San FrandsoOb by
A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 20-80, with s map. Jtme^ 1004 M
8. Types of Indian Culture in California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 81-108.
4. Basket Designs of the Indians of Korthwestem Calif omia» by A. L.
Kroeber. Fp. 106-164; plates 16-21. January, 1906 .75
6. The Toknts Language of Sonth Central California, by A. L. BIroeber.
Index, pp. 879-392.
Vol 8. The Morphology of the Hupa Language, by Fliny Earle Ooddard.
844 pp. Sjxn% 1906 .......,.....««..>»....«»««.««^...»»..— ....^.....^ ■.■^.^^ 8j60
Vol 4. 1. The Earliest Historical Belations between Mtaxico and Japan, ftom
original documents preserved in Spain and Japan, by Zelis HnttalL
2. Contribution to the Fhysical Anthropology of Calif onda» based on ool«
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the UMverrity of
California, and in the U. S. National Mnseom, by Ales Hi-^mV*^
Fp. 40-64, with 6 tables; plates 1-10, snd map. June, 1906 .78
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 66-166.
4. Indian Mytiis from South Central Calif omia» by A. L. Kroeber. Fp.
167-250. May, 1007 .78
6. The Washo Languago of East Central CaUf omia and Kevada» by A. L.
Kroeber. Fp. 251-818. September, 1907 « .: .78
6. The Beligion of the Indians of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 819-
vOo. Bepwemoer, ivui ..»»«««».«»»«..—.»«»«.—«»..——..«»—«»»»«»».■«»....■.». ■ .m.... »»...■« .ov
Index, pp. 867-374.
VoL 6. 1. The Fhonology of the Hupa Language; Fart I, The Indivldnal Sounds
by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-20, pUtes 1-8. March, 1007 J6
2. Kavaho Myths, Frayers and Songs, with Texts snd TranslatJonSb by
Washington Matthews, edited by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 21-68.
oepcemDer, ivuT ...».«...^.«...»««......«...»»«.»..«......«...»«......»«.— ■»...—..«•»»».. .»...^»...—~ .td
8. Kato Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 66-288, plate 9. December,
4. The Material Culture of the Klamath Lake and BCodoe ^hdiana of
Kortheastem California and Southern Oregon, by 8. A. Barrett.
Fp. 239-292, plates 10-St6. June, 1010 ...^ JTB
6. The Chimarlko Indians and Language, by Bdand B. Dixon. Fp. 298-
Index, pp. 881-384.
Vol 6. 1. The Ethno-Oeography of the Fomo and Neighboring Indians^ by Ssai-
ud Alfred Barrett. Fp. 1-882, maps 1-2. February, 1908 8J8
8. The Oeography and Dialects of the Miwok Indiana by Samud Alfred
Barrett Fp. 833-368, map 8.
8. On the Evidence of the Occupation of Certain Beglons by the Miwdc
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 869-880. Kos. 8 and 8 in one cover.
Index, pp. 881-400.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
Vol 7. 1. The Emeryville SheUmoiind, by Max Uhle. Pp. 1-106, plates 1-12» with
88 text figures. June, 1907 ^ 1,26
2. Recent Inyestigations bearing upon the Question of the Occurrence of
Neocene Man in the Auriferous Oravels of California,' by William
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-180, plates 18-14. Pebruary, 1908 M
8. Pomo Indian Basketry, by S. A. Barrett Pp. 188-806, plates 16-80,
281 text figures. December, 1908 1.76
4. Shellmounds of the San Prancisco Bay BegLon, by N. O. Nelson.
Pp. 809-856, plates 82-84. December, 1909 .60
6. The Ellis Landing Shellmound, by N. O. Nelson. ^. 867-426, slates
Index, pp. 427-448.
VoL 8. 1. A Mission Record of the Oalif omia Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. EIroeber. It>. 1-27. May, 1908 .25
2. The Ethnography of the Oahuilla Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-
68, plates 1-16. July, 1908 .75
. 8. The Religion of the Luisefio and Dieguefio Indians of Southern Oall-
fomia, by Oonstance CK>ddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
4. The Culture of the Luisefio Indians, by Philip Stedman Sparkman.
Pp. 187-284, plate 20. August, 1908 M
6. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern Oalif omia, by A. L. Kroe-
ber. Pp. 286-269. September, 1909 .85
8. The Religious Practices of the Dieguefio Indians, by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-868, plates 21-28. March, 1910 .80
Index, pp. 869-869.
VoL 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Sapir, together with Tana Myths collected by
Roland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-286. Pebruary, 1910 2.60
2. The Ohumash and Oostanoan Languages, 1^ A. L. EIroeber. Pp. 287-
271. November, 1910 .86
8. The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Prancisco, by
A. L. BIroeber. Pp. 278-485, and map. April, 1911 1.60
Index, pp. 487-489.
VoL 10. 1. Phonetic Constituents of the Native Languages of California, by A.
L. EIroeber. Pp. 1-12. May, 1911 - .10
2. The Phonetic Elements oi the Northern Palute Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-5. November, 1911 46
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohave Language^ by A. L. EIroeber. Pp.
46-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 . .66
4. The Ethnology of the Sallnan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-37. December, 1912 ^ » 1.76
6. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-268. August, 1918 .26
6. Notb3 on the Chilula Ihdians of Northwestern California, by Pliny
Earl Ooddard. Pp. 265-288, plates 88-41. April, 1914 .80 .
7. Chilula Texts, by Pliny Earle Gh>ddard. Pp. 289-379. November,
1914 1.00
Index la press.
VoL 11. 1. Elements of the Sato Language, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-176,
pxaxes X-40. wCwOoer, aIiim ••••..••..••.•.•.•.•.^.••••••.••••••••■••..•••••. .»••••••••. .••••..•• a.uu
2. Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language, by A. L. Eroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 ^. .10
8. Sarsl Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 189-277. February, 1915.... 1.00
4. Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 279-290.
Pebruary, 1915 ~ 10
Volumes now comideted:
VlAume 1. 1908-1904. 878 pages and 80 plates $4.25
VlAume 2. 1904-1907. 898 pages and 21 plates 8.60
Volume 8. 1906. The Morphology of the Hupa Language. 844 pages 8JM)
Volume 4. 1906-1907. 874 pages, with 6 tables, 10 plates, and map 8.60
Volume 6. 1907-1910. 884 pages, with 26 plates .i 8.60
Volume 6. XWS, 400 pages, with 8 maps ...^.....^...^.......^......^.......^.^..^^^..hm.......^..^ 8.60
Volume 7. 1907-1910. 448 pages and 50 plates 8.60
Vidume 8. 1908-1910. 869 pages and 28 plates .. 8JS0
voKBme V. xvxv— xvxx. sov pagos »««««»»».»«»»«««»»««»»»■»«««».»»»»——»»«»—»««».—»»—•—.««»—»«»■»■ m«..« ■«■■■■■.. 9.ov
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUCD)
Vote.— The UnlYwiltj of OallfomU PabUeftttoni an offerad in tzehaoge fte tlis pabUp
eatioiii of lotmed lodetiee and instttattonf, unlTociitlia and lilnazlea. OomptoU Usti of aU
Ilia pabUeattoni of the Uniy^nity will be aaat upon raq^ioat. For aam^ eoptoa^ Usta of
pabUcatloiia or other inf ormatioBu addreia the ICaaager of the Unireralty Preo^ Beikelej,
Oalif oniia» XT. 8. A. All matter aent in exchange ahonld be addieased to The Bxehaaft
Department! UniTeraity Library, Berkeley, Oallf miia, XT. 8. A.
AOBIOXTIiTUBAL 80IEN0E8. — ^B. B. Babcock, J. W. Oilmore, and 0. B. Lipman, Editors.
Price per TOlnme, $3.60. Volumes I and n in. progress.
ABTBONOICY.^W. W. Oampbell, Editor. (Lick Obserratory, ML Hamilton, CaL)
Publications of the Lick Observatory. — ^Volumes I-xn completed.
BOTAMT.^W. A. SetcheU, Editor. Price per Tolnme 9U0. YaftaaaM I (pp. 418), n (ppi
860), m (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 897) completed. Volnmea V and VI in progrees.
CTiABHTOAL PHILOLOaT.— Edward B. (Tlapp, William A. Merrill, Bttbeit a NMting,
Editgra. Price per Tolnme $2.00. Vcinme I (pp. 270) completed. Volnme n in
progress.
B(X)NOMI0a— A. 0. Miller, Editor.
BDXTOATION.^Edited by the Department of Education. Price per TcAume 92JB0.
BNOINEEEIKQ.— Edited under Jkhe direetlon of the Engineering Depart inenla. This ssi:i«
will contain contributiona ftom the Oollegea of Mecbanlos, ^""<"g, and OiTll Bugf-
neering. Volume I in progress,
aBOGBAPHT.— Bnliir 8. Holway, Editor. Volume I in progress.
OBOLOOT. — ^Bulletin oi the Department of Oeology. Andrew O. Lawaon and J^fan 0.
Merriam, Bditora. Price per Tolume $8.60. Volubiea I (pp. 485)y II (pp. 4X71)^ m
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), V (pp. 458), VI (pp. 464), and VII (pp. 504) completed.
Volume vm in progress.
MODEBK PHUiOLOOT.— Volumes I (pp. 400) and n (pp. 878) completed. Volumes m
and IV in progress.
PATHOLOGT.— Frederick P. Qay, Editor. Price per Tolume, 12.50. Volume I (pp. 847)
completed. Volume n in progress.
PHILOSOPHT. — Q. H. Howison, Editor. Volume I (pp. 262) completed. V<dume n In
progress. Price per Tolume $2.00.
PHT8IOLO0Y. — B. 8. Maxwell, Editor. Price per Tolume $2.00. Volumes I (pp. 817),
n (pp. 216), in (pp. 197) completed. Volume IV in progress.
P8T0H0L0OT.— Oeorge M. Stratton, Editor. Volume I in progress.
ZOOLOGT.—- W. E. Bitter and 0. A. Kofoid, Editors. Price per Tolume for Tolmnes I-X
$3.50; for volume XI and following, $6.00. Volumes I (pp. 317), II (pp. 882), in
(pp. 383), IV (pp. 400), V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478), Vn (pp. 446), Vm (pp. 357), IZ
(pp. 365), X (pp. 417), and XI (pp. 638) completed. Volumes xn, XITT, and XIV
in progress.
aKIVEl(SITY OP OALIFOBITIA GHBOMIOLB.— An ofleial record of XTuiTsrstty lifs^
issued quarterly, edited by a committee of the Faculty. Prioe^ $1.00 per year. Oa^
rent volume No. XVUL
Address all orders or requests for information concerning the ikbove yabUcatlona to The
ITniveraity Press^ Berkeley, Oalif omia.
European agent for the series in American Archaeology and Ethnology, Olaasieal Phil-
ology, Education, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Otto Harrassowits, Leipsig. Per the
series in Agricultural Sciences, Botany, Ctoography, Oeology, Mathematica, PathiAogy,
Physiology, Zoology, and also American Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Prledlaender Ik
Sohn, Berlin.
P^rEJVED
^^'-^ 5 1915
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS
IN < LIBRARY OF THE P
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOL^£a^BODY MUSEUM
Vol. 11, No. 4, pp. 279-290 February 10, 1915
SERIAN, TEQUISTLATECAN, AND HOKAN
BY
A. L. KROEBER
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
UmVBBSITT OF OAIJFOBMIA FUBLIOATIONB
DEPA&TMENT OF AKTHSOPOLOOT
TlM foUowliis publlcatioiis dealing with •rchaaological and ettmological tol^eete ivoed
mder ttib dixaction of the Depmrtment of Anthropology are sent in exchange for tfaa pabll-
eaticnif of anthropological departmmits and mnaeoma, and for Jonmala devoted to general
antiiropology or to archaeology and ethnology. They are for aale at the prlcee statedt which
tndnde poetage or ezpreaa charges. Exchangee ehoold be directed to The Exchange D^^art-
nient» UniTersity Library, Berkeley, Oalif ornla» U. 8. A. All orders and remittances tfioiild
be addressed to the University Press.
European agent for the series in American Archaeology and Ethnology, fiswrffsl PhU-
idogy. Education, Modem Philology, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Otto Harrassowlt%
Leipsig. For the series in Botany, Geology, Pathology, Physiology, Zoology and also Amer*
ican Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Frledlaender As Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBIOAV ABOHAEOLOaT AXD ETHKOLOOT^A. L. Kroeber, Editor. Price per
yolome $3.50 (VoL 1, 14.25).
Oited as Univ. Oalif . PabL Am. Arch. Bthn. Pries
VoL 1. 1. Life and Onltnre of the Hhpa, by Pliny Barle Ooddard. Pp. 1-88;
plates 1-30. September, 1908 $1.25
2. Hnpa Texts, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 88-368. March, 1904 8.00
Index, pp. 369-378.
VoL 2. 1. The Exploration of the Potter Creek OaTe, by William J. Sinclair.
Pp. 1-27; plates i-14. April, 1904 — .40
2. The Languages of the Coast of California South of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-80, with a map. June, 1904 .60
8. Types of Indian Culture in California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 81-103.
4. Basket Designs of the Indians of Northwestern California, by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 106-164; plates 16-21. January, 1905 . .75
5. The Tokuts Language of South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber.
Pp. 165-377. January, 1907 . . 2.26
Index, pp. 379-392.
VoL 8. The Morphology of the Hupa Language, by Pliny Earle Ctoddard.
344 pp. June, 1905 «. 8iW
VoL 4. 1. The Earliest Historical Eolations between Mexico and Ji^pan, txom
original documents preserved in Spain and Japan, by Zelia NuttalL
«K^ W09 Jk^^B • # »»MF»^Je A^r^^%^ ■■■■■■■■■■T»i««Tiiaii««ii»»i»»aiBiiii«««Bi>f«w«>>BgBB»,iB»«aiB«aa» I ■■■■■■■»»■«■ — » ^VP^r
2. Contribution to the Physical Anthropology of California, based on col-
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the Utiven^ of
Calif omia, and in the XS, S. National Museum, by Ales Hrdlir^a.
Pp. 49-64, with 5 tables; plates 1-10, and map. jdne, 1906 .76
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 65-166.
4. Indian Biytiis from South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
5. The Washo Language of East Central California and Neradai by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 251-318. September, 1907 ^. « .75
6. The Beligion of the Indians of California^ by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 819-
356. September, 1907 .50
Index, pp. 357-374.
VoL 5. 1. The Phonology of the Hupa Language; Part I, The Individual Sounds^
by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-20, plates 1-8. March, 1907 .85
2. Navaho M^ths, Prayers and Songs, with Texts and Translations, by
Washington Matthews, edited by Pliny Barle Goddard. Pp. 21-68.
8. Kato Texts, by Pliny Earle Qoddard. Pp. 65-288, plate 9. December,
4. The BCaterial Culture of the Klamath Lake and Modoe Indians of
Northeastern California and Southern Oregon, by 8. A. Banett.
Pp. 239-292, plates 10-25. June, 1910 . .78
5. The Chimariko Indians and Language^ by Bdand B. Dixon. Pp. 298-
880. August, 1910 ^.^...,.^....^..^.>.«.^«^.^.>i^.«iH.^.,^^ , IjOO
Index, pp. 881-384.
Vol 6. 1. The Ethno-Oeography of the Pomo and Neighboring Indians^ by Sam-
uel Alfred Barrett. Pp. 1-332, maps 1-2. February, 1908
2. The Oeography and Dialects of the Mlwok Indians^ by Samuel Alfted
Barrett. Pp. 833-368, map 3.
8. On the Evidence of the Occupation of Certain Begions by the Miwok
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 869-880. Nos. 2 and 8 in one cow.
February, 1908 ..^....^..^ — ^~....
Index, pp. 881-400.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
Vol 7. 1. Tbe Emeryrllle SheUmoimd, by M«z Uble. Pp. 1-106, plates 1-12» with
38 text flgnres. June, 1907 1.:
2. Becent Investigations bearing upon the Question of the Occurrence of'
Neocene Man in the Auriferous Gravels of Oallf omla, by William
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-130, plates 13-14. February, 1008 M
8. Porno Indian Basketry, by 8. A. Barrett. Pp. 133-306, plates 16-30,
231 text figures. December, 1908 1.76
4. SheUmounds of the San Francisco Bay Begion, by N. O. Neliion.
Pp. 309-356, plates 32-34. December, 1909 JSO
6. The Ellis Landing Shellmound, by K. O. Nelson. Pp. 357-426^ plates
Index, pp. 427-443.
VoL 8. 1. A Mission Becord of the California Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. BIroeber. Pp. 1-27. May, 1908 .26
2. The Ethnography of the Cahuilla Indians, by A. L. EIroeber. Pp. 29-
68, plates 1-15. July, 1908 76
8. The Beligion of the Luisefio and Dieguefio Indians of Southern Oali-
fomia, by Constance Goddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
June, 1908 — « « 1.26
4. The Culture of the Luirofio Indians, by Philip Stedman Sparkman.
Pp. 187-234, plate 20. August, 1908 « ^ „ M
6. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern Calif omia» by A. L. Eroe-
ber. Pp. 235-269. September, 1909..^ 36
6. The Beligious Practices of the Dieguefio Indians, by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-358, plates 21-28. March, 1910 _ ^ .80
Index, pp. 369-369.
VoL 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Sapir, together with Tana Myths collected by
Boland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-235. February, 1910 2.60
2. The Chumash and Costanoan Languages, by A. L. EIroeber. Pp. 237-
271. November, 1910 „ 36
3. The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Eroeber. Pp. 273-435, and map. April, 1911 1.60
Index, pp. 437-439.
V6L 10. 1. Phcmetic Constituents of the Native Languages of California, by A.
L. Eroeber. Pp. 1-12. May, 1911 10
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Palnte Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-5. November, 1911 ^ 46
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohave Language, by A. L. EIroeber. Pp.
46-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 ^ .66
4. The Ethnology of the Salinan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-37. December, 1912 - 1.75
5. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-263. August, 1913 .25
6. Notes on the Chilula Ihdians of Northwestern California, by Pliny
. Earl Goddard. Pp. 265-288, plates 38-41. April, 1914 , .30
7. Chilula Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 289-379. November,
1914 1.00
Index in press.
Vol. 11. 1. Elements of the Eato Language, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 1-176,
pxaxes JL-40. wCwODor, xVa^ .•.•.•...••••••••. .•••••••••••••••••••••••..••^^^••••••.••••••••••.••a 2fi.uu
2. Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language, by A. L. Eroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 ^ .10
3. Sarsi Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 189-277 (In press)
4. Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan, by A. L. Eroeber. Pp. 279-290.
February, 1915 10
Volumes now completed:
Volume 1. 1908-1904. 878 pages and 30 idates $4.26
Volume 2. 1904-1907. 393 pages and 21 plates 8.60
VOlnma 8. 1906. The Morphology of the Hupa Language. 844 pages 8.50
Volume 4. 1906-1907. 374 pages, with 6 tables, 10 plates, and map 8.60
Volume 6. 1907-1910. 384 pages, with 26 plates 8.60
Volume 6. 1908. 400 pages,' with 8 maps 8JJ0
Voluma 7. 1907-1910. 448 pages and 60 plates 8.60
Vcktume 8. 1908-1910. 369 pages and 28 plates 8.60
Vouime V. 1910-1911. 4S9 pages ..,^.......^...^.».^.^..««..»>.«..».<.«..>».^^.^»-.»»..«.>..»— 8.60
UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
Note.— The UniTenlty of Oalifomia Pnblicatioiui an offered in exchange for the pnhli-
eations of learned societiee and institationa, fmiTersitiea and libraries. Complete lists of an
the pabllcatlons of the UnlTerslty will be sent npon regneet. For samide copies, lists of
publications or other information, address the Manager of the UnlTersity Press, BedDriej,
Oallfomia, U. S. A. All matter sent in exchange should be addressed to The Bxdbsags
Department, Uniyersity Library, Bericeley, Oallfomia, U. S. A.
AOBIOUIiTUBAIi 8CIEN0E8. — E. B. Babcock, J. W. Qilmore, and 0. B. Lipman, Editors.
Price per Tolume, 93.50. Volumes I and n in progress.
ASTBONOMY.— W. W. Campbell, Bditor. (Lick Obserratory, Mt. Hamilton, CaL)
Publications of the Lick Obserratory. — ^Volumes I-XI completed.
BOTANT.— W. A. Betchell, Editor. Price per Tolume $3.60. Volumes I (i^. 418), n (pp.
' 360), m (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 397) completed. Volumes V and VI in progress.
CLASSICAL PHILOLOOT.— Edward B. Clapp, William A. Merrill, Herbert C. Mlitttng,
Editors. Price per volume $2.00. Volume I (pp. 270) completed. Volume n in
progress.
ECONOMICS.— A. C. Biiller, Editor.
EDUCATION'.— Edited by the Department of Education. Price per Tolume 92iK>.
EHOINEEBINa.— Edited under the direction of the Engineering Departments. This series
win contain contributions from the Colleges of Mechanics, Mining, and CItH Engi-
neering. Volume I in progress.
OEOGEAPHT.^Buliff S. Holway, Editor. Volume I in progress.
OEOLOOT. — Bulletin of the Department of Oedogy. Andrew C. Lawson and John O.
Merriam, Editors. Price per volume 93.60. Volumes I (pp. 435), n (pp. 457), IH
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), V (pp. 468), VI (pp. 454), and VII (pp. 495, index in press) '
completed. Volume vm in progress.
MODEBN PHILOLOGT. — ^Volumes I (pp. 400) and II (pp. 373) completed. Volumes in
and IV in progress.
PATHOLOOT.— Frederick P. Gay, Editor. Price per volume, 12.60. Volume I (pp. 347)
completed. Volume n in progress.
PHILOSOPHT. — O. H. Howlson, Editor. Volume I (pp. 282) completed. VlAume II in
progress. Price per volume 92.00.
PHT8IOLOOT. — 8. S. Iffaxwell, Editor. Price per volume 92.00. Volumes I (pp. 217),
n (pp. 216), in (pp. 197) completed. Volume IV in progress.
PSTCHOLOOT. — George M. Stratton, Editor. Volume I in progress.
ZOOLOGT.^W. E. Bitter and C. A. Kofoid, Editors. Price per volume for volumes I-X,
93.50; for volume XI and following, 96.00. Volumes I (pp. 317), n (pp. 382), HI
(pp. 383), IV (pp. 400), V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478), VH (pp. 446), VIH (pp. 357), IX
(pp. 366), X (pp. 417), and XI (pp. 638) completed. Volumes xn and xm in
progress.
QNIVEBSITY OP CALIFGBNIA CHBONICLE.— An oAdal record of Ukdveciity l!tt%
issued Quarterly, edited, by a committee of the Faculty. Price, 91*00 per year. Our-
rent volume No. XVn.
Address all orders or requests for information concerning the above publlcationa to Thm
University Press, Berkeley, California.
European agent for the series in American Archaeology and Ethnology, dasiical Phil-
<dogy. Education, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Ctto Harrassowiti, Leipslg. Fox Hm
series in Agricultural Sciences, Botany, Geogn^phy, Geology, Mathematics, Pathology,
Physiology, Zoology, and also American Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Friedlaeoder h
Sohn, Berlin.
1
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATI
IN
PfSCElVED
1
Map o .^
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY iOl^y
Vol. 11, No. 5, pp. 291-296
DICHOTOMOUS SOCIAL ORGANIZATION
IN SOUTH CENTRAL CALIFORNIA
BY
EDWARD WINSLOW GIFFORD
UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
VmYBMSOY OF OAUFOBNIA PXJBLIOATIOire
DBPA&TMBIIT OF AHTHBOPOLOOT
TlM foEowinf ynblteattoni dealing with archaaologleal and aftmologieal atf^aefeB iMoad
mder tlia dixactlon of tha Dapartmant of Antliropologj aca aaat la exchange for tlia pobtl-
Mttona of antliropologieal dapartmeots and Biueiim8» and for Jonmala devoted to genaral
aotliropology or to aicliaaology and ettmology. Tliej are for lala at the prleea Btated» whieh
tnelada poatafo or e^preai ehargea. Bzchangea should be directed to The Bxchaace D^^tft-
BMOti VidTnktj Library, Beckeley, Calif oinla» U. 8. A. All ordan and ramittancaa tfioidd
be addressed to the Uniy^rsity Frees.
Baropean agent for the series In American Archaeology and Bthnology, fnaatrtira! Fhil-
alogy, Bdncation, Modem Fhilology, Fhiloaophy, and Semitic Fhilology, Otto Banaaaowit^
LeiiMig. For the series in Botany, Geology, Fathology, Fhyslology, Soology and also Asmc^
loan Archaeology and Ethnology/ B. Friedlaender as Bohn, Berlin.
AMBBIOAB ABOHABOLOOT AND BTHNOLOaT.-A. L. Kroeb«r, Editor. Frice par
yoluma 9S.50 (VoL 1, 94.25).
Cited as UniT. Calif. FabL Am. Arch. Bthn. Fries
VoL 1. 1. Life and Cnttnre of the Btopa, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1«88;
plates 1-30. September, 1008 . $1.25
2. Hnpa Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 89-868. March, 1904 ZM
Index, pp. 869-878.
VoL a. 1. The Exploration of the Fetter Creek CaTO, by William J. Sinclair.
pp. 1-27; plates 1-14. April, 1904 .40
2. The Languages of the Coast of California South of San FZaadsco^ by
A. L. Broeber. Fp. 29-80, with a map. Jone^ 1904 .60
8. Types of Indian Cnltnre in California, by A. L. Sroeber. Fp. 81-108.
4. Basket Designs of the Indians of Vorthwestem California, by A. L.
Broeber. Fp. 105-164; plates 15-21. January, 1906 .75
5. The Toknts Language of South Central California, by A. L. Broeber.
Fp. 165-877. January, 1907 ..— ^.h.«»».»»»— .»«...~....^«..... »....^^...».-..- 8.90
Index, pp. 879-892.
VoL 8. The Morphology of the Hnpa Langnsge, by Fliny Earle Ooddard.
VoL 4. 1. The Earliest Historical Eolations between Mexico and Japan, ttom
original documents preserved in Spain and Japan, by Zelia VnttalL
2. Contribution to the Fhysical Anthropology of California, baaed on col-
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the UlniTenity of
California, and in the U. S. National Mosmim, by Ales HMUidca.
Fp. 49-64, with 5 tables; plates 1-10, and map. J^me, 1906 .78
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroebar. Fp. 65-166.
4. Indian Myths from South Central California, by A. L. Bte^ber. Fp.
jld /-fiOu. a&ay, ivuv «.«»»»«..»«».«».«««^w...»—....»»»»««»«.«»———^»«««»«»«»»«. »»■«»«««««»■ ■»»«»— .to
5. The Washo Language of Bast Central Califomia and NoTada, by A. L.
Broeber. Fp. 251-818. September, 1907 .78
6. The Beligion of the Indians of California, by A. L. Sroeber. Fp. 810-
Index, pp. 857-874.
VoL 5. 1. The Fhonology of the Hupa Language; Fart I, The Indiildnal Sounds^
by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-20, platea 1-8. March, 1907 .88
2. Navaho M^ths, Frayers and Songs, with Texts and Translations^ by
Washington Matthews, edited by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 21-68.
sopuuiiDer, jlvwy ..««».».«»»«..«»»»»».».«■»»«»—»..»»«»«».»—■»»»—->»»—»«——■■■»««■■■»«■■»«■■■■»■■■■■■»»■ ..o
8. Eato Texts, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 65-288, plate 9. December,
1909 ~ . 2JI6
4. The Material Culture of the Blamath Lake and Modoe Indians of
Northeastern Califomia and Southern Oregoai, by B. A. Bamtl.
It). 289-292, plates 10-26. June, 1910 - — . .78
5. The Chimariko Indians and Language, by Boland B. Dixon. Fp. 298-
Index, pp.. 881-884.
VoL 6. 1. The Ethno-Oeography of the Fomo and Neighboring Didlan% by Saa^
uel Alfred Barrett. Fp. 1-882, maps 1-2. February, 1908 8 JB
2. The Oeography and Dialects of the Miwok Indians^ by Samuel Alfted
Barrett. Fp. 883-868, map 8.
8. On the Evidence of the Occupation of Certain Begiona by the Mlwok
Indians, by A. L. Broeber. Fp. 869-880. Nos. 2 and 8 In one coTor.
Feoruan^, ivUo .,»«...»««««»«—»««»—»—«»»«—»*«■■■»"»—*——»«»*■*—*■«»«— »«■■"■"— ■■'■—■■■»■■■"■■ ^^9
Index, pp. 881-400.
^
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATION8-(CONTiNUCD)
Vol 7. 1. The Emeryrllla SheUmomid, by Max UUe. Pp. 1-106, plates 1-12» with
88 text figures. June, 1907 . _„ 1.28
2. Recent InTestigations bearing upon tlie Question of tbe Occurrence of
Neocene Man In tbe Auriferous Qravels of Oallf omla, by WUllam
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-130, plates 18-14. Pebruary, 1908 M
8. Pomo Indian Basketry, by S. A. Barrett. Pp. 188-806, plates 15-80,
281 text figures. December, 1908 1.75
4. SheUmounds of tbe San Prandsco Bay Region, by N. O. Kelson.
Pp. 809-866, plates 82-84. December, 1909 .50
6. Tbe Ellis Landing Shellmound, by N. O. Nelson. Tp. 857-426^ plates
•KMHI. A>pni, XVXU >...» ■■■.■■mm... ■ ■■■^..«»^»..»...^..«...«.»».. .■...■««—»«».»..«„ af 6
Index, pp. 427-448.
VoL 8. 1. A Mission Record of the Oallf omla Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. Kroeber. P^. 1-27. May, 1908 .25
2. The Bthnograxdiy of the Oahuilla Indiana, by A. L. BIroeber. Pp. 29-
68, plates 1-15. July, 1908 ^ .75
8. The R^lgion ^f the Lirisefio and Dleguefio Indians of Southern Oall-
fomla, by Oonstance CK>ddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
June, 1908 1.25
4. The Oulture of the Lulsefio Indians, by PhlUp Stedman Sparkmaa.
Pp. 187-284, plate 20. August, 1908 JM)
5. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern Oallfomla, by A. L. Kroe-
ber. Pp. 285-269. Sei^tember, 1909 ... . .. .85
6. The Religious Practices of the Dleguefio Indians^ by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-858, plates 21-28. March, 1910 '. 80
Index, pp. 869-809.
VoL 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Saplr, together with Tana Myths collected by
Roland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-285. Pebruary, 1910 2.50
2. The Ohumash and Oostanoan Languages, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 287-
271. November, 1910... _. .85
8. The Languages of the Ooast of Oallfomla North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 278-485, and map. April, 1911 1.50
Index, pp. 487-489.
V6L 10. 1. Phonetic Oonstituents of the Native Languages of Oallfomla, by A.
Ik Kroeoer. Pp« i~iz. ASay, 1911 .......................................................... aio
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Palute Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-5. November, 1911 .45
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohave Language, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
45-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 _ .65
4. The Ethnology of the Sallnan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-87. December, 1912 ».. 1.75
5. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-268. August, 1918 .25
6. Notes on the Ohilula Ihdlans of Northwestem Oallfornla, by Pliny
Earl Gk>ddard. Pp. 265-288, plates 88-41. April, 1914 . .80
7. Ohilula Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 289-379. November,
1914 1.00
Index in press.
VoL 11. 1. Elements of the Kato Language, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 1-176,
praxes x-vO. wCwODer, jloXjs •..........•..••...•.•.••...••..•••••.•.•.•..«•.•.....••.....••..•.•■• 2b.uu
2. Phonetic Elements of the Dleguefio Language, by A. L. Kroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 10
8. Sarsl Texte, by Pliny Earle Gk>ddard. Pp. 189-277. February, 1916.... 1.00
4. Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 279-290.
February, 1915 .10
5. Dlchotomous Social Organization in South Oentral Oallfomla, by Ed-
ward Winslow Giflord; Pp. 291-296. Febmary, 1916 05
Volumes now completed:
Volume 1* 1908-1904. 878 pages and 80 plates 14.25
Volumi 2. 1904-1907. 898 pages and 21 lOates . SJ50
Volume 8. 1905. The Morphology of the Hupa Language. 844 pages 8.60
Volume 4. 1906-1907. 874 pages, ^th 5 tables, 10 plates, and map 8.50
Volume 5* 1907-1910. 884 pages, with 25 plates . 8.50
Volume 6. 1908. 400 pages, with 8 maps 8JS0
Voluma 7. 1907-1910. 448 pages and 60 ^ates 8.50
V<dume 8. 1908-1910. 869 pages and 28 plates ~. .. 8.50
V(dnme 9. 1910-1911. 489 pages . .^ 8.50
^NIVmSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUCD)
Kota.— The Unlvei^ty of Oalifornia Pnbllcatloiii an offerad In czdiaiige for the poW-
ettioiit of leenad locletiee end inftitotloiie, vniTeciitieB end liteazlee. OonqpMe ll«ti of an
the pnWeatlone of the Uniyenlty will be sent npon reaneet. For wnple oopiei» lists of
publlcatloiis or oth^ inf osmatioiit addreis the Manager of the UnlTecsity Preo^ Bexkeiey,
Oalifomia^ U. 8% A. All natter sent in exchange should be addressed to The Bzehange
Department* Unirerslty liibrary, Berkeley, OaUf omia» U. 8. A.
AQBtOUIiTUHAL 8CIEN0ES.— B. B. Babcock, J. W. aUmore, and O. B. Idpman, Editors.
P^lce ptir Tolnme, $3^. Volumes I and n in progress.
ABTBONOICT.^W. W. Oami^bell, Bditor. (Lick Obsenratory, ML Waarflton, OaL)
Pablleations of the Lick Obserratory.— Volnmes I-xn completed.
BOTAMT.— W. A. 8etchellt Bditor. Price per Tolnme 98JM). Volnmes I <i9. 418), n (ppt
860), m (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 897) completed. V<^nmes V and VI in progress.
0LA8SI0AL FHILOLOaT.— Bdward B. Olapp^ William A. Merrill, Hexbort O. HMtlng,
Bditoss. Price per Tolnme 18.00. Volnme Z (pp. 270) Ofmipleted> Volsme n in
progress.
BOONOMI€».— A. 0. Miller, Bditor.
BDUOATZOK.— Bdited by the Department of Bdncation. Price per Tdnme 92JB0,
BHQZNBBBINa.^Bdited under the direetlon of the Engineering Departmsats. This series
will contain oontribnti<nis ftom the Colleges of Mechanics, ^""<"g, and Otril Sngl-
neering. Volume I in progress.
OiBOQi&AJPBT. — ^Bnliff 8. Hdway, Editor. Volume I in progress.
aBOZtfOOT,— Bulletin of tlie Departmsnt of (leology. Andrew O. ZdMnon end Jote O.
Merriam, Editors. Price per volnme $8.60. V<^nmes I (pp. 486), n (pp. 467), ZZZ
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), V (pp. 468), VI (pp. 464), and Vn (pp. 604) completed.
Volume vm in progress.
MODEBK PHUiOLOOT.— Volumes Z (pp. 400) and IZ (pp. 873) completed. Volumes ZZZ
and ZV In progress.
PATHOZiOaT.— Frederick P. Qay, Bditor. Price per Tolume^ 18.50. Volusie Z (pp. 847)
completed. Volume ZZ in progress.
PHZZiOBOPHT.— O. H. Howlson, Editor. Volume Z (pp. 262) completed. Volnme ZZ Sm
progress. Price per votame $2.00.
PHT8IOZX)OT.--8. 8. Maxwell, Bditor. Price per yi^ume 88.00. Volumes Z (pp. sa7),
ZZ (pp. 216), ZZZ (pp. 197) completed. Volume ZV in progreis.
PBTOHOZiOOT. — Gtoorge M. 8tratton, Bditor. Volume Z in progress.
SSOOZiOGT.— W. B. Bitter and 0. A. Kofoid, Editors. Price per volume for volumes Z-X,
$diS0; for volume XI and following, $6*00. Volumes I (pp. 317), n (pp. 882), Zn
(pp. 383). ZV (pp. 400). V (pp. 440), VZ (pp. 478), VZZ (pp. 446), VZfl (pp. 367), ZX
(pp. 366), X (pp. 417), snd XI (pp. 638) oompleted. Volumes XH, XTTT, and XZV
in progress.
ONZVEBSZTT OF OAZJFOBMZA GHBOMZCTZiE.— An oiAcial record of University ttfe^
issued quarteriy, edited by a committee of the Faculty. Pricey 11.00 per year. Oor-
rent volume No. XVZL
Address all orders or requests for information eonceming the above pablicatioiis to The
university Pres% Bericeley, Calif omia.
Buropean agent for the series in American Archaeology and Bllinology, Olassical Phll-
<dogy. Education, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Otto BCarrassowiti, Ztolpsig. For ttM
series in Agricultural Sciences^ Botany, Ctoography^ Ctodogy, MMhsmatics, Pathology,
Physiology, Zoology, and also American Archaeology and Ethnology, E. Friedlaender h
Sohn, Berlin.
RECEIVED ^
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA ^WBUC^-g^^py MUSiUM
IN
' AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETHNOLOGY
Vol. 11, No. 6, pp. 297<d98 March 8, 1916
THE DELINEATION OF THE DAY-SIGNS IN
THE AZTEC MANUSCRIPTS
BY
T. T. WATERMAN
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
I t
WlVBESm OF OAUFOBHIA. FUBLIOATZOHB
DEPA&TMBIIT OF ANTHBOPOLOaT
TlM foEowinf ynMlcatioiMi dealiiif with •rchaaologieal and gUinoU^giral nil^aefeB teoad
ndv tlM dlxoetUm of tho I>«pftrtoi«nt of Anthropology are aent in urc^ango for tlio pnldl-
aatioiis of antbropologieal dopartiiMiiti and mnaoimis, and for Jounala devoted to genetil
aotlixopologT or to archaeology and ethnidogy. They are for aale at the pileea stated, wtiidi
toolnde poatage or e^preai charges. Exchanges should be directed to The Szehange D^^art-
menti Untreiity Library, Bericeley, Oalifoinla» U. 8. A. All orders and rendttancee ahonld
be addressed to the UnlTersity Press.
Snropean agent for the series in American Archaeology and Bthnology, Olaasical Phil-
elogy, Bdncationt Hodem Philology, Philosophy, and Semitic Philology, Otto Harraaaowlti^
Leipsig. For the series in Botany, Geology, Pathology, Physiology, Zoology and also AniaK>-
ioan Archaeology and Bthnology, B. Frledlaender As Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBIOAK ABOHAEOLOOT AND ETHNOLOGT.^A. L. Ejroeber, Editor. Prices,
Volume 1, $4.25; Volnmes 2 to 10, Indoslve, $3.50 each; Volume 11 and following,
$5.00 each.
Oited as UniT. Oalif. PnbL Am. Arch. Bthn. Fries
VoL 1. 1. Life and Ooltnre of His Hnpa, by Pliny -Ba^ Ooddard. Pp. 1«88;
plates 1-30. September, 1908 fU6
2. Hnpa Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 89-368. Haxeh, 1904 ZM
Index, pp. 869-878.
VoL a. 1. The Exploration of the Potter Greek OaTO, by William J. Sinclair.
Pp. 1-27; plates 1-14. April, 1904 M
2. The Languages of the Ooast of Oalif oraia South of San FZaacisco^ by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-80, with a map. June, 1904 M
8. Types of Indian Culture in California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 81-108.
4. Basket Designs of the Indians of Northwestern California, by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 106-164; plates 15-21. Jannary, 1906 . .76
6. The Tokuts Language of South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber.
Pp. 166-877. January, 1907 2.96
Index, pp. 879-392.
VoL 8. The Morphology of the Hupa Language, by Pliny Ba^ Goddard.
844 m>. June. 1906 - . 8.50
Vol 4. 1. The Earliest Ettstorleal Eolations between Mexico and Japan, from
original documents preserred in Spain and Ji^pan, by Zelia NuttaO.
2. Contribution to the Physical Anthropology of California, based on col-
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the Utilyerstty of
California, and in the U. S. National Museum, by Ales HMUidca.
Pp. 49-64, with 5 tables; plates 1-10, and map. Jdne, 1906 ^ .78
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 66-166.
4. Indian Mytbs from South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
6. The Washo Language of East Central California and Nevada, by A. L.
Kroeber. Pp. 251-318. September, 1907 .75
6. The Beligion of the Indians of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 819-
356. September, 1907 ^^.»..>»^....».....».~.^^.>i.».^......^..~...».^^»>.^»«».»...»..^» J50
Index, pp. 357-374.
Vol 6. 1. The Phonology of the Hupa Language; Part I, The IndlYldual Sounds^
by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 1-20, plates 1-8. March, 1907 .85
2. NaTaho M^ths, Prayers and Songs, with Texts and Translations, by
Washington Matthews, edited by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 21-68.
8. Kato Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 65-288, plate 9. December,
4. The Material Culture of the Klamath Lake and Modoe Indians of
Northeastern California and Southern Oregon, by S. A. Barrett.
Pp. 239-292, plates 10-25. June, 1910 .75
6. The Chimariko Indians and Language^ by Bdand B. Dixon. Pp. 298-
380. August, 1910 IjOO
Index, pp. 881-384.
VoL 6. 1. The Ethno-Geography of the Pome and Neighboring Indians^ by Sam-
uel Alfred Barrett. Pp. 1-332, maps 1-2. February, 1908 . 8.88
2. The Geography and Dialects of the Miwok Indians^ by Samnel Alffeed
Barrett. Pp. 833-868, map 8.
8. On the Evidence of the Occupation of Certain Begions by tiie Mlwok
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 869-880. Nos. 2 and 8 in one eorwr.
^ooruary, Xvus ....»«...— »-»««^«^».»«.«—.... ».....— ^ « ■■...»■■■» .,« jom
Index, pp. 381-400.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUED)
Vol 7. 1. Tbe Emeryville Shellmoimd, by Mez UUe. Pp. 1-106, idates 1-12| with
2. Recent InyestlgatiQiiB bearing npon the Question of the Ocenrrence of
Neocene Man in the Aurlf erona Oravela of Oalif omia» by William
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-130, plates 18-14. February, 1908 M
8. Porno Indian Basketry, by S. A. Barrett. Pp. 188-806, plates 16-80,
281 text figures. December, 1908 „ 1.75
4. SheUmounds of the San Francisco Bay Region, by N. O. Nelson.
Pp. 809-866, plates 82 84. December, 1909 JSO
6. The Ellis Landing Sh^Umoond, by N. 0. Nelson. Pp. 867-426, plates
OO-Oil. Apm, XViLU ■■^■■■.■■■■.■■■■■■.■■■■■■■— »»■■»——.»»■»»..»»».«— »»■.«».»»».««».»«»«»««.—. .70
Index, pp. 427-448.
VoL 8. 1. A Mission Record of the California Indians, from a Manuscript in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 1-27. May, 1908 .25
2. The Ethnography of the Cahuilla Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 29-
68, olates 1-16. July, 1908 „ :... .75
8. The Religion of the Luisefio and Dieguefio Indians of Southern Oall-
fomia, by Constance Ooddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
4. The Culture of the Luisefio Indians, by Philip Stedman Sparkman.
Pp. 187-284, plate 20. August, 1908 .60
5. Notes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern California, by A. L. Kroe-
ber. Pp. 286-269. September, 1909 .35
8. The Religious Practices of the Dieguefio Ttidlans^ by T. T. Waterman.
Pp. 271-868, plates 21-28. March, 1910 80
Index, pp. 869-869.
VoL 9. 1. Tana Texts, by Edward Sapir, together with Tana Myths collected by
Roland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-286. February, 1910 2.60
2. The Chumash and Costanoan Languages, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 287-
271. November, 1910 .86
8, The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 278-485, and map. April, 1911 ' 1.60
Index, pp. 487-489.
Vcd. 10. 1. Phonetic Constituents of the Native Languages of California, by A.
L. Kroeber. Pp. 1-12. May, 1911 .10
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Palute Language, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-6. November, 1911 .46
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohave Language^ by A. L. Kroeber. Pp.
46-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 — .66
4. The Ethnology of the Salinan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-87. December, 1912 1.76
6. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-263. August, 1913 — J2B
6. Notes on the Chilula Ihdians of Northwestern California, by Pliny
Earl Gk>ddard. Pp. 266-288, plates 88-41. April, 1914 30
7. Chilula Texts, by Pltny Earle Goddard. Pp. 289-379. November,
X914 .................................................................. ........•••.^..••••.•••..•••••..••••••••..M* JL.UU
Index, pp. 381-385.
VoL 11. 1. Elements of the Kato Language, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 1-176,
plates 1-45. October, 1912 2.00
2. Phonetic Elements of the Dieguefio Language, by A. L. Kroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 .10
8. Sand Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddard. Pp. 189-277. February, 1916..„ 1.00
4. Serian, Tequistlatecan, and Hokan, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 279-290.
February, 1915 ~ .10
5. Dichotomous Social Organization in South Central California, by Ed-
ward Winslow Giflord. Pp. 291-296. February, 1916 — 05
6. The Delineation of the Day-Signs In the Aztec Manuscripts, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 297-398. March, 1916 1.00
7. The Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan Based on the Vocabulary of De la
Cuesta, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 399-472. March, 1916 70
Index In preparation.
VoL 12. 1. Composition of California SheUmounds, by Edward Winslow Gifford.
Pp. 1-29. February, 1916 „ .80
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA ^UBLt^ATtONt>--<C^irHinKD)
Votamof now oom^Utod:
VolQiiM 1. 190S-1904. 878 pag«k n^ 30 ^Mm flSB
Votimit a. 1904-1907. 898 pages tnd 21 j^Utas 8jB0
Votasit 8. 1905. The M6rpliolog7 of tlio Hnpft Ijmgnago, 8i4 ptfot 8J0
Volimii 4. 1906-1907. 874 p«cef| with 5 tablM, 10 pMm, and may SJO
Voliune 6. 1907-1910. 884 pagei, witb 85 platea %M
VolmM 6. 1908. 400 pagofi with 8 maps : 8J0
VoUune 7. 1907-1910. 443 pagss and 50 plates 3050
Volume 8. 1908-1910. 369 pages and 28 plates ^ ^ . 8.50
Volume 9. 1910-1911. 439 pages 3.60
Volume 10. 1911-1914. 385 pages and 41 plates .\ 3.50
Vote.— ne IFnli'mlty of Oalifomia PnUioatloiis ace offeied In eneliaage for tlie puftO-
eations of learned sodetieB and institations» natrexilties and Ubrailes. OonqpMe Usti of aU
Hie publications of the Unirenlty will be sent upon reanest. For sanq^ eopiesi lists of
pnblieations or other inf ormationt address the ICsaager of the XTnireniity Press^ Beikelej,
Oalifoniia» U. 8. A. All matter sent in exehange should be addressed to Ttm Bxofasage
Department, Uniyenity library, Berkeley, Oalifomia, XT. 8. A.
AOBIOULTUBAL 8CIEN0B8.— B. B. Babcock, J. W. CKlmore^ and 0. B. Lfpman, Bditocs.
Price per Tdume^ 83.50. Volumes I and n in progress.
ASTBONOMT.-'W. W. Oampbell, Bditor. (Lick Obserratory, Mt HlMDilloa, OaL)
Publications of the Lick Obsenratory.— Volumes I-Zn completed.
BOTAMT.— W. A. Setchell, Bditor. Price per Tolume $8.50. Volumes I (ro* 418), n iW9>
860), m (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 397) completed. Vdnmea V and VI in progress.
0LA88I0AL PHILOLOaT.— Bdward B. Olapp, Williaai A. Umm, Herbert O. Vottini,
Bditors. Price per Tdume $2.00. Volame I (pp. 270) competed. Vdnme n in
progress.
BDUOATIOK.^Bdited by the Department of Education. Price per TOlnme 82M.
BNOliTBEBIKa.— Edited under the direction of the Wnglneering Departments. This serlsB
will contain contributions ttom the OoUeges of Mechanics, Mining, and OiTfl Bngl-
neering. Volume I tti progress.
OBOOBAPHT,— Bnliir.8. Holway, Editor. Volume I in progress.
aBOLOOT.— Bulletin of the Department of Geology. Andrew 0. Laweon* and Jolm O.
Merriam, Editors. Pirioe per Tdume $8.50. Volumes I (pp. 435), n (pp. 457), nZ
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462)» V (pp. 458), VI (pp. 454), VII (pp. 504), and VHI (pp, 683)
completed. Volume DC in progress.
MODEBK PHILOLOGT.— -Volumes I (pp. 400) and n (pp. 878) completed. Volnmea nZ
and IV in progress.
PATHOLOOT.— Frederick P. (Hy, Bditor. Price per Tolume^ 82.50. Volume I (pp. 8^0
comideted. Volume n in progress.
PHIIi080PHT.^O. H. Howison, Bditor. Volnme I (pp. 282) completed. VohDone n im
progress. Price per Tolume $2.00.
PHT8I0L0O7.— 8. 8. Maxwell, Editor. Price per Tdume $2.00. Volumes I (pp. SIT),
n (pp. 215), in (pp. 197), and IV (pp. 228) completed. Volnine V in profccess.
PSTOHOLOa7.^<}eorge M. Btratton, Bditor. Vdume Z In progress.
S500L0OT.— W. B. Bitter and O. A. Kof old. Editors. Price per Tolume for TolnnuM I-X
88.50; fOr Tolume XI and following, $5.00. Volumes I (pp. SVT), H (pp. 888), in
(pp. 388), IV (pp. 400), V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478), VH (pp. 446), vm (pp. 867), XZ
(pp. 365), Z (pp. 417), and XI (pp. 538) completed. Volumes xn to ZVI indnstre
in progress.
ONIVBBSITT OP OALIFOBKZA €XBB<IMIOLB.-^An olBelal record of mdmslty tti^
issued quarterly^ edited by a committee of the Plmlty. Pflo% f LOO per yeoK. Onr-
rent Tdume No. jlvxu.
Address aU orders or requests for inf ormatiea oofMoninc the aboro yabUoalloBo %o
UtaiTersity Pres% Berkeley, Oalifomia.
RECEIVED ^
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PU BUCATIONttP'
■UBr^^^^ OF T^« ^
AMERICAN ARCHAEOLOGY AND ETt^^^f^f^Cfi U^^^^
Vol. 11, No. 7, pp. 399-472 March 9, 1916
THE MUTSUN DIALECT OF COSTANOAN
BASED ON THE VOCABULARY
OF DE LA CUESTA
BY
J. ALDEN MASON
UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORNIA PRESS
BERKELEY
UNXVBBSZTT OF OAUFOBMZA FUBLIOATIOH8
DBPABTMBNT OF ANZHBOPOLOOT
n« foUowliiff pahUcaMoBM daaUng wltli mrcbaaologlcal mud •Umologlcal mbj^eti taqad
Bidtf the dIraeUioii of tlio Departmeiit of Antbropology are sent In exctimge for tbe pnUI-
eettone of enttoopOloglol depertmenti anil mmeiinii, and for Jonmala deroted to genneal
anttm^pologj or to ardiaeology and ethnology. They are for sale at the prlceo stated,* vfai^
tneliDide postage or express chuges. Ezehanges should be direeted to The Bzchange Dc^art-
menti UnlTentty Zdteary, Berkeley, California, U. 8. A. All orders and remittanceo should
be addressed to the UniTorsity Frees.
Bvropean agent for the series In Awier1r4in Archaeology and Bthnology, COaaslcal FhH-
elogy, Bdnpation, Modem Fhilology, Fhiloeophy, and Semitie Fhilology, Otto HarrassowlH
Iisli^dg* For the series in Botany, Oeology, Fathology, Fhyslology, Zoology and also
lean Archaeology and Ethnology, B. Frledlaender H Sohn, Berlin.
AMEBIOAN ABOHAEOLOOT AND ETHNOLOaT.— A. L. Kroeber, Editor.
Volume 1, $4.25; Volumes 2 to 10, inclusive, $3.60 each; Volume 11 and following,
$6.00 each.
Cited as UniT. Calif. FnbL Am. Arch. Bthn. Pries
ToL 1. 1. Xdfe and Culture of the Hnpa, by Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-88;
plates 1-SO. September, 1903 .-^ fU6
a. Hnpa Texts, by FUny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 8»-368. Mardi, 1904 8M
Index, pp. 369-378.
▼oL 2. 1. The Exploration of the Fetter Creek CaTe^ by William J. Binclair.
Fp. 1-27; plates 1-14. April, 1904 M
2. The Languages of the Coast of California South of San Fraactsoo^ by
A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 29-80, with a map. June^ 1904 .60
8. Types of Indian Culture In Calif omia» by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 81-103.
A Basket Designs of the Indians of Northwestern Calif omia» by A. L.
Kroeber. Fp. 105-164; plates 16-21. January, 1905 .76
6. The Tokuts Language of South Central California, by A. L. Kroeber.
Index, pp. 379-392.
ToL 8. The Morphology of the Hupa Language, by FUny Earle Ooddazd.
344 DO. June. 1006 8.60
TdL A 1. The Earliest Historical Eolations between Mexico and Japan, fkom
original documents preserred In Spain and Japan, by Eelia NtittaU.
2. Contribution to the Fhysical Anthropology of Calif omia» based on col-
lections in the Department of Anthropology of the UniTerBlty of
California, and In the U. S. National ICnseum, by Alee HMlicka.
Fp. 49-64, with 6 tables; plates 1-10, and map. Jime, 1906 .75
8. The Shoshonean Dialects of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 65-166.
A Indian Myttis from South Central Caljf omia» by A. L. Kroeber. Fp.
5. The Washo Language of East Central CaUf omia and Nevada^ by A. L.
Kroeber. Fp. 261-318. September, 1907 .75
6. The Beligion of the Indians of California, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 819-
8o6t BeptemDer, ivu7 .»».—^»>.»..—^.«.«.»«»««»— —.»...».»».»»— »...—~».. .■■.....■. , .ov
Index, pp. 357-37A
ToL 5. 1. The Fhonology of the Hupa Language; Fart I, The Individual Sounds^
by FUny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 1-20, plates 1-8. March, 1907 35
8. Navaho Mirths, Frayers and Songs, with Texts and Translatfons, by
Washington Matthews, edited by FUny Bade Ooddard. Fp. 21-68.
i3V^^|F«^BXU8/vAs AW e - l it ■ ll ■ 1 ■ n-T-l n-lll fTl-rTTfW I ■ ■ ItTll ■■ — Till ■--! !■■'- 11B>-Tl Itll r IB-Tl r ■■Tir» • V^P
A Kato Texts, liy Fliny Earle Ooddard. Fp. 65-288» plate 9. December,
A The Material CuHore of the Klamath Lake and Modoe Indiana of
Northeastern CaUfomia and Southern Oregon, by 8. A. Barrett.
Fp. 289-292, plates 10-25. June^ 1910 .78
5. The Chinuuiko Ihdians and Language, by Boland B. DIxcn. Fp. 888-
Index, pp. 881-88A
TdL 6. 1. The Ethno-Oeography of the Fomo and Netghborlng TiuHansy by Sanh
u«l Alfted Barrett Fp. 1-888; maps 1-8. February, 1906
8. The Oeography and Dialects of the Miwok Indisns^ by Samuel Alflced
Barrett Fp. 833-368, map A
A On the ETldence of the Occupation of Certain Begiona by the Mlwek
Indians, by A. L. Kroeber. Fp. 869-880. Nos. 8 and 8 In csM eom.
February, 1906
»■■••■••■
Index, pp. 881-400.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS -(CONTINUED)
ToL 7. 1. The EmeryriUe Bliallmonndt by ISbx UUe. Pp. 1-106, pUtas 1-18, with
88 t6Kt flffures. June. 1907 _ l.fill
2. Beeent Inyestigatioiis bearing upon the Question of the Ocenxxeoce of
Keocene Man in the Anxlf enms Orayele of California, by William
J. Sinclair. Pp. 107-180, plates 18-14. Pebmary, 1908 .86
8. Porno Indian Basketry, by 8. A. Barrett. Pp. 188-306, plates 16-80,
281 text flgnres. December, 1908 « _ 1,78
4. Shellmonnds of the San Prandsco Bay Begion, by K. O. ITtfaon.
Pp. 809-866, plates 82-84. December, 1909 M
6. The Ellis Tiandiiig Shellmomid, by K. O. Kdson. Pp. 867-426^ j^tes
86-60. April, 1910 .75
Index, pp. 427-448.
ToL 8. 1. A Blisslon Becord of the California Indians, from a Idanuscrlpt in the
Bancroft Library, by A. L. Kroeber. I^. 1-27. Blay, 1908 .20
2. The Ethnography of the Cahuilla Indians, by A. I». Kroeber. Pp. 29-
68, plates 1-16. July, 1908 .75
8. The Bellgion of the Luiseilo and Diegnefio Indians of Sonthem Cali-
fornia, by Constance Gk>ddard Dubois. Pp. 69-186, plates 16-19.
4. The Culture of the Luiseilo Indians, by Philip Stedman Sparkman.
Pp. 187-234, plate 20. August, 1908 J50
6. Kotes on Shoshonean Dialects of Southern California, by A. L. E:roe-
ber. Pp. 285-269. September, 1909.................. .85
6. The B^ligious Practices of the Diegnefio Tndlans, by T. % Waterman.
Pp. 271-858, plates 50.-28. March, 1910 .80
Index, pp. 869-869.
▼d. 9. 1, Tana Texts, by Edward Sapir, together with Tana Myths collected by
Boland B. Dixon. Pp. 1-285. Pebmary, 1910 2JB0
2. The Chumash and Costanoan Languages, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 287-
271. KoTon^ber, 1910 .85
8. The Languages of the Coast of California North of San Francisco, by
A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 273-485, and map. April, 1911 IM
Index, pp. 437-489.
Vd. 10. 1. Phonetic Constituents of the Natiye Languages of California, by A.
L. ^kToeoer. *9' i*x«. s&ay, ivii ................m....m...............~.....m......m.. •lo
2. The Phonetic Elements of the Northern Paiute Language, by T; T.
Waterman. Pp. 18-44, plates 1-5. Noyember, 1911 .45
8. Phonetic Elements of the Mohaye Language^ by A- I** Kroeber. Pp.
45-96, plates 6-20. November, 1911 .66
4. The Ethnology of the Sallnan Indians, by J. Alden Mason. Pp. 97-
240, plates 21-37. December, 1912 1.75
5. Papago Verb Stems, by Juan Dolores. Pp. 241-268. August, 1918 .25
6. Notes on the Chilula Ihdians of Northwestern California, by Pliny
Earl Goddard. Pp. 265-288, plates 88-41. April, 1914 .80
7. Chilula Texts, by Pliny Earle GK>ddard. Pp. 289-879. November,
Index, pp. 381-385.
Vd. 11« 1. Elements of the Kato Language, by Pliny Earle Ooddard. Pp. 1-176^
pxavOo X* sO. \/vwOWv*, XvXa ......................... ........a..*........... ...... ....«....«»»...» 3S.wU
2. Phonetic Elements of the Diegnefio Language* by A. L. Kroeber and
J. P. Harrington. Pp. 177-188. April, 1914 .10
8. Sarsl Texts, by Pliny Earle Goddaxd. Pp. 189-277. Pebmary, 1915.... 1.00
A Serian, Tequlstlatecan, and Hokan, by A. L. Kroeber. Pp. 279-290.
A eDruaxy, xvxo ». .....M........M........... ......•.•..•..•••.•.••.. ...........•...•••..-m...... .»••••...• .jlu
5. Dichotomous Social Organization in South Central California, by Ed-
ward Winslow aifford. Pp. 291-296. Pebmary, 1916 .05
6. The Delineation of the Day-Signs in the Aztec Manuscripts, by T. T.
Waterman. Pp. 297-398. March, 1916 1.00
7. The Mutsun Dialect of Costanoan Based on the Vocabulary of De la
Cuesta, by J. Alden llCason. Pp. 399-472. March, 1916 70
Index in preparation.
VoL 12. 1. Composition of California Shellmounds, by Edward Winslow Oifford.
Pp. 1-29. Pebmary, 1916 .30
UNIVERSITY or CALIFORNIA PUBLICATIONS- (CONTINUCD)
YiAamm now oomtftotod:
VobniM 1. 1908-1004. 978 iNifei and 80 platM . |196
yoloBM 2. 1004-1907. 898 iNifei ami 21 platM , 8J0
VoUnne 8. 1906. TIm Morphologx of the Hnpa Language. 844 pagea . .. . ... . ZJSO
Volmno 4. 1906-1907. 874 pagoa, with 6 Ubloi, 10 pUtaa, and mi^ 8JW
Toliimt 6. 1907-1910. 884 pagea, wltli 26 pUtea 8J0
Tolnme 6. 1906. 400 pagea, wltli 8 mapa 8J0
Volume 7. 1907-1910. 443 pages and 50 plates „ 3.50
Volume 8. 1908-1910. 369 pages and 28 plates ..^ „ 3.50
Volume 9. 1910-1911. .439 pages „ „ „. 3.50
Volume 10. 1911-1914. 385 pages and 41 plates - 3.50
Note.— Tlie U&lTenlty of OaUfornia PnbUeatiotta are offered In ezcbange for the pahU-
eatlona of learned aodetieB and inatitutlona, nnlTeraitieB and llhrarlea. Ooi^;aete Usta of aQ
the pabUcftUona of the UniTonlty will be aent upon reonest. For aam^e coptai Usta of
pnbUoatlona or other information addreaa the ICanager of tha Uniroraitj Preasi Bodnl^,
OaUf omia» U. 8. A. All matter aent in exchange should be addreaaed to The Bxchange
Department^ UhlTeraity Library, Berkeley, OaUf onila» U. 8. A.
AOBIOULTUBAL 80IBN0B8.— B. B. Babcock, J. W. Oilmore^ and O. B. Llpman, Bditcna.
Price per Tolnme, $8.50. Volumea I and n in progreaa.
A8TBONOMT.— W. W. Campbell, Editor. (Lick Obserratory, Mt. JOamUtmi, OaL)
PabUoations of the Lick Obserratory. — ^Volumea I-XZI completed.
BOTAKT.— W. A. Setchell, Bditor. Price per TOlmne |8JM>. Volumea Z (ro- 418), H (P9i
860), m (pp. 400), and IV (pp. 897) completed. Volomea V and VI in progreaa.
OLAIJOTOAL PHILOLOaT.— Edward B. COapp^ William A. Merrill, Herbert O. N^ittlBi;
Edltora. Price per Tolume 12.00. Volnme I {pp. 270) completed. Vdnme n in
progreaa.
BDUOATION.— Edited by the Department of Bdncation. Price per Tolume 92JM).
BNOINEEBINa.— Edited under the direction of the Engineering Departmenta, This sviss
wlU contain contributiona ftom the OoUegea of Mechanics, Mining, and OlTil Engi-
neering. Volume I in progress.
QBOOEAPH7.— Buliff 8. Hdway, Bditor. Volnme I in progress.
OBOLOOT. — ^Bulletin of the Department of Ctodogy. Andrew O. Lawson and John 0.
Merriam, Edltora. Price per Tdlume $8.50. Volumea I (pp. 485), n (pp. 467), nx
(pp. 482), IV (pp. 462), V (pp. 458), VI (pp. 454), VII (pp. 504), and Vm (pp, 583)
completed. Volume IX in progress.
MODEEN PHILOLOaT.— Volumea I (pp. 400) and n (pp. 878) completed. Volumes in
and IV in progress.
PATHOLOGT.— Frederick P. Gay, Editor. Price per Tolume, 92.50. Volume I (pp. 847)
completed. Volume n in progress.
PHIL080PHT.— O. H. Howlaon, ^BMUtor. Volnme I (pp. 262) completed. Volnme n in
progreaa. Price per Tdlume 82.00.
PHT8I0L0GT*— ft. ft. MasEwell, Bdjltor. Price per volume 12.00. Volumea I (pp. 217),
n (pp. 215), m (pp. 197), and IV (pp. 228) completed. Volume V in progress.
PSTOHOLOaT.— Ctoorge M. Stratton, Bditor. V61ume I in progreaa.
SSOOI^T.— W. B. Bitter and O. A. Xof old. Editors. Price per volume for Totanea 1-3;
$3.50; for volume XI and following; 85.00. Volumea I (pp. 817), II (pp. 882), m
(pp. 888), IV (pp. 400), V (pp. 440), VI (pp. 478), Vn (pp. 446), Vm (pp. 857), IX
(pp. 365), X (pp. 417), and XI (pp. 538) completed. Volumes Xn to XVI InchisiTi
in progress.
DBIVEESITT OP OAUFOBMIA OHBOZilCLB.— An offldal record of DMTeiatty Uh,
issued quarterly, edited by a committee of the Paculty. Prioe^ 9L00 per year. 0B^
rent volume No. XVm.
Addreaa all ordera or reaneata for information concerning the abova poMleattona to Tha
Utatversi^ Press, Berkeley, Oalif omia.
This book is not to be
taken from the Library
(>
4
i
s
Nfimm
3 2044 042 862 326
^
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11